Lifestyle and Health Reference Library

Lifestyle and Health Reference Library

The questions the collection is built around, the papers, guidelines and statements behind them, the Australian Government policy register, and the identified policy gaps. Compiled by Mark Anns.

18 questions · 592 papers, guidelines and statements · 182 policy instruments · 14 identified gaps · exported 30 October 2026

Questions

8 core questions and 10 more. The records named in a summary are the main ones for that question, chosen from a much larger set held in the hub.

Question 1 Core question

What is lifestyle medicine, and is lifestyle psychiatry a real discipline?

Lifestyle medicine is framed as the clinical use of a defined set of lifestyle domains as treatment, not as advice added on top of usual care. Egger (REF-035) sets out the discipline's claim to sit between clinical medicine and public health, and Kushner and Sorensen (REF-060) describe it as chronic disease management rather than wellness. The specialty argument is carried by consensus statements: the follow-up to the Doha Declaration (REF-022), the Hail statement from the Middle East (REF-274), the American College of Lifestyle Medicine position summarised by Patel (REF-094) and the Australasian Society's own description of its domains (REF-303). Sayburn's BMJ feature records the professionalisation, including 40 health professionals sitting the first examination (REF-110).

Lifestyle psychiatry has a smaller but distinct literature. Firth and colleagues' meta-review synthesised 29 meta-analyses of cohort studies and 12 Mendelian randomisation studies across exercise, smoking, diet and sleep (REF-041). The LifePsych Society consensus now sets research priorities for the field (REF-167), Merlo and Vela argue that mental health should sit at the centre rather than the edge of lifestyle medicine (REF-077), and Firth's group has written an introduction for practising clinicians (REF-076). Lived experience counts too: in a survey of 649 Australian adults, 77% were positive about lifestyle medicine for mental illness (REF-103).

What the discipline claims for itself is narrower than the marketing around it. The American College of Lifestyle Medicine has published a framework to standardise how lifestyle medicine data are recorded (REF-528) and updated its dietary position statement (REF-004). Commentators argue the case for a true health initiative rather than a rebadging of existing practice (REF-059), while others position lifestyle medicine as the foundation of modern health care (REF-104) and as prevention, treatment and reversal of disease (REF-458). Translating evidence into real impact, rather than into citation counts, is argued directly in the literature (REF-027), and the intervention evidence for mental health practice is reviewed in its own right (REF-071).

The caveat is honest. Much of the underpinning evidence is observational, so the discipline's standing depends on trials arriving rather than on frameworks.

Reading groups Definitions and position statements, Training and the workforce, Critiques

Question 2 Core question

Can changing how we live treat depression and anxiety, not just prevent them?

The evidence for treatment, not only prevention, is now substantial. Clegg and colleagues' Cochrane review pooled 73 randomised trials with at least 4,985 adults and found exercise reduced depressive symptoms (REF-025). Noetel's network meta-analysis went further, across 218 trials and 14,170 participants, and ranked walking or jogging highest (REF-087). Singh's umbrella review covered 97 systematic reviews, 1,039 trials and 128,119 adults, with benefits for depression, anxiety and distress (REF-112). Heissel's meta-regression tested dose and modality across 41 trials (REF-052).

Diet has its own trials rather than only cohort data. SMILES was the first randomised trial to show that dietary improvement reduced symptoms of major depression (REF-384), HELFIMED replicated the finding in an Australian sample (REF-385), and Firth's meta-analysis of 16 trials supports dietary improvement for depression and anxiety (REF-040). The Food and Mood Centre's clinical guidelines set out how to use that in practice (REF-043).

Against medication and therapy the picture is more qualified. Blumenthal's trials found exercise comparable with sertraline in older adults (REF-386, REF-387), but Netz, re-examining the guideline comparisons, urges caution about how far that equivalence is pushed (REF-086).

Practice guidance has caught up with the trials. Clinical guidelines for lifestyle based mental health care (REF-073) and the CANMAT 2023 recommendations (REF-448) place lifestyle within stepped care, and a summary of the intervention evidence sets out what treatment and prevention actually rest on (REF-283). Designing an intervention for a common mental disorder is treated as a design problem rather than a prescription (REF-092), optimising the mental health effects of physical activity depends on how the activity is delivered (REF-125), and exercise remains the single best supported modality (REF-046). Lifestyle psychiatry as a whole extends beyond diet and exercise (REF-096).

Reading groups Exercise as treatment, Diet as treatment, Guidelines that include lifestyle, Compared with medication and therapy

Question 3 Core question

Is health a matter of choice or circumstance?

The evidence favours circumstance, with choice operating inside it. Marmot's Whitehall studies followed British civil servants by employment grade and found a clear inverse relation with coronary heart disease that held across decades (REF-203, REF-204, REF-205). Job control explained part of the social gradient (REF-206). Fair Society, Healthy Lives turned that into a policy program (REF-207), and the ten year follow-up found life expectancy had stalled and inequalities widened (REF-072).

Mechanisms have accumulated since. Allostatic load, the cumulative physiological cost of chronic stress, is measured across cohorts and rises earlier in disadvantaged groups (REF-158, REF-398). Health behaviours themselves track socioeconomic position, and in Whitehall II they explained part of the mortality gap rather than the whole of it (REF-223). Newer cohort work extends the pattern to dementia (REF-145).

Theory explains why the pattern persists. Social conditions have been described as fundamental causes precisely because they keep producing inequality however the mechanisms change (REF-396), income inequality has a causal review behind it (REF-210), and the Dahlgren-Whitehead model remains the map most used to organise determinants thirty years on (REF-209). WHO's Commission on Social Determinants set the international program (REF-208), AIHW reports the Australian pattern (REF-221), and a systematic account ties social determinants to mental disorders under the Sustainable Development Goals (REF-211). Poverty itself has causal evidence behind its effect on depression and anxiety (REF-443).

Housing, place and policy appear as instruments rather than background. WHO housing guidelines address crowding, indoor cold and heat (REF-134), NICE NG44 sets out community engagement for reducing inequalities (REF-083), and national reports keep measuring the gap (REF-029).

Reading groups Income and poverty, Housing and place, Racism and discrimination, Policy responses

Question 4 Core question

How do physical and mental health shape each other?

The relationship runs both ways, and is easiest to see in the physical health gap in serious mental illness. The joint position statement from three Australian professional bodies sets out the scale of that gap (REF-034), and the NSW Health guideline translates it into clinical process (REF-089). The gap appears early: an audit of 182 young people with first episode psychosis showed a lifestyle and life skills intervention was feasible in routine community services (REF-026).

Shared mechanisms are the other half of the answer. Inflammation and allostatic load recur across sleep, diet and stress research (REF-115, REF-158, REF-378), and Firth's meta-review pulls the cohort, genetic and trial evidence together (REF-041). In 163,707 Australians aged 45 and older, unhealthy lifestyle behaviours tracked with psychological distress over time (REF-047). Brain imaging in 18,083 UK Biobank adults traced pathways linking lifestyle, environment and physical health to mental health (REF-123).

Clinical guidance on the physical care of people with mental illness is now explicit. The Equally Well consensus statement sets the standard (REF-084), the Lester UK adaptation gives clinicians a cardiometabolic monitoring resource (REF-426), NICE quality standard QS80 covers psychosis and schizophrenia (REF-427), and the consensus on antipsychotic drugs and obesity addresses the medication contribution directly (REF-425). Psychoneuroimmunology supplies the immune to brain mechanism (REF-157), social determinants of psychiatric disorders are documented separately (REF-508), and implementing lifestyle interventions inside mental health care has its own evidence (REF-496) and its own case for routine psychiatric practice (REF-116). Sedentary behaviour is also markedly higher in people with bipolar disorder (REF-450).

The 2026 Exercise Physiologists consensus statement sets out a role in mental health support and recovery (REF-064), but physical and mental care largely remain separate systems.

Reading groups Shared mechanisms such as inflammation and stress, Multimorbidity, The physical health gap in serious mental illness

Question 5 Core question

Why is changing behaviour so hard, and what actually helps?

Behaviour change is hard for reasons the literature can name. Marques and colleagues rebuilt the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy as a formal ontology (REF-154), which helps specify what an intervention actually contains. Motivational interviewing based interventions were pooled across 97 trials and 27,811 adults, with modest but consistent effects on physical activity (REF-155). Habit formation takes longer than most programs assume, with wide variation between people and behaviours (REF-156), and self determination theory explains why autonomous motivation outperforms pressure (REF-148).

The method base has been standardised. The behaviour change wheel characterises interventions by capability, opportunity and motivation (REF-399), the behaviour change technique taxonomy lists 93 hierarchical techniques (REF-400), social cognitive theory accounts for self efficacy (REF-402), and the transtheoretical stages of change remain the model most clinicians were trained on (REF-403). NICE guidance on individual approaches sets out what services should commission (REF-428).

Adherence is where programs fail. A synthesis of 64 studies of community dwelling older adults mapped barriers and facilitators through the COM-B model (REF-152), and health coaching improved activity, disability and pain across 26 trials (REF-159). Participation is uneven too, with a review of the factors that determine who takes part in physical activity programs (REF-481).

Services are the second barrier. Clinicians want structure and support rather than one more task (REF-014), and they report their own barriers to raising lifestyle risk in consultation (REF-015, REF-056). Psychologists' own promotion practices vary widely (REF-509), and among 196 mental health professionals, 78% addressed nutrition while 51% had no formal training in it (REF-561). Interventions are also not equally effective across groups (REF-225), which argues for targeting rather than scaling the same program.

Reading groups Behaviour change methods, Adherence, Barriers in services, Implementation in practice

Question 6 Core question

What are governments doing, and is policy enough?

Australia has policy across the field, and the register records what exists. Nationally, the National Preventive Health Strategy 2021 to 2030 (REF-007), the National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions in its 2017 and 2026 versions (REF-012, REF-010) and the National Obesity Strategy (REF-009, GOV-017) set direction, alongside the National Tobacco Strategy (GOV-011). Movement has its own instrument in the Australian 24 hour movement guidelines (GOV-002), and the National Health and Climate Strategy is on the register (GOV-015).

States and territories differ markedly. South Australia's State Public Health Plan (REF-049), Health and Wellbeing Queensland's strategic plan (REF-050), the Tasmanian 20 year preventive health strategy (REF-118), the NSW performance and wellbeing framework (REF-090) and the ACT Wellbeing Framework (REF-001) show how uneven coverage is.

Gaps are documented rather than assumed: no standalone health equity or social determinants strategy in Victoria (GAP-03), no physical activity strategy in Western Australia or the Northern Territory (GAP-05, GAP-14).

The instruments are denser than a single strategy suggests, and the plan is not only about health portfolios. Alongside them sit the Primary Health Care 10 Year Plan (GOV-018) and the National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Agreement (GOV-016). Whether those documents actually address the social determinants has been analysed: Australian health policy documents were assessed for how far they take up the determinants (REF-493), and intersectoral action on them was reviewed separately (REF-497).

Whether policy is enough is the harder question. Strategies are long on direction and short on funding, targets and evaluation.

Reading groups National strategies, State and territory strategies, Beyond the health portfolio, Gaps

Question 7 Core question

With so much evidence on lifestyle, and so many prevention policies and guidelines, why are they not put into practice?

The gap between evidence and practice is documented at every step. Referral, uptake and completion of lifestyle modification programs were reviewed across 29 documents, with barriers appearing at each stage rather than at one point (REF-147). Even in a well defined specialty such as polycystic ovary syndrome, clinicians name practical obstacles to lifestyle management (REF-024). Psychologists report barriers to promoting physical activity despite accepting that it matters (REF-509), and 51% of mental health professionals surveyed had no formal training in nutrition (REF-561).

Time is the constraint clinicians name most often. Applying the time needed to treat to NICE lifestyle guidelines shows the consultation minutes those recommendations imply (REF-003), and clinicians describe wanting structure and support rather than one more task (REF-014, REF-015).

Workforce and funding follow the same pattern. Peers are used widely and the evidence on peer support is mixed once scaled (REF-330), and social prescribing has 18 international economic evaluations, too few and too varied to settle the case (REF-069). Where specialists are scarce, task-shared psychological interventions (REF-273) and community health worker delivered care (REF-338, REF-339) carry the work. Scaling structured lifestyle interventions depends on local infrastructure rather than on referral alone (REF-272), and implementing them inside mental health care has its own implementation evidence (REF-496).

Policy has its own version of the problem. The Productivity Commission's mental health inquiry recorded how often reform stops at strategy (REF-501), the latest reform progress report measures how far it has run (REF-523), and Australian health policy was examined directly for how far it addresses the social determinants (REF-493, REF-497). The register records 14 gaps, jurisdictions without a current instrument in a category they previously covered.

Reading groups The evidence-to-practice gap, Funding and where the money goes, Workforce, time and training in primary care, Commercial interests and industry influence, Policies without targets, funding or evaluation, What has worked when scaled up

Question 8 Core question

What does wellbeing look like in First Nations and other cultural frames?

First Nations wellbeing is not the same construct as the one most of this library measures. Colonisation and ongoing coloniality disrupted Indigenous flourishing, and social and emotional wellbeing is described in its own terms rather than as the absence of disorder (REF-326). Measures have been collated and classified, with over 30 Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional wellbeing instruments identified (REF-327), evidence on what works is drawn from community perspectives rather than service data (REF-328, REF-329), Mayi Kuwayu is the first large national longitudinal study designed to measure how culture relates to health (REF-416), and Indigenous cultural health has been reviewed in its own right (REF-194).

Policy theory matters here too. A policy analysis asked which theories of Indigenous and non-Indigenous wellbeing Australian strategies actually use (REF-498), the Health Performance Framework reports the outcomes (REF-222), the Close the Gap Campaign Report is the leading community controlled assessment (REF-415), and the National Agreement on Closing the Gap sets the formal partnership (REF-414).

Instruments are in place across jurisdictions, including the National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Plan 2021 to 2031 (GOV-022), the national Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander suicide prevention strategy (GOV-005) and state frameworks such as Korin Korin Balit-Djak (GOV-074).

The comparison with other cultural frames is instructive rather than decorative. Aotearoa's Māori Health Strategy sets wellbeing in its own terms (REF-521), longitudinal data on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander children follows social and emotional development over time (REF-522), community led strategies support implementation (REF-536), and culturally and linguistically diverse populations show how migration shapes chronic disease (REF-271).

Question 9 More questions

How much movement is enough, and does any movement count?

Guidelines converge on 150 to 300 minutes of moderate activity or 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous activity a week, with muscle strengthening twice, and they now treat sitting as a separate exposure (REF-135, REF-298). The Australian 24 hour movement guidelines (REF-516), the UK chief medical officers' guidelines (REF-517) and the Canadian guidelines, which fold movement, sedentary time and sleep into one package (REF-018, REF-019), say much the same thing.

The dose response curve is steeper at the bottom than most people expect. Pooled accelerometry across cohorts showed the largest mortality reductions came from moving out of the least active group, with diminishing returns thereafter (REF-374). Low activity carries a measurable share of the national burden of disease (REF-540), and leisure time activity benefits are not distributed evenly across socioeconomic groups (REF-484).

Sitting matters independently. In 91,292 UK Biobank adults wearing accelerometers, prolonged sedentary time tracked with cancer incidence (REF-146), breaking up sitting improved cognitive outcomes across 25 trials (REF-151), and replacing sedentary time with activity reduced symptoms in its own trial evidence (REF-453).

Different groups need different answers. Mind body exercise such as tai chi, qigong and yoga reduced depressive symptoms in adults over 60 across 25 systematic reviews (REF-066), while activity trials in children and adolescents produced a small mental health benefit (REF-068). Physical activity and depression are studied in university students specifically (REF-449), domain matters for dementia risk (REF-541), benefits depend on how activity is delivered (REF-125), participation depends on what programs ask of people (REF-481), and bone health in middle aged and older adults responds to the load involved (REF-507). Exercise is Medicine remains the profession's core statement (REF-429).

Question 10 More questions

Does food affect mood, and why is eating well so unequal?

Diet is now a treatment question with its own trials. SMILES was the first randomised trial to show that dietary improvement reduced symptoms of major depression (REF-384), HELFIMED replicated it in Australia (REF-385) and Firth's meta-analysis of 16 trials supported dietary improvement for depression and anxiety (REF-040). The Food and Mood Centre's clinical guidelines set out how to use that in practice (REF-043), and the broader literature on nutrition and depression across the life course (REF-036) and on how diet and nutrition affect mental wellbeing (REF-039) supplies the mechanism.

Ultra-processed food carries much of the risk signal. Across 17 observational studies and 385,541 participants, higher intake tracked with poorer mental health (REF-062), in 11,192 Australian adults aged 70 and over in ASPREE it tracked with depressive symptoms (REF-074), and an umbrella review links ultra-processed food exposure with a wider set of adverse health outcomes (REF-061).

Unequal access explains why eating well is harder for some. Australia's 2023 food insecurity data was the first national measurement of the problem (REF-228), food insecurity and mental health are linked in meta-analytic evidence (REF-226), dietary quality falls with food insecurity in United States data (REF-227), and dietary risks remain a leading contributor to death and disability across 195 countries (REF-263).

Commercial drivers are named directly. Trends in ultra-processed food sales document the nutrition transition globally (REF-267), the analysis of tobacco, alcohol and ultra-processed food industries names the shared playbook (REF-420), the World Obesity Federation commentary challenges corporate power in food policy (REF-537), and reducing ultra-processed food in clinical diets has its own trial and practice literature (REF-543). Dietary patterns such as MIND (REF-124) and anti-inflammatory approaches (REF-115) are where the treatment research is heading. Interventions are not equally effective for all groups (REF-225), so the prevention question cannot be separated from the equity one.

Question 11 More questions

Why does sleep matter for mental health?

The trials establish both directions. Digital cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia in 3,755 university students improved mental health as well as sleep in the OASIS trial (REF-044), and a meta-analysis of 54 trials with 6,876 participants found improving sleep produced measurable mental health benefits (REF-111). CBT for insomnia held its effect on depressive symptoms across 13,608 adults (REF-168), and combined sleep and circadian interventions produced transdiagnostic effects on depression (REF-144).

Mechanism is the clearest part. Sleep disturbance and extremes of duration are associated with inflammatory markers (REF-378), the role of sleep in depression is traced through review evidence (REF-093), and the joint position statement on managing adult insomnia sets out what six Australian professional bodies expect (REF-117).

Quantity has a U shaped relation with mortality, with both short and long sleep carrying risk (REF-375). Laboratory work showed that modest chronic restriction produced cumulative, dose dependent deficits that participants stopped noticing (REF-376), which helps explain why sleep debt is under recognised. Sleep hygiene advice is widely offered but weak on its own (REF-113), while behavioural and psychological treatments for chronic insomnia (REF-431) and combination treatment (REF-432) are where the effect sizes sit.

Shift work is the population where this becomes structural rather than behavioural, with the first months on shift predictive of later health (REF-180). Consumer sleep technology is now common enough to need a position statement of its own (REF-532), integrating sleep care into psychological practice remains uneven (REF-170), circadian and microglial mechanisms are being mapped (REF-461), and extreme heat cuts both sleep and activity in wearable data (REF-249).

Question 12 More questions

Is loneliness a health risk, and what helps?

Loneliness behaves like an exposure rather than a mood. A meta-analysis of 90 prospective cohorts with 2,205,199 adults found social isolation and loneliness carried mortality and morbidity risk comparable to established risk factors (REF-190). Loneliness predicted mental and physical ill health over five years in 5,616 Thai adults aged 45 and over (REF-095), social connectedness showed bidirectional links with public mental health across 21,227 New Zealanders (REF-107), and AIHW reports the Australian prevalence and its correlates (REF-278).

Mechanism and measurement come from psychology. Social identity based interventions have a measurable effect on health behaviour (REF-191, REF-192), connectedness has been proposed as a distinct pillar of lifestyle psychiatry (REF-196), a three study investigation links connectedness to health outcomes directly (REF-063), and loneliness shows bidirectional associations with physical multimorbidity (REF-506).

What helps has been tested less well than what harms. Social prescribing was assessed across eight randomised trials and 4,621 adults for chronic disease prevention (REF-193), across 18 international economic evaluations with the economics still unresolved (REF-069), and interventions targeting loneliness were systematically reviewed for what works (REF-195). NICE NG44 sets out community engagement as the mechanism for reaching people (REF-083), and volunteering in later life has its own mixed evidence base (REF-452).

Australia has a national strategy in Ending Loneliness Together (REF-037), which argues for structure rather than advice. Internationally, Wales has recognised social connection as a public health priority (REF-525) and WHO has convened a commission on it (REF-527).

Question 13 More questions

Why do lifestyle practitioners focus on alcohol and tobacco rather than other substances?

The focus reflects where the evidence sits. Tobacco and alcohol have five decades of cohort work behind them; the 50 year follow up of British male doctors established smoking as a cause of lung cancer and much else (REF-351). Alcohol has national guidance setting three guideline levels of risk (REF-082), updated Canadian recommendations for conversations in practice (REF-017), and WHO's SAFER progress report on the measures that reduce harm (REF-140). Tobacco has the Framework Convention, the only binding global health treaty of its kind (REF-410).

Both sit inside Australian frameworks rather than beside them: the National framework for alcohol, tobacco and other drug treatment (REF-006), the National Tobacco Strategy (GOV-011), the vaping reforms (GOV-007), the National Alcohol Strategy (GOV-026) and the National Drug Strategy (GOV-029).

Reporting and monitoring follow the same two substances. AIHW reports alcohol, tobacco and other drugs together (REF-280), the SNAP population health survey tracks smoking, nutrition, alcohol and physical activity as one set of risks (REF-120), and the national stigma and discrimination report card records how people who use drugs are treated (REF-085).

Other substances appear in only about five records, and that asymmetry is the finding. Lifestyle interventions for substance use disorder are reviewed for Australian general practice (REF-585), and a separate paper argues that lifestyle and addiction medicine belong in the same consultation (REF-586). Medicinal cannabis for mental disorders was reviewed with a clear finding against it (REF-588), and pooled evidence tracks cannabis use in young people with depression, anxiety and suicidality (REF-590). Stigma remains the main reason other drugs are handled differently (REF-593).

Above all of this sits the commercial layer: the commercial determinants of health are now a defined field (REF-419), and the analysis of tobacco, alcohol and ultra-processed food industries names the shared strategies (REF-420).

Question 14 More questions

Weight, metabolic health and the new medicines: where does lifestyle fit?

Prevalence frames the question. Pooled data from 3,663 population studies with 222 million participants show obesity has risen almost everywhere since 1990 (REF-265), AIHW reports two thirds of Australian adults above a healthy weight (REF-279), and the World Obesity Atlas projects the childhood picture forward (REF-535).

Management has become more medical. The 2026 standards of care treat obesity as a heterogeneous chronic disease (REF-286), the Australian obesity management algorithm gives general practitioners a practical route (REF-293), NICE NG246 covers prevention and treatment together (REF-300), and the 5As framework of ask, assess, advise, assist and arrange remains the primary care structure (REF-292).

Lifestyle has shifted from cure to component. Pharmacotherapy guidelines frame weight loss as a pathway to health rather than a goal in itself (REF-302), dietary interventions for type 2 diabetes are reviewed in their own right (REF-284), and remission of type 2 diabetes is now a defined outcome with HbA1c below 6.5 percent sustained without medication (REF-289, REF-312). The DiRECT trial showed primary care led weight management can achieve remission (REF-304), and its five year follow-up shows how durable that is.

The new medicines change what can be offered. WHO has issued conditional recommendations on GLP-1 medicines for adults with obesity (REF-297), and the cardiovascular outcome trials for semaglutide (REF-314) and tirzepatide (REF-315, REF-317) moved these drugs from weight loss to risk reduction. Weight regain after withdrawal is documented (REF-318), pooled analyses of cardiovascular, mortality and kidney outcomes are now available (REF-323), and effects on fat mass, lean mass and muscle function are being measured (REF-325). Whether lifestyle keeps its place alongside these treatments, or becomes the adjunct, is the live question.

Question 15 More questions

How do nature, heat and climate change affect health?

Nature exposure has both a dose and an equity finding. About 20,000 English adults showed that at least 120 minutes a week in nature was associated with good health and wellbeing, with no benefit below that threshold (REF-133). A scoping review of 123 studies asks whether nature is equigenic, narrowing rather than widening health inequalities (REF-028), green space studies in older people point the same way (REF-130), a cluster randomised trial of outdoor schooling found benefits for children (REF-187), and nature based social prescribing has been trialled as a delivery model (REF-544). The framework linking natural features to mental health comes from the ecosystem service literature (REF-016), and nature connectedness is studied as its own construct (REF-186).

Heat is the sharpest edge. An ecological study of 171,614 hospital admissions and 2,599 deaths in a temperate Australian city linked heat waves to mental and behavioural disorders (REF-231), psychotropic medications increase heat vulnerability through impaired thermoregulation (REF-232, REF-233), and systematic reviews of ambient temperature and hot weather reach the same conclusion (REF-229, REF-230). Wearable sensing showed extreme heat cutting both activity and sleep (REF-249).

Cold and displacement do the same in the other direction. The health impacts of cold homes and fuel poverty are documented in their own reviews (REF-236), climate anxiety is measurable across 35 studies and 45,667 adults (REF-239), and disaster research traces psychological outcomes after the Victorian bushfires (REF-241) and a decade later (REF-242), alongside the English cohort study of flooding and health (REF-243).

The National Health and Climate Strategy is the policy instrument (GOV-015), and the Lancet Countdown reports annually on how far health systems have adapted (REF-250).

Question 16 More questions

How do health needs and responses change across life, from childhood to old age?

Needs change shape across life, and so does the evidence. In children and adolescents, physical activity trials produce a small mental health benefit (REF-068), school based programs moved outcomes only when they were health focused rather than general activity (REF-198), brief school based interventions and whole programme approaches are reviewed separately (REF-201, REF-202), and family based interventions for childhood obesity improved parental and offspring outcomes across 20 randomised trials (REF-199). Physical activity and cognitive performance are studied in early childhood (REF-200), WHO has issued guidelines on managing obesity in children (REF-510) and adolescents (REF-511), and the Early Years Strategy covers the earliest part of this sequence (GOV-008).

In later life the questions change from prevention to function. Exercise and diet support brain health through physiological pathways (REF-055), mind body exercise reduced depressive symptoms in adults over 60 across 25 systematic reviews (REF-066), multimorbidity patterns predict mobility disability in frail adults over 70 (REF-126), and WHO Europe's report on promoting activity and diet for healthy ageing argues that later life still shapes future health (REF-143).

Midlife is where prevention may pay most. Multidomain lifestyle interventions for cognitive decline have their own trial base (REF-539), the Lancet Commission on dementia prevention sets out the modifiable share (REF-413), WHO guidance on reducing the risk of cognitive decline follows the same logic (REF-139), lifestyle predictors of healthy ageing are tracked in cohort studies (REF-472), and Mediterranean diet evidence sits alongside them (REF-465).

Adherence is where age specific programs succeed or fail, and 64 studies of community dwelling older adults map the barriers and facilitators (REF-152).

Question 17 More questions

Is lifestyle medicine a treatment given to individuals or a public health strategy, and does it only work when it is embedded in the community?

Treatment and public health ask different questions of the same evidence. Rose's distinction between sick individuals and sick populations remains the clearest statement of it: clinical care identifies the people at highest risk, while population strategy moves the distribution that produced the risk in the first place (REF-394). The policy lineage runs through Lalonde's framing of health determinants (REF-406), the Declaration of Alma-Ata on primary health care (REF-404) and the Ottawa Charter for health promotion (REF-405).

The instruments differ accordingly. Australia's National Preventive Health Strategy sets population direction (REF-007, GOV-019), and the WHO action plans on noncommunicable disease, physical activity and mental health do the same internationally (REF-407, REF-408, REF-409), as does the Lancet Commission on global mental health (REF-411). Clinical guidance works at the other scale, and its cost in clinician time is now measured explicitly (REF-003, REF-058).

Lifestyle change is where the two meet and often fail. Task-sharing and community health worker models deliver psychological and lifestyle support where specialists are scarce (REF-338, REF-339), community based healing programs show how the setting carries the effect (REF-336), and scaled structured lifestyle interventions depend on local infrastructure rather than referral alone (REF-272). Community engagement is the mechanism NICE recommends for reaching the people least served (REF-083), and the economics of social prescribing are still unresolved across 18 evaluations (REF-069).

The caution is that population programs can widen inequalities when they reach the already advantaged first (REF-224), and the commercial drivers of poor health sit above any individual consultation (REF-419).

Reading groups Clinical treatment and population strategy, Community and task-shared delivery, Scaling up, Equity and commercial drivers

Question 18 More questions

How do other countries approach this, and does the international evidence point the same way?

The field's frameworks are international before they are national. The WHO comprehensive mental health action plan (REF-409), the World mental health report (REF-433) and the Lancet Commission on global mental health (REF-411) set shared goals, with WHO guidance on mental health across government (REF-045) and at work (REF-183) translating them into other sectors.

Physical activity guidance is the most convergent area. The WHO 2020 guidelines on activity and sedentary behaviour (REF-135, REF-298), the Canadian 24 hour movement guidelines (REF-018) and the UK chief medical officers' guidelines (REF-517) agree on dose. Alcohol is the opposite case: Canadian recommendations pushed toward lower risk thresholds (REF-017) than the Australian guideline levels (REF-082).

Measurement and burden are where comparison gets harder. WHO's European review of the social determinants (REF-438) and national surveys in Malaysia (REF-253) document patterns that global series describe only in aggregate: dietary risk in 195 countries (REF-263) and worldwide obesity trends (REF-265). Metabolic reporting from India (REF-258) shows how quickly those transitions are running in middle income settings.

Professional and cultural framing varies as much as the data. The Doha white paper (REF-022) and the Hail consensus statement (REF-274) show regional developments in lifestyle medicine, Aotearoa's Māori Health Strategy sets wellbeing in its own terms (REF-521), and Wales has recognised social connection as a public health priority (REF-525).

Reading groups Global frameworks, Physical activity and alcohol guidance, Measurement and burden, Regional and cultural framing

Papers, guidelines and statements

Ordered by record ID. Record IDs are permanent.

REF-001 Paper, guideline or statement

ACT Wellbeing Framework

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

ACT Government tracks quality of life across twelve wellbeing domains and a Personal Wellbeing Index covering standard of living, health, achievement, relationships, safety, community connectedness and future security. A dashboard of 56 indicators, updated every two years, informs ACT Budget decisions and shows where some community groups sit below average wellbeing.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (n.d.). ACT Wellbeing Framework. https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing
All fields
ID
REF-001
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
ACT Government
Year
n.d.
Title
ACT Wellbeing Framework
Description
ACT Government tracks quality of life across twelve wellbeing domains and a Personal Wellbeing Index covering standard of living, health, achievement, relationships, safety, community connectedness and future security. A dashboard of 56 indicators, updated every two years, informs ACT Budget decisions and shows where some community groups sit below average wellbeing.
Publication or publisher
ACT Government
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing
Related items
GOV-158
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (n.d.). ACT Wellbeing Framework. https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing
Same document as
GOV-158
REF-002 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine and the science of cholesterol reduction: A systematic review of non-medication approaches among adults

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

Systematic review of non-drug cholesterol approaches in adults, finding Mediterranean and plant-based eating lowered LDL cholesterol, while regular activity cut triglycerides and raised HDL; poor sleep and smoking worsened lipids. Supports offering diet, movement, sleep and stress care alongside medication, with adherence the main limit.

Full APA reference

Akewe, T. O., Taiwo, O., Ejiyooye, T. F., Achara, K. E., Adebiyi, O., & Okoye, E. J. (2026). Lifestyle medicine and the science of cholesterol reduction: A systematic review of non-medication approaches among adults. Cureus, 18(8), e115435. https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.115435

Verified publication date: 30 August 2026

All fields
ID
REF-002
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Akewe, T. O., Taiwo, O., Ejiyooye, T. F., Achara, K. E., Adebiyi, O., & Okoye, E. J.
Year
2026
Title
Lifestyle medicine and the science of cholesterol reduction: A systematic review of non-medication approaches among adults
Description
Systematic review of non-drug cholesterol approaches in adults, finding Mediterranean and plant-based eating lowered LDL cholesterol, while regular activity cut triglycerides and raised HDL; poor sleep and smoking worsened lipids. Supports offering diet, movement, sleep and stress care alongside medication, with adherence the main limit.
Publication or publisher
Cureus, 18(8), e115435
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.115435
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.115435
Verification note
Verified publication date: 30 August 2026
Full APA reference
Akewe, T. O., Taiwo, O., Ejiyooye, T. F., Achara, K. E., Adebiyi, O., & Okoye, E. J. (2026). Lifestyle medicine and the science of cholesterol reduction: A systematic review of non-medication approaches among adults. Cureus, 18(8), e115435. https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.115435
REF-003 Paper, guideline or statement

Applying the time needed to treat to NICE guidelines on lifestyle interventions

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Albarqouni and colleagues applied the time needed to treat measure to the individually oriented lifestyle interventions NICE recommends, estimating clinician hours needed to deliver them to all eligible UK adults. Their estimates suggest the NHS employs too few clinicians to comply, so panels should weigh opportunity costs against population level prevention.

Full APA reference

Albarqouni, L., Montori, V., Jørgensen, K. J., Ringsten, M., Bulbeck, H., & Johannson, M. (2023). Applying the time needed to treat to NICE guidelines on lifestyle interventions. BMJ Evidence-Based Medicine, bmjebm-2022-112225. https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJEBM-2022-112225
All fields
ID
REF-003
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Albarqouni, L., Montori, V., Jørgensen, K. J., Ringsten, M., Bulbeck, H., & Johannson, M
Year
2023
Title
Applying the time needed to treat to NICE guidelines on lifestyle interventions
Description
Albarqouni and colleagues applied the time needed to treat measure to the individually oriented lifestyle interventions NICE recommends, estimating clinician hours needed to deliver them to all eligible UK adults. Their estimates suggest the NHS employs too few clinicians to comply, so panels should weigh opportunity costs against population level prevention.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Evidence-Based Medicine, bmjebm-2022-112225
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJEBM-2022-112225
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJEBM-2022-112225
Full APA reference
Albarqouni, L., Montori, V., Jørgensen, K. J., Ringsten, M., Bulbeck, H., & Johannson, M. (2023). Applying the time needed to treat to NICE guidelines on lifestyle interventions. BMJ Evidence-Based Medicine, bmjebm-2022-112225. https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJEBM-2022-112225
REF-004 Paper, guideline or statement

ACLM releases updated dietary position statement

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental and physical health

Position statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine, developed by an expert panel over a year for its 15,000 members, framing food as medicine as a continuum from prevention to disease reversal. Sets nutrition competencies and culturally tailored support for underserved groups.

Full APA reference

Karlsen, M. (2026, February 9). ACLM releases updated dietary position statement. American College of Lifestyle Medicine. https://lifestylemedicine.org/aclm-releases-updated-dietary-position-statement/

Verified publication date: 9 February 2026 (page states "Feb 9, 2026")

All fields
ID
REF-004
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Lifestyle Medicine (Karlsen, M.)
Year
2026
Title
ACLM releases updated dietary position statement
Description
Position statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine, developed by an expert panel over a year for its 15,000 members, framing food as medicine as a continuum from prevention to disease reversal. Sets nutrition competencies and culturally tailored support for underserved groups.
Publication or publisher
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://lifestylemedicine.org/aclm-releases-updated-dietary-position-statement/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 9 February 2026 (page states "Feb 9, 2026")
Full APA reference
Karlsen, M. (2026, February 9). ACLM releases updated dietary position statement. American College of Lifestyle Medicine. https://lifestylemedicine.org/aclm-releases-updated-dietary-position-statement/
REF-005 Paper, guideline or statement

Homepage

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Homepage of the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine, formerly the Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine, launched 2015 with over 950 members, offering training across the six pillars, a fellowship pathway, practitioner directory and advocacy. Useful entry point for referral, credentialing and professional development.

Full APA reference

Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (2025). Homepage. Retrieved from https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/

ASLM is a health promotion charity working towards improved prevention, management and treatment of chronic, complex and lifestyle-related conditions. Lifestyle-related includes environmental, societal and behavioural factors. Now trading as the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine; earlier publications appear under the former name.

All fields
ID
REF-005
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
2025
Title
Homepage
Description
Homepage of the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine, formerly the Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine, launched 2015 with over 950 members, offering training across the six pillars, a fellowship pathway, practitioner directory and advocacy. Useful entry point for referral, credentialing and professional development.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Societies / Research Centres
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/
Verification note
ASLM is a health promotion charity working towards improved prevention, management and treatment of chronic, complex and lifestyle-related conditions. Lifestyle-related includes environmental, societal and behavioural factors. Now trading as the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine; earlier publications appear under the former name.
Full APA reference
Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (2025). Homepage. Retrieved from https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/
REF-006 Paper, guideline or statement

National framework for alcohol, tobacco and other drug treatment 2019–2029

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • General health

Covering 2019 to 2029, the framework aims for everyone seeking alcohol, tobacco, prescribed medicine or other drug treatment to access quality care, structured around harm reduction, screening and assessment, and intensive interventions. Principles guide treatment planning, purchasing, monitoring and partnerships, with the Ministerial Drug and Alcohol Forum overseeing implementation; primary prevention falls outside scope.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). National framework for alcohol, tobacco and other drug treatment 2019–2029. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-framework-for-alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-treatment-2019-29
All fields
ID
REF-006
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2019
Title
National framework for alcohol, tobacco and other drug treatment 2019–2029
Description
Covering 2019 to 2029, the framework aims for everyone seeking alcohol, tobacco, prescribed medicine or other drug treatment to access quality care, structured around harm reduction, screening and assessment, and intensive interventions. Principles guide treatment planning, purchasing, monitoring and partnerships, with the Ministerial Drug and Alcohol Forum overseeing implementation; primary prevention falls outside scope.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-framework-for-alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-treatment-2019-29
Related items
REF-585
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). National framework for alcohol, tobacco and other drug treatment 2019–2029. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-framework-for-alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-treatment-2019-29
REF-007 Paper, guideline or statement

National preventive health strategy 2021–2030

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Running 2021 to 2030, the strategy sets seven focus areas: tobacco and nicotine, healthy diet, physical activity, cancer screening, immunisation, alcohol and drug harm, and mental health promotion. Targets include 5% of health spending on prevention by 2030 and three extra years of full health for the lowest socioeconomic quintiles and First Nations people.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2021). National preventive health strategy 2021–2030. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030
All fields
ID
REF-007
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2021
Title
National preventive health strategy 2021–2030
Description
Running 2021 to 2030, the strategy sets seven focus areas: tobacco and nicotine, healthy diet, physical activity, cancer screening, immunisation, alcohol and drug harm, and mental health promotion. Targets include 5% of health spending on prevention by 2030 and three extra years of full health for the lowest socioeconomic quintiles and First Nations people.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030
Related items
GOV-019
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2021). National preventive health strategy 2021–2030. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030
Same document as
GOV-019
REF-008 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical activity and exercise guidelines for all Australians

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

Australia's 24 hour movement guidelines set advice for infants, children, adults, older adults, pregnancy, disability and chronic conditions, treating physical activity, sitting, screen time and sleep as one package. Benchmarks include 30 minutes tummy time for babies, three hours energetic play at ages one to two, and no screen time before age two.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2021, May 7). Physical activity and exercise guidelines for all Australians. https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity-and-exercise/physical-activity-and-exercise-guidelines-for-all-australians
All fields
ID
REF-008
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2021
Title
Physical activity and exercise guidelines for all Australians
Description
Australia's 24 hour movement guidelines set advice for infants, children, adults, older adults, pregnancy, disability and chronic conditions, treating physical activity, sitting, screen time and sleep as one package. Benchmarks include 30 minutes tummy time for babies, three hours energetic play at ages one to two, and no screen time before age two.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity-and-exercise/physical-activity-and-exercise-guidelines-for-all-australians
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2021, May 7). Physical activity and exercise guidelines for all Australians. https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity-and-exercise/physical-activity-and-exercise-guidelines-for-all-australians
REF-009 Paper, guideline or statement

National Obesity Strategy 2022–2032 – At a glance – Summary with a logic framework

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Prepared by the Health Ministers Meeting for 2022 to 2032, it sets goals for healthy environments, empowering people and early intervention, plus principles on equity and weight stigma. Targets for 2030 include five daily serves of vegetables, cutting discretionary food energy from over 30% to under 20%, and halting the rise in adult obesity.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2022). National Obesity Strategy 2022–2032 – At a glance – Summary with a logic framework. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework?language=en
All fields
ID
REF-009
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2022
Title
National Obesity Strategy 2022–2032 – At a glance – Summary with a logic framework
Description
Prepared by the Health Ministers Meeting for 2022 to 2032, it sets goals for healthy environments, empowering people and early intervention, plus principles on equity and weight stigma. Targets for 2030 include five daily serves of vegetables, cutting discretionary food energy from over 30% to under 20%, and halting the rise in adult obesity.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework?language=en
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2022). National Obesity Strategy 2022–2032 – At a glance – Summary with a logic framework. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework?language=en
REF-010 Paper, guideline or statement

National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions 2026-35

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

Refreshing the 2017 to 2025 edition, the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing sets seven principles for 2026 to 2035, including equity, person centred multidisciplinary care, sustainability and climate resilience. Shaped by over 400 consultation submissions, it steers policy towards prevention and multimorbidity, asking that care be holistic, culturally safe and trauma informed.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions 2026-35. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions

Verified publication date: 2 March 2026 (departmental launch news page "New 10-year framework and program for chronic condition launched", dated 2 March 2026; framework document titled 2026-35) Supersedes the 2017 to 2025 framework, recorded at REF-012.

All fields
ID
REF-010
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2026
Title
National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions 2026-35
Description
Refreshing the 2017 to 2025 edition, the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing sets seven principles for 2026 to 2035, including equity, person centred multidisciplinary care, sustainability and climate resilience. Shaped by over 400 consultation submissions, it steers policy towards prevention and multimorbidity, asking that care be holistic, culturally safe and trauma informed.
Publication or publisher
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions
Verification note
Verified publication date: 2 March 2026 (departmental launch news page "New 10-year framework and program for chronic condition launched", dated 2 March 2026; framework document titled 2026-35) Supersedes the 2017 to 2025 framework, recorded at REF-012.
Related items
REF-012; GOV-003
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions 2026-35. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions
Same document as
GOV-003
REF-011 Paper, guideline or statement

Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Treasury's framework organises wellbeing into five themes, healthy, secure, sustainable, cohesive and prosperous, supported by 12 dimensions and 50 indicators, with inclusion, equity and fairness cutting across them. The healthy theme covers physical and mental health and service access, and Treasury commits to guidance helping agencies embed the framework in policy development and evaluation.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Treasury. (2023). Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework. https://treasury.gov.au/policy-topics/measuring-what-matters
All fields
ID
REF-011
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Government Treasury
Year
2023
Title
Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework
Description
Treasury's framework organises wellbeing into five themes, healthy, secure, sustainable, cohesive and prosperous, supported by 12 dimensions and 50 indicators, with inclusion, equity and fairness cutting across them. The healthy theme covers physical and mental health and service access, and Treasury commits to guidance helping agencies embed the framework in policy development and evaluation.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://treasury.gov.au/policy-topics/measuring-what-matters
Related items
GOV-012
Full APA reference
Australian Government Treasury. (2023). Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework. https://treasury.gov.au/policy-topics/measuring-what-matters
Same document as
GOV-012
REF-012 Paper, guideline or statement

National strategic framework for chronic conditions

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Agreed by the Australian Health Ministers' Advisory Council for 2017 to 2025, it set three objectives: prevention, efficient and appropriate care to optimise quality of life, and targeting priority populations. Eleven strategic priority areas span risk reduction, critical life stages, early detection, continuity of care and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health.

Full APA reference

Australian Health Ministers’ Advisory Council. (2017). National strategic framework for chronic conditions. Australian Government Department of Health. https://extranet.who.int/ncdccs/Data/AUS_NCD_National%20Strategic%20Framework%20for%20Chronic%20Conditions.pdf

The health.gov.au landing page now serves the 2026–35 edition, so this record points at the full 2017 framework held in the WHO noncommunicable disease document repository, carrying the copyright line © Australian Health Ministers’ Advisory Council 2017 and stating a 2017 to 2025 period. Verified 8 September 2026. Superseded by REF-010.

All fields
ID
REF-012
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Health Ministers’ Advisory Council
Year
2017
Title
National strategic framework for chronic conditions
Description
Agreed by the Australian Health Ministers' Advisory Council for 2017 to 2025, it set three objectives: prevention, efficient and appropriate care to optimise quality of life, and targeting priority populations. Eleven strategic priority areas span risk reduction, critical life stages, early detection, continuity of care and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health.
Publication or publisher
Australian Government Department of Health
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines; Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://extranet.who.int/ncdccs/Data/AUS_NCD_National%20Strategic%20Framework%20for%20Chronic%20Conditions.pdf
Verification note
The health.gov.au landing page now serves the 2026–35 edition, so this record points at the full 2017 framework held in the WHO noncommunicable disease document repository, carrying the copyright line © Australian Health Ministers’ Advisory Council 2017 and stating a 2017 to 2025 period. Verified 8 September 2026. Superseded by REF-010.
Related items
REF-010
Full APA reference
Australian Health Ministers’ Advisory Council. (2017). National strategic framework for chronic conditions. Australian Government Department of Health. https://extranet.who.int/ncdccs/Data/AUS_NCD_National%20Strategic%20Framework%20for%20Chronic%20Conditions.pdf
REF-013 Paper, guideline or statement

Behaviours & risk factors

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

The Australian Institute of Health and Welfare collects its national reporting on behavioural risk factors here, including Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia, illicit drug use, and Injury in Australia. Continuously updated web reports and data tables give clinicians and policy staff current prevalence baselines for substance use, injury and accidental poisoning.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Behaviours & risk factors. Retrieved May 14, 2025, from https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/behaviours-risk-factors
All fields
ID
REF-013
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Behaviours & risk factors
Description
The Australian Institute of Health and Welfare collects its national reporting on behavioural risk factors here, including Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia, illicit drug use, and Injury in Australia. Continuously updated web reports and data tables give clinicians and policy staff current prevalence baselines for substance use, injury and accidental poisoning.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/behaviours-risk-factors
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Behaviours & risk factors. Retrieved May 14, 2025, from https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/behaviours-risk-factors
REF-014 Paper, guideline or statement

Clinician experiences of healthy lifestyle promotion and perceptions of digital interventions as complementary tools for lifestyle behavior change in primary care

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Qualitative Swedish study, 10 focus groups with 46 primary care clinicians, finding they want structured, evidence based lifestyle routines and view digital tools as complements rather than replacements for personal consultations. Points to where technology can extend, not substitute, lifestyle counselling.

Full APA reference

Berman, K., Kolaas, E., Petersén, P., Bendtsen, E., Hedman, C., Linderoth, U., ... & Thurang, A. (2018). Clinician experiences of healthy lifestyle promotion and perceptions of digital interventions as complementary tools for lifestyle behavior change in primary care. BMC Family Practice, 19(1), 139. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-018-0829-z
All fields
ID
REF-014
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Berman, K., Kolaas, E., Petersén, P., Bendtsen, E., Hedman, C., Linderoth, U., ... & Thurang, A
Year
2018
Title
Clinician experiences of healthy lifestyle promotion and perceptions of digital interventions as complementary tools for lifestyle behavior change in primary care
Description
Qualitative Swedish study, 10 focus groups with 46 primary care clinicians, finding they want structured, evidence based lifestyle routines and view digital tools as complements rather than replacements for personal consultations. Points to where technology can extend, not substitute, lifestyle counselling.
Publication or publisher
BMC Family Practice, 19(1), 139
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-018-0829-z
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-018-0829-z
Full APA reference
Berman, K., Kolaas, E., Petersén, P., Bendtsen, E., Hedman, C., Linderoth, U., ... & Thurang, A. (2018). Clinician experiences of healthy lifestyle promotion and perceptions of digital interventions as complementary tools for lifestyle behavior change in primary care. BMC Family Practice, 19(1), 139. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-018-0829-z
REF-015 Paper, guideline or statement

Barriers and facilitators perceived by healthcare professionals for implementing lifestyle interventions in patients with osteoarthritis: A scoping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Scoping review of 36 articles yielding 809 factors across nine domains on delivering lifestyle interventions in hip and knee osteoarthritis. Barriers included weak interdisciplinary collaboration, low patient health literacy and clinician skill gaps, showing training and team design matter as much as the intervention itself.

Full APA reference

Bouma, S. E., Van Beek, J. F. E., Diercks, R. L., Van Der Woude, L. H. V., Stevens, M., & Van Den Akker-Scheek, I. (2022). Barriers and facilitators perceived by healthcare professionals for implementing lifestyle interventions in patients with osteoarthritis: A scoping review. BMJ Open, 12(2). https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2021-056831
All fields
ID
REF-015
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Bouma, S. E., Van Beek, J. F. E., Diercks, R. L., Van Der Woude, L. H. V., Stevens, M., & Van Den Akker-Scheek, I
Year
2022
Title
Barriers and facilitators perceived by healthcare professionals for implementing lifestyle interventions in patients with osteoarthritis: A scoping review
Description
Scoping review of 36 articles yielding 809 factors across nine domains on delivering lifestyle interventions in hip and knee osteoarthritis. Barriers included weak interdisciplinary collaboration, low patient health literacy and clinician skill gaps, showing training and team design matter as much as the intervention itself.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open, 12(2)
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2021-056831
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2021-056831
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Bouma, S. E., Van Beek, J. F. E., Diercks, R. L., Van Der Woude, L. H. V., Stevens, M., & Van Den Akker-Scheek, I. (2022). Barriers and facilitators perceived by healthcare professionals for implementing lifestyle interventions in patients with osteoarthritis: A scoping review. BMJ Open, 12(2). https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2021-056831
REF-016 Paper, guideline or statement

Nature and mental health: An ecosystem service perspective

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Consensus framework from an international working group linking natural features, exposure, experience and mental health effects, agreeing nature contact raises wellbeing and lowers some mental illness risk while access shrinks worldwide. Lets planners and clinicians treat green space as health infrastructure.

Full APA reference

Bratman, G. N., Anderson, C. B., Berman, M. G., Cochran, B., de Vries, S., Flanders, J., Folke, C., Frumkin, H., Gross, J. J., Hartig, T., Kahn, P. H., Kuo, M., Lawler, J. J., Levin, P. S., Lindahl, T., Meyer-Lindenberg, A., Mitchell, R., Ouyang, Z., Roe, J., … Daily, G. C. (2019). Nature and mental health: An ecosystem service perspective. Science Advances, 5(7).https://doi.org/10.1126/SCIADV.AAX0903
All fields
ID
REF-016
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Bratman, G. N., Anderson, C. B., Berman, M. G., Cochran, B., de Vries, S., Flanders, J., Folke, C., Frumkin, H., Gross, J. J., Hartig, T., Kahn, P. H., Kuo, M., Lawler, J. J., Levin, P. S., Lindahl, T., Meyer-Lindenberg, A., Mitchell, R., Ouyang, Z., Roe, J., … Daily, G. C
Year
2019
Title
Nature and mental health: An ecosystem service perspective
Description
Consensus framework from an international working group linking natural features, exposure, experience and mental health effects, agreeing nature contact raises wellbeing and lowers some mental illness risk while access shrinks worldwide. Lets planners and clinicians treat green space as health infrastructure.
Publication or publisher
Science Advances, 5(7)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1126/SCIADV.AAX0903
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1126/SCIADV.AAX0903
Full APA reference
Bratman, G. N., Anderson, C. B., Berman, M. G., Cochran, B., de Vries, S., Flanders, J., Folke, C., Frumkin, H., Gross, J. J., Hartig, T., Kahn, P. H., Kuo, M., Lawler, J. J., Levin, P. S., Lindahl, T., Meyer-Lindenberg, A., Mitchell, R., Ouyang, Z., Roe, J., … Daily, G. C. (2019). Nature and mental health: An ecosystem service perspective. Science Advances, 5(7).https://doi.org/10.1126/SCIADV.AAX0903
REF-017 Paper, guideline or statement

Updated Canadian recommendations for talking with patients about alcohol and managing high-risk drinking and alcohol use disorder

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Canadian recommendations released May 2026, informed by a systematic review of screening tools, replacing long routine questionnaires with a short permission seeking question and targeted follow up for people drinking at risk. Frees clinician time and makes alcohol conversations less confronting in primary care.

Full APA reference

BC Centre on Substance Use. (2026, May 4). New Canadian recommendations aim to redefine how health professionals talk to their patients about alcohol [News release]. https://www.bccsu.ca/blog/news-release/new-canadian-recommendations-aim-to-redefine-how-health-professionals-talk-to-their-patients-about-alcohol/

Verified publication date: 4 May 2026 (guideline DOI 10.1503/cmaj.251759 cited on the release)

All fields
ID
REF-017
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Canadian Research Initiative on Substance Matters (Wood, E., & Rehm, J., co-chairs)
Year
2026
Title
Updated Canadian recommendations for talking with patients about alcohol and managing high-risk drinking and alcohol use disorder
Description
Canadian recommendations released May 2026, informed by a systematic review of screening tools, replacing long routine questionnaires with a short permission seeking question and targeted follow up for people drinking at risk. Frees clinician time and makes alcohol conversations less confronting in primary care.
Publication or publisher
Canadian Medical Association Journal / BC Centre on Substance Use
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.bccsu.ca/blog/news-release/new-canadian-recommendations-aim-to-redefine-how-health-professionals-talk-to-their-patients-about-alcohol/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 4 May 2026 (guideline DOI 10.1503/cmaj.251759 cited on the release)
Related items
REF-567
Full APA reference
BC Centre on Substance Use. (2026, May 4). New Canadian recommendations aim to redefine how health professionals talk to their patients about alcohol [News release]. https://www.bccsu.ca/blog/news-release/new-canadian-recommendations-aim-to-redefine-how-health-professionals-talk-to-their-patients-about-alcohol/
REF-018 Paper, guideline or statement

Canadian 24-Hour Movement Guidelines: An integration of physical activity, sedentary behaviour, and sleep

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

Canadian guidelines treating activity, sitting time and sleep as one 24 hour package, with recommendations for ages 0 to 4, 5 to 17, 18 to 64 and 65 plus, and advice to swap sitting for activity. Offers a whole day model suited to lifestyle consultations.

Full APA reference

Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology. (2025). Canadian 24-Hour Movement Guidelines: An integration of physical activity, sedentary behaviour, and sleep. Retrieved from https://csepguidelines.ca/
All fields
ID
REF-018
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology
Year
2025
Title
Canadian 24-Hour Movement Guidelines: An integration of physical activity, sedentary behaviour, and sleep
Description
Canadian guidelines treating activity, sitting time and sleep as one 24 hour package, with recommendations for ages 0 to 4, 5 to 17, 18 to 64 and 65 plus, and advice to swap sitting for activity. Offers a whole day model suited to lifestyle consultations.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://csepguidelines.ca/
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology. (2025). Canadian 24-Hour Movement Guidelines: An integration of physical activity, sedentary behaviour, and sleep. Retrieved from https://csepguidelines.ca/
REF-019 Paper, guideline or statement

CSEP expands Canada's 24-Hour Movement Guidelines with multilingual resources to advance health equity

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

Announcement that Canada's 24 hour movement guidelines and supporting tools are now available in 12 languages, including Arabic, Tagalog, Mandarin, Punjabi and Spanish, alongside primary care and physiotherapy toolkits. Treats language access as a determinant of health, a model for equitable lifestyle advice.

Full APA reference

Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology. (2026, March 11). CSEP expands Canada's 24-Hour Movement Guidelines with multilingual resources to advance health equity. https://csep.ca/2026/03/11/csep-expands-canadas-24-hour-movement-guidelines-with-multilingual-resources-to-advance-health-equity/

Verified publication date: 11 March 2026 (page states "Ottawa, ON - March 11, 2026")

All fields
ID
REF-019
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology
Year
2026
Title
CSEP expands Canada's 24-Hour Movement Guidelines with multilingual resources to advance health equity
Description
Announcement that Canada's 24 hour movement guidelines and supporting tools are now available in 12 languages, including Arabic, Tagalog, Mandarin, Punjabi and Spanish, alongside primary care and physiotherapy toolkits. Treats language access as a determinant of health, a model for equitable lifestyle advice.
Publication or publisher
Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
General health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://csep.ca/2026/03/11/csep-expands-canadas-24-hour-movement-guidelines-with-multilingual-resources-to-advance-health-equity/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 11 March 2026 (page states "Ottawa, ON - March 11, 2026")
Full APA reference
Canadian Society for Exercise Physiology. (2026, March 11). CSEP expands Canada's 24-Hour Movement Guidelines with multilingual resources to advance health equity. https://csep.ca/2026/03/11/csep-expands-canadas-24-hour-movement-guidelines-with-multilingual-resources-to-advance-health-equity/
REF-020 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle risk factors and the primary prevention of cancer

  • Web resource
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Cancer Australia's position statement, endorsed by Cancer Council Australia, holds at least one third of cancers are preventable and potentially over half avoidable when healthy lifestyle is combined with regular screening. It directs adults towards modifiable lifestyle factors and screening, giving clinicians agency backing to treat prevention as core cancer control rather than optional advice.

Full APA reference

Cancer Australia. (2025). Lifestyle risk factors and the primary prevention of cancer. https://www.canceraustralia.gov.au/resources/position-statements/lifestyle-risk-factors-and-primary-prevention-cancer
All fields
ID
REF-020
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Cancer Australia
Year
2025
Title
Lifestyle risk factors and the primary prevention of cancer
Description
Cancer Australia's position statement, endorsed by Cancer Council Australia, holds at least one third of cancers are preventable and potentially over half avoidable when healthy lifestyle is combined with regular screening. It directs adults towards modifiable lifestyle factors and screening, giving clinicians agency backing to treat prevention as core cancer control rather than optional advice.
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.canceraustralia.gov.au/resources/position-statements/lifestyle-risk-factors-and-primary-prevention-cancer
Full APA reference
Cancer Australia. (2025). Lifestyle risk factors and the primary prevention of cancer. https://www.canceraustralia.gov.au/resources/position-statements/lifestyle-risk-factors-and-primary-prevention-cancer
REF-021 Paper, guideline or statement

Keeping the Body in Mind – Primary

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Central and Eastern Sydney PHN funds this free 12 week Mindgardens program for people aged 18 to 75 with severe mental illness, offering six sessions with an exercise physiologist, dietitian and nicotine treatment specialist. Group cooking, exercise and peer support are included, and GPs refer patients not already under public mental health care.

Full APA reference

Central and Eastern Sydney Primary Health Network. (n.d.). Keeping the Body in Mind – Primary. CESPHN. Retrieved from https://cesphn.org.au/general-practice/help-my-patients-with/mental-health/mental-health-services-funded-by-cesphn/kbimp
All fields
ID
REF-021
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Central and Eastern Sydney Primary Health Network
Year
n.d.
Title
Keeping the Body in Mind – Primary
Description
Central and Eastern Sydney PHN funds this free 12 week Mindgardens program for people aged 18 to 75 with severe mental illness, offering six sessions with an exercise physiologist, dietitian and nicotine treatment specialist. Group cooking, exercise and peer support are included, and GPs refer patients not already under public mental health care.
Publication or publisher
CESPHN
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://cesphn.org.au/general-practice/help-my-patients-with/mental-health/mental-health-services-funded-by-cesphn/kbimp
Full APA reference
Central and Eastern Sydney Primary Health Network. (n.d.). Keeping the Body in Mind – Primary. CESPHN. Retrieved from https://cesphn.org.au/general-practice/help-my-patients-with/mental-health/mental-health-services-funded-by-cesphn/kbimp
REF-022 Paper, guideline or statement

Building on the Doha Declaration: A white paper on advancing lifestyle medicine for non-communicable disease prevention and health system transformation

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

White paper from a consensus meeting of 26 global lifestyle medicine experts, building on the Doha Declaration, arguing that around 80% of non-communicable diseases are preventable through six pillars including nutrition, activity, sleep and social connection. Maps how health systems, training and policy can embed prevention.

Full APA reference

Cheema, S., Abraham, A., Mechley, A., Lapsa-Lesinske, A., Mercore Hutanu, E., Lee, J. S., Lanza Sagardia, S. D., Feroz, S., Poobalasingam, S., & Mamtani, R. (2026). Building on the Doha Declaration: A white paper on advancing lifestyle medicine for non-communicable disease prevention and health system transformation. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1873047. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1873047

Verified publication date: 7 July 2026 (page shows accepted 06 July 2026, published 07 July 2026)

All fields
ID
REF-022
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cheema, S., Abraham, A., Mechley, A., Lapsa-Lesinske, A., Mercore Hutanu, E., Lee, J. S., Lanza Sagardia, S. D., Feroz, S., Poobalasingam, S., & Mamtani, R.
Year
2026
Title
Building on the Doha Declaration: A white paper on advancing lifestyle medicine for non-communicable disease prevention and health system transformation
Description
White paper from a consensus meeting of 26 global lifestyle medicine experts, building on the Doha Declaration, arguing that around 80% of non-communicable diseases are preventable through six pillars including nutrition, activity, sleep and social connection. Maps how health systems, training and policy can embed prevention.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1873047
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/public-health/articles/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1873047/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1873047
Verification note
Verified publication date: 7 July 2026 (page shows accepted 06 July 2026, published 07 July 2026)
Full APA reference
Cheema, S., Abraham, A., Mechley, A., Lapsa-Lesinske, A., Mercore Hutanu, E., Lee, J. S., Lanza Sagardia, S. D., Feroz, S., Poobalasingam, S., & Mamtani, R. (2026). Building on the Doha Declaration: A white paper on advancing lifestyle medicine for non-communicable disease prevention and health system transformation. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1873047. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1873047
REF-023 Paper, guideline or statement

Impact of healthy lifestyle on the incidence and progression trajectory of mental disorders: A prospective study in the UK Biobank

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Prospective cohort of 385,704 UK Biobank adults without mental illness found higher healthy lifestyle scores lowered the risk of developing anxiety or depression, and of progressing to having both, with hazard ratios of 0.90 to 0.95. Shows habits shape the course of illness, not just its onset.

Full APA reference

Chen, H. W., Huang, R. D., Li, L. H., Zhou, R., Cao, B. F., Liu, K., Wang, S. A., Zhong, Q., Wei, Y. F., & Wu, X. B. (2024). Impact of healthy lifestyle on the incidence and progression trajectory of mental disorders: A prospective study in the UK Biobank. Journal of Affective Disorders, 358, 383–390. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JAD.2024.05.054
All fields
ID
REF-023
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Chen, H. W., Huang, R. D., Li, L. H., Zhou, R., Cao, B. F., Liu, K., Wang, S. A., Zhong, Q., Wei, Y. F., & Wu, X. B
Year
2024
Title
Impact of healthy lifestyle on the incidence and progression trajectory of mental disorders: A prospective study in the UK Biobank
Description
Prospective cohort of 385,704 UK Biobank adults without mental illness found higher healthy lifestyle scores lowered the risk of developing anxiety or depression, and of progressing to having both, with hazard ratios of 0.90 to 0.95. Shows habits shape the course of illness, not just its onset.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Affective Disorders, 358, 383–390
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JAD.2024.05.054
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JAD.2024.05.054
Related items
REF-482
Full APA reference
Chen, H. W., Huang, R. D., Li, L. H., Zhou, R., Cao, B. F., Liu, K., Wang, S. A., Zhong, Q., Wei, Y. F., & Wu, X. B. (2024). Impact of healthy lifestyle on the incidence and progression trajectory of mental disorders: A prospective study in the UK Biobank. Journal of Affective Disorders, 358, 383–390. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JAD.2024.05.054
REF-024 Paper, guideline or statement

Barriers and facilitators to the implementation of lifestyle management in polycystic ovary syndrome: Endocrinologists' and obstetricians and gynaecologists' perspectives

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Interview study with 11 endocrinologists and 10 obstetrician gynaecologists managing polycystic ovary syndrome found all valued lifestyle change but lacked consultation time and access to allied health services. Points to team based care and credible, condition specific advice as practical fixes for busy specialists.

Full APA reference

Chhour, I., Blackshaw, L., Moran, L. J., Boyle, J. A., Robinson, T., & Lim, S. S. (2022). Barriers and facilitators to the implementation of lifestyle management in polycystic ovary syndrome: Endocrinologists' and obstetricians and gynaecologists' perspectives. Patient Education and Counseling, 105(7), 2292–2298. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PEC.2021.12.013
All fields
ID
REF-024
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Chhour, I., Blackshaw, L., Moran, L. J., Boyle, J. A., Robinson, T., & Lim, S. S
Year
2022
Title
Barriers and facilitators to the implementation of lifestyle management in polycystic ovary syndrome: Endocrinologists' and obstetricians and gynaecologists' perspectives
Description
Interview study with 11 endocrinologists and 10 obstetrician gynaecologists managing polycystic ovary syndrome found all valued lifestyle change but lacked consultation time and access to allied health services. Points to team based care and credible, condition specific advice as practical fixes for busy specialists.
Publication or publisher
Patient Education and Counseling, 105(7), 2292–2298
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PEC.2021.12.013
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PEC.2021.12.013
Related items
REF-463
Full APA reference
Chhour, I., Blackshaw, L., Moran, L. J., Boyle, J. A., Robinson, T., & Lim, S. S. (2022). Barriers and facilitators to the implementation of lifestyle management in polycystic ovary syndrome: Endocrinologists' and obstetricians and gynaecologists' perspectives. Patient Education and Counseling, 105(7), 2292–2298. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PEC.2021.12.013
REF-025 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise for depression

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Cochrane review of 73 randomised trials with at least 4,985 adults found exercise reduced depressive symptoms compared with no treatment, standardised mean difference 0.67, though certainty was low and effects shrank in higher quality trials. Supports movement as a mainstream but modest depression treatment.

Full APA reference

Clegg, A. J., Hill, J. E., Mullin, D. S., Harris, C., Smith, C. J., Lightbody, C. E., Dwan, K., Cooney, G. M., Mead, G. E., & Watkins, C. L. (2026). Exercise for depression. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 1(1), CD004366. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD004366.pub7

Verified publication date: 8 January 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Jan 8")

All fields
ID
REF-025
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Clegg, A. J., Hill, J. E., Mullin, D. S., Harris, C., Smith, C. J., Lightbody, C. E., Dwan, K., Cooney, G. M., Mead, G. E., & Watkins, C. L.
Year
2026
Title
Exercise for depression
Description
Cochrane review of 73 randomised trials with at least 4,985 adults found exercise reduced depressive symptoms compared with no treatment, standardised mean difference 0.67, though certainty was low and effects shrank in higher quality trials. Supports movement as a mainstream but modest depression treatment.
Publication or publisher
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 1(1), CD004366
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41500513/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD004366.pub7
Verification note
Verified publication date: 8 January 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Jan 8")
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Clegg, A. J., Hill, J. E., Mullin, D. S., Harris, C., Smith, C. J., Lightbody, C. E., Dwan, K., Cooney, G. M., Mead, G. E., & Watkins, C. L. (2026). Exercise for depression. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 1(1), CD004366. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD004366.pub7
REF-026 Paper, guideline or statement

Implementation of a lifestyle and life-skills intervention to prevent weight-gain and cardiometabolic abnormalities in young people with first-episode psychosis as part of routine care: The Keeping the Body in Mind program

  • Website or organisation page
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Audit of 182 young people with first episode psychosis across three community services showed the 12 week Keeping the Body in Mind program held average weight gain to 1.5 kg, with 81% avoiding clinically significant gain. Evidence that metabolic prevention works inside routine care.

Full APA reference

Curtis, J., Teasdale, S. B., Morell, R., Wadhwa, P., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., O'Donnell, C., Fibbins, H., & Ward, P. B. (2024). Implementation of a lifestyle and life-skills intervention to prevent weight-gain and cardiometabolic abnormalities in young people with first-episode psychosis as part of routine care: The Keeping the Body in Mind program. Early Intervention in Psychiatry, 18(9), 731–738. https://doi.org/10.1111/eip.13508
All fields
ID
REF-026
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Curtis, J., Teasdale, S. B., Morell, R., Wadhwa, P., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., O'Donnell, C., Fibbins, H., & Ward, P. B
Year
2024
Title
Implementation of a lifestyle and life-skills intervention to prevent weight-gain and cardiometabolic abnormalities in young people with first-episode psychosis as part of routine care: The Keeping the Body in Mind program
Description
Audit of 182 young people with first episode psychosis across three community services showed the 12 week Keeping the Body in Mind program held average weight gain to 1.5 kg, with 81% avoiding clinically significant gain. Evidence that metabolic prevention works inside routine care.
Publication or publisher
Early Intervention in Psychiatry, 18(9), 731–738
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1111/eip.13508
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/eip.13508
Full APA reference
Curtis, J., Teasdale, S. B., Morell, R., Wadhwa, P., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., O'Donnell, C., Fibbins, H., & Ward, P. B. (2024). Implementation of a lifestyle and life-skills intervention to prevent weight-gain and cardiometabolic abnormalities in young people with first-episode psychosis as part of routine care: The Keeping the Body in Mind program. Early Intervention in Psychiatry, 18(9), 731–738. https://doi.org/10.1111/eip.13508
REF-027 Paper, guideline or statement

From impact factors to real impact: Translating evidence on lifestyle interventions into routine mental health care

  • Journal article
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Commentary arguing that despite growing trial evidence, lifestyle interventions rarely reach routine mental health services, and calling for implementation science to close that gap. Useful framing for anyone moving exercise, diet and sleep programs from research papers into everyday clinical practice and funding decisions.

Full APA reference

Deenik, J., Czosnek, L., Teasdale, S. B., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Schuch, F. B., Tenback, Di. E., Van Harten, P. N., Tak, E. C. P. M., Lederman, O., Ward, P. B., Hendriksen, I. J. M., Vancampfort, D., & Rosenbaum, S. (2020). From impact factors to real impact: Translating evidence on lifestyle interventions into routine mental health care. Translational Behavioral Medicine, 10(4), 1070–1073. https://doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibz067
All fields
ID
REF-027
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Deenik, J., Czosnek, L., Teasdale, S. B., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Schuch, F. B., Tenback, Di. E., Van Harten, P. N., Tak, E. C. P. M., Lederman, O., Ward, P. B., Hendriksen, I. J. M., Vancampfort, D., & Rosenbaum, S
Year
2020
Title
From impact factors to real impact: Translating evidence on lifestyle interventions into routine mental health care
Description
Commentary arguing that despite growing trial evidence, lifestyle interventions rarely reach routine mental health services, and calling for implementation science to close that gap. Useful framing for anyone moving exercise, diet and sleep programs from research papers into everyday clinical practice and funding decisions.
Publication or publisher
Translational Behavioral Medicine, 10(4), 1070–1073
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibz067
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibz067
Related items
REF-496; REF-509
Full APA reference
Deenik, J., Czosnek, L., Teasdale, S. B., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Schuch, F. B., Tenback, Di. E., Van Harten, P. N., Tak, E. C. P. M., Lederman, O., Ward, P. B., Hendriksen, I. J. M., Vancampfort, D., & Rosenbaum, S. (2020). From impact factors to real impact: Translating evidence on lifestyle interventions into routine mental health care. Translational Behavioral Medicine, 10(4), 1070–1073. https://doi.org/10.1093/tbm/ibz067
REF-028 Paper, guideline or statement

Nature is nurture: A scoping review of nature exposure as an equigenic intervention on children's psychological health

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Scoping review of 123 studies from 2003 to 2025 asking whether nature exposure narrows health gaps found 37 of the 64 studies comparing advantage groups supported an equigenic effect, including 19 of 24 on children's mental health. Frames greenspace as an equity measure, not just an amenity.

Full APA reference

Denker, K. I., & Faber Taylor, A. (2026). Nature is nurture: A scoping review of nature exposure as an equigenic intervention on children's psychological health. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1731222. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1731222

Verified publication date: 10 April 2026

All fields
ID
REF-028
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Denker, K. I., & Faber Taylor, A.
Year
2026
Title
Nature is nurture: A scoping review of nature exposure as an equigenic intervention on children's psychological health
Description
Scoping review of 123 studies from 2003 to 2025 asking whether nature exposure narrows health gaps found 37 of the 64 studies comparing advantage groups supported an equigenic effect, including 19 of 24 on children's mental health. Frames greenspace as an equity measure, not just an amenity.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1731222
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/psychology/articles/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1731222/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1731222
Verification note
Verified publication date: 10 April 2026
Full APA reference
Denker, K. I., & Faber Taylor, A. (2026). Nature is nurture: A scoping review of nature exposure as an equigenic intervention on children's psychological health. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1731222. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1731222
REF-029 Paper, guideline or statement

Health Inequalities Annual Report 2026

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The Department of Health and NISRA compare the 20% most and least deprived areas of Northern Ireland across 70 indicators covering mental health, alcohol, smoking, drugs and diet. The 2026 edition reports a male life expectancy gap of 7.2 years and a male healthy life expectancy gap of 14.9 years, with trust and council breakdowns.

Full APA reference

Department of Health (Northern Ireland) & Northern Ireland Statistics and Research Agency. (2026, March 25). Health inequalities annual report 2026. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/health-inequalities-annual-report-2026

Verified publication date: 25 March 2026

All fields
ID
REF-029
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Department of Health (Northern Ireland) & Northern Ireland Statistics and Research Agency
Year
2026
Title
Health Inequalities Annual Report 2026
Description
The Department of Health and NISRA compare the 20% most and least deprived areas of Northern Ireland across 70 indicators covering mental health, alcohol, smoking, drugs and diet. The 2026 edition reports a male life expectancy gap of 7.2 years and a male healthy life expectancy gap of 14.9 years, with trust and council breakdowns.
Publication or publisher
GOV.UK / Department of Health (Northern Ireland)
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/health-inequalities-annual-report-2026
Verification note
Verified publication date: 25 March 2026
Full APA reference
Department of Health (Northern Ireland) & Northern Ireland Statistics and Research Agency. (2026, March 25). Health inequalities annual report 2026. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/health-inequalities-annual-report-2026
REF-030 Paper, guideline or statement

A National framework for recovery-oriented mental health services: guide for practitioners and providers

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Issued by the Commonwealth in 2013, the guide sets the domains and capabilities practitioners and providers need for recovery oriented practice, aligned with the 2010 National Standards for Mental Health Services. It urges changes to workforce skill mix, more lived experience input, and removal of barriers to work, education and community life.

Full APA reference

Department of Health and Aged Care. (2013). A National framework for recovery-oriented mental health services: guide for practitioners and providers. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/a-national-framework-for-recovery-oriented-mental-health-services-policy-and-theory?language=en
All fields
ID
REF-030
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2013
Title
A National framework for recovery-oriented mental health services: guide for practitioners and providers
Description
Issued by the Commonwealth in 2013, the guide sets the domains and capabilities practitioners and providers need for recovery oriented practice, aligned with the 2010 National Standards for Mental Health Services. It urges changes to workforce skill mix, more lived experience input, and removal of barriers to work, education and community life.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/a-national-framework-for-recovery-oriented-mental-health-services-policy-and-theory?language=en
Full APA reference
Department of Health and Aged Care. (2013). A National framework for recovery-oriented mental health services: guide for practitioners and providers. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/a-national-framework-for-recovery-oriented-mental-health-services-policy-and-theory?language=en
REF-031 Paper, guideline or statement

Cardiovascular disease modern service framework

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

Published in July 2026 for England, it sets 12 priorities covering cardiovascular, kidney and metabolic risk detection, faster stroke and heart attack treatment, and rehabilitation. The stated aim is a 25% cut in premature heart disease and stroke deaths within a decade, preventing 1,600 to 2,400 under 75 deaths a year, and narrowing inequalities.

Full APA reference

Department of Health and Social Care. (2026, July 7). Cardiovascular disease modern service framework. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/cardiovascular-disease-modern-service-framework

Verified publication date: 7 July 2026

All fields
ID
REF-031
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Department of Health and Social Care
Year
2026
Title
Cardiovascular disease modern service framework
Description
Published in July 2026 for England, it sets 12 priorities covering cardiovascular, kidney and metabolic risk detection, faster stroke and heart attack treatment, and rehabilitation. The stated aim is a 25% cut in premature heart disease and stroke deaths within a decade, preventing 1,600 to 2,400 under 75 deaths a year, and narrowing inequalities.
Publication or publisher
GOV.UK
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/cardiovascular-disease-modern-service-framework
Verification note
Verified publication date: 7 July 2026
Full APA reference
Department of Health and Social Care. (2026, July 7). Cardiovascular disease modern service framework. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/cardiovascular-disease-modern-service-framework
REF-032 Paper, guideline or statement

Informing the mental health strategy for England: Call for evidence

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Department of Health and Social Care invites evidence of good practice from mental health and wider health services, local government, education and training settings, workplaces and community settings. Submissions will shape a cross government mental health approach under the 10 Year Health Plan for England, drawing mainly on service providers and people delivering services.

Full APA reference

Department of Health and Social Care. (2026, May 15). Informing the mental health strategy for England: Call for evidence. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/calls-for-evidence/informing-the-mental-health-strategy-for-england

Verified publication date: 15 May 2026

All fields
ID
REF-032
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Department of Health and Social Care
Year
2026
Title
Informing the mental health strategy for England: Call for evidence
Description
The Department of Health and Social Care invites evidence of good practice from mental health and wider health services, local government, education and training settings, workplaces and community settings. Submissions will shape a cross government mental health approach under the 10 Year Health Plan for England, drawing mainly on service providers and people delivering services.
Publication or publisher
GOV.UK
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.gov.uk/government/calls-for-evidence/informing-the-mental-health-strategy-for-england
Verification note
Verified publication date: 15 May 2026
Full APA reference
Department of Health and Social Care. (2026, May 15). Informing the mental health strategy for England: Call for evidence. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/calls-for-evidence/informing-the-mental-health-strategy-for-england
REF-034 Paper, guideline or statement

Joint position statement: Addressing the physical health of people with mental illness

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Joint statement from three Australian professional bodies covering dietetics, exercise science and psychology, calling for holistic multidisciplinary treatment of the physical health of people living with mental illness and endorsing dietary and exercise interventions as core parts of that care. Gives practitioners professional backing to argue for funded dietitian and exercise physiologist roles inside mental health teams.

Full APA reference

Dietitians Australia, Exercise & Sports Science Australia, & Australian Psychological Society. (2017). Joint position statement: Addressing the physical health of people with mental illness. https://dietitiansaustralia.org.au/advocacy-and-policy/joint-position-statements/addressing-physical-health-people-mental-illness-joint-position-statement

Link confirmed 3 September 2026. Merged on 8 September 2026 with a duplicate entry for the same statement, which listed the first body under its former name, Dietitians Association of Australia.

All fields
ID
REF-034
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Dietitians Australia, Exercise & Sports Science Australia, & Australian Psychological Society
Year
2017
Title
Joint position statement: Addressing the physical health of people with mental illness
Description
Joint statement from three Australian professional bodies covering dietetics, exercise science and psychology, calling for holistic multidisciplinary treatment of the physical health of people living with mental illness and endorsing dietary and exercise interventions as core parts of that care. Gives practitioners professional backing to argue for funded dietitian and exercise physiologist roles inside mental health teams.
Publication or publisher
Joint professional position statement
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://dietitiansaustralia.org.au/advocacy-and-policy/joint-position-statements/addressing-physical-health-people-mental-illness-joint-position-statement
Verification note
Link confirmed 3 September 2026. Merged on 8 September 2026 with a duplicate entry for the same statement, which listed the first body under its former name, Dietitians Association of Australia.
Full APA reference
Dietitians Australia, Exercise & Sports Science Australia, & Australian Psychological Society. (2017). Joint position statement: Addressing the physical health of people with mental illness. https://dietitiansaustralia.org.au/advocacy-and-policy/joint-position-statements/addressing-physical-health-people-mental-illness-joint-position-statement
REF-035 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine: The ‘why’, ‘what’ and ‘how’ of a developing discipline

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Overview positioning lifestyle medicine between clinical medicine and public health, describing what it adds in four areas, science, skills, tools and procedures, and urging clinicians to address distal environmental drivers the author calls anthropogens. A practical orientation for general practitioners managing chronic disease.

Full APA reference

Egger, G. (2019). Lifestyle medicine: The ‘why’, ‘what’ and ‘how’ of a developing discipline. Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 665–668. https://www1.racgp.org.au/ajgp/2019/october/lifestyle-medicine
All fields
ID
REF-035
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Egger, G
Year
2019
Title
Lifestyle medicine: The ‘why’, ‘what’ and ‘how’ of a developing discipline
Description
Overview positioning lifestyle medicine between clinical medicine and public health, describing what it adds in four areas, science, skills, tools and procedures, and urging clinicians to address distal environmental drivers the author calls anthropogens. A practical orientation for general practitioners managing chronic disease.
Publication or publisher
Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 665–668
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Other
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Other or unspecified
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://www1.racgp.org.au/ajgp/2019/october/lifestyle-medicine
Related items
REF-458
Full APA reference
Egger, G. (2019). Lifestyle medicine: The ‘why’, ‘what’ and ‘how’ of a developing discipline. Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 665–668. https://www1.racgp.org.au/ajgp/2019/october/lifestyle-medicine
REF-036 Paper, guideline or statement

The relationship between nutrition and depression in the life process: A mini-review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Mini review linking diet quality and specific nutrients, including folate, vitamins B12, B6 and D, omega 3 fats, magnesium, selenium and zinc, to depression risk across the lifespan, noting mood and food choices influence each other. Background reading for nutrition conversations in mental health care.

Full APA reference

Ekinci, G. N., & Sanlier, N. (2023). The relationship between nutrition and depression in the life process: A mini-review. Experimental Gerontology, 172. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.EXGER.2022.112072
All fields
ID
REF-036
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Ekinci, G. N., & Sanlier, N
Year
2023
Title
The relationship between nutrition and depression in the life process: A mini-review
Description
Mini review linking diet quality and specific nutrients, including folate, vitamins B12, B6 and D, omega 3 fats, magnesium, selenium and zinc, to depression risk across the lifespan, noting mood and food choices influence each other. Background reading for nutrition conversations in mental health care.
Publication or publisher
Experimental Gerontology, 172
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.EXGER.2022.112072
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.EXGER.2022.112072
Full APA reference
Ekinci, G. N., & Sanlier, N. (2023). The relationship between nutrition and depression in the life process: A mini-review. Experimental Gerontology, 172. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.EXGER.2022.112072
REF-037 Paper, guideline or statement

Ending loneliness together in Australia: The first national strategy to tackle loneliness

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Ending Loneliness Together's November 2020 white paper uses surveys from 2018 and 2019 plus pandemic monitoring in early 2020, arguing loneliness is subjective and distinct from social isolation. Its three recommendations are a National Loneliness Strategy involving lived experience and all governments, an anti stigma awareness campaign, and faster translation of evidence into practice.

Full APA reference

Ending Loneliness Together. (2020). Ending loneliness together in Australia: The first national strategy to tackle loneliness. https://endingloneliness.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2020/11/Ending-Loneliness-Together-in-Australia_Nov20.pdf
All fields
ID
REF-037
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Ending Loneliness Together
Year
2020
Title
Ending loneliness together in Australia: The first national strategy to tackle loneliness
Description
Ending Loneliness Together's November 2020 white paper uses surveys from 2018 and 2019 plus pandemic monitoring in early 2020, arguing loneliness is subjective and distinct from social isolation. Its three recommendations are a National Loneliness Strategy involving lived experience and all governments, an anti stigma awareness campaign, and faster translation of evidence into practice.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://endingloneliness.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2020/11/Ending-Loneliness-Together-in-Australia_Nov20.pdf
Full APA reference
Ending Loneliness Together. (2020). Ending loneliness together in Australia: The first national strategy to tackle loneliness. https://endingloneliness.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2020/11/Ending-Loneliness-Together-in-Australia_Nov20.pdf
REF-038 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of a brief lifestyle intervention targeting mental health staff: analysis of physical fitness and activity in the Keeping Our Staff in Mind study

  • Journal article
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Single arm study of 106 Australian public mental health staff offered five sessions of exercise and nutrition counselling found cardiorespiratory fitness improved significantly by 16 weeks. Suggests supporting staff health is a route to shifting service culture so consumers' physical health is taken seriously.

Full APA reference

Fibbins, H., Ward, P. B., Curtis, J., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., Morell, R., & Rosenbaum, S. (2020). Effectiveness of a brief lifestyle intervention targeting mental health staff: analysis of physical fitness and activity in the Keeping Our Staff in Mind study. BMJ Open Sport & Exercise Medicine, 6(1), e000761. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjsem-2020-000761
All fields
ID
REF-038
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Fibbins, H., Ward, P. B., Curtis, J., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., Morell, R., & Rosenbaum, S
Year
2020
Title
Effectiveness of a brief lifestyle intervention targeting mental health staff: analysis of physical fitness and activity in the Keeping Our Staff in Mind study
Description
Single arm study of 106 Australian public mental health staff offered five sessions of exercise and nutrition counselling found cardiorespiratory fitness improved significantly by 16 weeks. Suggests supporting staff health is a route to shifting service culture so consumers' physical health is taken seriously.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open Sport & Exercise Medicine, 6(1), e000761
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjsem-2020-000761
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjsem-2020-000761
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Fibbins, H., Ward, P. B., Curtis, J., Watkins, A., Lederman, O., Morell, R., & Rosenbaum, S. (2020). Effectiveness of a brief lifestyle intervention targeting mental health staff: analysis of physical fitness and activity in the Keeping Our Staff in Mind study. BMJ Open Sport & Exercise Medicine, 6(1), e000761. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjsem-2020-000761
REF-039 Paper, guideline or statement

Food and mood: How do diet and nutrition affect mental well-being?

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Peer reviewed BMJ analysis summarising evidence that Mediterranean style eating is linked to better mental health than Western diets, with plausible pathways through blood sugar, immune activation and the gut microbiome, while noting causation is unsettled. A balanced primer for clinicians asked whether food lifts mood.

Full APA reference

Firth, J., Firth, J., Gangwisch, J. E., Gangwisch, J. E., Borisini, A., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Mayer, E. A., & Mayer, E. A. (2020). Food and mood: How do diet and nutrition affect mental well-being? The BMJ, 369. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.m2382
All fields
ID
REF-039
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Firth, J., Firth, J., Gangwisch, J. E., Gangwisch, J. E., Borisini, A., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Mayer, E. A., & Mayer, E. A
Year
2020
Title
Food and mood: How do diet and nutrition affect mental well-being?
Description
Peer reviewed BMJ analysis summarising evidence that Mediterranean style eating is linked to better mental health than Western diets, with plausible pathways through blood sugar, immune activation and the gut microbiome, while noting causation is unsettled. A balanced primer for clinicians asked whether food lifts mood.
Publication or publisher
The BMJ, 369
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.m2382
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.m2382
Full APA reference
Firth, J., Firth, J., Gangwisch, J. E., Gangwisch, J. E., Borisini, A., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Wootton, R. E., Mayer, E. A., & Mayer, E. A. (2020). Food and mood: How do diet and nutrition affect mental well-being? The BMJ, 369. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.m2382
REF-040 Paper, guideline or statement

The Effects of Dietary Improvement on Symptoms of Depression and Anxiety: A Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 16 randomised trials with outcome data for 45,826 people found dietary improvement produced a small but reliable reduction in depressive symptoms, Hedges' g 0.16, with no effect on anxiety and larger gains for women. Supports diet as an add on population level mental health measure.

Full APA reference

Firth, J., Marx, W., Dash, S., Carney, R., Teasdale, S. B., Solmi, M., Stubbs, B., Schuch, F. B., Carvalho, A. F., Jacka, F., & Sarris, J. (2019). The Effects of Dietary Improvement on Symptoms of Depression and Anxiety: A Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. Psychosomatic Medicine, 81(3), 265–280. https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0000000000000673
All fields
ID
REF-040
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Firth, J., Marx, W., Dash, S., Carney, R., Teasdale, S. B., Solmi, M., Stubbs, B., Schuch, F. B., Carvalho, A. F., Jacka, F., & Sarris, J
Year
2019
Title
The Effects of Dietary Improvement on Symptoms of Depression and Anxiety: A Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials
Description
Meta-analysis of 16 randomised trials with outcome data for 45,826 people found dietary improvement produced a small but reliable reduction in depressive symptoms, Hedges' g 0.16, with no effect on anxiety and larger gains for women. Supports diet as an add on population level mental health measure.
Publication or publisher
Psychosomatic Medicine, 81(3), 265–280
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0000000000000673
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0000000000000673
Full APA reference
Firth, J., Marx, W., Dash, S., Carney, R., Teasdale, S. B., Solmi, M., Stubbs, B., Schuch, F. B., Carvalho, A. F., Jacka, F., & Sarris, J. (2019). The Effects of Dietary Improvement on Symptoms of Depression and Anxiety: A Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. Psychosomatic Medicine, 81(3), 265–280. https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0000000000000673
REF-041 Paper, guideline or statement

A meta-review of "lifestyle psychiatry": the role of exercise, smoking, diet and sleep in the prevention and treatment of mental disorders

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Meta-review synthesising 29 meta-analyses of cohort studies, 12 Mendelian randomisation studies and further top tier evidence on exercise, smoking, diet and sleep across depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and ADHD. Physical activity has the strongest case for prevention and treatment, while smoking looks causal.

Full APA reference

Firth, J., Solmi, M., Wootton, R. E., Vancampfort, D., Schuch, F. B., Hoare, E., Gilbody, S., Torous, J., Teasdale, S. B., Jackson, S. E., Smith, L., Eaton, M., Jacka, F. N., Veronese, N., Marx, W., Ashdown-Franks, G., Siskind, D., Sarris, J., Rosenbaum, S., … Stubbs, B. (2020). A meta-review of "lifestyle psychiatry": the role of exercise, smoking, diet and sleep in the prevention and treatment of mental disorders. World Psychiatry, 19(3), 360–380. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.20773
All fields
ID
REF-041
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Firth, J., Solmi, M., Wootton, R. E., Vancampfort, D., Schuch, F. B., Hoare, E., Gilbody, S., Torous, J., Teasdale, S. B., Jackson, S. E., Smith, L., Eaton, M., Jacka, F. N., Veronese, N., Marx, W., Ashdown-Franks, G., Siskind, D., Sarris, J., Rosenbaum, S., … Stubbs, B
Year
2020
Title
A meta-review of "lifestyle psychiatry": the role of exercise, smoking, diet and sleep in the prevention and treatment of mental disorders
Description
Meta-review synthesising 29 meta-analyses of cohort studies, 12 Mendelian randomisation studies and further top tier evidence on exercise, smoking, diet and sleep across depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and ADHD. Physical activity has the strongest case for prevention and treatment, while smoking looks causal.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 19(3), 360–380
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.20773
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.20773
Related items
REF-464; REF-481; REF-496; REF-508; REF-509
Full APA reference
Firth, J., Solmi, M., Wootton, R. E., Vancampfort, D., Schuch, F. B., Hoare, E., Gilbody, S., Torous, J., Teasdale, S. B., Jackson, S. E., Smith, L., Eaton, M., Jacka, F. N., Veronese, N., Marx, W., Ashdown-Franks, G., Siskind, D., Sarris, J., Rosenbaum, S., … Stubbs, B. (2020). A meta-review of "lifestyle psychiatry": the role of exercise, smoking, diet and sleep in the prevention and treatment of mental disorders. World Psychiatry, 19(3), 360–380. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.20773
REF-042 Paper, guideline or statement

Homepage

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Homepage of Deakin University's Food & Mood Centre, a multidisciplinary nutritional psychiatry research group working from microbiology to public health on diet based prevention and treatment of mental disorders. Offers education and evidence summaries, a credible Australian reference point for clients asking about food and mood.

Full APA reference

Food & Mood Centre. (2025). Homepage. Retrieved from https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/

Deakin University multi-disciplinary research centre studying how what we eat influences brain, mood and mental health.

All fields
ID
REF-042
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Food & Mood Centre
Year
2025
Title
Homepage
Description
Homepage of Deakin University's Food & Mood Centre, a multidisciplinary nutritional psychiatry research group working from microbiology to public health on diet based prevention and treatment of mental disorders. Offers education and evidence summaries, a credible Australian reference point for clients asking about food and mood.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
University research centre
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Societies / Research Centres
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/
Verification note
Deakin University multi-disciplinary research centre studying how what we eat influences brain, mood and mental health.
Full APA reference
Food & Mood Centre. (2025). Homepage. Retrieved from https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/
REF-043 Paper, guideline or statement

Guidelines for clinical practice - Food & Mood Academy

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Clinical practice guidelines from Deakin's Food & Mood Centre with the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine on lifestyle based care for major depressive disorder, graded by strength of evidence and paired with consumer resources. Gives clinicians a structured way to add diet, activity and sleep support to depression treatment.

Full APA reference

Food & Mood Centre. (2025). Guidelines for clinical practice - Food & Mood Academy. Retrieved from https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/academy/guidelines-clinical-practice/
All fields
ID
REF-043
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Food & Mood Centre
Year
2025
Title
Guidelines for clinical practice - Food & Mood Academy
Description
Clinical practice guidelines from Deakin's Food & Mood Centre with the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine on lifestyle based care for major depressive disorder, graded by strength of evidence and paired with consumer resources. Gives clinicians a structured way to add diet, activity and sleep support to depression treatment.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
University research centre
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/academy/guidelines-clinical-practice/
Full APA reference
Food & Mood Centre. (2025). Guidelines for clinical practice - Food & Mood Academy. Retrieved from https://foodandmoodcentre.com.au/academy/guidelines-clinical-practice/
REF-044 Paper, guideline or statement

The effects of improving sleep on mental health (OASIS): a randomised controlled trial with mediation analysis

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Randomised trial of 3,755 students with insomnia across 26 UK universities: digital cognitive behavioural therapy sharply reduced insomnia (d=1.11) and also cut paranoia and hallucinations, with sleep improvement mediating those gains. Indicates poor sleep helps cause psychotic experiences, so sleep treatment deserves higher priority in mental health services.

Full APA reference

Freeman, D., Sheaves, B., Goodwin, G. M., Yu, L. M., Nickless, A., Harrison, P. J., Emsley, R., Luik, A. I., Foster, R. G., Wadekar, V., Hinds, C., Gumley, A., Jones, R., Lightman, S., Jones, S., Bentall, R., Kinderman, P., Rowse, G., Brugha, T., … Espie, C. A. (2017). The effects of improving sleep on mental health (OASIS): a randomised controlled trial with mediation analysis. The Lancet. Psychiatry, 4(10), 749. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(17)30328-0
All fields
ID
REF-044
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Freeman, D., Sheaves, B., Goodwin, G. M., Yu, L. M., Nickless, A., Harrison, P. J., Emsley, R., Luik, A. I., Foster, R. G., Wadekar, V., Hinds, C., Gumley, A., Jones, R., Lightman, S., Jones, S., Bentall, R., Kinderman, P., Rowse, G., Brugha, T., … Espie, C. A
Year
2017
Title
The effects of improving sleep on mental health (OASIS): a randomised controlled trial with mediation analysis
Description
Randomised trial of 3,755 students with insomnia across 26 UK universities: digital cognitive behavioural therapy sharply reduced insomnia (d=1.11) and also cut paranoia and hallucinations, with sleep improvement mediating those gains. Indicates poor sleep helps cause psychotic experiences, so sleep treatment deserves higher priority in mental health services.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet. Psychiatry, 4(10), 749
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(17)30328-0
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(17)30328-0
Full APA reference
Freeman, D., Sheaves, B., Goodwin, G. M., Yu, L. M., Nickless, A., Harrison, P. J., Emsley, R., Luik, A. I., Foster, R. G., Wadekar, V., Hinds, C., Gumley, A., Jones, R., Lightman, S., Jones, S., Bentall, R., Kinderman, P., Rowse, G., Brugha, T., … Espie, C. A. (2017). The effects of improving sleep on mental health (OASIS): a randomised controlled trial with mediation analysis. The Lancet. Psychiatry, 4(10), 749. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(17)30328-0
REF-045 Paper, guideline or statement

New WHO guidance on mental health and well-being across government sectors

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Funk and colleagues describe the World Health Organization's 2025 collection, one overarching guidance plus twelve companion guides, for embedding mental health across ten government sectors including education, justice, employment and social protection. Eight steps run from policy dialogue to implementation, with principles on human rights, the life course, social determinants and lived experience participation.

Full APA reference

Funk, M., Drew, N., Cole, C., & Moro, M. F. (2026). New WHO guidance on mental health and well-being across government sectors. World Psychiatry, 25(1), 147-148. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70016

Verified publication date: 14 January 2026 (published online; issue date February 2026)

All fields
ID
REF-045
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Funk, M., Drew, N., Cole, C., & Moro, M. F.
Year
2026
Title
New WHO guidance on mental health and well-being across government sectors
Description
Funk and colleagues describe the World Health Organization's 2025 collection, one overarching guidance plus twelve companion guides, for embedding mental health across ten government sectors including education, justice, employment and social protection. Eight steps run from policy dialogue to implementation, with principles on human rights, the life course, social determinants and lived experience participation.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 25(1), 147-148
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12805070/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70016
Verification note
Verified publication date: 14 January 2026 (published online; issue date February 2026)
Full APA reference
Funk, M., Drew, N., Cole, C., & Moro, M. F. (2026). New WHO guidance on mental health and well-being across government sectors. World Psychiatry, 25(1), 147-148. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70016
REF-046 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise interventions are most consistently supported for depressive disorders: An umbrella review of diagnosed depressive and anxiety disorders

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Umbrella review of 9 reviews covering 89 unique primary studies found exercise consistently reduced symptoms in major depression (Hedges' g -0.79), while anxiety disorder evidence showed no clear benefit and most reviews were low or critically low quality. Supports prescribing exercise for depression while staying cautious for anxiety.

Full APA reference

Gao, Zhang, Ma, J., & Lyu, Z. (2026). Exercise interventions are most consistently supported for depressive disorders: An umbrella review of diagnosed depressive and anxiety disorders. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1871522. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1871522

Verified publication date: 3 July 2026 (page metadata datePublished 2026-07-03)

All fields
ID
REF-046
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gao, Zhang, Ma, J., & Lyu, Z.
Year
2026
Title
Exercise interventions are most consistently supported for depressive disorders: An umbrella review of diagnosed depressive and anxiety disorders
Description
Umbrella review of 9 reviews covering 89 unique primary studies found exercise consistently reduced symptoms in major depression (Hedges' g -0.79), while anxiety disorder evidence showed no clear benefit and most reviews were low or critically low quality. Supports prescribing exercise for depression while staying cautious for anxiety.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1871522
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/psychiatry/articles/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1871522/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1871522
Verification note
Verified publication date: 3 July 2026 (page metadata datePublished 2026-07-03)
Full APA reference
Gao, Zhang, Ma, J., & Lyu, Z. (2026). Exercise interventions are most consistently supported for depressive disorders: An umbrella review of diagnosed depressive and anxiety disorders. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1871522. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1871522
REF-047 Paper, guideline or statement

Unhealthy lifestyle behaviours and psychological distress: A longitudinal study of Australian adults aged 45 years and older

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Longitudinal analysis of 163,707 Australians aged 45 and older in the 45 and Up Study found people reporting five unhealthy behaviours had 2.4 times the odds of high psychological distress at follow up, rising to 3.0 times with six or more. Supports tackling clustered behaviours together.

Full APA reference

George, E. S., Davidson, I., El Masri, A., Meade, T., & Kolt, G. S. (2022). Unhealthy lifestyle behaviours and psychological distress: A longitudinal study of Australian adults aged 45 years and older. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 19(7), 4399. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph19074399
All fields
ID
REF-047
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
George, E. S., Davidson, I., El Masri, A., Meade, T., & Kolt, G. S
Year
2022
Title
Unhealthy lifestyle behaviours and psychological distress: A longitudinal study of Australian adults aged 45 years and older
Description
Longitudinal analysis of 163,707 Australians aged 45 and older in the 45 and Up Study found people reporting five unhealthy behaviours had 2.4 times the odds of high psychological distress at follow up, rising to 3.0 times with six or more. Supports tackling clustered behaviours together.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 19(7), 4399
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph19074399
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph19074399
Related items
REF-451
Full APA reference
George, E. S., Davidson, I., El Masri, A., Meade, T., & Kolt, G. S. (2022). Unhealthy lifestyle behaviours and psychological distress: A longitudinal study of Australian adults aged 45 years and older. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 19(7), 4399. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph19074399
REF-048 Paper, guideline or statement

Preventive Health SA

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

South Australia's prevention agency works across obesity prevention, alcohol and other drugs, tobacco and vaping, and mental health and wellbeing, publishing strategies such as the Walking Strategy 2022 to 2032. Its levers include banning unhealthy food advertising on government buses and trains, Health in All Policies work with councils, and suicide prevention community grants.

Full APA reference

Government of South Australia. (n.d.). Preventive Health SA. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
All fields
ID
REF-048
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Government of South Australia
Year
n.d.
Title
Preventive Health SA
Description
South Australia's prevention agency works across obesity prevention, alcohol and other drugs, tobacco and vaping, and mental health and wellbeing, publishing strategies such as the Walking Strategy 2022 to 2032. Its levers include banning unhealthy food advertising on government buses and trains, Health in All Policies work with councils, and suicide prevention community grants.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Government of South Australia. (n.d.). Preventive Health SA. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
REF-049 Paper, guideline or statement

State Public Health Plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, Liveable, Connected

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Made under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011, the 2026 plan names five priority areas: infectious disease control, healthy living to reduce chronic disease, mental health and wellbeing, injury reduction and healthy environments. Councils must review regional public health plans every five years and report to the Chief Public Health Officer biennially.

Full APA reference

Government of South Australia. (2026). State public health plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, liveable, connected. SA Health. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan

Preventive health strategy. Operative period: From 2026, next statutory cycle. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Resource page titled "SA State Public Health Plan 2026" and states the Plan was co-developed with public health stakeholders; the linked PDF is named "State Public Health Plan_2026 FINAL"

All fields
ID
REF-049
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Government of South Australia, SA Health
Year
2026
Title
State Public Health Plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, Liveable, Connected
Description
Made under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011, the 2026 plan names five priority areas: infectious disease control, healthy living to reduce chronic disease, mental health and wellbeing, injury reduction and healthy environments. Councils must review regional public health plans every five years and report to the Chief Public Health Officer biennially.
Publication or publisher
Government of South Australia, SA Health
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/resources/sa+state+public+health+plan+2026
Verification note
Preventive health strategy. Operative period: From 2026, next statutory cycle. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Resource page titled "SA State Public Health Plan 2026" and states the Plan was co-developed with public health stakeholders; the linked PDF is named "State Public Health Plan_2026 FINAL"
Related items
GOV-123
Full APA reference
Government of South Australia. (2026). *State public health plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, liveable, connected*. SA Health. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan
Same document as
GOV-123
REF-050 Paper, guideline or statement

Health and Wellbeing Queensland Strategic Plan 2023-2027

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Health and Wellbeing Queensland's 2023 to 2027 plan sets five objectives: make a healthier Queensland, champion prevention, drive systems change, commit to impact and thrive together. Strategies include intensive prevention delivery in priority regions, advancing health equity with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, and creating healthier places where Queenslanders live, learn, work and play.

Full APA reference

Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2026). Health and Wellbeing Queensland strategic plan 2023-27 (April 2026 review). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/HWQld_Strategic_Plan_2023-27_APRIL_26.pdf

Preventive health strategy. Operative period: 2023-2027, reviewed April 2026. Status: Current. Evidence on page: PDF states "This strategic plan was reviewed in April 2026 and remains current for the reporting period 2026-2027"

All fields
ID
REF-050
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Year
2023
Title
Health and Wellbeing Queensland Strategic Plan 2023-2027
Description
Health and Wellbeing Queensland's 2023 to 2027 plan sets five objectives: make a healthier Queensland, champion prevention, drive systems change, commit to impact and thrive together. Strategies include intensive prevention delivery in priority regions, advancing health equity with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, and creating healthier places where Queenslanders live, learn, work and play.
Publication or publisher
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://hw.qld.gov.au/about-us/strategic-plan/
Verification note
Preventive health strategy. Operative period: 2023-2027, reviewed April 2026. Status: Current. Evidence on page: PDF states "This strategic plan was reviewed in April 2026 and remains current for the reporting period 2026-2027"
Related items
GOV-087
Full APA reference
Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2026). *Health and Wellbeing Queensland strategic plan 2023-27* (April 2026 review). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/HWQld_Strategic_Plan_2023-27_APRIL_26.pdf
Same document as
GOV-087
REF-051 Paper, guideline or statement

Making healthy happen

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Queensland's prevention agency uses this site to push nutrition, physical activity and wellbeing, offering free recipes, workouts, professional development and referral pathways for clinicians. Its October 2025 benchmarking found only 32% of Queenslanders ate five serves of fruit and vegetables in a day that week, framing the case for small habit changes.

Full APA reference

Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (n.d.). Making healthy happen. https://hw.qld.gov.au/
All fields
ID
REF-051
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Year
n.d.
Title
Making healthy happen
Description
Queensland's prevention agency uses this site to push nutrition, physical activity and wellbeing, offering free recipes, workouts, professional development and referral pathways for clinicians. Its October 2025 benchmarking found only 32% of Queenslanders ate five serves of fruit and vegetables in a day that week, framing the case for small habit changes.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://hw.qld.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (n.d.). Making healthy happen. https://hw.qld.gov.au/
REF-052 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise as medicine for depressive symptoms? A systematic review and meta-analysis with meta-regression

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 41 randomised trials with 2,264 adults found exercise produced large reductions in depressive symptoms (SMD -0.95, number needed to treat 2), with effects moderate but still clear in the 12 low risk of bias trials. Backs exercise as a core depression treatment rather than an optional extra.

Full APA reference

Heissel, A., Heinen, D., Brokmeier, L. L., Skarabis, N., Kangas, M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Ward, P. B., Rosenbaum, S., Hallgren, M., & Schuch, F. (2023). Exercise as medicine for depressive symptoms? A systematic review and meta-analysis with meta-regression. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 57(16), 1049. https://doi.org/10.1136/BJSPORTS-2022-106282
All fields
ID
REF-052
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Heissel, A., Heinen, D., Brokmeier, L. L., Skarabis, N., Kangas, M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Ward, P. B., Rosenbaum, S., Hallgren, M., & Schuch, F
Year
2023
Title
Exercise as medicine for depressive symptoms? A systematic review and meta-analysis with meta-regression
Description
Meta-analysis of 41 randomised trials with 2,264 adults found exercise produced large reductions in depressive symptoms (SMD -0.95, number needed to treat 2), with effects moderate but still clear in the 12 low risk of bias trials. Backs exercise as a core depression treatment rather than an optional extra.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, 57(16), 1049
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/BJSPORTS-2022-106282
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/BJSPORTS-2022-106282
Full APA reference
Heissel, A., Heinen, D., Brokmeier, L. L., Skarabis, N., Kangas, M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Firth, J., Ward, P. B., Rosenbaum, S., Hallgren, M., & Schuch, F. (2023). Exercise as medicine for depressive symptoms? A systematic review and meta-analysis with meta-regression. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 57(16), 1049. https://doi.org/10.1136/BJSPORTS-2022-106282
REF-053 Paper, guideline or statement

Enhancing Mental Health, Well-Being and Active Lifestyles of University Students by Means of Physical Activity and Exercise Research Programs

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Review plus early results from five intervention studies in Ulm University's Anem Fit&Well project with healthy German students, indicating regular exercise and even single low to moderate intensity bouts buffer perceived stress and ease depressive and anxiety symptoms. Argues universities should build movement into student wellbeing and prevention programs.

Full APA reference

Herbert, C. (2022). Enhancing Mental Health, Well-Being and Active Lifestyles of University Students by Means of Physical Activity and Exercise Research Programs. Frontiers in Public Health, 10. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2022.849093
All fields
ID
REF-053
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Herbert, C
Year
2022
Title
Enhancing Mental Health, Well-Being and Active Lifestyles of University Students by Means of Physical Activity and Exercise Research Programs
Description
Review plus early results from five intervention studies in Ulm University's Anem Fit&Well project with healthy German students, indicating regular exercise and even single low to moderate intensity bouts buffer perceived stress and ease depressive and anxiety symptoms. Argues universities should build movement into student wellbeing and prevention programs.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 10
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2022.849093
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2022.849093
Related items
REF-449
Full APA reference
Herbert, C. (2022). Enhancing Mental Health, Well-Being and Active Lifestyles of University Students by Means of Physical Activity and Exercise Research Programs. Frontiers in Public Health, 10. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2022.849093
REF-054 Paper, guideline or statement

iyarn for You!

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Product page for iyarn, an online check in tool, free to trial, where individuals, teams, schools and families rate self chosen life areas on a numerical scale, add notes and track change over time. Offers a simple structured way to make wellbeing conversations and self monitoring routine.

Full APA reference

iyarn. (n.d.). iyarn for You! Retrieved May 17, 2025, from https://iyarn.com/iyarn-for-you/
All fields
ID
REF-054
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
iyarn
Year
n.d.
Title
iyarn for You!
Description
Product page for iyarn, an online check in tool, free to trial, where individuals, teams, schools and families rate self chosen life areas on a numerical scale, add notes and track change over time. Offers a simple structured way to make wellbeing conversations and self monitoring routine.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Other or unspecified
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://iyarn.com/iyarn-for-you/
Full APA reference
iyarn. (n.d.). iyarn for You! Retrieved May 17, 2025, from https://iyarn.com/iyarn-for-you/
REF-055 Paper, guideline or statement

Promoting brain health through exercise and diet in older adults: a physiological perspective

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Physiology focused review arguing that physical activity, mental stimulation and a Mediterranean style diet build brain, cerebrovascular and cognitive reserve in older adults, helping preserve thinking skills for longer. Explains the biological mechanisms behind lifestyle advice for ageing clients and for reducing dementia risk.

Full APA reference

Jackson, P. A., Pialoux, V., Corbett, D., Drogos, L., Erickson, K. I., Eskes, G. A., & Poulin, M. J. (2016). Promoting brain health through exercise and diet in older adults: a physiological perspective. Journal of Physiology, 594(16), 4485–4498. https://doi.org/10.1113/JP271270
All fields
ID
REF-055
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Jackson, P. A., Pialoux, V., Corbett, D., Drogos, L., Erickson, K. I., Eskes, G. A., & Poulin, M. J
Year
2016
Title
Promoting brain health through exercise and diet in older adults: a physiological perspective
Description
Physiology focused review arguing that physical activity, mental stimulation and a Mediterranean style diet build brain, cerebrovascular and cognitive reserve in older adults, helping preserve thinking skills for longer. Explains the biological mechanisms behind lifestyle advice for ageing clients and for reducing dementia risk.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Physiology, 594(16), 4485–4498
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1113/JP271270
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1113/JP271270
Full APA reference
Jackson, P. A., Pialoux, V., Corbett, D., Drogos, L., Erickson, K. I., Eskes, G. A., & Poulin, M. J. (2016). Promoting brain health through exercise and diet in older adults: a physiological perspective. Journal of Physiology, 594(16), 4485–4498. https://doi.org/10.1113/JP271270
REF-056 Paper, guideline or statement

Barriers and facilitators to lifestyle risk communication by Australian general practice nurses

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Interview study with 15 registered nurses in general practices in south eastern Australia identified six influences on discussing lifestyle risk, including training and confidence, funding arrangements, competing priorities, organisational support and role autonomy. Shows prevention conversations need protected time, payment and education, not just willing staff.

Full APA reference

James, S., Halcomb, E., Desborough, J., & McInnes, S. (2021). Barriers and facilitators to lifestyle risk communication by Australian general practice nurses. Australian Journal of Primary Health, 27(1), 30–35. https://doi.org/10.1071/PY20139
All fields
ID
REF-056
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
James, S., Halcomb, E., Desborough, J., & McInnes, S
Year
2021
Title
Barriers and facilitators to lifestyle risk communication by Australian general practice nurses
Description
Interview study with 15 registered nurses in general practices in south eastern Australia identified six influences on discussing lifestyle risk, including training and confidence, funding arrangements, competing priorities, organisational support and role autonomy. Shows prevention conversations need protected time, payment and education, not just willing staff.
Publication or publisher
Australian Journal of Primary Health, 27(1), 30–35
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1071/PY20139
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1071/PY20139
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
James, S., Halcomb, E., Desborough, J., & McInnes, S. (2021). Barriers and facilitators to lifestyle risk communication by Australian general practice nurses. Australian Journal of Primary Health, 27(1), 30–35. https://doi.org/10.1071/PY20139
REF-057 Paper, guideline or statement

Determinants of preferences for lifestyle changes versus medication and beliefs in ability to maintain lifestyle changes

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Survey of 1,069 Danes aged 40 to 60 imagining raised heart disease risk found 962 preferred lifestyle change over medication, yet lower education, existing risk factors and poorer health predicted weak belief in sustaining change. Reminds clinicians to build confidence and address circumstances, not just record a preference.

Full APA reference

Jarbøl, D. E., Larsen, P. V., Gyrd-Hansen, D., Søndergaard, J., Brandt, C., Leppin, A., Barfoed, B. L., & Nielsen, J. B. (2017). Determinants of preferences for lifestyle changes versus medication and beliefs in ability to maintain lifestyle changes. A population-based survey. Preventive Medicine Reports, 6, 66–73. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PMEDR.2017.02.010
All fields
ID
REF-057
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Jarbøl, D. E., Larsen, P. V., Gyrd-Hansen, D., Søndergaard, J., Brandt, C., Leppin, A., Barfoed, B. L., & Nielsen, J. B
Year
2017
Title
Determinants of preferences for lifestyle changes versus medication and beliefs in ability to maintain lifestyle changes
Description
Survey of 1,069 Danes aged 40 to 60 imagining raised heart disease risk found 962 preferred lifestyle change over medication, yet lower education, existing risk factors and poorer health predicted weak belief in sustaining change. Reminds clinicians to build confidence and address circumstances, not just record a preference.
Publication or publisher
A population-based survey. Preventive Medicine Reports, 6, 66–73
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PMEDR.2017.02.010
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PMEDR.2017.02.010
Full APA reference
Jarbøl, D. E., Larsen, P. V., Gyrd-Hansen, D., Søndergaard, J., Brandt, C., Leppin, A., Barfoed, B. L., & Nielsen, J. B. (2017). Determinants of preferences for lifestyle changes versus medication and beliefs in ability to maintain lifestyle changes. A population-based survey. Preventive Medicine Reports, 6, 66–73. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PMEDR.2017.02.010
REF-058 Paper, guideline or statement

Guidelines Recommending That Clinicians Advise Patients on Lifestyle Changes: A Popular but Questionable Approach to Improve Public Health

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Editorial arguing routine lifestyle counselling is weakly evidenced: of 379 UK guideline lifestyle recommendations only 3% had reliable evidence of benefit, and delivering them all would need about five times the current nursing workforce. Warns of stigma and lost consultation time, urging community and structural action instead.

Full APA reference

Johansson, M., Niklasson, A., Albarqouni, L., Jørgensen, K. J., Guyatt, G., & Montori, V. M. (2024). Guidelines Recommending That Clinicians Advise Patients on Lifestyle Changes: A Popular but Questionable Approach to Improve Public Health. Annals of Internal Medicine. https://doi.org/10.7326/annals-24-00283
All fields
ID
REF-058
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Johansson, M., Niklasson, A., Albarqouni, L., Jørgensen, K. J., Guyatt, G., & Montori, V. M
Year
2024
Title
Guidelines Recommending That Clinicians Advise Patients on Lifestyle Changes: A Popular but Questionable Approach to Improve Public Health
Description
Editorial arguing routine lifestyle counselling is weakly evidenced: of 379 UK guideline lifestyle recommendations only 3% had reliable evidence of benefit, and delivering them all would need about five times the current nursing workforce. Warns of stigma and lost consultation time, urging community and structural action instead.
Publication or publisher
Annals of Internal Medicine
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.7326/annals-24-00283
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.7326/annals-24-00283
Full APA reference
Johansson, M., Niklasson, A., Albarqouni, L., Jørgensen, K. J., Guyatt, G., & Montori, V. M. (2024). Guidelines Recommending That Clinicians Advise Patients on Lifestyle Changes: A Popular but Questionable Approach to Improve Public Health. Annals of Internal Medicine. https://doi.org/10.7326/annals-24-00283
REF-059 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle as Medicine: The Case for a True Health Initiative

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Commentary noting roughly 80% of chronic disease and premature death is preventable through not smoking, being active and eating well, and proposing a global coalition of experts to cut through conflicting nutrition messages. Makes the case for consistent, trusted public communication about lifestyle fundamentals.

Full APA reference

Katz, D. L., Frates, E. P., Bonnet, J. P., Gupta, S. K., Vartiainen, E., & Carmona, R. H. (2018). Lifestyle as Medicine: The Case for a True Health Initiative. American Journal of Health Promotion, 32(6), 1452–1458. https://doi.org/10.1177/0890117117705949
All fields
ID
REF-059
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Katz, D. L., Frates, E. P., Bonnet, J. P., Gupta, S. K., Vartiainen, E., & Carmona, R. H
Year
2018
Title
Lifestyle as Medicine: The Case for a True Health Initiative
Description
Commentary noting roughly 80% of chronic disease and premature death is preventable through not smoking, being active and eating well, and proposing a global coalition of experts to cut through conflicting nutrition messages. Makes the case for consistent, trusted public communication about lifestyle fundamentals.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Health Promotion, 32(6), 1452–1458
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/0890117117705949
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/0890117117705949
Full APA reference
Katz, D. L., Frates, E. P., Bonnet, J. P., Gupta, S. K., Vartiainen, E., & Carmona, R. H. (2018). Lifestyle as Medicine: The Case for a True Health Initiative. American Journal of Health Promotion, 32(6), 1452–1458. https://doi.org/10.1177/0890117117705949
REF-060 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine: the future of chronic disease management

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Review positioning lifestyle medicine as a systematic approach to chronic disease, noting that behaviour driven noncommunicable diseases account for about 63% of deaths worldwide while healthy living remains rare. Argues clinicians need specific competencies in behaviour change, diet, weight, stress, substance use and self management support.

Full APA reference

Kushner, R. F., & Sorensen, K. W. (2013). Lifestyle medicine: the future of chronic disease management. Current Opinion in Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Obesity, 20(5), 389–395. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.MED.0000433056.76699.5D
All fields
ID
REF-060
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Kushner, R. F., & Sorensen, K. W
Year
2013
Title
Lifestyle medicine: the future of chronic disease management
Description
Review positioning lifestyle medicine as a systematic approach to chronic disease, noting that behaviour driven noncommunicable diseases account for about 63% of deaths worldwide while healthy living remains rare. Argues clinicians need specific competencies in behaviour change, diet, weight, stress, substance use and self management support.
Publication or publisher
Current Opinion in Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Obesity, 20(5), 389–395
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1097/01.MED.0000433056.76699.5D
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/01.MED.0000433056.76699.5D
Full APA reference
Kushner, R. F., & Sorensen, K. W. (2013). Lifestyle medicine: the future of chronic disease management. Current Opinion in Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Obesity, 20(5), 389–395. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.MED.0000433056.76699.5D
REF-061 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed food exposure and adverse health outcomes: umbrella review of epidemiological meta-analyses

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

Umbrella review of 14 meta-analyses, 45 pooled analyses and 9.9 million participants linked higher ultra-processed food intake to increased risk of death, cardiovascular disease, type 2 diabetes, obesity, anxiety and common mental disorders. Strengthens the case for food policy that limits ultra-processed products, not just individual advice.

Full APA reference

Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Du, S., Ashtree, D. N., McGuinness, A. J., Gauci, S., Baker, P., Lawrence, M., Rebholz, C. M., Srour, B., Touvier, M., Jacka, F. N., O’Neil, A., Segasby, T., & Marx, W. (2024). Ultra-processed food exposure and adverse health outcomes: umbrella review of epidemiological meta-analyses. BMJ, 384. https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJ-2023-077310
All fields
ID
REF-061
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Du, S., Ashtree, D. N., McGuinness, A. J., Gauci, S., Baker, P., Lawrence, M., Rebholz, C. M., Srour, B., Touvier, M., Jacka, F. N., O’Neil, A., Segasby, T., & Marx, W
Year
2024
Title
Ultra-processed food exposure and adverse health outcomes: umbrella review of epidemiological meta-analyses
Description
Umbrella review of 14 meta-analyses, 45 pooled analyses and 9.9 million participants linked higher ultra-processed food intake to increased risk of death, cardiovascular disease, type 2 diabetes, obesity, anxiety and common mental disorders. Strengthens the case for food policy that limits ultra-processed products, not just individual advice.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 384
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJ-2023-077310
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJ-2023-077310
Full APA reference
Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Du, S., Ashtree, D. N., McGuinness, A. J., Gauci, S., Baker, P., Lawrence, M., Rebholz, C. M., Srour, B., Touvier, M., Jacka, F. N., O’Neil, A., Segasby, T., & Marx, W. (2024). Ultra-processed food exposure and adverse health outcomes: umbrella review of epidemiological meta-analyses. BMJ, 384. https://doi.org/10.1136/BMJ-2023-077310
REF-062 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed food consumption and mental health: A systematic review and meta-analysis of observational studies

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 17 observational studies with 385,541 participants across seven countries found higher ultra-processed food consumption was associated with greater odds of depressive and anxiety symptoms. Links everyday diet quality directly to mental health, supporting routine dietary questions in psychological assessment and care planning.

Full APA reference

Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Travica, N., Dissanayaka, T., Ashtree, D. N., Gauci, S., Lotfaliany, M., O’Neil, A., Jacka, F. N., & Marx, W. (2022). Ultra-processed food consumption and mental health: A systematic review and meta-analysis of observational studies. Nutrients, 14(13), 2568. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu14132568
All fields
ID
REF-062
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Travica, N., Dissanayaka, T., Ashtree, D. N., Gauci, S., Lotfaliany, M., O’Neil, A., Jacka, F. N., & Marx, W
Year
2022
Title
Ultra-processed food consumption and mental health: A systematic review and meta-analysis of observational studies
Description
Meta-analysis of 17 observational studies with 385,541 participants across seven countries found higher ultra-processed food consumption was associated with greater odds of depressive and anxiety symptoms. Links everyday diet quality directly to mental health, supporting routine dietary questions in psychological assessment and care planning.
Publication or publisher
Nutrients, 14(13), 2568
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3390/nu14132568
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/nu14132568
Full APA reference
Lane, M. M., Gamage, E., Travica, N., Dissanayaka, T., Ashtree, D. N., Gauci, S., Lotfaliany, M., O’Neil, A., Jacka, F. N., & Marx, W. (2022). Ultra-processed food consumption and mental health: A systematic review and meta-analysis of observational studies. Nutrients, 14(13), 2568. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu14132568
REF-063 Paper, guideline or statement

A multi-study investigation of social connectedness and health

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Social connection
  • General health

Three linked surveys of 486 students, 225 people with chronic illness and 280 adults found social connectedness independently predicted fewer physical symptoms and better health related quality of life, with stress partly explaining the link. Positions belonging as a health factor worth assessing alongside diet and exercise.

Full APA reference

Lange, L.J., Crawford, A.B. A multi-study investigation of social connectedness and health. Curr Psychol 43, 20014–20023 (2024). https://doi.org/10.1007/s12144-024-05791-2
All fields
ID
REF-063
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Lange, L. J., & Crawford, A. B.
Year
2024
Title
A multi-study investigation of social connectedness and health
Description
Three linked surveys of 486 students, 225 people with chronic illness and 280 adults found social connectedness independently predicted fewer physical symptoms and better health related quality of life, with stress partly explaining the link. Positions belonging as a health factor worth assessing alongside diet and exercise.
Publication or publisher
Current Psychology, 43, 20014-20023
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12144-024-05791-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12144-024-05791-2
Full APA reference
Lange, L.J., Crawford, A.B. A multi-study investigation of social connectedness and health. Curr Psychol 43, 20014–20023 (2024). https://doi.org/10.1007/s12144-024-05791-2
REF-064 Paper, guideline or statement

Role of exercise physiologists in mental health support and recovery: 2026 Exercise and Sports Science Australia (ESSA) Consensus Statement

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Consensus statement from 24 Australian experts, using a four step Delphi with 80% agreement across 12 items, sets six best-practice principles for exercise physiologists in mental health care, including trauma informed and recovery oriented practice. Gives services a workforce model for embedding exercise in multidisciplinary mental health teams.

Full APA reference

Lederman, O., Chapman, J., Fibbins, H., Haywood, D., Hart, N. H., Furzer, B., Wright, K., McKeon, G., Brinsley, J., Mastrogiovanni, C., Semaan, A., Llana, A., Stanton, R., & Rosenbaum, S. (2026). Role of exercise physiologists in mental health support and recovery: 2026 Exercise and Sports Science Australia (ESSA) Consensus Statement. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 60(8), 568-582. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-110879

Verified publication date: 31 March 2026

All fields
ID
REF-064
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lederman, O., Chapman, J., Fibbins, H., Haywood, D., Hart, N. H., Furzer, B., Wright, K., McKeon, G., Brinsley, J., Mastrogiovanni, C., Semaan, A., Llana, A., Stanton, R., & Rosenbaum, S. (Exercise and Sports Science Australia)
Year
2026
Title
Role of exercise physiologists in mental health support and recovery: 2026 Exercise and Sports Science Australia (ESSA) Consensus Statement
Description
Consensus statement from 24 Australian experts, using a four step Delphi with 80% agreement across 12 items, sets six best-practice principles for exercise physiologists in mental health care, including trauma informed and recovery oriented practice. Gives services a workforce model for embedding exercise in multidisciplinary mental health teams.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, 60(8), 568-582
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41850728/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-110879
Verification note
Verified publication date: 31 March 2026
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Lederman, O., Chapman, J., Fibbins, H., Haywood, D., Hart, N. H., Furzer, B., Wright, K., McKeon, G., Brinsley, J., Mastrogiovanni, C., Semaan, A., Llana, A., Stanton, R., & Rosenbaum, S. (2026). Role of exercise physiologists in mental health support and recovery: 2026 Exercise and Sports Science Australia (ESSA) Consensus Statement. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 60(8), 568-582. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-110879
REF-065 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical activity and nutrition in relation to resilience: a cross-sectional study

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Two German surveys of 685 and 625 adults found that regular physical activity and nutritional awareness were linked to higher life satisfaction and weakened the negative effect of stress on it. Supports treating everyday eating and movement habits as resilience resources, not only physical health behaviours.

Full APA reference

Leipold, B., Klier, K., Dapperger, E., & Schmidt, A. (2024). Physical activity and nutrition in relation to resilience: a cross-sectional study. Scientific Reports 2024 14:1, 14(1), 1–11. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-024-52753-6
All fields
ID
REF-065
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Leipold, B., Klier, K., Dapperger, E., & Schmidt, A
Year
2024
Title
Physical activity and nutrition in relation to resilience: a cross-sectional study
Description
Two German surveys of 685 and 625 adults found that regular physical activity and nutritional awareness were linked to higher life satisfaction and weakened the negative effect of stress on it. Supports treating everyday eating and movement habits as resilience resources, not only physical health behaviours.
Publication or publisher
Scientific Reports 2024 14:1, 14(1), 1–11
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-024-52753-6
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-024-52753-6
Full APA reference
Leipold, B., Klier, K., Dapperger, E., & Schmidt, A. (2024). Physical activity and nutrition in relation to resilience: a cross-sectional study. Scientific Reports 2024 14:1, 14(1), 1–11. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-024-52753-6
REF-066 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of mind-body exercises on depressive symptoms in older adults: A comprehensive umbrella review of the evidence

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Umbrella review of 25 systematic reviews covering over 20,000 people aged 60 and older found tai chi, yoga and qigong moderately reduced depressive symptoms, pooled effect size 0.51. Points to low cost, low risk group activities that clinicians can recommend to older clients alongside usual care.

Full APA reference

Li, F., Li, Q., Huang, J., Li, X., & Lu, Z. (2026). Effects of mind-body exercises on depressive symptoms in older adults: A comprehensive umbrella review of the evidence. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1806563. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1806563

Verified publication date: 7 May 2026

All fields
ID
REF-066
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Li, F., Li, Q., Huang, J., Li, X., & Lu, Z.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of mind-body exercises on depressive symptoms in older adults: A comprehensive umbrella review of the evidence
Description
Umbrella review of 25 systematic reviews covering over 20,000 people aged 60 and older found tai chi, yoga and qigong moderately reduced depressive symptoms, pooled effect size 0.51. Points to low cost, low risk group activities that clinicians can recommend to older clients alongside usual care.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1806563
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/psychology/articles/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1806563/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1806563
Verification note
Verified publication date: 7 May 2026
Related items
REF-507; REF-572
Full APA reference
Li, F., Li, Q., Huang, J., Li, X., & Lu, Z. (2026). Effects of mind-body exercises on depressive symptoms in older adults: A comprehensive umbrella review of the evidence. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1806563. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1806563
REF-067 Paper, guideline or statement

Positive Psychology in Lifestyle Medicine and Health Care: Strategies for Implementation

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Implementation article from the first Summit on Happiness Science in Healthcare, setting out how positive psychology can be built into clinical conversations, treatment plans, staff wellbeing programs, medical education and research. Offers concrete steps for adding emotional wellbeing to lifestyle medicine practice rather than leaving it optional.

Full APA reference

Lianov, L. S., Fredrickson, B. L., Barron, C., Krishnaswami, J., & Wallace, A. (2019). Positive Psychology in Lifestyle Medicine and Health Care: Strategies for Implementation. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 13(5), 480. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827619838992
All fields
ID
REF-067
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Lianov, L. S., Fredrickson, B. L., Barron, C., Krishnaswami, J., & Wallace, A
Year
2019
Title
Positive Psychology in Lifestyle Medicine and Health Care: Strategies for Implementation
Description
Implementation article from the first Summit on Happiness Science in Healthcare, setting out how positive psychology can be built into clinical conversations, treatment plans, staff wellbeing programs, medical education and research. Offers concrete steps for adding emotional wellbeing to lifestyle medicine practice rather than leaving it optional.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 13(5), 480
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827619838992
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827619838992
Full APA reference
Lianov, L. S., Fredrickson, B. L., Barron, C., Krishnaswami, J., & Wallace, A. (2019). Positive Psychology in Lifestyle Medicine and Health Care: Strategies for Implementation. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 13(5), 480. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827619838992
REF-068 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of physical activity interventions on mental health in children and adolescents: A systematic review and meta-analysis of intervention type and baseline risk as moderators

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 24 physical activity trials in children and adolescents found a small mental health benefit, effect size 0.19, rising to 0.31 among young people already at psychological risk and for mind body programs. Supports targeting school and community activity programs at higher risk groups.

Full APA reference

Liu, Q., Xu, Z., Tai, P., Lian, Z., Cheng, W., & Zhang, J. (2026). Effects of physical activity interventions on mental health in children and adolescents: A systematic review and meta-analysis of intervention type and baseline risk as moderators. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1825603. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1825603

Verified publication date: 29 May 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 May 29")

All fields
ID
REF-068
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Liu, Q., Xu, Z., Tai, P., Lian, Z., Cheng, W., & Zhang, J.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of physical activity interventions on mental health in children and adolescents: A systematic review and meta-analysis of intervention type and baseline risk as moderators
Description
Meta-analysis of 24 physical activity trials in children and adolescents found a small mental health benefit, effect size 0.19, rising to 0.31 among young people already at psychological risk and for mind body programs. Supports targeting school and community activity programs at higher risk groups.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1825603
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42293965/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1825603
Verification note
Verified publication date: 29 May 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 May 29")
Full APA reference
Liu, Q., Xu, Z., Tai, P., Lian, Z., Cheng, W., & Zhang, J. (2026). Effects of physical activity interventions on mental health in children and adolescents: A systematic review and meta-analysis of intervention type and baseline risk as moderators. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1825603. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1825603
REF-069 Paper, guideline or statement

The health economics of social prescribing: Systematic review of the international evidence

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Systematic review of 18 international economic evaluations of social prescribing, 9 of them British, found schemes such as exercise referral, community singing and chair yoga were generally cost-effective, though methods were inconsistent and rarely used standard health economics. Useful for commissioners weighing investment in non-medical community supports.

Full APA reference

Lynch, M., Keating, A. J., Morrow, E., & Spencer, L. H. (2026). The health economics of social prescribing: Systematic review of the international evidence. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1753435. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1753435

Verified publication date: 28 January 2026

All fields
ID
REF-069
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lynch, M., Keating, A. J., Morrow, E., & Spencer, L. H.
Year
2026
Title
The health economics of social prescribing: Systematic review of the international evidence
Description
Systematic review of 18 international economic evaluations of social prescribing, 9 of them British, found schemes such as exercise referral, community singing and chair yoga were generally cost-effective, though methods were inconsistent and rarely used standard health economics. Useful for commissioners weighing investment in non-medical community supports.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1753435
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/public-health/articles/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1753435/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1753435
Verification note
Verified publication date: 28 January 2026
Related items
REF-485
Full APA reference
Lynch, M., Keating, A. J., Morrow, E., & Spencer, L. H. (2026). The health economics of social prescribing: Systematic review of the international evidence. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, 1753435. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1753435
REF-070 Paper, guideline or statement

The 2020 Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists clinical practice guidelines for mood disorders

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Clinical practice guidelines from the Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists covering depressive and bipolar disorders, updating the 2015 edition with evidence plus expert consensus for psychiatrists, psychologists and GPs. Sets the regional standard against which lifestyle additions to mood disorder treatment are judged.

Full APA reference

Malhi, G. S., Bell, E., Bassett, D., Boyce, P., Bryant, R., Hazell, P., Hopwood, M., Lyndon, B., Mulder, R., Porter, R., Singh, A. B., & Murray, G. (2021). The 2020 Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists clinical practice guidelines for mood disorders. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55(1), 7–117. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420979353
All fields
ID
REF-070
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Malhi, G. S., Bell, E., Bassett, D., Boyce, P., Bryant, R., Hazell, P., Hopwood, M., Lyndon, B., Mulder, R., Porter, R., Singh, A. B., & Murray, G
Year
2021
Title
The 2020 Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists clinical practice guidelines for mood disorders
Description
Clinical practice guidelines from the Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists covering depressive and bipolar disorders, updating the 2015 edition with evidence plus expert consensus for psychiatrists, psychologists and GPs. Sets the regional standard against which lifestyle additions to mood disorder treatment are judged.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55(1), 7–117
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420979353
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420979353
Related items
REF-073; REF-301; REF-252; REF-041; GOV-020
Full APA reference
Malhi, G. S., Bell, E., Bassett, D., Boyce, P., Bryant, R., Hazell, P., Hopwood, M., Lyndon, B., Mulder, R., Porter, R., Singh, A. B., & Murray, G. (2021). The 2020 Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists clinical practice guidelines for mood disorders. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55(1), 7–117. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420979353
REF-071 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle interventions for mental health

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Clinical review for Australian general practitioners summarising evidence on nutrition, physical activity, sleep, smoking cessation, reduced alcohol and drug use, and stress management in mental illness, noting anxiety disorders affect 14.4% of adults yearly. Positions GPs as the practical starting point for lifestyle change with mentally unwell patients.

Full APA reference

Manger, S. (2019). Lifestyle interventions for mental health. Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 670–673. https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-06-19-4964
All fields
ID
REF-071
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Manger, S
Year
2019
Title
Lifestyle interventions for mental health
Description
Clinical review for Australian general practitioners summarising evidence on nutrition, physical activity, sleep, smoking cessation, reduced alcohol and drug use, and stress management in mental illness, noting anxiety disorders affect 14.4% of adults yearly. Positions GPs as the practical starting point for lifestyle change with mentally unwell patients.
Publication or publisher
Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 670–673
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-06-19-4964
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-06-19-4964
Full APA reference
Manger, S. (2019). Lifestyle interventions for mental health. Australian Journal of General Practice, 48(10), 670–673. https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-06-19-4964
REF-072 Paper, guideline or statement

Health equity in England: The Marmot Review 10 years on

  • Report or review
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Review of health inequalities in England a decade after the 2010 Marmot Review, finding life expectancy stalled for the first time in over 100 years and fell for women in the poorest 10% of areas. Core evidence that social and economic conditions, not individual choices alone, drive health gaps.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M., Allen, J., Boyce, T., Goldblatt, P., & Morrison, J. (2020). Health equity in England: The Marmot Review 10 years on. Institute of Health Equity. https://www.health.org.uk/publications/reports/the-marmot-review-10-years-on
All fields
ID
REF-072
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Marmot, M., Allen, J., Boyce, T., Goldblatt, P., & Morrison, J
Year
2020
Title
Health equity in England: The Marmot Review 10 years on
Description
Review of health inequalities in England a decade after the 2010 Marmot Review, finding life expectancy stalled for the first time in over 100 years and fell for women in the poorest 10% of areas. Core evidence that social and economic conditions, not individual choices alone, drive health gaps.
Publication or publisher
Institute of Health Equity
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.org.uk/publications/reports/the-marmot-review-10-years-on
Full APA reference
Marmot, M., Allen, J., Boyce, T., Goldblatt, P., & Morrison, J. (2020). Health equity in England: The Marmot Review 10 years on. Institute of Health Equity. https://www.health.org.uk/publications/reports/the-marmot-review-10-years-on
REF-073 Paper, guideline or statement

Clinical guidelines for the use of lifestyle-based mental health care in major depressive disorder: World Federation of Societies for Biological Psychiatry (WFSBP) and Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine (ASLM) taskforce

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

International guidelines from a taskforce spanning nine countries, agreed through two Delphi rounds needing over 80% consensus, on using exercise, diet, sleep, smoking cessation, stress management, work, social support and green space in adults with major depression. First global standard for prescribing lifestyle care in depression.

Full APA reference

Marx, W., Manger, S. H., Blencowe, M., Murray, G., Ho, F. Y. Y., Lawn, S., … O’Neil, A. (2022). Clinical guidelines for the use of lifestyle-based mental health care in major depressive disorder: World Federation of Societies for Biological Psychiatry (WFSBP) and Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine (ASLM) taskforce. The World Journal of Biological Psychiatry, 24(5), 333–386. https://doi.org/10.1080/15622975.2022.2112074

Title and corporate author are reproduced as published in 2022. The society now trades as the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine.

All fields
ID
REF-073
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Marx, W., Manger, S. H., Blencowe, M., Murray, G., Ho, F. Y. Y., Lawn, S., … O’Neil, A
Year
2022
Title
Clinical guidelines for the use of lifestyle-based mental health care in major depressive disorder: World Federation of Societies for Biological Psychiatry (WFSBP) and Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine (ASLM) taskforce
Description
International guidelines from a taskforce spanning nine countries, agreed through two Delphi rounds needing over 80% consensus, on using exercise, diet, sleep, smoking cessation, stress management, work, social support and green space in adults with major depression. First global standard for prescribing lifestyle care in depression.
Publication or publisher
The World Journal of Biological Psychiatry, 24(5), 333–386
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://doi.org/10.1080/15622975.2022.2112074
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/15622975.2022.2112074
Verification note
Title and corporate author are reproduced as published in 2022. The society now trades as the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine.
Related items
REF-041; REF-166; REF-391; REF-448
Full APA reference
Marx, W., Manger, S. H., Blencowe, M., Murray, G., Ho, F. Y. Y., Lawn, S., … O’Neil, A. (2022). Clinical guidelines for the use of lifestyle-based mental health care in major depressive disorder: World Federation of Societies for Biological Psychiatry (WFSBP) and Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine (ASLM) taskforce. The World Journal of Biological Psychiatry, 24(5), 333–386. https://doi.org/10.1080/15622975.2022.2112074
REF-074 Paper, guideline or statement

The risk associated with ultra-processed food intake on depressive symptoms and mental health in older adults: A target trial emulation

  • Journal article
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Target trial emulation of 11,192 Australian adults aged 70 and over in the ASPREE study found those eating four or more daily servings of ultra-processed food had a 10% higher risk of depressive symptoms over roughly six years. Strengthens the case for asking older clients about food quality.

Full APA reference

Mengist, B., Lotfaliany, M., Pasco, J. A., Agustini, B., Berk, M., Forbes, M., Lane, M. M., Orchard, S. G., Ryan, J., Owen, A. J., Woods, R. L., McNeil, J. J., & Mohebbi, M. (2025). The risk associated with ultra-processed food intake on depressive symptoms and mental health in older adults: A target trial emulation. BMC Medicine, 23, 172. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-025-04002-4
All fields
ID
REF-074
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Mengist, B., Lotfaliany, M., Pasco, J. A., Agustini, B., Berk, M., Forbes, M., Lane, M. M., Orchard, S. G., Ryan, J., Owen, A. J., Woods, R. L., McNeil, J. J., & Mohebbi, M
Year
2025
Title
The risk associated with ultra-processed food intake on depressive symptoms and mental health in older adults: A target trial emulation
Description
Target trial emulation of 11,192 Australian adults aged 70 and over in the ASPREE study found those eating four or more daily servings of ultra-processed food had a 10% higher risk of depressive symptoms over roughly six years. Strengthens the case for asking older clients about food quality.
Publication or publisher
BMC Medicine, 23, 172
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-025-04002-4
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-025-04002-4
Full APA reference
Mengist, B., Lotfaliany, M., Pasco, J. A., Agustini, B., Berk, M., Forbes, M., Lane, M. M., Orchard, S. G., Ryan, J., Owen, A. J., Woods, R. L., McNeil, J. J., & Mohebbi, M. (2025). The risk associated with ultra-processed food intake on depressive symptoms and mental health in older adults: A target trial emulation. BMC Medicine, 23, 172. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-025-04002-4
REF-075 Paper, guideline or statement

Stronger Together: A Path Towards an EU Mental Health Strategy For All

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Policy statement from Mental Health Europe calling for a binding EU Mental Health Strategy for 2027 to 2037 as the 2023 approach and its 20 initiatives wind down, with mental ill health costing over 600 billion euro yearly. Five priorities include prevention and community based care.

Full APA reference

Mental Health Europe. (2026, May 4). Stronger together: A path towards an EU mental health strategy for all [Policy brief]. https://www.mentalhealtheurope.org/statement-stronger-together-a-path-towards-a-eu-mental-health-strategy-for-all/

Verified publication date: 4 May 2026

All fields
ID
REF-075
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mental Health Europe
Year
2026
Title
Stronger Together: A Path Towards an EU Mental Health Strategy For All
Description
Policy statement from Mental Health Europe calling for a binding EU Mental Health Strategy for 2027 to 2037 as the 2023 approach and its 20 initiatives wind down, with mental ill health costing over 600 billion euro yearly. Five priorities include prevention and community based care.
Publication or publisher
Mental Health Europe
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
European Union
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.mentalhealtheurope.org/statement-stronger-together-a-path-towards-a-eu-mental-health-strategy-for-all/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 4 May 2026
Full APA reference
Mental Health Europe. (2026, May 4). Stronger together: A path towards an EU mental health strategy for all [Policy brief]. https://www.mentalhealtheurope.org/statement-stronger-together-a-path-towards-a-eu-mental-health-strategy-for-all/
REF-076 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle psychiatry: Evidence-based lifestyle interventions for mental and physical health

  • Web resource
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Clinical commentary introducing lifestyle psychiatry to practising clinicians, covering six pillars of nutrition, sleep, exercise, relationships, stress and substance use, and citing emerging guidance from Australasia, Britain and the United States. Accessible orientation piece for clinicians new to prescribing lifestyle change alongside medication and therapy.

Full APA reference

Merlo, G., & Sugden, S. G. (2024). Lifestyle psychiatry: Evidence-based lifestyle interventions for mental and physical health. Psychiatric Times. Retrieved from https://www.psychiatrictimes.com/view/lifestyle-psychiatry-evidence-based-lifestyle-interventions-for-mental-and-physical-health
All fields
ID
REF-076
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Merlo, G., & Sugden, S. G
Year
2024
Title
Lifestyle psychiatry: Evidence-based lifestyle interventions for mental and physical health
Description
Clinical commentary introducing lifestyle psychiatry to practising clinicians, covering six pillars of nutrition, sleep, exercise, relationships, stress and substance use, and citing emerging guidance from Australasia, Britain and the United States. Accessible orientation piece for clinicians new to prescribing lifestyle change alongside medication and therapy.
Publication or publisher
Psychiatric Times
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Other
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Other or unspecified
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.psychiatrictimes.com/view/lifestyle-psychiatry-evidence-based-lifestyle-interventions-for-mental-and-physical-health
Full APA reference
Merlo, G., & Sugden, S. G. (2024). Lifestyle psychiatry: Evidence-based lifestyle interventions for mental and physical health. Psychiatric Times. Retrieved from https://www.psychiatrictimes.com/view/lifestyle-psychiatry-evidence-based-lifestyle-interventions-for-mental-and-physical-health
REF-077 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental Health in Lifestyle Medicine: A Call to Action

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Call to action arguing lifestyle medicine should treat mental health as central rather than incidental, reviewing evidence across all six pillars and noting one in five American adults experiences a mental disorder. Frames the two way link between lifestyle and mental health as a core professional responsibility.

Full APA reference

Merlo, G., & Vela, A. (2022). Mental Health in Lifestyle Medicine: A Call to Action. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(1), 7–20. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276211013313
All fields
ID
REF-077
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Merlo, G., & Vela, A
Year
2022
Title
Mental Health in Lifestyle Medicine: A Call to Action
Description
Call to action arguing lifestyle medicine should treat mental health as central rather than incidental, reviewing evidence across all six pillars and noting one in five American adults experiences a mental disorder. Frames the two way link between lifestyle and mental health as a core professional responsibility.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(1), 7–20
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276211013313
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276211013313
Full APA reference
Merlo, G., & Vela, A. (2022). Mental Health in Lifestyle Medicine: A Call to Action. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(1), 7–20. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276211013313
REF-078 Paper, guideline or statement

Perceptions of mental health professionals on nutritional psychiatry as an adjunct treatment in mainstream psychiatric settings in New South Wales, Australia

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Survey of 40 mental health professionals in New South Wales found 85 to 93% considered nutrition important for mental health, yet 54% rated their own knowledge low and 43% had no nutrition teaching in training, while 92% wanted further education. Identifies a clear workforce training gap.

Full APA reference

Minhas, J., & Mcbride, J. C. (2024). Perceptions of mental health professionals on nutritional psychiatry as an adjunct treatment in mainstream psychiatric settings in New South Wales, Australia. Cureus, 16(3), e56906. https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.56906
All fields
ID
REF-078
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Minhas, J., & Mcbride, J. C
Year
2024
Title
Perceptions of mental health professionals on nutritional psychiatry as an adjunct treatment in mainstream psychiatric settings in New South Wales, Australia
Description
Survey of 40 mental health professionals in New South Wales found 85 to 93% considered nutrition important for mental health, yet 54% rated their own knowledge low and 43% had no nutrition teaching in training, while 92% wanted further education. Identifies a clear workforce training gap.
Publication or publisher
Cureus, 16(3), e56906
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.56906
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.56906
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Minhas, J., & Mcbride, J. C. (2024). Perceptions of mental health professionals on nutritional psychiatry as an adjunct treatment in mainstream psychiatric settings in New South Wales, Australia. Cureus, 16(3), e56906. https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.56906
REF-079 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2026-2036

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Ministry of Health's strategy for 2026 to 2036 sets four priorities for New Zealand: prevention and early intervention, access to supports and services, workforce, and effectiveness. Its actions include wraparound housing and employment support for people leaving the system, and cross agency work on the social and economic determinants of wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Ministry of Health. (2026). Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2026-2036. New Zealand Government. https://www.health.govt.nz/publications/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2026-2036

Verified publication date: August 2026 (strategy document states "Published in August 2026 by the Ministry of Health"; embargo notice "6 August 2026")

All fields
ID
REF-079
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ministry of Health (Manatu Hauora)
Year
2026
Title
Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2026-2036
Description
The Ministry of Health's strategy for 2026 to 2036 sets four priorities for New Zealand: prevention and early intervention, access to supports and services, workforce, and effectiveness. Its actions include wraparound housing and employment support for people leaving the system, and cross agency work on the social and economic determinants of wellbeing.
Publication or publisher
Ministry of Health, New Zealand
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.govt.nz/publications/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2026-2036
Verification note
Verified publication date: August 2026 (strategy document states "Published in August 2026 by the Ministry of Health"; embargo notice "6 August 2026")
Full APA reference
Ministry of Health. (2026). Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2026-2036. New Zealand Government. https://www.health.govt.nz/publications/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2026-2036
REF-080 Paper, guideline or statement

Combining Lifestyle Medicine and Positive Psychology to Improve Mental Health and Emotional Well-being

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Evidence review pairing lifestyle medicine with positive psychology, citing over 80,000 Britons studied on fruit and vegetable intake and happiness, and more than 25 studies linking activity to better mood, plus nature, light, sleep, gratitude and service. Practical framework for wellbeing focused group programs.

Full APA reference

Morton, D. P. (2018). Combining Lifestyle Medicine and Positive Psychology to Improve Mental Health and Emotional Well-being. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 12(5), 370–374. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827618766482/ASSET/1559827618766482.FP.PNG_V03
All fields
ID
REF-080
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Morton, D. P
Year
2018
Title
Combining Lifestyle Medicine and Positive Psychology to Improve Mental Health and Emotional Well-being
Description
Evidence review pairing lifestyle medicine with positive psychology, citing over 80,000 Britons studied on fruit and vegetable intake and happiness, and more than 25 studies linking activity to better mood, plus nature, light, sleep, gratitude and service. Practical framework for wellbeing focused group programs.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 12(5), 370–374
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827618766482/ASSET/1559827618766482.FP.PNG_V03
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827618766482/ASSET/1559827618766482.FP.PNG_V03
Full APA reference
Morton, D. P. (2018). Combining Lifestyle Medicine and Positive Psychology to Improve Mental Health and Emotional Well-being. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 12(5), 370–374. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827618766482/ASSET/1559827618766482.FP.PNG_V03
REF-081 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian dietary guidelines

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2013 guidelines set five rules: match intake to energy needs while active, eat from the five food groups, limit saturated fat, salt, added sugars and alcohol, support breastfeeding, and handle food safely. They cover healthy Australians only, and rule out weight loss dieting in pregnancy and childhood.

Full APA reference

National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). Australian dietary guidelines. https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-09/n55_australian_dietary_guidelines.pdf
All fields
ID
REF-081
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
National Health and Medical Research Council
Year
2013
Title
Australian dietary guidelines
Description
The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2013 guidelines set five rules: match intake to energy needs while active, eat from the five food groups, limit saturated fat, salt, added sugars and alcohol, support breastfeeding, and handle food safely. They cover healthy Australians only, and rule out weight loss dieting in pregnancy and childhood.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-09/n55_australian_dietary_guidelines.pdf
Related items
GOV-030
Full APA reference
National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). Australian dietary guidelines. https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-09/n55_australian_dietary_guidelines.pdf
Same document as
GOV-030
REF-082 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian guidelines to reduce health risks from drinking alcohol

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • General health

The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2020 advice sets three guidelines: healthy adults no more than 10 standard drinks a week and 4 on any day, no alcohol under 18, and none in pregnancy or breastfeeding. One standard drink equals 10 grams of pure alcohol, giving clinicians a fixed threshold for screening.

Full APA reference

National Health and Medical Research Council. (2020). Australian guidelines to reduce health risks from drinking alcohol. https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/australian-guidelines-reduce-health-risks-drinking-alcohol
All fields
ID
REF-082
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
National Health and Medical Research Council
Year
2020
Title
Australian guidelines to reduce health risks from drinking alcohol
Description
The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2020 advice sets three guidelines: healthy adults no more than 10 standard drinks a week and 4 on any day, no alcohol under 18, and none in pregnancy or breastfeeding. One standard drink equals 10 grams of pure alcohol, giving clinicians a fixed threshold for screening.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/australian-guidelines-reduce-health-risks-drinking-alcohol
Related items
REF-567
Full APA reference
National Health and Medical Research Council. (2020). Australian guidelines to reduce health risks from drinking alcohol. https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/australian-guidelines-reduce-health-risks-drinking-alcohol
REF-083 Paper, guideline or statement

Community engagement: Improving health and wellbeing and reducing health inequalities (NICE Guideline NG44)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Social connection
  • Social determinants of health

NICE guideline NG44, issued in 2016, tells local authorities, the NHS and voluntary organisations how to engage communities, covering overarching principles, collaborations and partnerships, peer and lay roles, embedding engagement in initiatives, and making participation easy. Use is not mandatory, but commissioners must still meet statutory duties to reduce health inequalities and eliminate discrimination.

Full APA reference

National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2016). Community engagement: Improving health and wellbeing and reducing health inequalities (NICE Guideline NG44). NICE. Retrieved from https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng44
All fields
ID
REF-083
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Year
2016
Title
Community engagement: Improving health and wellbeing and reducing health inequalities (NICE Guideline NG44)
Description
NICE guideline NG44, issued in 2016, tells local authorities, the NHS and voluntary organisations how to engage communities, covering overarching principles, collaborations and partnerships, peer and lay roles, embedding engagement in initiatives, and making participation easy. Use is not mandatory, but commissioners must still meet statutory duties to reduce health inequalities and eliminate discrimination.
Publication or publisher
NICE
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng44
Related items
REF-452
Full APA reference
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2016). Community engagement: Improving health and wellbeing and reducing health inequalities (NICE Guideline NG44). NICE. Retrieved from https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng44
REF-084 Paper, guideline or statement

Equally well consensus statement

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The National Mental Health Commission's 2016 consensus statement sets six essential elements: holistic person centred care, promotion and prevention, equity of access, better quality health care, coordinated regional integration, and monitoring of progress. It cites people with psychosis dying 14 to 23 years earlier, and $15 billion a year in physical illness costs.

Full APA reference

National Mental Health Commission. (2021). Equally well consensus statement. National Mental Health Commission. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/equally-well-consensus-statement
All fields
ID
REF-084
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
National Mental Health Commission
Year
2021
Title
Equally well consensus statement
Description
The National Mental Health Commission's 2016 consensus statement sets six essential elements: holistic person centred care, promotion and prevention, equity of access, better quality health care, coordinated regional integration, and monitoring of progress. It cites people with psychosis dying 14 to 23 years earlier, and $15 billion a year in physical illness costs.
Publication or publisher
National Mental Health Commission
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/equally-well-consensus-statement
Full APA reference
National Mental Health Commission. (2021). Equally well consensus statement. National Mental Health Commission. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/equally-well-consensus-statement
REF-085 Paper, guideline or statement

2026 National Stigma and Discrimination Report Card

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The National Mental Health Commission, with SANE Australia, surveyed 6,032 adults in 2024 and found 70% of people with mental health challenges faced discrimination in at least one life domain, while 68% said stigma was worse than their symptoms. It sets six action areas, including targeting high impact settings and reducing structural stigma.

Full APA reference

National Mental Health Commission. (2026). 2026 National Stigma and Discrimination Report Card: Full report. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/2026-national-stigma-and-discrimination-report-card-full-report

Verified publication date: 6 July 2026 (date shown on publication page)

All fields
ID
REF-085
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Mental Health Commission
Year
2026
Title
2026 National Stigma and Discrimination Report Card
Description
The National Mental Health Commission, with SANE Australia, surveyed 6,032 adults in 2024 and found 70% of people with mental health challenges faced discrimination in at least one life domain, while 68% said stigma was worse than their symptoms. It sets six action areas, including targeting high impact settings and reducing structural stigma.
Publication or publisher
National Mental Health Commission
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/2026-national-stigma-and-discrimination-report-card-full-report
Verification note
Verified publication date: 6 July 2026 (date shown on publication page)
Related items
REF-501; REF-593
Full APA reference
National Mental Health Commission. (2026). 2026 National Stigma and Discrimination Report Card: Full report. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/publications/2026-national-stigma-and-discrimination-report-card-full-report
REF-086 Paper, guideline or statement

Is the Comparison between exercise and pharmacologic treatment of depression in the clinical practice guideline of the American college of physicians evidence-based? Frontiers in Pharmacology, 8(MAY)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Perspective piece re-examining 3 trials comparing exercise with antidepressants and 11 adding exercise to medication, arguing the American College of Physicians guideline wrongly omitted exercise despite comparable results. Supports offering structured activity as a legitimate option when clients resist or cannot tolerate drugs.

Full APA reference

Netz, Y. (2017). Is the Comparison between exercise and pharmacologic treatment of depression in the clinical practice guideline of the American college of physicians evidence-based? Frontiers in Pharmacology, 8(MAY). https://doi.org/10.3389/FPHAR.2017.00257/PDF
All fields
ID
REF-086
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Netz, Y
Year
2017
Title
Is the Comparison between exercise and pharmacologic treatment of depression in the clinical practice guideline of the American college of physicians evidence-based? Frontiers in Pharmacology, 8(MAY)
Description
Perspective piece re-examining 3 trials comparing exercise with antidepressants and 11 adding exercise to medication, arguing the American College of Physicians guideline wrongly omitted exercise despite comparable results. Supports offering structured activity as a legitimate option when clients resist or cannot tolerate drugs.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Pharmacology, 8
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3389/FPHAR.2017.00257/PDF
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/FPHAR.2017.00257/PDF
Full APA reference
Netz, Y. (2017). Is the Comparison between exercise and pharmacologic treatment of depression in the clinical practice guideline of the American college of physicians evidence-based? Frontiers in Pharmacology, 8(MAY). https://doi.org/10.3389/FPHAR.2017.00257/PDF
REF-087 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of exercise for depression: Systematic review and network meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Network meta-analysis of 218 randomised trials and 14,170 participants found walking or jogging (effect size 0.62), yoga (0.55) and strength training (0.49) reduced depression against active controls, with benefits rising with intensity. Gives clinicians concrete dose and modality guidance.

Full APA reference

Noetel, M., Sanders, T., Gallardo-Gómez, D., Taylor, P., del Pozo Cruz, B., van den Hoek, D., Smith, J. J., Mahoney, J., Spathis, J., Moresi, M., Pagano, R., Pagano, L., Vasconcellos, R., Arnott, H., Varley, B., Parker, P., Biddle, S. J. H., & Lonsdale, C. (2024). Effect of exercise for depression: Systematic review and network meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. BMJ, 384, e075847. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-075847
All fields
ID
REF-087
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Noetel, M., Sanders, T., Gallardo-Gómez, D., Taylor, P., del Pozo Cruz, B., van den Hoek, D., Smith, J. J., Mahoney, J., Spathis, J., Moresi, M., Pagano, R., Pagano, L., Vasconcellos, R., Arnott, H., Varley, B., Parker, P., Biddle, S. J. H., & Lonsdale, C
Year
2024
Title
Effect of exercise for depression: Systematic review and network meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials
Description
Network meta-analysis of 218 randomised trials and 14,170 participants found walking or jogging (effect size 0.62), yoga (0.55) and strength training (0.49) reduced depression against active controls, with benefits rising with intensity. Gives clinicians concrete dose and modality guidance.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 384, e075847
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-075847
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-075847
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Noetel, M., Sanders, T., Gallardo-Gómez, D., Taylor, P., del Pozo Cruz, B., van den Hoek, D., Smith, J. J., Mahoney, J., Spathis, J., Moresi, M., Pagano, R., Pagano, L., Vasconcellos, R., Arnott, H., Varley, B., Parker, P., Biddle, S. J. H., & Lonsdale, C. (2024). Effect of exercise for depression: Systematic review and network meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. BMJ, 384, e075847. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-075847
REF-088 Paper, guideline or statement

Healthy eating and active living strategy 2022–2032

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

NSW Health published this ten year plan in September 2022 with four priorities: prevention programs and services, routine healthy eating and active living advice within clinical care, social marketing for behaviour change, and healthier food and built environments. Running to 2032, it targets overweight and obesity through joint action with partner agencies.

Full APA reference

NSW Government. (2022). Healthy eating and active living strategy 2022–2032. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx
All fields
ID
REF-088
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
NSW Government
Year
2022
Title
Healthy eating and active living strategy 2022–2032
Description
NSW Health published this ten year plan in September 2022 with four priorities: prevention programs and services, routine healthy eating and active living advice within clinical care, social marketing for behaviour change, and healthier food and built environments. Running to 2032, it targets overweight and obesity through joint action with partner agencies.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx
Related items
GOV-054
Full APA reference
NSW Government. (2022). Healthy eating and active living strategy 2022–2032. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx
Same document as
GOV-054
REF-089 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical health care for people living with mental health issues

  • Web resource
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

NSW Health guideline GL2021_006 splits physical health care for people with mental health issues into five chapters: prevention and health promotion, access and intervention, comprehensive assessment, effective and integrated care, and value based care. Services must screen routinely, act on findings under the rule "don't just screen, intervene", and co-design integrated care plans.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2023). Physical health care for people living with mental health issues. NSW Health. Retrieved from https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/professionals/physical-health-care/Pages/default.aspx
All fields
ID
REF-089
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2023
Title
Physical health care for people living with mental health issues
Description
NSW Health guideline GL2021_006 splits physical health care for people with mental health issues into five chapters: prevention and health promotion, access and intervention, comprehensive assessment, effective and integrated care, and value based care. Services must screen routinely, act on findings under the rule "don't just screen, intervene", and co-design integrated care plans.
Publication or publisher
NSW Health
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/professionals/physical-health-care/Pages/default.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2023). Physical health care for people living with mental health issues. NSW Health. Retrieved from https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/professionals/physical-health-care/Pages/default.aspx
REF-090 Paper, guideline or statement

TPG26-02 NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

NSW Treasury's TPG26-02, issued February 2026, makes it mandatory for general government sector agencies to report against the Performance and Wellbeing Framework introduced in the 2025 to 2026 budget. It supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting and links agency spending decisions to measures of the wellbeing of the people of NSW.

Full APA reference

NSW Treasury. (2026). TPG26-02 NSW performance and wellbeing framework. NSW Government. https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework

Wellbeing framework. Operative period: Active, mandatory, no end date. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Page states Issued 25 February 2026, Status Active, Compliance Mandatory, supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting

All fields
ID
REF-090
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
NSW Treasury
Year
2026
Title
TPG26-02 NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework
Description
NSW Treasury's TPG26-02, issued February 2026, makes it mandatory for general government sector agencies to report against the Performance and Wellbeing Framework introduced in the 2025 to 2026 budget. It supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting and links agency spending decisions to measures of the wellbeing of the people of NSW.
Publication or publisher
NSW Treasury
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Themes
Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework
Verification note
Wellbeing framework. Operative period: Active, mandatory, no end date. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Page states Issued 25 February 2026, Status Active, Compliance Mandatory, supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting
Related items
GOV-045
Full APA reference
NSW Treasury. (2026). *TPG26-02 NSW performance and wellbeing framework*. NSW Government. https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework
Same document as
GOV-045
REF-091 Paper, guideline or statement

Efficacy of a multimodal lifestyle intervention (The Lift Project) for improving the mental health of individuals with an affective mood disorder living in South Africa

  • Journal article
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Single arm pilot of the 10 week Lift Project with 23 adults taking psychiatric medication in Kathu, South Africa, improved all six outcomes, with effect sizes of 0.66 to 1.71. Shows group lifestyle and positive psychology programs can work in small, low resource mining communities.

Full APA reference

Oakes-Cornellissen, A., Morton, D., Rankin, P., & Renfrew, M. (2023). Efficacy of a multimodal lifestyle intervention (The Lift Project) for improving the mental health of individuals with an affective mood disorder living in South Africa. Frontiers in Psychology, 14. https://doi.org/10.3389/FPSYG.2023.1127068/PDF
All fields
ID
REF-091
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Oakes-Cornellissen, A., Morton, D., Rankin, P., & Renfrew, M
Year
2023
Title
Efficacy of a multimodal lifestyle intervention (The Lift Project) for improving the mental health of individuals with an affective mood disorder living in South Africa
Description
Single arm pilot of the 10 week Lift Project with 23 adults taking psychiatric medication in Kathu, South Africa, improved all six outcomes, with effect sizes of 0.66 to 1.71. Shows group lifestyle and positive psychology programs can work in small, low resource mining communities.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 14
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3389/FPSYG.2023.1127068/PDF
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/FPSYG.2023.1127068/PDF
Full APA reference
Oakes-Cornellissen, A., Morton, D., Rankin, P., & Renfrew, M. (2023). Efficacy of a multimodal lifestyle intervention (The Lift Project) for improving the mental health of individuals with an affective mood disorder living in South Africa. Frontiers in Psychology, 14. https://doi.org/10.3389/FPSYG.2023.1127068/PDF
REF-092 Paper, guideline or statement

Designing Lifestyle Interventions for Common Mental Disorders: What Can We Learn from Diabetes Prevention Programs? Nutrients 2021, Vol. 13, Page 3766, 13(11), 3766

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Narrative review borrowing from diabetes prevention programs to design lifestyle interventions for common mental disorders, favouring group delivery, peer support, cultural adaptation, affordability and retention over weight focused framing. Offers a practical checklist for anyone scaling lifestyle psychiatry beyond small trials.

Full APA reference

Opie, R. S., Jacka, F. N., Marx, W., Rocks, T., Young, C., & O’neil, A. (2021). Designing Lifestyle Interventions for Common Mental Disorders: What Can We Learn from Diabetes Prevention Programs? Nutrients 2021, Vol. 13, Page 3766, 13(11), 3766. https://doi.org/10.3390/NU13113766
All fields
ID
REF-092
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Opie, R. S., Jacka, F. N., Marx, W., Rocks, T., Young, C., & O’neil, A
Year
2021
Title
Designing Lifestyle Interventions for Common Mental Disorders: What Can We Learn from Diabetes Prevention Programs? Nutrients 2021, Vol. 13, Page 3766, 13(11), 3766
Description
Narrative review borrowing from diabetes prevention programs to design lifestyle interventions for common mental disorders, favouring group delivery, peer support, cultural adaptation, affordability and retention over weight focused framing. Offers a practical checklist for anyone scaling lifestyle psychiatry beyond small trials.
Publication or publisher
Nutrients, 13(11), 3766
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3390/NU13113766
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/NU13113766
Full APA reference
Opie, R. S., Jacka, F. N., Marx, W., Rocks, T., Young, C., & O’neil, A. (2021). Designing Lifestyle Interventions for Common Mental Disorders: What Can We Learn from Diabetes Prevention Programs? Nutrients 2021, Vol. 13, Page 3766, 13(11), 3766. https://doi.org/10.3390/NU13113766
REF-093 Paper, guideline or statement

Clarifying the role of sleep in depression: A narrative review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Narrative review of human and animal evidence links depression, which affects 4.4% to 20% of people, with disrupted circadian rhythms, melatonin signalling, neuroinflammation and sleep apnoea. Makes the case for treating sleep as a treatment target rather than only a symptom.

Full APA reference

Pandi-Perumal, S. R., Monti, J. M., Burman, D., Karthikeyan, R., BaHammam, A. S., Spence, D. W., Brown, G. M., & Narashimhan, M. (2020). Clarifying the role of sleep in depression: A narrative review. Psychiatry Research, 291. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PSYCHRES.2020.113239
All fields
ID
REF-093
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Pandi-Perumal, S. R., Monti, J. M., Burman, D., Karthikeyan, R., BaHammam, A. S., Spence, D. W., Brown, G. M., & Narashimhan, M
Year
2020
Title
Clarifying the role of sleep in depression: A narrative review
Description
Narrative review of human and animal evidence links depression, which affects 4.4% to 20% of people, with disrupted circadian rhythms, melatonin signalling, neuroinflammation and sleep apnoea. Makes the case for treating sleep as a treatment target rather than only a symptom.
Publication or publisher
Psychiatry Research, 291
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PSYCHRES.2020.113239
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PSYCHRES.2020.113239
Full APA reference
Pandi-Perumal, S. R., Monti, J. M., Burman, D., Karthikeyan, R., BaHammam, A. S., Spence, D. W., Brown, G. M., & Narashimhan, M. (2020). Clarifying the role of sleep in depression: A narrative review. Psychiatry Research, 291. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PSYCHRES.2020.113239
REF-094 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine: A foundational framework for high-value care

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Commentary on the American College of Lifestyle Medicine position statement, which sets five principles for lifestyle medicine as high value care in a country where about 76% of adults have a chronic condition. Argues payment reform and shared training are needed to embed it.

Full APA reference

Patel, P. (2026). Lifestyle medicine: A foundational framework for high-value care. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276261420127

Verified publication date: 31 January 2026

All fields
ID
REF-094
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Patel, P.
Year
2026
Title
Lifestyle medicine: A foundational framework for high-value care
Description
Commentary on the American College of Lifestyle Medicine position statement, which sets five principles for lifestyle medicine as high value care in a country where about 76% of adults have a chronic condition. Argues payment reform and shared training are needed to embed it.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12861401/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276261420127
Verification note
Verified publication date: 31 January 2026
Related items
REF-458
Full APA reference
Patel, P. (2026). Lifestyle medicine: A foundational framework for high-value care. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276261420127
REF-095 Paper, guideline or statement

Longitudinal associations of loneliness with mental ill-health, physical ill-health, lifestyle factors and mortality in ageing adults in Thailand

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Cohort study following 5,616 Thai adults aged 45 and over from 2015 to 2020 found loneliness, reported by about 22%, predicted depression, insomnia, poorer physical health, and new diabetes, kidney disease and disability. Strengthens the case for treating social connection as a clinical risk factor.

Full APA reference

Pengpid, S., Peltzer, K., & Anantanasuwong, D. (2023). Longitudinal associations of loneliness with mental ill-health, physical ill-health, lifestyle factors and mortality in ageing adults in Thailand. BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–10. https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-05263-0
All fields
ID
REF-095
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Pengpid, S., Peltzer, K., & Anantanasuwong, D
Year
2023
Title
Longitudinal associations of loneliness with mental ill-health, physical ill-health, lifestyle factors and mortality in ageing adults in Thailand
Description
Cohort study following 5,616 Thai adults aged 45 and over from 2015 to 2020 found loneliness, reported by about 22%, predicted depression, insomnia, poorer physical health, and new diabetes, kidney disease and disability. Strengthens the case for treating social connection as a clinical risk factor.
Publication or publisher
BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–10
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-05263-0
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-05263-0
Related items
REF-506; REF-508; REF-570
Full APA reference
Pengpid, S., Peltzer, K., & Anantanasuwong, D. (2023). Longitudinal associations of loneliness with mental ill-health, physical ill-health, lifestyle factors and mortality in ageing adults in Thailand. BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–10. https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-05263-0
REF-096 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle psychiatry for depression and anxiety: Beyond diet and exercise

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Review widening lifestyle psychiatry past diet and exercise to sleep, stress, substance use and relationships, plus five neglected targets: financial stability, time in nature, pet ownership, materialistic values and screen use. Expands the list of modifiable factors clinicians can realistically explore with clients.

Full APA reference

Piotrowski, M. C., Lunsford, J., & Gaynes, B. N. (2021). Lifestyle psychiatry for depression and anxiety: Beyond diet and exercise. Lifestyle Medicine, 2(1). https://doi.org/10.1002/LIM2.21
All fields
ID
REF-096
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Piotrowski, M. C., Lunsford, J., & Gaynes, B. N
Year
2021
Title
Lifestyle psychiatry for depression and anxiety: Beyond diet and exercise
Description
Review widening lifestyle psychiatry past diet and exercise to sleep, stress, substance use and relationships, plus five neglected targets: financial stability, time in nature, pet ownership, materialistic values and screen use. Expands the list of modifiable factors clinicians can realistically explore with clients.
Publication or publisher
Lifestyle Medicine, 2(1)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1002/LIM2.21
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/LIM2.21
Full APA reference
Piotrowski, M. C., Lunsford, J., & Gaynes, B. N. (2021). Lifestyle psychiatry for depression and anxiety: Beyond diet and exercise. Lifestyle Medicine, 2(1). https://doi.org/10.1002/LIM2.21
REF-097 Paper, guideline or statement

A Scotland where everybody thrives: Public Health Scotland’s strategic plan 2022 to 2025

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Public Health Scotland's plan for 2022 to 2025 commits it to prevent disease, prolong healthy life, promote health and wellbeing, and put reducing health inequalities at the heart of its work. Noting that people in Scotland's poorest areas die more than 10 years earlier than the wealthiest, it targets child poverty and mental wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Public Health Scotland. (2024). A Scotland where everybody thrives: Public Health Scotland’s strategic plan 2022 to 2025. Retrieved from https://publichealthscotland.scot/about-us/what-we-do-and-how-we-work/a-scotland-where-everybody-thrives-public-health-scotland-s-strategic-plan-2022-to-2025/
All fields
ID
REF-097
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Public Health Scotland
Year
2024
Title
A Scotland where everybody thrives: Public Health Scotland’s strategic plan 2022 to 2025
Description
Public Health Scotland's plan for 2022 to 2025 commits it to prevent disease, prolong healthy life, promote health and wellbeing, and put reducing health inequalities at the heart of its work. Noting that people in Scotland's poorest areas die more than 10 years earlier than the wealthiest, it targets child poverty and mental wellbeing.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Scotland
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://publichealthscotland.scot/about-us/what-we-do-and-how-we-work/a-scotland-where-everybody-thrives-public-health-scotland-s-strategic-plan-2022-to-2025/
Full APA reference
Public Health Scotland. (2024). A Scotland where everybody thrives: Public Health Scotland’s strategic plan 2022 to 2025. Retrieved from https://publichealthscotland.scot/about-us/what-we-do-and-how-we-work/a-scotland-where-everybody-thrives-public-health-scotland-s-strategic-plan-2022-to-2025/
REF-098 Paper, guideline or statement

Together we can: Our 10-year strategy to 2035

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

Public Health Scotland's Together We Can, published January 2026, sets five drivers to 2035: building a prevention focused system, improving social and economic conditions, strengthening places and communities, enabling healthy living, and equitable access to health and care. It aims to raise life expectancy and narrow the gap between the most and least deprived communities.

Full APA reference

Public Health Scotland. (2026). Together we can: Our 10-year strategy to 2035. https://publichealthscotland.scot/publications/together-we-can-our-10-year-strategy-to-2035/

Verified publication date: 27 January 2026 (publication date shown on the publications page)

All fields
ID
REF-098
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Public Health Scotland
Year
2026
Title
Together we can: Our 10-year strategy to 2035
Description
Public Health Scotland's Together We Can, published January 2026, sets five drivers to 2035: building a prevention focused system, improving social and economic conditions, strengthening places and communities, enabling healthy living, and equitable access to health and care. It aims to raise life expectancy and narrow the gap between the most and least deprived communities.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Scotland
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Scotland
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://publichealthscotland.scot/publications/together-we-can-our-10-year-strategy-to-2035/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 27 January 2026 (publication date shown on the publications page)
Full APA reference
Public Health Scotland. (2026). Together we can: Our 10-year strategy to 2035. https://publichealthscotland.scot/publications/together-we-can-our-10-year-strategy-to-2035/
REF-099 Paper, guideline or statement

Screening equity strategy 2026 to 2031

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Public Health Wales sets five priorities for 2026 to 2031: accessible information, working together, using our services, learning and training, and monitoring and evaluation of impact. A Screening Division Equity Action Plan will set who acts and by when, promising online booking, flexible appointments and targeted calls to non responders.

Full APA reference

Public Health Wales. (2026). Screening equity strategy 2026 to 2031. https://phw.nhs.wales/reports/screening-equity-strategy-2026-to-2031/

Verified publication date: 18 August 2026 (page states "18th August 2026")

All fields
ID
REF-099
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Public Health Wales
Year
2026
Title
Screening equity strategy 2026 to 2031
Description
Public Health Wales sets five priorities for 2026 to 2031: accessible information, working together, using our services, learning and training, and monitoring and evaluation of impact. A Screening Division Equity Action Plan will set who acts and by when, promising online booking, flexible appointments and targeted calls to non responders.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Wales
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Wales
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://phw.nhs.wales/reports/screening-equity-strategy-2026-to-2031/
Verification note
Verified publication date: 18 August 2026 (page states "18th August 2026")
Full APA reference
Public Health Wales. (2026). Screening equity strategy 2026 to 2031. https://phw.nhs.wales/reports/screening-equity-strategy-2026-to-2031/
REF-100 Paper, guideline or statement

Prevention strategic framework 2017–2026

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Queensland Health's framework for 2017 to 2026 aims to increase healthy behaviours through two objectives, healthy places and empowered people, and targets tobacco smoking and vaping, unsafe sun exposure, unhealthy eating and physical inactivity. It puts Queensland chronic disease costs at $9.6 billion and cites a median $14 return for every $1 invested in prevention.

Full APA reference

Queensland Government. (2017). Prevention strategic framework 2017–2026. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0036/651798/prevention-strategic-framework.pdf
All fields
ID
REF-100
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Queensland Government
Year
2017
Title
Prevention strategic framework 2017–2026
Description
Queensland Health's framework for 2017 to 2026 aims to increase healthy behaviours through two objectives, healthy places and empowered people, and targets tobacco smoking and vaping, unsafe sun exposure, unhealthy eating and physical inactivity. It puts Queensland chronic disease costs at $9.6 billion and cites a median $14 return for every $1 invested in prevention.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0036/651798/prevention-strategic-framework.pdf
Related items
GOV-097
Full APA reference
Queensland Government. (2017). Prevention strategic framework 2017–2026. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0036/651798/prevention-strategic-framework.pdf
Same document as
GOV-097
REF-101 Paper, guideline or statement

Queensland Spirit: The Road to 2032

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

The Queensland Government's sport plan, announced July 2026, sets four priorities: Games On!, the home of Australian sport, Play On! and Beyond 2032. It funds $200 sports vouchers, up to $150 for learn to swim for children aged 0 to 4, and grassroots infrastructure for 8,500 clubs serving 865,000 participants.

Full APA reference

Queensland Government. (2026, July 23). Queensland Spirit: The road to 2032. https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647

Physical activity strategy. Operative period: To 2032. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Ministerial statement states "Published Thursday, 23 July, 2026 at 01:20 PM"; strategy page at https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/sport-strategy

All fields
ID
REF-101
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Queensland Government
Year
2026
Title
Queensland Spirit: The Road to 2032
Description
The Queensland Government's sport plan, announced July 2026, sets four priorities: Games On!, the home of Australian sport, Play On! and Beyond 2032. It funds $200 sports vouchers, up to $150 for learn to swim for children aged 0 to 4, and grassroots infrastructure for 8,500 clubs serving 865,000 participants.
Publication or publisher
Queensland Government
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647
Verification note
Physical activity strategy. Operative period: To 2032. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Ministerial statement states "Published Thursday, 23 July, 2026 at 01:20 PM"; strategy page at https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/sport-strategy
Related items
GOV-084
Full APA reference
Queensland Government. (2026, July 23). *Queensland Spirit: The road to 2032*. https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647
Same document as
GOV-084
REF-102 Paper, guideline or statement

Adherence to Australian diet, physical activity and alcohol guidelines is associated with lower risk of depression and anxiety: A secondary analysis of the CALM trial

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Secondary analysis pooling both arms of the CALM trial, 182 distressed Australian adults, found meeting activity guidelines (risk ratio 0.51), limiting alcohol (0.59) and higher diet quality (0.93) predicted less depression and anxiety. Lets clinicians use familiar national guidelines as mental health advice.

Full APA reference

Radovic, L. K., Orr, R., Lane, M. M., Jacka, F. N., Jabeen, T., Young, L. M., Saunders, D., Mahoney, S., Turner, M., Bryan, M., John, T., Marx, W., Rocks, T., O'Neil, A., & Ashtree, D. N. (2026). Adherence to Australian diet, physical activity and alcohol guidelines is associated with lower risk of depression and anxiety: A secondary analysis of the CALM trial. International Journal of Food Sciences and Nutrition, 77(2), 136-145. https://doi.org/10.1080/09637486.2026.2624827

Verified publication date: March 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Mar", epub 2 March 2026)

All fields
ID
REF-102
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Radovic, L. K., Orr, R., Lane, M. M., Jacka, F. N., Jabeen, T., Young, L. M., Saunders, D., Mahoney, S., Turner, M., Bryan, M., John, T., Marx, W., Rocks, T., O'Neil, A., & Ashtree, D. N.
Year
2026
Title
Adherence to Australian diet, physical activity and alcohol guidelines is associated with lower risk of depression and anxiety: A secondary analysis of the CALM trial
Description
Secondary analysis pooling both arms of the CALM trial, 182 distressed Australian adults, found meeting activity guidelines (risk ratio 0.51), limiting alcohol (0.59) and higher diet quality (0.93) predicted less depression and anxiety. Lets clinicians use familiar national guidelines as mental health advice.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Food Sciences and Nutrition, 77(2), 136-145
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41769734/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/09637486.2026.2624827
Verification note
Verified publication date: March 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Mar", epub 2 March 2026)
Related items
REF-565
Full APA reference
Radovic, L. K., Orr, R., Lane, M. M., Jacka, F. N., Jabeen, T., Young, L. M., Saunders, D., Mahoney, S., Turner, M., Bryan, M., John, T., Marx, W., Rocks, T., O'Neil, A., & Ashtree, D. N. (2026). Adherence to Australian diet, physical activity and alcohol guidelines is associated with lower risk of depression and anxiety: A secondary analysis of the CALM trial. International Journal of Food Sciences and Nutrition, 77(2), 136-145. https://doi.org/10.1080/09637486.2026.2624827
REF-103 Paper, guideline or statement

The acceptability of lifestyle medicine for the treatment of mental illness: Perspectives of people with and without lived experience of mental illness

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Online survey of 649 Australian adults, 54% with lived experience of mental illness, found 77% felt positive about lifestyle medicine and 86% understood it, yet fewer than half felt able to sustain it. Suggests confidence, effort and cost, not credibility, are the real barriers.

Full APA reference

Richardson, K., Petukhova, R., Hughes, S., Pitt, J., Yücel, M., & Segrave, R. (2024). The acceptability of lifestyle medicine for the treatment of mental illness: Perspectives of people with and without lived experience of mental illness. BMC Public Health, 24(1), Article 171. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-024-17683-y
All fields
ID
REF-103
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Richardson, K., Petukhova, R., Hughes, S., Pitt, J., Yücel, M., & Segrave, R
Year
2024
Title
The acceptability of lifestyle medicine for the treatment of mental illness: Perspectives of people with and without lived experience of mental illness
Description
Online survey of 649 Australian adults, 54% with lived experience of mental illness, found 77% felt positive about lifestyle medicine and 86% understood it, yet fewer than half felt able to sustain it. Suggests confidence, effort and cost, not credibility, are the real barriers.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 24(1), Article 171
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-024-17683-y
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-024-17683-y
Full APA reference
Richardson, K., Petukhova, R., Hughes, S., Pitt, J., Yücel, M., & Segrave, R. (2024). The acceptability of lifestyle medicine for the treatment of mental illness: Perspectives of people with and without lived experience of mental illness. BMC Public Health, 24(1), Article 171. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-024-17683-y
REF-104 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle Medicine Is Truly the Strong Foundation for Modern Health Care

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Editorial introducing a journal issue drawn from the 2019 American College of Lifestyle Medicine conference, arguing lifestyle medicine belongs at the foundation of health care from birth to old age. Useful for explaining why nutrition, activity, sleep, stress and social connection are handled together.

Full APA reference

Rippe, J. M. (2020). Lifestyle Medicine Is Truly the Strong Foundation for Modern Health Care. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(5), 468–470. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620912165
All fields
ID
REF-104
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Rippe, J. M
Year
2020
Title
Lifestyle Medicine Is Truly the Strong Foundation for Modern Health Care
Description
Editorial introducing a journal issue drawn from the 2019 American College of Lifestyle Medicine conference, arguing lifestyle medicine belongs at the foundation of health care from birth to old age. Useful for explaining why nutrition, activity, sleep, stress and social connection are handled together.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(5), 468–470
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620912165
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620912165
Full APA reference
Rippe, J. M. (2020). Lifestyle Medicine Is Truly the Strong Foundation for Modern Health Care. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(5), 468–470. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620912165
REF-105 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health and wellbeing: Position statement Positive Health and Wellbeing – retrieved May 2025 from

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Royal Society for Public Health position statement treats mental health as core public health business, citing mental illness as the largest global disease burden, affecting over one in four people and costing England £105.2 billion in 2009 to 2010. Calls for wellbeing impact assessment and prevention.

Full APA reference

Royal Society for Public Health. (n.d.). Mental health and wellbeing: Position statement Positive Health and Wellbeing – retrieved May 2025 from https://www.rsph.org.uk/static/uploaded/8952b9b1-4d22-437b-865c7738ee68d2f9.pdf
All fields
ID
REF-105
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Royal Society for Public Health
Year
n.d.
Title
Mental health and wellbeing: Position statement Positive Health and Wellbeing – retrieved May 2025 from
Description
Royal Society for Public Health position statement treats mental health as core public health business, citing mental illness as the largest global disease burden, affecting over one in four people and costing England £105.2 billion in 2009 to 2010. Calls for wellbeing impact assessment and prevention.
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.rsph.org.uk/static/uploaded/8952b9b1-4d22-437b-865c7738ee68d2f9.pdf
Full APA reference
Royal Society for Public Health. (n.d.). Mental health and wellbeing: Position statement Positive Health and Wellbeing – retrieved May 2025 from https://www.rsph.org.uk/static/uploaded/8952b9b1-4d22-437b-865c7738ee68d2f9.pdf
REF-106 Paper, guideline or statement

Well-being is more than happiness and life satisfaction: A multidimensional analysis of 21 countries

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Analysis of European Social Survey data from roughly 40,000 respondents in each of 2006 and 2012 across 21 countries built a ten dimension measure of psychological wellbeing. Single happiness or satisfaction scores can hide problems, so tracking separate dimensions gives policy and practice clearer targets for improving wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Ruggeri, K., Garcia-Garzon, E., Maguire, Á. et al. Well-being is more than happiness and life satisfaction: a multidimensional analysis of 21 countries. Health Qual Life Outcomes 18, 192 (2020). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12955-020-01423-y
All fields
ID
REF-106
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Ruggeri, K., Garcia-Garzon, E., Maguire, Á., et al.
Year
2020
Title
Well-being is more than happiness and life satisfaction: A multidimensional analysis of 21 countries
Description
Analysis of European Social Survey data from roughly 40,000 respondents in each of 2006 and 2012 across 21 countries built a ten dimension measure of psychological wellbeing. Single happiness or satisfaction scores can hide problems, so tracking separate dimensions gives policy and practice clearer targets for improving wellbeing.
Publication or publisher
Health and Quality of Life Outcomes, 18, 192
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12955-020-01423-y
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12955-020-01423-y
Full APA reference
Ruggeri, K., Garcia-Garzon, E., Maguire, Á. et al. Well-being is more than happiness and life satisfaction: a multidimensional analysis of 21 countries. Health Qual Life Outcomes 18, 192 (2020). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12955-020-01423-y
REF-107 Paper, guideline or statement

Social connectedness improves public mental health: Investigating bidirectional relationships in the New Zealand attitudes and values survey

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Cross lagged analysis of about 21,227 New Zealanders in a national longitudinal values survey showed social connectedness predicted later mental health more strongly and consistently than mental health predicted connectedness. Positions belonging and social ties as a modifiable determinant worth building into prevention programs and clinical care.

Full APA reference

Saeri, A. K., Cruwys, T., Barlow, F. K., Stronge, S., & Sibley, C. G. (2018). Social connectedness improves public mental health: Investigating bidirectional relationships in the New Zealand attitudes and values survey. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 52(4), 365–374. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867417723990/
All fields
ID
REF-107
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Saeri, A. K., Cruwys, T., Barlow, F. K., Stronge, S., & Sibley, C. G
Year
2018
Title
Social connectedness improves public mental health: Investigating bidirectional relationships in the New Zealand attitudes and values survey
Description
Cross lagged analysis of about 21,227 New Zealanders in a national longitudinal values survey showed social connectedness predicted later mental health more strongly and consistently than mental health predicted connectedness. Positions belonging and social ties as a modifiable determinant worth building into prevention programs and clinical care.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 52(4), 365–374
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867417723990/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867417723990/
Related items
REF-506
Full APA reference
Saeri, A. K., Cruwys, T., Barlow, F. K., Stronge, S., & Sibley, C. G. (2018). Social connectedness improves public mental health: Investigating bidirectional relationships in the New Zealand attitudes and values survey. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 52(4), 365–374. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867417723990/
REF-108 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle factors and psychological well-being: 10-year follow-up study in Lithuanian urban population

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Ten year follow up of 3,267 adults aged 45 to 72 in Kaunas, Lithuania, found healthier baseline behaviours predicted higher psychological wellbeing a decade later on the CASP-12 scale. Supports lifestyle change as a long term investment in mental wellbeing, not only physical health.

Full APA reference

Sapranaviciute-Zabazlajeva, L., Sileikiene, L., Luksiene, D., Tamosiunas, A., Radisauskas, R., Milvidaite, I., & Bobak, M. (2022). Lifestyle factors and psychological well-being: 10-year follow-up study in Lithuanian urban population. BMC Public Health, 22, Article 1011. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-022-13413-4
All fields
ID
REF-108
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Sapranaviciute-Zabazlajeva, L., Sileikiene, L., Luksiene, D., Tamosiunas, A., Radisauskas, R., Milvidaite, I., & Bobak, M
Year
2022
Title
Lifestyle factors and psychological well-being: 10-year follow-up study in Lithuanian urban population
Description
Ten year follow up of 3,267 adults aged 45 to 72 in Kaunas, Lithuania, found healthier baseline behaviours predicted higher psychological wellbeing a decade later on the CASP-12 scale. Supports lifestyle change as a long term investment in mental wellbeing, not only physical health.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 22, Article 1011
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-022-13413-4
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-022-13413-4
Full APA reference
Sapranaviciute-Zabazlajeva, L., Sileikiene, L., Luksiene, D., Tamosiunas, A., Radisauskas, R., Milvidaite, I., & Bobak, M. (2022). Lifestyle factors and psychological well-being: 10-year follow-up study in Lithuanian urban population. BMC Public Health, 22, Article 1011. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-022-13413-4
REF-109 Paper, guideline or statement

The effect of aerobic exercises of different intensities on anxiety, cigarette addiction, sleep quality, and quality of life in former smokers

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Randomised trial of 60 recent quitters aged 18 to 45 in Turkey compared eight weeks of mild and moderate intensity aerobic exercise with no exercise. Moderate intensity cut cravings most and mild intensity improved sleep disturbance, though anxiety and quality of life were unchanged.

Full APA reference

Sarıtoy, A., & Usgu, S. (2022). The effect of aerobic exercises of different intensities on anxiety, cigarette addiction, sleep quality, and quality of life in former smokers. Irish Journal of Medical Science. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11845-022-03065-z
All fields
ID
REF-109
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Sarıtoy, A., & Usgu, S
Year
2022
Title
The effect of aerobic exercises of different intensities on anxiety, cigarette addiction, sleep quality, and quality of life in former smokers
Description
Randomised trial of 60 recent quitters aged 18 to 45 in Turkey compared eight weeks of mild and moderate intensity aerobic exercise with no exercise. Moderate intensity cut cravings most and mild intensity improved sleep disturbance, though anxiety and quality of life were unchanged.
Publication or publisher
Irish Journal of Medical Science
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11845-022-03065-z
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11845-022-03065-z
Full APA reference
Sarıtoy, A., & Usgu, S. (2022). The effect of aerobic exercises of different intensities on anxiety, cigarette addiction, sleep quality, and quality of life in former smokers. Irish Journal of Medical Science. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11845-022-03065-z
REF-110 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine: A new medical specialty? BMJ, 363, k4442

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

BMJ feature from 2018 charts rising interest in lifestyle medicine, noting 40 health professionals sat the first British Society of Lifestyle Medicine diploma exam, and asks whether it should be a standalone specialty or embedded across existing ones. Useful background on how the field is defined and contested.

Full APA reference

Sayburn, A. (2018). Lifestyle medicine: A new medical specialty? BMJ, 363, k4442. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.k4442
All fields
ID
REF-110
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Sayburn, A
Year
2018
Title
Lifestyle medicine: A new medical specialty? BMJ, 363, k4442
Description
BMJ feature from 2018 charts rising interest in lifestyle medicine, noting 40 health professionals sat the first British Society of Lifestyle Medicine diploma exam, and asks whether it should be a standalone specialty or embedded across existing ones. Useful background on how the field is defined and contested.
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.k4442
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.k4442
Full APA reference
Sayburn, A. (2018). Lifestyle medicine: A new medical specialty? BMJ, 363, k4442. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.k4442
REF-111 Paper, guideline or statement

Does improving sleep lead to better mental health? A meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 54 randomised trials with 6,876 participants found interventions that improved sleep also improved mental health overall (g = 0.47), with the largest gains for depression (0.54), then anxiety and stress. Bigger sleep gains produced bigger mental health gains, making sleep a practical treatment target.

Full APA reference

Alexander Scott, 770 Does Improving Sleep Lead to Better Mental Health? A Meta-Analysis of Randomised Controlled Trials, Sleep, Volume 44, Issue Supplement_2, May 2021, Page A300, https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/zsab072.767
All fields
ID
REF-111
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Scott, A.
Year
2021
Title
Does improving sleep lead to better mental health? A meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials
Description
Meta-analysis of 54 randomised trials with 6,876 participants found interventions that improved sleep also improved mental health overall (g = 0.47), with the largest gains for depression (0.54), then anxiety and stress. Bigger sleep gains produced bigger mental health gains, making sleep a practical treatment target.
Publication or publisher
Sleep, 44(Supplement_2), A300
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/zsab072.767
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/zsab072.767
Full APA reference
Alexander Scott, 770 Does Improving Sleep Lead to Better Mental Health? A Meta-Analysis of Randomised Controlled Trials, Sleep, Volume 44, Issue Supplement_2, May 2021, Page A300, https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/zsab072.767
REF-112 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of physical activity interventions for improving depression, anxiety and distress: an overview of systematic reviews

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Umbrella review of 97 systematic reviews, covering 1,039 randomised trials and 128,119 adults, found physical activity produced medium reductions in depression and anxiety symptoms compared with usual care (median standardised effects around 0.43 and 0.42). Strong justification for prescribing movement as frontline mental health care.

Full APA reference

Singh, B., Olds, T., Curtis, R., Dumuid, D., Virgara, R., Watson, A., Szeto, K., O’Connor, E., Ferguson, T., Eglitis, E., Miatke, A., Simpson, C. E., & Maher, C. (2023). Effectiveness of physical activity interventions for improving depression, anxiety and distress: an overview of systematic reviews. British Journal of Sports Medicine, bjsports-2022-106195. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2022-106195
All fields
ID
REF-112
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Singh, B., Olds, T., Curtis, R., Dumuid, D., Virgara, R., Watson, A., Szeto, K., O’Connor, E., Ferguson, T., Eglitis, E., Miatke, A., Simpson, C. E., & Maher, C
Year
2023
Title
Effectiveness of physical activity interventions for improving depression, anxiety and distress: an overview of systematic reviews
Description
Umbrella review of 97 systematic reviews, covering 1,039 randomised trials and 128,119 adults, found physical activity produced medium reductions in depression and anxiety symptoms compared with usual care (median standardised effects around 0.43 and 0.42). Strong justification for prescribing movement as frontline mental health care.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, bjsports-2022-106195
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2022-106195
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2022-106195
Full APA reference
Singh, B., Olds, T., Curtis, R., Dumuid, D., Virgara, R., Watson, A., Szeto, K., O’Connor, E., Ferguson, T., Eglitis, E., Miatke, A., Simpson, C. E., & Maher, C. (2023). Effectiveness of physical activity interventions for improving depression, anxiety and distress: an overview of systematic reviews. British Journal of Sports Medicine, bjsports-2022-106195. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2022-106195
REF-113 Paper, guideline or statement

Sleep hygiene: Good sleep habits

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Sleep
  • General health

Australian consumer fact sheet setting out practical sleep habits, including regular bed and wake times, a wind down hour, switching off screens one to two hours before bed, limiting caffeine, and getting up when sleep will not come. Plain language handout suited to client education and self management.

Full APA reference

Sleep Health Foundation. (n.d.). Sleep hygiene: Good sleep habits. https://www.sleephealthfoundation.org.au/sleep-topics/sleep-hygiene-good-sleep-habits
All fields
ID
REF-113
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Sleep Health Foundation
Year
n.d.
Title
Sleep hygiene: Good sleep habits
Description
Australian consumer fact sheet setting out practical sleep habits, including regular bed and wake times, a wind down hour, switching off screens one to two hours before bed, limiting caffeine, and getting up when sleep will not come. Plain language handout suited to client education and self management.
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.sleephealthfoundation.org.au/sleep-topics/sleep-hygiene-good-sleep-habits
Full APA reference
Sleep Health Foundation. (n.d.). Sleep hygiene: Good sleep habits. https://www.sleephealthfoundation.org.au/sleep-topics/sleep-hygiene-good-sleep-habits
REF-114 Paper, guideline or statement

The Role of Gut Microbiota, Nutrition, and Physical Activity in Depression and Obesity-Interdependent Mechanisms/Co-Occurrence

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Narrative review of human and animal evidence on how gut bacteria, diet quality and inactivity link depression and obesity through inflammation and a leaky gut barrier. Frames probiotics and prebiotics as possible add ons to balanced eating and exercise rather than standalone fixes, pending stronger trials.

Full APA reference

Sochacka, K., Kotowska, A., & Lachowicz-Wiśniewska, S. (2024). The Role of Gut Microbiota, Nutrition, and Physical Activity in Depression and Obesity-Interdependent Mechanisms/Co-Occurrence. Nutrients, 16(7). https://doi.org/10.3390/NU16071039
All fields
ID
REF-114
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Sochacka, K., Kotowska, A., & Lachowicz-Wiśniewska, S
Year
2024
Title
The Role of Gut Microbiota, Nutrition, and Physical Activity in Depression and Obesity-Interdependent Mechanisms/Co-Occurrence
Description
Narrative review of human and animal evidence on how gut bacteria, diet quality and inactivity link depression and obesity through inflammation and a leaky gut barrier. Frames probiotics and prebiotics as possible add ons to balanced eating and exercise rather than standalone fixes, pending stronger trials.
Publication or publisher
Nutrients, 16(7)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3390/NU16071039
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/NU16071039
Related items
REF-508
Full APA reference
Sochacka, K., Kotowska, A., & Lachowicz-Wiśniewska, S. (2024). The Role of Gut Microbiota, Nutrition, and Physical Activity in Depression and Obesity-Interdependent Mechanisms/Co-Occurrence. Nutrients, 16(7). https://doi.org/10.3390/NU16071039
REF-115 Paper, guideline or statement

Anti-inflammatory diets and mental health: A scoping review of randomized controlled trials and systematic evidence syntheses

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Scoping review screened 21,923 records and included 42 randomised trials plus 23 evidence syntheses of anti-inflammatory eating in adults. Improvement in at least one mental health outcome appeared in 28 of the 42 trials, most consistently for depression, with Mediterranean style patterns the most tested approach.

Full APA reference

Sprengel, M. L., Mansoor, R., Latsou, N., Allen, S., Lubarsky, O., Mark, K., Gizzi, L., & Vieten, C. (2026). Anti-inflammatory diets and mental health: A scoping review of randomized controlled trials and systematic evidence syntheses. Frontiers in Nutrition, 13, 1795350. https://doi.org/10.3389/fnut.2026.1795350

Verified publication date: 13 April 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Apr 13")

All fields
ID
REF-115
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sprengel, M. L., Mansoor, R., Latsou, N., Allen, S., Lubarsky, O., Mark, K., Gizzi, L., & Vieten, C.
Year
2026
Title
Anti-inflammatory diets and mental health: A scoping review of randomized controlled trials and systematic evidence syntheses
Description
Scoping review screened 21,923 records and included 42 randomised trials plus 23 evidence syntheses of anti-inflammatory eating in adults. Improvement in at least one mental health outcome appeared in 28 of the 42 trials, most consistently for depression, with Mediterranean style patterns the most tested approach.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Nutrition, 13, 1795350
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42051341/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fnut.2026.1795350
Verification note
Verified publication date: 13 April 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Apr 13")
Full APA reference
Sprengel, M. L., Mansoor, R., Latsou, N., Allen, S., Lubarsky, O., Mark, K., Gizzi, L., & Vieten, C. (2026). Anti-inflammatory diets and mental health: A scoping review of randomized controlled trials and systematic evidence syntheses. Frontiers in Nutrition, 13, 1795350. https://doi.org/10.3389/fnut.2026.1795350
REF-116 Paper, guideline or statement

Integrating physical activity into routine psychiatric care: A review

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Review of physical activity in psychiatric care notes adults with severe mental illness often sit more than 10 hours daily and live 10 to 20 years less, while structured exercise cuts depressive and psychotic symptoms moderately to largely. Argues activity, including two strength sessions weekly, belongs in standard treatment.

Full APA reference

Stubbs, B., Ma, R., Teychenne, M., Kinnafick, F., Mossaheb, N., Korman, N., Trott, M., Rosenbaum, S., Schuch, F., Firth, J., & Vancampfort, D. (2026). Integrating physical activity into routine psychiatric care: A review. JAMA Psychiatry, 83(5), 535-542. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.0026

Verified publication date: 1 May 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 May 1")

All fields
ID
REF-116
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Stubbs, B., Ma, R., Teychenne, M., Kinnafick, F., Mossaheb, N., Korman, N., Trott, M., Rosenbaum, S., Schuch, F., Firth, J., & Vancampfort, D.
Year
2026
Title
Integrating physical activity into routine psychiatric care: A review
Description
Review of physical activity in psychiatric care notes adults with severe mental illness often sit more than 10 hours daily and live 10 to 20 years less, while structured exercise cuts depressive and psychotic symptoms moderately to largely. Argues activity, including two strength sessions weekly, belongs in standard treatment.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Psychiatry, 83(5), 535-542
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41779424/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.0026
Verification note
Verified publication date: 1 May 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 May 1")
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Stubbs, B., Ma, R., Teychenne, M., Kinnafick, F., Mossaheb, N., Korman, N., Trott, M., Rosenbaum, S., Schuch, F., Firth, J., & Vancampfort, D. (2026). Integrating physical activity into routine psychiatric care: A review. JAMA Psychiatry, 83(5), 535-542. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.0026
REF-117 Paper, guideline or statement

Management of adult insomnia in Australia: A joint position statement

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Sleep
  • Mental and physical health

Joint Australian position statement from six professional bodies, including the sleep, general practice, psychology, pharmacy and nursing peaks, names multi-component cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia as first line for adults. Sleep hygiene alone is judged inadequate for chronic insomnia and medicines are reserved for adjunct or second line use.

Full APA reference

Sweetman, A., Putland, S., Meaklim, H., Winter, S., Kennedy, G., Lack, L., Bartlett, D., ... Ree, M. (2026). Management of adult insomnia in Australia: A joint position statement of the Australasian Sleep Association, Sleep Health Foundation, Royal Australian College of General Practitioners, Australian Psychological Society, Pharmaceutical Society of Australia, and Australian Primary Health Care Nurses Association. Sleep Advances. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleepadvances/zpag086

Verified publication date: 29 July 2026

All fields
ID
REF-117
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sweetman, A., Putland, S., Meaklim, H., Winter, S., Kennedy, G., Lack, L., Bartlett, D., ... Ree, M. (Australasian Sleep Association, Sleep Health Foundation, RACGP, Australian Psychological Society, Pharmaceutical Society of Australia, and Australian Primary Health Care Nurses Association)
Year
2026
Title
Management of adult insomnia in Australia: A joint position statement
Description
Joint Australian position statement from six professional bodies, including the sleep, general practice, psychology, pharmacy and nursing peaks, names multi-component cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia as first line for adults. Sleep hygiene alone is judged inadequate for chronic insomnia and medicines are reserved for adjunct or second line use.
Publication or publisher
Sleep Advances (Oxford University Press)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://academic.oup.com/sleepadvances/advance-article/doi/10.1093/sleepadvances/zpag086/8746744
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleepadvances/zpag086
Verification note
Verified publication date: 29 July 2026
Full APA reference
Sweetman, A., Putland, S., Meaklim, H., Winter, S., Kennedy, G., Lack, L., Bartlett, D., ... Ree, M. (2026). Management of adult insomnia in Australia: A joint position statement of the Australasian Sleep Association, Sleep Health Foundation, Royal Australian College of General Practitioners, Australian Psychological Society, Pharmaceutical Society of Australia, and Australian Primary Health Care Nurses Association. Sleep Advances. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleepadvances/zpag086
REF-118 Paper, guideline or statement

Launching into Tasmania's Health Revolution: Tasmania's 20-year preventive health strategy

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Tasmania's 20 year preventive health strategy, The Health Revolution, covers 2026 to 2046 and was released in June 2026 with $20 million over four years and a first action plan. Shaped by almost 6,000 contributors, it names stable housing, secure jobs, education, safe transport, healthy food and social connection as conditions that shape health.

Full APA reference

Archer, B. (2026, June 4). Launching into Tasmania's Health Revolution [Media release]. Tasmanian Government. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution

Verified publication date: 4 June 2026

All fields
ID
REF-118
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Tasmanian Government (Archer, B., Minister for Health, Mental Health and Wellbeing)
Year
2026
Title
Launching into Tasmania's Health Revolution: Tasmania's 20-year preventive health strategy
Description
Tasmania's 20 year preventive health strategy, The Health Revolution, covers 2026 to 2046 and was released in June 2026 with $20 million over four years and a first action plan. Shaped by almost 6,000 contributors, it names stable housing, secure jobs, education, safe transport, healthy food and social connection as conditions that shape health.
Publication or publisher
Tasmanian Government, Office of the Premier
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution
Verification note
Verified publication date: 4 June 2026
Related items
GOV-138
Full APA reference
Archer, B. (2026, June 4). Launching into Tasmania's Health Revolution [Media release]. Tasmanian Government. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution
Same document as
GOV-138
REF-119 Paper, guideline or statement

Rethink and Beyond: discussion paper for Tasmania's next mental health strategy

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Tasmanian Department of Health opened consultation on 24 March 2026 on Rethink and Beyond, the mental health strategy following Rethink 2015 to 2025 and Rethink 2020. It draws on an October 2025 roundtable and the preventive health consultation, and asks how to build a more integrated, person centred system with stronger lived experience leadership.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Government. (2026, March 24). Rethink and Beyond: Consultation on Tasmania's next mental health strategy. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy

Mental health plan. Operative period: Consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026. Status: Draft or consultation. Evidence on page: Release states consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026; the preceding Rethink 2020 State Plan 2020-2025 has ended

All fields
ID
REF-119
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2026
Title
Rethink and Beyond: discussion paper for Tasmania's next mental health strategy
Description
The Tasmanian Department of Health opened consultation on 24 March 2026 on Rethink and Beyond, the mental health strategy following Rethink 2015 to 2025 and Rethink 2020. It draws on an October 2025 roundtable and the preventive health consultation, and asks how to build a more integrated, person centred system with stronger lived experience leadership.
Publication or publisher
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy
Verification note
Mental health plan. Operative period: Consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026. Status: Draft or consultation. Evidence on page: Release states consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026; the preceding Rethink 2020 State Plan 2020-2025 has ended
Related items
GOV-139
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Government. (2026, March 24). *Rethink and Beyond: Consultation on Tasmania's next mental health strategy*. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy
Same document as
GOV-139
REF-120 Paper, guideline or statement

Smoking, nutrition, alcohol, physical activity (SNAP): A population health guide to behavioural risk factors in general practice (2nd ed.)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

RACGP practice guide helps general practice teams address four behavioural risk factors, smoking, nutrition, alcohol and physical activity, with recommendations graded A to D against NHMRC evidence levels I to IV and practice points where evidence is thin. Gives Australian clinicians a structured routine for risk factor conversations.

Full APA reference

The Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2015). Smoking, nutrition, alcohol, physical activity (SNAP): A population health guide to behavioural risk factors in general practice (2nd ed.). RACGP. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/snap
All fields
ID
REF-120
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
The Royal Australian College of General Practitioners
Year
2015
Title
Smoking, nutrition, alcohol, physical activity (SNAP): A population health guide to behavioural risk factors in general practice (2nd ed.)
Description
RACGP practice guide helps general practice teams address four behavioural risk factors, smoking, nutrition, alcohol and physical activity, with recommendations graded A to D against NHMRC evidence levels I to IV and practice points where evidence is thin. Gives Australian clinicians a structured routine for risk factor conversations.
Publication or publisher
RACGP
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Guidelines
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/snap
Full APA reference
The Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2015). Smoking, nutrition, alcohol, physical activity (SNAP): A population health guide to behavioural risk factors in general practice (2nd ed.). RACGP. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/snap
REF-121 Paper, guideline or statement

Measuring wellbeing: The LSF Dashboard

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The New Zealand Treasury's Living Standards Framework dashboard, refreshed in April 2022 and updated with data to March 2025, reports wellbeing indicators across individual and collective wellbeing, institutions and governance, and national wealth. Indicators break down by sex, ethnicity and region and feed the Wellbeing Report required every four years under the Public Finance Act.

Full APA reference

The Treasury New Zealand. (2025). Measuring wellbeing: The LSF Dashboard. Retrieved from https://www.treasury.govt.nz/information-and-services/nz-economy/higher-living-standards/measuring-wellbeing-lsf-dashboard
All fields
ID
REF-121
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
The Treasury New Zealand
Year
2025
Title
Measuring wellbeing: The LSF Dashboard
Description
The New Zealand Treasury's Living Standards Framework dashboard, refreshed in April 2022 and updated with data to March 2025, reports wellbeing indicators across individual and collective wellbeing, institutions and governance, and national wealth. Indicators break down by sex, ethnicity and region and feed the Wellbeing Report required every four years under the Public Finance Act.
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.treasury.govt.nz/information-and-services/nz-economy/higher-living-standards/measuring-wellbeing-lsf-dashboard
Full APA reference
The Treasury New Zealand. (2025). Measuring wellbeing: The LSF Dashboard. Retrieved from https://www.treasury.govt.nz/information-and-services/nz-economy/higher-living-standards/measuring-wellbeing-lsf-dashboard
REF-122 Paper, guideline or statement

Complementary medicine in psychology practice: an analysis of Australian psychology guidelines and a comparison with other psychology associations from English speaking countries

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Document analysis of 58 Australian psychology guidance documents, 42 from the APS, 14 from the Psychology Board and 2 from AHPRA, found no direct reference to complementary medicine, unlike overseas associations. Leaves psychologists without guidance on scope of practice, informed consent and traditional healing practices clients already use.

Full APA reference

Thomson-Casey, C., Adams, J., & McIntyre, E. (2022). Complementary medicine in psychology practice: an analysis of Australian psychology guidelines and a comparison with other psychology associations from English speaking countries. BMC Complementary Medicine and Therapies, 22(1), 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12906-022-03620-2
All fields
ID
REF-122
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Thomson-Casey, C., Adams, J., & McIntyre, E
Year
2022
Title
Complementary medicine in psychology practice: an analysis of Australian psychology guidelines and a comparison with other psychology associations from English speaking countries
Description
Document analysis of 58 Australian psychology guidance documents, 42 from the APS, 14 from the Psychology Board and 2 from AHPRA, found no direct reference to complementary medicine, unlike overseas associations. Leaves psychologists without guidance on scope of practice, informed consent and traditional healing practices clients already use.
Publication or publisher
BMC Complementary Medicine and Therapies, 22(1), 1–13
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12906-022-03620-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12906-022-03620-2
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Thomson-Casey, C., Adams, J., & McIntyre, E. (2022). Complementary medicine in psychology practice: an analysis of Australian psychology guidelines and a comparison with other psychology associations from English speaking countries. BMC Complementary Medicine and Therapies, 22(1), 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12906-022-03620-2
REF-123 Paper, guideline or statement

Brain, lifestyle and environmental pathways linking physical and mental health

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

UK Biobank study of 18,083 adults aged 40 to 70, with brain scans taken 4 to 14 years after health assessment, traced how the heart, lungs, liver, kidneys, muscles, immune and metabolic systems shape later depression, anxiety and neuroticism partly through brain structure. Maps lifestyle as an upstream lever.

Full APA reference

Tian, Y. E., Cole, J. H., Bullmore, E. T., & Zalesky, A. (2024). Brain, lifestyle and environmental pathways linking physical and mental health. Nature Mental Health, 2(10), 1250–1261. https://doi.org/10.1038/S44220-024-00303-
All fields
ID
REF-123
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Tian, Y. E., Cole, J. H., Bullmore, E. T., & Zalesky, A
Year
2024
Title
Brain, lifestyle and environmental pathways linking physical and mental health
Description
UK Biobank study of 18,083 adults aged 40 to 70, with brain scans taken 4 to 14 years after health assessment, traced how the heart, lungs, liver, kidneys, muscles, immune and metabolic systems shape later depression, anxiety and neuroticism partly through brain structure. Maps lifestyle as an upstream lever.
Publication or publisher
Nature Mental Health, 2(10), 1250–1261
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1038/S44220-024-00303-
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/S44220-024-00303-
Full APA reference
Tian, Y. E., Cole, J. H., Bullmore, E. T., & Zalesky, A. (2024). Brain, lifestyle and environmental pathways linking physical and mental health. Nature Mental Health, 2(10), 1250–1261. https://doi.org/10.1038/S44220-024-00303-
REF-124 Paper, guideline or statement

Adherence to the MIND diet is inversely associated with odds and severity of anxiety disorders: a case–control study

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Case control study in Iran compared 85 adults with psychiatrist diagnosed anxiety disorders against 170 healthy controls, scoring diet against 14 MIND diet components. Closer adherence went with lower anxiety severity on the GAD-7, adding to the case for dietary counselling within mental health care.

Full APA reference

Torabynasab, K., Shahinfar, H., Jazayeri, S., Effatpanah, M., Azadbakht, L., & Abolghasemi, J. (2023). Adherence to the MIND diet is inversely associated with odds and severity of anxiety disorders: a case–control study. BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–9. https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-04776-Y
All fields
ID
REF-124
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Torabynasab, K., Shahinfar, H., Jazayeri, S., Effatpanah, M., Azadbakht, L., & Abolghasemi, J
Year
2023
Title
Adherence to the MIND diet is inversely associated with odds and severity of anxiety disorders: a case–control study
Description
Case control study in Iran compared 85 adults with psychiatrist diagnosed anxiety disorders against 170 healthy controls, scoring diet against 14 MIND diet components. Closer adherence went with lower anxiety severity on the GAD-7, adding to the case for dietary counselling within mental health care.
Publication or publisher
BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–9
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-04776-Y
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-04776-Y
Full APA reference
Torabynasab, K., Shahinfar, H., Jazayeri, S., Effatpanah, M., Azadbakht, L., & Abolghasemi, J. (2023). Adherence to the MIND diet is inversely associated with odds and severity of anxiety disorders: a case–control study. BMC Psychiatry 2023 23:1, 23(1), 1–9. https://doi.org/10.1186/S12888-023-04776-Y
REF-125 Paper, guideline or statement

Optimising the effects of physical activity on mental health and wellbeing: A joint consensus statement from Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Australian consensus statement developed by eight experts for Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society concludes mental health benefits depend on the type, setting, social context, domain and delivery style of activity, not the dose alone. Practitioners are urged to prioritise enjoyment, autonomy and social connection.

Full APA reference

Vella SA, Aidman E, Teychenne M, Smith JJ, Swann C, Rosenbaum S, White RL, Lubans DR. Optimising the effects of physical activity on mental health and wellbeing: A joint consensus statement from Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society. J Sci Med Sport. 2023 Feb;26(2):132-139. doi: 10.1016/j.jsams.2023.01.001. Epub 2023 Jan 8. PMID: 36737260.

Link confirmed 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-125
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Vella, S. A., Aidman, E., Teychenne, M., Smith, J. J., Swann, C., Rosenbaum, S., White, R. L., & Lubans, D. R.
Year
2023
Title
Optimising the effects of physical activity on mental health and wellbeing: A joint consensus statement from Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society
Description
Australian consensus statement developed by eight experts for Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society concludes mental health benefits depend on the type, setting, social context, domain and delivery style of activity, not the dose alone. Practitioners are urged to prioritise enjoyment, autonomy and social connection.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Science and Medicine in Sport, 26(2), 132-139
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Position statements, white papers and strategy
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/36737260/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jsams.2023.01.001
Verification note
Link confirmed 3 September 2026.
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Vella SA, Aidman E, Teychenne M, Smith JJ, Swann C, Rosenbaum S, White RL, Lubans DR. Optimising the effects of physical activity on mental health and wellbeing: A joint consensus statement from Sports Medicine Australia and the Australian Psychological Society. J Sci Med Sport. 2023 Feb;26(2):132-139. doi: 10.1016/j.jsams.2023.01.001. Epub 2023 Jan 8. PMID: 36737260.
REF-126 Paper, guideline or statement

Multimorbidity patterns influence mobility disability prevention in frail older adults from the SPRINTT trial

  • Journal article
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Secondary analysis of the SPRINTT randomised trial, involving 1,199 frail adults over 70 across 11 European countries, found the exercise and nutrition program cut mobility disability or death by 22 per cent overall and 35 per cent for those with psychiatric multimorbidity. Cardiometabolic and respiratory groups gained almost nothing.

Full APA reference

Vetrano, D. L., Gregorio, C., Triolo, F., Soraci, L., Cherubini, A., Tosato, M., von Haehling, S., Marzetti, E., Landi, F., & Calvani, R. (2026). Multimorbidity patterns influence mobility disability prevention in frail older adults from the SPRINTT trial. Nature Aging. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1038/s43587-026-01188-x

Verified publication date: 31 August 2026. Post hoc analysis of the SPRINTT randomised trial, 1,199 adults aged over 70 with physical frailty, low muscle mass and at least two chronic conditions across 11 European countries. The physical activity and nutrition intervention cut mobility disability or death by 22 per cent overall, by 35 per cent in the psychiatric multimorbidity pattern, and showed essentially no benefit in the cardiometabolic and respiratory patterns.

All fields
ID
REF-126
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Vetrano, D. L., Gregorio, C., Triolo, F., Soraci, L., Cherubini, A., Tosato, M., von Haehling, S., Marzetti, E., Landi, F., & Calvani, R.
Year
2026
Title
Multimorbidity patterns influence mobility disability prevention in frail older adults from the SPRINTT trial
Description
Secondary analysis of the SPRINTT randomised trial, involving 1,199 frail adults over 70 across 11 European countries, found the exercise and nutrition program cut mobility disability or death by 22 per cent overall and 35 per cent for those with psychiatric multimorbidity. Cardiometabolic and respiratory groups gained almost nothing.
Publication or publisher
Nature Aging (advance online publication)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nature.com/articles/s43587-026-01188-x
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s43587-026-01188-x
Verification note
Verified publication date: 31 August 2026. Post hoc analysis of the SPRINTT randomised trial, 1,199 adults aged over 70 with physical frailty, low muscle mass and at least two chronic conditions across 11 European countries. The physical activity and nutrition intervention cut mobility disability or death by 22 per cent overall, by 35 per cent in the psychiatric multimorbidity pattern, and showed essentially no benefit in the cardiometabolic and respiratory patterns.
Related items
REF-506; REF-507
Full APA reference
Vetrano, D. L., Gregorio, C., Triolo, F., Soraci, L., Cherubini, A., Tosato, M., von Haehling, S., Marzetti, E., Landi, F., & Calvani, R. (2026). Multimorbidity patterns influence mobility disability prevention in frail older adults from the SPRINTT trial. Nature Aging. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1038/s43587-026-01188-x
REF-127 Paper, guideline or statement

Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2019–2023

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Victoria's third statutory public health and wellbeing plan covers 2019 to 2023 and names 10 priorities, with four focus areas: tackling climate change, increasing healthy eating, increasing active living and reducing tobacco related harm. Remaining priorities include improving mental wellbeing, and actions include integrating healthy lifestyle counselling and referrals into routine healthcare.

Full APA reference

Victorian Government Department of Health and Human Services. (2019). Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2019–2023. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2019-2023
All fields
ID
REF-127
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Victorian Government Department of Health and Human Services
Year
2019
Title
Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2019–2023
Description
Victoria's third statutory public health and wellbeing plan covers 2019 to 2023 and names 10 priorities, with four focus areas: tackling climate change, increasing healthy eating, increasing active living and reducing tobacco related harm. Remaining priorities include improving mental wellbeing, and actions include integrating healthy lifestyle counselling and referrals into routine healthcare.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2019-2023
Full APA reference
Victorian Government Department of Health and Human Services. (2019). Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2019–2023. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2019-2023
REF-128 Paper, guideline or statement

Western Australian Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The WA Mental Health Commission's strategy for 2026 to 2031 is built on aspirations across four domains, people, community, services and leadership, and five strategic pillars spanning prevention through to specialist services. Statewide consultation in late 2024 shaped it, and delivery runs through published Annual Implementation and Monitoring Plans tracking Commission and partner agency actions.

Full APA reference

WA Mental Health Commission. (2026). Western Australian mental health and alcohol and other drugs strategy 2026-2031. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/

Mental health plan. Operative period: 2026-2031. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Commission page states "last updated: 6 July 2026"; the strategy site refers to "the final document" and to annual implementation and monitoring plans, replacing the 2020-2030 Services Plan

All fields
ID
REF-128
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
WA Mental Health Commission
Year
2026
Title
Western Australian Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031
Description
The WA Mental Health Commission's strategy for 2026 to 2031 is built on aspirations across four domains, people, community, services and leadership, and five strategic pillars spanning prevention through to specialist services. Statewide consultation in late 2024 shaped it, and delivery runs through published Annual Implementation and Monitoring Plans tracking Commission and partner agency actions.
Publication or publisher
WA Mental Health Commission
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.mhc.wa.gov.au/our-initiatives/our-projects/mental-health-and-alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2026-2031
Verification note
Mental health plan. Operative period: 2026-2031. Status: Current. Evidence on page: Commission page states "last updated: 6 July 2026"; the strategy site refers to "the final document" and to annual implementation and monitoring plans, replacing the 2020-2030 Services Plan
Related items
GOV-109
Full APA reference
WA Mental Health Commission. (2026). *Western Australian mental health and alcohol and other drugs strategy 2026-2031*. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/
Same document as
GOV-109
REF-129 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of a Lifestyle Intervention for People With a Severe Mental Illness in Dutch Outpatient Mental Health Care: A Randomized Clinical Trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Pragmatic cluster randomised trial in 224 Dutch adults with severe mental illness and a body mass index of 27 or more found a 12 month group lifestyle program produced 3.3 kg more weight loss than usual care. Attendance drove results, so services must actively support engagement.

Full APA reference

Walburg, F. S., Berno Van Meijel, ;, Hoekstra, T., Kol, J., Laura, ;, Pape, M., Willemina De Joode, J., van Tulder, M., & Adriaanse, M. (2023). Effectiveness of a Lifestyle Intervention for People With a Severe Mental Illness in Dutch Outpatient Mental Health Care: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA Psychiatry. https://doi.org/10.1001/JAMAPSYCHIATRY.2023.1566
All fields
ID
REF-129
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Walburg, F. S., Berno Van Meijel, ;, Hoekstra, T., Kol, J., Laura, ;, Pape, M., Willemina De Joode, J., van Tulder, M., & Adriaanse, M
Year
2023
Title
Effectiveness of a Lifestyle Intervention for People With a Severe Mental Illness in Dutch Outpatient Mental Health Care: A Randomized Clinical Trial
Description
Pragmatic cluster randomised trial in 224 Dutch adults with severe mental illness and a body mass index of 27 or more found a 12 month group lifestyle program produced 3.3 kg more weight loss than usual care. Attendance drove results, so services must actively support engagement.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Psychiatry
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1001/JAMAPSYCHIATRY.2023.1566
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/JAMAPSYCHIATRY.2023.1566
Full APA reference
Walburg, F. S., Berno Van Meijel, ;, Hoekstra, T., Kol, J., Laura, ;, Pape, M., Willemina De Joode, J., van Tulder, M., & Adriaanse, M. (2023). Effectiveness of a Lifestyle Intervention for People With a Severe Mental Illness in Dutch Outpatient Mental Health Care: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA Psychiatry. https://doi.org/10.1001/JAMAPSYCHIATRY.2023.1566
REF-130 Paper, guideline or statement

Association between green space exposure and elderly health: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • General health

Systematic review and meta-analysis of 27 studies on green space and older people's health reported lower odds of Alzheimer's disease (0.86) and depression (0.72), with mixed cardiovascular results. Supports nature based prescribing and greener neighbourhoods as low cost levers for ageing bodies and minds.

Full APA reference

Wang, M., Che, Y., Tan, X., Zhang, N., Yu, S., & Yan, P. (2026). Association between green space exposure and elderly health: A systematic review and meta-analysis. BMC Public Health, 26(1), 491. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-26137-y

Verified publication date: 8 January 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Jan 8")

All fields
ID
REF-130
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, M., Che, Y., Tan, X., Zhang, N., Yu, S., & Yan, P.
Year
2026
Title
Association between green space exposure and elderly health: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Systematic review and meta-analysis of 27 studies on green space and older people's health reported lower odds of Alzheimer's disease (0.86) and depression (0.72), with mixed cardiovascular results. Supports nature based prescribing and greener neighbourhoods as low cost levers for ageing bodies and minds.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 26(1), 491
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41507873/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-26137-y
Verification note
Verified publication date: 8 January 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Jan 8")
Full APA reference
Wang, M., Che, Y., Tan, X., Zhang, N., Yu, S., & Yan, P. (2026). Association between green space exposure and elderly health: A systematic review and meta-analysis. BMC Public Health, 26(1), 491. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-26137-y
REF-131 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025 to 2035

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Welsh Government's 2025 to 2035 strategy, replacing Together for Mental Health, sets four vision statements: the building blocks are in place, everyone has knowledge and confidence, a connected system, and seamless services. Blocks include safe homes, good jobs and enough money, and public bodies must assess impacts on mental as well as physical health.

Full APA reference

Welsh Government. (2025). Mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025 to 2035. Retrieved from https://www.gov.wales/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2035
All fields
ID
REF-131
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Welsh Government
Year
2025
Title
Mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025 to 2035
Description
The Welsh Government's 2025 to 2035 strategy, replacing Together for Mental Health, sets four vision statements: the building blocks are in place, everyone has knowledge and confidence, a connected system, and seamless services. Blocks include safe homes, good jobs and enough money, and public bodies must assess impacts on mental as well as physical health.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Wales
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.gov.wales/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2035
Full APA reference
Welsh Government. (2025). Mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025 to 2035. Retrieved from https://www.gov.wales/mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2035
REF-132 Paper, guideline or statement

Health promotion strategic framework 2022–2026

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

WA Health's Population and Preventive Health Directorate guides chronic disease and injury prevention from 2022 to 2026 through four priorities: reducing tobacco use, healthy eating and active living, reducing harmful alcohol use, and preventing injury. Its goal is equitable improvement in health behaviours and environments, with partners outside the health system invited to use it.

Full APA reference

Western Australian Department of Health. (2022). Health promotion strategic framework 2022–2026. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework
All fields
ID
REF-132
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Western Australian Department of Health
Year
2022
Title
Health promotion strategic framework 2022–2026
Description
WA Health's Population and Preventive Health Directorate guides chronic disease and injury prevention from 2022 to 2026 through four priorities: reducing tobacco use, healthy eating and active living, reducing harmful alcohol use, and preventing injury. Its goal is equitable improvement in health behaviours and environments, with partners outside the health system invited to use it.
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Frameworks and policies
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework
Related items
GOV-112
Full APA reference
Western Australian Department of Health. (2022). Health promotion strategic framework 2022–2026. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework
Same document as
GOV-112
REF-133 Paper, guideline or statement

Spending at least 120 minutes a week in nature is associated with good health and wellbeing

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Cross sectional survey analysis of about 20,000 English adults in 2014 to 2016 found at least 120 minutes of recreational nature contact weekly, however it was accumulated, was linked to better self rated health and wellbeing. Gives practitioners a simple, equitable weekly dose to suggest.

Full APA reference

White, M. P., Alcock, I., Grellier, J., Wheeler, B. W., Hartig, T., Warber, S. L., Bone, A., Depledge, M. H., & Fleming, L. E. (2019). Spending at least 120 minutes a week in nature is associated with good health and wellbeing. Scientific Reports, 9, 7730. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-019-44097-3
All fields
ID
REF-133
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
White, M. P., Alcock, I., Grellier, J., Wheeler, B. W., Hartig, T., Warber, S. L., Bone, A., Depledge, M. H., & Fleming, L. E
Year
2019
Title
Spending at least 120 minutes a week in nature is associated with good health and wellbeing
Description
Cross sectional survey analysis of about 20,000 English adults in 2014 to 2016 found at least 120 minutes of recreational nature contact weekly, however it was accumulated, was linked to better self rated health and wellbeing. Gives practitioners a simple, equitable weekly dose to suggest.
Publication or publisher
Scientific Reports, 9, 7730
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-019-44097-3
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-019-44097-3
Full APA reference
White, M. P., Alcock, I., Grellier, J., Wheeler, B. W., Hartig, T., Warber, S. L., Bone, A., Depledge, M. H., & Fleming, L. E. (2019). Spending at least 120 minutes a week in nature is associated with good health and wellbeing. Scientific Reports, 9, 7730. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-019-44097-3
REF-134 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO housing and health guidelines

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • Social determinants of health

WHO guidelines built on commissioned systematic reviews, recommending action on crowding, indoor cold and heat, home injury hazards and accessibility, alongside existing guidance on air quality, noise, lead and radon. Anchors housing as a modifiable social determinant demanding cooperation beyond the health sector.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2018). WHO housing and health guidelines. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241550376
All fields
ID
REF-134
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2018
Title
WHO housing and health guidelines
Description
WHO guidelines built on commissioned systematic reviews, recommending action on crowding, indoor cold and heat, home injury hazards and accessibility, alongside existing guidance on air quality, noise, lead and radon. Anchors housing as a modifiable social determinant demanding cooperation beyond the health sector.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241550376
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2018). WHO housing and health guidelines. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241550376
REF-135 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

Global WHO guidelines advise adults to accumulate 150 to 300 minutes of moderate or 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous activity weekly, children an average of 60 minutes daily, and everyone to limit sedentary time. Sets the benchmark for activity advice across ages and abilities.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2020). WHO guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour. WHO. Retrieved from here https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240015128

Link confirmed 3 September 2026. This is the WHO issuing publication. The same guidelines are also published as a peer reviewed article, recorded at REF-298.

All fields
ID
REF-135
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2020
Title
WHO guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour
Description
Global WHO guidelines advise adults to accumulate 150 to 300 minutes of moderate or 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous activity weekly, children an average of 60 minutes daily, and everyone to limit sedentary time. Sets the benchmark for activity advice across ages and abilities.
Publication or publisher
WHO
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240015128
Verification note
Link confirmed 3 September 2026. This is the WHO issuing publication. The same guidelines are also published as a peer reviewed article, recorded at REF-298.
Related items
REF-298; REF-450
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2020). WHO guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour. WHO. Retrieved from here https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240015128
REF-136 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being, 2022 revision

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Revised WHO guideline recommends self-care interventions for every country and economic setting, citing a projected shortage of 11 million health workers by 2030 and 400 million people lacking essential services. Legitimises supported self-management as a mainstream part of lifestyle and wellbeing care.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2022). WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being, 2022 revision. WHO. Retrieved from WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being

Link confirmed 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-136
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2022
Title
WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being, 2022 revision
Description
Revised WHO guideline recommends self-care interventions for every country and economic setting, citing a projected shortage of 11 million health workers by 2030 and 400 million people lacking essential services. Legitimises supported self-management as a mainstream part of lifestyle and wellbeing care.
Publication or publisher
WHO
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Reference list only
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/357828
Verification note
Link confirmed 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2022). WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being, 2022 revision. WHO. Retrieved from WHO guideline on self-care interventions for health and well-being
REF-137 Paper, guideline or statement

Annual progress report towards the implementation of the Roadmap for health and well-being in Central Asia (2022–2025)

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

WHO Europe's 2023 report tracks the first year of the Roadmap for health and well being in Central Asia, endorsed in September 2022 by health ministers of Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan, covering 11 action areas and 32 reform initiatives. Progress includes a Mental Health Coalition flagship, obesity policy dialogues and tobacco cessation training.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2023). Annual progress report towards the implementation of the Roadmap for health and well-being in Central Asia (2022–2025). WHO. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-7596-47363-69541
All fields
ID
REF-137
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2023
Title
Annual progress report towards the implementation of the Roadmap for health and well-being in Central Asia (2022–2025)
Description
WHO Europe's 2023 report tracks the first year of the Roadmap for health and well being in Central Asia, endorsed in September 2022 by health ministers of Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan, covering 11 action areas and 32 reform initiatives. Progress includes a Mental Health Coalition flagship, obesity policy dialogues and tobacco cessation training.
Publication or publisher
WHO
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-7596-47363-69541
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2023). Annual progress report towards the implementation of the Roadmap for health and well-being in Central Asia (2022–2025). WHO. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-7596-47363-69541
REF-138 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO releases new guidance on monitoring the social determinants of health equity

  • Web resource
  • Primary study or article
  • Social connection
  • Social determinants of health

WHO announcement of an operational framework for monitoring social determinants of health equity, responding to World Health Assembly resolution WHA74.16 of 2021, offering an indicator menu and a step by step national monitoring process. Gives governments practical tools to measure inequity and act on it.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2024). WHO releases new guidance on monitoring the social determinants of health equity. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/news/item/19-02-2024-who-releases-new-guidance-on-monitoring-the-social-determinants-of-health-equity
All fields
ID
REF-138
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2024
Title
WHO releases new guidance on monitoring the social determinants of health equity
Description
WHO announcement of an operational framework for monitoring social determinants of health equity, responding to World Health Assembly resolution WHA74.16 of 2021, offering an indicator menu and a step by step national monitoring process. Gives governments practical tools to measure inequity and act on it.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.who.int/news/item/19-02-2024-who-releases-new-guidance-on-monitoring-the-social-determinants-of-health-equity
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2024). WHO releases new guidance on monitoring the social determinants of health equity. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/news/item/19-02-2024-who-releases-new-guidance-on-monitoring-the-social-determinants-of-health-equity
REF-139 Paper, guideline or statement

Risk reduction of cognitive decline and dementia: WHO guidelines

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Second edition of WHO's dementia risk reduction guidelines, updating the 2019 version with recommendations on healthy behaviours, managing conditions that raise risk, reducing environmental exposures and tailored multidomain interventions. Positions brain health as a lifestyle and policy target rather than only a clinical one.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). Risk reduction of cognitive decline and dementia: WHO guidelines. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123557

Verified publication date: 15 July 2026 (WHO launch news item "New WHO guidelines: up to 45% of dementia risk could be prevented or delayed", 15-07-2026)

All fields
ID
REF-139
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Risk reduction of cognitive decline and dementia: WHO guidelines
Description
Second edition of WHO's dementia risk reduction guidelines, updating the 2019 version with recommendations on healthy behaviours, managing conditions that raise risk, reducing environmental exposures and tailored multidomain interventions. Positions brain health as a lifestyle and policy target rather than only a clinical one.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123557
Verification note
Verified publication date: 15 July 2026 (WHO launch news item "New WHO guidelines: up to 45% of dementia risk could be prevented or delayed", 15-07-2026)
Related items
REF-457; REF-472; REF-578
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). Risk reduction of cognitive decline and dementia: WHO guidelines. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123557
REF-140 Paper, guideline or statement

Implementing what works in alcohol policy: Progress report on the SAFER initiative

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

WHO progress report on the SAFER initiative since its 2018 launch, covering five cost effective alcohol measures spanning availability, drink driving, treatment access, advertising and pricing, with country experiences from Uganda, Nepal and Ireland. Shows population level policy reduces harm, and warns against commercial interference.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). Implementing what works in alcohol policy: Progress report on the SAFER initiative. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240120587

Verified publication date: 26 June 2026 (WHO news item "New WHO report charts progress on the SAFER alcohol policy initiative", 26-06-2026)

All fields
ID
REF-140
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Implementing what works in alcohol policy: Progress report on the SAFER initiative
Description
WHO progress report on the SAFER initiative since its 2018 launch, covering five cost effective alcohol measures spanning availability, drink driving, treatment access, advertising and pricing, with country experiences from Uganda, Nepal and Ireland. Shows population level policy reduces harm, and warns against commercial interference.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240120587
Verification note
Verified publication date: 26 June 2026 (WHO news item "New WHO report charts progress on the SAFER alcohol policy initiative", 26-06-2026)
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). Implementing what works in alcohol policy: Progress report on the SAFER initiative. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240120587
REF-141 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychological self-help interventions: Delivering self-help for individuals, featuring Step-by-Step and Doing What Matters in Times of Stress

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

WHO implementation guide for delivering psychological self-help, featuring Step-by-Step and Doing What Matters in Times of Stress, each trialled with only 15 minutes of non specialist support across five weeks. Offers scalable options where more than a billion people live with mental ill health.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026, June 1). WHO launches new guide to help scale psychological self-help. https://www.who.int/news/item/01-06-2026-who-launches-new-guide-to-help-scale-psychological-self-help

Verified publication date: 1 June 2026

All fields
ID
REF-141
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Psychological self-help interventions: Delivering self-help for individuals, featuring Step-by-Step and Doing What Matters in Times of Stress
Description
WHO implementation guide for delivering psychological self-help, featuring Step-by-Step and Doing What Matters in Times of Stress, each trialled with only 15 minutes of non specialist support across five weeks. Offers scalable options where more than a billion people live with mental ill health.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/news/item/01-06-2026-who-launches-new-guide-to-help-scale-psychological-self-help
Verification note
Verified publication date: 1 June 2026
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026, June 1). WHO launches new guide to help scale psychological self-help. https://www.who.int/news/item/01-06-2026-who-launches-new-guide-to-help-scale-psychological-self-help
REF-142 Paper, guideline or statement

Global status report on cancer 2026: The future we choose together

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

WHO's 280 page global cancer assessment tracks incidence, mortality, survival, risk factors and health system capacity, then sets seven recommendations around three shifts: better capabilities, better protections and better value. Frames prevention and equity, not treatment alone, as the decisive levers for cancer outcomes.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). Global status report on cancer 2026: The future we choose together. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123977

Verified publication date: 8 July 2026 (WHO launch news item dated 08-07-2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012397-7)

All fields
ID
REF-142
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Global status report on cancer 2026: The future we choose together
Description
WHO's 280 page global cancer assessment tracks incidence, mortality, survival, risk factors and health system capacity, then sets seven recommendations around three shifts: better capabilities, better protections and better value. Frames prevention and equity, not treatment alone, as the decisive levers for cancer outcomes.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123977
Verification note
Verified publication date: 8 July 2026 (WHO launch news item dated 08-07-2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012397-7)
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). Global status report on cancer 2026: The future we choose together. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123977
REF-143 Paper, guideline or statement

Promoting physical activity and healthy diets for healthy ageing in the WHO European Region

  • Web resource
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

WHO Europe report argues that activity levels and diet quality in later life still shape function, mobility and independence, and showcases innovations Member States can adapt and scale. Backs investment in lifestyle programs for older adults so rising life expectancy brings more healthy years.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. Regional Office for Europe. (2023). Promoting physical activity and healthy diets for healthy ageing in the WHO European Region. WHO. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-8002-47770-70520
All fields
ID
REF-143
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
World Health Organization. Regional Office for Europe
Year
2023
Title
Promoting physical activity and healthy diets for healthy ageing in the WHO European Region
Description
WHO Europe report argues that activity levels and diet quality in later life still shape function, mobility and independence, and showcases innovations Member States can adapt and scale. Backs investment in lifestyle programs for older adults so rising life expectancy brings more healthy years.
Publication or publisher
WHO
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-8002-47770-70520
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. Regional Office for Europe. (2023). Promoting physical activity and healthy diets for healthy ageing in the WHO European Region. WHO. Retrieved from https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/WHO-EURO-2023-8002-47770-70520
REF-144 Paper, guideline or statement

Transdiagnostic effects of combined sleep-circadian interventions on depressive symptoms and sleep outcomes in adults with mental disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Meta-analysis of 11 randomised trials, each with 33 to 396 participants, of combined sleep and circadian treatments for adults with mental disorders found moderate reductions in depressive symptoms (standardised mean difference 0.51) and better treatment response (risk ratio 1.68). Supports targeting sleep timing to improve mood.

Full APA reference

Xu, J., Wang, B., Zhu, W., Song, P., & Ao, H. (2026). Transdiagnostic effects of combined sleep-circadian interventions on depressive symptoms and sleep outcomes in adults with mental disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1901978. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1901978

Verified publication date: 6 August 2026

All fields
ID
REF-144
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Xu, J., Wang, B., Zhu, W., Song, P., & Ao, H.
Year
2026
Title
Transdiagnostic effects of combined sleep-circadian interventions on depressive symptoms and sleep outcomes in adults with mental disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials
Description
Meta-analysis of 11 randomised trials, each with 33 to 396 participants, of combined sleep and circadian treatments for adults with mental disorders found moderate reductions in depressive symptoms (standardised mean difference 0.51) and better treatment response (risk ratio 1.68). Supports targeting sleep timing to improve mood.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1901978
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/articles/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1901978/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1901978
Verification note
Verified publication date: 6 August 2026
Full APA reference
Xu, J., Wang, B., Zhu, W., Song, P., & Ao, H. (2026). Transdiagnostic effects of combined sleep-circadian interventions on depressive symptoms and sleep outcomes in adults with mental disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 17, 1901978. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2026.1901978
REF-145 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of health, behavioral factors, and incident dementia: A prospective cohort study

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Prospective cohort of 17,303 dementia free American adults followed from 2006 to 2020 recorded 1,942 dementia cases; people with five or more social disadvantages plus two or more risky behaviours had roughly nine times the risk. Argues social conditions and behaviour must be addressed together.

Full APA reference

Zhang, H., Ding, C., Xu, Y., Hao, H., Gong, Y., An, T., Hu, Z., Li, Y., Wang, X., Jiang, S., Hao, M., & Li, X. (2026). Social determinants of health, behavioral factors, and incident dementia: A prospective cohort study. Alzheimer's Research and Therapy, 18(1), 107. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13195-026-02037-0

Verified publication date: 30 March 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Mar 30")

All fields
ID
REF-145
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, H., Ding, C., Xu, Y., Hao, H., Gong, Y., An, T., Hu, Z., Li, Y., Wang, X., Jiang, S., Hao, M., & Li, X.
Year
2026
Title
Social determinants of health, behavioral factors, and incident dementia: A prospective cohort study
Description
Prospective cohort of 17,303 dementia free American adults followed from 2006 to 2020 recorded 1,942 dementia cases; people with five or more social disadvantages plus two or more risky behaviours had roughly nine times the risk. Argues social conditions and behaviour must be addressed together.
Publication or publisher
Alzheimer's Research and Therapy, 18(1), 107
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41906138/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13195-026-02037-0
Verification note
Verified publication date: 30 March 2026 (PubMed record: "2026 Mar 30")
Full APA reference
Zhang, H., Ding, C., Xu, Y., Hao, H., Gong, Y., An, T., Hu, Z., Li, Y., Wang, X., Jiang, S., Hao, M., & Li, X. (2026). Social determinants of health, behavioral factors, and incident dementia: A prospective cohort study. Alzheimer's Research and Therapy, 18(1), 107. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13195-026-02037-0
REF-146 Paper, guideline or statement

Accelerometry-measured prolonged and interrupted sedentary behavior and cancer incidence and mortality: A cohort study of 91,292 UK Biobank participants

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Cohort of 91,292 UK Biobank adults wearing accelerometers, followed a median 12.4 years, found each extra daily hour of prolonged sitting raised cancer death risk by 9 percent, while broken up sitting lowered it by 18 percent. Supports advising frequent movement breaks, including light activity.

Full APA reference

Zhou, Z., Trost, S. G., Ryde, G. C., Parra-Soto, S., Fang, Z., Xu, C., et al. (2026). Accelerometry-measured prolonged and interrupted sedentary behavior and cancer incidence and mortality: A cohort study of 91,292 UK Biobank participants. PLOS Medicine, 23(7), e1004767. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1004767

Verified publication date: 2 July 2026 (page states "July 2, 2026")

All fields
ID
REF-146
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhou, Z., Trost, S. G., Ryde, G. C., Parra-Soto, S., Fang, Z., Xu, C., et al.
Year
2026
Title
Accelerometry-measured prolonged and interrupted sedentary behavior and cancer incidence and mortality: A cohort study of 91,292 UK Biobank participants
Description
Cohort of 91,292 UK Biobank adults wearing accelerometers, followed a median 12.4 years, found each extra daily hour of prolonged sitting raised cancer death risk by 9 percent, while broken up sitting lowered it by 18 percent. Supports advising frequent movement breaks, including light activity.
Publication or publisher
PLOS Medicine, 23(7), e1004767
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://journals.plos.org/plosmedicine/article?id=10.1371/journal.pmed.1004767
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1004767
Verification note
Verified publication date: 2 July 2026 (page states "July 2, 2026")
Full APA reference
Zhou, Z., Trost, S. G., Ryde, G. C., Parra-Soto, S., Fang, Z., Xu, C., et al. (2026). Accelerometry-measured prolonged and interrupted sedentary behavior and cancer incidence and mortality: A cohort study of 91,292 UK Biobank participants. PLOS Medicine, 23(7), e1004767. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1004767
REF-147 Paper, guideline or statement

Identifying enablers and barriers to referral, uptake and completion of lifestyle modification programmes: A rapid literature review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Rapid review of 29 documents, 14 of them grey literature, on adult lifestyle modification programs for chronic disease prevention. Clinician knowledge, role beliefs and payment shape referral, while transport, family support and depression shape patient uptake and completion, so implementation must address professionals and clients together.

Full APA reference

Zurynski, Y., Smith, C., Siette, J., Nic Giolla Easpaig, B., Simons, M., & Knaggs, G. T. (2021). Identifying enablers and barriers to referral, uptake and completion of lifestyle modification programmes: A rapid literature review. BMJ Open, 11(3), e045094. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2020-045094
All fields
ID
REF-147
Source list
Added 2025 (original list)
Year added to library
2025
Author or organisation
Zurynski, Y., Smith, C., Siette, J., Nic Giolla Easpaig, B., Simons, M., & Knaggs, G. T
Year
2021
Title
Identifying enablers and barriers to referral, uptake and completion of lifestyle modification programmes: A rapid literature review
Description
Rapid review of 29 documents, 14 of them grey literature, on adult lifestyle modification programs for chronic disease prevention. Clinician knowledge, role beliefs and payment shape referral, while transport, family support and depression shape patient uptake and completion, so implementation must address professionals and clients together.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open, 11(3), e045094
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
International
In curated section
Yes
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2020-045094
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2020-045094
Full APA reference
Zurynski, Y., Smith, C., Siette, J., Nic Giolla Easpaig, B., Simons, M., & Knaggs, G. T. (2021). Identifying enablers and barriers to referral, uptake and completion of lifestyle modification programmes: A rapid literature review. BMJ Open, 11(3), e045094. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2020-045094
REF-148 Paper, guideline or statement

Self-determination theory informed research for promoting physical activity: Contributions, debates, and future directions

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Ntoumanis and Moller appraise self determination theory applied to physical activity promotion, finding intervention effects that are small to moderate and mediated mainly by rising autonomous motivation, need supportive interpersonal styles and competence satisfaction. Motivational quality, rather than activity counts alone, decides whether movement persists long enough to benefit physical and mental health.

Full APA reference

Ntoumanis, N., & Moller, A. C. (2025). Self-determination theory informed research for promoting physical activity: Contributions, debates, and future directions. Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 80, 102879. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2025.102879

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40383282

All fields
ID
REF-148
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ntoumanis, N., & Moller, A. C.
Year
2025
Title
Self-determination theory informed research for promoting physical activity: Contributions, debates, and future directions
Description
Ntoumanis and Moller appraise self determination theory applied to physical activity promotion, finding intervention effects that are small to moderate and mediated mainly by rising autonomous motivation, need supportive interpersonal styles and competence satisfaction. Motivational quality, rather than activity counts alone, decides whether movement persists long enough to benefit physical and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 80, 102879
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40383282/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2025.102879
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40383282
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Ntoumanis, N., & Moller, A. C. (2025). Self-determination theory informed research for promoting physical activity: Contributions, debates, and future directions. *Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 80*, 102879. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2025.102879
REF-149 Paper, guideline or statement

Athlete mental health help-seeking: A systematic review and meta-analysis of rates, barriers and facilitators

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Twenty two studies were synthesised, with eleven contributing rates and a pooled formal help seeking proportion of 22.4 per cent across 3,415 athletes, while stigma, fear of deselection and confidentiality concerns acted as barriers. Sporting culture works as a social determinant of whether physically active people reach mental health care.

Full APA reference

Cosh, S. M., McNeil, D. G., Jeffreys, A., Clark, L., & Tully, P. J. (2024). Athlete mental health help-seeking: A systematic review and meta-analysis of rates, barriers and facilitators. Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 71, 102586. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2023.102586

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38128709

All fields
ID
REF-149
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cosh, S. M., McNeil, D. G., Jeffreys, A., Clark, L., & Tully, P. J.
Year
2024
Title
Athlete mental health help-seeking: A systematic review and meta-analysis of rates, barriers and facilitators
Description
Twenty two studies were synthesised, with eleven contributing rates and a pooled formal help seeking proportion of 22.4 per cent across 3,415 athletes, while stigma, fear of deselection and confidentiality concerns acted as barriers. Sporting culture works as a social determinant of whether physically active people reach mental health care.
Publication or publisher
Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 71, 102586
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38128709/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2023.102586
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38128709
Full APA reference
Cosh, S. M., McNeil, D. G., Jeffreys, A., Clark, L., & Tully, P. J. (2024). Athlete mental health help-seeking: A systematic review and meta-analysis of rates, barriers and facilitators. *Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 71*, 102586. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychsport.2023.102586
REF-150 Paper, guideline or statement

International Olympic Committee consensus-driven guidelines for athlete mental health support at sporting events

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

An International Olympic Committee expert panel used an eight stage RAND UCLA Appropriateness Method process to agree recommendations for event based athlete mental health support, covering pre event planning, anti stigma education, a mental fitness decompression area and in person care by qualified clinicians. Elite sport becomes an environment requiring designed mental health infrastructure.

Full APA reference

Mountjoy, M., Sloan, S., Ali-Zada, M., Bindra, A., Blauwet, C., Budgett, R., ... Gouttebarge, V. (2025). International Olympic Committee consensus-driven guidelines for athlete mental health support at sporting events. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 59(21), 1459-1470. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-109646

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40701786

All fields
ID
REF-150
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mountjoy, M., Sloan, S., Ali-Zada, M., Bindra, A., Blauwet, C., Budgett, R., ... Gouttebarge, V.
Year
2025
Title
International Olympic Committee consensus-driven guidelines for athlete mental health support at sporting events
Description
An International Olympic Committee expert panel used an eight stage RAND UCLA Appropriateness Method process to agree recommendations for event based athlete mental health support, covering pre event planning, anti stigma education, a mental fitness decompression area and in person care by qualified clinicians. Elite sport becomes an environment requiring designed mental health infrastructure.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, 59(21), 1459-1470
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
Other or unspecified
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40701786/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-109646
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40701786
Full APA reference
Mountjoy, M., Sloan, S., Ali-Zada, M., Bindra, A., Blauwet, C., Budgett, R., ... Gouttebarge, V. (2025). International Olympic Committee consensus-driven guidelines for athlete mental health support at sporting events. *British Journal of Sports Medicine, 59*(21), 1459-1470. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2025-109646
REF-151 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of reducing sedentary behaviour by increasing physical activity, on cognitive function, brain function and structure across the lifespan: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty five randomised trials with 1,289 participants were pooled, and interrupting prolonged sitting with physical activity improved cognitive function acutely (g = 0.17, 95 per cent CI 0.05 to 0.29), with benefit confined to multiple activity bouts. Sitting time is treated as a modifiable determinant of brain health across the lifespan.

Full APA reference

Feter, N., Ligeza, T. S., Bashir, N., Shanmugam, R. J., Montero Herrera, B., Aldabbagh, T., ... Pindus, D. M. (2024). Effects of reducing sedentary behaviour by increasing physical activity, on cognitive function, brain function and structure across the lifespan: a systematic review and meta-analysis. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 58(21), 1295-1306. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2024-108444

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39197948

All fields
ID
REF-151
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Feter, N., Ligeza, T. S., Bashir, N., Shanmugam, R. J., Montero Herrera, B., Aldabbagh, T., ... Pindus, D. M.
Year
2024
Title
Effects of reducing sedentary behaviour by increasing physical activity, on cognitive function, brain function and structure across the lifespan: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Twenty five randomised trials with 1,289 participants were pooled, and interrupting prolonged sitting with physical activity improved cognitive function acutely (g = 0.17, 95 per cent CI 0.05 to 0.29), with benefit confined to multiple activity bouts. Sitting time is treated as a modifiable determinant of brain health across the lifespan.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, 58(21), 1295-1306
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39197948/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2024-108444
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39197948
Full APA reference
Feter, N., Ligeza, T. S., Bashir, N., Shanmugam, R. J., Montero Herrera, B., Aldabbagh, T., ... Pindus, D. M. (2024). Effects of reducing sedentary behaviour by increasing physical activity, on cognitive function, brain function and structure across the lifespan: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *British Journal of Sports Medicine, 58*(21), 1295-1306. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2024-108444
REF-152 Paper, guideline or statement

Barriers and facilitators to exercise adherence in community-dwelling older adults: A mixed-methods systematic review using the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Sixty four studies were synthesised through the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework, yielding 54 influences on exercise adherence among community dwelling older adults and 38 candidate behaviour change techniques for intervention design. Adherence is reframed as a capability, opportunity and motivation problem rather than a matter of individual willpower.

Full APA reference

Yang, Y., Gao, Y., An, R., & Wan, Q. (2024). Barriers and facilitators to exercise adherence in community-dwelling older adults: A mixed-methods systematic review using the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework. International Journal of Nursing Studies, 157, 104808. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2024.104808

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38823146

All fields
ID
REF-152
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Yang, Y., Gao, Y., An, R., & Wan, Q.
Year
2024
Title
Barriers and facilitators to exercise adherence in community-dwelling older adults: A mixed-methods systematic review using the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework
Description
Sixty four studies were synthesised through the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework, yielding 54 influences on exercise adherence among community dwelling older adults and 38 candidate behaviour change techniques for intervention design. Adherence is reframed as a capability, opportunity and motivation problem rather than a matter of individual willpower.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Nursing Studies, 157, 104808
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38823146/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2024.104808
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38823146
Related items
REF-509; REF-573
Full APA reference
Yang, Y., Gao, Y., An, R., & Wan, Q. (2024). Barriers and facilitators to exercise adherence in community-dwelling older adults: A mixed-methods systematic review using the COM-B model and Theoretical Domains Framework. *International Journal of Nursing Studies, 157*, 104808. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2024.104808
REF-153 Paper, guideline or statement

BPS DSEP position statement: Psychological skills training in youth sport

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The British Psychological Society Division of Sport and Exercise Psychology reviews psychological skills training across childhood, early adolescence and mid to late adolescence, closing with 10 recommendations for youth sport organisations, training and accrediting bodies, researchers and practitioners. Developmentally staged practice guidance links sport participation with psychosocial wellbeing in young people.

Full APA reference

Thrower, S. N., Barker, J., Bruton, A. M., Coffee, P., Cumming, J., Harwood, C., ... Mellalieu, S. D. (2024). BPS DSEP position statement: Psychological skills training in youth sport. Sport and Exercise Psychology Review, 19(1), 4-20. https://doi.org/10.53841/bpssepr.2024.19.1.4

Repository record and full abstract read on Brunel University Research Archive, dated 15 July 2024, with volume, issue and page range taken from the deposited publication details

All fields
ID
REF-153
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Thrower, S. N., Barker, J., Bruton, A. M., Coffee, P., Cumming, J., Harwood, C., ... Mellalieu, S. D.
Year
2024
Title
BPS DSEP position statement: Psychological skills training in youth sport
Description
The British Psychological Society Division of Sport and Exercise Psychology reviews psychological skills training across childhood, early adolescence and mid to late adolescence, closing with 10 recommendations for youth sport organisations, training and accrediting bodies, researchers and practitioners. Developmentally staged practice guidance links sport participation with psychosocial wellbeing in young people.
Publication or publisher
Sport and Exercise Psychology Review, 19(1), 4-20
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Sport and exercise psychology
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://bura.brunel.ac.uk/handle/2438/29100
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.53841/bpssepr.2024.19.1.4
Verification note
Repository record and full abstract read on Brunel University Research Archive, dated 15 July 2024, with volume, issue and page range taken from the deposited publication details
Full APA reference
Thrower, S. N., Barker, J., Bruton, A. M., Coffee, P., Cumming, J., Harwood, C., ... Mellalieu, S. D. (2024). BPS DSEP position statement: Psychological skills training in youth sport. *Sport and Exercise Psychology Review, 19*(1), 4-20. https://doi.org/10.53841/bpssepr.2024.19.1.4
REF-154 Paper, guideline or statement

The Behaviour Change Technique Ontology: Transforming the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Marques and colleagues rebuilt the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1 as a formal ontology of 247 techniques in 20 higher level groups, tested for reliable annotation of intervention reports and released in computer readable form. Shared technique labels let lifestyle intervention content be compared across trials, disciplines and health outcomes.

Full APA reference

Marques, M. M., Wright, A. J., Corker, E., Johnston, M., West, R., Hastings, J., ... Michie, S. (2023). The Behaviour Change Technique Ontology: Transforming the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1. Wellcome Open Research, 8, 308. https://doi.org/10.12688/wellcomeopenres.19363.2

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37593567, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10427801

All fields
ID
REF-154
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marques, M. M., Wright, A. J., Corker, E., Johnston, M., West, R., Hastings, J., ... Michie, S.
Year
2023
Title
The Behaviour Change Technique Ontology: Transforming the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1
Description
Marques and colleagues rebuilt the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1 as a formal ontology of 247 techniques in 20 higher level groups, tested for reliable annotation of intervention reports and released in computer readable form. Shared technique labels let lifestyle intervention content be compared across trials, disciplines and health outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Wellcome Open Research, 8, 308
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10427801/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.12688/wellcomeopenres.19363.2
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37593567, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10427801
Full APA reference
Marques, M. M., Wright, A. J., Corker, E., Johnston, M., West, R., Hastings, J., ... Michie, S. (2023). The Behaviour Change Technique Ontology: Transforming the Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy v1. *Wellcome Open Research, 8*, 308. https://doi.org/10.12688/wellcomeopenres.19363.2
REF-155 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of behavioural interventions with motivational interviewing on physical activity outcomes in adults: systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Ninety seven randomised trials with 27,811 adults were pooled, and behavioural interventions containing motivational interviewing beat comparators for total physical activity (SMD 0.45, 95 per cent CI 0.33 to 0.65, about 1,323 extra steps a day). Counselling style is an active ingredient of activity promotion in healthy and clinical populations.

Full APA reference

Zhu, S., Sinha, D., Kirk, M., Michalopoulou, M., Hajizadeh, A., Wren, G., ... Astbury, N. M. (2024). Effectiveness of behavioural interventions with motivational interviewing on physical activity outcomes in adults: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ, 386, e078713. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-078713

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38986547, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11234249

All fields
ID
REF-155
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhu, S., Sinha, D., Kirk, M., Michalopoulou, M., Hajizadeh, A., Wren, G., ... Astbury, N. M.
Year
2024
Title
Effectiveness of behavioural interventions with motivational interviewing on physical activity outcomes in adults: systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Ninety seven randomised trials with 27,811 adults were pooled, and behavioural interventions containing motivational interviewing beat comparators for total physical activity (SMD 0.45, 95 per cent CI 0.33 to 0.65, about 1,323 extra steps a day). Counselling style is an active ingredient of activity promotion in healthy and clinical populations.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 386, e078713
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11234249/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-078713
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38986547, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11234249
Full APA reference
Zhu, S., Sinha, D., Kirk, M., Michalopoulou, M., Hajizadeh, A., Wren, G., ... Astbury, N. M. (2024). Effectiveness of behavioural interventions with motivational interviewing on physical activity outcomes in adults: systematic review and meta-analysis. *BMJ, 386*, e078713. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2023-078713
REF-156 Paper, guideline or statement

Time to Form a Habit: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Health Behaviour Habit Formation and Its Determinants

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Twenty experimental studies with 2,601 participants were pooled, and reported times to reach automaticity in health behaviours ranged from 59 to 66 days by median and 106 to 154 days by mean, with wide individual variation. Realistic habit timelines govern how long lifestyle programmes need to keep supporting people.

Full APA reference

Singh, B., Murphy, A., Maher, C., & Smith, A. E. (2024). Time to Form a Habit: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Health Behaviour Habit Formation and Its Determinants. Healthcare, 12(23), 2488. https://doi.org/10.3390/healthcare12232488

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39685110, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11641623

All fields
ID
REF-156
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Singh, B., Murphy, A., Maher, C., & Smith, A. E.
Year
2024
Title
Time to Form a Habit: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Health Behaviour Habit Formation and Its Determinants
Description
Twenty experimental studies with 2,601 participants were pooled, and reported times to reach automaticity in health behaviours ranged from 59 to 66 days by median and 106 to 154 days by mean, with wide individual variation. Realistic habit timelines govern how long lifestyle programmes need to keep supporting people.
Publication or publisher
Healthcare, 12(23), 2488
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11641623/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/healthcare12232488
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39685110, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11641623
Full APA reference
Singh, B., Murphy, A., Maher, C., & Smith, A. E. (2024). Time to Form a Habit: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Health Behaviour Habit Formation and Its Determinants. *Healthcare, 12*(23), 2488. https://doi.org/10.3390/healthcare12232488
REF-157 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychoneuroimmunology: An Introduction to Immune-to-Brain Communication and Its Implications for Clinical Psychology

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Bower and Kuhlman introduce immune to brain signalling for clinical psychologists, tracing inflammation effects on positive and negative valence systems, social processes, cognition and fatigue, and linking early life adversity to later neuroimmune risk. Psychosocial and mind body interventions are set out as levers on the biology joining social conditions to mental disorder.

Full APA reference

Bower, J. E., & Kuhlman, K. R. (2023). Psychoneuroimmunology: An Introduction to Immune-to-Brain Communication and Its Implications for Clinical Psychology. Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 19, 331-359. https://doi.org/10.1146/annurev-clinpsy-080621-045153

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 36791765

All fields
ID
REF-157
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bower, J. E., & Kuhlman, K. R.
Year
2023
Title
Psychoneuroimmunology: An Introduction to Immune-to-Brain Communication and Its Implications for Clinical Psychology
Description
Bower and Kuhlman introduce immune to brain signalling for clinical psychologists, tracing inflammation effects on positive and negative valence systems, social processes, cognition and fatigue, and linking early life adversity to later neuroimmune risk. Psychosocial and mind body interventions are set out as levers on the biology joining social conditions to mental disorder.
Publication or publisher
Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 19, 331-359
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/36791765/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1146/annurev-clinpsy-080621-045153
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 36791765
Related items
REF-508
Full APA reference
Bower, J. E., & Kuhlman, K. R. (2023). Psychoneuroimmunology: An Introduction to Immune-to-Brain Communication and Its Implications for Clinical Psychology. *Annual Review of Clinical Psychology, 19*, 331-359. https://doi.org/10.1146/annurev-clinpsy-080621-045153
REF-158 Paper, guideline or statement

Towards a consensus definition of allostatic load: a multi-cohort, multi-system, multi-biomarker individual participant data (IPD) meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Individual participant data on 67,126 adults from 13 cohorts and 40 biomarkers across 12 physiological systems were pooled to define allostatic load, with reliable markers found in nine systems including C reactive protein, resting heart rate and dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate. A consistent measure lets life course stress exposure be quantified beside lifestyle and health outcomes.

Full APA reference

McCrory, C., McLoughlin, S., Layte, R., NiCheallaigh, C., O'Halloran, A. M., Barros, H., ... Kenny, R. A. (2023). Towards a consensus definition of allostatic load: a multi-cohort, multi-system, multi-biomarker individual participant data (IPD) meta-analysis. Psychoneuroendocrinology, 153, 106117. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psyneuen.2023.106117

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37100008, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10620736

All fields
ID
REF-158
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McCrory, C., McLoughlin, S., Layte, R., NiCheallaigh, C., O'Halloran, A. M., Barros, H., ... Kenny, R. A.
Year
2023
Title
Towards a consensus definition of allostatic load: a multi-cohort, multi-system, multi-biomarker individual participant data (IPD) meta-analysis
Description
Individual participant data on 67,126 adults from 13 cohorts and 40 biomarkers across 12 physiological systems were pooled to define allostatic load, with reliable markers found in nine systems including C reactive protein, resting heart rate and dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate. A consistent measure lets life course stress exposure be quantified beside lifestyle and health outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Psychoneuroendocrinology, 153, 106117
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Wellbeing measurement; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10620736/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psyneuen.2023.106117
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37100008, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10620736
Related items
REF-508
Full APA reference
McCrory, C., McLoughlin, S., Layte, R., NiCheallaigh, C., O'Halloran, A. M., Barros, H., ... Kenny, R. A. (2023). Towards a consensus definition of allostatic load: a multi-cohort, multi-system, multi-biomarker individual participant data (IPD) meta-analysis. *Psychoneuroendocrinology, 153*, 106117. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psyneuen.2023.106117
REF-159 Paper, guideline or statement

Health coaching improves physical activity, disability and pain in adults with chronic non-cancer pain: a systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty six randomised trials with 4,403 adults living with chronic non cancer pain showed health coaching produced small gains in physical activity (SMD 0.21), disability (SMD 0.25) and pain (SMD 0.31), with certainty from very low to moderate. Coached lifestyle support sits squarely at the physical and mental health interface.

Full APA reference

Barnet-Hepples, T., Dario, A., Oliveira, J., Maher, C., Tiedemann, A., & Amorim, A. (2024). Health coaching improves physical activity, disability and pain in adults with chronic non-cancer pain: a systematic review. Journal of Physiotherapy, 70(2), 115-123. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jphys.2024.01.001

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38494402

All fields
ID
REF-159
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Barnet-Hepples, T., Dario, A., Oliveira, J., Maher, C., Tiedemann, A., & Amorim, A.
Year
2024
Title
Health coaching improves physical activity, disability and pain in adults with chronic non-cancer pain: a systematic review
Description
Twenty six randomised trials with 4,403 adults living with chronic non cancer pain showed health coaching produced small gains in physical activity (SMD 0.21), disability (SMD 0.25) and pain (SMD 0.31), with certainty from very low to moderate. Coached lifestyle support sits squarely at the physical and mental health interface.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Physiotherapy, 70(2), 115-123
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38494402/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jphys.2024.01.001
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38494402
Full APA reference
Barnet-Hepples, T., Dario, A., Oliveira, J., Maher, C., Tiedemann, A., & Amorim, A. (2024). Health coaching improves physical activity, disability and pain in adults with chronic non-cancer pain: a systematic review. *Journal of Physiotherapy, 70*(2), 115-123. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jphys.2024.01.001
REF-160 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of breathwork on stress and mental health: A meta-analysis of randomised-controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Twelve randomised controlled trials with 785 adults were pooled, and breathwork lowered self reported stress against non breathwork controls (g = -0.35, 95 per cent CI -0.55 to -0.14), with comparable effects for anxiety and depressive symptoms. Brief regulated breathing becomes a low cost, teachable component of lifestyle based mental health care.

Full APA reference

Fincham, G. W., Strauss, C., Montero-Marin, J., & Cavanagh, K. (2023). Effect of breathwork on stress and mental health: A meta-analysis of randomised-controlled trials. Scientific Reports, 13(1), 432. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-27247-y

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 36624160, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC9828383

All fields
ID
REF-160
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fincham, G. W., Strauss, C., Montero-Marin, J., & Cavanagh, K.
Year
2023
Title
Effect of breathwork on stress and mental health: A meta-analysis of randomised-controlled trials
Description
Twelve randomised controlled trials with 785 adults were pooled, and breathwork lowered self reported stress against non breathwork controls (g = -0.35, 95 per cent CI -0.55 to -0.14), with comparable effects for anxiety and depressive symptoms. Brief regulated breathing becomes a low cost, teachable component of lifestyle based mental health care.
Publication or publisher
Scientific Reports, 13(1), 432
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC9828383/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-27247-y
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 36624160, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC9828383
Full APA reference
Fincham, G. W., Strauss, C., Montero-Marin, J., & Cavanagh, K. (2023). Effect of breathwork on stress and mental health: A meta-analysis of randomised-controlled trials. *Scientific Reports, 13*(1), 432. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-27247-y
REF-161 Paper, guideline or statement

Individual participant data systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials assessing adult mindfulness-based programmes for mental health promotion in non-clinical settings

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Individual participant data from 13 trials and 2,371 adults in non clinical settings showed mindfulness based programmes reduced psychological distress against passive controls one to six months later (SMD -0.32, 95 per cent CI -0.41 to -0.24), with no effect against active controls. Universal mental health promotion is tested at the level of who benefits.

Full APA reference

Galante, J., Friedrich, C., Dalgleish, T., Jones, P. B., White, I. R., & Collaboration of Mindfulness Trials (CoMinT) (2023). Individual participant data systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials assessing adult mindfulness-based programmes for mental health promotion in non-clinical settings. Nature Mental Health, 1(7), 462-476. https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-023-00081-5

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37867573, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC7615230

All fields
ID
REF-161
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Galante, J., Friedrich, C., Dalgleish, T., Jones, P. B., White, I. R., & Collaboration of Mindfulness Trials (CoMinT)
Year
2023
Title
Individual participant data systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials assessing adult mindfulness-based programmes for mental health promotion in non-clinical settings
Description
Individual participant data from 13 trials and 2,371 adults in non clinical settings showed mindfulness based programmes reduced psychological distress against passive controls one to six months later (SMD -0.32, 95 per cent CI -0.41 to -0.24), with no effect against active controls. Universal mental health promotion is tested at the level of who benefits.
Publication or publisher
Nature Mental Health, 1(7), 462-476
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC7615230/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-023-00081-5
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37867573, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC7615230
Full APA reference
Galante, J., Friedrich, C., Dalgleish, T., Jones, P. B., White, I. R., & Collaboration of Mindfulness Trials (CoMinT) (2023). Individual participant data systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials assessing adult mindfulness-based programmes for mental health promotion in non-clinical settings. *Nature Mental Health, 1*(7), 462-476. https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-023-00081-5
REF-162 Paper, guideline or statement

The effects of mind-body exercise on anxiety and depression in older adults: a systematic review and network meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Forty two randomised trials with 2,974 older adults were pooled, and mind body exercise beat control for anxiety (SMD -0.87) and depression (SMD -0.52), with tai chi ranked first for both outcomes in the network analysis. Movement modalities that older people will actually sustain are compared head to head.

Full APA reference

Dong, Y., Zhang, X., Zhao, R., Cao, L., Kuang, X., & Yao, J. (2024). The effects of mind-body exercise on anxiety and depression in older adults: a systematic review and network meta-analysis. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15, 1305295. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1305295

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38384592, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10879425

All fields
ID
REF-162
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dong, Y., Zhang, X., Zhao, R., Cao, L., Kuang, X., & Yao, J.
Year
2024
Title
The effects of mind-body exercise on anxiety and depression in older adults: a systematic review and network meta-analysis
Description
Forty two randomised trials with 2,974 older adults were pooled, and mind body exercise beat control for anxiety (SMD -0.87) and depression (SMD -0.52), with tai chi ranked first for both outcomes in the network analysis. Movement modalities that older people will actually sustain are compared head to head.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15, 1305295
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10879425/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1305295
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38384592, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10879425
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
Dong, Y., Zhang, X., Zhao, R., Cao, L., Kuang, X., & Yao, J. (2024). The effects of mind-body exercise on anxiety and depression in older adults: a systematic review and network meta-analysis. *Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15*, 1305295. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1305295
REF-163 Paper, guideline or statement

Exploring the benefits of traditional Chinese exercises (Tai Chi and Qigong) on the anxiety and depression of older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Thirty one studies with 2,501 older adults were pooled, and traditional Chinese exercise improved anxiety (SMD -0.93) and depression (SMD -1.14), with 12 to 16 weeks optimal for anxiety and 24 weeks for depression despite very high heterogeneity. Dose parameters are what practitioners need when prescribing culturally familiar movement.

Full APA reference

Dong, Y., Pang, D., Xiang, J., Chao, G., & Kuang, X. (2025). Exploring the benefits of traditional Chinese exercises (Tai Chi and Qigong) on the anxiety and depression of older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Medicine, 104(12), e41908. https://doi.org/10.1097/MD.0000000000041908

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40128068, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11936652

All fields
ID
REF-163
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dong, Y., Pang, D., Xiang, J., Chao, G., & Kuang, X.
Year
2025
Title
Exploring the benefits of traditional Chinese exercises (Tai Chi and Qigong) on the anxiety and depression of older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Thirty one studies with 2,501 older adults were pooled, and traditional Chinese exercise improved anxiety (SMD -0.93) and depression (SMD -1.14), with 12 to 16 weeks optimal for anxiety and 24 weeks for depression despite very high heterogeneity. Dose parameters are what practitioners need when prescribing culturally familiar movement.
Publication or publisher
Medicine, 104(12), e41908
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11936652/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/MD.0000000000041908
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40128068, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11936652
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
Dong, Y., Pang, D., Xiang, J., Chao, G., & Kuang, X. (2025). Exploring the benefits of traditional Chinese exercises (Tai Chi and Qigong) on the anxiety and depression of older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *Medicine, 104*(12), e41908. https://doi.org/10.1097/MD.0000000000041908
REF-164 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of Yoga Nidra on Stress, Anxiety, and Depression: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Seventy three studies with 5,201 participants were pooled, and yoga nidra improved stress (Hedges g -0.80 against active comparators), anxiety (-1.35) and depression (-0.69), though the authors caution that low methodological quality probably inflates these estimates. Honest appraisal of a popular relaxation practice is scarce and needed.

Full APA reference

Ghai, S., Odyniec, P., & Ghai, I. (2026). Effects of Yoga Nidra on Stress, Anxiety, and Depression: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 1556(1), e70149. https://doi.org/10.1111/nyas.70149

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41327816, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12917937

All fields
ID
REF-164
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ghai, S., Odyniec, P., & Ghai, I.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of Yoga Nidra on Stress, Anxiety, and Depression: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis
Description
Seventy three studies with 5,201 participants were pooled, and yoga nidra improved stress (Hedges g -0.80 against active comparators), anxiety (-1.35) and depression (-0.69), though the authors caution that low methodological quality probably inflates these estimates. Honest appraisal of a popular relaxation practice is scarce and needed.
Publication or publisher
Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 1556(1), e70149
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12917937/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/nyas.70149
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41327816, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12917937
Full APA reference
Ghai, S., Odyniec, P., & Ghai, I. (2026). Effects of Yoga Nidra on Stress, Anxiety, and Depression: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. *Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 1556*(1), e70149. https://doi.org/10.1111/nyas.70149
REF-165 Paper, guideline or statement

Reaching Veterans with Cooccurring Mental Health Conditions Through the VA Whole Health System of Care

  • Journal article
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Electronic records for 9,689 veterans across 18 pilot sites showed that those with more mental health diagnoses were more likely to use Whole Health coaching and complementary and integrative health services, with adjusted odds up to 2.36 for three diagnoses versus none. Whole person service models reach the people carrying the heaviest load.

Full APA reference

Reed, D. E., Engel, C. C., Etingen, B., Hyde, J., Bokhour, B. G., & Zeliadt, S. B. (2025). Reaching Veterans with Cooccurring Mental Health Conditions Through the VA Whole Health System of Care. Journal of Integrative and Complementary Medicine, 31(5), 463-470. https://doi.org/10.1089/jicm.2024.0766

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39928497, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC13170756

All fields
ID
REF-165
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Reed, D. E., Engel, C. C., Etingen, B., Hyde, J., Bokhour, B. G., & Zeliadt, S. B.
Year
2025
Title
Reaching Veterans with Cooccurring Mental Health Conditions Through the VA Whole Health System of Care
Description
Electronic records for 9,689 veterans across 18 pilot sites showed that those with more mental health diagnoses were more likely to use Whole Health coaching and complementary and integrative health services, with adjusted odds up to 2.36 for three diagnoses versus none. Whole person service models reach the people carrying the heaviest load.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Integrative and Complementary Medicine, 31(5), 463-470
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13170756/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1089/jicm.2024.0766
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39928497, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC13170756
Full APA reference
Reed, D. E., Engel, C. C., Etingen, B., Hyde, J., Bokhour, B. G., & Zeliadt, S. B. (2025). Reaching Veterans with Cooccurring Mental Health Conditions Through the VA Whole Health System of Care. *Journal of Integrative and Complementary Medicine, 31*(5), 463-470. https://doi.org/10.1089/jicm.2024.0766
REF-166 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle psychiatry: a conceptual framework for application in mental healthcare and support

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Forty three contributors from 15 countries built a conceptual framework for lifestyle psychiatry through iterative collaboration, defining core domains, naming behaviour change challenges specific to mental health populations and pressing for multilevel, equity oriented approaches. A shared definition is the precondition for consistent research, training and service design in this field.

Full APA reference

Deenik, J., Vermeulen, J. M., Teasdale, S. B., Schuch, F. B., Marx, W., Perry, B., ... Firth, J. (2025). Lifestyle psychiatry: a conceptual framework for application in mental healthcare and support. BMJ Mental Health, 28(1), e301980. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjment-2025-301980

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41290362, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12658517

All fields
ID
REF-166
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Deenik, J., Vermeulen, J. M., Teasdale, S. B., Schuch, F. B., Marx, W., Perry, B., ... Firth, J.
Year
2025
Title
Lifestyle psychiatry: a conceptual framework for application in mental healthcare and support
Description
Forty three contributors from 15 countries built a conceptual framework for lifestyle psychiatry through iterative collaboration, defining core domains, naming behaviour change challenges specific to mental health populations and pressing for multilevel, equity oriented approaches. A shared definition is the precondition for consistent research, training and service design in this field.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Mental Health, 28(1), e301980
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12658517/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjment-2025-301980
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41290362, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12658517
Related items
REF-167; REF-076; REF-196; REF-464; REF-496
Full APA reference
Deenik, J., Vermeulen, J. M., Teasdale, S. B., Schuch, F. B., Marx, W., Perry, B., ... Firth, J. (2025). Lifestyle psychiatry: a conceptual framework for application in mental healthcare and support. *BMJ Mental Health, 28*(1), e301980. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjment-2025-301980
REF-167 Paper, guideline or statement

Priorities and opportunities for lifestyle psychiatry: consensus from the LifePsych Society

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Following its inaugural 2024 summit, the LifePsych Society sets priorities for lifestyle psychiatry, naming implementation science, culturally responsive co creation with low and middle income country partners, training of community lay health workers and digital monitoring of activity, sleep and heart rate variability. Global implementation, not further efficacy trials, is the stated bottleneck.

Full APA reference

Firth, J., Deenik, J., Castellanos, N., Diez, G. G., Schuch, F. B., Scrivano, L., ... LifePsych Society Consortium (2025). Priorities and opportunities for lifestyle psychiatry: consensus from the LifePsych Society. World Psychiatry, 24(2), 277-279. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.21325

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40371793, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12079361

All fields
ID
REF-167
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Firth, J., Deenik, J., Castellanos, N., Diez, G. G., Schuch, F. B., Scrivano, L., ... LifePsych Society Consortium
Year
2025
Title
Priorities and opportunities for lifestyle psychiatry: consensus from the LifePsych Society
Description
Following its inaugural 2024 summit, the LifePsych Society sets priorities for lifestyle psychiatry, naming implementation science, culturally responsive co creation with low and middle income country partners, training of community lay health workers and digital monitoring of activity, sleep and heart rate variability. Global implementation, not further efficacy trials, is the stated bottleneck.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 24(2), 277-279
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12079361/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.21325
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40371793, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12079361
Full APA reference
Firth, J., Deenik, J., Castellanos, N., Diez, G. G., Schuch, F. B., Scrivano, L., ... LifePsych Society Consortium (2025). Priorities and opportunities for lifestyle psychiatry: consensus from the LifePsych Society. *World Psychiatry, 24*(2), 277-279. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.21325
REF-168 Paper, guideline or statement

Long-term efficacy of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia (CBT-I) on depressive symptoms: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Fifty three articles reporting on 13,608 adults with insomnia were pooled, and cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia still reduced depressive symptoms at three months (d = -0.35), six months (d = -0.32) and twelve months (d = -0.25), with effects fading slowly. Treating sleep durably shifts mood, joining two lifestyle relevant clinical targets.

Full APA reference

Fiori, V., Lombardo, C., Baglioni, C., & Ballesio, A. (2026). Long-term efficacy of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia (CBT-I) on depressive symptoms: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. Sleep Medicine Reviews, 89, 102339. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2026.102339

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 42435604

All fields
ID
REF-168
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fiori, V., Lombardo, C., Baglioni, C., & Ballesio, A.
Year
2026
Title
Long-term efficacy of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia (CBT-I) on depressive symptoms: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials
Description
Fifty three articles reporting on 13,608 adults with insomnia were pooled, and cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia still reduced depressive symptoms at three months (d = -0.35), six months (d = -0.32) and twelve months (d = -0.25), with effects fading slowly. Treating sleep durably shifts mood, joining two lifestyle relevant clinical targets.
Publication or publisher
Sleep Medicine Reviews, 89, 102339
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42435604/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2026.102339
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 42435604
Full APA reference
Fiori, V., Lombardo, C., Baglioni, C., & Ballesio, A. (2026). Long-term efficacy of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia (CBT-I) on depressive symptoms: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. *Sleep Medicine Reviews, 89*, 102339. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2026.102339
REF-169 Paper, guideline or statement

Behavioral Activation, Depression, and Promotion of Health Behaviors: A Scoping Review

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty papers from 336 candidates were appraised in a scoping review of behavioural activation adapted to promote health behaviours, with most modified interventions improving the targeted behaviour, spanning substance use, exercise and medication adherence, while also reducing depressive symptoms. One psychological treatment can carry both mood and lifestyle change at once.

Full APA reference

May, D., Litvin, B., & Allegrante, J. (2024). Behavioral Activation, Depression, and Promotion of Health Behaviors: A Scoping Review. Health Education & Behavior, 51(2), 321-331. https://doi.org/10.1177/10901981221090157

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 35484949

All fields
ID
REF-169
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
May, D., Litvin, B., & Allegrante, J.
Year
2024
Title
Behavioral Activation, Depression, and Promotion of Health Behaviors: A Scoping Review
Description
Twenty papers from 336 candidates were appraised in a scoping review of behavioural activation adapted to promote health behaviours, with most modified interventions improving the targeted behaviour, spanning substance use, exercise and medication adherence, while also reducing depressive symptoms. One psychological treatment can carry both mood and lifestyle change at once.
Publication or publisher
Health Education & Behavior, 51(2), 321-331
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/35484949/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/10901981221090157
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 35484949
Full APA reference
May, D., Litvin, B., & Allegrante, J. (2024). Behavioral Activation, Depression, and Promotion of Health Behaviors: A Scoping Review. *Health Education & Behavior, 51*(2), 321-331. https://doi.org/10.1177/10901981221090157
REF-170 Paper, guideline or statement

Integrating sleep care in psychological practice: A survey of Brazilian clinical psychologists and a global bibliometric analysis

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Responses from 1,011 Brazilian clinical psychologists showed most routinely ask about sleep quality and address sleep problems, though a minority saw no link between mental disorders and biological rhythms, while a paired bibliometric analysis tied cognitive behavioural therapy most strongly to sleep terms. Workforce readiness for sleep as a lifestyle target is uneven.

Full APA reference

Soalheiro, L. M., Benfica, M. A., Brandão, B. J., Paiva, R. V. N., Carvalho, L. D., Paranhos, R. C. M., ... Tamura, E. K. (2025). Integrating sleep care in psychological practice: A survey of Brazilian clinical psychologists and a global bibliometric analysis. Journal of Health Psychology, 30(11), 3047-3063. https://doi.org/10.1177/13591053241298780

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39655775

All fields
ID
REF-170
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Soalheiro, L. M., Benfica, M. A., Brandão, B. J., Paiva, R. V. N., Carvalho, L. D., Paranhos, R. C. M., ... Tamura, E. K.
Year
2025
Title
Integrating sleep care in psychological practice: A survey of Brazilian clinical psychologists and a global bibliometric analysis
Description
Responses from 1,011 Brazilian clinical psychologists showed most routinely ask about sleep quality and address sleep problems, though a minority saw no link between mental disorders and biological rhythms, while a paired bibliometric analysis tied cognitive behavioural therapy most strongly to sleep terms. Workforce readiness for sleep as a lifestyle target is uneven.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Health Psychology, 30(11), 3047-3063
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39655775/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/13591053241298780
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39655775
Related items
REF-509
Full APA reference
Soalheiro, L. M., Benfica, M. A., Brandão, B. J., Paiva, R. V. N., Carvalho, L. D., Paranhos, R. C. M., ... Tamura, E. K. (2025). Integrating sleep care in psychological practice: A survey of Brazilian clinical psychologists and a global bibliometric analysis. *Journal of Health Psychology, 30*(11), 3047-3063. https://doi.org/10.1177/13591053241298780
REF-171 Paper, guideline or statement

Network meta-analysis examining efficacy of components of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Eighty studies covering 15,351 participants were entered into a component network meta-analysis, where sleep restriction therapy carried the effect on insomnia severity (d = -0.45) and stimulus control improved total sleep time, while psychoeducation, relaxation and cognitive therapy added no significant benefit. Component level evidence tells clinicians which parts of a sleep programme matter.

Full APA reference

Steinmetz, L., Simon, L., Feige, B., Riemann, D., Johann, A. F., Ell, J., ... Spiegelhalder, K. (2024). Network meta-analysis examining efficacy of components of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia. Clinical Psychology Review, 114, 102507. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2024.102507

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39504928

All fields
ID
REF-171
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Steinmetz, L., Simon, L., Feige, B., Riemann, D., Johann, A. F., Ell, J., ... Spiegelhalder, K.
Year
2024
Title
Network meta-analysis examining efficacy of components of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia
Description
Eighty studies covering 15,351 participants were entered into a component network meta-analysis, where sleep restriction therapy carried the effect on insomnia severity (d = -0.45) and stimulus control improved total sleep time, while psychoeducation, relaxation and cognitive therapy added no significant benefit. Component level evidence tells clinicians which parts of a sleep programme matter.
Publication or publisher
Clinical Psychology Review, 114, 102507
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39504928/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2024.102507
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39504928
Full APA reference
Steinmetz, L., Simon, L., Feige, B., Riemann, D., Johann, A. F., Ell, J., ... Spiegelhalder, K. (2024). Network meta-analysis examining efficacy of components of cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia. *Clinical Psychology Review, 114*, 102507. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2024.102507
REF-172 Paper, guideline or statement

The Global Flourishing Study: Study Profile and Initial Results on Flourishing

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Over 200,000 participants across 22 countries and six populated continents were surveyed with nationally representative sampling and five annual waves planned, reporting a composite flourishing index against demographic characteristics and retrospectively reported childhood experiences. Cross national wellbeing data on this scale anchors claims about which determinants of flourishing are universal.

Full APA reference

VanderWeele, T. J., Johnson, B. R., Bialowolski, P. T., Bonhag, R., Bradshaw, M., Breedlove, T., ... Yancey, G. (2025). The Global Flourishing Study: Study Profile and Initial Results on Flourishing. Nature Mental Health, 3(6), 636-653. https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-025-00423-5

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40521104, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12165845

All fields
ID
REF-172
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
VanderWeele, T. J., Johnson, B. R., Bialowolski, P. T., Bonhag, R., Bradshaw, M., Breedlove, T., ... Yancey, G.
Year
2025
Title
The Global Flourishing Study: Study Profile and Initial Results on Flourishing
Description
Over 200,000 participants across 22 countries and six populated continents were surveyed with nationally representative sampling and five annual waves planned, reporting a composite flourishing index against demographic characteristics and retrospectively reported childhood experiences. Cross national wellbeing data on this scale anchors claims about which determinants of flourishing are universal.
Publication or publisher
Nature Mental Health, 3(6), 636-653
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12165845/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-025-00423-5
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40521104, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12165845
Full APA reference
VanderWeele, T. J., Johnson, B. R., Bialowolski, P. T., Bonhag, R., Bradshaw, M., Breedlove, T., ... Yancey, G. (2025). The Global Flourishing Study: Study Profile and Initial Results on Flourishing. *Nature Mental Health, 3*(6), 636-653. https://doi.org/10.1038/s44220-025-00423-5
REF-173 Paper, guideline or statement

A meta-analysis of the effectiveness of gratitude interventions on well-being across cultures

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A preregistered meta-analysis of 145 papers, 727 effect sizes and 24,804 participants from 28 countries found gratitude interventions produced small wellbeing gains (Hedges g = 0.19, 95 per cent CI 0.15 to 0.22), varying between countries without identifiable moderators. Cultural transferability of popular wellbeing practices cannot be assumed by practitioners.

Full APA reference

Choi, H., Cha, Y., McCullough, M. E., Coles, N. A., & Oishi, S. (2025). A meta-analysis of the effectiveness of gratitude interventions on well-being across cultures. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 122(28), e2425193122. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2425193122

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40627390, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12280877

All fields
ID
REF-173
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Choi, H., Cha, Y., McCullough, M. E., Coles, N. A., & Oishi, S.
Year
2025
Title
A meta-analysis of the effectiveness of gratitude interventions on well-being across cultures
Description
A preregistered meta-analysis of 145 papers, 727 effect sizes and 24,804 participants from 28 countries found gratitude interventions produced small wellbeing gains (Hedges g = 0.19, 95 per cent CI 0.15 to 0.22), varying between countries without identifiable moderators. Cultural transferability of popular wellbeing practices cannot be assumed by practitioners.
Publication or publisher
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 122(28), e2425193122
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12280877/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2425193122
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40627390, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12280877
Full APA reference
Choi, H., Cha, Y., McCullough, M. E., Coles, N. A., & Oishi, S. (2025). A meta-analysis of the effectiveness of gratitude interventions on well-being across cultures. *Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 122*(28), e2425193122. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2425193122
REF-174 Paper, guideline or statement

Mapping the evidence base of positive psychology interventions: effectiveness, limitations, and future directions

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Sixty three primary studies and 11 meta-analyses published between 2000 and 2025 were mapped, with positive psychology interventions producing mean effects of d = 0.29 to 0.47 on subjective wellbeing and moderate reductions in depressive symptoms, gratitude and strength based formats strongest. Gaps in fidelity, population specificity and long term efficacy are named plainly.

Full APA reference

Akhter, S., Kumar, T., & Shaheen, M. (2026). Mapping the evidence base of positive psychology interventions: effectiveness, limitations, and future directions. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1812638. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1812638

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 42293973, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC13261818

All fields
ID
REF-174
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Akhter, S., Kumar, T., & Shaheen, M.
Year
2026
Title
Mapping the evidence base of positive psychology interventions: effectiveness, limitations, and future directions
Description
Sixty three primary studies and 11 meta-analyses published between 2000 and 2025 were mapped, with positive psychology interventions producing mean effects of d = 0.29 to 0.47 on subjective wellbeing and moderate reductions in depressive symptoms, gratitude and strength based formats strongest. Gaps in fidelity, population specificity and long term efficacy are named plainly.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1812638
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13261818/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1812638
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 42293973, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC13261818
Full APA reference
Akhter, S., Kumar, T., & Shaheen, M. (2026). Mapping the evidence base of positive psychology interventions: effectiveness, limitations, and future directions. *Frontiers in Psychology, 17*, 1812638. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1812638
REF-175 Paper, guideline or statement

Positive psychological well-being and cardiovascular health

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Zuccarella-Hackl and colleagues synthesise evidence linking positive psychological wellbeing, including optimism, purpose in life and vitality, with better cardiovascular indicators in healthy adults and with mortality and rehospitalisation in cardiac patients. Named pathways of biological processes, health behaviour change and stress buffering connect wellbeing to hard cardiac endpoints.

Full APA reference

Zuccarella-Hackl, C., Princip, M., Sivakumar, S., & von Känel, R. (2024). Positive psychological well-being and cardiovascular health. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15, 1443978. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1443978

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39524133, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11543404

All fields
ID
REF-175
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zuccarella-Hackl, C., Princip, M., Sivakumar, S., & von Känel, R.
Year
2024
Title
Positive psychological well-being and cardiovascular health
Description
Zuccarella-Hackl and colleagues synthesise evidence linking positive psychological wellbeing, including optimism, purpose in life and vitality, with better cardiovascular indicators in healthy adults and with mortality and rehospitalisation in cardiac patients. Named pathways of biological processes, health behaviour change and stress buffering connect wellbeing to hard cardiac endpoints.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15, 1443978
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11543404/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1443978
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39524133, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11543404
Related items
REF-508
Full APA reference
Zuccarella-Hackl, C., Princip, M., Sivakumar, S., & von Känel, R. (2024). Positive psychological well-being and cardiovascular health. *Frontiers in Psychiatry, 15*, 1443978. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyt.2024.1443978
REF-176 Paper, guideline or statement

Association between life satisfaction and health behaviours among older adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Fifty six studies from 22 countries with a pooled mean age of 70.6 years were synthesised, where quality sleep in 77.3 per cent of studies, higher physical activity in 69.1 per cent and regular fruit and vegetable intake in 52.9 per cent accompanied higher life satisfaction. Wellbeing and health behaviour travel together in later life.

Full APA reference

Alumona, C. J., Scott, D. R., Aladejebi, T., Kalu, M. E., Onyeso, O. K., Odole, A. C., ... Awosoga, O. A. (2026). Association between life satisfaction and health behaviours among older adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis. International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 23(1), 15. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-026-01877-1

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41588526, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12924400

All fields
ID
REF-176
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Alumona, C. J., Scott, D. R., Aladejebi, T., Kalu, M. E., Onyeso, O. K., Odole, A. C., ... Awosoga, O. A.
Year
2026
Title
Association between life satisfaction and health behaviours among older adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Fifty six studies from 22 countries with a pooled mean age of 70.6 years were synthesised, where quality sleep in 77.3 per cent of studies, higher physical activity in 69.1 per cent and regular fruit and vegetable intake in 52.9 per cent accompanied higher life satisfaction. Wellbeing and health behaviour travel together in later life.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 23(1), 15
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12924400/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-026-01877-1
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 41588526, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12924400
Full APA reference
Alumona, C. J., Scott, D. R., Aladejebi, T., Kalu, M. E., Onyeso, O. K., Odole, A. C., ... Awosoga, O. A. (2026). Association between life satisfaction and health behaviours among older adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 23*(1), 15. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-026-01877-1
REF-177 Paper, guideline or statement

Positive Psychology Interventions in Medical Populations: Critical Issues in Intervention Development, Testing, and Implementation

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Huffman and colleagues set out six critical issues for positive psychology interventions in medical populations, including theoretical models of mechanism, consistent intervention targets, inclusion of diverse samples and attention to implementation and scalability from the outset. Wellbeing programmes for physically ill people fail on design and delivery, not on plausibility.

Full APA reference

Huffman, J. C., Feig, E. H., Zambrano, J., & Celano, C. M. (2023). Positive Psychology Interventions in Medical Populations: Critical Issues in Intervention Development, Testing, and Implementation. Affective Science, 4(1), 59-71. https://doi.org/10.1007/s42761-022-00137-2

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37070006, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10105001

All fields
ID
REF-177
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Huffman, J. C., Feig, E. H., Zambrano, J., & Celano, C. M.
Year
2023
Title
Positive Psychology Interventions in Medical Populations: Critical Issues in Intervention Development, Testing, and Implementation
Description
Huffman and colleagues set out six critical issues for positive psychology interventions in medical populations, including theoretical models of mechanism, consistent intervention targets, inclusion of diverse samples and attention to implementation and scalability from the outset. Wellbeing programmes for physically ill people fail on design and delivery, not on plausibility.
Publication or publisher
Affective Science, 4(1), 59-71
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10105001/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s42761-022-00137-2
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37070006, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10105001
Full APA reference
Huffman, J. C., Feig, E. H., Zambrano, J., & Celano, C. M. (2023). Positive Psychology Interventions in Medical Populations: Critical Issues in Intervention Development, Testing, and Implementation. *Affective Science, 4*(1), 59-71. https://doi.org/10.1007/s42761-022-00137-2
REF-178 Paper, guideline or statement

The effects of different types of organisational workplace mental health interventions on mental health and wellbeing in healthcare workers: a systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Twenty two studies, mostly hospital based, were graded for quality, with 68 per cent reporting improvement in at least one primary outcome and strong evidence for job and task modifications, plus moderate evidence for flexible scheduling and physical work environment changes. Organisational redesign, not resilience training, carries the evidence here.

Full APA reference

Aust, B., Leduc, C., Cresswell-Smith, J., O'Brien, C., Rugulies, R., Leduc, M., ... MENTUPP consortium members (2024). The effects of different types of organisational workplace mental health interventions on mental health and wellbeing in healthcare workers: a systematic review. International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97(5), 485-522. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02065-z

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38695906, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11130054

All fields
ID
REF-178
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Aust, B., Leduc, C., Cresswell-Smith, J., O'Brien, C., Rugulies, R., Leduc, M., ... MENTUPP consortium members
Year
2024
Title
The effects of different types of organisational workplace mental health interventions on mental health and wellbeing in healthcare workers: a systematic review
Description
Twenty two studies, mostly hospital based, were graded for quality, with 68 per cent reporting improvement in at least one primary outcome and strong evidence for job and task modifications, plus moderate evidence for flexible scheduling and physical work environment changes. Organisational redesign, not resilience training, carries the evidence here.
Publication or publisher
International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97(5), 485-522
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11130054/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02065-z
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38695906, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11130054
Related items
REF-451
Full APA reference
Aust, B., Leduc, C., Cresswell-Smith, J., O'Brien, C., Rugulies, R., Leduc, M., ... MENTUPP consortium members (2024). The effects of different types of organisational workplace mental health interventions on mental health and wellbeing in healthcare workers: a systematic review. *International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97*(5), 485-522. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02065-z
REF-179 Paper, guideline or statement

Workplace interventions to improve well-being and reduce burnout for nurses, physicians and allied healthcare professionals: a systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

From 1,663 screened articles, 33 met inclusion, and 30 targeted individuals while only three addressed the organisation and only two removed causes of stress, with mindfulness based practice used in 20 studies. The mismatch between where burnout originates and where interventions are aimed is documented rather than asserted.

Full APA reference

Cohen, C., Pignata, S., Bezak, E., Tie, M., & Childs, J. (2023). Workplace interventions to improve well-being and reduce burnout for nurses, physicians and allied healthcare professionals: a systematic review. BMJ Open, 13(6), e071203. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2022-071203

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37385740, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10314589

All fields
ID
REF-179
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cohen, C., Pignata, S., Bezak, E., Tie, M., & Childs, J.
Year
2023
Title
Workplace interventions to improve well-being and reduce burnout for nurses, physicians and allied healthcare professionals: a systematic review
Description
From 1,663 screened articles, 33 met inclusion, and 30 targeted individuals while only three addressed the organisation and only two removed causes of stress, with mindfulness based practice used in 20 studies. The mismatch between where burnout originates and where interventions are aimed is documented rather than asserted.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open, 13(6), e071203
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10314589/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2022-071203
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37385740, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10314589
Full APA reference
Cohen, C., Pignata, S., Bezak, E., Tie, M., & Childs, J. (2023). Workplace interventions to improve well-being and reduce burnout for nurses, physicians and allied healthcare professionals: a systematic review. *BMJ Open, 13*(6), e071203. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2022-071203
REF-180 Paper, guideline or statement

Sleep, mental health and physical health in new shift workers transitioning to shift work: Systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental and physical health

Forty eight papers following workers from within three months of starting shift work were synthesised, and sleep and mental health worsened after onset while physical health did not change significantly, with pre shift sleep, mental health and work characteristics predicting later shift work tolerance. Prevention has to start before the first roster.

Full APA reference

Harris, R., Kavaliotis, E., Drummond, S. P. A., & Wolkow, A. P. (2024). Sleep, mental health and physical health in new shift workers transitioning to shift work: Systematic review and meta-analysis. Sleep Medicine Reviews, 75, 101927. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2024.101927

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38626702

All fields
ID
REF-180
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Harris, R., Kavaliotis, E., Drummond, S. P. A., & Wolkow, A. P.
Year
2024
Title
Sleep, mental health and physical health in new shift workers transitioning to shift work: Systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Forty eight papers following workers from within three months of starting shift work were synthesised, and sleep and mental health worsened after onset while physical health did not change significantly, with pre shift sleep, mental health and work characteristics predicting later shift work tolerance. Prevention has to start before the first roster.
Publication or publisher
Sleep Medicine Reviews, 75, 101927
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38626702/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2024.101927
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38626702
Full APA reference
Harris, R., Kavaliotis, E., Drummond, S. P. A., & Wolkow, A. P. (2024). Sleep, mental health and physical health in new shift workers transitioning to shift work: Systematic review and meta-analysis. *Sleep Medicine Reviews, 75*, 101927. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.smrv.2024.101927
REF-181 Paper, guideline or statement

The overall fractions of coronary heart diseases and depression attributable to multiple dependent psychosocial work factors in Europe

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Across 35 European countries, job strain, effort reward imbalance, job insecurity, long working hours and workplace bullying together accounted for 8.1 per cent of coronary heart disease and 26.3 per cent of depression, with no difference by gender or country. Attributable fractions convert psychosocial work exposure into a policy sized burden.

Full APA reference

Niedhammer, I., Sultan-Taïeb, H., & Chastang, J. F. (2024). The overall fractions of coronary heart diseases and depression attributable to multiple dependent psychosocial work factors in Europe. International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97(5), 569-574. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02067-x

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38616186, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11130006

All fields
ID
REF-181
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Niedhammer, I., Sultan-Taïeb, H., & Chastang, J. F.
Year
2024
Title
The overall fractions of coronary heart diseases and depression attributable to multiple dependent psychosocial work factors in Europe
Description
Across 35 European countries, job strain, effort reward imbalance, job insecurity, long working hours and workplace bullying together accounted for 8.1 per cent of coronary heart disease and 26.3 per cent of depression, with no difference by gender or country. Attributable fractions convert psychosocial work exposure into a policy sized burden.
Publication or publisher
International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97(5), 569-574
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11130006/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02067-x
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38616186, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11130006
Full APA reference
Niedhammer, I., Sultan-Taïeb, H., & Chastang, J. F. (2024). The overall fractions of coronary heart diseases and depression attributable to multiple dependent psychosocial work factors in Europe. *International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 97*(5), 569-574. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-024-02067-x
REF-182 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychological detachment from work predicts mental wellbeing of working-age adults: Findings from the 'Wellbeing of the Workforce' (WoW) prospective longitudinal cohort study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

In a two wave United Kingdom cohort of working adults, risk for major depression rose from 20.0 per cent to 29.0 per cent and poor life satisfaction from 15.4 per cent to 25.4 per cent, with low psychological detachment from work predicting worse wellbeing. Recovery time is a measurable occupational health behaviour.

Full APA reference

Blake, H., Hassard, J., Thomson, L., Choo, W. H., Dulal-Arthur, T., Karanika-Murray, M., ... Rudkin, L. (2025). Psychological detachment from work predicts mental wellbeing of working-age adults: Findings from the 'Wellbeing of the Workforce' (WoW) prospective longitudinal cohort study. PLOS ONE, 20(1), e0312673. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0312673

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39808595, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11731735

All fields
ID
REF-182
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Blake, H., Hassard, J., Thomson, L., Choo, W. H., Dulal-Arthur, T., Karanika-Murray, M., ... Rudkin, L.
Year
2025
Title
Psychological detachment from work predicts mental wellbeing of working-age adults: Findings from the 'Wellbeing of the Workforce' (WoW) prospective longitudinal cohort study
Description
In a two wave United Kingdom cohort of working adults, risk for major depression rose from 20.0 per cent to 29.0 per cent and poor life satisfaction from 15.4 per cent to 25.4 per cent, with low psychological detachment from work predicting worse wellbeing. Recovery time is a measurable occupational health behaviour.
Publication or publisher
PLOS ONE, 20(1), e0312673
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11731735/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0312673
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39808595, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11731735
Full APA reference
Blake, H., Hassard, J., Thomson, L., Choo, W. H., Dulal-Arthur, T., Karanika-Murray, M., ... Rudkin, L. (2025). Psychological detachment from work predicts mental wellbeing of working-age adults: Findings from the 'Wellbeing of the Workforce' (WoW) prospective longitudinal cohort study. *PLOS ONE, 20*(1), e0312673. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0312673
REF-183 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO guidelines on mental health at work

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The World Health Organization issues evidence based recommendations across five areas, namely organisational interventions, manager training, worker training, individual interventions, return to work and gaining employment, noting that around 15 per cent of working age adults live with a mental disorder. Work is treated as a modifiable determinant of mental health at population scale.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2022). WHO guidelines on mental health at work. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240053052

Guideline page read on the World Health Organization website, ISBN 9789240053052, 134 pages, with the catalogue record confirmed on PubMed, PMID 36395303

All fields
ID
REF-183
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2022
Title
WHO guidelines on mental health at work
Description
The World Health Organization issues evidence based recommendations across five areas, namely organisational interventions, manager training, worker training, individual interventions, return to work and gaining employment, noting that around 15 per cent of working age adults live with a mental disorder. Work is treated as a modifiable determinant of mental health at population scale.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240053052
Verification note
Guideline page read on the World Health Organization website, ISBN 9789240053052, 134 pages, with the catalogue record confirmed on PubMed, PMID 36395303
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2022). *WHO guidelines on mental health at work*. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240053052
REF-184 Paper, guideline or statement

Nature exposure and mental health during the COVID-19 pandemic: A Navigation Guide systematic review with meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

One hundred and thirteen studies were appraised with the Navigation Guide method, and garden access accompanied lower odds of depression (pooled odds ratio 0.71) and anxiety (0.73), while more time in green space accompanied lower stress. Access to nature functioned as a population level buffer during a sustained collective stressor.

Full APA reference

Patwary, M. M., Bardhan, M., Disha, A. S., Dzhambov, A. M., Parkinson, C., Browning, M. H. E. M., ... Shuvo, F. K. (2024). Nature exposure and mental health during the COVID-19 pandemic: A Navigation Guide systematic review with meta-analysis. Environmental Pollution, 356, 124284. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envpol.2024.124284

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38821342

All fields
ID
REF-184
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Patwary, M. M., Bardhan, M., Disha, A. S., Dzhambov, A. M., Parkinson, C., Browning, M. H. E. M., ... Shuvo, F. K.
Year
2024
Title
Nature exposure and mental health during the COVID-19 pandemic: A Navigation Guide systematic review with meta-analysis
Description
One hundred and thirteen studies were appraised with the Navigation Guide method, and garden access accompanied lower odds of depression (pooled odds ratio 0.71) and anxiety (0.73), while more time in green space accompanied lower stress. Access to nature functioned as a population level buffer during a sustained collective stressor.
Publication or publisher
Environmental Pollution, 356, 124284
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38821342/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envpol.2024.124284
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38821342
Full APA reference
Patwary, M. M., Bardhan, M., Disha, A. S., Dzhambov, A. M., Parkinson, C., Browning, M. H. E. M., ... Shuvo, F. K. (2024). Nature exposure and mental health during the COVID-19 pandemic: A Navigation Guide systematic review with meta-analysis. *Environmental Pollution, 356*, 124284. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envpol.2024.124284
REF-185 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health benefits of specific blue space types and characteristics: A systematic evidence map

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

One hundred and thirty nine papers were mapped, with coastal environments studied 94 times and affect the most assessed outcome, yet only six studies directly compared different blue space types, so no ranking of water settings can currently be supported. Honest evidence mapping keeps blue space planning claims proportionate.

Full APA reference

Beute, F., Marselle, M. R., Olszewska-Guizzo, A., Andreucci, M. B., Lammel, A., Davies, Z. G., ... de Vries, S. (2026). Mental health benefits of specific blue space types and characteristics: A systematic evidence map. Environmental Research, 297, 124054. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2026.124054

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41724225

All fields
ID
REF-185
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Beute, F., Marselle, M. R., Olszewska-Guizzo, A., Andreucci, M. B., Lammel, A., Davies, Z. G., ... de Vries, S.
Year
2026
Title
Mental health benefits of specific blue space types and characteristics: A systematic evidence map
Description
One hundred and thirty nine papers were mapped, with coastal environments studied 94 times and affect the most assessed outcome, yet only six studies directly compared different blue space types, so no ranking of water settings can currently be supported. Honest evidence mapping keeps blue space planning claims proportionate.
Publication or publisher
Environmental Research, 297, 124054
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41724225/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2026.124054
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41724225
Full APA reference
Beute, F., Marselle, M. R., Olszewska-Guizzo, A., Andreucci, M. B., Lammel, A., Davies, Z. G., ... de Vries, S. (2026). Mental health benefits of specific blue space types and characteristics: A systematic evidence map. *Environmental Research, 297*, 124054. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2026.124054
REF-186 Paper, guideline or statement

Relationships between people and nature: Nature connectedness and relational environmental values

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Lengieza and Aviste review nature connectedness and relational environmental values as predictors of pro environmental outcomes, arguing that connectedness behaves like a genuine relationship, functions as self transcendence and involves the self. Attention shifts from individual scores to group level processes, which matters for community based nature interventions.

Full APA reference

Lengieza, M. L., & Aviste, R. (2025). Relationships between people and nature: Nature connectedness and relational environmental values. Current Opinion in Psychology, 62, 101984. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.copsyc.2024.101984

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39765177

All fields
ID
REF-186
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lengieza, M. L., & Aviste, R.
Year
2025
Title
Relationships between people and nature: Nature connectedness and relational environmental values
Description
Lengieza and Aviste review nature connectedness and relational environmental values as predictors of pro environmental outcomes, arguing that connectedness behaves like a genuine relationship, functions as self transcendence and involves the self. Attention shifts from individual scores to group level processes, which matters for community based nature interventions.
Publication or publisher
Current Opinion in Psychology, 62, 101984
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39765177/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.copsyc.2024.101984
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 39765177
Full APA reference
Lengieza, M. L., & Aviste, R. (2025). Relationships between people and nature: Nature connectedness and relational environmental values. *Current Opinion in Psychology, 62*, 101984. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.copsyc.2024.101984
REF-187 Paper, guideline or statement

A Nature-Based Intervention and Mental Health of Schoolchildren: A Cluster Randomized Clinical Trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Open Sky School cluster randomised trial taught grade 5 and 6 classes outdoors for two hours weekly over 12 weeks in Quebec schools with green space within one kilometre, measuring internalising, externalising and social problems on the Social Behaviour Questionnaire. Randomised evidence on outdoor schooling is rare and directly policy relevant.

Full APA reference

Loose, T., Fuoco, J., Malboeuf-Hurtubise, C., Ayotte-Beaudet, J. P., Gauvin, L., Chadi, N., ... Geoffroy, M. C. (2024). A Nature-Based Intervention and Mental Health of Schoolchildren: A Cluster Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA Network Open, 7(11), e2444824. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamanetworkopen.2024.44824

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39546315, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11568460

All fields
ID
REF-187
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Loose, T., Fuoco, J., Malboeuf-Hurtubise, C., Ayotte-Beaudet, J. P., Gauvin, L., Chadi, N., ... Geoffroy, M. C.
Year
2024
Title
A Nature-Based Intervention and Mental Health of Schoolchildren: A Cluster Randomized Clinical Trial
Description
The Open Sky School cluster randomised trial taught grade 5 and 6 classes outdoors for two hours weekly over 12 weeks in Quebec schools with green space within one kilometre, measuring internalising, externalising and social problems on the Social Behaviour Questionnaire. Randomised evidence on outdoor schooling is rare and directly policy relevant.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Network Open, 7(11), e2444824
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11568460/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamanetworkopen.2024.44824
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39546315, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11568460
Full APA reference
Loose, T., Fuoco, J., Malboeuf-Hurtubise, C., Ayotte-Beaudet, J. P., Gauvin, L., Chadi, N., ... Geoffroy, M. C. (2024). A Nature-Based Intervention and Mental Health of Schoolchildren: A Cluster Randomized Clinical Trial. *JAMA Network Open, 7*(11), e2444824. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamanetworkopen.2024.44824
REF-188 Paper, guideline or statement

The relationship between climate change and mental health: a systematic review of the association between eco-anxiety, psychological distress, and symptoms of major affective disorders

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Thirty five studies covering 45,667 adults were reviewed, and eco anxiety correlated positively, from small to large, with psychological distress and depression, anxiety and stress symptoms, with stronger associations where eco anxiety was operationalised as anxiety rather than worry. Environmental change enters clinical formulation as a real source of distress.

Full APA reference

Cosh, S. M., Ryan, R., Fallander, K., Robinson, K., Tognela, J., Tully, P. J., ... Lykins, A. D. (2024). The relationship between climate change and mental health: a systematic review of the association between eco-anxiety, psychological distress, and symptoms of major affective disorders. BMC Psychiatry, 24(1), 833. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12888-024-06274-1

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39567913, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11577747

All fields
ID
REF-188
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cosh, S. M., Ryan, R., Fallander, K., Robinson, K., Tognela, J., Tully, P. J., ... Lykins, A. D.
Year
2024
Title
The relationship between climate change and mental health: a systematic review of the association between eco-anxiety, psychological distress, and symptoms of major affective disorders
Description
Thirty five studies covering 45,667 adults were reviewed, and eco anxiety correlated positively, from small to large, with psychological distress and depression, anxiety and stress symptoms, with stronger associations where eco anxiety was operationalised as anxiety rather than worry. Environmental change enters clinical formulation as a real source of distress.
Publication or publisher
BMC Psychiatry, 24(1), 833
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Climate, heat and environmental health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11577747/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12888-024-06274-1
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39567913, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11577747
Full APA reference
Cosh, S. M., Ryan, R., Fallander, K., Robinson, K., Tognela, J., Tully, P. J., ... Lykins, A. D. (2024). The relationship between climate change and mental health: a systematic review of the association between eco-anxiety, psychological distress, and symptoms of major affective disorders. *BMC Psychiatry, 24*(1), 833. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12888-024-06274-1
REF-189 Paper, guideline or statement

Health effects of green prescription: A systematic review of randomized controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

Thirty one randomised controlled trials of green prescriptions were reviewed, with benefits reported for psychological health in 16 of 24 studies, physical activity in eight of nine, cardiometabolic health in five of nine and inflammation in both relevant studies. Prescribing nature contact is testable, and mostly tests well, across mental and physical outcomes.

Full APA reference

Adewuyi, F. A., Knobel, P., Gogna, P., & Dadvand, P. (2023). Health effects of green prescription: A systematic review of randomized controlled trials. Environmental Research, 236(Pt 2), 116844. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2023.116844

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 37574099

All fields
ID
REF-189
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Adewuyi, F. A., Knobel, P., Gogna, P., & Dadvand, P.
Year
2023
Title
Health effects of green prescription: A systematic review of randomized controlled trials
Description
Thirty one randomised controlled trials of green prescriptions were reviewed, with benefits reported for psychological health in 16 of 24 studies, physical activity in eight of nine, cardiometabolic health in five of nine and inflammation in both relevant studies. Prescribing nature contact is testable, and mostly tests well, across mental and physical outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Environmental Research, 236(Pt 2), 116844
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37574099/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2023.116844
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 37574099
Full APA reference
Adewuyi, F. A., Knobel, P., Gogna, P., & Dadvand, P. (2023). Health effects of green prescription: A systematic review of randomized controlled trials. *Environmental Research, 236*(Pt 2), 116844. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envres.2023.116844
REF-190 Paper, guideline or statement

A systematic review and meta-analysis of 90 cohort studies of social isolation, loneliness and mortality

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Ninety prospective cohorts totalling 2,205,199 adults were pooled, and social isolation raised all cause mortality risk by 32 per cent and loneliness by 14 per cent, with isolation also raising cardiovascular mortality by 34 per cent. Social connection earns its place as a lifestyle pillar on mortality evidence, not sentiment.

Full APA reference

Wang, F., Gao, Y., Han, Z., Yu, Y., Long, Z., Jiang, X., ... Zhao, Y. (2023). A systematic review and meta-analysis of 90 cohort studies of social isolation, loneliness and mortality. Nature Human Behaviour, 7(8), 1307-1319. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41562-023-01617-6

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 37337095

All fields
ID
REF-190
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, F., Gao, Y., Han, Z., Yu, Y., Long, Z., Jiang, X., ... Zhao, Y.
Year
2023
Title
A systematic review and meta-analysis of 90 cohort studies of social isolation, loneliness and mortality
Description
Ninety prospective cohorts totalling 2,205,199 adults were pooled, and social isolation raised all cause mortality risk by 32 per cent and loneliness by 14 per cent, with isolation also raising cardiovascular mortality by 34 per cent. Social connection earns its place as a lifestyle pillar on mortality evidence, not sentiment.
Publication or publisher
Nature Human Behaviour, 7(8), 1307-1319
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37337095/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41562-023-01617-6
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 37337095
Related items
REF-506; REF-570
Full APA reference
Wang, F., Gao, Y., Han, Z., Yu, Y., Long, Z., Jiang, X., ... Zhao, Y. (2023). A systematic review and meta-analysis of 90 cohort studies of social isolation, loneliness and mortality. *Nature Human Behaviour, 7*(8), 1307-1319. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41562-023-01617-6
REF-191 Paper, guideline or statement

Social identity and health-related behavior: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

One hundred and fifteen articles yielding 248 effect sizes from 133 independent samples and 112,112 participants were pooled, showing a small positive association between social identification and health related behaviour, intention and attitudes, strongest for health related identities. Group membership becomes a usable lever in lifestyle intervention design.

Full APA reference

de Hoog, N., & Pat-El, R. (2024). Social identity and health-related behavior: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Social Science & Medicine, 344, 116629. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2024.116629

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38330634

All fields
ID
REF-191
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
de Hoog, N., & Pat-El, R.
Year
2024
Title
Social identity and health-related behavior: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
One hundred and fifteen articles yielding 248 effect sizes from 133 independent samples and 112,112 participants were pooled, showing a small positive association between social identification and health related behaviour, intention and attitudes, strongest for health related identities. Group membership becomes a usable lever in lifestyle intervention design.
Publication or publisher
Social Science & Medicine, 344, 116629
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38330634/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2024.116629
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38330634
Full APA reference
de Hoog, N., & Pat-El, R. (2024). Social identity and health-related behavior: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *Social Science & Medicine, 344*, 116629. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2024.116629
REF-192 Paper, guideline or statement

Nothing is so impactful as good theory: Evidence for the impact of the social identity approach to health on policy and practice

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Using SciVal and Overton policy citation tools across articles from 1996 to 2023, Cruwys and colleagues found more than one in five social identity approach to health papers cited in policy documents, a higher share than for the theory of planned behaviour or self determination theory. Community intervention policy leans on this theory.

Full APA reference

Cruwys, T., Haslam, S. A., Steffens, N. K., Haslam, C., & Reicher, S. D. (2025). Nothing is so impactful as good theory: Evidence for the impact of the social identity approach to health on policy and practice. Social Science & Medicine, 379, 118164. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2025.118164

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40381283

All fields
ID
REF-192
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cruwys, T., Haslam, S. A., Steffens, N. K., Haslam, C., & Reicher, S. D.
Year
2025
Title
Nothing is so impactful as good theory: Evidence for the impact of the social identity approach to health on policy and practice
Description
Using SciVal and Overton policy citation tools across articles from 1996 to 2023, Cruwys and colleagues found more than one in five social identity approach to health papers cited in policy documents, a higher share than for the theory of planned behaviour or self determination theory. Community intervention policy leans on this theory.
Publication or publisher
Social Science & Medicine, 379, 118164
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40381283/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2025.118164
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 40381283
Full APA reference
Cruwys, T., Haslam, S. A., Steffens, N. K., Haslam, C., & Reicher, S. D. (2025). Nothing is so impactful as good theory: Evidence for the impact of the social identity approach to health on policy and practice. *Social Science & Medicine, 379*, 118164. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2025.118164
REF-193 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of social prescribing for chronic disease prevention in adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Nine reports from eight randomised trials with 4,621 community dwelling adults were pooled, and social prescribing likely raised physical activity by about 21 minutes weekly at completion and 19 minutes at follow up, without clear improvement in adiposity markers. Referral to community activity has modest, measurable, honestly bounded effects.

Full APA reference

Htun, H. L., Teshale, A. B., Cumpston, M. S., Demos, L., Ryan, J., Owen, A., ... Freak-Poli, R. (2023). Effectiveness of social prescribing for chronic disease prevention in adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 77(4), 265-276. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2022-220247

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 36813546

All fields
ID
REF-193
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Htun, H. L., Teshale, A. B., Cumpston, M. S., Demos, L., Ryan, J., Owen, A., ... Freak-Poli, R.
Year
2023
Title
Effectiveness of social prescribing for chronic disease prevention in adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials
Description
Nine reports from eight randomised trials with 4,621 community dwelling adults were pooled, and social prescribing likely raised physical activity by about 21 minutes weekly at completion and 19 minutes at follow up, without clear improvement in adiposity markers. Referral to community activity has modest, measurable, honestly bounded effects.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 77(4), 265-276
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/36813546/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2022-220247
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 36813546
Related items
REF-485
Full APA reference
Htun, H. L., Teshale, A. B., Cumpston, M. S., Demos, L., Ryan, J., Owen, A., ... Freak-Poli, R. (2023). Effectiveness of social prescribing for chronic disease prevention in adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. *Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 77*(4), 265-276. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2022-220247
REF-194 Paper, guideline or statement

What is Indigenous cultural health and wellbeing? A narrative review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Social determinants of health

Biles and colleagues review Indigenous cultural health in settler colonial contexts, mostly Australian, identifying three themes of Country, culture and Indigenous knowledges, and arguing that cultural practice provides frameworks for healing that must be read against ongoing colonisation. Culturally centred definitions of wellbeing are prerequisites for equitable lifestyle programmes.

Full APA reference

Biles, B. J., Serova, N., Stanbrook, G., Brady, B., Kingsley, J., Topp, S. M., ... Yashadhana, A. (2024). What is Indigenous cultural health and wellbeing? A narrative review. The Lancet Regional Health Western Pacific, 52, 101220. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanwpc.2024.101220

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39664592, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11632815

All fields
ID
REF-194
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Biles, B. J., Serova, N., Stanbrook, G., Brady, B., Kingsley, J., Topp, S. M., ... Yashadhana, A.
Year
2024
Title
What is Indigenous cultural health and wellbeing? A narrative review
Description
Biles and colleagues review Indigenous cultural health in settler colonial contexts, mostly Australian, identifying three themes of Country, culture and Indigenous knowledges, and arguing that cultural practice provides frameworks for healing that must be read against ongoing colonisation. Culturally centred definitions of wellbeing are prerequisites for equitable lifestyle programmes.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Regional Health Western Pacific, 52, 101220
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11632815/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanwpc.2024.101220
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 39664592, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11632815
Full APA reference
Biles, B. J., Serova, N., Stanbrook, G., Brady, B., Kingsley, J., Topp, S. M., ... Yashadhana, A. (2024). What is Indigenous cultural health and wellbeing? A narrative review. *The Lancet Regional Health Western Pacific, 52*, 101220. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanwpc.2024.101220
REF-195 Paper, guideline or statement

What works in interventions targeting loneliness: a systematic review of intervention characteristics

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

From 4,734 records, 22 studies measuring loneliness with validated scales were reviewed, and 14 interventions were effective, letting the authors extract the intervention characteristics associated with success rather than reporting a single pooled estimate. Design detail is exactly what commissioners of loneliness programmes lack.

Full APA reference

Morrish, N., Choudhury, S., & Medina-Lara, A. (2023). What works in interventions targeting loneliness: a systematic review of intervention characteristics. BMC Public Health, 23(1), 2214. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-023-17097-2

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37946186, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10636966

All fields
ID
REF-195
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Morrish, N., Choudhury, S., & Medina-Lara, A.
Year
2023
Title
What works in interventions targeting loneliness: a systematic review of intervention characteristics
Description
From 4,734 records, 22 studies measuring loneliness with validated scales were reviewed, and 14 interventions were effective, letting the authors extract the intervention characteristics associated with success rather than reporting a single pooled estimate. Design detail is exactly what commissioners of loneliness programmes lack.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 23(1), 2214
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10636966/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-023-17097-2
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 37946186, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC10636966
Full APA reference
Morrish, N., Choudhury, S., & Medina-Lara, A. (2023). What works in interventions targeting loneliness: a systematic review of intervention characteristics. *BMC Public Health, 23*(1), 2214. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-023-17097-2
REF-196 Paper, guideline or statement

Connectedness: The Updated and Expanded Pillar of Lifestyle Psychiatry and Lifestyle Medicine

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Merlo, Snellman and Sugden expand connectedness within lifestyle psychiatry into six domains, namely happiness, purpose and meaning making, empathy and compassion, social connection and community, nature, and spirituality and religion, mapped onto three core relational needs. The sixth lifestyle pillar gains a workable structure for assessment and intervention.

Full APA reference

Merlo, G., Snellman, L., & Sugden, S. G. (2025). Connectedness: The Updated and Expanded Pillar of Lifestyle Psychiatry and Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19(8), 1104-1124. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251345455

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40469950, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12129969

All fields
ID
REF-196
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Merlo, G., Snellman, L., & Sugden, S. G.
Year
2025
Title
Connectedness: The Updated and Expanded Pillar of Lifestyle Psychiatry and Lifestyle Medicine
Description
Merlo, Snellman and Sugden expand connectedness within lifestyle psychiatry into six domains, namely happiness, purpose and meaning making, empathy and compassion, social connection and community, nature, and spirituality and religion, mapped onto three core relational needs. The sixth lifestyle pillar gains a workable structure for assessment and intervention.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19(8), 1104-1124
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12129969/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251345455
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 40469950, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC12129969
Related items
REF-506; REF-508
Full APA reference
Merlo, G., Snellman, L., & Sugden, S. G. (2025). Connectedness: The Updated and Expanded Pillar of Lifestyle Psychiatry and Lifestyle Medicine. *American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19*(8), 1104-1124. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251345455
REF-197 Paper, guideline or statement

Social Media Use and Internalizing Symptoms in Clinical and Community Adolescent Samples: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

One hundred and forty three studies covering 1,094,890 adolescents were pooled to compare clinical and community samples on social media use and internalising symptoms, after 14,211 records were screened by two blinded reviewers. Clinical groups have been largely absent from a debate that shapes family and school lifestyle advice.

Full APA reference

Fassi, L., Thomas, K., Parry, D. A., Leyland-Craggs, A., Ford, T. J., & Orben, A. (2024). Social Media Use and Internalizing Symptoms in Clinical and Community Adolescent Samples: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. JAMA Pediatrics, 178(8), 814-822. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapediatrics.2024.2078

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38913335, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11197453

All fields
ID
REF-197
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fassi, L., Thomas, K., Parry, D. A., Leyland-Craggs, A., Ford, T. J., & Orben, A.
Year
2024
Title
Social Media Use and Internalizing Symptoms in Clinical and Community Adolescent Samples: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis
Description
One hundred and forty three studies covering 1,094,890 adolescents were pooled to compare clinical and community samples on social media use and internalising symptoms, after 14,211 records were screened by two blinded reviewers. Clinical groups have been largely absent from a debate that shapes family and school lifestyle advice.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Pediatrics, 178(8), 814-822
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11197453/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapediatrics.2024.2078
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC, PMID 38913335, full text available on PMC, PMCID PMC11197453
Full APA reference
Fassi, L., Thomas, K., Parry, D. A., Leyland-Craggs, A., Ford, T. J., & Orben, A. (2024). Social Media Use and Internalizing Symptoms in Clinical and Community Adolescent Samples: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. *JAMA Pediatrics, 178*(8), 814-822. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapediatrics.2024.2078
REF-198 Paper, guideline or statement

School-based physical activity interventions for mental health promotion and mental disease prevention in children and adolescents in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Twenty five randomised and cluster randomised trials from high income countries were reviewed, and only health related quality of life showed a positive pooled effect (SMD 1.08, 95 per cent CI 0.24 to 1.91) at very low certainty, with no significant effect on depression or anxiety. Enthusiasm for school activity programmes needs this corrective.

Full APA reference

Ditzen-Janotta, C., Schwarz, S., Wendel, F., Kunzler, A. M., Schoenweger, P., Kirschneck, M., ... Jung-Sievers, C. (2026). School-based physical activity interventions for mental health promotion and mental disease prevention in children and adolescents in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis. European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience, 276(4), 1699-1724. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00406-025-02187-6

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41721841

All fields
ID
REF-198
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ditzen-Janotta, C., Schwarz, S., Wendel, F., Kunzler, A. M., Schoenweger, P., Kirschneck, M., ... Jung-Sievers, C.
Year
2026
Title
School-based physical activity interventions for mental health promotion and mental disease prevention in children and adolescents in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Twenty five randomised and cluster randomised trials from high income countries were reviewed, and only health related quality of life showed a positive pooled effect (SMD 1.08, 95 per cent CI 0.24 to 1.91) at very low certainty, with no significant effect on depression or anxiety. Enthusiasm for school activity programmes needs this corrective.
Publication or publisher
European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience, 276(4), 1699-1724
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41721841/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00406-025-02187-6
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41721841
Full APA reference
Ditzen-Janotta, C., Schwarz, S., Wendel, F., Kunzler, A. M., Schoenweger, P., Kirschneck, M., ... Jung-Sievers, C. (2026). School-based physical activity interventions for mental health promotion and mental disease prevention in children and adolescents in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience, 276*(4), 1699-1724. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00406-025-02187-6
REF-199 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of Family-Based Intervention for Childhood Obesity on Parental and Offspring Outcomes: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty randomised trials with 1,740 participants were pooled, and family based interventions positioning parents as active co agents reduced children's body mass index z score, with added benefit for long term z score and body fat percentage. Family systems, rather than individual children, are the practical unit of lifestyle change.

Full APA reference

Zhang, Y., Pang, L., Yang, S., & Wu, J. (2026). Effects of Family-Based Intervention for Childhood Obesity on Parental and Offspring Outcomes: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Obesity Reviews, e70122. https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.70122

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41784131

All fields
ID
REF-199
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, Y., Pang, L., Yang, S., & Wu, J.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of Family-Based Intervention for Childhood Obesity on Parental and Offspring Outcomes: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis
Description
Twenty randomised trials with 1,740 participants were pooled, and family based interventions positioning parents as active co agents reduced children's body mass index z score, with added benefit for long term z score and body fat percentage. Family systems, rather than individual children, are the practical unit of lifestyle change.
Publication or publisher
Obesity Reviews, e70122
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41784131/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.70122
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41784131
Full APA reference
Zhang, Y., Pang, L., Yang, S., & Wu, J. (2026). Effects of Family-Based Intervention for Childhood Obesity on Parental and Offspring Outcomes: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. *Obesity Reviews*, e70122. https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.70122
REF-200 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical Activity and Cognitive Performance in Early Childhood: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty four randomised trials with 3,483 children aged three to six years were pooled, and physical activity interventions improved attention (SMD 0.49), inhibition (0.45), working memory (0.50) and cognitive flexibility (0.39), most commonly through two 30 minute sessions weekly. Early years movement shapes cognitive development, not just physical fitness.

Full APA reference

Morales, J. S., Alberquilla Del Río, E., Valenzuela, P. L., & Martínez-de-Quel, Ó. (2024). Physical Activity and Cognitive Performance in Early Childhood: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. Sports Medicine, 54(7), 1835-1850. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40279-024-02020-5

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38598150

All fields
ID
REF-200
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Morales, J. S., Alberquilla Del Río, E., Valenzuela, P. L., & Martínez-de-Quel, Ó.
Year
2024
Title
Physical Activity and Cognitive Performance in Early Childhood: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials
Description
Twenty four randomised trials with 3,483 children aged three to six years were pooled, and physical activity interventions improved attention (SMD 0.49), inhibition (0.45), working memory (0.50) and cognitive flexibility (0.39), most commonly through two 30 minute sessions weekly. Early years movement shapes cognitive development, not just physical fitness.
Publication or publisher
Sports Medicine, 54(7), 1835-1850
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38598150/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s40279-024-02020-5
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38598150
Full APA reference
Morales, J. S., Alberquilla Del Río, E., Valenzuela, P. L., & Martínez-de-Quel, Ó. (2024). Physical Activity and Cognitive Performance in Early Childhood: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. *Sports Medicine, 54*(7), 1835-1850. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40279-024-02020-5
REF-201 Paper, guideline or statement

Brief School-Based Interventions Targeting Student Mental Health or Well-Being: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Seventy five studies with 40,498 students and 324 extracted effect sizes were pooled, and brief interventions of four sessions or less improved mental health and wellbeing at one month (g = 0.18), six months (0.15) and one year (0.10). Small, scalable school supports have a defensible preventive public health role.

Full APA reference

Cohen, K. A., Ito, S., Ahuvia, I. L., Yang, Y., Zhang, Y., Renshaw, T. L., ... Schleider, J. L. (2024). Brief School-Based Interventions Targeting Student Mental Health or Well-Being: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review, 27(3), 732-806. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10567-024-00487-2

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38884838

All fields
ID
REF-201
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cohen, K. A., Ito, S., Ahuvia, I. L., Yang, Y., Zhang, Y., Renshaw, T. L., ... Schleider, J. L.
Year
2024
Title
Brief School-Based Interventions Targeting Student Mental Health or Well-Being: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis
Description
Seventy five studies with 40,498 students and 324 extracted effect sizes were pooled, and brief interventions of four sessions or less improved mental health and wellbeing at one month (g = 0.18), six months (0.15) and one year (0.10). Small, scalable school supports have a defensible preventive public health role.
Publication or publisher
Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review, 27(3), 732-806
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38884838/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10567-024-00487-2
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 38884838
Full APA reference
Cohen, K. A., Ito, S., Ahuvia, I. L., Yang, Y., Zhang, Y., Renshaw, T. L., ... Schleider, J. L. (2024). Brief School-Based Interventions Targeting Student Mental Health or Well-Being: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. *Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review, 27*(3), 732-806. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10567-024-00487-2
REF-202 Paper, guideline or statement

How can school-based programmes improve physical and mental health outcomes in low-and-middle-income countries? An umbrella review and logic model

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Twenty systematic reviews covering 214 physical and 120 mental health primary studies in low and middle income countries were synthesised into a logic model, with stronger evidence for proximal outcomes such as nutritional knowledge than for distal outcomes such as obesity reduction. Cultural adaptation and implementation quality emerge as decisive and under reported.

Full APA reference

Winsper, C., Tuomainen, H., Jilka, S., Goutham, S., Morroni, D., Akpan, U., ... Singh, S. P. (2026). How can school-based programmes improve physical and mental health outcomes in low-and-middle-income countries? An umbrella review and logic model. Clinical Psychology Review, 125, 102727. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2026.102727

Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41849914

All fields
ID
REF-202
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Winsper, C., Tuomainen, H., Jilka, S., Goutham, S., Morroni, D., Akpan, U., ... Singh, S. P.
Year
2026
Title
How can school-based programmes improve physical and mental health outcomes in low-and-middle-income countries? An umbrella review and logic model
Description
Twenty systematic reviews covering 214 physical and 120 mental health primary studies in low and middle income countries were synthesised into a logic model, with stronger evidence for proximal outcomes such as nutritional knowledge than for distal outcomes such as obesity reduction. Cultural adaptation and implementation quality emerge as decisive and under reported.
Publication or publisher
Clinical Psychology Review, 125, 102727
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41849914/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2026.102727
Verification note
Bibliographic record and abstract read via Europe PMC and PubMed, PMID 41849914
Full APA reference
Winsper, C., Tuomainen, H., Jilka, S., Goutham, S., Morroni, D., Akpan, U., ... Singh, S. P. (2026). How can school-based programmes improve physical and mental health outcomes in low-and-middle-income countries? An umbrella review and logic model. *Clinical Psychology Review, 125*, 102727. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cpr.2026.102727
REF-203 Paper, guideline or statement

Employment grade and coronary heart disease in British civil servants

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

This first Whitehall longitudinal study of 17,530 civil servants working in London found a clear inverse relationship between grade of employment and coronary heart disease mortality after seven and a half years of follow up, with men in the lowest grade of messengers having 3.6 times the coronary heart disease mortality of men in the highest administrative grade. It belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library because the gradient remained strong after allowance for smoking, leisure time physical activity, blood pressure, plasma glucose, plasma cholesterol and body build, showing that social position shapes physical health beyond conventional lifestyle risk factors.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M. G., Rose, G., Shipley, M., & Hamilton, P. J. (1978). Employment grade and coronary heart disease in British civil servants. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 32(4), 244-249. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech.32.4.244

Abstract and full bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-203
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M. G., Rose, G., Shipley, M., & Hamilton, P. J.
Year
1978
Title
Employment grade and coronary heart disease in British civil servants
Description
This first Whitehall longitudinal study of 17,530 civil servants working in London found a clear inverse relationship between grade of employment and coronary heart disease mortality after seven and a half years of follow up, with men in the lowest grade of messengers having 3.6 times the coronary heart disease mortality of men in the highest administrative grade. It belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library because the gradient remained strong after allowance for smoking, leisure time physical activity, blood pressure, plasma glucose, plasma cholesterol and body build, showing that social position shapes physical health beyond conventional lifestyle risk factors.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 32(4), 244-249
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/744814/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/jech.32.4.244
Verification note
Abstract and full bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Related items
REF-486
Full APA reference
Marmot, M. G., Rose, G., Shipley, M., & Hamilton, P. J. (1978). Employment grade and coronary heart disease in British civil servants. *Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 32*(4), 244-249. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech.32.4.244
REF-204 Paper, guideline or statement

Inequalities in death – specific explanations of a general pattern?

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

In this Whitehall analysis, 17,530 London civil servants were classified by employment grade and followed for 10 years of mortality, revealing a steep inverse relation between grade and death, with men in the lowest grade having three times the mortality of administrators from coronary heart disease, from a range of other causes and from all causes combined. It belongs in the library because the authors showed the grade difference exceeded national differences between social classes I and V, was only partly accounted for by smoking and other coronary risk factors, and pointed to general susceptibility and early life influences on adult health.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M. G., Shipley, M. J., & Rose, G. (1984). Inequalities in death – specific explanations of a general pattern? The Lancet, 1(8384), 1003-1006. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(84)92337-7

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-204
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M. G., Shipley, M. J., & Rose, G.
Year
1984
Title
Inequalities in death – specific explanations of a general pattern?
Description
In this Whitehall analysis, 17,530 London civil servants were classified by employment grade and followed for 10 years of mortality, revealing a steep inverse relation between grade and death, with men in the lowest grade having three times the mortality of administrators from coronary heart disease, from a range of other causes and from all causes combined. It belongs in the library because the authors showed the grade difference exceeded national differences between social classes I and V, was only partly accounted for by smoking and other coronary risk factors, and pointed to general susceptibility and early life influences on adult health.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 1(8384), 1003-1006
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/6143919/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(84)92337-7
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marmot, M. G., Shipley, M. J., & Rose, G. (1984). Inequalities in death – specific explanations of a general pattern? *The Lancet, 1*(8384), 1003-1006. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(84)92337-7
REF-205 Paper, guideline or statement

Health inequalities among British civil servants: the Whitehall II study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

This cohort profile of the Whitehall II study describes 10,314 London based British civil servants aged 35 to 55 years, comprising 6,900 men and 3,414 women, screened between 1985 and 1988, and reports that 20 years after the first Whitehall study there had been no diminution in social class differences in morbidity, with inverse associations between employment grade and angina, electrocardiographic ischaemia, chronic bronchitis symptoms and poorer self perceived health. It belongs in the library because it documented employment grade differences in smoking, diet, exercise, economic circumstances, monotonous work, low control at work, low satisfaction and social support, and concluded that healthy behaviours should be encouraged across the whole of society alongside attention to social environments, job design and income inequality.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M. G., Smith, G. D., Stansfeld, S., Patel, C., North, F., Head, J., White, I., Brunner, E., & Feeney, A. (1991). Health inequalities among British civil servants: the Whitehall II study. The Lancet, 337(8754), 1387-1393. https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(91)93068-K

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-205
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M. G., Smith, G. D., Stansfeld, S., Patel, C., North, F., Head, J., White, I., Brunner, E., & Feeney, A.
Year
1991
Title
Health inequalities among British civil servants: the Whitehall II study
Description
This cohort profile of the Whitehall II study describes 10,314 London based British civil servants aged 35 to 55 years, comprising 6,900 men and 3,414 women, screened between 1985 and 1988, and reports that 20 years after the first Whitehall study there had been no diminution in social class differences in morbidity, with inverse associations between employment grade and angina, electrocardiographic ischaemia, chronic bronchitis symptoms and poorer self perceived health. It belongs in the library because it documented employment grade differences in smoking, diet, exercise, economic circumstances, monotonous work, low control at work, low satisfaction and social support, and concluded that healthy behaviours should be encouraged across the whole of society alongside attention to social environments, job design and income inequality.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 337(8754), 1387-1393
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/1674771/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(91)93068-K
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marmot, M. G., Smith, G. D., Stansfeld, S., Patel, C., North, F., Head, J., White, I., Brunner, E., & Feeney, A. (1991). Health inequalities among British civil servants: the Whitehall II study. *The Lancet, 337*(8754), 1387-1393. https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(91)93068-K
REF-206 Paper, guideline or statement

Contribution of job control and other risk factors to social variations in coronary heart disease incidence

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Social determinants of health

Using the first three examination phases of the Whitehall II study, with 7,372 men and women contacted on all three occasions and a mean follow up of 5.3 years, this analysis found that men in the lowest clerical and office support grade had an age adjusted odds ratio of 1.50 for any new coronary heart disease compared with administrators, and that low control at work made the largest contribution to the socioeconomic gradient, larger than height and standard coronary risk factors. It belongs in the library because it identifies the psychosocial work environment as a modifiable determinant sitting alongside individual lifestyle behaviours in producing physical disease among people of lower social position.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M. G., Bosma, H., Hemingway, H., Brunner, E., & Stansfeld, S. (1997). Contribution of job control and other risk factors to social variations in coronary heart disease incidence. The Lancet, 350(9073), 235-239. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(97)04244-X

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-206
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M. G., Bosma, H., Hemingway, H., Brunner, E., & Stansfeld, S.
Year
1997
Title
Contribution of job control and other risk factors to social variations in coronary heart disease incidence
Description
Using the first three examination phases of the Whitehall II study, with 7,372 men and women contacted on all three occasions and a mean follow up of 5.3 years, this analysis found that men in the lowest clerical and office support grade had an age adjusted odds ratio of 1.50 for any new coronary heart disease compared with administrators, and that low control at work made the largest contribution to the socioeconomic gradient, larger than height and standard coronary risk factors. It belongs in the library because it identifies the psychosocial work environment as a modifiable determinant sitting alongside individual lifestyle behaviours in producing physical disease among people of lower social position.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 350(9073), 235-239
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Workplace and occupational health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/9242799/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(97)04244-X
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marmot, M. G., Bosma, H., Hemingway, H., Brunner, E., & Stansfeld, S. (1997). Contribution of job control and other risk factors to social variations in coronary heart disease incidence. *The Lancet, 350*(9073), 235-239. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(97)04244-X
REF-207 Paper, guideline or statement

Fair Society, Healthy Lives (The Marmot Review)

  • Report or review
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Commissioned in November 2008 by the then Secretary of State for Health and published in February 2010, this independent strategic review of health inequalities in England, chaired by Professor Sir Michael Marmot, concluded that reducing health inequalities requires action across six policy objectives, including giving every child the best start in life, creating fair employment and good work for all, ensuring a healthy standard of living for all, developing healthy and sustainable places and communities, and strengthening the role and impact of ill health prevention. It belongs in the library as the landmark national policy framework that placed lifestyle and prevention within a whole of government social determinants strategy rather than treating behaviour as an individual matter.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M. (Chair), & The Marmot Review Team. (2010). Fair Society, Healthy Lives (The Marmot Review). Institute of Health Equity. https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/fair-society-healthy-lives-the-marmot-review

Report landing page read on the Institute of Health Equity website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-207
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M. (Chair), & The Marmot Review Team
Year
2010
Title
Fair Society, Healthy Lives (The Marmot Review)
Description
Commissioned in November 2008 by the then Secretary of State for Health and published in February 2010, this independent strategic review of health inequalities in England, chaired by Professor Sir Michael Marmot, concluded that reducing health inequalities requires action across six policy objectives, including giving every child the best start in life, creating fair employment and good work for all, ensuring a healthy standard of living for all, developing healthy and sustainable places and communities, and strengthening the role and impact of ill health prevention. It belongs in the library as the landmark national policy framework that placed lifestyle and prevention within a whole of government social determinants strategy rather than treating behaviour as an individual matter.
Publication or publisher
Institute of Health Equity
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
University research centre
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/fair-society-healthy-lives-the-marmot-review
Verification note
Report landing page read on the Institute of Health Equity website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marmot, M. (Chair), & The Marmot Review Team. (2010). *Fair Society, Healthy Lives (The Marmot Review)*. Institute of Health Equity. https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/fair-society-healthy-lives-the-marmot-review
REF-208 Paper, guideline or statement

Closing the gap in a generation: health equity through action on the social determinants of health. Final report of the Commission on Social Determinants of Health

  • Report or review
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This 247 page final report of the WHO Commission on Social Determinants of Health, set up by WHO in 2005 to marshal evidence on promoting health equity, argues that health inequities arise from the circumstances in which people grow, live, work and age and from the political, social and economic forces that shape those circumstances, noting that a girl born today can expect to live more than 80 years in some countries and less than 45 years in others. It belongs in the library because it is the founding global statement that the distribution of health, including the conditions that make healthy living possible, is a matter of social justice and policy rather than individual choice alone.

Full APA reference

Commission on Social Determinants of Health. (2008). Closing the gap in a generation: health equity through action on the social determinants of health. Final report of the Commission on Social Determinants of Health. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/items/a77f3d0e-d74b-4856-8f2d-ea738c89e370

Catalogue record read on the WHO IRIS repository and the report landing page read on who.int in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-208
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Commission on Social Determinants of Health
Year
2008
Title
Closing the gap in a generation: health equity through action on the social determinants of health. Final report of the Commission on Social Determinants of Health
Description
This 247 page final report of the WHO Commission on Social Determinants of Health, set up by WHO in 2005 to marshal evidence on promoting health equity, argues that health inequities arise from the circumstances in which people grow, live, work and age and from the political, social and economic forces that shape those circumstances, noting that a girl born today can expect to live more than 80 years in some countries and less than 45 years in others. It belongs in the library because it is the founding global statement that the distribution of health, including the conditions that make healthy living possible, is a matter of social justice and policy rather than individual choice alone.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/items/a77f3d0e-d74b-4856-8f2d-ea738c89e370
Verification note
Catalogue record read on the WHO IRIS repository and the report landing page read on who.int in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Commission on Social Determinants of Health. (2008). *Closing the gap in a generation: health equity through action on the social determinants of health. Final report of the Commission on Social Determinants of Health*. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/items/a77f3d0e-d74b-4856-8f2d-ea738c89e370
REF-209 Paper, guideline or statement

The Dahlgren-Whitehead model of health determinants: 30 years on and still chasing rainbows

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

In this review the original authors mark the thirtieth anniversary of their rainbow model of the main determinants of health, describing its journey from initial rejection to worldwide acclaim, clarifying what the model was and was not designed to do, and explaining how they use it together with the complementary Diderichsen framework to explain the pathways producing social gradients in health within countries. It belongs in the library because the rainbow model is the standard teaching and planning framework for locating individual lifestyle factors within the living and working conditions and wider socioeconomic forces that surround them.

Full APA reference

Dahlgren, G., & Whitehead, M. (2021). The Dahlgren-Whitehead model of health determinants: 30 years on and still chasing rainbows. Public Health, 199, 20-24. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2021.08.009

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-209
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dahlgren, G., & Whitehead, M.
Year
2021
Title
The Dahlgren-Whitehead model of health determinants: 30 years on and still chasing rainbows
Description
In this review the original authors mark the thirtieth anniversary of their rainbow model of the main determinants of health, describing its journey from initial rejection to worldwide acclaim, clarifying what the model was and was not designed to do, and explaining how they use it together with the complementary Diderichsen framework to explain the pathways producing social gradients in health within countries. It belongs in the library because the rainbow model is the standard teaching and planning framework for locating individual lifestyle factors within the living and working conditions and wider socioeconomic forces that surround them.
Publication or publisher
Public Health, 199, 20-24
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34534885/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2021.08.009
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Dahlgren, G., & Whitehead, M. (2021). The Dahlgren-Whitehead model of health determinants: 30 years on and still chasing rainbows. *Public Health, 199*, 20-24. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2021.08.009
REF-210 Paper, guideline or statement

Income inequality and health: a causal review

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This review assesses the large literature on income inequality and health within an epidemiological causal framework and concludes that the evidence strongly suggests income inequality affects population health and wellbeing, with the causal criteria of temporality, biological plausibility, consistency and lack of alternative explanations well supported, and that most studies reporting no association can be explained by measuring inequality at an inappropriate scale, controlling for mediating variables, using subjective health measures or short follow up. It belongs in the library because it makes the case that the structural distribution of income, not only individual behaviour, drives population patterns of physical and mental health, and because its causal claims remain actively contested.

Full APA reference

Pickett, K. E., & Wilkinson, R. G. (2015). Income inequality and health: a causal review. Social Science & Medicine, 128, 316-326. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2014.12.031

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-210
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Pickett, K. E., & Wilkinson, R. G.
Year
2015
Title
Income inequality and health: a causal review
Description
This review assesses the large literature on income inequality and health within an epidemiological causal framework and concludes that the evidence strongly suggests income inequality affects population health and wellbeing, with the causal criteria of temporality, biological plausibility, consistency and lack of alternative explanations well supported, and that most studies reporting no association can be explained by measuring inequality at an inappropriate scale, controlling for mediating variables, using subjective health measures or short follow up. It belongs in the library because it makes the case that the structural distribution of income, not only individual behaviour, drives population patterns of physical and mental health, and because its causal claims remain actively contested.
Publication or publisher
Social Science & Medicine, 128, 316-326
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/25577953/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2014.12.031
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Pickett, K. E., & Wilkinson, R. G. (2015). Income inequality and health: a causal review. *Social Science & Medicine, 128*, 316-326. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2014.12.031
REF-211 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of mental disorders and the Sustainable Development Goals: a systematic review of reviews

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This systematic review of reviews included 289 articles and developed a conceptual framework for the social determinants of mental disorders spanning demographic, economic, neighbourhood, environmental event, and social and cultural domains, mapped against the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals. It belongs in the library because it is the clearest synthesis showing that poverty, education, housing, neighbourhood conditions and adverse events shape mental as well as physical health, and it identifies the intervention targets that lifestyle and public mental health programmes must sit alongside.

Full APA reference

Lund, C., Brooke-Sumner, C., Baingana, F., Baron, E. C., Breuer, E., Chandra, P., Haushofer, J., Herrman, H., Jordans, M., Kieling, C., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Omigbodun, O., Tol, W., Patel, V., & Saxena, S. (2018). Social determinants of mental disorders and the Sustainable Development Goals: a systematic review of reviews. The Lancet Psychiatry, 5(4), 357-369. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(18)30060-9

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-211
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lund, C., Brooke-Sumner, C., Baingana, F., Baron, E. C., Breuer, E., Chandra, P., Haushofer, J., Herrman, H., Jordans, M., Kieling, C., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Omigbodun, O., Tol, W., Patel, V., & Saxena, S.
Year
2018
Title
Social determinants of mental disorders and the Sustainable Development Goals: a systematic review of reviews
Description
This systematic review of reviews included 289 articles and developed a conceptual framework for the social determinants of mental disorders spanning demographic, economic, neighbourhood, environmental event, and social and cultural domains, mapped against the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals. It belongs in the library because it is the clearest synthesis showing that poverty, education, housing, neighbourhood conditions and adverse events shape mental as well as physical health, and it identifies the intervention targets that lifestyle and public mental health programmes must sit alongside.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Psychiatry, 5(4), 357-369
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/29580610/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(18)30060-9
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lund, C., Brooke-Sumner, C., Baingana, F., Baron, E. C., Breuer, E., Chandra, P., Haushofer, J., Herrman, H., Jordans, M., Kieling, C., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Omigbodun, O., Tol, W., Patel, V., & Saxena, S. (2018). Social determinants of mental disorders and the Sustainable Development Goals: a systematic review of reviews. *The Lancet Psychiatry, 5*(4), 357-369. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(18)30060-9
REF-212 Paper, guideline or statement

Morbidity and mortality in homeless individuals, prisoners, sex workers, and individuals with substance use disorders in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

This systematic review and meta-analysis of 337 studies from high income countries published between 2005 and 2015 found all cause standardised mortality ratios were significantly raised in 91 of 92 extracted datapoints, at 11.86 in women and 7.88 in men, with the highest ratios for deaths due to injury, poisoning and other external causes, and consistently raised prevalence of infections, mental disorders, cardiovascular and respiratory conditions. It belongs in the library because it quantifies the extreme physical and mental health inequities faced by socially excluded groups and shows that the relative effect of exclusion is greater in women than men.

Full APA reference

Aldridge, R. W., Story, A., Hwang, S. W., Nordentoft, M., Luchenski, S. A., Hartwell, G., Tweed, E. J., Lewer, D., Katikireddi, S. V., & Hayward, A. C. (2018). Morbidity and mortality in homeless individuals, prisoners, sex workers, and individuals with substance use disorders in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis. The Lancet, 391(10117), 241-250. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)31869-X

Abstract with results and conclusions read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-212
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Aldridge, R. W., Story, A., Hwang, S. W., Nordentoft, M., Luchenski, S. A., Hartwell, G., Tweed, E. J., Lewer, D., Katikireddi, S. V., & Hayward, A. C.
Year
2018
Title
Morbidity and mortality in homeless individuals, prisoners, sex workers, and individuals with substance use disorders in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis of 337 studies from high income countries published between 2005 and 2015 found all cause standardised mortality ratios were significantly raised in 91 of 92 extracted datapoints, at 11.86 in women and 7.88 in men, with the highest ratios for deaths due to injury, poisoning and other external causes, and consistently raised prevalence of infections, mental disorders, cardiovascular and respiratory conditions. It belongs in the library because it quantifies the extreme physical and mental health inequities faced by socially excluded groups and shows that the relative effect of exclusion is greater in women than men.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 391(10117), 241-250
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/29137869/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)31869-X
Verification note
Abstract with results and conclusions read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Aldridge, R. W., Story, A., Hwang, S. W., Nordentoft, M., Luchenski, S. A., Hartwell, G., Tweed, E. J., Lewer, D., Katikireddi, S. V., & Hayward, A. C. (2018). Morbidity and mortality in homeless individuals, prisoners, sex workers, and individuals with substance use disorders in high-income countries: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *The Lancet, 391*(10117), 241-250. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)31869-X
REF-213 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of Housing First approaches on health and well-being of adults who are homeless or at risk of homelessness: systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

This systematic review and meta-analysis pooled four randomised controlled trials from Canada and the United States, all judged at high risk of bias, and found that Housing First participants spent more days housed and were more likely to be housed at 18 to 24 months, with fewer emergency department visits and fewer hospitalisations, while differences in mental health, quality of life and substance use were unclear. It belongs in the library because it tests whether providing secure housing, an upstream social determinant, improves health and service use, and shows that structural provision reduces homelessness without increasing problematic substance use.

Full APA reference

Baxter, A. J., Tweed, E. J., Katikireddi, S. V., & Thomson, H. (2019). Effects of Housing First approaches on health and well-being of adults who are homeless or at risk of homelessness: systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 73(5), 379-387. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2018-210981

Full text with abstract, results and conclusion read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-213
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Baxter, A. J., Tweed, E. J., Katikireddi, S. V., & Thomson, H.
Year
2019
Title
Effects of Housing First approaches on health and well-being of adults who are homeless or at risk of homelessness: systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis pooled four randomised controlled trials from Canada and the United States, all judged at high risk of bias, and found that Housing First participants spent more days housed and were more likely to be housed at 18 to 24 months, with fewer emergency department visits and fewer hospitalisations, while differences in mental health, quality of life and substance use were unclear. It belongs in the library because it tests whether providing secure housing, an upstream social determinant, improves health and service use, and shows that structural provision reduces homelessness without increasing problematic substance use.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 73(5), 379-387
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC6581117/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2018-210981
Verification note
Full text with abstract, results and conclusion read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Baxter, A. J., Tweed, E. J., Katikireddi, S. V., & Thomson, H. (2019). Effects of Housing First approaches on health and well-being of adults who are homeless or at risk of homelessness: systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. *Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 73*(5), 379-387. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2018-210981
REF-214 Paper, guideline or statement

The prevalence of mental disorders among homeless people in high-income countries: An updated systematic review and meta-regression analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

This updated systematic review and meta-regression of 39 publications covering 8,049 homeless people across 11 high income countries, including two Australian studies with 667 participants, estimated the mean prevalence of any current mental disorder at 76.2 per cent, with alcohol use disorders at 36.7 per cent, drug use disorders at 21.7 per cent, major depression at 12.6 per cent and schizophrenia spectrum disorders at 12.4 per cent. It belongs in the library because it shows the very high psychiatric morbidity that accompanies housing exclusion and argues that services should regularly review how they assess, treat and follow up homeless people.

Full APA reference

Gutwinski, S., Schreiter, S., Deutscher, K., & Fazel, S. (2021). The prevalence of mental disorders among homeless people in high-income countries: An updated systematic review and meta-regression analysis. PLOS Medicine, 18(8), e1003750. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1003750

Full text with results and conclusions read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-214
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gutwinski, S., Schreiter, S., Deutscher, K., & Fazel, S.
Year
2021
Title
The prevalence of mental disorders among homeless people in high-income countries: An updated systematic review and meta-regression analysis
Description
This updated systematic review and meta-regression of 39 publications covering 8,049 homeless people across 11 high income countries, including two Australian studies with 667 participants, estimated the mean prevalence of any current mental disorder at 76.2 per cent, with alcohol use disorders at 36.7 per cent, drug use disorders at 21.7 per cent, major depression at 12.6 per cent and schizophrenia spectrum disorders at 12.4 per cent. It belongs in the library because it shows the very high psychiatric morbidity that accompanies housing exclusion and argues that services should regularly review how they assess, treat and follow up homeless people.
Publication or publisher
PLOS Medicine, 18(8), e1003750
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC8423293/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1003750
Verification note
Full text with results and conclusions read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Gutwinski, S., Schreiter, S., Deutscher, K., & Fazel, S. (2021). The prevalence of mental disorders among homeless people in high-income countries: An updated systematic review and meta-regression analysis. *PLOS Medicine, 18*(8), e1003750. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1003750
REF-215 Paper, guideline or statement

The threat of home eviction and its effects on health through the equity lens: A systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

This systematic review screened 2,208 unduplicated articles and included 47, most of them from Anglo Saxon countries and mainly the United States, finding general consensus that people under threat of eviction experience worse health, including depression, anxiety, psychological distress and suicide, alongside poor self reported health, high blood pressure and child maltreatment. It belongs in the library because housing insecurity is a social determinant that acts on mental and physical health together, and the review examines how these harms are distributed along axes of social inequity.

Full APA reference

Vásquez-Vera, H., Palència, L., Magna, I., Mena, C., Neira, J., & Borrell, C. (2017). The threat of home eviction and its effects on health through the equity lens: A systematic review. Social Science & Medicine, 175, 199-208. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2017.01.010

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-215
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Vásquez-Vera, H., Palència, L., Magna, I., Mena, C., Neira, J., & Borrell, C.
Year
2017
Title
The threat of home eviction and its effects on health through the equity lens: A systematic review
Description
This systematic review screened 2,208 unduplicated articles and included 47, most of them from Anglo Saxon countries and mainly the United States, finding general consensus that people under threat of eviction experience worse health, including depression, anxiety, psychological distress and suicide, alongside poor self reported health, high blood pressure and child maltreatment. It belongs in the library because housing insecurity is a social determinant that acts on mental and physical health together, and the review examines how these harms are distributed along axes of social inequity.
Publication or publisher
Social Science & Medicine, 175, 199-208
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/28107704/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2017.01.010
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Vásquez-Vera, H., Palència, L., Magna, I., Mena, C., Neira, J., & Borrell, C. (2017). The threat of home eviction and its effects on health through the equity lens: A systematic review. *Social Science & Medicine, 175*, 199-208. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.socscimed.2017.01.010
REF-216 Paper, guideline or statement

Long-term effects of homelessness on mortality: a 15-year Australian cohort study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

This 15 year retrospective longitudinal cohort study of adults attending the emergency department of an inner city public hospital in Melbourne, Victoria, between 1 January 2003 and 31 December 2004 found homeless individuals had a mortality rate of 11.89 versus 8.10 per 1,000 person years, a rate ratio of 1.47, and died at a younger median age of 66.60 years compared with 78.19 years. It belongs in the library because it provides Australian longitudinal evidence that homelessness independently predicts premature death, with adjusted hazard ratios of 2.05 for primary, 1.60 for secondary and 1.72 for tertiary homelessness.

Full APA reference

Seastres, R. J., Hutton, J., Zordan, R., Moore, G., Mackelprang, J., Kiburg, K. V., & Sundararajan, V. (2020). Long-term effects of homelessness on mortality: a 15-year Australian cohort study. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Public Health, 44(6), 476-481. https://doi.org/10.1111/1753-6405.13038

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026, with the publisher record checked on Wiley Online Library.

All fields
ID
REF-216
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Seastres, R. J., Hutton, J., Zordan, R., Moore, G., Mackelprang, J., Kiburg, K. V., & Sundararajan, V.
Year
2020
Title
Long-term effects of homelessness on mortality: a 15-year Australian cohort study
Description
This 15 year retrospective longitudinal cohort study of adults attending the emergency department of an inner city public hospital in Melbourne, Victoria, between 1 January 2003 and 31 December 2004 found homeless individuals had a mortality rate of 11.89 versus 8.10 per 1,000 person years, a rate ratio of 1.47, and died at a younger median age of 66.60 years compared with 78.19 years. It belongs in the library because it provides Australian longitudinal evidence that homelessness independently predicts premature death, with adjusted hazard ratios of 2.05 for primary, 1.60 for secondary and 1.72 for tertiary homelessness.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Public Health, 44(6), 476-481
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32955766/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/1753-6405.13038
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026, with the publisher record checked on Wiley Online Library.
Full APA reference
Seastres, R. J., Hutton, J., Zordan, R., Moore, G., Mackelprang, J., Kiburg, K. V., & Sundararajan, V. (2020). Long-term effects of homelessness on mortality: a 15-year Australian cohort study. *Australian and New Zealand Journal of Public Health, 44*(6), 476-481. https://doi.org/10.1111/1753-6405.13038
REF-217 Paper, guideline or statement

Australia's health 2024

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Released on 2 July 2024, this is the AIHW's nineteenth biennial report on the health of Australians, combining short statistical summaries with long form articles on topical health issues and functioning as a report card on how Australia is faring as a nation, accompanied by an in brief edition covering the health system, the health of Australians and the factors that influence health. It belongs in the library as the authoritative national compendium linking health outcomes to behavioural and social determinants across the Australian population.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). Australia's health 2024. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-health

Report collection page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, where Australia's health 2024 is named as the current edition with a release date of 2 July 2024.

All fields
ID
REF-217
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2024
Title
Australia's health 2024
Description
Released on 2 July 2024, this is the AIHW's nineteenth biennial report on the health of Australians, combining short statistical summaries with long form articles on topical health issues and functioning as a report card on how Australia is faring as a nation, accompanied by an in brief edition covering the health system, the health of Australians and the factors that influence health. It belongs in the library as the authoritative national compendium linking health outcomes to behavioural and social determinants across the Australian population.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-health
Verification note
Report collection page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, where Australia's health 2024 is named as the current edition with a release date of 2 July 2024.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). *Australia's health 2024*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-health
REF-218 Paper, guideline or statement

Australia's welfare 2023

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Released on 7 September 2023, this is the AIHW's sixteenth biennial welfare report, mixing short statistical summaries with long form articles on topical welfare issues and serving as a report card on the welfare of Australians and how they are faring as a nation. It belongs in the library because welfare domains such as income support, housing, employment, education and social participation are the practical machinery of the social determinants of health in Australia.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2023). Australia's welfare 2023. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-welfare

Report collection page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, where Australia's welfare 2023 is named as the current edition with a release date of 7 September 2023.

All fields
ID
REF-218
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2023
Title
Australia's welfare 2023
Description
Released on 7 September 2023, this is the AIHW's sixteenth biennial welfare report, mixing short statistical summaries with long form articles on topical welfare issues and serving as a report card on the welfare of Australians and how they are faring as a nation. It belongs in the library because welfare domains such as income support, housing, employment, education and social participation are the practical machinery of the social determinants of health in Australia.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-welfare
Verification note
Report collection page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, where Australia's welfare 2023 is named as the current edition with a release date of 7 September 2023.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2023). *Australia's welfare 2023*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/australias-welfare
REF-219 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian Burden of Disease Study 2024

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

This edition of the Australian Burden of Disease Study estimates that Australians lost 5.8 million years of healthy life in 2024, equal to 0.2 disability adjusted life years per person, with 54 per cent of total burden due to living with illness or injury and 46 per cent due to premature death, across 220 diseases and injuries in 17 disease groups and 20 individual risk factors covering behavioural, dietary, metabolic and environmental exposures. It belongs in the library because it quantifies how much of Australia's health loss is attributable to modifiable lifestyle and environmental risk factors and how that burden is distributed.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). Australian Burden of Disease Study 2024. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/burden-of-disease/australian-burden-of-disease-study-2024/contents/summary

Summary section of the report read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-219
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2024
Title
Australian Burden of Disease Study 2024
Description
This edition of the Australian Burden of Disease Study estimates that Australians lost 5.8 million years of healthy life in 2024, equal to 0.2 disability adjusted life years per person, with 54 per cent of total burden due to living with illness or injury and 46 per cent due to premature death, across 220 diseases and injuries in 17 disease groups and 20 individual risk factors covering behavioural, dietary, metabolic and environmental exposures. It belongs in the library because it quantifies how much of Australia's health loss is attributable to modifiable lifestyle and environmental risk factors and how that burden is distributed.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/burden-of-disease/australian-burden-of-disease-study-2024/contents/summary
Verification note
Summary section of the report read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). *Australian Burden of Disease Study 2024*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/burden-of-disease/australian-burden-of-disease-study-2024/contents/summary
REF-220 Paper, guideline or statement

Specialist homelessness services annual report 2023–24

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

This annual national report, catalogue number HOU 339 with a release date of 11 March 2025, records that almost 280,100 clients were assisted by specialist homelessness services agencies in 2023–24 at a rate of 105.1 per 10,000 population, that 88,300 clients or around 32 per cent had a current mental health issue, that 37,800 clients were experiencing persistent homelessness, and that around 31 per cent of clients needing short term or emergency accommodation did not receive it. It belongs in the library because it is the primary Australian data source showing how housing exclusion, family and domestic violence and mental ill health converge in the same population.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Specialist homelessness services annual report 2023–24 (Cat. no. HOU 339). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/homelessness-services/specialist-homelessness-services-annual-report/contents/clients-services-and-outcomes

About and clients, services and outcomes sections of the 2023–24 edition read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-220
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Specialist homelessness services annual report 2023–24
Description
This annual national report, catalogue number HOU 339 with a release date of 11 March 2025, records that almost 280,100 clients were assisted by specialist homelessness services agencies in 2023–24 at a rate of 105.1 per 10,000 population, that 88,300 clients or around 32 per cent had a current mental health issue, that 37,800 clients were experiencing persistent homelessness, and that around 31 per cent of clients needing short term or emergency accommodation did not receive it. It belongs in the library because it is the primary Australian data source showing how housing exclusion, family and domestic violence and mental ill health converge in the same population.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/homelessness-services/specialist-homelessness-services-annual-report/contents/clients-services-and-outcomes
Verification note
About and clients, services and outcomes sections of the 2023–24 edition read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Specialist homelessness services annual report 2023–24* (Cat. no. HOU 339). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/homelessness-services/specialist-homelessness-services-annual-report/contents/clients-services-and-outcomes
REF-221 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of health

  • Website or organisation page
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Published on 2 July 2024 as an Australia's health topic summary, this AIHW page compiles selected national data on income, education, occupation, employment and work, housing and homelessness, early childhood, family relationships and social inclusion, and notes the World Health Organization estimate that social determinants account for between 30 and 55 per cent of health outcomes. It belongs in the library because it states plainly that in Australia, as in countries at all income levels, health and illness follow a social gradient in which the lower the socioeconomic position the worse the health.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). Social determinants of health. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/australias-health/social-determinants-of-health

Topic summary page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, showing a publication date of 2 July 2024.

All fields
ID
REF-221
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2024
Title
Social determinants of health
Description
Published on 2 July 2024 as an Australia's health topic summary, this AIHW page compiles selected national data on income, education, occupation, employment and work, housing and homelessness, early childhood, family relationships and social inclusion, and notes the World Health Organization estimate that social determinants account for between 30 and 55 per cent of health outcomes. It belongs in the library because it states plainly that in Australia, as in countries at all income levels, health and illness follow a social gradient in which the lower the socioeconomic position the worse the health.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/australias-health/social-determinants-of-health
Verification note
Topic summary page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, showing a publication date of 2 July 2024.
Related items
REF-493; REF-494; REF-495; REF-497; REF-499
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). *Social determinants of health*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/australias-health/social-determinants-of-health
REF-222 Paper, guideline or statement

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Performance Framework: summary report June 2025

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Released on 11 June 2025, this AIHW summary report draws together Health Performance Framework measures on health status, determinants of health and health system performance, and reports that in 2018 the burden of disease among Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people was 2.3 times that of non-Indigenous Australians, with mental and substance use disorders the leading contributor at 24 per cent of that burden. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative Australian source connecting the social and cultural determinants of health to the combined physical and mental health outcomes of First Nations people.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Performance Framework: summary report June 2025. AIHW. https://www.indigenoushpf.gov.au/reports/summary-reports/summary-report

Summary report page read on the AIHW Indigenous Health Performance Framework site in September 2026, showing a release date of 11 June 2025.

All fields
ID
REF-222
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Performance Framework: summary report June 2025
Description
Released on 11 June 2025, this AIHW summary report draws together Health Performance Framework measures on health status, determinants of health and health system performance, and reports that in 2018 the burden of disease among Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people was 2.3 times that of non-Indigenous Australians, with mental and substance use disorders the leading contributor at 24 per cent of that burden. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative Australian source connecting the social and cultural determinants of health to the combined physical and mental health outcomes of First Nations people.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.indigenoushpf.gov.au/reports/summary-reports/summary-report
Verification note
Summary report page read on the AIHW Indigenous Health Performance Framework site in September 2026, showing a release date of 11 June 2025.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Performance Framework: summary report June 2025*. AIHW. https://www.indigenoushpf.gov.au/reports/summary-reports/summary-report
REF-223 Paper, guideline or statement

Association of socioeconomic position with health behaviors and mortality. The Whitehall II study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

In 9,590 British civil servants from the Whitehall II cohort followed for a mean of 19.4 years with 654 deaths, participants in low socioeconomic positions had 1.60 times the all cause mortality risk of those in high positions, and this association was attenuated by 42 per cent when smoking, diet, physical activity and alcohol were measured only at baseline but by 72 per cent when the same behaviours were treated as time dependent covariates. It belongs in the library because it shows that repeatedly measured lifestyle behaviours account for a substantial share of the social gradient in death, with smoking the strongest mediator and the explanatory power of diet, physical activity and alcohol rising sharply under repeat assessment.

Full APA reference

Stringhini, S., Sabia, S., Shipley, M., Brunner, E., Nabi, H., Kivimaki, M., & Singh-Manoux, A. (2010). Association of socioeconomic position with health behaviors and mortality. The Whitehall II study. JAMA, 303(12), 1159-1166. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2010.297

Full text with results and conclusions read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-223
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Stringhini, S., Sabia, S., Shipley, M., Brunner, E., Nabi, H., Kivimaki, M., & Singh-Manoux, A.
Year
2010
Title
Association of socioeconomic position with health behaviors and mortality. The Whitehall II study
Description
In 9,590 British civil servants from the Whitehall II cohort followed for a mean of 19.4 years with 654 deaths, participants in low socioeconomic positions had 1.60 times the all cause mortality risk of those in high positions, and this association was attenuated by 42 per cent when smoking, diet, physical activity and alcohol were measured only at baseline but by 72 per cent when the same behaviours were treated as time dependent covariates. It belongs in the library because it shows that repeatedly measured lifestyle behaviours account for a substantial share of the social gradient in death, with smoking the strongest mediator and the explanatory power of diet, physical activity and alcohol rising sharply under repeat assessment.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 303(12), 1159-1166
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC2918905/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2010.297
Verification note
Full text with results and conclusions read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Related items
REF-484; REF-486
Full APA reference
Stringhini, S., Sabia, S., Shipley, M., Brunner, E., Nabi, H., Kivimaki, M., & Singh-Manoux, A. (2010). Association of socioeconomic position with health behaviors and mortality. The Whitehall II study. *JAMA, 303*(12), 1159-1166. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2010.297
REF-224 Paper, guideline or statement

What types of interventions generate inequalities? Evidence from systematic reviews

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

This rapid overview of systematic reviews of non healthcare interventions in high income countries, synthesised narratively, found some evidence that media campaigns and workplace smoking bans increase inequalities while structural workplace interventions, provision of resources and fiscal measures such as tobacco pricing reduce them, and concluded that downstream preventive interventions are more likely to increase health inequalities than upstream ones. It belongs in the library because it is the reference statement of intervention generated inequalities, the risk that lifestyle programmes benefit the advantaged most unless they are designed otherwise.

Full APA reference

Lorenc, T., Petticrew, M., Welch, V., & Tugwell, P. (2013). What types of interventions generate inequalities? Evidence from systematic reviews. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 67(2), 190-193. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2012-201257

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-224
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lorenc, T., Petticrew, M., Welch, V., & Tugwell, P.
Year
2013
Title
What types of interventions generate inequalities? Evidence from systematic reviews
Description
This rapid overview of systematic reviews of non healthcare interventions in high income countries, synthesised narratively, found some evidence that media campaigns and workplace smoking bans increase inequalities while structural workplace interventions, provision of resources and fiscal measures such as tobacco pricing reduce them, and concluded that downstream preventive interventions are more likely to increase health inequalities than upstream ones. It belongs in the library because it is the reference statement of intervention generated inequalities, the risk that lifestyle programmes benefit the advantaged most unless they are designed otherwise.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 67(2), 190-193
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/22875078/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2012-201257
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lorenc, T., Petticrew, M., Welch, V., & Tugwell, P. (2013). What types of interventions generate inequalities? Evidence from systematic reviews. *Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 67*(2), 190-193. https://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2012-201257
REF-225 Paper, guideline or statement

Are interventions to promote healthy eating equally effective for all? Systematic review of socioeconomic inequalities in impact

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

This systematic review screened 31,887 articles and included 36 studies that reported dietary outcomes by a measure of socioeconomic position, categorising interventions using an expanded marketing mix framework of price, place, product, prescriptive, promotion and person to test whether healthy eating interventions work equally well across socioeconomic groups. It belongs in the library because it examines the equity impact of nutrition interventions specifically, the domain where advice based approaches most often widen rather than narrow dietary inequalities.

Full APA reference

McGill, R., Anwar, E., Orton, L., Bromley, H., Lloyd-Williams, F., O'Flaherty, M., Taylor-Robinson, D., Guzman-Castillo, M., Gillespie, D., Moreira, P., Allen, K., Hyseni, L., Calder, N., Petticrew, M., White, M., Whitehead, M., & Capewell, S. (2015). Are interventions to promote healthy eating equally effective for all? Systematic review of socioeconomic inequalities in impact. BMC Public Health, 15, 457. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-015-1781-7

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-225
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McGill, R., Anwar, E., Orton, L., Bromley, H., Lloyd-Williams, F., O'Flaherty, M., Taylor-Robinson, D., Guzman-Castillo, M., Gillespie, D., Moreira, P., Allen, K., Hyseni, L., Calder, N., Petticrew, M., White, M., Whitehead, M., & Capewell, S.
Year
2015
Title
Are interventions to promote healthy eating equally effective for all? Systematic review of socioeconomic inequalities in impact
Description
This systematic review screened 31,887 articles and included 36 studies that reported dietary outcomes by a measure of socioeconomic position, categorising interventions using an expanded marketing mix framework of price, place, product, prescriptive, promotion and person to test whether healthy eating interventions work equally well across socioeconomic groups. It belongs in the library because it examines the equity impact of nutrition interventions specifically, the domain where advice based approaches most often widen rather than narrow dietary inequalities.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 15, 457
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/25934496/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-015-1781-7
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
McGill, R., Anwar, E., Orton, L., Bromley, H., Lloyd-Williams, F., O'Flaherty, M., Taylor-Robinson, D., Guzman-Castillo, M., Gillespie, D., Moreira, P., Allen, K., Hyseni, L., Calder, N., Petticrew, M., White, M., Whitehead, M., & Capewell, S. (2015). Are interventions to promote healthy eating equally effective for all? Systematic review of socioeconomic inequalities in impact. *BMC Public Health, 15*, 457. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-015-1781-7
REF-226 Paper, guideline or statement

Food insecurity and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

This systematic review and random effects meta-analysis of 19 studies covering 372,143 participants across 10 countries found food insecurity was positively associated with depression, with an odds ratio of 1.40, and with stress, with an odds ratio of 1.34, while no association was found with anxiety, and the risk of depression was highest in people aged 65 years and over. It belongs in the library because it links a structural determinant of diet directly to mental health outcomes, bridging nutrition, poverty and psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Pourmotabbed, A., Moradi, S., Babaei, A., Ghavami, A., Mohammadi, H., Jalili, C., Symonds, M. E., & Miraghajani, M. (2020). Food insecurity and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Public Health Nutrition, 23(10), 1778-1790. https://doi.org/10.1017/S136898001900435X

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-226
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Pourmotabbed, A., Moradi, S., Babaei, A., Ghavami, A., Mohammadi, H., Jalili, C., Symonds, M. E., & Miraghajani, M.
Year
2020
Title
Food insecurity and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and random effects meta-analysis of 19 studies covering 372,143 participants across 10 countries found food insecurity was positively associated with depression, with an odds ratio of 1.40, and with stress, with an odds ratio of 1.34, while no association was found with anxiety, and the risk of depression was highest in people aged 65 years and over. It belongs in the library because it links a structural determinant of diet directly to mental health outcomes, bridging nutrition, poverty and psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Nutrition, 23(10), 1778-1790
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32174292/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S136898001900435X
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Pourmotabbed, A., Moradi, S., Babaei, A., Ghavami, A., Mohammadi, H., Jalili, C., Symonds, M. E., & Miraghajani, M. (2020). Food insecurity and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *Public Health Nutrition, 23*(10), 1778-1790. https://doi.org/10.1017/S136898001900435X
REF-227 Paper, guideline or statement

Food insecurity and dietary quality in US adults and children: a systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

This systematic review of studies sampling United States residents tested 170 associations in adults, of which 50 or 29 per cent were adverse, and 130 associations in children, of which 21 or 16 per cent were adverse, finding that food insecure adults ate fewer vegetables, fruit and dairy products and had lower intakes of vitamins A and B-6, calcium, magnesium and zinc, while lower fruit consumption was the only consistent finding in children. It belongs in the library because it shows that material access to food, not only knowledge or motivation, sets the ceiling on diet quality, and that parents appear to shield children from the worst dietary consequences.

Full APA reference

Hanson, K. L., & Connor, L. M. (2014). Food insecurity and dietary quality in US adults and children: a systematic review. The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 100(2), 684-692. https://doi.org/10.3945/ajcn.114.084525

Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026, with the Europe PMC record also checked.

All fields
ID
REF-227
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hanson, K. L., & Connor, L. M.
Year
2014
Title
Food insecurity and dietary quality in US adults and children: a systematic review
Description
This systematic review of studies sampling United States residents tested 170 associations in adults, of which 50 or 29 per cent were adverse, and 130 associations in children, of which 21 or 16 per cent were adverse, finding that food insecure adults ate fewer vegetables, fruit and dairy products and had lower intakes of vitamins A and B-6, calcium, magnesium and zinc, while lower fruit consumption was the only consistent finding in children. It belongs in the library because it shows that material access to food, not only knowledge or motivation, sets the ceiling on diet quality, and that parents appear to shield children from the worst dietary consequences.
Publication or publisher
The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 100(2), 684-692
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/24944059/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3945/ajcn.114.084525
Verification note
Abstract and bibliographic record read on PubMed in September 2026, with the Europe PMC record also checked.
Full APA reference
Hanson, K. L., & Connor, L. M. (2014). Food insecurity and dietary quality in US adults and children: a systematic review. *The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 100*(2), 684-692. https://doi.org/10.3945/ajcn.114.084525
REF-228 Paper, guideline or statement

National data on the prevalence of food insecurity in Australia: Implications for health promotion

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

This commentary examines newly released 2023 Australian Bureau of Statistics data, the first nationally representative federal government prevalence estimates in a decade and the first Australian use of the 10 item United States Department of Agriculture Household Food Security Survey Module, reporting that one in eight Australian households experienced food insecurity in 2023 and comparing this with Canadian and United States estimates and with state monitoring in South Australia, Western Australia, Victoria and Tasmania. It belongs in the library because it establishes the Australian baseline for food insecurity, the material determinant that constrains diet quality and mental wellbeing at population scale.

Full APA reference

Kent, K. (2025). National data on the prevalence of food insecurity in Australia: Implications for health promotion. Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 36(4), e70112. https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.70112

Full text record read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-228
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kent, K.
Year
2025
Title
National data on the prevalence of food insecurity in Australia: Implications for health promotion
Description
This commentary examines newly released 2023 Australian Bureau of Statistics data, the first nationally representative federal government prevalence estimates in a decade and the first Australian use of the 10 item United States Department of Agriculture Household Food Security Survey Module, reporting that one in eight Australian households experienced food insecurity in 2023 and comparing this with Canadian and United States estimates and with state monitoring in South Australia, Western Australia, Victoria and Tasmania. It belongs in the library because it establishes the Australian baseline for food insecurity, the material determinant that constrains diet quality and mental wellbeing at population scale.
Publication or publisher
Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 36(4), e70112
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12495553/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.70112
Verification note
Full text record read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Kent, K. (2025). National data on the prevalence of food insecurity in Australia: Implications for health promotion. *Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 36*(4), e70112. https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.70112
REF-229 Paper, guideline or statement

Ambient temperature and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This systematic review and meta-analysis included 114 epidemiological studies of ambient outdoor temperature and mental health, 19 of which were pooled, and found that a 1 degree Celsius rise in mean monthly temperature was associated with a 1.5 percent increase in suicide incidence (95% CI 0.8 to 2.2, n = 1,563,109) while heatwave periods were associated with a 9.7 percent increase in hospital attendance or admission for mental illness (95% CI 7.6 to 11.9, n = 362,086). It belongs in this library because it quantifies ambient heat as an environmental determinant of psychiatric outcomes and shows how a physical exposure translates into measurable mental health burden at population scale.

Full APA reference

Thompson, R., Lawrance, E. L., Roberts, L. F., Grailey, K., Ashrafian, H., Maheswaran, H., Toledano, M. B., & Darzi, A. (2023). Ambient temperature and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis. The Lancet Planetary Health, 7(7), e580-e589. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(23)00104-3

Full text summary read on The Lancet Planetary Health website and citation details confirmed on the PubMed record PMID 37437999 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-229
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Thompson, R., Lawrance, E. L., Roberts, L. F., Grailey, K., Ashrafian, H., Maheswaran, H., Toledano, M. B., & Darzi, A.
Year
2023
Title
Ambient temperature and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis included 114 epidemiological studies of ambient outdoor temperature and mental health, 19 of which were pooled, and found that a 1 degree Celsius rise in mean monthly temperature was associated with a 1.5 percent increase in suicide incidence (95% CI 0.8 to 2.2, n = 1,563,109) while heatwave periods were associated with a 9.7 percent increase in hospital attendance or admission for mental illness (95% CI 7.6 to 11.9, n = 362,086). It belongs in this library because it quantifies ambient heat as an environmental determinant of psychiatric outcomes and shows how a physical exposure translates into measurable mental health burden at population scale.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Planetary Health, 7(7), e580-e589
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.thelancet.com/journals/lanplh/article/PIIS2542-5196(23)00104-3/fulltext
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(23)00104-3
Verification note
Full text summary read on The Lancet Planetary Health website and citation details confirmed on the PubMed record PMID 37437999 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Thompson, R., Lawrance, E. L., Roberts, L. F., Grailey, K., Ashrafian, H., Maheswaran, H., Toledano, M. B., & Darzi, A. (2023). Ambient temperature and mental health: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *The Lancet Planetary Health, 7*(7), e580-e589. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(23)00104-3
REF-230 Paper, guideline or statement

Is there an association between hot weather and poor mental health outcomes? A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This systematic review and meta-analysis pooled 53 studies of high ambient temperatures and heatwaves covering more than 1.7 million mental health related deaths and 1.9 million morbidity cases, and found that each 1 degree Celsius rise in temperature was associated with a 2.2 percent increase in mental health related mortality (RR 1.022, 95% CI 1.015 to 1.029) and a 0.9 percent increase in morbidity (RR 1.009, 95% CI 1.007 to 1.015). It belongs in this library because it establishes heat as a modifiable population level risk factor for psychiatric morbidity and mortality, with the largest risks in organic and substance related disorders.

Full APA reference

Liu, J., Varghese, B. M., Hansen, A., Xiang, J., Zhang, Y., Dear, K., Gourley, M., Driscoll, T., Morgan, G., Capon, A., & Bi, P. (2021). Is there an association between hot weather and poor mental health outcomes? A systematic review and meta-analysis. Environment International, 153, 106533. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envint.2021.106533

Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 33799230 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-230
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Liu, J., Varghese, B. M., Hansen, A., Xiang, J., Zhang, Y., Dear, K., Gourley, M., Driscoll, T., Morgan, G., Capon, A., & Bi, P.
Year
2021
Title
Is there an association between hot weather and poor mental health outcomes? A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis pooled 53 studies of high ambient temperatures and heatwaves covering more than 1.7 million mental health related deaths and 1.9 million morbidity cases, and found that each 1 degree Celsius rise in temperature was associated with a 2.2 percent increase in mental health related mortality (RR 1.022, 95% CI 1.015 to 1.029) and a 0.9 percent increase in morbidity (RR 1.009, 95% CI 1.007 to 1.015). It belongs in this library because it establishes heat as a modifiable population level risk factor for psychiatric morbidity and mortality, with the largest risks in organic and substance related disorders.
Publication or publisher
Environment International, 153, 106533
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33799230/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envint.2021.106533
Verification note
Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 33799230 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Liu, J., Varghese, B. M., Hansen, A., Xiang, J., Zhang, Y., Dear, K., Gourley, M., Driscoll, T., Morgan, G., Capon, A., & Bi, P. (2021). Is there an association between hot weather and poor mental health outcomes? A systematic review and meta-analysis. *Environment International, 153*, 106533. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envint.2021.106533
REF-231 Paper, guideline or statement

The effect of heat waves on mental health in a temperate Australian city

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This ecological study of 171,614 hospital admissions and 2,599 deaths for mental and behavioural disorders in metropolitan Adelaide, South Australia, between 1993 and 2006 found a temperature threshold of 26.7 degrees Celsius above which admissions rose sharply, with a 7.3 percent increase in admissions during heatwaves and higher mortality among people aged 65 to 74 years and people with schizophrenia, schizotypal and delusional disorders. It belongs in this library as landmark Australian evidence that extreme heat is a salient clinical and social risk for people living with mental illness, connecting environmental exposure, physical vulnerability and psychiatric outcomes.

Full APA reference

Hansen, A., Bi, P., Nitschke, M., Ryan, P., Pisaniello, D., & Tucker, G. (2008). The effect of heat waves on mental health in a temperate Australian city. Environmental Health Perspectives, 116(10), 1369-1375. https://doi.org/10.1289/ehp.11339

Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 18941580 and the full text read on the Environmental Health Perspectives website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-231
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hansen, A., Bi, P., Nitschke, M., Ryan, P., Pisaniello, D., & Tucker, G.
Year
2008
Title
The effect of heat waves on mental health in a temperate Australian city
Description
This ecological study of 171,614 hospital admissions and 2,599 deaths for mental and behavioural disorders in metropolitan Adelaide, South Australia, between 1993 and 2006 found a temperature threshold of 26.7 degrees Celsius above which admissions rose sharply, with a 7.3 percent increase in admissions during heatwaves and higher mortality among people aged 65 to 74 years and people with schizophrenia, schizotypal and delusional disorders. It belongs in this library as landmark Australian evidence that extreme heat is a salient clinical and social risk for people living with mental illness, connecting environmental exposure, physical vulnerability and psychiatric outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Environmental Health Perspectives, 116(10), 1369-1375
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/18941580/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1289/ehp.11339
Verification note
Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 18941580 and the full text read on the Environmental Health Perspectives website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Hansen, A., Bi, P., Nitschke, M., Ryan, P., Pisaniello, D., & Tucker, G. (2008). The effect of heat waves on mental health in a temperate Australian city. *Environmental Health Perspectives, 116*(10), 1369-1375. https://doi.org/10.1289/ehp.11339
REF-232 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychotropic prescriptions in the context of extreme heat

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This CMAJ practice article sets out how psychotropic medications raise heat vulnerability by interfering with central thermoregulation, altering thirst perception and fluid and electrolyte balance, and reports that heatwaves are associated with a 9.7 percent increase in mental health related hospital presentations and that mental illness is among the strongest predictors of heat related death (odds ratio 3.61, 95% CI 1.3 to 9.8), noting that people with schizophrenia had the highest death risk during the 2021 western Canada heat dome. It belongs in this library because it translates climate exposure into concrete prescribing and monitoring decisions, showing how medication, housing and social vulnerability combine to shape physical and mental health outcomes.

Full APA reference

Xue, S., Rajan, A., & Kidd, S. A. (2025). Psychotropic prescriptions in the context of extreme heat. CMAJ, 197(29), E915. https://doi.org/10.1503/cmaj.250636

Full text read on the PubMed Central record PMC12448758 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-232
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Xue, S., Rajan, A., & Kidd, S. A.
Year
2025
Title
Psychotropic prescriptions in the context of extreme heat
Description
This CMAJ practice article sets out how psychotropic medications raise heat vulnerability by interfering with central thermoregulation, altering thirst perception and fluid and electrolyte balance, and reports that heatwaves are associated with a 9.7 percent increase in mental health related hospital presentations and that mental illness is among the strongest predictors of heat related death (odds ratio 3.61, 95% CI 1.3 to 9.8), noting that people with schizophrenia had the highest death risk during the 2021 western Canada heat dome. It belongs in this library because it translates climate exposure into concrete prescribing and monitoring decisions, showing how medication, housing and social vulnerability combine to shape physical and mental health outcomes.
Publication or publisher
CMAJ, 197(29), E915
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12448758/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1503/cmaj.250636
Verification note
Full text read on the PubMed Central record PMC12448758 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Xue, S., Rajan, A., & Kidd, S. A. (2025). Psychotropic prescriptions in the context of extreme heat. *CMAJ, 197*(29), E915. https://doi.org/10.1503/cmaj.250636
REF-233 Paper, guideline or statement

The role of psychotropics on the associations between extreme temperature and heat-related outcomes among people with mental health conditions: population-based study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This population based self controlled case series used National Health Insurance claims from Ibaraki prefecture, Japan, for 2014 to 2021 and covered 62,186 people with severe mental illness and 96,875 people with depression, finding that heatwave periods raised the rate of heat related illness in people with severe mental illness both without antipsychotics (IRR 1.45, 95% CI 1.35 to 1.56) and with antipsychotics (IRR 1.48, 95% CI 1.40 to 1.56), and also raised myocardial infarction risk. It belongs in this library because it shows that heat risk in people with mental illness is elevated regardless of psychotropic exposure, pointing to broader social and clinical vulnerability rather than medication alone.

Full APA reference

Wong, A. Y. S., Iwagami, M., Taniguchi, Y., Kawamura, C., Suzuki, A., Douglas, I. J., Bhaskaran, K., Sugiyama, T., Kuroda, N., Nitsch, D., & Tamiya, N. (2024). The role of psychotropics on the associations between extreme temperature and heat-related outcomes among people with mental health conditions: population-based study. Psychological Medicine, 54(16), 4658-4664. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291724002824

Full text and results tables read on the PubMed Central record PMC11769904 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-233
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wong, A. Y. S., Iwagami, M., Taniguchi, Y., Kawamura, C., Suzuki, A., Douglas, I. J., Bhaskaran, K., Sugiyama, T., Kuroda, N., Nitsch, D., & Tamiya, N.
Year
2024
Title
The role of psychotropics on the associations between extreme temperature and heat-related outcomes among people with mental health conditions: population-based study
Description
This population based self controlled case series used National Health Insurance claims from Ibaraki prefecture, Japan, for 2014 to 2021 and covered 62,186 people with severe mental illness and 96,875 people with depression, finding that heatwave periods raised the rate of heat related illness in people with severe mental illness both without antipsychotics (IRR 1.45, 95% CI 1.35 to 1.56) and with antipsychotics (IRR 1.48, 95% CI 1.40 to 1.56), and also raised myocardial infarction risk. It belongs in this library because it shows that heat risk in people with mental illness is elevated regardless of psychotropic exposure, pointing to broader social and clinical vulnerability rather than medication alone.
Publication or publisher
Psychological Medicine, 54(16), 4658-4664
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Japan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11769904/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291724002824
Verification note
Full text and results tables read on the PubMed Central record PMC11769904 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Wong, A. Y. S., Iwagami, M., Taniguchi, Y., Kawamura, C., Suzuki, A., Douglas, I. J., Bhaskaran, K., Sugiyama, T., Kuroda, N., Nitsch, D., & Tamiya, N. (2024). The role of psychotropics on the associations between extreme temperature and heat-related outcomes among people with mental health conditions: population-based study. *Psychological Medicine, 54*(16), 4658-4664. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291724002824
REF-234 Paper, guideline or statement

Heat and Medications – Guidance for Clinicians

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This clinical guidance page, first posted in July 2024 and last reviewed in September 2025, sets out the three ways medicines and heat interact, namely impaired thermoregulation or fluid balance, reduced drug effectiveness or increased toxicity when stored above recommended temperatures, and heat driven changes in pharmacokinetics, and names diuretics, anticholinergic agents, antipsychotics, tricyclic antidepressants, SSRIs, stimulants and non-selective antihistamines among the agents that raise risk. It belongs in this library because it gives prescribers a practical, government issued framework for protecting people whose medications, chronic illness and living conditions make heat a combined physical and mental health hazard.

Full APA reference

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Environmental Health. (2025). Heat and Medications – Guidance for Clinicians. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. https://www.cdc.gov/heat-health/hcp/clinical-guidance/heat-and-medications-guidance-for-clinicians.html

Guidance page read on the CDC Heat Health website in September 2026, where the posting date of July 17, 2024 and last review date of September 18, 2025 are stated.

All fields
ID
REF-234
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Environmental Health
Year
2025
Title
Heat and Medications – Guidance for Clinicians
Description
This clinical guidance page, first posted in July 2024 and last reviewed in September 2025, sets out the three ways medicines and heat interact, namely impaired thermoregulation or fluid balance, reduced drug effectiveness or increased toxicity when stored above recommended temperatures, and heat driven changes in pharmacokinetics, and names diuretics, anticholinergic agents, antipsychotics, tricyclic antidepressants, SSRIs, stimulants and non-selective antihistamines among the agents that raise risk. It belongs in this library because it gives prescribers a practical, government issued framework for protecting people whose medications, chronic illness and living conditions make heat a combined physical and mental health hazard.
Publication or publisher
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cdc.gov/heat-health/hcp/clinical-guidance/heat-and-medications-guidance-for-clinicians.html
Verification note
Guidance page read on the CDC Heat Health website in September 2026, where the posting date of July 17, 2024 and last review date of September 18, 2025 are stated.
Full APA reference
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Environmental Health. (2025). *Heat and Medications – Guidance for Clinicians*. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. https://www.cdc.gov/heat-health/hcp/clinical-guidance/heat-and-medications-guidance-for-clinicians.html
REF-235 Paper, guideline or statement

The mental health impacts of fuel poverty: A global scoping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Social determinants of health

This PRISMA-ScR scoping review screened 4,761 records and included 47 studies from 13 countries, with the United Kingdom (20 studies), Spain (8) and China (6) most represented, and found that 46 of the 47 studies reported a detrimental association between fuel poverty and mental health through environmental pathways such as thermal discomfort, damp and mould and heating fewer rooms, economic pathways such as debt and the heat or eat dilemma, and social pathways such as isolation, loneliness and stigma. It belongs in this library because it maps cold housing and energy hardship as a social determinant that operates on mental health through material, economic and relational mechanisms rather than through individual behaviour alone.

Full APA reference

Khavandi, S., McColl, L., Leavey, C., McGowan, V. J., & Bennett, N. C. (2024). The mental health impacts of fuel poverty: A global scoping review. International Journal of Public Health, 69, 1607459. https://doi.org/10.3389/ijph.2024.1607459

Full text read on the PubMed Central record PMC11612648 and on the International Journal of Public Health website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-235
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Khavandi, S., McColl, L., Leavey, C., McGowan, V. J., & Bennett, N. C.
Year
2024
Title
The mental health impacts of fuel poverty: A global scoping review
Description
This PRISMA-ScR scoping review screened 4,761 records and included 47 studies from 13 countries, with the United Kingdom (20 studies), Spain (8) and China (6) most represented, and found that 46 of the 47 studies reported a detrimental association between fuel poverty and mental health through environmental pathways such as thermal discomfort, damp and mould and heating fewer rooms, economic pathways such as debt and the heat or eat dilemma, and social pathways such as isolation, loneliness and stigma. It belongs in this library because it maps cold housing and energy hardship as a social determinant that operates on mental health through material, economic and relational mechanisms rather than through individual behaviour alone.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Public Health, 69, 1607459
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Social connection; Sleep
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11612648/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/ijph.2024.1607459
Verification note
Full text read on the PubMed Central record PMC11612648 and on the International Journal of Public Health website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Khavandi, S., McColl, L., Leavey, C., McGowan, V. J., & Bennett, N. C. (2024). The mental health impacts of fuel poverty: A global scoping review. *International Journal of Public Health, 69*, 1607459. https://doi.org/10.3389/ijph.2024.1607459
REF-236 Paper, guideline or statement

The Health Impacts of Cold Homes and Fuel Poverty

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nature and environment
  • Social determinants of health

This review by the Marmot Review Team at University College London for Friends of the Earth synthesised evidence on the direct and indirect health effects of cold housing in the United Kingdom, reporting that 18 percent of UK households were fuel poor in 2008, that fuel poor households in England rose from 1.2 million in 2004 to 4.6 million in 2010, that the World Health Organization recommends indoor temperatures of 21 degrees Celsius in living rooms and 18 degrees Celsius in bedrooms for at least nine hours a day, and that raising all English properties to SAP 81 would lift an estimated 83 percent of households out of fuel poverty. It belongs in this library as a foundational social determinants document showing how housing quality, income and fuel costs shape cardiovascular, respiratory and mental health together.

Full APA reference

Geddes, I., Bloomer, E., Allen, J., & Goldblatt, P. (2011). The Health Impacts of Cold Homes and Fuel Poverty. Friends of the Earth & the Marmot Review Team. https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty.pdf

Report PDF read on the Institute of Health Equity website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-236
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Geddes, I., Bloomer, E., Allen, J., & Goldblatt, P.
Year
2011
Title
The Health Impacts of Cold Homes and Fuel Poverty
Description
This review by the Marmot Review Team at University College London for Friends of the Earth synthesised evidence on the direct and indirect health effects of cold housing in the United Kingdom, reporting that 18 percent of UK households were fuel poor in 2008, that fuel poor households in England rose from 1.2 million in 2004 to 4.6 million in 2010, that the World Health Organization recommends indoor temperatures of 21 degrees Celsius in living rooms and 18 degrees Celsius in bedrooms for at least nine hours a day, and that raising all English properties to SAP 81 would lift an estimated 83 percent of households out of fuel poverty. It belongs in this library as a foundational social determinants document showing how housing quality, income and fuel costs shape cardiovascular, respiratory and mental health together.
Publication or publisher
Friends of the Earth & the Marmot Review Team
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty.pdf
Verification note
Report PDF read on the Institute of Health Equity website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Geddes, I., Bloomer, E., Allen, J., & Goldblatt, P. (2011). *The Health Impacts of Cold Homes and Fuel Poverty*. Friends of the Earth & the Marmot Review Team. https://www.instituteofhealthequity.org/resources-reports/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty/the-health-impacts-of-cold-homes-and-fuel-poverty.pdf
REF-237 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of cold-water immersion on health and wellbeing: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

This systematic review and meta-analysis of 11 randomised trials in 3,177 healthy adults, using water at 7 to 15 degrees Celsius for 30 seconds to two hours, found a significant rise in inflammation immediately after immersion (SMD 1.03, 95% CI 0.37 to 1.68) and a significant reduction in stress 12 hours afterwards (SMD -1.00, 95% CI -1.40 to -0.61) with no significant effect immediately, at one hour, at 24 hours or at 48 hours. It belongs in this library because deliberate cold exposure is a widely promoted lifestyle practice and this review shows time dependent effects on stress, sleep quality and quality of life alongside a thin evidence base of small, homogeneous trials.

Full APA reference

Cain, T., Brinsley, J., Bennett, H., Nelson, M., Maher, C., & Singh, B. (2025). Effects of cold-water immersion on health and wellbeing: A systematic review and meta-analysis. PLOS ONE, 20(1), e0317615. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0317615

Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 39879231 and full results read on the PubMed Central record PMC11778651 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-237
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cain, T., Brinsley, J., Bennett, H., Nelson, M., Maher, C., & Singh, B.
Year
2025
Title
Effects of cold-water immersion on health and wellbeing: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis of 11 randomised trials in 3,177 healthy adults, using water at 7 to 15 degrees Celsius for 30 seconds to two hours, found a significant rise in inflammation immediately after immersion (SMD 1.03, 95% CI 0.37 to 1.68) and a significant reduction in stress 12 hours afterwards (SMD -1.00, 95% CI -1.40 to -0.61) with no significant effect immediately, at one hour, at 24 hours or at 48 hours. It belongs in this library because deliberate cold exposure is a widely promoted lifestyle practice and this review shows time dependent effects on stress, sleep quality and quality of life alongside a thin evidence base of small, homogeneous trials.
Publication or publisher
PLOS ONE, 20(1), e0317615
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Nature and environment; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; General lifestyle and wellbeing; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11778651/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0317615
Verification note
Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 39879231 and full results read on the PubMed Central record PMC11778651 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Cain, T., Brinsley, J., Bennett, H., Nelson, M., Maher, C., & Singh, B. (2025). Effects of cold-water immersion on health and wellbeing: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *PLOS ONE, 20*(1), e0317615. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0317615
REF-238 Paper, guideline or statement

Development and validation of a measure of climate change anxiety

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This paper reports three studies developing and validating the Climate Change Anxiety Scale, with an initial MTurk sample of 197, a replication sample of 199 and a third sample of 217, and exploratory factor analysis yielding four factors of cognitive-emotional impairment, functional impairment, behavioural engagement and experience, with climate change anxiety correlated with emotional but not behavioural responses to climate change. It belongs in this library because it is the most widely used measurement instrument for climate distress and it distinguishes ordinary worry from impairment in daily functioning, which matters for deciding when eco distress becomes a clinical concern.

Full APA reference

Clayton, S., & Karazsia, B. T. (2020). Development and validation of a measure of climate change anxiety. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 69, 101434. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2020.101434

Bibliographic record read on the OUCI index page and the abstract, volume and article number confirmed from the Crossref and Semantic Scholar API records for DOI 10.1016/j.jenvp.2020.101434 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-238
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Clayton, S., & Karazsia, B. T.
Year
2020
Title
Development and validation of a measure of climate change anxiety
Description
This paper reports three studies developing and validating the Climate Change Anxiety Scale, with an initial MTurk sample of 197, a replication sample of 199 and a third sample of 217, and exploratory factor analysis yielding four factors of cognitive-emotional impairment, functional impairment, behavioural engagement and experience, with climate change anxiety correlated with emotional but not behavioural responses to climate change. It belongs in this library because it is the most widely used measurement instrument for climate distress and it distinguishes ordinary worry from impairment in daily functioning, which matters for deciding when eco distress becomes a clinical concern.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 69, 101434
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Wellbeing measurement; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://ouci.dntb.gov.ua/en/works/4NeAGeY7/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2020.101434
Verification note
Bibliographic record read on the OUCI index page and the abstract, volume and article number confirmed from the Crossref and Semantic Scholar API records for DOI 10.1016/j.jenvp.2020.101434 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Clayton, S., & Karazsia, B. T. (2020). Development and validation of a measure of climate change anxiety. *Journal of Environmental Psychology, 69*, 101434. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2020.101434
REF-239 Paper, guideline or statement

Climate anxiety in children and young people and their beliefs about government responses to climate change: a global survey

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This global survey of 10,000 people aged 16 to 25 years, 1,000 in each of Australia, Brazil, Finland, France, India, Nigeria, the Philippines, Portugal, the United Kingdom and the United States, found that 59 percent were very or extremely worried about climate change, 84 percent were at least moderately worried, more than 45 percent said their feelings negatively affected daily life and functioning, and 75 percent thought the future is frightening, with distress correlated with perceived inadequate government response and feelings of betrayal. It belongs in this library because it frames climate distress in young people as a rational response to a social and political failure rather than an individual pathology, linking environmental context, wellbeing and everyday functioning.

Full APA reference

Hickman, C., Marks, E., Pihkala, P., Clayton, S., Lewandowski, R. E., Mayall, E. E., Wray, B., Mellor, C., & van Susteren, L. (2021). Climate anxiety in children and young people and their beliefs about government responses to climate change: a global survey. The Lancet Planetary Health, 5(12), e863-e873. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(21)00278-3

Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 34895496 and the methods and sampling detail read on The Lancet Planetary Health full text page in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-239
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hickman, C., Marks, E., Pihkala, P., Clayton, S., Lewandowski, R. E., Mayall, E. E., Wray, B., Mellor, C., & van Susteren, L.
Year
2021
Title
Climate anxiety in children and young people and their beliefs about government responses to climate change: a global survey
Description
This global survey of 10,000 people aged 16 to 25 years, 1,000 in each of Australia, Brazil, Finland, France, India, Nigeria, the Philippines, Portugal, the United Kingdom and the United States, found that 59 percent were very or extremely worried about climate change, 84 percent were at least moderately worried, more than 45 percent said their feelings negatively affected daily life and functioning, and 75 percent thought the future is frightening, with distress correlated with perceived inadequate government response and feelings of betrayal. It belongs in this library because it frames climate distress in young people as a rational response to a social and political failure rather than an individual pathology, linking environmental context, wellbeing and everyday functioning.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Planetary Health, 5(12), e863-e873
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Psychological mechanisms; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34895496/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(21)00278-3
Verification note
Abstract read on the PubMed record PMID 34895496 and the methods and sampling detail read on The Lancet Planetary Health full text page in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Hickman, C., Marks, E., Pihkala, P., Clayton, S., Lewandowski, R. E., Mayall, E. E., Wray, B., Mellor, C., & van Susteren, L. (2021). Climate anxiety in children and young people and their beliefs about government responses to climate change: a global survey. *The Lancet Planetary Health, 5*(12), e863-e873. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(21)00278-3
REF-240 Paper, guideline or statement

Climate anxiety is not a mental health problem. But we should still treat it as one

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This commentary argues that climate anxiety is a normal and largely adaptive response rather than a disorder, noting that almost 80 percent of Europeans regard climate change as a very serious problem, that 66 percent of people in the United States are somewhat or very worried about it, that about one in 10 Americans feel anxious about it with some regularity but only 3 percent reach clinically significant levels, and that 2 percent already discuss these feelings with a counsellor while 7 percent would like to. It belongs in this library because it sets out the practical and ethical consequences of classifying eco distress as illness or as ordinary emotion, which shapes how services, psychologists and public health respond.

Full APA reference

van Valkengoed, A. M. (2023). Climate anxiety is not a mental health problem. But we should still treat it as one. Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, 79(6), 385-387. https://doi.org/10.1080/00963402.2023.2266942

Author accepted version read in the University of Groningen research portal PDF in September 2026, where the journal, volume, issue and page range are stated.

All fields
ID
REF-240
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
van Valkengoed, A. M.
Year
2023
Title
Climate anxiety is not a mental health problem. But we should still treat it as one
Description
This commentary argues that climate anxiety is a normal and largely adaptive response rather than a disorder, noting that almost 80 percent of Europeans regard climate change as a very serious problem, that 66 percent of people in the United States are somewhat or very worried about it, that about one in 10 Americans feel anxious about it with some regularity but only 3 percent reach clinically significant levels, and that 2 percent already discuss these feelings with a counsellor while 7 percent would like to. It belongs in this library because it sets out the practical and ethical consequences of classifying eco distress as illness or as ordinary emotion, which shapes how services, psychologists and public health respond.
Publication or publisher
Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, 79(6), 385-387
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Psychological mechanisms; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pure.rug.nl/ws/portalfiles/portal/831891183/Climate_anxiety_is_not_a_mental_health_problem._But_we_should_still_treat_it_as_one.pdf
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/00963402.2023.2266942
Verification note
Author accepted version read in the University of Groningen research portal PDF in September 2026, where the journal, volume, issue and page range are stated.
Full APA reference
van Valkengoed, A. M. (2023). Climate anxiety is not a mental health problem. But we should still treat it as one. *Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, 79*(6), 385-387. https://doi.org/10.1080/00963402.2023.2266942
REF-241 Paper, guideline or statement

The dynamic course of psychological outcomes following the Victorian Black Saturday bushfires

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This longitudinal Beyond Bushfires study surveyed 1,017 residents 3 to 4 years after the 2009 Victorian Black Saturday bushfires, 736 at five years and 525 at 10 years, and found fire related posttraumatic stress disorder fell from 12.2 percent to 6.2 percent and severe distress from 7.5 percent to 4.4 percent while depression and alcohol abuse remained comparable, with 22.1 percent of people in high affected regions still meeting criteria for posttraumatic stress disorder, depression or severe distress at 10 years and worsening linked to property loss and recent traumatic and stressful events. It belongs in this library because it maps recovery trajectories rather than single time point prevalence and identifies ongoing social and material stressors, not just the original disaster, as drivers of long term mental health.

Full APA reference

Bryant, R. A., Gibbs, L., Gallagher, H. C., Pattison, P., Lusher, D., MacDougall, C., Harms, L., Block, K., Ireton, G., Richardson, J., Forbes, D., Molyneaux, R., & O'Donnell, M. (2021). The dynamic course of psychological outcomes following the Victorian Black Saturday bushfires. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55(7), 666-677. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420969815

Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 33176436 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-241
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bryant, R. A., Gibbs, L., Gallagher, H. C., Pattison, P., Lusher, D., MacDougall, C., Harms, L., Block, K., Ireton, G., Richardson, J., Forbes, D., Molyneaux, R., & O'Donnell, M.
Year
2021
Title
The dynamic course of psychological outcomes following the Victorian Black Saturday bushfires
Description
This longitudinal Beyond Bushfires study surveyed 1,017 residents 3 to 4 years after the 2009 Victorian Black Saturday bushfires, 736 at five years and 525 at 10 years, and found fire related posttraumatic stress disorder fell from 12.2 percent to 6.2 percent and severe distress from 7.5 percent to 4.4 percent while depression and alcohol abuse remained comparable, with 22.1 percent of people in high affected regions still meeting criteria for posttraumatic stress disorder, depression or severe distress at 10 years and worsening linked to property loss and recent traumatic and stressful events. It belongs in this library because it maps recovery trajectories rather than single time point prevalence and identifies ongoing social and material stressors, not just the original disaster, as drivers of long term mental health.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55(7), 666-677
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33176436/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420969815
Verification note
Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 33176436 in September 2026.
Related items
REF-569
Full APA reference
Bryant, R. A., Gibbs, L., Gallagher, H. C., Pattison, P., Lusher, D., MacDougall, C., Harms, L., Block, K., Ireton, G., Richardson, J., Forbes, D., Molyneaux, R., & O'Donnell, M. (2021). The dynamic course of psychological outcomes following the Victorian Black Saturday bushfires. *Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 55*(7), 666-677. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867420969815
REF-242 Paper, guideline or statement

10 Years Beyond Bushfires Report 2020

  • Report or review
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This University of Melbourne report presents the longitudinal mixed method Beyond Bushfires study of communities affected by the 2009 Victorian bushfires, combining community meetings, in depth interviews conducted 3 to 4 years after the fires and repeated surveys at 3 to 4, five and 10 years, across communities ranging from no direct impact to high impact, and examines how social connections and community level recovery shaped individual mental health and wellbeing. It belongs in this library because it treats disaster recovery as a social process, showing that community networks, service responses and place attachment influence long term mental and physical health after an extreme weather event.

Full APA reference

Gibbs, L., Molyneaux, R., Harms, L., Gallagher, H. C., Block, K., Richardson, J., Brandenburg, V., O'Donnell, M., Kellett, C., Quinn, P., Kosta, L., Brady, K., Ireton, G., MacDougall, C., & Bryant, R. (2021). 10 Years Beyond Bushfires Report 2020. University of Melbourne. https://mspgh.unimelb.edu.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/3767858/BB-10-years-report.pdf

Report PDF read on the University of Melbourne Melbourne School of Population and Global Health website in September 2026, where the suggested citation and March 2021 date are stated.

All fields
ID
REF-242
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gibbs, L., Molyneaux, R., Harms, L., Gallagher, H. C., Block, K., Richardson, J., Brandenburg, V., O'Donnell, M., Kellett, C., Quinn, P., Kosta, L., Brady, K., Ireton, G., MacDougall, C., & Bryant, R.
Year
2021
Title
10 Years Beyond Bushfires Report 2020
Description
This University of Melbourne report presents the longitudinal mixed method Beyond Bushfires study of communities affected by the 2009 Victorian bushfires, combining community meetings, in depth interviews conducted 3 to 4 years after the fires and repeated surveys at 3 to 4, five and 10 years, across communities ranging from no direct impact to high impact, and examines how social connections and community level recovery shaped individual mental health and wellbeing. It belongs in this library because it treats disaster recovery as a social process, showing that community networks, service responses and place attachment influence long term mental and physical health after an extreme weather event.
Publication or publisher
University of Melbourne
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
University research centre
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://mspgh.unimelb.edu.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/3767858/BB-10-years-report.pdf
Verification note
Report PDF read on the University of Melbourne Melbourne School of Population and Global Health website in September 2026, where the suggested citation and March 2021 date are stated.
Full APA reference
Gibbs, L., Molyneaux, R., Harms, L., Gallagher, H. C., Block, K., Richardson, J., Brandenburg, V., O'Donnell, M., Kellett, C., Quinn, P., Kosta, L., Brady, K., Ireton, G., MacDougall, C., & Bryant, R. (2021). *10 Years Beyond Bushfires Report 2020*. University of Melbourne. https://mspgh.unimelb.edu.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/3767858/BB-10-years-report.pdf
REF-243 Paper, guideline or statement

The English National Cohort Study of Flooding & Health: psychological morbidity at three years of follow up

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This cohort study followed 819 people in England for three years after the winter 2013 to 2014 floods, comprising 119 unaffected, 421 disrupted and 279 flooded participants, and found overall prevalences of 5.7 percent for probable depression, 8.1 percent for probable anxiety and 11.8 percent for probable posttraumatic stress disorder, with flooded participants at markedly higher adjusted odds of depression (aOR 8.48, 95% CI 1.04 to 68.97) and posttraumatic stress disorder (aOR 7.74, 95% CI 2.24 to 26.79), while 9.4 percent reported persistent damp or mould in liveable rooms. It belongs in this library because it shows that the housing damage and disruption that follow a flood, not only the event itself, sustain psychological morbidity for years, linking the built environment to mental health.

Full APA reference

Mulchandani, R., Armstrong, B., Beck, C. R., Waite, T. D., Amlôt, R., Kovats, S., Leonardi, G., Rubin, G. J., & Oliver, I. (2020). The English National Cohort Study of Flooding & Health: psychological morbidity at three years of follow up. BMC Public Health, 20(1), 321. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-020-8424-3

Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 32223747 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-243
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mulchandani, R., Armstrong, B., Beck, C. R., Waite, T. D., Amlôt, R., Kovats, S., Leonardi, G., Rubin, G. J., & Oliver, I.
Year
2020
Title
The English National Cohort Study of Flooding & Health: psychological morbidity at three years of follow up
Description
This cohort study followed 819 people in England for three years after the winter 2013 to 2014 floods, comprising 119 unaffected, 421 disrupted and 279 flooded participants, and found overall prevalences of 5.7 percent for probable depression, 8.1 percent for probable anxiety and 11.8 percent for probable posttraumatic stress disorder, with flooded participants at markedly higher adjusted odds of depression (aOR 8.48, 95% CI 1.04 to 68.97) and posttraumatic stress disorder (aOR 7.74, 95% CI 2.24 to 26.79), while 9.4 percent reported persistent damp or mould in liveable rooms. It belongs in this library because it shows that the housing damage and disruption that follow a flood, not only the event itself, sustain psychological morbidity for years, linking the built environment to mental health.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 20(1), 321
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32223747/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-020-8424-3
Verification note
Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 32223747 in September 2026.
Related items
REF-569
Full APA reference
Mulchandani, R., Armstrong, B., Beck, C. R., Waite, T. D., Amlôt, R., Kovats, S., Leonardi, G., Rubin, G. J., & Oliver, I. (2020). The English National Cohort Study of Flooding & Health: psychological morbidity at three years of follow up. *BMC Public Health, 20*(1), 321. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-020-8424-3
REF-244 Paper, guideline or statement

The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy, sustainable, and just food systems

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

This second EAT-Lancet Commission, authored by 24 commissioners, 11 postdoctoral fellows and 35 co-authors, updates the Planetary Health Diet at about 2,400 kcal a day with targets such as 300 g of vegetables, 200 g of fruit, 210 g of whole grains, 75 g of legumes and 15 g of beef, pork or lamb daily, and reports that food systems drive nearly 30 percent of global greenhouse gas emissions while adoption of the diet could prevent an estimated 15 million avoidable deaths a year, about 27 percent of global mortality, with eight solution areas including shifting to healthy diets and securing decent work. It belongs in this library because it is the reference framework for diet as a shared lever for human and planetary health, placing nutrition, equity and justice in the same analysis.

Full APA reference

Rockström, J., Thilsted, S. H., Willett, W. C., Gordon, L. J., Herrero, M., Hicks, C. C., Mason-D'Croz, D., Rao, N., Springmann, M., Wright, E. C., Agustina, R., Bajaj, S., Bunge, A. C., Carducci, B., Conti, C., Covic, N., Fanzo, J., Forouhi, N. G., Gibson, M. F., … DeClerck, F. (2025). The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy, sustainable, and just food systems. The Lancet, 406(10512), 1625-1700. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01201-2

Citation details and the full author list read on the PubMed record PMID 41046857 and the headline findings and diet targets read in the EAT-Lancet Commission Summary Report 2025 PDF on eatforum.org in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-244
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rockström, J., Thilsted, S. H., Willett, W. C., Gordon, L. J., Herrero, M., Hicks, C. C., Mason-D'Croz, D., Rao, N., Springmann, M., Wright, E. C., Agustina, R., Bajaj, S., Bunge, A. C., Carducci, B., Conti, C., Covic, N., Fanzo, J., Forouhi, N. G., Gibson, M. F., … DeClerck, F.
Year
2025
Title
The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy, sustainable, and just food systems
Description
This second EAT-Lancet Commission, authored by 24 commissioners, 11 postdoctoral fellows and 35 co-authors, updates the Planetary Health Diet at about 2,400 kcal a day with targets such as 300 g of vegetables, 200 g of fruit, 210 g of whole grains, 75 g of legumes and 15 g of beef, pork or lamb daily, and reports that food systems drive nearly 30 percent of global greenhouse gas emissions while adoption of the diet could prevent an estimated 15 million avoidable deaths a year, about 27 percent of global mortality, with eight solution areas including shifting to healthy diets and securing decent work. It belongs in this library because it is the reference framework for diet as a shared lever for human and planetary health, placing nutrition, equity and justice in the same analysis.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 406(10512), 1625-1700
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41046857/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01201-2
Verification note
Citation details and the full author list read on the PubMed record PMID 41046857 and the headline findings and diet targets read in the EAT-Lancet Commission Summary Report 2025 PDF on eatforum.org in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Rockström, J., Thilsted, S. H., Willett, W. C., Gordon, L. J., Herrero, M., Hicks, C. C., Mason-D'Croz, D., Rao, N., Springmann, M., Wright, E. C., Agustina, R., Bajaj, S., Bunge, A. C., Carducci, B., Conti, C., Covic, N., Fanzo, J., Forouhi, N. G., Gibson, M. F., … DeClerck, F. (2025). The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy, sustainable, and just food systems. *The Lancet, 406*(10512), 1625-1700. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01201-2
REF-245 Paper, guideline or statement

Potential of active transport to improve health, reduce healthcare costs, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions: A modelling study

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

This proportional multistate life table model applied to the 4.4 million New Zealanders alive in 2011 estimated that switching all car trips under 1 km to walking and trips of 1 to 5 km to cycling would gain 112,000 quality adjusted life years (95% uncertainty interval 89,000 to 134,700) and cut greenhouse gas emissions by 194.4 ktCO2e a year (uncertainty interval -377.2 to -3.1), whereas switching only the shortest trips to walking produced health gains but no significant net emissions change once dietary emissions were counted. It belongs in this library because it quantifies the co-benefits and the trade offs of active transport, showing how a physical activity intervention operates simultaneously on health, healthcare costs and emissions.

Full APA reference

Mizdrak, A., Blakely, T., Cleghorn, C. L., & Cobiac, L. J. (2019). Potential of active transport to improve health, reduce healthcare costs, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions: A modelling study. PLOS ONE, 14(7), e0219316. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0219316

Full text, results tables and abstract conclusions read on the PubMed Central record PMC6636726 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-245
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mizdrak, A., Blakely, T., Cleghorn, C. L., & Cobiac, L. J.
Year
2019
Title
Potential of active transport to improve health, reduce healthcare costs, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions: A modelling study
Description
This proportional multistate life table model applied to the 4.4 million New Zealanders alive in 2011 estimated that switching all car trips under 1 km to walking and trips of 1 to 5 km to cycling would gain 112,000 quality adjusted life years (95% uncertainty interval 89,000 to 134,700) and cut greenhouse gas emissions by 194.4 ktCO2e a year (uncertainty interval -377.2 to -3.1), whereas switching only the shortest trips to walking produced health gains but no significant net emissions change once dietary emissions were counted. It belongs in this library because it quantifies the co-benefits and the trade offs of active transport, showing how a physical activity intervention operates simultaneously on health, healthcare costs and emissions.
Publication or publisher
PLOS ONE, 14(7), e0219316
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC6636726/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0219316
Verification note
Full text, results tables and abstract conclusions read on the PubMed Central record PMC6636726 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Mizdrak, A., Blakely, T., Cleghorn, C. L., & Cobiac, L. J. (2019). Potential of active transport to improve health, reduce healthcare costs, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions: A modelling study. *PLOS ONE, 14*(7), e0219316. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0219316
REF-246 Paper, guideline or statement

Global Change and Public Health: Addressing the Ecological Determinants of Health

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Report or review
  • Nature and environment
  • General health

This discussion document, led by Trevor Hancock with lead editors Donald W. Spady and Colin L. Soskolne and condensed from a technical report of roughly 350 pages, argues that human health depends on ecosystem goods and services such as oxygen, water, food, the ozone layer, the nitrogen and phosphorus cycles, fertile soil and a reasonably stable climate, and calls on public health to move beyond traditional environmental health to address climate change, resource depletion, ecotoxicity and biodiversity loss using One Health, Ecohealth and ecosocial approaches. It belongs in this library because it provides the conceptual framework that ties ecological determinants to the social determinants of health, making explicit that human wellbeing and planetary systems are one system.

Full APA reference

Canadian Public Health Association. (2015). Global Change and Public Health: Addressing the Ecological Determinants of Health. Canadian Public Health Association. https://www.cpha.ca/sites/default/files/assets/policy/edh-discussion_e.pdf

Discussion document PDF read on the Canadian Public Health Association website in September 2026, where the May 2015 publication date and authorship are stated.

All fields
ID
REF-246
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Canadian Public Health Association
Year
2015
Title
Global Change and Public Health: Addressing the Ecological Determinants of Health
Description
This discussion document, led by Trevor Hancock with lead editors Donald W. Spady and Colin L. Soskolne and condensed from a technical report of roughly 350 pages, argues that human health depends on ecosystem goods and services such as oxygen, water, food, the ozone layer, the nitrogen and phosphorus cycles, fertile soil and a reasonably stable climate, and calls on public health to move beyond traditional environmental health to address climate change, resource depletion, ecotoxicity and biodiversity loss using One Health, Ecohealth and ecosocial approaches. It belongs in this library because it provides the conceptual framework that ties ecological determinants to the social determinants of health, making explicit that human wellbeing and planetary systems are one system.
Publication or publisher
Canadian Public Health Association
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cpha.ca/sites/default/files/assets/policy/edh-discussion_e.pdf
Verification note
Discussion document PDF read on the Canadian Public Health Association website in September 2026, where the May 2015 publication date and authorship are stated.
Full APA reference
Canadian Public Health Association. (2015). *Global Change and Public Health: Addressing the Ecological Determinants of Health*. Canadian Public Health Association. https://www.cpha.ca/sites/default/files/assets/policy/edh-discussion_e.pdf
REF-247 Paper, guideline or statement

Workers' health and productivity under occupational heat strain: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Physical health

This systematic review and meta-analysis included 111 studies from 30 countries covering 447,108,664 workers across more than 40 occupations, with 64 studies and 55,791 workers pooled, and found that people working a single shift under heat stress were 4.01 times more likely to experience occupational heat strain than those in thermoneutral conditions (95% CI 2.45 to 6.58), that 35 percent of workers experienced heat strain during or at the end of a shift (95% CI 31 to 39) and that core temperature rose by 0.7 degrees Celsius over a shift. It belongs in this library because occupational heat is a major and unequally distributed determinant of physical health, kidney injury and productivity, and it connects working conditions to climate exposure.

Full APA reference

Flouris, A. D., Dinas, P. C., Ioannou, L. G., Nybo, L., Havenith, G., Kenny, G. P., & Kjellstrom, T. (2018). Workers' health and productivity under occupational heat strain: a systematic review and meta-analysis. The Lancet Planetary Health, 2(12), e521-e531. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(18)30237-7

Full text read on The Lancet Planetary Health website and the author list, volume and page range confirmed from the Crossref record for DOI 10.1016/S2542-5196(18)30237-7 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-247
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Flouris, A. D., Dinas, P. C., Ioannou, L. G., Nybo, L., Havenith, G., Kenny, G. P., & Kjellstrom, T.
Year
2018
Title
Workers' health and productivity under occupational heat strain: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and meta-analysis included 111 studies from 30 countries covering 447,108,664 workers across more than 40 occupations, with 64 studies and 55,791 workers pooled, and found that people working a single shift under heat stress were 4.01 times more likely to experience occupational heat strain than those in thermoneutral conditions (95% CI 2.45 to 6.58), that 35 percent of workers experienced heat strain during or at the end of a shift (95% CI 31 to 39) and that core temperature rose by 0.7 degrees Celsius over a shift. It belongs in this library because occupational heat is a major and unequally distributed determinant of physical health, kidney injury and productivity, and it connects working conditions to climate exposure.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Planetary Health, 2(12), e521-e531
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Workplace and occupational health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.thelancet.com/journals/lanplh/article/PIIS2542-5196(18)30237-7/fulltext
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(18)30237-7
Verification note
Full text read on The Lancet Planetary Health website and the author list, volume and page range confirmed from the Crossref record for DOI 10.1016/S2542-5196(18)30237-7 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Flouris, A. D., Dinas, P. C., Ioannou, L. G., Nybo, L., Havenith, G., Kenny, G. P., & Kjellstrom, T. (2018). Workers' health and productivity under occupational heat strain: a systematic review and meta-analysis. *The Lancet Planetary Health, 2*(12), e521-e531. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2542-5196(18)30237-7
REF-248 Paper, guideline or statement

An Umbrella Review of Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses on Occupational Heat Exposure, Health Risks, and Productivity Losses Globally

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Physical health

This umbrella review synthesised 14 systematic reviews and meta-analyses published up to 31 March 2025 using PECOS eligibility, AMSTAR appraisal and GRADE assessment, and found consistent global evidence linking workplace heat exposure to heat related illness, reduced estimated glomerular filtration rate and renal impairment (adjusted odds ratio 3.50, 95% CI 1.30 to 9.40), cognitive decline and injuries, with injury risk rising about 1 percent for each 1 degree Celsius increase in temperature and women and relocated workers among the groups most affected. It belongs in this library because it is the most recent high level synthesis of occupational heat risk in agriculture, construction and manufacturing, and it frames heat as a workplace health and equity issue as well as a climate one.

Full APA reference

Nath, A., Sahu, S., & Lee, J. K. W. (2026). An umbrella review of systematic reviews and meta-analyses on occupational heat exposure, health risks, and productivity losses globally. Current Environmental Health Reports, 13(1), 2. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40572-025-00520-8

Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 41499074 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-248
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Nath, A., Sahu, S., & Lee, J. K. W.
Year
2026
Title
An Umbrella Review of Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses on Occupational Heat Exposure, Health Risks, and Productivity Losses Globally
Description
This umbrella review synthesised 14 systematic reviews and meta-analyses published up to 31 March 2025 using PECOS eligibility, AMSTAR appraisal and GRADE assessment, and found consistent global evidence linking workplace heat exposure to heat related illness, reduced estimated glomerular filtration rate and renal impairment (adjusted odds ratio 3.50, 95% CI 1.30 to 9.40), cognitive decline and injuries, with injury risk rising about 1 percent for each 1 degree Celsius increase in temperature and women and relocated workers among the groups most affected. It belongs in this library because it is the most recent high level synthesis of occupational heat risk in agriculture, construction and manufacturing, and it frames heat as a workplace health and equity issue as well as a climate one.
Publication or publisher
Current Environmental Health Reports, 13(1), 2
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Workplace and occupational health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41499074/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s40572-025-00520-8
Verification note
Abstract and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 41499074 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Nath, A., Sahu, S., & Lee, J. K. W. (2026). An umbrella review of systematic reviews and meta-analyses on occupational heat exposure, health risks, and productivity losses globally. *Current Environmental Health Reports, 13*(1), 2. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40572-025-00520-8
REF-249 Paper, guideline or statement

Sensing the impact of extreme heat on physical activity and sleep

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

This wearable sensor feasibility study followed 29 of 30 recruited adults in a low income, predominantly Black community in Houston, Texas, over 438 participant days in August and September 2022, and found that each 1 degree increase in person specific ambient temperature was associated with about a 2 percent increase in sedentary time (beta 2.11, p < .0001) and about a 2 percent decrease in sleep efficiency (beta -1.8, p = .0337), with the effect on sedentary time levelling off above 30 degrees and the sharpest sleep effect between 32 and 35 degrees. It belongs in this library because it shows heat changing two core lifestyle behaviours, movement and sleep, in exactly the population least able to cool their homes, and demonstrates how air conditioning access mediates that exposure.

Full APA reference

Cheong, S.-M., & Gaynanova, I. (2024). Sensing the impact of extreme heat on physical activity and sleep. Digital Health, 10, 20552076241241509. https://doi.org/10.1177/20552076241241509

Full text and results read on the PubMed Central record PMC10962040 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-249
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cheong, S.-M., & Gaynanova, I.
Year
2024
Title
Sensing the impact of extreme heat on physical activity and sleep
Description
This wearable sensor feasibility study followed 29 of 30 recruited adults in a low income, predominantly Black community in Houston, Texas, over 438 participant days in August and September 2022, and found that each 1 degree increase in person specific ambient temperature was associated with about a 2 percent increase in sedentary time (beta 2.11, p < .0001) and about a 2 percent decrease in sleep efficiency (beta -1.8, p = .0337), with the effect on sedentary time levelling off above 30 degrees and the sharpest sleep effect between 32 and 35 degrees. It belongs in this library because it shows heat changing two core lifestyle behaviours, movement and sleep, in exactly the population least able to cool their homes, and demonstrates how air conditioning access mediates that exposure.
Publication or publisher
Digital Health, 10, 20552076241241509
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Behaviour change and adherence; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10962040/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/20552076241241509
Verification note
Full text and results read on the PubMed Central record PMC10962040 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Cheong, S.-M., & Gaynanova, I. (2024). Sensing the impact of extreme heat on physical activity and sleep. *Digital Health, 10*, 20552076241241509. https://doi.org/10.1177/20552076241241509
REF-250 Paper, guideline or statement

The 2025 report of the Lancet Countdown on health and climate change: climate change action offers a lifeline

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This annual global assessment, produced by 128 experts from 71 institutions and tracking 57 indicators, reports that health risks and impacts of climate change are worse than ever across 13 of 20 impact indicators, that the rate of heat related deaths has risen 23 percent since the 1990s to about 546,000 a year, that 2024 saw a record 154,000 estimated deaths from wildfire smoke fine particulate matter, and that dengue transmission potential has risen by up to 49 percent since the 1950s, while 97 percent of cities reporting to CDP in 2024 had completed or intended climate risk assessments. It belongs in this library as the authoritative annual accounting of climate change as a determinant of physical and mental health, and it supplies the indicator set that governments and health services use to track adaptation.

Full APA reference

Romanello, M., Walawender, M., Hsu, S.-C., Moskeland, A., Palmeiro-Silva, Y., Scamman, D., Smallcombe, J. W., Abdullah, S., Ades, M., Al-Maruf, A., Ameli, N., Angelova, D., Ayeb-Karlsson, S., Ballester, J., Basagaña, X., Bechara, H., Beggs, P. J., Cai, W., Campbell-Lendrum, D., … Costello, A. (2025). The 2025 report of the Lancet Countdown on health and climate change: climate change action offers a lifeline. The Lancet, 406(10521), 2804-2857. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01919-1

Headline indicator findings read on the Lancet Countdown 2025 report page and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 41175887 in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-250
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Romanello, M., Walawender, M., Hsu, S.-C., Moskeland, A., Palmeiro-Silva, Y., Scamman, D., Smallcombe, J. W., Abdullah, S., Ades, M., Al-Maruf, A., Ameli, N., Angelova, D., Ayeb-Karlsson, S., Ballester, J., Basagaña, X., Bechara, H., Beggs, P. J., Cai, W., Campbell-Lendrum, D., … Costello, A.
Year
2025
Title
The 2025 report of the Lancet Countdown on health and climate change: climate change action offers a lifeline
Description
This annual global assessment, produced by 128 experts from 71 institutions and tracking 57 indicators, reports that health risks and impacts of climate change are worse than ever across 13 of 20 impact indicators, that the rate of heat related deaths has risen 23 percent since the 1990s to about 546,000 a year, that 2024 saw a record 154,000 estimated deaths from wildfire smoke fine particulate matter, and that dengue transmission potential has risen by up to 49 percent since the 1950s, while 97 percent of cities reporting to CDP in 2024 had completed or intended climate risk assessments. It belongs in this library as the authoritative annual accounting of climate change as a determinant of physical and mental health, and it supplies the indicator set that governments and health services use to track adaptation.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 406(10521), 2804-2857
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://lancetcountdown.org/2025-report/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01919-1
Verification note
Headline indicator findings read on the Lancet Countdown 2025 report page and citation details read on the PubMed record PMID 41175887 in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Romanello, M., Walawender, M., Hsu, S.-C., Moskeland, A., Palmeiro-Silva, Y., Scamman, D., Smallcombe, J. W., Abdullah, S., Ades, M., Al-Maruf, A., Ameli, N., Angelova, D., Ayeb-Karlsson, S., Ballester, J., Basagaña, X., Bechara, H., Beggs, P. J., Cai, W., Campbell-Lendrum, D., … Costello, A. (2025). The 2025 report of the Lancet Countdown on health and climate change: climate change action offers a lifeline. *The Lancet, 406*(10521), 2804-2857. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(25)01919-1
REF-251 Paper, guideline or statement

Heat–health action plans: guidance, second edition

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

This second edition of WHO guidance on heat–health action plans, issued by the WHO Regional Office for Europe through its Centre for Environment, Climate Change and Health, is structured around eight core elements including governance, a heat–health warning system, identification of populations at increased risk, communication and health system preparedness, and provides user action briefs for key sectors plus a public health message bank for risk communication. It belongs in this library because it is the reference intergovernmental framework for preventing heat related illness and death, and it explicitly directs services to populations made vulnerable by age, illness, medication and social circumstance.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe. (2026). Heat–health action plans: guidance, second edition. WHO Regional Office for Europe. https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/9789289062930

Publication record and executive summary content read on the WHO Regional Office for Europe publications page in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-251
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe
Year
2026
Title
Heat–health action plans: guidance, second edition
Description
This second edition of WHO guidance on heat–health action plans, issued by the WHO Regional Office for Europe through its Centre for Environment, Climate Change and Health, is structured around eight core elements including governance, a heat–health warning system, identification of populations at increased risk, communication and health system preparedness, and provides user action briefs for key sectors plus a public health message bank for risk communication. It belongs in this library because it is the reference intergovernmental framework for preventing heat related illness and death, and it explicitly directs services to populations made vulnerable by age, illness, medication and social circumstance.
Publication or publisher
WHO Regional Office for Europe
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
WHO European Region
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/9789289062930
Verification note
Publication record and executive summary content read on the WHO Regional Office for Europe publications page in September 2026.
Related items
REF-575; GOV-183
Full APA reference
World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe. (2026). *Heat–health action plans: guidance, second edition*. WHO Regional Office for Europe. https://www.who.int/europe/publications/i/item/9789289062930
REF-252 Paper, guideline or statement

The mental health impacts of climate change

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This RANZCP position statement, numbered PS 106 and last updated in December 2021, states that climate change affects mental health both directly through severe weather events, which have been followed by observed increases in anxiety, depression and posttraumatic stress disorder, and indirectly through distress about climate change and human inaction, rising temperature and humidity, suicidal behaviour, unemployment, poverty and relationship strain, and calls for further research to establish causal links. It belongs in this library because it is the peak Australian and New Zealand psychiatric position tying climate exposure to psychiatric practice, and it identifies the social and economic pathways through which environmental change reaches mental health.

Full APA reference

Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists. (2021). The mental health impacts of climate change (Position statement 106). Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists. https://www.ranzcp.org/clinical-guidelines-publications/clinical-guidelines-publications-library/the-mental-health-impacts-of-climate-change

Position statement PS 106 read on the RANZCP clinical guidelines and publications library website in September 2026, where the December 2021 update date is stated.

All fields
ID
REF-252
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists
Year
2021
Title
The mental health impacts of climate change
Description
This RANZCP position statement, numbered PS 106 and last updated in December 2021, states that climate change affects mental health both directly through severe weather events, which have been followed by observed increases in anxiety, depression and posttraumatic stress disorder, and indirectly through distress about climate change and human inaction, rising temperature and humidity, suicidal behaviour, unemployment, poverty and relationship strain, and calls for further research to establish causal links. It belongs in this library because it is the peak Australian and New Zealand psychiatric position tying climate exposure to psychiatric practice, and it identifies the social and economic pathways through which environmental change reaches mental health.
Publication or publisher
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia and New Zealand
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ranzcp.org/clinical-guidelines-publications/clinical-guidelines-publications-library/the-mental-health-impacts-of-climate-change
Verification note
Position statement PS 106 read on the RANZCP clinical guidelines and publications library website in September 2026, where the December 2021 update date is stated.
Full APA reference
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists. (2021). *The mental health impacts of climate change* (Position statement 106). Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists. https://www.ranzcp.org/clinical-guidelines-publications/clinical-guidelines-publications-library/the-mental-health-impacts-of-climate-change
REF-253 Paper, guideline or statement

Conducting the National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 in Malaysia with focus on methodology and main findings on non-communicable diseases

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This peer reviewed account of Malaysia's National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 describes a cross-sectional, nationwide, population-based survey using two-stage stratified random sampling in all states and federal territories, with 13,616 respondents aged 5 years and above interviewed from 5,006 living quarters and an overall response rate of 83.2 per cent, and reports weighted prevalence of 15.6 per cent for diabetes, 29.2 per cent for hypertension, 54.4 per cent for overweight and obesity combined, 54.5 per cent for abdominal obesity, 29.9 per cent for physical inactivity and 49.9 per cent for sedentary behaviour. It belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library because it documents, in one middle income country, how far diet related metabolic disease and physical inactivity have advanced, and it gives the survey methodology that underpins Malaysian lifestyle policy.

Full APA reference

Mat Rifin, H., Mohd Yusoff, M. F., & Abd Hamid, H. A. (2025). Conducting the National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 in Malaysia with focus on methodology and main findings on non-communicable diseases. Scientific Reports, 15, 25531. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-025-08311-9

Full text and PubMed record read on PubMed Central and PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-253
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mat Rifin, H., Mohd Yusoff, M. F., & Abd Hamid, H. A.
Year
2025
Title
Conducting the National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 in Malaysia with focus on methodology and main findings on non-communicable diseases
Description
This peer reviewed account of Malaysia's National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 describes a cross-sectional, nationwide, population-based survey using two-stage stratified random sampling in all states and federal territories, with 13,616 respondents aged 5 years and above interviewed from 5,006 living quarters and an overall response rate of 83.2 per cent, and reports weighted prevalence of 15.6 per cent for diabetes, 29.2 per cent for hypertension, 54.4 per cent for overweight and obesity combined, 54.5 per cent for abdominal obesity, 29.9 per cent for physical inactivity and 49.9 per cent for sedentary behaviour. It belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library because it documents, in one middle income country, how far diet related metabolic disease and physical inactivity have advanced, and it gives the survey methodology that underpins Malaysian lifestyle policy.
Publication or publisher
Scientific Reports, 15, 25531
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Malaysia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12264187/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-025-08311-9
Verification note
Full text and PubMed record read on PubMed Central and PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Mat Rifin, H., Mohd Yusoff, M. F., & Abd Hamid, H. A. (2025). Conducting the National Health and Morbidity Survey 2023 in Malaysia with focus on methodology and main findings on non-communicable diseases. *Scientific Reports, 15*, 25531. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-025-08311-9
REF-254 Paper, guideline or statement

National Health and Morbidity Survey (NHMS) 2023: Non-communicable diseases and healthcare demand - Key findings

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This official key findings report from Malaysia's Institute for Public Health presents results of a cross-sectional national survey of 13,616 respondents for the non-communicable disease component and 9,177 respondents for the healthcare demand component, and reports that 15.6 per cent or one in six Malaysian adults have diabetes with two in five unaware of it, that 29.2 per cent have hypertension of whom only 48 per cent are controlled below 140/90, that 54.4 per cent are overweight or obese by body mass index and 54.5 per cent have abdominal obesity, and that one in three adults are physically inactive. It is the primary government source the library owner asked about, and it links diet, weight and inactivity directly to Malaysia's metabolic and cardiovascular disease burden and to unmet demand for care.

Full APA reference

Institute for Public Health, National Institutes of Health, Ministry of Health Malaysia. (2024). National Health and Morbidity Survey (NHMS) 2023: Non-communicable diseases and healthcare demand - Key findings. Institute for Public Health. https://iku.nih.gov.my/images/nhms2023/key-findings-nhms-2023.pdf

Report PDF read on the Institute for Public Health website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-254
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Institute for Public Health, National Institutes of Health, Ministry of Health Malaysia
Year
2024
Title
National Health and Morbidity Survey (NHMS) 2023: Non-communicable diseases and healthcare demand - Key findings
Description
This official key findings report from Malaysia's Institute for Public Health presents results of a cross-sectional national survey of 13,616 respondents for the non-communicable disease component and 9,177 respondents for the healthcare demand component, and reports that 15.6 per cent or one in six Malaysian adults have diabetes with two in five unaware of it, that 29.2 per cent have hypertension of whom only 48 per cent are controlled below 140/90, that 54.4 per cent are overweight or obese by body mass index and 54.5 per cent have abdominal obesity, and that one in three adults are physically inactive. It is the primary government source the library owner asked about, and it links diet, weight and inactivity directly to Malaysia's metabolic and cardiovascular disease burden and to unmet demand for care.
Publication or publisher
Institute for Public Health, National Institutes of Health, Ministry of Health Malaysia
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Malaysia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iku.nih.gov.my/images/nhms2023/key-findings-nhms-2023.pdf
Verification note
Report PDF read on the Institute for Public Health website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Institute for Public Health, National Institutes of Health, Ministry of Health Malaysia. (2024). *National Health and Morbidity Survey (NHMS) 2023: Non-communicable diseases and healthcare demand - Key findings*. Institute for Public Health. https://iku.nih.gov.my/images/nhms2023/key-findings-nhms-2023.pdf
REF-255 Paper, guideline or statement

Prevalence of type-2 diabetes and prediabetes in Malaysia: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

This systematic review and random effects meta-analysis of 15 mainly cross-sectional Malaysian studies with 103,063 participants aged 15 to 85 years found a pooled diabetes prevalence of 14.39 per cent (95 per cent confidence interval 12.51 to 16.38, I squared 98.4 per cent), with prevalence rising from 11.2 per cent in 2011 to 18.3 per cent in 2019, higher rates in urban areas at 15.89 per cent than rural areas at 12.72 per cent, and marked ethnic differences with 25.10 per cent among Malaysians of Indian descent compared with 15.25 per cent among Malays, 12.87 per cent among Chinese and 8.62 per cent among Bumiputera. It belongs in this library because it quantifies the speed of Malaysia's diabetes epidemic and shows that lifestyle related metabolic risk is patterned by urban residence and ethnicity, which are social as well as behavioural determinants.

Full APA reference

Akhtar, S., Nasir, J. A., Ali, A., Asghar, M., Majeed, R., & Sarwar, A. (2022). Prevalence of type-2 diabetes and prediabetes in Malaysia: A systematic review and meta-analysis. PLOS ONE, 17(1), e0263139. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0263139

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-255
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Akhtar, S., Nasir, J. A., Ali, A., Asghar, M., Majeed, R., & Sarwar, A.
Year
2022
Title
Prevalence of type-2 diabetes and prediabetes in Malaysia: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and random effects meta-analysis of 15 mainly cross-sectional Malaysian studies with 103,063 participants aged 15 to 85 years found a pooled diabetes prevalence of 14.39 per cent (95 per cent confidence interval 12.51 to 16.38, I squared 98.4 per cent), with prevalence rising from 11.2 per cent in 2011 to 18.3 per cent in 2019, higher rates in urban areas at 15.89 per cent than rural areas at 12.72 per cent, and marked ethnic differences with 25.10 per cent among Malaysians of Indian descent compared with 15.25 per cent among Malays, 12.87 per cent among Chinese and 8.62 per cent among Bumiputera. It belongs in this library because it quantifies the speed of Malaysia's diabetes epidemic and shows that lifestyle related metabolic risk is patterned by urban residence and ethnicity, which are social as well as behavioural determinants.
Publication or publisher
PLOS ONE, 17(1), e0263139
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Malaysia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC8794132/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0263139
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Akhtar, S., Nasir, J. A., Ali, A., Asghar, M., Majeed, R., & Sarwar, A. (2022). Prevalence of type-2 diabetes and prediabetes in Malaysia: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *PLOS ONE, 17*(1), e0263139. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0263139
REF-256 Paper, guideline or statement

The nutrition transition in Malaysia; key drivers and recommendations for improved health outcomes

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Using food balance sheets from 1980 to 2013 together with the Malaysian Adult Nutrition Survey and National Health and Morbidity Surveys I to V, this quasi-historical review documents Malaysia's nutrition transition, showing national energy supply exceeding average requirements by at least 30 per cent, wheat supply up 56.5 per cent, sugar and sweetener supply up 23.9 per cent to about 26.1 teaspoons per capita per day, meat up 49.3 per cent and animal protein supply up 59.1 per cent while rice supply fell 23.7 per cent. It is the clearest single account of the dietary drivers behind Malaysia's obesity and diabetes burden, and it ties food system and socioeconomic change to population health outcomes.

Full APA reference

Goh, E. V., Azam-Ali, S., McCullough, F., & Mitra, S. R. (2020). The nutrition transition in Malaysia; key drivers and recommendations for improved health outcomes. BMC Nutrition, 6, 32. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40795-020-00348-5

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-256
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Goh, E. V., Azam-Ali, S., McCullough, F., & Mitra, S. R.
Year
2020
Title
The nutrition transition in Malaysia; key drivers and recommendations for improved health outcomes
Description
Using food balance sheets from 1980 to 2013 together with the Malaysian Adult Nutrition Survey and National Health and Morbidity Surveys I to V, this quasi-historical review documents Malaysia's nutrition transition, showing national energy supply exceeding average requirements by at least 30 per cent, wheat supply up 56.5 per cent, sugar and sweetener supply up 23.9 per cent to about 26.1 teaspoons per capita per day, meat up 49.3 per cent and animal protein supply up 59.1 per cent while rice supply fell 23.7 per cent. It is the clearest single account of the dietary drivers behind Malaysia's obesity and diabetes burden, and it ties food system and socioeconomic change to population health outcomes.
Publication or publisher
BMC Nutrition, 6, 32
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Malaysia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC7322903/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s40795-020-00348-5
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Goh, E. V., Azam-Ali, S., McCullough, F., & Mitra, S. R. (2020). The nutrition transition in Malaysia; key drivers and recommendations for improved health outcomes. *BMC Nutrition, 6*, 32. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40795-020-00348-5
REF-257 Paper, guideline or statement

National Strategic Plan for Non-Communicable Disease (NSP-NCD) 2016-2025

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This Malaysian national strategy, edited by Feisul Idzwan Mustapha and issued by the Non-Communicable Disease Section of the Ministry of Health, sets targets against National Health and Morbidity Survey baselines showing adult diabetes rising from 11.6 per cent in 2006 to 15.2 per cent in 2011 and 17.5 per cent in 2015 and obesity rising from 14.0 per cent to 17.7 per cent over the same period, and commits Malaysia to cutting insufficient physical activity from a 35.2 per cent baseline to 30.0 per cent and the risk of premature death from cardiovascular disease, cancer, diabetes or chronic respiratory disease from 20 per cent to 15 per cent by 2025. It belongs in the library as the verifiable government policy instrument behind Malaysia's lifestyle and non-communicable disease response, and it states that high blood pressure alone contributes an estimated 42.2 per cent of deaths and 21.6 per cent of disability adjusted life years in Malaysia.

Full APA reference

Ministry of Health Malaysia, Non-Communicable Disease Section, Disease Control Division. (2016). National Strategic Plan for Non-Communicable Disease (NSP-NCD) 2016-2025. Ministry of Health Malaysia. https://www.moh.gov.my/moh/resources/Penerbitan/Rujukan/NCD/National%20Strategic%20Plan/FINAL_NSPNCD.pdf

Strategy PDF read on the Ministry of Health Malaysia website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-257
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ministry of Health Malaysia, Non-Communicable Disease Section, Disease Control Division
Year
2016
Title
National Strategic Plan for Non-Communicable Disease (NSP-NCD) 2016-2025
Description
This Malaysian national strategy, edited by Feisul Idzwan Mustapha and issued by the Non-Communicable Disease Section of the Ministry of Health, sets targets against National Health and Morbidity Survey baselines showing adult diabetes rising from 11.6 per cent in 2006 to 15.2 per cent in 2011 and 17.5 per cent in 2015 and obesity rising from 14.0 per cent to 17.7 per cent over the same period, and commits Malaysia to cutting insufficient physical activity from a 35.2 per cent baseline to 30.0 per cent and the risk of premature death from cardiovascular disease, cancer, diabetes or chronic respiratory disease from 20 per cent to 15 per cent by 2025. It belongs in the library as the verifiable government policy instrument behind Malaysia's lifestyle and non-communicable disease response, and it states that high blood pressure alone contributes an estimated 42.2 per cent of deaths and 21.6 per cent of disability adjusted life years in Malaysia.
Publication or publisher
Non-Communicable Disease Section, Disease Control Division, Ministry of Health Malaysia
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Malaysia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.moh.gov.my/moh/resources/Penerbitan/Rujukan/NCD/National%20Strategic%20Plan/FINAL_NSPNCD.pdf
Verification note
Strategy PDF read on the Ministry of Health Malaysia website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Ministry of Health Malaysia, Non-Communicable Disease Section, Disease Control Division. (2016). *National Strategic Plan for Non-Communicable Disease (NSP-NCD) 2016-2025*. Ministry of Health Malaysia. https://www.moh.gov.my/moh/resources/Penerbitan/Rujukan/NCD/National%20Strategic%20Plan/FINAL_NSPNCD.pdf
REF-258 Paper, guideline or statement

Metabolic non-communicable disease health report of India: the ICMR-INDIAB national cross-sectional study (ICMR-INDIAB-17)

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

This nationally representative cross-sectional survey of Indians aged 20 years and older across 31 states and union territories, using stratified multistage sampling, found weighted prevalence of 11.4 per cent for diabetes, 15.3 per cent for prediabetes, 35.5 per cent for hypertension, 28.6 per cent for generalised obesity, 39.5 per cent for abdominal obesity and 81.2 per cent for dyslipidaemia, with diabetes markedly higher in urban areas at 16.4 per cent than rural areas at 8.9 per cent. It is the benchmark South Asian population estimate for metabolic disease and shows how urbanisation and associated lifestyle change reshape risk within a single low and middle income country.

Full APA reference

Anjana, R. M., Unnikrishnan, R., Deepa, M., Pradeepa, R., Tandon, N., Das, A. K., Joshi, S., Bajaj, S., Jabbar, P. K., Das, H. K., Kumar, A., Dhandhania, V. K., Bhansali, A., Rao, P. V., Desai, A., Kalra, S., Gupta, A., Lakshmy, R., Madhu, S. V., ... Mohan, V. (2023). Metabolic non-communicable disease health report of India: the ICMR-INDIAB national cross-sectional study (ICMR-INDIAB-17). The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology, 11(7), 474-489. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23)00119-5

Abstract with full results tables read on The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology website, and the author list read on PubMed, in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-258
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Anjana, R. M., Unnikrishnan, R., Deepa, M., Pradeepa, R., Tandon, N., Das, A. K., Joshi, S., Bajaj, S., Jabbar, P. K., Das, H. K., Kumar, A., Dhandhania, V. K., Bhansali, A., Rao, P. V., Desai, A., Kalra, S., Gupta, A., Lakshmy, R., Madhu, S. V., ... Mohan, V.
Year
2023
Title
Metabolic non-communicable disease health report of India: the ICMR-INDIAB national cross-sectional study (ICMR-INDIAB-17)
Description
This nationally representative cross-sectional survey of Indians aged 20 years and older across 31 states and union territories, using stratified multistage sampling, found weighted prevalence of 11.4 per cent for diabetes, 15.3 per cent for prediabetes, 35.5 per cent for hypertension, 28.6 per cent for generalised obesity, 39.5 per cent for abdominal obesity and 81.2 per cent for dyslipidaemia, with diabetes markedly higher in urban areas at 16.4 per cent than rural areas at 8.9 per cent. It is the benchmark South Asian population estimate for metabolic disease and shows how urbanisation and associated lifestyle change reshape risk within a single low and middle income country.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology, 11(7), 474-489
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
India
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.thelancet.com/journals/landia/article/PIIS2213-8587(23)00119-5/abstract
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23)00119-5
Verification note
Abstract with full results tables read on The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology website, and the author list read on PubMed, in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Anjana, R. M., Unnikrishnan, R., Deepa, M., Pradeepa, R., Tandon, N., Das, A. K., Joshi, S., Bajaj, S., Jabbar, P. K., Das, H. K., Kumar, A., Dhandhania, V. K., Bhansali, A., Rao, P. V., Desai, A., Kalra, S., Gupta, A., Lakshmy, R., Madhu, S. V., ... Mohan, V. (2023). Metabolic non-communicable disease health report of India: the ICMR-INDIAB national cross-sectional study (ICMR-INDIAB-17). *The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology, 11*(7), 474-489. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23)00119-5
REF-259 Paper, guideline or statement

South Asians and cardiometabolic health: A framework for comprehensive care for the individual, community, and population - An American society for preventive cardiology clinical practice statement

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This American Society for Preventive Cardiology clinical practice statement, co-chaired by Sonia S. Anand and Martha Gulati, sets out a roadmap for clinicians, health systems, community outreach groups and policy stakeholders to reduce cardiometabolic risk in people of South Asian descent from India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal, Bhutan, the Maldives and Sri Lanka who live in North America, spanning individual care, community outreach and population level investigation and policy. It belongs in the library because it treats the distinctive South Asian cardiometabolic phenotype as something to be addressed through lifestyle, community and structural action rather than clinical risk scoring alone.

Full APA reference

Rohatgi, A., Anand, S. S., Gadgil, M., Gujral, U. P., Jain, S. S., Javed, Z., Jha, M., Joshi, P. H., Manubolu, V. S., Nasir, K., Natarajan, P., Pagidipati, N., Palaniappan, L., Patel, A. P., Satish, P., Shah, N. S., Sharma, G., Trivedi, M. H., Virani, S. S., Gulati, M., & Patel, J. (2025). South Asians and cardiometabolic health: A framework for comprehensive care for the individual, community, and population - An American society for preventive cardiology clinical practice statement. American Journal of Preventive Cardiology, 22, 101000. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajpc.2025.101000

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-259
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rohatgi, A., Anand, S. S., Gadgil, M., Gujral, U. P., Jain, S. S., Javed, Z., Jha, M., Joshi, P. H., Manubolu, V. S., Nasir, K., Natarajan, P., Pagidipati, N., Palaniappan, L., Patel, A. P., Satish, P., Shah, N. S., Sharma, G., Trivedi, M. H., Virani, S. S., Gulati, M., & Patel, J.
Year
2025
Title
South Asians and cardiometabolic health: A framework for comprehensive care for the individual, community, and population - An American society for preventive cardiology clinical practice statement
Description
This American Society for Preventive Cardiology clinical practice statement, co-chaired by Sonia S. Anand and Martha Gulati, sets out a roadmap for clinicians, health systems, community outreach groups and policy stakeholders to reduce cardiometabolic risk in people of South Asian descent from India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal, Bhutan, the Maldives and Sri Lanka who live in North America, spanning individual care, community outreach and population level investigation and policy. It belongs in the library because it treats the distinctive South Asian cardiometabolic phenotype as something to be addressed through lifestyle, community and structural action rather than clinical risk scoring alone.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Preventive Cardiology, 22, 101000
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12139456/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajpc.2025.101000
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Rohatgi, A., Anand, S. S., Gadgil, M., Gujral, U. P., Jain, S. S., Javed, Z., Jha, M., Joshi, P. H., Manubolu, V. S., Nasir, K., Natarajan, P., Pagidipati, N., Palaniappan, L., Patel, A. P., Satish, P., Shah, N. S., Sharma, G., Trivedi, M. H., Virani, S. S., Gulati, M., & Patel, J. (2025). South Asians and cardiometabolic health: A framework for comprehensive care for the individual, community, and population - An American society for preventive cardiology clinical practice statement. *American Journal of Preventive Cardiology, 22*, 101000. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajpc.2025.101000
REF-260 Paper, guideline or statement

Burden of hypertension, diabetes, and hypercholesterolemia in relation to social and behavioral health determinants: Insights from the 2018 Bangladesh STEPS survey

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

This secondary cross-sectional analysis of 6,875 records from the 2018 National STEPS Survey for Non-communicable Diseases Risk Factors in Bangladesh found national prevalence of 27.3 per cent for hypertension, 9.8 per cent for diabetes and 30.2 per cent for hypercholesterolaemia, with significant variation between divisions and with age, occupational status, physical activity and body mass index category emerging as significant risk factors and urban residence raising the odds of diabetes. It belongs in the library as South Asian evidence that behavioural and social determinants, including occupation and place of residence, structure non-communicable disease burden within a low income setting.

Full APA reference

Rahman, M. M., Farhana, Z., Al Noman, A., Hossain, N., Kamil, A. A., & Riaz, B. K. (2025). Burden of hypertension, diabetes, and hypercholesterolemia in relation to social and behavioral health determinants: Insights from the 2018 Bangladesh STEPS survey. Public Health, 246, 105832. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2025.105832

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-260
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rahman, M. M., Farhana, Z., Al Noman, A., Hossain, N., Kamil, A. A., & Riaz, B. K.
Year
2025
Title
Burden of hypertension, diabetes, and hypercholesterolemia in relation to social and behavioral health determinants: Insights from the 2018 Bangladesh STEPS survey
Description
This secondary cross-sectional analysis of 6,875 records from the 2018 National STEPS Survey for Non-communicable Diseases Risk Factors in Bangladesh found national prevalence of 27.3 per cent for hypertension, 9.8 per cent for diabetes and 30.2 per cent for hypercholesterolaemia, with significant variation between divisions and with age, occupational status, physical activity and body mass index category emerging as significant risk factors and urban residence raising the odds of diabetes. It belongs in the library as South Asian evidence that behavioural and social determinants, including occupation and place of residence, structure non-communicable disease burden within a low income setting.
Publication or publisher
Public Health, 246, 105832
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Bangladesh
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40570783/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2025.105832
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Rahman, M. M., Farhana, Z., Al Noman, A., Hossain, N., Kamil, A. A., & Riaz, B. K. (2025). Burden of hypertension, diabetes, and hypercholesterolemia in relation to social and behavioral health determinants: Insights from the 2018 Bangladesh STEPS survey. *Public Health, 246*, 105832. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.puhe.2025.105832
REF-261 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of potentially modifiable risk factors associated with myocardial infarction in 52 countries (the INTERHEART study): case-control study

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

This standardised case-control study of 15,152 cases of acute myocardial infarction and 14,820 controls across 52 countries on every inhabited continent found that nine modifiable factors, namely a raised ApoB to ApoA1 ratio, smoking, hypertension, diabetes, abdominal obesity, psychosocial factors, low fruit and vegetable intake, alcohol use and physical inactivity, together accounted for 90 per cent of the population attributable risk in men and 94 per cent in women, with psychosocial factors alone carrying an odds ratio of 2.67 and a population attributable risk of 32.5 per cent. It is a foundational global comparative study for this library because it shows that the same lifestyle and psychosocial risk factors dominate heart attack risk in every world region, and it puts psychosocial stress alongside diet, smoking and activity as a major contributor.

Full APA reference

Yusuf, S., Hawken, S., Ounpuu, S., Dans, T., Avezum, A., Lanas, F., McQueen, M., Budaj, A., Pais, P., Varigos, J., & Lisheng, L. (2004). Effect of potentially modifiable risk factors associated with myocardial infarction in 52 countries (the INTERHEART study): case-control study. The Lancet, 364(9438), 937-952. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17018-9

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-261
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Yusuf, S., Hawken, S., Ounpuu, S., Dans, T., Avezum, A., Lanas, F., McQueen, M., Budaj, A., Pais, P., Varigos, J., & Lisheng, L.
Year
2004
Title
Effect of potentially modifiable risk factors associated with myocardial infarction in 52 countries (the INTERHEART study): case-control study
Description
This standardised case-control study of 15,152 cases of acute myocardial infarction and 14,820 controls across 52 countries on every inhabited continent found that nine modifiable factors, namely a raised ApoB to ApoA1 ratio, smoking, hypertension, diabetes, abdominal obesity, psychosocial factors, low fruit and vegetable intake, alcohol use and physical inactivity, together accounted for 90 per cent of the population attributable risk in men and 94 per cent in women, with psychosocial factors alone carrying an odds ratio of 2.67 and a population attributable risk of 32.5 per cent. It is a foundational global comparative study for this library because it shows that the same lifestyle and psychosocial risk factors dominate heart attack risk in every world region, and it puts psychosocial stress alongside diet, smoking and activity as a major contributor.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 364(9438), 937-952
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/15364185/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17018-9
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Yusuf, S., Hawken, S., Ounpuu, S., Dans, T., Avezum, A., Lanas, F., McQueen, M., Budaj, A., Pais, P., Varigos, J., & Lisheng, L. (2004). Effect of potentially modifiable risk factors associated with myocardial infarction in 52 countries (the INTERHEART study): case-control study. *The Lancet, 364*(9438), 937-952. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17018-9
REF-262 Paper, guideline or statement

Fruit, vegetable, and legume intake, and cardiovascular disease and deaths in 18 countries (PURE): a prospective cohort study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

In this Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology cohort of 135,335 adults aged 35 to 70 years from 613 communities in 18 low income, middle income and high income countries across seven world regions, with a median follow up of 7.4 years, higher fruit, vegetable and legume intake was associated with lower total mortality (hazard ratio 0.81, 95 per cent confidence interval 0.68 to 0.96) and the lowest risk occurred at three to four servings per day, equivalent to 375 to 500 grams per day, with no further benefit above that. It belongs in the library because it tests a core lifestyle medicine dietary message across very different economies and shows that modest, affordable intakes deliver most of the mortality benefit.

Full APA reference

Miller, V., Mente, A., Dehghan, M., Rangarajan, S., Zhang, X., Swaminathan, S., Dagenais, G., Gupta, R., Mohan, V., Lear, S., Bangdiwala, S. I., Schutte, A. E., Wentzel-Viljoen, E., Avezum, A., Altuntas, Y., Yusoff, K., Ismail, N., Peer, N., Chifamba, J., ... Yusuf, S. (2017). Fruit, vegetable, and legume intake, and cardiovascular disease and deaths in 18 countries (PURE): a prospective cohort study. The Lancet, 390(10107), 2037-2049. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32253-5

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-262
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Miller, V., Mente, A., Dehghan, M., Rangarajan, S., Zhang, X., Swaminathan, S., Dagenais, G., Gupta, R., Mohan, V., Lear, S., Bangdiwala, S. I., Schutte, A. E., Wentzel-Viljoen, E., Avezum, A., Altuntas, Y., Yusoff, K., Ismail, N., Peer, N., Chifamba, J., ... Yusuf, S.
Year
2017
Title
Fruit, vegetable, and legume intake, and cardiovascular disease and deaths in 18 countries (PURE): a prospective cohort study
Description
In this Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology cohort of 135,335 adults aged 35 to 70 years from 613 communities in 18 low income, middle income and high income countries across seven world regions, with a median follow up of 7.4 years, higher fruit, vegetable and legume intake was associated with lower total mortality (hazard ratio 0.81, 95 per cent confidence interval 0.68 to 0.96) and the lowest risk occurred at three to four servings per day, equivalent to 375 to 500 grams per day, with no further benefit above that. It belongs in the library because it tests a core lifestyle medicine dietary message across very different economies and shows that modest, affordable intakes deliver most of the mortality benefit.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 390(10107), 2037-2049
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/28864331/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32253-5
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Miller, V., Mente, A., Dehghan, M., Rangarajan, S., Zhang, X., Swaminathan, S., Dagenais, G., Gupta, R., Mohan, V., Lear, S., Bangdiwala, S. I., Schutte, A. E., Wentzel-Viljoen, E., Avezum, A., Altuntas, Y., Yusoff, K., Ismail, N., Peer, N., Chifamba, J., ... Yusuf, S. (2017). Fruit, vegetable, and legume intake, and cardiovascular disease and deaths in 18 countries (PURE): a prospective cohort study. *The Lancet, 390*(10107), 2037-2049. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32253-5
REF-263 Paper, guideline or statement

Health effects of dietary risks in 195 countries, 1990-2017: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2017

  • Journal article
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

This Global Burden of Disease systematic analysis across 195 countries estimated that suboptimal diet was responsible for 11 million deaths (95 per cent uncertainty interval 10 to 12 million) and 255 million disability adjusted life years (95 per cent uncertainty interval 234 to 274 million) in 2017, with the leading dietary risks being high sodium intake at 3 million deaths and 70 million disability adjusted life years, low whole grain intake at 3 million deaths and 82 million disability adjusted life years, and low fruit intake at 2 million deaths and 65 million disability adjusted life years. It anchors the library's global comparative section by quantifying how much of the world's disease burden is attributable to diet and how that attribution varies between countries.

Full APA reference

Afshin, A., Sur, P. J., Fay, K. A., Cornaby, L., Ferrara, G., Salama, J. S., Mullany, E. C., Abate, K. H., Abbafati, C., Abebe, Z., Afarideh, M., Aggarwal, A., Agrawal, S., Akinyemiju, T., Alahdab, F., Bacha, U., Bachman, V. F., Badali, H., Badawi, A., ... Murray, C. J. L. (2019). Health effects of dietary risks in 195 countries, 1990-2017: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2017. The Lancet, 393(10184), 1958-1972. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(19)30041-8

Abstract and collaborator list read on The Lancet website, with bibliographic details confirmed on PubMed, in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-263
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Afshin, A., Sur, P. J., Fay, K. A., Cornaby, L., Ferrara, G., Salama, J. S., Mullany, E. C., Abate, K. H., Abbafati, C., Abebe, Z., Afarideh, M., Aggarwal, A., Agrawal, S., Akinyemiju, T., Alahdab, F., Bacha, U., Bachman, V. F., Badali, H., Badawi, A., ... Murray, C. J. L.
Year
2019
Title
Health effects of dietary risks in 195 countries, 1990-2017: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2017
Description
This Global Burden of Disease systematic analysis across 195 countries estimated that suboptimal diet was responsible for 11 million deaths (95 per cent uncertainty interval 10 to 12 million) and 255 million disability adjusted life years (95 per cent uncertainty interval 234 to 274 million) in 2017, with the leading dietary risks being high sodium intake at 3 million deaths and 70 million disability adjusted life years, low whole grain intake at 3 million deaths and 82 million disability adjusted life years, and low fruit intake at 2 million deaths and 65 million disability adjusted life years. It anchors the library's global comparative section by quantifying how much of the world's disease burden is attributable to diet and how that attribution varies between countries.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 393(10184), 1958-1972
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.thelancet.com/article/S0140-6736(19)30041-8/fulltext
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(19)30041-8
Verification note
Abstract and collaborator list read on The Lancet website, with bibliographic details confirmed on PubMed, in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Afshin, A., Sur, P. J., Fay, K. A., Cornaby, L., Ferrara, G., Salama, J. S., Mullany, E. C., Abate, K. H., Abbafati, C., Abebe, Z., Afarideh, M., Aggarwal, A., Agrawal, S., Akinyemiju, T., Alahdab, F., Bacha, U., Bachman, V. F., Badali, H., Badawi, A., ... Murray, C. J. L. (2019). Health effects of dietary risks in 195 countries, 1990-2017: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2017. *The Lancet, 393*(10184), 1958-1972. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(19)30041-8
REF-264 Paper, guideline or statement

Worldwide trends in diabetes prevalence and treatment from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 1108 population-representative studies with 141 million participants

  • Journal article
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This pooled Bayesian hierarchical analysis of 1,108 population representative studies with 141 million participants aged 18 years and over across 200 countries and territories estimated that 828 million adults (95 per cent credible interval 757 to 908 million) were living with diabetes in 2022, an increase of 630 million since 1990, with age standardised prevalence rising in 131 countries for women and treatment coverage lagging furthest behind in low and middle income countries. It belongs in the library because it is the definitive comparative account of how metabolic disease has shifted towards lower income regions, including Southeast Asia and Malaysia, while treatment access has not followed.

Full APA reference

NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC). (2024). Worldwide trends in diabetes prevalence and treatment from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 1108 population-representative studies with 141 million participants. The Lancet, 404(10467), 2077-2093. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)02317-1

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-264
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC)
Year
2024
Title
Worldwide trends in diabetes prevalence and treatment from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 1108 population-representative studies with 141 million participants
Description
This pooled Bayesian hierarchical analysis of 1,108 population representative studies with 141 million participants aged 18 years and over across 200 countries and territories estimated that 828 million adults (95 per cent credible interval 757 to 908 million) were living with diabetes in 2022, an increase of 630 million since 1990, with age standardised prevalence rising in 131 countries for women and treatment coverage lagging furthest behind in low and middle income countries. It belongs in the library because it is the definitive comparative account of how metabolic disease has shifted towards lower income regions, including Southeast Asia and Malaysia, while treatment access has not followed.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 404(10467), 2077-2093
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39549716/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)02317-1
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC). (2024). Worldwide trends in diabetes prevalence and treatment from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 1108 population-representative studies with 141 million participants. *The Lancet, 404*(10467), 2077-2093. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)02317-1
REF-265 Paper, guideline or statement

Worldwide trends in underweight and obesity from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 3663 population-representative studies with 222 million children, adolescents, and adults

  • Journal article
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

Using measured height and weight from 3,663 population based studies with 222 million participants across 200 countries and territories, this Bayesian pooled analysis found that between 1990 and 2022 the combined prevalence of underweight and obesity in adults increased in 162 countries for women and 140 countries for men, that obesity prevalence exceeded underweight prevalence in 177 countries for women and 145 for men by 2022, and that the combined burden was highest in island nations of the Caribbean, Polynesia and Micronesia and in the Middle East and north Africa. It belongs in the library as the reference source for the global double burden of malnutrition and for showing that obesity is now a low and middle income country problem as much as a high income one.

Full APA reference

NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC). (2024). Worldwide trends in underweight and obesity from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 3663 population-representative studies with 222 million children, adolescents, and adults. The Lancet, 403(10431), 1027-1050. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)02750-2

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-265
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC)
Year
2024
Title
Worldwide trends in underweight and obesity from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 3663 population-representative studies with 222 million children, adolescents, and adults
Description
Using measured height and weight from 3,663 population based studies with 222 million participants across 200 countries and territories, this Bayesian pooled analysis found that between 1990 and 2022 the combined prevalence of underweight and obesity in adults increased in 162 countries for women and 140 countries for men, that obesity prevalence exceeded underweight prevalence in 177 countries for women and 145 for men by 2022, and that the combined burden was highest in island nations of the Caribbean, Polynesia and Micronesia and in the Middle East and north Africa. It belongs in the library as the reference source for the global double burden of malnutrition and for showing that obesity is now a low and middle income country problem as much as a high income one.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 403(10431), 1027-1050
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38432237/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)02750-2
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
NCD Risk Factor Collaboration (NCD-RisC). (2024). Worldwide trends in underweight and obesity from 1990 to 2022: a pooled analysis of 3663 population-representative studies with 222 million children, adolescents, and adults. *The Lancet, 403*(10431), 1027-1050. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)02750-2
REF-266 Paper, guideline or statement

The nutrition transition: worldwide obesity dynamics and their determinants

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This review of large scale surveys and nationally representative studies of diet, activity and obesity in adults and children traces the nutrition transition from a receding famine pattern to one dominated by nutrition related non-communicable diseases, and concludes that shifts in diet and activity are occurring at great speed and at earlier stages of economic development in the lower and middle income countries of Asia, Africa, the Middle East and Latin America than they did in the United States and Europe. It is the framing reference for the library's nutrition transition material and explains why lifestyle related disease now arrives earlier and faster in poorer countries.

Full APA reference

Popkin, B. M., & Gordon-Larsen, P. (2004). The nutrition transition: worldwide obesity dynamics and their determinants. International Journal of Obesity and Related Metabolic Disorders, 28(Suppl 3), S2-S9. https://doi.org/10.1038/sj.ijo.0802804

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-266
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Popkin, B. M., & Gordon-Larsen, P.
Year
2004
Title
The nutrition transition: worldwide obesity dynamics and their determinants
Description
This review of large scale surveys and nationally representative studies of diet, activity and obesity in adults and children traces the nutrition transition from a receding famine pattern to one dominated by nutrition related non-communicable diseases, and concludes that shifts in diet and activity are occurring at great speed and at earlier stages of economic development in the lower and middle income countries of Asia, Africa, the Middle East and Latin America than they did in the United States and Europe. It is the framing reference for the library's nutrition transition material and explains why lifestyle related disease now arrives earlier and faster in poorer countries.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Obesity and Related Metabolic Disorders, 28(Suppl 3), S2-S9
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/15543214/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/sj.ijo.0802804
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Popkin, B. M., & Gordon-Larsen, P. (2004). The nutrition transition: worldwide obesity dynamics and their determinants. *International Journal of Obesity and Related Metabolic Disorders, 28*(Suppl 3), S2-S9. https://doi.org/10.1038/sj.ijo.0802804
REF-267 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed foods and the nutrition transition: Global, regional and national trends, food systems transformations and political economy drivers

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

This synthesis review quantified per capita volumes and trends in ultra-processed food sales and in the sweeteners, fats, sodium and cosmetic additives they supply for countries grouped by income and region, finding a substantial worldwide expansion in the types and quantities sold, highest sales in Australasia, North America, Europe and Latin America but the fastest growth in Asia, the Middle East and Africa, and linking these shifts to food system industrialisation, globalisation and the market and political activities of transnational food corporations. It belongs in the library because it moves the ultra-processed food question from individual choice to food system and political economy determinants, and it flags the scale of dietary change in highly populated middle income countries as a serious global health concern.

Full APA reference

Baker, P., Machado, P., Santos, T., Sievert, K., Backholer, K., Hadjikakou, M., Russell, C., Huse, O., Bell, C., Scrinis, G., Worsley, A., Friel, S., & Lawrence, M. (2020). Ultra-processed foods and the nutrition transition: Global, regional and national trends, food systems transformations and political economy drivers. Obesity Reviews, 21(12), e13126. https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.13126

Abstract read on the Wiley Online Library page, with journal, volume and article number confirmed on PubMed, in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-267
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Baker, P., Machado, P., Santos, T., Sievert, K., Backholer, K., Hadjikakou, M., Russell, C., Huse, O., Bell, C., Scrinis, G., Worsley, A., Friel, S., & Lawrence, M.
Year
2020
Title
Ultra-processed foods and the nutrition transition: Global, regional and national trends, food systems transformations and political economy drivers
Description
This synthesis review quantified per capita volumes and trends in ultra-processed food sales and in the sweeteners, fats, sodium and cosmetic additives they supply for countries grouped by income and region, finding a substantial worldwide expansion in the types and quantities sold, highest sales in Australasia, North America, Europe and Latin America but the fastest growth in Asia, the Middle East and Africa, and linking these shifts to food system industrialisation, globalisation and the market and political activities of transnational food corporations. It belongs in the library because it moves the ultra-processed food question from individual choice to food system and political economy determinants, and it flags the scale of dietary change in highly populated middle income countries as a serious global health concern.
Publication or publisher
Obesity Reviews, 21(12), e13126
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/obr.13126
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.13126
Verification note
Abstract read on the Wiley Online Library page, with journal, volume and article number confirmed on PubMed, in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Baker, P., Machado, P., Santos, T., Sievert, K., Backholer, K., Hadjikakou, M., Russell, C., Huse, O., Bell, C., Scrinis, G., Worsley, A., Friel, S., & Lawrence, M. (2020). Ultra-processed foods and the nutrition transition: Global, regional and national trends, food systems transformations and political economy drivers. *Obesity Reviews, 21*(12), e13126. https://doi.org/10.1111/obr.13126
REF-268 Paper, guideline or statement

Urbanization and physical activity in the global Prospective Urban and Rural Epidemiology study

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

This cross-sectional analysis of 138,206 adults in 698 communities across 22 countries in the Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology study used satellite derived population density and impervious surface area to measure urbanisation and found that an interquartile increase in baseline population density was associated with 12.4 per cent lower total physical activity (95 per cent confidence interval 16.0 to 8.7 per cent lower) and an interquartile increase in five year population density change with 17.2 per cent lower total physical activity, with urbanisation proceeding fastest in low and middle income countries. It belongs in the library because it provides direct multi-country evidence that the built and urban environment, not individual motivation alone, shapes how much people move.

Full APA reference

Boakye, K., Bovbjerg, M., Schuna, J., Jr., Branscum, A., Varma, R. P., Ismail, R., Barbarash, O., Dominguez, J., Altuntas, Y., Anjana, R. M., Yusuf, R., Kelishadi, R., Lopez-Jaramillo, P., Iqbal, R., Seron, P., Rosengren, A., Poirier, P., Lakshmi, P. V. M., Khatib, R., ... Hystad, P. (2023). Urbanization and physical activity in the global Prospective Urban and Rural Epidemiology study. Scientific Reports, 13, 290. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-26406-5

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-268
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Boakye, K., Bovbjerg, M., Schuna, J., Jr., Branscum, A., Varma, R. P., Ismail, R., Barbarash, O., Dominguez, J., Altuntas, Y., Anjana, R. M., Yusuf, R., Kelishadi, R., Lopez-Jaramillo, P., Iqbal, R., Seron, P., Rosengren, A., Poirier, P., Lakshmi, P. V. M., Khatib, R., ... Hystad, P.
Year
2023
Title
Urbanization and physical activity in the global Prospective Urban and Rural Epidemiology study
Description
This cross-sectional analysis of 138,206 adults in 698 communities across 22 countries in the Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology study used satellite derived population density and impervious surface area to measure urbanisation and found that an interquartile increase in baseline population density was associated with 12.4 per cent lower total physical activity (95 per cent confidence interval 16.0 to 8.7 per cent lower) and an interquartile increase in five year population density change with 17.2 per cent lower total physical activity, with urbanisation proceeding fastest in low and middle income countries. It belongs in the library because it provides direct multi-country evidence that the built and urban environment, not individual motivation alone, shapes how much people move.
Publication or publisher
Scientific Reports, 13, 290
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC9822998/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-26406-5
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Boakye, K., Bovbjerg, M., Schuna, J., Jr., Branscum, A., Varma, R. P., Ismail, R., Barbarash, O., Dominguez, J., Altuntas, Y., Anjana, R. M., Yusuf, R., Kelishadi, R., Lopez-Jaramillo, P., Iqbal, R., Seron, P., Rosengren, A., Poirier, P., Lakshmi, P. V. M., Khatib, R., ... Hystad, P. (2023). Urbanization and physical activity in the global Prospective Urban and Rural Epidemiology study. *Scientific Reports, 13*, 290. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-022-26406-5
REF-269 Paper, guideline or statement

The effect of migration on hypertension and other cardiovascular risk factors: a review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

This review of literature from Europe, Asia, Africa, the Americas, China, Australia and the Middle East describes how acculturation following movement from small rural agricultural economies to industrialised towns and cities reduces physical activity, replaces low sodium and low fat diets with processed foods and high salt, and raises stress, hypertension, obesity and diabetes, with older migrants affected more severely than younger ones, and concludes that host country governments and health services must tailor prevention and treatment programmes to these populations. It belongs in the library because it treats migration as a lifestyle and social determinant exposure that changes physical and mental health together.

Full APA reference

Rosenthal, T. (2014). The effect of migration on hypertension and other cardiovascular risk factors: a review. Journal of the American Society of Hypertension, 8(3), 171-191. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jash.2013.12.007

Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-269
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rosenthal, T.
Year
2014
Title
The effect of migration on hypertension and other cardiovascular risk factors: a review
Description
This review of literature from Europe, Asia, Africa, the Americas, China, Australia and the Middle East describes how acculturation following movement from small rural agricultural economies to industrialised towns and cities reduces physical activity, replaces low sodium and low fat diets with processed foods and high salt, and raises stress, hypertension, obesity and diabetes, with older migrants affected more severely than younger ones, and concludes that host country governments and health services must tailor prevention and treatment programmes to these populations. It belongs in the library because it treats migration as a lifestyle and social determinant exposure that changes physical and mental health together.
Publication or publisher
Journal of the American Society of Hypertension, 8(3), 171-191
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/24524887/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jash.2013.12.007
Verification note
Abstract read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Rosenthal, T. (2014). The effect of migration on hypertension and other cardiovascular risk factors: a review. *Journal of the American Society of Hypertension, 8*(3), 171-191. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jash.2013.12.007
REF-270 Paper, guideline or statement

Cohort Profile Update: Southall and Brent Revisited (SABRE) study: a UK population-based comparison of cardiovascular disease and diabetes in people of European, South Asian and African Caribbean heritage

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

This cohort profile update describes SABRE, a West London population based cohort of White British people and first generation migrants of South Asian or African Caribbean heritage, recruited in 1988 to 1991 from workplaces and general practice registers with a baseline sample of 4,972 and followed up at 20 years and at 25 to 30 years, established to study ethnic disparities in type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease and ethnic and sex differences in physiological and cognitive functional capacity. It belongs in the library because it is the longest running study of how migration and ethnicity shape cardiometabolic and cognitive trajectories in a high income country.

Full APA reference

Jones, S., Tillin, T., Park, C., Williams, S., Rapala, A., Al Saikhan, L., Eastwood, S. V., Richards, M., Hughes, A. D., & Chaturvedi, N. (2020). Cohort Profile Update: Southall and Brent Revisited (SABRE) study: a UK population-based comparison of cardiovascular disease and diabetes in people of European, South Asian and African Caribbean heritage. International Journal of Epidemiology, 49(5), 1441-1442e. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyaa135

Full text read on PubMed Central and bibliographic details read on PubMed in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-270
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jones, S., Tillin, T., Park, C., Williams, S., Rapala, A., Al Saikhan, L., Eastwood, S. V., Richards, M., Hughes, A. D., & Chaturvedi, N.
Year
2020
Title
Cohort Profile Update: Southall and Brent Revisited (SABRE) study: a UK population-based comparison of cardiovascular disease and diabetes in people of European, South Asian and African Caribbean heritage
Description
This cohort profile update describes SABRE, a West London population based cohort of White British people and first generation migrants of South Asian or African Caribbean heritage, recruited in 1988 to 1991 from workplaces and general practice registers with a baseline sample of 4,972 and followed up at 20 years and at 25 to 30 years, established to study ethnic disparities in type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease and ethnic and sex differences in physiological and cognitive functional capacity. It belongs in the library because it is the longest running study of how migration and ethnicity shape cardiometabolic and cognitive trajectories in a high income country.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 49(5), 1441-1442e
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC7746410/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyaa135
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central and bibliographic details read on PubMed in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Jones, S., Tillin, T., Park, C., Williams, S., Rapala, A., Al Saikhan, L., Eastwood, S. V., Richards, M., Hughes, A. D., & Chaturvedi, N. (2020). Cohort Profile Update: Southall and Brent Revisited (SABRE) study: a UK population-based comparison of cardiovascular disease and diabetes in people of European, South Asian and African Caribbean heritage. *International Journal of Epidemiology, 49*(5), 1441-1442e. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyaa135
REF-271 Paper, guideline or statement

Chronic health conditions among culturally and linguistically diverse Australians, 2021

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This Australian Institute of Health and Welfare web report (catalogue number PHE 320) analyses long term health conditions collected for the first time in the 2021 Census of Population and Housing, covering the more than 7 million Australian residents born overseas and 6 million who speak a language other than English, and finds that people born overseas generally had lower prevalence of long term conditions than Australian born people but that dementia, heart disease, stroke, diabetes and kidney disease were more common among people born in Polynesia, South Asia and the Middle East, with Bangladesh born Australians having the highest prevalence of diabetes at 12 per cent and heart disease at 4.6 per cent, and with low English proficiency combined with more than 10 years in Australia associated with higher chronic condition prevalence. It belongs in the library because it shows ethnic and migration related inequality in lifestyle related disease within Australia and links that inequality to language and length of settlement rather than to individual behaviour alone.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2021). Chronic health conditions among culturally and linguistically diverse Australians, 2021 (Cat. no. PHE 320). Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/cald-australians/chronic-conditions-cald-2021/contents/summary

Summary and about pages of the web report read on the Australian Institute of Health and Welfare website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-271
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2021
Title
Chronic health conditions among culturally and linguistically diverse Australians, 2021
Description
This Australian Institute of Health and Welfare web report (catalogue number PHE 320) analyses long term health conditions collected for the first time in the 2021 Census of Population and Housing, covering the more than 7 million Australian residents born overseas and 6 million who speak a language other than English, and finds that people born overseas generally had lower prevalence of long term conditions than Australian born people but that dementia, heart disease, stroke, diabetes and kidney disease were more common among people born in Polynesia, South Asia and the Middle East, with Bangladesh born Australians having the highest prevalence of diabetes at 12 per cent and heart disease at 4.6 per cent, and with low English proficiency combined with more than 10 years in Australia associated with higher chronic condition prevalence. It belongs in the library because it shows ethnic and migration related inequality in lifestyle related disease within Australia and links that inequality to language and length of settlement rather than to individual behaviour alone.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/cald-australians/chronic-conditions-cald-2021/contents/summary
Verification note
Summary and about pages of the web report read on the Australian Institute of Health and Welfare website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2021). *Chronic health conditions among culturally and linguistically diverse Australians, 2021* (Cat. no. PHE 320). Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/cald-australians/chronic-conditions-cald-2021/contents/summary
REF-272 Paper, guideline or statement

Scaling up structured lifestyle interventions to improve the management of cardiometabolic diseases in low-income and middle-income countries: a systematic review of strategies, methods and outcomes

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This PRISMA guided systematic review of 26 studies published between 2008 and 2021 from countries including Nigeria, Malawi, South Africa, Pakistan, Iran, Ghana, China, Cuba, Guatemala, Mali, Morocco and Palestine found that 18 studies (69 per cent) adapted structured lifestyle interventions to local context, that system integration, service strengthening and training achieved up to 100 per cent participant attendance, that only four studies (15 per cent) used theories, models or frameworks for the full scale-up process and that 7 studies (27 per cent) reported no significant differences in lifestyle behaviours or cardiometabolic biomarkers. It belongs in the library because it is the clearest evidence map of how lifestyle interventions are actually delivered and scaled outside high income settings, and it names early community and stakeholder engagement, readiness assessment and system integration as the conditions for success.

Full APA reference

Shrestha, A., Yang, L., Demissie, G. D., Dhital, R., Panniyammakal, J., Parasuraman, G., Gupta, S., Karmacharya, B., Thankappan, K. R., Oldenburg, B., & Haregu, T. (2025). Scaling up structured lifestyle interventions to improve the management of cardiometabolic diseases in low-income and middle-income countries: a systematic review of strategies, methods and outcomes. BMJ Public Health, 3(1), e001371. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjph-2024-001371

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-272
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Shrestha, A., Yang, L., Demissie, G. D., Dhital, R., Panniyammakal, J., Parasuraman, G., Gupta, S., Karmacharya, B., Thankappan, K. R., Oldenburg, B., & Haregu, T.
Year
2025
Title
Scaling up structured lifestyle interventions to improve the management of cardiometabolic diseases in low-income and middle-income countries: a systematic review of strategies, methods and outcomes
Description
This PRISMA guided systematic review of 26 studies published between 2008 and 2021 from countries including Nigeria, Malawi, South Africa, Pakistan, Iran, Ghana, China, Cuba, Guatemala, Mali, Morocco and Palestine found that 18 studies (69 per cent) adapted structured lifestyle interventions to local context, that system integration, service strengthening and training achieved up to 100 per cent participant attendance, that only four studies (15 per cent) used theories, models or frameworks for the full scale-up process and that 7 studies (27 per cent) reported no significant differences in lifestyle behaviours or cardiometabolic biomarkers. It belongs in the library because it is the clearest evidence map of how lifestyle interventions are actually delivered and scaled outside high income settings, and it names early community and stakeholder engagement, readiness assessment and system integration as the conditions for success.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Public Health, 3(1), e001371
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11883891/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjph-2024-001371
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Shrestha, A., Yang, L., Demissie, G. D., Dhital, R., Panniyammakal, J., Parasuraman, G., Gupta, S., Karmacharya, B., Thankappan, K. R., Oldenburg, B., & Haregu, T. (2025). Scaling up structured lifestyle interventions to improve the management of cardiometabolic diseases in low-income and middle-income countries: a systematic review of strategies, methods and outcomes. *BMJ Public Health, 3*(1), e001371. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjph-2024-001371
REF-273 Paper, guideline or statement

Association of task-shared psychological interventions with depression outcomes in low- and middle-income countries: A systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis pooled 11 of 13 eligible randomised clinical trials of task-shared psychological interventions for adult depression in low and middle income countries, covering 4,145 participants or about 94 per cent of all existing individual patient data, and found a greater reduction in depressive symptom severity than control conditions (Hedges g 0.32) with higher odds of response (odds ratio 2.11, 95 per cent confidence interval 1.60 to 2.80) and remission (odds ratio 1.87, 95 per cent confidence interval 1.20 to 1.99), and heterogeneity of 74 per cent. It belongs in the library because task sharing to non-specialist workers is the main delivery model available for psychosocial and lifestyle oriented mental health care in low resource settings, and this analysis establishes that it works.

Full APA reference

Karyotaki, E., Araya, R., Kessler, R. C., Waqas, A., Bhana, A., Rahman, A., Matsuzaka, C. T., Miguel, C., Lund, C., Garman, E. C., Nakimuli-Mpungu, E., Petersen, I., Naslund, J. A., Schneider, M., Sikander, S., Jordans, M. J. D., Abas, M., Slade, P., Walters, S., ... Patel, V. (2022). Association of task-shared psychological interventions with depression outcomes in low- and middle-income countries: A systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis. JAMA Psychiatry, 79(5), 430-443. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2022.0301

Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-273
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Karyotaki, E., Araya, R., Kessler, R. C., Waqas, A., Bhana, A., Rahman, A., Matsuzaka, C. T., Miguel, C., Lund, C., Garman, E. C., Nakimuli-Mpungu, E., Petersen, I., Naslund, J. A., Schneider, M., Sikander, S., Jordans, M. J. D., Abas, M., Slade, P., Walters, S., ... Patel, V.
Year
2022
Title
Association of task-shared psychological interventions with depression outcomes in low- and middle-income countries: A systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis
Description
This systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis pooled 11 of 13 eligible randomised clinical trials of task-shared psychological interventions for adult depression in low and middle income countries, covering 4,145 participants or about 94 per cent of all existing individual patient data, and found a greater reduction in depressive symptom severity than control conditions (Hedges g 0.32) with higher odds of response (odds ratio 2.11, 95 per cent confidence interval 1.60 to 2.80) and remission (odds ratio 1.87, 95 per cent confidence interval 1.20 to 1.99), and heterogeneity of 74 per cent. It belongs in the library because task sharing to non-specialist workers is the main delivery model available for psychosocial and lifestyle oriented mental health care in low resource settings, and this analysis establishes that it works.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Psychiatry, 79(5), 430-443
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC8943620/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2022.0301
Verification note
Full text read on PubMed Central in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Karyotaki, E., Araya, R., Kessler, R. C., Waqas, A., Bhana, A., Rahman, A., Matsuzaka, C. T., Miguel, C., Lund, C., Garman, E. C., Nakimuli-Mpungu, E., Petersen, I., Naslund, J. A., Schneider, M., Sikander, S., Jordans, M. J. D., Abas, M., Slade, P., Walters, S., ... Patel, V. (2022). Association of task-shared psychological interventions with depression outcomes in low- and middle-income countries: A systematic review and individual patient data meta-analysis. *JAMA Psychiatry, 79*(5), 430-443. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2022.0301
REF-274 Paper, guideline or statement

Hail Lifestyle Medicine consensus position statement as a medical specialty: Middle Eastern perspective

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Using a survey, SWOT analysis, Delphi rounds and nominal polling among a national lifestyle medicine group of 815 members in Saudi Arabia and the wider Middle East, this consensus position statement recorded 136 votes of which 118 favoured a newly developed Middle East and North Africa set of lifestyle medicine pillars over retaining the American College of Lifestyle Medicine pillars unchanged, adding motor vehicle driving disturbances, smart technology use, emotional and mental health, spirituality and sexuality as regionally salient pillars. It belongs in the library as a verifiable regional professional statement showing that the pillars of lifestyle medicine are being renegotiated outside high income Western settings, with mental, emotional and spiritual health placed alongside diet and activity.

Full APA reference

Alrajhi, S., Konswa, A. A., Alhamdi, N., Alshammari, F., Alqurashi, A., Alraddadi, R., Alfheeaid, H., Albattal, S., Alsoqih, N., Almuhaileb, F., Alnais, M., Kunonga, E., Latif, S., Tanigawa Guimaraes, S., Tariq, R., Albishri, T., & Alrasadi, K. (2025). Hail Lifestyle Medicine consensus position statement as a medical specialty: Middle Eastern perspective. Frontiers in Public Health, 13, 1455871. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2025.1455871

Full text read on the Frontiers in Public Health website in September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-274
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Alrajhi, S., Konswa, A. A., Alhamdi, N., Alshammari, F., Alqurashi, A., Alraddadi, R., Alfheeaid, H., Albattal, S., Alsoqih, N., Almuhaileb, F., Alnais, M., Kunonga, E., Latif, S., Tanigawa Guimaraes, S., Tariq, R., Albishri, T., & Alrasadi, K.
Year
2025
Title
Hail Lifestyle Medicine consensus position statement as a medical specialty: Middle Eastern perspective
Description
Using a survey, SWOT analysis, Delphi rounds and nominal polling among a national lifestyle medicine group of 815 members in Saudi Arabia and the wider Middle East, this consensus position statement recorded 136 votes of which 118 favoured a newly developed Middle East and North Africa set of lifestyle medicine pillars over retaining the American College of Lifestyle Medicine pillars unchanged, adding motor vehicle driving disturbances, smart technology use, emotional and mental health, spirituality and sexuality as regionally salient pillars. It belongs in the library as a verifiable regional professional statement showing that the pillars of lifestyle medicine are being renegotiated outside high income Western settings, with mental, emotional and spiritual health placed alongside diet and activity.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 13, 1455871
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Saudi Arabia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/public-health/articles/10.3389/fpubh.2025.1455871/full
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2025.1455871
Verification note
Full text read on the Frontiers in Public Health website in September 2026.
Full APA reference
Alrajhi, S., Konswa, A. A., Alhamdi, N., Alshammari, F., Alqurashi, A., Alraddadi, R., Alfheeaid, H., Albattal, S., Alsoqih, N., Almuhaileb, F., Alnais, M., Kunonga, E., Latif, S., Tanigawa Guimaraes, S., Tariq, R., Albishri, T., & Alrasadi, K. (2025). Hail Lifestyle Medicine consensus position statement as a medical specialty: Middle Eastern perspective. *Frontiers in Public Health, 13*, 1455871. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2025.1455871
REF-275 Paper, guideline or statement

The health of people in Australia's prisons 2025

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Drawing on the National Prisoner Health Data Collection and announced in August 2026, this AIHW report found that around 3 in 5 prison entrants had a mental health condition at some stage of their life, that mental health or behavioural conditions were recorded for 56 per cent of people in prison in 2024-25, that 4 in 5 entrants reported illicit drug use in the previous 12 months, and that 1 in 4 had experienced homelessness in the month before entering prison while around 1 in 3 people discharged were expected to be homeless on release. It belongs in the library because it shows lifestyle risk factors, mental illness and housing insecurity concentrating in one marginalised group, and because 51 per cent of people discharged said their physical health improved in custody while 22 per cent said it worsened.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). The health of people in Australia's prisons 2025. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/news-media/media-releases/2026/2026-august/the-health-of-people-in-australia-s-prisons-2025

AIHW report announcement read in September 2026 through a syndicated full text copy of the media release, because aihw.gov.au blocks automated retrieval of its media release and prisoner health report pages. Figures quoted are those given in the release for 2024-25 and for 30 June 2025, when around 47,000 people were in Australian prisons, 21 per cent more than in 2016.

All fields
ID
REF-275
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2026
Title
The health of people in Australia's prisons 2025
Description
Drawing on the National Prisoner Health Data Collection and announced in August 2026, this AIHW report found that around 3 in 5 prison entrants had a mental health condition at some stage of their life, that mental health or behavioural conditions were recorded for 56 per cent of people in prison in 2024-25, that 4 in 5 entrants reported illicit drug use in the previous 12 months, and that 1 in 4 had experienced homelessness in the month before entering prison while around 1 in 3 people discharged were expected to be homeless on release. It belongs in the library because it shows lifestyle risk factors, mental illness and housing insecurity concentrating in one marginalised group, and because 51 per cent of people discharged said their physical health improved in custody while 22 per cent said it worsened.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/news-media/media-releases/2026/2026-august/the-health-of-people-in-australia-s-prisons-2025
Verification note
AIHW report announcement read in September 2026 through a syndicated full text copy of the media release, because aihw.gov.au blocks automated retrieval of its media release and prisoner health report pages. Figures quoted are those given in the release for 2024-25 and for 30 June 2025, when around 47,000 people were in Australian prisons, 21 per cent more than in 2016.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). *The health of people in Australia's prisons 2025*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/news-media/media-releases/2026/2026-august/the-health-of-people-in-australia-s-prisons-2025
REF-276 Paper, guideline or statement

Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031 Outcomes Framework: 3rd annual report

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Released on 4 July 2025, this AIHW report tracks 2024 outcomes for people with disability across the seven outcome areas of Australia's Disability Strategy, covering employment and financial security, inclusive homes and communities, safety rights and justice, personal and community support, education and learning, health and wellbeing, and community attitudes, with 56 measures currently carrying data and 36 showing updated post-baseline results. It belongs in the library because it treats health and wellbeing as one outcome alongside housing, work, education and community attitudes, which is social determinants reasoning built into a national monitoring framework.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031 Outcomes Framework: 3rd annual report. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/australias-disability-strategy

Outcomes framework reporting page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating a release date of 04/07/2025 for the third annual report and listing the seven outcome areas. The page records that 20 measures received a progress status for the first time, 18 of them from the Survey of Disability, Ageing and Carers.

All fields
ID
REF-276
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031 Outcomes Framework: 3rd annual report
Description
Released on 4 July 2025, this AIHW report tracks 2024 outcomes for people with disability across the seven outcome areas of Australia's Disability Strategy, covering employment and financial security, inclusive homes and communities, safety rights and justice, personal and community support, education and learning, health and wellbeing, and community attitudes, with 56 measures currently carrying data and 36 showing updated post-baseline results. It belongs in the library because it treats health and wellbeing as one outcome alongside housing, work, education and community attitudes, which is social determinants reasoning built into a national monitoring framework.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/australias-disability-strategy
Verification note
Outcomes framework reporting page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating a release date of 04/07/2025 for the third annual report and listing the seven outcome areas. The page records that 20 measures received a progress status for the first time, 18 of them from the Survey of Disability, Ageing and Carers.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031 Outcomes Framework: 3rd annual report*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/australias-disability-strategy
REF-277 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health (AIHW mental health reporting collection)

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This is the AIHW's standing national reporting collection on mental health, refreshed several times a year rather than issued as a single edition, with sections on the prevalence and impact of mental illness, Medicare mental health services, mental health prescriptions, presentations to emergency departments, involuntary treatment, social isolation and loneliness, specialist homelessness services, and spending on mental illness. It belongs in the library because it is the current Australian source for prevalence and service use figures that any lifestyle or mental health resource needs to keep up to date, including newer analyses of ADHD medication dispensing from 2004-05 to 2023-24 and of suicide, self-harm and mental health together.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). Mental health. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health

Collection landing page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026. The page carries no single edition year and instead lists recently updated and newly added sections, which are the sections named in the description.

All fields
ID
REF-277
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2026
Title
Mental health (AIHW mental health reporting collection)
Description
This is the AIHW's standing national reporting collection on mental health, refreshed several times a year rather than issued as a single edition, with sections on the prevalence and impact of mental illness, Medicare mental health services, mental health prescriptions, presentations to emergency departments, involuntary treatment, social isolation and loneliness, specialist homelessness services, and spending on mental illness. It belongs in the library because it is the current Australian source for prevalence and service use figures that any lifestyle or mental health resource needs to keep up to date, including newer analyses of ADHD medication dispensing from 2004-05 to 2023-24 and of suicide, self-harm and mental health together.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health
Verification note
Collection landing page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026. The page carries no single edition year and instead lists recently updated and newly added sections, which are the sections named in the description.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). *Mental health*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health
REF-278 Paper, guideline or statement

Social isolation and loneliness

  • Web resource
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Updated with new data on 20 May 2025, this AIHW analysis of Household, Income and Labour Dynamics in Australia waves 1 to 23 reported that 15 per cent of Australians aged 15 and over were socially isolated in 2023, 17 per cent of males and 13 per cent of females, up from 13 per cent in 2019 and 16 per cent in 2021, with the 35 to 44 age group the exception in continuing to rise from 16 per cent in 2021 to 18 per cent in 2023. It belongs in the library because it supplies the Australian time series on social connection, showing that men report more isolation while women report more loneliness in the 25 to 54 range and that both worsened between 2020 and 2022.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Social isolation and loneliness. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health/topic-areas/social-isolation-and-loneliness

Topic page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating that data were updated on 20 May 2025 and drawn from AIHW analysis of HILDA waves 1 to 23 covering 2001 to 2023.

All fields
ID
REF-278
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Social isolation and loneliness
Description
Updated with new data on 20 May 2025, this AIHW analysis of Household, Income and Labour Dynamics in Australia waves 1 to 23 reported that 15 per cent of Australians aged 15 and over were socially isolated in 2023, 17 per cent of males and 13 per cent of females, up from 13 per cent in 2019 and 16 per cent in 2021, with the 35 to 44 age group the exception in continuing to rise from 16 per cent in 2021 to 18 per cent in 2023. It belongs in the library because it supplies the Australian time series on social connection, showing that men report more isolation while women report more loneliness in the 25 to 54 range and that both worsened between 2020 and 2022.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health/topic-areas/social-isolation-and-loneliness
Verification note
Topic page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating that data were updated on 20 May 2025 and drawn from AIHW analysis of HILDA waves 1 to 23 covering 2001 to 2023.
Related items
REF-501; REF-506
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Social isolation and loneliness*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/mental-health/topic-areas/social-isolation-and-loneliness
REF-279 Paper, guideline or statement

Overweight and obesity

  • Web resource
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

This AIHW web report, catalogue number PHE 251, reports that in 2022 two thirds of Australian adults, 66 per cent, were overweight or obese, made up of 34 per cent overweight but not obese and 32 per cent obese, that one in four children and adolescents aged 2 to 17, 26 per cent, were overweight or obese, and that 63 per cent of men and 72 per cent of women had a waist circumference indicating high risk of metabolic complications. It belongs in the library because it provides the national prevalence baseline against which nutrition, physical activity and obesity policy is measured, and places Australia tenth highest of 21 OECD countries for overweight and obesity in people aged 15 and over.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). Overweight and obesity (Cat. no. PHE 251). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/overweight-obesity/overweight-and-obesity

Web report pages read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, showing catalogue number PHE 251 and headline figures for 2022. The report summary page carries a stated date of 17 June 2024 and the report is revised periodically rather than as dated editions.

All fields
ID
REF-279
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2024
Title
Overweight and obesity
Description
This AIHW web report, catalogue number PHE 251, reports that in 2022 two thirds of Australian adults, 66 per cent, were overweight or obese, made up of 34 per cent overweight but not obese and 32 per cent obese, that one in four children and adolescents aged 2 to 17, 26 per cent, were overweight or obese, and that 63 per cent of men and 72 per cent of women had a waist circumference indicating high risk of metabolic complications. It belongs in the library because it provides the national prevalence baseline against which nutrition, physical activity and obesity policy is measured, and places Australia tenth highest of 21 OECD countries for overweight and obesity in people aged 15 and over.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/overweight-obesity/overweight-and-obesity/contents/about
Verification note
Web report pages read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, showing catalogue number PHE 251 and headline figures for 2022. The report summary page carries a stated date of 17 June 2024 and the report is revised periodically rather than as dated editions.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). *Overweight and obesity* (Cat. no. PHE 251). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/overweight-obesity/overweight-and-obesity
REF-280 Paper, guideline or statement

Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia

  • Web resource
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

This AIHW web report, catalogue number PHE 221 and current as at 15 May 2025, is regularly updated from a range of national collections and brings together data on tobacco smoking as one of the leading risk factors for burden of disease in Australia, on shifts in apparent alcohol consumption across the past 50 years, on cannabis as the most widely used illicit drug, and on non-medical use of pharmaceutical drugs. It belongs in the library because substance use is the lifestyle domain where Australian monitoring is most detailed, and this is the single reference point that keeps those figures current across populations and jurisdictions.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia (Cat. no. PHE 221). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/alcohol/alcohol-tobacco-other-drugs-australia

Web report about page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating that content is correct as at 15 May 2025, that the report is regularly updated, and giving catalogue number PHE 221.

All fields
ID
REF-280
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia
Description
This AIHW web report, catalogue number PHE 221 and current as at 15 May 2025, is regularly updated from a range of national collections and brings together data on tobacco smoking as one of the leading risk factors for burden of disease in Australia, on shifts in apparent alcohol consumption across the past 50 years, on cannabis as the most widely used illicit drug, and on non-medical use of pharmaceutical drugs. It belongs in the library because substance use is the lifestyle domain where Australian monitoring is most detailed, and this is the single reference point that keeps those figures current across populations and jurisdictions.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/alcohol/alcohol-tobacco-other-drugs-australia
Verification note
Web report about page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating that content is correct as at 15 May 2025, that the report is regularly updated, and giving catalogue number PHE 221.
Related items
REF-568
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in Australia* (Cat. no. PHE 221). AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/alcohol/alcohol-tobacco-other-drugs-australia
REF-281 Paper, guideline or statement

Suicide and self-harm monitoring

  • Web resource
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This continuously updated AIHW monitoring resource reports that in 2023 there were 3,214 deaths by suicide out of 183,131 registered deaths in Australia, or 1.8 per cent of all deaths, and sets out the reporting lags that shape the evidence, with up to 18 months for national suicide deaths data and about 12 months for hospital admissions. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative Australian source for suicide and self-harm trends and because it documents the newer state and territory suicide registers, established in the Australian Capital Territory in 2021, South Australia in 2022 and the Northern Territory in 2023, along with ambulance attendance data from January 2021.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Suicide and self-harm monitoring. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/suicide-self-harm-monitoring

Overview page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating the 2023 figures and that the resource will be updated regularly as new data become available. The overview page carries a stated date of 11 December 2025.

All fields
ID
REF-281
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Suicide and self-harm monitoring
Description
This continuously updated AIHW monitoring resource reports that in 2023 there were 3,214 deaths by suicide out of 183,131 registered deaths in Australia, or 1.8 per cent of all deaths, and sets out the reporting lags that shape the evidence, with up to 18 months for national suicide deaths data and about 12 months for hospital admissions. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative Australian source for suicide and self-harm trends and because it documents the newer state and territory suicide registers, established in the Australian Capital Territory in 2021, South Australia in 2022 and the Northern Territory in 2023, along with ambulance attendance data from January 2021.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/suicide-self-harm-monitoring/overview
Verification note
Overview page read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026, stating the 2023 figures and that the resource will be updated regularly as new data become available. The overview page carries a stated date of 11 December 2025.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). *Suicide and self-harm monitoring*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/suicide-self-harm-monitoring
REF-282 Paper, guideline or statement

Rural and remote health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This AIHW topic report sets out how people living in rural and remote Australia have shorter lives, higher levels of disease and injury, higher rates of hospitalisation and mortality, and poorer access to and use of primary health care than people in metropolitan areas, and reports that the gap in Year 12 completion between major cities and remote or very remote areas narrowed from 29 per cent in 2013 to 24 per cent in 2022. It belongs in the library because geography is a social determinant in its own right, shaping whether lifestyle and mental health services are reachable at all, and because it gives the national numbers behind that claim.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). Rural and remote health. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/rural-remote-australians/rural-and-remote-health

Rural and remote health topic pages read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026. The report page carries a stated date of 2 July 2024 and the population group overview page repeats the same comparisons.

All fields
ID
REF-282
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2024
Title
Rural and remote health
Description
This AIHW topic report sets out how people living in rural and remote Australia have shorter lives, higher levels of disease and injury, higher rates of hospitalisation and mortality, and poorer access to and use of primary health care than people in metropolitan areas, and reports that the gap in Year 12 completion between major cities and remote or very remote areas narrowed from 29 per cent in 2013 to 24 per cent in 2022. It belongs in the library because geography is a social determinant in its own right, shaping whether lifestyle and mental health services are reachable at all, and because it gives the national numbers behind that claim.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/rural-remote-australians/rural-and-remote-health
Verification note
Rural and remote health topic pages read on aihw.gov.au in September 2026. The report page carries a stated date of 2 July 2024 and the population group overview page repeats the same comparisons.
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2024). *Rural and remote health*. AIHW. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/rural-remote-australians/rural-and-remote-health
REF-283 Paper, guideline or statement

Executive Summary of Lifestyle Interventions for Treatment and Remission of Type 2 Diabetes and Prediabetes in Adults: A Clinical Practice Guideline From the American College of Lifestyle Medicine

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A 20 member multidisciplinary group produced 14 key action statements presenting lifestyle intervention as the foundation of type 2 diabetes and prediabetes care, and it is described as the first diabetes guideline to cover all six pillars of lifestyle medicine including behaviour change. Strong recommendations cover advocacy for lifestyle intervention, assessing baseline habits, prescribing aerobic and strength activity, reducing sedentary time, identifying sleep disorders and prescribing nutrition plans. The six pillars framing (nutrition, activity, sleep, stress, social connectedness, substances) makes this the clearest single statement that metabolic disease management spans behaviour, sleep and social connection rather than diet alone.

Full APA reference

American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2025). Executive summary of lifestyle interventions for treatment and remission of type 2 diabetes and prediabetes in adults: A clinical practice guideline from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19(2 Suppl), 132S-154S. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251325485

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-283
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
2025
Title
Executive Summary of Lifestyle Interventions for Treatment and Remission of Type 2 Diabetes and Prediabetes in Adults: A Clinical Practice Guideline From the American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Description
A 20 member multidisciplinary group produced 14 key action statements presenting lifestyle intervention as the foundation of type 2 diabetes and prediabetes care, and it is described as the first diabetes guideline to cover all six pillars of lifestyle medicine including behaviour change. Strong recommendations cover advocacy for lifestyle intervention, assessing baseline habits, prescribing aerobic and strength activity, reducing sedentary time, identifying sleep disorders and prescribing nutrition plans. The six pillars framing (nutrition, activity, sleep, stress, social connectedness, substances) makes this the clearest single statement that metabolic disease management spans behaviour, sleep and social connection rather than diet alone.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19(2 Suppl), 132S-154S
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40546763/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251325485
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2025). Executive summary of lifestyle interventions for treatment and remission of type 2 diabetes and prediabetes in adults: A clinical practice guideline from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 19(2 Suppl), 132S-154S. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276251325485
REF-284 Paper, guideline or statement

Dietary Interventions to Treat Type 2 Diabetes in Adults with a Goal of Remission: An Expert Consensus Statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

A modified Delphi panel screened 131 candidate statements over four survey rounds, with 69 reaching consensus, 5 near consensus and 60 no consensus. The panel agreed remission means HbA1c below 6.5 percent sustained at least 3 months without surgery, devices or glucose lowering drugs, and that diet as a primary intervention can achieve remission in many adults. Shows a professional body treating food as a therapeutic agent, and the consensus and no consensus split is a useful teaching example of where evidence and professional opinion diverge.

Full APA reference

Rosenfeld, R. M., Kelly, J. H., Agarwal, M., Aspry, K., Barnett, T., Davis, B. C., Fields, D., Gaillard, T., Gulati, M., Guthrie, G. E., Moore, D. J., Panigrahi, G., Rothberg, A., Sannidhi, D. V., Weatherspoon, L., Pauly, K., & Karlsen, M. C. (2022). Dietary interventions to treat type 2 diabetes in adults with a goal of remission: An expert consensus statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(3). https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221087624

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-284
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rosenfeld, R. M., Kelly, J. H., Agarwal, M., Aspry, K., Barnett, T., Davis, B. C., Fields, D., Gaillard, T., Gulati, M., Guthrie, G. E., Moore, D. J., Panigrahi, G., Rothberg, A., Sannidhi, D. V., Weatherspoon, L., Pauly, K., & Karlsen, M. C.
Year
2022
Title
Dietary Interventions to Treat Type 2 Diabetes in Adults with a Goal of Remission: An Expert Consensus Statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Description
A modified Delphi panel screened 131 candidate statements over four survey rounds, with 69 reaching consensus, 5 near consensus and 60 no consensus. The panel agreed remission means HbA1c below 6.5 percent sustained at least 3 months without surgery, devices or glucose lowering drugs, and that diet as a primary intervention can achieve remission in many adults. Shows a professional body treating food as a therapeutic agent, and the consensus and no consensus split is a useful teaching example of where evidence and professional opinion diverge.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(3)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://journals.sagepub.com/doi/full/10.1177/15598276221087624
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221087624
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Rosenfeld, R. M., Kelly, J. H., Agarwal, M., Aspry, K., Barnett, T., Davis, B. C., Fields, D., Gaillard, T., Gulati, M., Guthrie, G. E., Moore, D. J., Panigrahi, G., Rothberg, A., Sannidhi, D. V., Weatherspoon, L., Pauly, K., & Karlsen, M. C. (2022). Dietary interventions to treat type 2 diabetes in adults with a goal of remission: An expert consensus statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 16(3). https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221087624
REF-285 Paper, guideline or statement

Type 2 Diabetes Remission and Lifestyle Medicine: A Position Statement From the American College of Lifestyle Medicine

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

ACLM argued that remission should be the primary clinical goal in type 2 diabetes and that intensive lifestyle interventions producing remission should become standard of care, with a whole food plant based dietary pattern plus moderate exercise as the optimal treatment. It applied a remission definition of glycaemia below the diabetic range for at least 1 year without pharmacologic or surgical therapy, splitting partial remission (HbA1c under 6.5 percent) from complete remission (HbA1c under 5.7 percent). Useful for tracing how a definition contested between professional bodies was settled, which matters when comparing remission rates across studies and jurisdictions.

Full APA reference

Kelly, J., Karlsen, M., & Steinke, G. (2020). Type 2 diabetes remission and lifestyle medicine: A position statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(4), 406-419. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620930962

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-285
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kelly, J., Karlsen, M., & Steinke, G.
Year
2020
Title
Type 2 Diabetes Remission and Lifestyle Medicine: A Position Statement From the American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Description
ACLM argued that remission should be the primary clinical goal in type 2 diabetes and that intensive lifestyle interventions producing remission should become standard of care, with a whole food plant based dietary pattern plus moderate exercise as the optimal treatment. It applied a remission definition of glycaemia below the diabetic range for at least 1 year without pharmacologic or surgical therapy, splitting partial remission (HbA1c under 6.5 percent) from complete remission (HbA1c under 5.7 percent). Useful for tracing how a definition contested between professional bodies was settled, which matters when comparing remission rates across studies and jurisdictions.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(4), 406-419
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC7692017/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620930962
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Kelly, J., Karlsen, M., & Steinke, G. (2020). Type 2 diabetes remission and lifestyle medicine: A position statement from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 14(4), 406-419. https://doi.org/10.1177/1559827620930962
REF-286 Paper, guideline or statement

Screening, Diagnosis, Evaluation, and Staging of Obesity in Adults: Standards of Care in Overweight and Obesity-2026

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

This new standards series treats obesity as a heterogeneous chronic disease and recommends screening for excess adiposity at least annually using BMI, with race and ethnicity specific BMI thresholds and waist circumference measures for some people to reduce underdiagnosis. It calls for comprehensive clinical evaluation of all adults diagnosed with overweight or obesity, including risk stratification and staging that inform the management plan and follow up. Marks the institutional shift from weight as a behaviour to weight as a staged chronic disease, and the ethnicity specific thresholds connect diagnosis directly to population and equity considerations.

Full APA reference

American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Obesity. (2026). Screening, diagnosis, evaluation, and staging of obesity in adults: Standards of care in overweight and obesity-2026. BMJ Open Diabetes Research and Care, 13(Suppl. 1), e006247. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjdrc-2026-006247

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-286
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Obesity
Year
2026
Title
Screening, Diagnosis, Evaluation, and Staging of Obesity in Adults: Standards of Care in Overweight and Obesity-2026
Description
This new standards series treats obesity as a heterogeneous chronic disease and recommends screening for excess adiposity at least annually using BMI, with race and ethnicity specific BMI thresholds and waist circumference measures for some people to reduce underdiagnosis. It calls for comprehensive clinical evaluation of all adults diagnosed with overweight or obesity, including risk stratification and staging that inform the management plan and follow up. Marks the institutional shift from weight as a behaviour to weight as a staged chronic disease, and the ethnicity specific thresholds connect diagnosis directly to population and equity considerations.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open Diabetes Research and Care, 13(Suppl. 1), e006247
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42242835/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjdrc-2026-006247
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Obesity. (2026). Screening, diagnosis, evaluation, and staging of obesity in adults: Standards of care in overweight and obesity-2026. BMJ Open Diabetes Research and Care, 13(Suppl. 1), e006247. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjdrc-2026-006247
REF-287 Paper, guideline or statement

5. Facilitating Positive Health Behaviors and Well-being to Improve Health Outcomes: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2026

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This chapter of the annually revised ADA Standards of Care sets out the ADA's current clinical practice recommendations on health behaviours and wellbeing, including the components of care, treatment goals and tools to evaluate quality of care. The PubMed record does not state numerical recommendations, so no figure is quoted here. The chapter title itself is evidence of mainstream diabetes guidance putting behaviour and wellbeing, not only glucose, at the centre of care.

Full APA reference

American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes. (2026). 5. Facilitating positive health behaviors and well-being to improve health outcomes: Standards of care in diabetes-2026. Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S89-S131. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S005

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-287
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes
Year
2026
Title
5. Facilitating Positive Health Behaviors and Well-being to Improve Health Outcomes: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2026
Description
This chapter of the annually revised ADA Standards of Care sets out the ADA's current clinical practice recommendations on health behaviours and wellbeing, including the components of care, treatment goals and tools to evaluate quality of care. The PubMed record does not state numerical recommendations, so no figure is quoted here. The chapter title itself is evidence of mainstream diabetes guidance putting behaviour and wellbeing, not only glucose, at the centre of care.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S89-S131
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41358898/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S005
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes. (2026). 5. Facilitating positive health behaviors and well-being to improve health outcomes: Standards of care in diabetes-2026. Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S89-S131. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S005
REF-288 Paper, guideline or statement

8. Obesity and Weight Management for the Prevention and Treatment of Diabetes: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2026

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

This is the ADA's dedicated obesity and weight management chapter within the 2026 Standards of Care, sitting between the health behaviours chapter and the pharmacologic glycaemic treatment chapter. The PubMed record lists bibliographic detail and authorship but no numerical results, so no figures are quoted. The pairing of a behaviour chapter and a weight chapter within one guideline is the practical template most clinical services now follow.

Full APA reference

American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes. (2026). 8. Obesity and weight management for the prevention and treatment of diabetes: Standards of care in diabetes-2026. Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S166-S182. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S008

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-288
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes
Year
2026
Title
8. Obesity and Weight Management for the Prevention and Treatment of Diabetes: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2026
Description
This is the ADA's dedicated obesity and weight management chapter within the 2026 Standards of Care, sitting between the health behaviours chapter and the pharmacologic glycaemic treatment chapter. The PubMed record lists bibliographic detail and authorship but no numerical results, so no figures are quoted. The pairing of a behaviour chapter and a weight chapter within one guideline is the practical template most clinical services now follow.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S166-S182
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41358882/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S008
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee for Diabetes. (2026). 8. Obesity and weight management for the prevention and treatment of diabetes: Standards of care in diabetes-2026. Diabetes Care, 49(Suppl. 1), S166-S182. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc26-S008
REF-289 Paper, guideline or statement

Type 2 diabetes remission

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Diabetes Australia defines remission as HbA1c below 6.5 percent, or 48 mmol/mol, sustained for at least 3 months after stopping glucose lowering medication, and stresses remission is not a cure because glucose can rise again. It states that likely fewer than half of people attempting remission through intensive dietary change achieve it at one year and only about one third sustain it over two years, and that remission is more likely with diabetes duration under five years, lower HbA1c and no insulin. A consumer facing national statement that deliberately manages expectation and guards against blame, which is exactly the psychosocial framing a lifestyle psychiatry library needs.

Full APA reference

Diabetes Australia. (2021). Type 2 diabetes remission [Position statement]. Diabetes Australia. https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2021_Diabetes-Australia-Position-Statement_Type-2-diabetes-remission_2.pdf

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-289
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Diabetes Australia
Year
2021
Title
Type 2 diabetes remission
Description
Diabetes Australia defines remission as HbA1c below 6.5 percent, or 48 mmol/mol, sustained for at least 3 months after stopping glucose lowering medication, and stresses remission is not a cure because glucose can rise again. It states that likely fewer than half of people attempting remission through intensive dietary change achieve it at one year and only about one third sustain it over two years, and that remission is more likely with diabetes duration under five years, lower HbA1c and no insulin. A consumer facing national statement that deliberately manages expectation and guards against blame, which is exactly the psychosocial framing a lifestyle psychiatry library needs.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Australia
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2021_Diabetes-Australia-Position-Statement_Type-2-diabetes-remission_2.pdf
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Diabetes Australia. (2021). Type 2 diabetes remission [Position statement]. Diabetes Australia. https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2021_Diabetes-Australia-Position-Statement_Type-2-diabetes-remission_2.pdf
REF-290 Paper, guideline or statement

Bariatric surgery

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

The statement says blood glucose may return to normal without medication in up to three out of four people with type 2 diabetes after bariatric surgery, with average loss of around 50 to 65 percent of excess weight and complication rates below 1 percent for gastric banding versus 2 to 10 percent for more complex procedures. It positions surgery as an option at BMI over 35 when lifestyle and medical treatments have not succeeded, and insists lifestyle intervention achieving sustained weight loss should be the initial approach for all people at high risk. Useful counterweight to drug and diet items because it shows the same national body ranking lifestyle first while accepting a surgical pathway.

Full APA reference

Diabetes Australia. (n.d.). Bariatric surgery [Position statement]. Diabetes Australia. https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/Position-statement-Bariatric-Surgery.pdf

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-290
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Diabetes Australia
Year
n.d.
Title
Bariatric surgery
Description
The statement says blood glucose may return to normal without medication in up to three out of four people with type 2 diabetes after bariatric surgery, with average loss of around 50 to 65 percent of excess weight and complication rates below 1 percent for gastric banding versus 2 to 10 percent for more complex procedures. It positions surgery as an option at BMI over 35 when lifestyle and medical treatments have not succeeded, and insists lifestyle intervention achieving sustained weight loss should be the initial approach for all people at high risk. Useful counterweight to drug and diet items because it shows the same national body ranking lifestyle first while accepting a surgical pathway.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Australia
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/Position-statement-Bariatric-Surgery.pdf
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Diabetes Australia. (n.d.). Bariatric surgery [Position statement]. Diabetes Australia. https://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/wp-content/uploads/Position-statement-Bariatric-Surgery.pdf
REF-291 Paper, guideline or statement

Management of type 2 diabetes: A handbook for general practice

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The handbook states almost 1.5 million Australians with diabetes are registered with the National Diabetes Services Scheme, more than 85 percent of them with type 2 diabetes, and that numbers may reach 3.6 million by 2050 on current trends. It attributes rising type 2 diabetes to rising overweight and obesity, lifestyle and dietary change and population ageing, and centres general practice in early identification and structured education. The primary care reference point for Australia, and it explicitly links population level lifestyle change to a projected disease burden.

Full APA reference

Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2024). Management of type 2 diabetes: A handbook for general practice (2024 ed.). RACGP. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/management-of-type-2-diabetes/introduction

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-291
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners
Year
2024
Title
Management of type 2 diabetes: A handbook for general practice
Description
The handbook states almost 1.5 million Australians with diabetes are registered with the National Diabetes Services Scheme, more than 85 percent of them with type 2 diabetes, and that numbers may reach 3.6 million by 2050 on current trends. It attributes rising type 2 diabetes to rising overweight and obesity, lifestyle and dietary change and population ageing, and centres general practice in early identification and structured education. The primary care reference point for Australia, and it explicitly links population level lifestyle change to a projected disease burden.
Publication or publisher
RACGP
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/management-of-type-2-diabetes/introduction
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2024). Management of type 2 diabetes: A handbook for general practice (2024 ed.). RACGP. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/management-of-type-2-diabetes/introduction
REF-292 Paper, guideline or statement

Clinical Practice Guidelines for the management of overweight and obesity in adults, adolescents and children in Australia

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

The guidelines followed a primary care 5As framework of ask and assess, advise, assist and arrange, and recommended management for people with BMI above 25.0 kg/m squared who are at risk of or already have an obesity related comorbidity. They promoted healthy eating plans, increased physical activity and behavioural modification. The rescinded status is itself the finding: Australia currently lacks a current national obesity clinical guideline, which is a live policy gap worth documenting.

Full APA reference

National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). Clinical practice guidelines for the management of overweight and obesity in adults, adolescents and children in Australia (Rescinded). NHMRC. https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/clinical-practice-guidelines-management-overweight-and-obesity

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-292
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Health and Medical Research Council
Year
2013
Title
Clinical Practice Guidelines for the management of overweight and obesity in adults, adolescents and children in Australia
Description
The guidelines followed a primary care 5As framework of ask and assess, advise, assist and arrange, and recommended management for people with BMI above 25.0 kg/m squared who are at risk of or already have an obesity related comorbidity. They promoted healthy eating plans, increased physical activity and behavioural modification. The rescinded status is itself the finding: Australia currently lacks a current national obesity clinical guideline, which is a live policy gap worth documenting.
Publication or publisher
NHMRC
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/clinical-practice-guidelines-management-overweight-and-obesity
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). Clinical practice guidelines for the management of overweight and obesity in adults, adolescents and children in Australia (Rescinded). NHMRC. https://www.nhmrc.gov.au/about-us/publications/clinical-practice-guidelines-management-overweight-and-obesity
REF-293 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian obesity management algorithm

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

The algorithm gives general practitioners a practical tool for treating non pregnant adults with obesity, describing obesity as a complex multifactorial chronic disease with genetic, environmental, physiological and behavioural determinants that requires long term care. It cites 2014 to 2015 data showing 63.4 percent of Australians aged 18 and over were above normal weight, 27.9 percent were obese, and direct plus indirect costs of obesity were about 8.65 billion dollars. The current practical Australian standard, and its multi determinant framing plus cost figures links clinical care to social and economic conditions.

Full APA reference

Australian Diabetes Society, Australian and New Zealand Obesity Society, & Obesity Surgery Society of Australia and New Zealand. (2025). Australian obesity management algorithm. Australian Diabetes Society. https://www.diabetessociety.com.au/guideline/obesity/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-293
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Diabetes Society, Australian and New Zealand Obesity Society, & Obesity Surgery Society of Australia and New Zealand
Year
2025
Title
Australian obesity management algorithm
Description
The algorithm gives general practitioners a practical tool for treating non pregnant adults with obesity, describing obesity as a complex multifactorial chronic disease with genetic, environmental, physiological and behavioural determinants that requires long term care. It cites 2014 to 2015 data showing 63.4 percent of Australians aged 18 and over were above normal weight, 27.9 percent were obese, and direct plus indirect costs of obesity were about 8.65 billion dollars. The current practical Australian standard, and its multi determinant framing plus cost figures links clinical care to social and economic conditions.
Publication or publisher
Australian Diabetes Society
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia and New Zealand
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.diabetessociety.com.au/guideline/obesity/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Australian Diabetes Society, Australian and New Zealand Obesity Society, & Obesity Surgery Society of Australia and New Zealand. (2025). Australian obesity management algorithm. Australian Diabetes Society. https://www.diabetessociety.com.au/guideline/obesity/
REF-294 Paper, guideline or statement

Management of Hyperglycemia in Type 2 Diabetes, 2022. A Consensus Report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD)

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The 2022 report systematically examined publications since 2018 and adds explicit focus on social determinants of health, the health care system and physical activity behaviours including sleep, with greater emphasis on weight management within holistic diabetes care. It also incorporates cardiovascular and kidney outcome trial results for SGLT2 inhibitors and GLP-1 receptor agonists to guide cardiorenal protection. One of the clearest examples of a mainstream pharmacological guideline formally adopting social determinants and sleep as clinical variables.

Full APA reference

Davies, M. J., Aroda, V. R., Collins, B. S., Gabbay, R. A., Green, J., Maruthur, N. M., Rosas, S. E., Del Prato, S., Mathieu, C., Mingrone, G., Rossing, P., Tankova, T., Tsapas, A., & Buse, J. B. (2022). Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes, 2022. A consensus report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD). Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2753-2786. https://doi.org/10.2337/dci22-0034

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-294
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Davies, M. J., Aroda, V. R., Collins, B. S., Gabbay, R. A., Green, J., Maruthur, N. M., Rosas, S. E., Del Prato, S., Mathieu, C., Mingrone, G., Rossing, P., Tankova, T., Tsapas, A., & Buse, J. B.
Year
2022
Title
Management of Hyperglycemia in Type 2 Diabetes, 2022. A Consensus Report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD)
Description
The 2022 report systematically examined publications since 2018 and adds explicit focus on social determinants of health, the health care system and physical activity behaviours including sleep, with greater emphasis on weight management within holistic diabetes care. It also incorporates cardiovascular and kidney outcome trial results for SGLT2 inhibitors and GLP-1 receptor agonists to guide cardiorenal protection. One of the clearest examples of a mainstream pharmacological guideline formally adopting social determinants and sleep as clinical variables.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2753-2786
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/36148880/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/dci22-0034
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Davies, M. J., Aroda, V. R., Collins, B. S., Gabbay, R. A., Green, J., Maruthur, N. M., Rosas, S. E., Del Prato, S., Mathieu, C., Mingrone, G., Rossing, P., Tankova, T., Tsapas, A., & Buse, J. B. (2022). Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes, 2022. A consensus report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD). Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2753-2786. https://doi.org/10.2337/dci22-0034
REF-295 Paper, guideline or statement

Life's Essential 8: Updating and Enhancing the American Heart Association's Construct of Cardiovascular Health: A Presidential Advisory From the American Heart Association

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Life's Essential 8 defines cardiovascular health through four health behaviours (diet, physical activity, nicotine exposure, sleep) and four health factors (body mass index, blood lipids, blood glucose, blood pressure), each scored 0 to 100 with the overall score the unweighted average. Scores of 80 to 100 indicate high, 50 to 79 moderate and 0 to 49 low cardiovascular health, replacing the older ideal, intermediate and poor labels. The addition of sleep health, and keywords that include social determinants of health, make this the standard scoring construct for connecting behaviour to cardiometabolic risk.

Full APA reference

Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Allen, N. B., Anderson, C. A. M., Black, T., Brewer, L. C., Foraker, R. E., Grandner, M. A., Lavretsky, H., Perak, A. M., Sharma, G., & Rosamond, W. (2022). Life's Essential 8: Updating and enhancing the American Heart Association's construct of cardiovascular health: A presidential advisory from the American Heart Association. Circulation, 146(5), e18-e43. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001078

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-295
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Allen, N. B., Anderson, C. A. M., Black, T., Brewer, L. C., Foraker, R. E., Grandner, M. A., Lavretsky, H., Perak, A. M., Sharma, G., & Rosamond, W.
Year
2022
Title
Life's Essential 8: Updating and Enhancing the American Heart Association's Construct of Cardiovascular Health: A Presidential Advisory From the American Heart Association
Description
Life's Essential 8 defines cardiovascular health through four health behaviours (diet, physical activity, nicotine exposure, sleep) and four health factors (body mass index, blood lipids, blood glucose, blood pressure), each scored 0 to 100 with the overall score the unweighted average. Scores of 80 to 100 indicate high, 50 to 79 moderate and 0 to 49 low cardiovascular health, replacing the older ideal, intermediate and poor labels. The addition of sleep health, and keywords that include social determinants of health, make this the standard scoring construct for connecting behaviour to cardiometabolic risk.
Publication or publisher
Circulation, 146(5), e18-e43
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ahajournals.org/doi/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001078
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001078
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Allen, N. B., Anderson, C. A. M., Black, T., Brewer, L. C., Foraker, R. E., Grandner, M. A., Lavretsky, H., Perak, A. M., Sharma, G., & Rosamond, W. (2022). Life's Essential 8: Updating and enhancing the American Heart Association's construct of cardiovascular health: A presidential advisory from the American Heart Association. Circulation, 146(5), e18-e43. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001078
REF-296 Paper, guideline or statement

2021 Dietary Guidance to Improve Cardiovascular Health: A Scientific Statement From the American Heart Association

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

Analysis of three large United States cohorts in the Dietary Patterns Methods Project found 14 to 28 percent lower cardiovascular mortality among adults with high versus low adherence to high quality dietary patterns. The statement names Mediterranean style, DASH style, Healthy US style and healthy vegetarian patterns as heart healthy, finds insufficient evidence for popular diets such as ketogenic diets and intermittent fasting, and notes processed, packaged and out of home foods supply almost three quarters of dietary sodium. Moves the unit of dietary advice from nutrients to patterns and to the food environment, which is the bridge between individual behaviour and food policy.

Full APA reference

Lichtenstein, A. H., Appel, L. J., Vadiveloo, M., Hu, F. B., Kris-Etherton, P. M., Rebholz, C. M., Sacks, F. M., Thorndike, A. N., Van Horn, L., & Wylie-Rosett, J. (2021). 2021 dietary guidance to improve cardiovascular health: A scientific statement from the American Heart Association. Circulation, 144(23), e472-e487. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001031

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-296
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lichtenstein, A. H., Appel, L. J., Vadiveloo, M., Hu, F. B., Kris-Etherton, P. M., Rebholz, C. M., Sacks, F. M., Thorndike, A. N., Van Horn, L., & Wylie-Rosett, J.
Year
2021
Title
2021 Dietary Guidance to Improve Cardiovascular Health: A Scientific Statement From the American Heart Association
Description
Analysis of three large United States cohorts in the Dietary Patterns Methods Project found 14 to 28 percent lower cardiovascular mortality among adults with high versus low adherence to high quality dietary patterns. The statement names Mediterranean style, DASH style, Healthy US style and healthy vegetarian patterns as heart healthy, finds insufficient evidence for popular diets such as ketogenic diets and intermittent fasting, and notes processed, packaged and out of home foods supply almost three quarters of dietary sodium. Moves the unit of dietary advice from nutrients to patterns and to the food environment, which is the bridge between individual behaviour and food policy.
Publication or publisher
Circulation, 144(23), e472-e487
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34724806/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001031
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lichtenstein, A. H., Appel, L. J., Vadiveloo, M., Hu, F. B., Kris-Etherton, P. M., Rebholz, C. M., Sacks, F. M., Thorndike, A. N., Van Horn, L., & Wylie-Rosett, J. (2021). 2021 dietary guidance to improve cardiovascular health: A scientific statement from the American Heart Association. Circulation, 144(23), e472-e487. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000001031
REF-297 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO issues global guideline on the use of GLP-1 medicines in treating obesity

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

WHO issued conditional recommendations that adults other than pregnant women may use liraglutide, semaglutide or tirzepatide for long term obesity treatment as part of a comprehensive approach including healthy diets, physical activity and health professional support, with conditionality driven by limited long term data, cost, health system readiness and equity concerns. A second conditional recommendation, based on low certainty evidence, is that intensive behavioural interventions may be offered to adults prescribed GLP-1 therapies, and WHO cites more than 1 billion people with obesity, 3.7 million associated deaths in 2024, and a projected 3 trillion United States dollars annual economic cost by 2030. The single most important recent statement that drug treatment and behavioural or environmental intervention are complements, with explicit warning that unequal access could widen health disparities.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2025, December 1). WHO issues global guideline on the use of GLP-1 medicines in treating obesity. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/news/item/01-12-2025-who-issues-global-guideline-on-the-use-of-glp-1-medicines-in-treating-obesity

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-297
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2025
Title
WHO issues global guideline on the use of GLP-1 medicines in treating obesity
Description
WHO issued conditional recommendations that adults other than pregnant women may use liraglutide, semaglutide or tirzepatide for long term obesity treatment as part of a comprehensive approach including healthy diets, physical activity and health professional support, with conditionality driven by limited long term data, cost, health system readiness and equity concerns. A second conditional recommendation, based on low certainty evidence, is that intensive behavioural interventions may be offered to adults prescribed GLP-1 therapies, and WHO cites more than 1 billion people with obesity, 3.7 million associated deaths in 2024, and a projected 3 trillion United States dollars annual economic cost by 2030. The single most important recent statement that drug treatment and behavioural or environmental intervention are complements, with explicit warning that unequal access could widen health disparities.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/news/item/01-12-2025-who-issues-global-guideline-on-the-use-of-glp-1-medicines-in-treating-obesity
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2025, December 1). WHO issues global guideline on the use of GLP-1 medicines in treating obesity. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/news/item/01-12-2025-who-issues-global-guideline-on-the-use-of-glp-1-medicines-in-treating-obesity
REF-298 Paper, guideline or statement

World Health Organization 2020 guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Adults should undertake 150 to 300 minutes of moderate intensity or 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous intensity aerobic activity per week or an equivalent combination, while children and adolescents should average 60 minutes per day of moderate to vigorous activity across the week. Regular muscle strengthening is recommended for all age groups and reducing sedentary behaviour is recommended across all ages and abilities, though evidence was insufficient to set a sedentary threshold. For the first time WHO added recommendations for pregnant and postpartum women and people living with chronic conditions or disability. The global numerical benchmark against which most lifestyle intervention studies define their activity prescriptions, and it extends coverage to groups often excluded from such advice.

Full APA reference

Bull, F. C., Al-Ansari, S. S., Biddle, S., Borodulin, K., Buman, M. P., Cardon, G., Carty, C., Chaput, J.-P., Chastin, S., Chou, R., Dempsey, P. C., DiPietro, L., Ekelund, U., Firth, J., Friedenreich, C. M., Garcia, L., Gichu, M., Jago, R., Katzmarzyk, P. T., ... Willumsen, J. F. (2020). World Health Organization 2020 guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 54(24), 1451-1462. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2020-102955

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. This is the peer reviewed journal publication of the WHO guidelines. The WHO issuing publication is recorded at REF-135.

All fields
ID
REF-298
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bull, F. C., Al-Ansari, S. S., Biddle, S., Borodulin, K., Buman, M. P., Cardon, G., Carty, C., Chaput, J.-P., Chastin, S., Chou, R., Dempsey, P. C., DiPietro, L., Ekelund, U., Firth, J., Friedenreich, C. M., Garcia, L., Gichu, M., Jago, R., Katzmarzyk, P. T., ... Willumsen, J. F.
Year
2020
Title
World Health Organization 2020 guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour
Description
Adults should undertake 150 to 300 minutes of moderate intensity or 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous intensity aerobic activity per week or an equivalent combination, while children and adolescents should average 60 minutes per day of moderate to vigorous activity across the week. Regular muscle strengthening is recommended for all age groups and reducing sedentary behaviour is recommended across all ages and abilities, though evidence was insufficient to set a sedentary threshold. For the first time WHO added recommendations for pregnant and postpartum women and people living with chronic conditions or disability. The global numerical benchmark against which most lifestyle intervention studies define their activity prescriptions, and it extends coverage to groups often excluded from such advice.
Publication or publisher
British Journal of Sports Medicine, 54(24), 1451-1462
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33239350/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2020-102955
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. This is the peer reviewed journal publication of the WHO guidelines. The WHO issuing publication is recorded at REF-135.
Related items
REF-135; REF-450
Full APA reference
Bull, F. C., Al-Ansari, S. S., Biddle, S., Borodulin, K., Buman, M. P., Cardon, G., Carty, C., Chaput, J.-P., Chastin, S., Chou, R., Dempsey, P. C., DiPietro, L., Ekelund, U., Firth, J., Friedenreich, C. M., Garcia, L., Gichu, M., Jago, R., Katzmarzyk, P. T., ... Willumsen, J. F. (2020). World Health Organization 2020 guidelines on physical activity and sedentary behaviour. British Journal of Sports Medicine, 54(24), 1451-1462. https://doi.org/10.1136/bjsports-2020-102955
REF-299 Paper, guideline or statement

Type 2 diabetes: prevention in people at high risk

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The guideline covers identifying adults at high risk of type 2 diabetes and aims to ensure they are offered an effective intensive lifestyle change programme to prevent or delay onset, and it can be used alongside the NHS Health Check programme. Recommendations span risk assessment and identification, physical activity, weight management and dietary advice, vulnerable groups, and metformin and orlistat. The policy instrument behind national scale diabetes prevention programmes, and its explicit vulnerable groups section ties prevention to social conditions.

Full APA reference

National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2018). Type 2 diabetes: Prevention in people at high risk (NICE guideline PH38). NICE. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph38

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-299
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Year
2018
Title
Type 2 diabetes: prevention in people at high risk
Description
The guideline covers identifying adults at high risk of type 2 diabetes and aims to ensure they are offered an effective intensive lifestyle change programme to prevent or delay onset, and it can be used alongside the NHS Health Check programme. Recommendations span risk assessment and identification, physical activity, weight management and dietary advice, vulnerable groups, and metformin and orlistat. The policy instrument behind national scale diabetes prevention programmes, and its explicit vulnerable groups section ties prevention to social conditions.
Publication or publisher
NICE
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph38
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2018). Type 2 diabetes: Prevention in people at high risk (NICE guideline PH38). NICE. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph38
REF-300 Paper, guideline or statement

Overweight and obesity management

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

NG246 covers prevention and management of overweight, obesity and central adiposity in children, young people and adults, excluding pregnancy, and consolidates seven earlier NICE guidelines into one. New or updated recommendations include prevention in schools and nurseries, identification, assessment and referral, specific advice for people from ethnic minority backgrounds, behavioural management interventions, dietary advice, and planning and funding of services. A rare example of a national body merging clinical and population prevention guidance in one document, including settings based and ethnicity specific recommendations.

Full APA reference

National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2026). Overweight and obesity management (NICE guideline NG246). NICE. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng246

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-300
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Year
2026
Title
Overweight and obesity management
Description
NG246 covers prevention and management of overweight, obesity and central adiposity in children, young people and adults, excluding pregnancy, and consolidates seven earlier NICE guidelines into one. New or updated recommendations include prevention in schools and nurseries, identification, assessment and referral, specific advice for people from ethnic minority backgrounds, behavioural management interventions, dietary advice, and planning and funding of services. A rare example of a national body merging clinical and population prevention guidance in one document, including settings based and ethnicity specific recommendations.
Publication or publisher
NICE
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng246
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2026). Overweight and obesity management (NICE guideline NG246). NICE. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng246
REF-301 Paper, guideline or statement

Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists expert consensus statement for the treatment, management and monitoring of the physical health of people with an enduring psychotic illness

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Using the Delphi method, a 416 item survey of strategies was rated over three rounds by three Australian expert panels comprising 55 clinicians, 21 carers and 20 consumers, with clinician participation across all rounds at 65 percent. Strategies reaching predefined consensus on importance were written into a statement for treating, managing and monitoring physical health in people with recurrent psychoses, with keywords including cardiometabolic health and multi-morbidity. The core Australasian psychiatry document on cardiometabolic health in severe mental illness, and its inclusion of consumer and carer panels models participatory guideline development.

Full APA reference

Lambert, T. J. R., Reavley, N. J., Jorm, A. F., & Oakley Browne, M. A. (2017). Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists expert consensus statement for the treatment, management and monitoring of the physical health of people with an enduring psychotic illness. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 51(4), 322-337. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867416686693

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-301
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lambert, T. J. R., Reavley, N. J., Jorm, A. F., & Oakley Browne, M. A.
Year
2017
Title
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists expert consensus statement for the treatment, management and monitoring of the physical health of people with an enduring psychotic illness
Description
Using the Delphi method, a 416 item survey of strategies was rated over three rounds by three Australian expert panels comprising 55 clinicians, 21 carers and 20 consumers, with clinician participation across all rounds at 65 percent. Strategies reaching predefined consensus on importance were written into a statement for treating, managing and monitoring physical health in people with recurrent psychoses, with keywords including cardiometabolic health and multi-morbidity. The core Australasian psychiatry document on cardiometabolic health in severe mental illness, and its inclusion of consumer and carer panels models participatory guideline development.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 51(4), 322-337
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia and New Zealand
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ranzcp.org/getmedia/d1fd1da1-52ca-4047-b158-15612e10f70d/physical-health-consensus-paper.pdf
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867416686693
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lambert, T. J. R., Reavley, N. J., Jorm, A. F., & Oakley Browne, M. A. (2017). Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists expert consensus statement for the treatment, management and monitoring of the physical health of people with an enduring psychotic illness. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 51(4), 322-337. https://doi.org/10.1177/0004867416686693
REF-302 Paper, guideline or statement

Pharmacological management of obesity: an endocrine Society clinical practice guideline

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Developed with GRADE, the guideline frames weight loss as a pathway to health improvement and positions approved chronic weight management medications as useful adjuncts to lifestyle change for people unsuccessful with diet and exercise alone. It highlights that many drugs commonly prescribed for diabetes, depression and other chronic diseases have weight effects, and that knowledgeable prescribing of agents with favourable weight profiles can aid obesity prevention and management. Directly relevant to lifestyle psychiatry because it names psychotropic and antidiabetic medication induced weight gain as a modifiable clinical decision.

Full APA reference

Apovian, C. M., Aronne, L. J., Bessesen, D. H., McDonnell, M. E., Murad, M. H., Pagotto, U., Ryan, D. H., & Still, C. D. (2015). Pharmacological management of obesity: An Endocrine Society clinical practice guideline. The Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism, 100(2), 342-362. https://doi.org/10.1210/jc.2014-3415

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-302
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Apovian, C. M., Aronne, L. J., Bessesen, D. H., McDonnell, M. E., Murad, M. H., Pagotto, U., Ryan, D. H., & Still, C. D.
Year
2015
Title
Pharmacological management of obesity: an endocrine Society clinical practice guideline
Description
Developed with GRADE, the guideline frames weight loss as a pathway to health improvement and positions approved chronic weight management medications as useful adjuncts to lifestyle change for people unsuccessful with diet and exercise alone. It highlights that many drugs commonly prescribed for diabetes, depression and other chronic diseases have weight effects, and that knowledgeable prescribing of agents with favourable weight profiles can aid obesity prevention and management. Directly relevant to lifestyle psychiatry because it names psychotropic and antidiabetic medication induced weight gain as a modifiable clinical decision.
Publication or publisher
The Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism, 100(2), 342-362
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/25590212/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1210/jc.2014-3415
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Apovian, C. M., Aronne, L. J., Bessesen, D. H., McDonnell, M. E., Murad, M. H., Pagotto, U., Ryan, D. H., & Still, C. D. (2015). Pharmacological management of obesity: An Endocrine Society clinical practice guideline. The Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism, 100(2), 342-362. https://doi.org/10.1210/jc.2014-3415
REF-303 Paper, guideline or statement

About us

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

ASLM frames lifestyle medicine around domains including social connection, climate and environment, sleep, tobacco and alcohol and exercise, citing a meta analysis of 140 studies indicating lack of social connection affects life expectancy similarly to smoking 15 cigarettes a day, and consistent access to green and blue space linked to a 7 percent lower risk of heart disease. It also cites 1.6 percent of total Australian deaths in 2015 attributed to air pollution, tobacco linked to more than one in every eight Australian deaths in 2018, and around 4,500 smoking related deaths per year in New Zealand. The Australasian society's own framing explicitly bundles social connection, environment and sleep with classic risk factors, which is the exact interaction this library documents. Note that this is a scope page, not a formal position statement, because the society's position statement documents were not retrievable in this session.

Full APA reference

Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). About us. Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/about/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-303
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
n.d.
Title
About us
Description
ASLM frames lifestyle medicine around domains including social connection, climate and environment, sleep, tobacco and alcohol and exercise, citing a meta analysis of 140 studies indicating lack of social connection affects life expectancy similarly to smoking 15 cigarettes a day, and consistent access to green and blue space linked to a 7 percent lower risk of heart disease. It also cites 1.6 percent of total Australian deaths in 2015 attributed to air pollution, tobacco linked to more than one in every eight Australian deaths in 2018, and around 4,500 smoking related deaths per year in New Zealand. The Australasian society's own framing explicitly bundles social connection, environment and sleep with classic risk factors, which is the exact interaction this library documents. Note that this is a scope page, not a formal position statement, because the society's position statement documents were not retrievable in this session.
Publication or publisher
Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Australia and New Zealand
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/about/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). About us. Australasian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. https://lifestylemedicine.org.au/about/
REF-304 Paper, guideline or statement

Primary care-led weight management for remission of type 2 diabetes (DiRECT): an open-label, cluster-randomised trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

At 12 months, 68 of 149 intervention participants (46 percent) were in diabetes remission versus 6 of 149 controls (4 percent), odds ratio 19.7, 95 percent CI 7.8 to 49.8, p less than 0.0001, and mean weight change was minus 10.0 kg versus minus 1.0 kg. Remission tracked weight loss almost linearly: 0 percent among those who gained weight, 7 percent for 0 to 5 kg loss, 34 percent for 5 to 10 kg, 57 percent for 10 to 15 kg and 86 percent for 15 kg or more, and quality of life on the EQ-5D visual analogue scale improved by 6.4 points more than control. The trial that made remission a routine primary care target, and its dose response between weight loss and remission is the clearest single piece of evidence that behaviour delivered at scale changes disease state.

Full APA reference

Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Stefanetti, R., Trenell, M., ... Taylor, R. (2018). Primary care-led weight management for remission of type 2 diabetes (DiRECT): An open-label, cluster-randomised trial. The Lancet, 391(10120), 541-551. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)33102-1

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-304
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Stefanetti, R., Trenell, M., ... Taylor, R.
Year
2018
Title
Primary care-led weight management for remission of type 2 diabetes (DiRECT): an open-label, cluster-randomised trial
Description
At 12 months, 68 of 149 intervention participants (46 percent) were in diabetes remission versus 6 of 149 controls (4 percent), odds ratio 19.7, 95 percent CI 7.8 to 49.8, p less than 0.0001, and mean weight change was minus 10.0 kg versus minus 1.0 kg. Remission tracked weight loss almost linearly: 0 percent among those who gained weight, 7 percent for 0 to 5 kg loss, 34 percent for 5 to 10 kg, 57 percent for 10 to 15 kg and 86 percent for 15 kg or more, and quality of life on the EQ-5D visual analogue scale improved by 6.4 points more than control. The trial that made remission a routine primary care target, and its dose response between weight loss and remission is the clearest single piece of evidence that behaviour delivered at scale changes disease state.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 391(10120), 541-551
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/29221645/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Stefanetti, R., Trenell, M., ... Taylor, R. (2018). Primary care-led weight management for remission of type 2 diabetes (DiRECT): An open-label, cluster-randomised trial. The Lancet, 391(10120), 541-551. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)33102-1
REF-305 Paper, guideline or statement

Durability of a primary care-led weight-management intervention for remission of type 2 diabetes: 2-year results of the DiRECT open-label, cluster-randomised trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

At 24 months remission was sustained in 53 of 149 intervention participants (36 percent) versus 5 of 149 controls (3 percent), adjusted odds ratio 25.82, 95 percent CI 8.25 to 80.84, p less than 0.0001, with an adjusted mean weight difference of minus 5.4 kg. Among the 45 participants who maintained at least 10 kg weight loss, 29 (64 percent) were in remission. Demonstrates both durability and attrition, which is the realistic middle ground between the optimism of year one results and the pessimism of drug discontinuation data.

Full APA reference

Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., Kean, S., ... Taylor, R. (2019). Durability of a primary care-led weight-management intervention for remission of type 2 diabetes: 2-year results of the DiRECT open-label, cluster-randomised trial. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(5), 344-355. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30068-3

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-305
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., Kean, S., ... Taylor, R.
Year
2019
Title
Durability of a primary care-led weight-management intervention for remission of type 2 diabetes: 2-year results of the DiRECT open-label, cluster-randomised trial
Description
At 24 months remission was sustained in 53 of 149 intervention participants (36 percent) versus 5 of 149 controls (3 percent), adjusted odds ratio 25.82, 95 percent CI 8.25 to 80.84, p less than 0.0001, with an adjusted mean weight difference of minus 5.4 kg. Among the 45 participants who maintained at least 10 kg weight loss, 29 (64 percent) were in remission. Demonstrates both durability and attrition, which is the realistic middle ground between the optimism of year one results and the pessimism of drug discontinuation data.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(5), 344-355
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/30852132/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30068-3
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Al-Mrabeh, A., Hollingsworth, K. G., Rodrigues, A. M., Rehackova, L., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., Ross, H. M., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., Kean, S., ... Taylor, R. (2019). Durability of a primary care-led weight-management intervention for remission of type 2 diabetes: 2-year results of the DiRECT open-label, cluster-randomised trial. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(5), 344-355. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30068-3
REF-306 Paper, guideline or statement

5-year follow-up of the randomised Diabetes Remission Clinical Trial (DiRECT) of continued support for weight loss maintenance in the UK: an extension study

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

At 5 years the extension group (n=85) had average weight loss of 6.1 kg with 11 of 85 (13 percent) in remission, compared with mean 4.6 kg loss and 5 of 93 (5 percent) in remission in the original control group, and visits in remission were 34 percent versus 12 percent for extension versus non extension, p less than 0.0001. Only 26 percent of those in remission at year 2 remained in remission at year 5, while 29 of 36 participants (81 percent) who maintained more than 10 kg loss at 2 years stayed in remission. The most honest long term account of lifestyle induced remission, showing continued support matters and that maintenance, not induction, is the hard problem.

Full APA reference

Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Kelly, T., Irvine, K., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Hollingsworth, K. G., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., McConnachie, A., McIntosh, A., Sattar, N., & Taylor, R. (2024). 5-year follow-up of the randomised Diabetes Remission Clinical Trial (DiRECT) of continued support for weight loss maintenance in the UK: An extension study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 12(4), 233-246. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23)00385-6

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-306
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Kelly, T., Irvine, K., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Hollingsworth, K. G., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., McConnachie, A., McIntosh, A., Sattar, N., & Taylor, R.
Year
2024
Title
5-year follow-up of the randomised Diabetes Remission Clinical Trial (DiRECT) of continued support for weight loss maintenance in the UK: an extension study
Description
At 5 years the extension group (n=85) had average weight loss of 6.1 kg with 11 of 85 (13 percent) in remission, compared with mean 4.6 kg loss and 5 of 93 (5 percent) in remission in the original control group, and visits in remission were 34 percent versus 12 percent for extension versus non extension, p less than 0.0001. Only 26 percent of those in remission at year 2 remained in remission at year 5, while 29 of 36 participants (81 percent) who maintained more than 10 kg loss at 2 years stayed in remission. The most honest long term account of lifestyle induced remission, showing continued support matters and that maintenance, not induction, is the hard problem.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 12(4), 233-246
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38423026/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lean, M. E. J., Leslie, W. S., Barnes, A. C., Brosnahan, N., Thom, G., McCombie, L., Kelly, T., Irvine, K., Peters, C., Zhyzhneuskaya, S., Hollingsworth, K. G., Adamson, A. J., Sniehotta, F. F., Mathers, J. C., McIlvenna, Y., Welsh, P., McConnachie, A., McIntosh, A., Sattar, N., & Taylor, R. (2024). 5-year follow-up of the randomised Diabetes Remission Clinical Trial (DiRECT) of continued support for weight loss maintenance in the UK: An extension study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 12(4), 233-246. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(23)00385-6
REF-307 Paper, guideline or statement

Cardiovascular effects of intensive lifestyle intervention in type 2 diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 5,145 overweight or obese adults with type 2 diabetes followed a median 9.6 years, the intensive lifestyle intervention achieved 8.6 percent weight loss at one year versus 0.7 percent in the control group but did not reduce the composite cardiovascular outcome, hazard ratio 0.95, 95 percent CI 0.83 to 1.09, p equals 0.51, and the trial was stopped early for futility. The intervention did produce greater reductions in HbA1c and greater initial improvements in fitness and in all cardiovascular risk factors except LDL cholesterol. The essential null result. It disciplines any claim that lifestyle weight loss automatically prevents cardiovascular events, and forces attention to intervention intensity, duration and endpoint choice.

Full APA reference

Look AHEAD Research Group. (2013). Cardiovascular effects of intensive lifestyle intervention in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 369(2), 145-154. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1212914

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-307
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Look AHEAD Research Group
Year
2013
Title
Cardiovascular effects of intensive lifestyle intervention in type 2 diabetes
Description
Among 5,145 overweight or obese adults with type 2 diabetes followed a median 9.6 years, the intensive lifestyle intervention achieved 8.6 percent weight loss at one year versus 0.7 percent in the control group but did not reduce the composite cardiovascular outcome, hazard ratio 0.95, 95 percent CI 0.83 to 1.09, p equals 0.51, and the trial was stopped early for futility. The intervention did produce greater reductions in HbA1c and greater initial improvements in fitness and in all cardiovascular risk factors except LDL cholesterol. The essential null result. It disciplines any claim that lifestyle weight loss automatically prevents cardiovascular events, and forces attention to intervention intensity, duration and endpoint choice.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 369(2), 145-154
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/23796131/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1212914
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Look AHEAD Research Group. (2013). Cardiovascular effects of intensive lifestyle intervention in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 369(2), 145-154. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1212914
REF-308 Paper, guideline or statement

Long-term effects of lifestyle intervention or metformin on diabetes development and microvascular complications over 15-year follow-up: the Diabetes Prevention Program Outcomes Study

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Over a mean 15 years in 2,776 participants, or 88 percent of the surviving cohort, diabetes incidence was reduced 27 percent with lifestyle intervention (HR 0.73, 95 percent CI 0.65 to 0.83, p less than 0.0001) and 18 percent with metformin (HR 0.82, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.93, p equals 0.001) versus placebo. Cumulative diabetes incidence at year 15 was 55 percent for lifestyle, 56 percent for metformin and 62 percent for placebo, and the aggregate microvascular outcome did not differ significantly between groups (11.3 percent, 13.0 percent and 12.4 percent respectively). Shows a behavioural intervention outperforming a drug on incidence over 15 years while also showing the benefit narrowing, which is essential nuance for prevention policy.

Full APA reference

Diabetes Prevention Program Research Group. (2015). Long-term effects of lifestyle intervention or metformin on diabetes development and microvascular complications over 15-year follow-up: The Diabetes Prevention Program Outcomes Study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 3(11), 866-875. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(15)00291-0

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-308
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Diabetes Prevention Program Research Group
Year
2015
Title
Long-term effects of lifestyle intervention or metformin on diabetes development and microvascular complications over 15-year follow-up: the Diabetes Prevention Program Outcomes Study
Description
Over a mean 15 years in 2,776 participants, or 88 percent of the surviving cohort, diabetes incidence was reduced 27 percent with lifestyle intervention (HR 0.73, 95 percent CI 0.65 to 0.83, p less than 0.0001) and 18 percent with metformin (HR 0.82, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.93, p equals 0.001) versus placebo. Cumulative diabetes incidence at year 15 was 55 percent for lifestyle, 56 percent for metformin and 62 percent for placebo, and the aggregate microvascular outcome did not differ significantly between groups (11.3 percent, 13.0 percent and 12.4 percent respectively). Shows a behavioural intervention outperforming a drug on incidence over 15 years while also showing the benefit narrowing, which is essential nuance for prevention policy.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 3(11), 866-875
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/26377054/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(15
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Diabetes Prevention Program Research Group. (2015). Long-term effects of lifestyle intervention or metformin on diabetes development and microvascular complications over 15-year follow-up: The Diabetes Prevention Program Outcomes Study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 3(11), 866-875. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(15)00291-0
REF-309 Paper, guideline or statement

Prevention of type 2 diabetes mellitus by changes in lifestyle among subjects with impaired glucose tolerance

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 522 middle aged overweight adults with impaired glucose tolerance followed a mean 3.2 years, individualised counselling on weight, fat and fibre intake and physical activity cut diabetes risk by 58 percent, p less than 0.001, with cumulative 4 year incidence 11 percent versus 23 percent. Intervention participants lost a mean 4.2 kg in year one versus 0.8 kg in controls, and the reduction in diabetes incidence was directly associated with changes in lifestyle. The foundational proof of concept for behavioural diabetes prevention, and the dose relation to actual behaviour change makes it a template for later programme design.

Full APA reference

Tuomilehto, J., Lindström, J., Eriksson, J. G., Valle, T. T., Hämäläinen, H., Ilanne-Parikka, P., Keinänen-Kiukaanniemi, S., Laakso, M., Louheranta, A., Rastas, M., Salminen, V., & Uusitupa, M. (2001). Prevention of type 2 diabetes mellitus by changes in lifestyle among subjects with impaired glucose tolerance. New England Journal of Medicine, 344(18), 1343-1350. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM200105033441801

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-309
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Tuomilehto, J., Lindström, J., Eriksson, J. G., Valle, T. T., Hämäläinen, H., Ilanne-Parikka, P., Keinänen-Kiukaanniemi, S., Laakso, M., Louheranta, A., Rastas, M., Salminen, V., & Uusitupa, M.
Year
2001
Title
Prevention of type 2 diabetes mellitus by changes in lifestyle among subjects with impaired glucose tolerance
Description
Among 522 middle aged overweight adults with impaired glucose tolerance followed a mean 3.2 years, individualised counselling on weight, fat and fibre intake and physical activity cut diabetes risk by 58 percent, p less than 0.001, with cumulative 4 year incidence 11 percent versus 23 percent. Intervention participants lost a mean 4.2 kg in year one versus 0.8 kg in controls, and the reduction in diabetes incidence was directly associated with changes in lifestyle. The foundational proof of concept for behavioural diabetes prevention, and the dose relation to actual behaviour change makes it a template for later programme design.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 344(18), 1343-1350
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Finland
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/11333990/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM200105033441801
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Tuomilehto, J., Lindström, J., Eriksson, J. G., Valle, T. T., Hämäläinen, H., Ilanne-Parikka, P., Keinänen-Kiukaanniemi, S., Laakso, M., Louheranta, A., Rastas, M., Salminen, V., & Uusitupa, M. (2001). Prevention of type 2 diabetes mellitus by changes in lifestyle among subjects with impaired glucose tolerance. New England Journal of Medicine, 344(18), 1343-1350. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM200105033441801
REF-310 Paper, guideline or statement

Morbidity and mortality after lifestyle intervention for people with impaired glucose tolerance: 30-year results of the Da Qing Diabetes Prevention Outcome Study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Six years of diet and exercise intervention delivered from 1986 in 33 clinics to 577 adults with impaired glucose tolerance produced, over up to 30 years of follow up in 94 percent of participants, a median 3.96 year delay in diabetes onset and reductions in cardiovascular events (HR 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.59 to 0.92), microvascular complications (HR 0.65), cardiovascular death (HR 0.67) and all cause death (HR 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.61 to 0.89, p equals 0.0015). Life expectancy increased by 1.44 years, 95 percent CI 0.20 to 2.68, p equals 0.023. The strongest existing evidence that a time limited lifestyle programme can lengthen life, and the only mortality and life expectancy result of its kind in this collection.

Full APA reference

Gong, Q., Zhang, P., Wang, J., Ma, J., An, Y., Chen, Y., Zhang, B., Feng, X., Li, H., Chen, X., Cheng, Y. J., Gregg, E. W., Hu, Y., Bennett, P. H., & Li, G. (2019). Morbidity and mortality after lifestyle intervention for people with impaired glucose tolerance: 30-year results of the Da Qing Diabetes Prevention Outcome Study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(6), 452-461. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30093-2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-310
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gong, Q., Zhang, P., Wang, J., Ma, J., An, Y., Chen, Y., Zhang, B., Feng, X., Li, H., Chen, X., Cheng, Y. J., Gregg, E. W., Hu, Y., Bennett, P. H., & Li, G.
Year
2019
Title
Morbidity and mortality after lifestyle intervention for people with impaired glucose tolerance: 30-year results of the Da Qing Diabetes Prevention Outcome Study
Description
Six years of diet and exercise intervention delivered from 1986 in 33 clinics to 577 adults with impaired glucose tolerance produced, over up to 30 years of follow up in 94 percent of participants, a median 3.96 year delay in diabetes onset and reductions in cardiovascular events (HR 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.59 to 0.92), microvascular complications (HR 0.65), cardiovascular death (HR 0.67) and all cause death (HR 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.61 to 0.89, p equals 0.0015). Life expectancy increased by 1.44 years, 95 percent CI 0.20 to 2.68, p equals 0.023. The strongest existing evidence that a time limited lifestyle programme can lengthen life, and the only mortality and life expectancy result of its kind in this collection.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(6), 452-461
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
China
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/31036503/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30093-2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Gong, Q., Zhang, P., Wang, J., Ma, J., An, Y., Chen, Y., Zhang, B., Feng, X., Li, H., Chen, X., Cheng, Y. J., Gregg, E. W., Hu, Y., Bennett, P. H., & Li, G. (2019). Morbidity and mortality after lifestyle intervention for people with impaired glucose tolerance: 30-year results of the Da Qing Diabetes Prevention Outcome Study. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 7(6), 452-461. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(19)30093-2
REF-311 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of intensive lifestyle intervention on bodyweight and glycaemia in early type 2 diabetes (DIADEM-I): an open-label, parallel-group, randomised controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 158 adults aged 18 to 50 with diabetes duration of 3 years or less, intensive lifestyle intervention produced mean 11.98 kg weight loss at 12 months versus 3.98 kg with usual care, an adjusted difference of minus 6.08 kg, p less than 0.0001. Diabetes remission occurred in 61 percent versus 12 percent, odds ratio 12.03, 95 percent CI 5.17 to 28.03, and normoglycaemia in 33 percent versus 4 percent. Extends the remission evidence beyond European populations and to younger adults, which matters for generalising lifestyle intervention across cultures and food environments.

Full APA reference

Taheri, S., Zaghloul, H., Chagoury, O., Elhadad, S., Ahmed, S. H., El Khatib, N., Amona, R. A., El Nahas, K., Suleiman, N., Alnaama, A., Al-Hamaq, A., Charlson, M., Wells, M. T., Al-Abdulla, S., & Abou-Samra, A. B. (2020). Effect of intensive lifestyle intervention on bodyweight and glycaemia in early type 2 diabetes (DIADEM-I): An open-label, parallel-group, randomised controlled trial. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 8(6), 477-489. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(20)30117-0

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-311
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Taheri, S., Zaghloul, H., Chagoury, O., Elhadad, S., Ahmed, S. H., El Khatib, N., Amona, R. A., El Nahas, K., Suleiman, N., Alnaama, A., Al-Hamaq, A., Charlson, M., Wells, M. T., Al-Abdulla, S., & Abou-Samra, A. B.
Year
2020
Title
Effect of intensive lifestyle intervention on bodyweight and glycaemia in early type 2 diabetes (DIADEM-I): an open-label, parallel-group, randomised controlled trial
Description
In 158 adults aged 18 to 50 with diabetes duration of 3 years or less, intensive lifestyle intervention produced mean 11.98 kg weight loss at 12 months versus 3.98 kg with usual care, an adjusted difference of minus 6.08 kg, p less than 0.0001. Diabetes remission occurred in 61 percent versus 12 percent, odds ratio 12.03, 95 percent CI 5.17 to 28.03, and normoglycaemia in 33 percent versus 4 percent. Extends the remission evidence beyond European populations and to younger adults, which matters for generalising lifestyle intervention across cultures and food environments.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 8(6), 477-489
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Qatar
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32445735/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(20
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Taheri, S., Zaghloul, H., Chagoury, O., Elhadad, S., Ahmed, S. H., El Khatib, N., Amona, R. A., El Nahas, K., Suleiman, N., Alnaama, A., Al-Hamaq, A., Charlson, M., Wells, M. T., Al-Abdulla, S., & Abou-Samra, A. B. (2020). Effect of intensive lifestyle intervention on bodyweight and glycaemia in early type 2 diabetes (DIADEM-I): An open-label, parallel-group, randomised controlled trial. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 8(6), 477-489. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(20)30117-0
REF-312 Paper, guideline or statement

Consensus Report: Definition and Interpretation of Remission in Type 2 Diabetes

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

The international expert group settled on "remission" as the appropriate term and set the usual diagnostic criterion as HbA1c below 6.5 percent, or 48 mmol/mol, measured at least 3 months after stopping glucose lowering pharmacotherapy. It recommends active observation of people in remission and discusses predictors, outcomes and the long term risks versus benefits of pursuing remission. The measurement standard that makes every other item in this section comparable, and the choice of the word remission over cure is itself a statement about chronic disease and identity.

Full APA reference

Riddle, M. C., Cefalu, W. T., Evans, P. H., Gerstein, H. C., Nauck, M. A., Oh, W. K., Rothberg, A. E., le Roux, C. W., Rubino, F., Schauer, P., Taylor, R., & Twenefour, D. (2021). Consensus report: Definition and interpretation of remission in type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care, 44(10), 2438-2444. https://doi.org/10.2337/dci21-0034

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-312
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Riddle, M. C., Cefalu, W. T., Evans, P. H., Gerstein, H. C., Nauck, M. A., Oh, W. K., Rothberg, A. E., le Roux, C. W., Rubino, F., Schauer, P., Taylor, R., & Twenefour, D.
Year
2021
Title
Consensus Report: Definition and Interpretation of Remission in Type 2 Diabetes
Description
The international expert group settled on "remission" as the appropriate term and set the usual diagnostic criterion as HbA1c below 6.5 percent, or 48 mmol/mol, measured at least 3 months after stopping glucose lowering pharmacotherapy. It recommends active observation of people in remission and discusses predictors, outcomes and the long term risks versus benefits of pursuing remission. The measurement standard that makes every other item in this section comparable, and the choice of the word remission over cure is itself a statement about chronic disease and identity.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 44(10), 2438-2444
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34462270/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/dci21-0034
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Riddle, M. C., Cefalu, W. T., Evans, P. H., Gerstein, H. C., Nauck, M. A., Oh, W. K., Rothberg, A. E., le Roux, C. W., Rubino, F., Schauer, P., Taylor, R., & Twenefour, D. (2021). Consensus report: Definition and interpretation of remission in type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care, 44(10), 2438-2444. https://doi.org/10.2337/dci21-0034
REF-313 Paper, guideline or statement

Diets for weight management in adults with type 2 diabetes: an umbrella review of published meta-analyses and systematic review of trials of diets for diabetes remission

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

The umbrella review screened 1,064 records and included 21 systematic reviews comprising 19 meta analyses, of which 12 were rated critically low or low quality on AMSTAR 2 and 7 were high quality. The parallel remission review included 16 papers covering 14 studies (6 randomised and 8 non randomised) across 7 diet types, with total diet replacement the most studied approach at 4 studies, and defined remission as HbA1c below 48 mmol/mol or fasting plasma glucose below 7 mmol/l without glucose lowering medication. The best available map of the dietary evidence base, and its quality appraisal is a caution against citing individual diet meta analyses uncritically.

Full APA reference

Churuangsuk, C., Hall, J., Reynolds, A., Griffin, S. J., Combet, E., & Lean, M. E. J. (2022). Diets for weight management in adults with type 2 diabetes: An umbrella review of published meta-analyses and systematic review of trials of diets for diabetes remission. Diabetologia, 65, 14-36. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00125-021-05577-2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-313
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Churuangsuk, C., Hall, J., Reynolds, A., Griffin, S. J., Combet, E., & Lean, M. E. J.
Year
2022
Title
Diets for weight management in adults with type 2 diabetes: an umbrella review of published meta-analyses and systematic review of trials of diets for diabetes remission
Description
The umbrella review screened 1,064 records and included 21 systematic reviews comprising 19 meta analyses, of which 12 were rated critically low or low quality on AMSTAR 2 and 7 were high quality. The parallel remission review included 16 papers covering 14 studies (6 randomised and 8 non randomised) across 7 diet types, with total diet replacement the most studied approach at 4 studies, and defined remission as HbA1c below 48 mmol/mol or fasting plasma glucose below 7 mmol/l without glucose lowering medication. The best available map of the dietary evidence base, and its quality appraisal is a caution against citing individual diet meta analyses uncritically.
Publication or publisher
Diabetologia, 65, 14-36
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s00125-021-05577-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00125-021-05577-2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Churuangsuk, C., Hall, J., Reynolds, A., Griffin, S. J., Combet, E., & Lean, M. E. J. (2022). Diets for weight management in adults with type 2 diabetes: An umbrella review of published meta-analyses and systematic review of trials of diets for diabetes remission. Diabetologia, 65, 14-36. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00125-021-05577-2
REF-314 Paper, guideline or statement

Semaglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Obesity without Diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 17,604 patients aged 45 or older with preexisting cardiovascular disease, BMI 27 or greater and no diabetes, followed a mean 39.8 months, semaglutide 2.4 mg weekly reduced the composite of cardiovascular death, nonfatal myocardial infarction or nonfatal stroke to 6.5 percent versus 8.0 percent on placebo, hazard ratio 0.80, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.90, p less than 0.001. Adverse events leading to permanent discontinuation occurred in 16.6 percent on semaglutide versus 8.2 percent on placebo, p less than 0.001. The trial that turned obesity pharmacotherapy into cardiovascular prevention, and the discontinuation rate is a reminder that tolerability, not efficacy, often decides real world outcomes.

Full APA reference

Lincoff, A. M., Brown-Frandsen, K., Colhoun, H. M., Deanfield, J., Emerson, S. S., Esbjerg, S., Hardt-Lindberg, S., Hovingh, G. K., Kahn, S. E., Kushner, R. F., Lingvay, I., Oral, T. K., Michelsen, M. M., Plutzky, J., Tornøe, C. W., & Ryan, D. H. (2023). Semaglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in obesity without diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 389(24), 2221-2232. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2307563

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-314
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lincoff, A. M., Brown-Frandsen, K., Colhoun, H. M., Deanfield, J., Emerson, S. S., Esbjerg, S., Hardt-Lindberg, S., Hovingh, G. K., Kahn, S. E., Kushner, R. F., Lingvay, I., Oral, T. K., Michelsen, M. M., Plutzky, J., Tornøe, C. W., & Ryan, D. H.
Year
2023
Title
Semaglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Obesity without Diabetes
Description
In 17,604 patients aged 45 or older with preexisting cardiovascular disease, BMI 27 or greater and no diabetes, followed a mean 39.8 months, semaglutide 2.4 mg weekly reduced the composite of cardiovascular death, nonfatal myocardial infarction or nonfatal stroke to 6.5 percent versus 8.0 percent on placebo, hazard ratio 0.80, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.90, p less than 0.001. Adverse events leading to permanent discontinuation occurred in 16.6 percent on semaglutide versus 8.2 percent on placebo, p less than 0.001. The trial that turned obesity pharmacotherapy into cardiovascular prevention, and the discontinuation rate is a reminder that tolerability, not efficacy, often decides real world outcomes.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 389(24), 2221-2232
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37952131/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2307563
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Lincoff, A. M., Brown-Frandsen, K., Colhoun, H. M., Deanfield, J., Emerson, S. S., Esbjerg, S., Hardt-Lindberg, S., Hovingh, G. K., Kahn, S. E., Kushner, R. F., Lingvay, I., Oral, T. K., Michelsen, M. M., Plutzky, J., Tornøe, C. W., & Ryan, D. H. (2023). Semaglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in obesity without diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 389(24), 2221-2232. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2307563
REF-315 Paper, guideline or statement

Tirzepatide Once Weekly for the Treatment of Obesity

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 2,539 adults without diabetes, mean baseline weight 104.8 kg, mean weight change at 72 weeks was minus 15.0 percent, minus 19.5 percent and minus 20.9 percent for tirzepatide 5, 10 and 15 mg versus minus 3.1 percent for placebo, all p less than 0.001. At least 5 percent weight reduction was achieved by 85 to 91 percent on tirzepatide versus 35 percent on placebo, and at least 20 percent reduction by 50 to 57 percent on the higher doses versus 3 percent on placebo, with gastrointestinal events the most common adverse effects. Defines the current upper bound of pharmacological weight loss and provides the benchmark that any lifestyle or combined programme is now compared against.

Full APA reference

Jastreboff, A. M., Aronne, L. J., Ahmad, N. N., Wharton, S., Connery, L., Alves, B., Kiyosue, A., Zhang, S., Liu, B., Bunck, M. C., & Stefanski, A. (2022). Tirzepatide once weekly for the treatment of obesity. New England Journal of Medicine, 387(3), 205-216. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2206038

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-315
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jastreboff, A. M., Aronne, L. J., Ahmad, N. N., Wharton, S., Connery, L., Alves, B., Kiyosue, A., Zhang, S., Liu, B., Bunck, M. C., & Stefanski, A.
Year
2022
Title
Tirzepatide Once Weekly for the Treatment of Obesity
Description
Among 2,539 adults without diabetes, mean baseline weight 104.8 kg, mean weight change at 72 weeks was minus 15.0 percent, minus 19.5 percent and minus 20.9 percent for tirzepatide 5, 10 and 15 mg versus minus 3.1 percent for placebo, all p less than 0.001. At least 5 percent weight reduction was achieved by 85 to 91 percent on tirzepatide versus 35 percent on placebo, and at least 20 percent reduction by 50 to 57 percent on the higher doses versus 3 percent on placebo, with gastrointestinal events the most common adverse effects. Defines the current upper bound of pharmacological weight loss and provides the benchmark that any lifestyle or combined programme is now compared against.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 387(3), 205-216
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/35658024/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2206038
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Jastreboff, A. M., Aronne, L. J., Ahmad, N. N., Wharton, S., Connery, L., Alves, B., Kiyosue, A., Zhang, S., Liu, B., Bunck, M. C., & Stefanski, A. (2022). Tirzepatide once weekly for the treatment of obesity. New England Journal of Medicine, 387(3), 205-216. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2206038
REF-316 Paper, guideline or statement

Cardiovascular Outcomes with Tirzepatide versus Dulaglutide in Type 2 Diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 13,299 randomised patients with type 2 diabetes and atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease, the primary composite of cardiovascular death, myocardial infarction or stroke occurred in 801 of 6,586 (12.2 percent) on tirzepatide up to 15 mg versus 862 of 6,579 (13.1 percent) on dulaglutide 1.5 mg, hazard ratio 0.92, 95.3 percent CI 0.83 to 1.01. Tirzepatide met noninferiority, p equals 0.003, but not superiority, p equals 0.09, with similar overall adverse event incidence and more gastrointestinal events on tirzepatide. Shows that much larger weight loss did not translate into clearly better cardiovascular outcomes than an older agent, which complicates any simple weight to outcome causal story.

Full APA reference

Nicholls, S. J., Pavo, I., Bhatt, D. L., Buse, J. B., Del Prato, S., Kahn, S. E., Lincoff, A. M., McGuire, D. K., Miller, D., Nauck, M. A., Nishiyama, H., Nissen, S. E., Sattar, N., Weerakkody, G., Wiese, R. J., Zinman, B., Zoungas, S., Basile, J., Davies, M. J., ... D'Alessio, D. (2025). Cardiovascular outcomes with tirzepatide versus dulaglutide in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 393(24), 2409-2420. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2505928

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-316
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Nicholls, S. J., Pavo, I., Bhatt, D. L., Buse, J. B., Del Prato, S., Kahn, S. E., Lincoff, A. M., McGuire, D. K., Miller, D., Nauck, M. A., Nishiyama, H., Nissen, S. E., Sattar, N., Weerakkody, G., Wiese, R. J., Zinman, B., Zoungas, S., Basile, J., Davies, M. J., ... D'Alessio, D.
Year
2025
Title
Cardiovascular Outcomes with Tirzepatide versus Dulaglutide in Type 2 Diabetes
Description
Among 13,299 randomised patients with type 2 diabetes and atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease, the primary composite of cardiovascular death, myocardial infarction or stroke occurred in 801 of 6,586 (12.2 percent) on tirzepatide up to 15 mg versus 862 of 6,579 (13.1 percent) on dulaglutide 1.5 mg, hazard ratio 0.92, 95.3 percent CI 0.83 to 1.01. Tirzepatide met noninferiority, p equals 0.003, but not superiority, p equals 0.09, with similar overall adverse event incidence and more gastrointestinal events on tirzepatide. Shows that much larger weight loss did not translate into clearly better cardiovascular outcomes than an older agent, which complicates any simple weight to outcome causal story.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 393(24), 2409-2420
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41406444/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2505928
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Nicholls, S. J., Pavo, I., Bhatt, D. L., Buse, J. B., Del Prato, S., Kahn, S. E., Lincoff, A. M., McGuire, D. K., Miller, D., Nauck, M. A., Nishiyama, H., Nissen, S. E., Sattar, N., Weerakkody, G., Wiese, R. J., Zinman, B., Zoungas, S., Basile, J., Davies, M. J., ... D'Alessio, D. (2025). Cardiovascular outcomes with tirzepatide versus dulaglutide in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 393(24), 2409-2420. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2505928
REF-317 Paper, guideline or statement

Once-Weekly Semaglutide in Adults with Overweight or Obesity

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 1,961 adults without diabetes, semaglutide 2.4 mg weekly plus lifestyle intervention produced minus 14.9 percent body weight change at week 68 versus minus 2.4 percent for placebo plus lifestyle intervention, a treatment difference of minus 12.4 percentage points, 95 percent CI minus 13.4 to minus 11.5, p less than 0.001, or minus 15.3 kg versus minus 2.6 kg. At least 5 percent loss was reached by 86.4 percent versus 31.5 percent, at least 10 percent by 69.1 percent versus 12.0 percent and at least 15 percent by 50.5 percent versus 4.9 percent, with greater improvement in cardiometabolic risk factors and in participant reported physical functioning. Note the design: both arms received lifestyle intervention, so the trial measures drug added to behaviour change rather than drug versus behaviour change, which is often misreported.

Full APA reference

Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Calanna, S., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Rosenstock, J., Tran, M. T. D., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., Zeuthen, N., & Kushner, R. F. (2021). Once-weekly semaglutide in adults with overweight or obesity. New England Journal of Medicine, 384(11), 989-1002. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2032183

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-317
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Calanna, S., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Rosenstock, J., Tran, M. T. D., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., Zeuthen, N., & Kushner, R. F.
Year
2021
Title
Once-Weekly Semaglutide in Adults with Overweight or Obesity
Description
In 1,961 adults without diabetes, semaglutide 2.4 mg weekly plus lifestyle intervention produced minus 14.9 percent body weight change at week 68 versus minus 2.4 percent for placebo plus lifestyle intervention, a treatment difference of minus 12.4 percentage points, 95 percent CI minus 13.4 to minus 11.5, p less than 0.001, or minus 15.3 kg versus minus 2.6 kg. At least 5 percent loss was reached by 86.4 percent versus 31.5 percent, at least 10 percent by 69.1 percent versus 12.0 percent and at least 15 percent by 50.5 percent versus 4.9 percent, with greater improvement in cardiometabolic risk factors and in participant reported physical functioning. Note the design: both arms received lifestyle intervention, so the trial measures drug added to behaviour change rather than drug versus behaviour change, which is often misreported.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 384(11), 989-1002
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33567185/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2032183
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Calanna, S., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Rosenstock, J., Tran, M. T. D., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., Zeuthen, N., & Kushner, R. F. (2021). Once-weekly semaglutide in adults with overweight or obesity. New England Journal of Medicine, 384(11), 989-1002. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2032183
REF-318 Paper, guideline or statement

Weight regain and cardiometabolic effects after withdrawal of semaglutide: The STEP 1 trial extension

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 327 participants followed for a further year after both semaglutide and lifestyle intervention were stopped at week 68, mean weight loss of 17.3 percent on semaglutide was followed by regain of 11.6 percentage points of the weight lost, leaving net loss of 5.6 percent at week 120 versus 0.1 percent for placebo. Cardiometabolic improvements reverted toward baseline for most variables, and the authors conclude the findings confirm the chronicity of obesity and that ongoing treatment is required to maintain benefit. The central discontinuation evidence, and because lifestyle support was withdrawn simultaneously it also illustrates how hard it is to separate drug effect from support effect.

Full APA reference

Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Kandler, K., Konakli, K., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Oral, T. K., Rosenstock, J., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., & Kushner, R. F. (2022). Weight regain and cardiometabolic effects after withdrawal of semaglutide: The STEP 1 trial extension. Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 24(8), 1553-1564. https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.14725

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-318
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Kandler, K., Konakli, K., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Oral, T. K., Rosenstock, J., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., & Kushner, R. F.
Year
2022
Title
Weight regain and cardiometabolic effects after withdrawal of semaglutide: The STEP 1 trial extension
Description
In 327 participants followed for a further year after both semaglutide and lifestyle intervention were stopped at week 68, mean weight loss of 17.3 percent on semaglutide was followed by regain of 11.6 percentage points of the weight lost, leaving net loss of 5.6 percent at week 120 versus 0.1 percent for placebo. Cardiometabolic improvements reverted toward baseline for most variables, and the authors conclude the findings confirm the chronicity of obesity and that ongoing treatment is required to maintain benefit. The central discontinuation evidence, and because lifestyle support was withdrawn simultaneously it also illustrates how hard it is to separate drug effect from support effect.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 24(8), 1553-1564
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/35441470/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.14725
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Wilding, J. P. H., Batterham, R. L., Davies, M., Van Gaal, L. F., Kandler, K., Konakli, K., Lingvay, I., McGowan, B. M., Oral, T. K., Rosenstock, J., Wadden, T. A., Wharton, S., Yokote, K., & Kushner, R. F. (2022). Weight regain and cardiometabolic effects after withdrawal of semaglutide: The STEP 1 trial extension. Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 24(8), 1553-1564. https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.14725
REF-319 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of Subcutaneous Semaglutide vs Placebo as an Adjunct to Intensive Behavioral Therapy on Body Weight in Adults With Overweight or Obesity: The STEP 3 Randomized Clinical Trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 611 adults given a low calorie diet for the first 8 weeks and 30 behavioural counselling visits over 68 weeks, weight change was minus 16.0 percent with semaglutide versus minus 5.7 percent with placebo, a difference of minus 10.3 percentage points, 95 percent CI minus 12.0 to minus 8.6, p less than 0.001. Placebo plus intensive behavioural therapy alone still achieved at least 5 percent weight loss in 47.6 percent of participants, and gastrointestinal adverse events affected 82.8 percent versus 63.2 percent. The best single quantification of drug and behavioural therapy as co-interventions, because the placebo arm shows what intensive behavioural support alone delivers.

Full APA reference

Wadden, T. A., Bailey, T. S., Billings, L. K., Davies, M., Frias, J. P., Koroleva, A., Lingvay, I., O'Neil, P. M., Rubino, D. M., Skovgaard, D., Wallenstein, S. O. R., & Garvey, W. T. (2021). Effect of subcutaneous semaglutide vs placebo as an adjunct to intensive behavioral therapy on body weight in adults with overweight or obesity: The STEP 3 randomized clinical trial. JAMA, 325(14), 1403-1413. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2021.1831

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-319
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wadden, T. A., Bailey, T. S., Billings, L. K., Davies, M., Frias, J. P., Koroleva, A., Lingvay, I., O'Neil, P. M., Rubino, D. M., Skovgaard, D., Wallenstein, S. O. R., & Garvey, W. T.
Year
2021
Title
Effect of Subcutaneous Semaglutide vs Placebo as an Adjunct to Intensive Behavioral Therapy on Body Weight in Adults With Overweight or Obesity: The STEP 3 Randomized Clinical Trial
Description
In 611 adults given a low calorie diet for the first 8 weeks and 30 behavioural counselling visits over 68 weeks, weight change was minus 16.0 percent with semaglutide versus minus 5.7 percent with placebo, a difference of minus 10.3 percentage points, 95 percent CI minus 12.0 to minus 8.6, p less than 0.001. Placebo plus intensive behavioural therapy alone still achieved at least 5 percent weight loss in 47.6 percent of participants, and gastrointestinal adverse events affected 82.8 percent versus 63.2 percent. The best single quantification of drug and behavioural therapy as co-interventions, because the placebo arm shows what intensive behavioural support alone delivers.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 325(14), 1403-1413
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33625476/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2021.1831
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Wadden, T. A., Bailey, T. S., Billings, L. K., Davies, M., Frias, J. P., Koroleva, A., Lingvay, I., O'Neil, P. M., Rubino, D. M., Skovgaard, D., Wallenstein, S. O. R., & Garvey, W. T. (2021). Effect of subcutaneous semaglutide vs placebo as an adjunct to intensive behavioral therapy on body weight in adults with overweight or obesity: The STEP 3 randomized clinical trial. JAMA, 325(14), 1403-1413. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2021.1831
REF-320 Paper, guideline or statement

Semaglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 3,297 patients with type 2 diabetes treated for 104 weeks, 83.0 percent of whom had established cardiovascular disease, chronic kidney disease or both, the primary composite occurred in 108 of 1,648 (6.6 percent) on semaglutide versus 146 of 1,649 (8.9 percent) on placebo, hazard ratio 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.58 to 0.95, p less than 0.001 for noninferiority. Nonfatal stroke fell from 2.7 percent to 1.6 percent, hazard ratio 0.61, 95 percent CI 0.38 to 0.99, p equals 0.04, while cardiovascular death rates were similar. An early signal that these agents affect hard outcomes rather than surrogate markers, which is why later obesity indications were taken seriously.

Full APA reference

Marso, S. P., Bain, S. C., Consoli, A., Eliaschewitz, F. G., Jódar, E., Leiter, L. A., Lingvay, I., Rosenstock, J., Seufert, J., Warren, M. L., Woo, V., Hansen, O., Holst, A. G., Pettersson, J., & Vilsbøll, T. (2016). Semaglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 375(19), 1834-1844. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1607141

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-320
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marso, S. P., Bain, S. C., Consoli, A., Eliaschewitz, F. G., Jódar, E., Leiter, L. A., Lingvay, I., Rosenstock, J., Seufert, J., Warren, M. L., Woo, V., Hansen, O., Holst, A. G., Pettersson, J., & Vilsbøll, T.
Year
2016
Title
Semaglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes
Description
Among 3,297 patients with type 2 diabetes treated for 104 weeks, 83.0 percent of whom had established cardiovascular disease, chronic kidney disease or both, the primary composite occurred in 108 of 1,648 (6.6 percent) on semaglutide versus 146 of 1,649 (8.9 percent) on placebo, hazard ratio 0.74, 95 percent CI 0.58 to 0.95, p less than 0.001 for noninferiority. Nonfatal stroke fell from 2.7 percent to 1.6 percent, hazard ratio 0.61, 95 percent CI 0.38 to 0.99, p equals 0.04, while cardiovascular death rates were similar. An early signal that these agents affect hard outcomes rather than surrogate markers, which is why later obesity indications were taken seriously.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 375(19), 1834-1844
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/27633186/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1607141
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marso, S. P., Bain, S. C., Consoli, A., Eliaschewitz, F. G., Jódar, E., Leiter, L. A., Lingvay, I., Rosenstock, J., Seufert, J., Warren, M. L., Woo, V., Hansen, O., Holst, A. G., Pettersson, J., & Vilsbøll, T. (2016). Semaglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 375(19), 1834-1844. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1607141
REF-321 Paper, guideline or statement

Liraglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Type 2 Diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Among 9,340 patients with type 2 diabetes at high cardiovascular risk followed a median 3.8 years, the primary composite occurred in 13.0 percent on liraglutide versus 14.9 percent on placebo, hazard ratio 0.87, 95 percent CI 0.78 to 0.97, p equals 0.01 for superiority. Cardiovascular death fell from 6.0 to 4.7 percent, hazard ratio 0.78, 95 percent CI 0.66 to 0.93, p equals 0.007, and all cause death from 9.6 to 8.2 percent, hazard ratio 0.85, 95 percent CI 0.74 to 0.97, p equals 0.02. The first mortality benefit in this drug class, and the reference point for any claim that incretin therapy reduces death rather than only weight.

Full APA reference

Marso, S. P., Daniels, G. H., Brown-Frandsen, K., Kristensen, P., Mann, J. F. E., Nauck, M. A., Nissen, S. E., Pocock, S., Poulter, N. R., Ravn, L. S., Steinberg, W. M., Stockner, M., Zinman, B., Bergenstal, R. M., & Buse, J. B. (2016). Liraglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 375(4), 311-322. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1603827

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-321
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marso, S. P., Daniels, G. H., Brown-Frandsen, K., Kristensen, P., Mann, J. F. E., Nauck, M. A., Nissen, S. E., Pocock, S., Poulter, N. R., Ravn, L. S., Steinberg, W. M., Stockner, M., Zinman, B., Bergenstal, R. M., & Buse, J. B.
Year
2016
Title
Liraglutide and Cardiovascular Outcomes in Type 2 Diabetes
Description
Among 9,340 patients with type 2 diabetes at high cardiovascular risk followed a median 3.8 years, the primary composite occurred in 13.0 percent on liraglutide versus 14.9 percent on placebo, hazard ratio 0.87, 95 percent CI 0.78 to 0.97, p equals 0.01 for superiority. Cardiovascular death fell from 6.0 to 4.7 percent, hazard ratio 0.78, 95 percent CI 0.66 to 0.93, p equals 0.007, and all cause death from 9.6 to 8.2 percent, hazard ratio 0.85, 95 percent CI 0.74 to 0.97, p equals 0.02. The first mortality benefit in this drug class, and the reference point for any claim that incretin therapy reduces death rather than only weight.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 375(4), 311-322
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/27295427/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1603827
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marso, S. P., Daniels, G. H., Brown-Frandsen, K., Kristensen, P., Mann, J. F. E., Nauck, M. A., Nissen, S. E., Pocock, S., Poulter, N. R., Ravn, L. S., Steinberg, W. M., Stockner, M., Zinman, B., Bergenstal, R. M., & Buse, J. B. (2016). Liraglutide and cardiovascular outcomes in type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 375(4), 311-322. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1603827
REF-322 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of Semaglutide on Chronic Kidney Disease in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 3,533 patients with type 2 diabetes and chronic kidney disease followed a median 3.4 years, semaglutide 1.0 mg weekly reduced major kidney disease events by 24 percent, 331 versus 410 first events, hazard ratio 0.76, 95 percent CI 0.66 to 0.88, p equals 0.0003, and the trial was stopped early at a prespecified interim analysis. Death from cardiovascular causes was also reduced, hazard ratio 0.71, 95 percent CI 0.56 to 0.89. Extends the outcome evidence to kidney disease, a complication strongly patterned by social disadvantage and by access to continuous care.

Full APA reference

Perkovic, V., Tuttle, K. R., Rossing, P., Mahaffey, K. W., Mann, J. F. E., Bakris, G., Baeres, F. M. M., Idorn, T., Bosch-Traberg, H., Lausvig, N. L., & Pratley, R. (2024). Effects of semaglutide on chronic kidney disease in patients with type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 391(2), 109-121. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2403347

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-322
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Perkovic, V., Tuttle, K. R., Rossing, P., Mahaffey, K. W., Mann, J. F. E., Bakris, G., Baeres, F. M. M., Idorn, T., Bosch-Traberg, H., Lausvig, N. L., & Pratley, R.
Year
2024
Title
Effects of Semaglutide on Chronic Kidney Disease in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes
Description
In 3,533 patients with type 2 diabetes and chronic kidney disease followed a median 3.4 years, semaglutide 1.0 mg weekly reduced major kidney disease events by 24 percent, 331 versus 410 first events, hazard ratio 0.76, 95 percent CI 0.66 to 0.88, p equals 0.0003, and the trial was stopped early at a prespecified interim analysis. Death from cardiovascular causes was also reduced, hazard ratio 0.71, 95 percent CI 0.56 to 0.89. Extends the outcome evidence to kidney disease, a complication strongly patterned by social disadvantage and by access to continuous care.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 391(2), 109-121
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38785209/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2403347
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Perkovic, V., Tuttle, K. R., Rossing, P., Mahaffey, K. W., Mann, J. F. E., Bakris, G., Baeres, F. M. M., Idorn, T., Bosch-Traberg, H., Lausvig, N. L., & Pratley, R. (2024). Effects of semaglutide on chronic kidney disease in patients with type 2 diabetes. New England Journal of Medicine, 391(2), 109-121. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa2403347
REF-323 Paper, guideline or statement

Cardiovascular, mortality, and kidney outcomes with GLP-1 receptor agonists in patients with type 2 diabetes: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Pooling 8 trials and 60,080 patients, GLP-1 receptor agonists reduced major adverse cardiovascular events by 14 percent (HR 0.86, 95 percent CI 0.80 to 0.93), all cause mortality by 12 percent (HR 0.88, 95 percent CI 0.82 to 0.94, p equals 0.0001), heart failure admission by 11 percent and the composite kidney outcome by 21 percent. There was no significant heterogeneity across nine subgroups and no increase in severe hypoglycaemia, retinopathy or pancreatic adverse effects. The class level mortality estimate, useful as the anchor number when comparing drug benefit against the mortality benefit seen with lifestyle intervention in Da Qing (B7).

Full APA reference

Sattar, N., Lee, M. M. Y., Kristensen, S. L., Branch, K. R. H., Del Prato, S., Khurmi, N. S., Lam, C. S. P., Lopes, R. D., McMurray, J. J. V., Pratley, R. E., Rosenstock, J., & Gerstein, H. C. (2021). Cardiovascular, mortality, and kidney outcomes with GLP-1 receptor agonists in patients with type 2 diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised trials. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 9(10), 653-662. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(21)00203-5

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-323
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sattar, N., Lee, M. M. Y., Kristensen, S. L., Branch, K. R. H., Del Prato, S., Khurmi, N. S., Lam, C. S. P., Lopes, R. D., McMurray, J. J. V., Pratley, R. E., Rosenstock, J., & Gerstein, H. C.
Year
2021
Title
Cardiovascular, mortality, and kidney outcomes with GLP-1 receptor agonists in patients with type 2 diabetes: a systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised trials
Description
Pooling 8 trials and 60,080 patients, GLP-1 receptor agonists reduced major adverse cardiovascular events by 14 percent (HR 0.86, 95 percent CI 0.80 to 0.93), all cause mortality by 12 percent (HR 0.88, 95 percent CI 0.82 to 0.94, p equals 0.0001), heart failure admission by 11 percent and the composite kidney outcome by 21 percent. There was no significant heterogeneity across nine subgroups and no increase in severe hypoglycaemia, retinopathy or pancreatic adverse effects. The class level mortality estimate, useful as the anchor number when comparing drug benefit against the mortality benefit seen with lifestyle intervention in Da Qing (B7).
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 9(10), 653-662
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34425083/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(21
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Sattar, N., Lee, M. M. Y., Kristensen, S. L., Branch, K. R. H., Del Prato, S., Khurmi, N. S., Lam, C. S. P., Lopes, R. D., McMurray, J. J. V., Pratley, R. E., Rosenstock, J., & Gerstein, H. C. (2021). Cardiovascular, mortality, and kidney outcomes with GLP-1 receptor agonists in patients with type 2 diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomised trials. The Lancet Diabetes and Endocrinology, 9(10), 653-662. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2213-8587(21)00203-5
REF-324 Paper, guideline or statement

Product warnings updated for GLP-1 RA class

  • Report or review
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Mental and physical health

The TGA aligned warnings across the GLP-1 receptor agonist class, covering Ozempic, Wegovy, Saxenda, Trulicity and Mounjaro, so that all products carry consistent wording about suicidal thoughts or behaviours. The alert also states that an interaction between tirzepatide and oral contraception cannot be ruled out, advising non oral or additional barrier contraception for four weeks after starting treatment and after each dose increase, and that these medicines are not for use in pregnancy. This is the clearest Australian regulatory link between a metabolic drug class and mental health monitoring, which matters for a library that treats physical and mental health as interacting rather than separate domains.

Full APA reference

Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2025, December 1). Product warnings updated for GLP-1 RA class. Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. https://www.tga.gov.au/safety/safety-monitoring-and-information/safety-alerts/product-warnings-updated-glp-1-ra-class

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-324
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Therapeutic Goods Administration
Year
2025
Title
Product warnings updated for GLP-1 RA class
Description
The TGA aligned warnings across the GLP-1 receptor agonist class, covering Ozempic, Wegovy, Saxenda, Trulicity and Mounjaro, so that all products carry consistent wording about suicidal thoughts or behaviours. The alert also states that an interaction between tirzepatide and oral contraception cannot be ruled out, advising non oral or additional barrier contraception for four weeks after starting treatment and after each dose increase, and that these medicines are not for use in pregnancy. This is the clearest Australian regulatory link between a metabolic drug class and mental health monitoring, which matters for a library that treats physical and mental health as interacting rather than separate domains.
Publication or publisher
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.tga.gov.au/safety/safety-monitoring-and-information/safety-alerts/product-warnings-updated-glp-1-ra-class
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2025, December 1). Product warnings updated for GLP-1 RA class. Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. https://www.tga.gov.au/safety/safety-monitoring-and-information/safety-alerts/product-warnings-updated-glp-1-ra-class
REF-325 Paper, guideline or statement

Impact of Semaglutide on fat mass, lean mass and muscle function in patients with obesity: The SEMALEAN study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

In 115 enrolled and 106 analysed adults with a mean body mass index of 46.3, semaglutide produced 9.8 percent weight loss at month 7 and 12.7 percent at month 12, with fat mass falling 18.9 percent and lean mass falling 3.0 kg by month 7 before stabilising. Muscle function improved rather than declined, with handgrip strength rising 4.1 kg at month 12 and sarcopenic obesity falling from 49 percent at baseline to 33 percent at month 12, while resting energy expenditure dropped by 244 kcal per 24 hours. Directly addresses the muscle loss concern raised about incretin therapy, and shows why activity and protein behaviours remain part of the picture even when a drug is doing the weight loss work.

Full APA reference

Alissou, M., Demangeat, T., et al. (2026). Impact of semaglutide on fat mass, lean mass and muscle function in patients with obesity: The SEMALEAN study. Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 28(1), 112-121. https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.70141

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-325
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Alissou, M., Demangeat, T., et al
Year
2026
Title
Impact of Semaglutide on fat mass, lean mass and muscle function in patients with obesity: The SEMALEAN study
Description
In 115 enrolled and 106 analysed adults with a mean body mass index of 46.3, semaglutide produced 9.8 percent weight loss at month 7 and 12.7 percent at month 12, with fat mass falling 18.9 percent and lean mass falling 3.0 kg by month 7 before stabilising. Muscle function improved rather than declined, with handgrip strength rising 4.1 kg at month 12 and sarcopenic obesity falling from 49 percent at baseline to 33 percent at month 12, while resting energy expenditure dropped by 244 kcal per 24 hours. Directly addresses the muscle loss concern raised about incretin therapy, and shows why activity and protein behaviours remain part of the picture even when a drug is doing the weight loss work.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 28(1), 112-121
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
France
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12673431/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.70141
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Alissou, M., Demangeat, T., et al. (2026). Impact of semaglutide on fat mass, lean mass and muscle function in patients with obesity: The SEMALEAN study. Diabetes, Obesity and Metabolism, 28(1), 112-121. https://doi.org/10.1111/dom.70141
REF-326 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional well-being

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The article describes how colonisation and ongoing coloniality disrupted Indigenous flourishing, and traces Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander leadership in building the social and emotional wellbeing (SEWB) model, which privileges Indigenous knowledges, truth telling, practice based evidence and Indigenous human rights. It reviews the foundations, development and expansion of the SEWB model and recommends strategies to extend SEWB and support a decolonial turn in psychology. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative account of the social and emotional wellbeing model from the researchers who built it, and it frames wellbeing as relational, cultural and political rather than individual.

Full APA reference

Dudgeon, P., Agung-Igusti, R., Derry, K., & Gibson, C. (2025). Australian aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional well-being. American Psychologist, 80(8), 1137-1149. https://doi.org/10.1037/amp0001535

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-326
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dudgeon, P., Agung-Igusti, R., Derry, K., & Gibson, C.
Year
2025
Title
Australian Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional well-being
Description
The article describes how colonisation and ongoing coloniality disrupted Indigenous flourishing, and traces Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander leadership in building the social and emotional wellbeing (SEWB) model, which privileges Indigenous knowledges, truth telling, practice based evidence and Indigenous human rights. It reviews the foundations, development and expansion of the SEWB model and recommends strategies to extend SEWB and support a decolonial turn in psychology. It belongs in the library because it is the authoritative account of the social and emotional wellbeing model from the researchers who built it, and it frames wellbeing as relational, cultural and political rather than individual.
Publication or publisher
American Psychologist, 80(8), 1137-1149
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41379665/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1037/amp0001535
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Related items
REF-498
Full APA reference
Dudgeon, P., Agung-Igusti, R., Derry, K., & Gibson, C. (2025). Australian aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional well-being. American Psychologist, 80(8), 1137-1149. https://doi.org/10.1037/amp0001535
REF-327 Paper, guideline or statement

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional wellbeing measures (Cat

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The project collated over 30 Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander SEWB measures, classified as culturally derived (17), culturally informed (2) and culturally adapted (16), presented via a summary list, an inventory and a report. It argues that measures based on western concepts of mental health are not always culturally appropriate, and that the lack of use of culturally relevant SEWB measures has held back progress in understanding and improving First Nations wellbeing. It belongs in the library because it is the national inventory of culturally derived and culturally adapted wellbeing measures, which is the practical starting point for anyone choosing an outcome measure with First Nations clients.

Full APA reference

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Social and Emotional Wellbeing Measurement Consortium, & Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional wellbeing measures (Cat. no. IHW 305). AIHW, Australian Government. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/indigenous-australians/first-nations-wellbeing-measures/contents/about

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-327
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Social and Emotional Wellbeing Measurement Consortium, & Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2025
Title
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional wellbeing measures (Cat
Description
The project collated over 30 Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander SEWB measures, classified as culturally derived (17), culturally informed (2) and culturally adapted (16), presented via a summary list, an inventory and a report. It argues that measures based on western concepts of mental health are not always culturally appropriate, and that the lack of use of culturally relevant SEWB measures has held back progress in understanding and improving First Nations wellbeing. It belongs in the library because it is the national inventory of culturally derived and culturally adapted wellbeing measures, which is the practical starting point for anyone choosing an outcome measure with First Nations clients.
Publication or publisher
AIHW, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/indigenous-australians/first-nations-wellbeing-measures/contents/about
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Social and Emotional Wellbeing Measurement Consortium, & Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2025). Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander social and emotional wellbeing measures (Cat. no. IHW 305). AIHW, Australian Government. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/indigenous-australians/first-nations-wellbeing-measures/contents/about
REF-328 Paper, guideline or statement

Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander perspectives on what works in social and emotional wellbeing programs

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The paper synthesises evidence on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people's own experiences of a diverse range of social and emotional wellbeing programs and identifies the factors participants said made those programs succeed. Success factors include culturally safe, holistic and strengths based design, arts activities, connection to culture, yarning and storytelling, mentoring from Elders or community members, and skills building. It belongs in the library because it reports what Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander participants themselves said made wellbeing programs work, which is the kind of evidence that rarely reaches guideline documents.

Full APA reference

Murrup-Stewart, C., Truong, M., & Joshi, A. (2025). Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander perspectives on what works in social and emotional wellbeing programs [Policy and practice paper]. Australian Institute of Family Studies. https://aifs.gov.au/resources/policy-and-practice-papers/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-perspectives-what-works

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-328
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Murrup-Stewart, C., Truong, M., & Joshi, A.
Year
2025
Title
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander perspectives on what works in social and emotional wellbeing programs
Description
The paper synthesises evidence on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people's own experiences of a diverse range of social and emotional wellbeing programs and identifies the factors participants said made those programs succeed. Success factors include culturally safe, holistic and strengths based design, arts activities, connection to culture, yarning and storytelling, mentoring from Elders or community members, and skills building. It belongs in the library because it reports what Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander participants themselves said made wellbeing programs work, which is the kind of evidence that rarely reaches guideline documents.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Family Studies
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://aifs.gov.au/resources/policy-and-practice-papers/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-perspectives-what-works
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Murrup-Stewart, C., Truong, M., & Joshi, A. (2025). Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander perspectives on what works in social and emotional wellbeing programs [Policy and practice paper]. Australian Institute of Family Studies. https://aifs.gov.au/resources/policy-and-practice-papers/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-perspectives-what-works
REF-329 Paper, guideline or statement

Understanding the Social and Emotional Wellbeing factors protecting Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander young people from justice system involvement

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Using secondary data from the 2014-2015 National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Social Survey for young people aged 16 to 24, hierarchical logistic regression found that SEWB markers were not significantly associated with justice system non-involvement once other variables were controlled. Being female, experiencing fair treatment as an Aboriginal person, abstaining from substances, being employed and having housing stability were the significant correlates of staying out of the justice system. It belongs in the library because it tests social and emotional wellbeing markers against a hard social outcome and finds that fair treatment, employment, housing and substance abstinence carry the effect, which is a social determinants finding rather than a clinical one.

Full APA reference

Young, M., Ali, M. M., Trounson, J., & Shepherd, S. (2025). Understanding the Social and Emotional Wellbeing factors protecting Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander young people from justice system involvement. Psychiatry, Psychology and Law, 33(4), 1058-1078. https://doi.org/10.1080/13218719.2025.2497782

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-329
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Young, M., Ali, M. M., Trounson, J., & Shepherd, S.
Year
2025
Title
Understanding the Social and Emotional Wellbeing factors protecting Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander young people from justice system involvement
Description
Using secondary data from the 2014-2015 National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Social Survey for young people aged 16 to 24, hierarchical logistic regression found that SEWB markers were not significantly associated with justice system non-involvement once other variables were controlled. Being female, experiencing fair treatment as an Aboriginal person, abstaining from substances, being employed and having housing stability were the significant correlates of staying out of the justice system. It belongs in the library because it tests social and emotional wellbeing markers against a hard social outcome and finds that fair treatment, employment, housing and substance abstinence carry the effect, which is a social determinants finding rather than a clinical one.
Publication or publisher
Psychiatry, Psychology and Law, 33(4), 1058-1078
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/13218719.2025.2497782
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/13218719.2025.2497782
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Young, M., Ali, M. M., Trounson, J., & Shepherd, S. (2025). Understanding the Social and Emotional Wellbeing factors protecting Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander young people from justice system involvement. Psychiatry, Psychology and Law, 33(4), 1058-1078. https://doi.org/10.1080/13218719.2025.2497782
REF-330 Paper, guideline or statement

The effectiveness, implementation, and experiences of peer support approaches for mental health: A systematic umbrella review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The umbrella review covered 35 reviews spanning 426 primary studies and found mixed evidence that paid peer support improves outcomes, with some benefit for depression (particularly perinatal depression), self efficacy and recovery. Implementation succeeded where there was co-production, clear role definition, adequate training and supervision, strong leadership and a recovery oriented culture, and failed where time, funding, certification and pay were lacking or where non-peer staff were hostile. It belongs in the library because it is the broadest available synthesis of paid peer support and it separates the question of whether peer support works from the question of whether services implement it properly.

Full APA reference

Cooper, R. E., Saunders, K. R. K., Greenburgh, A., Shah, P., Appleton, R., Machin, K., Jeynes, T., Barnett, P., Allan, S. M., Griffiths, J., Stuart, R., Mitchell, L., Chipp, B., Jeffreys, S., Lloyd-Evans, B., Simpson, A., & Johnson, S. (2024). The effectiveness, implementation, and experiences of peer support approaches for mental health: A systematic umbrella review. BMC Medicine, 22, Article 72. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-024-03260-y

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-330
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cooper, R. E., Saunders, K. R. K., Greenburgh, A., Shah, P., Appleton, R., Machin, K., Jeynes, T., Barnett, P., Allan, S. M., Griffiths, J., Stuart, R., Mitchell, L., Chipp, B., Jeffreys, S., Lloyd-Evans, B., Simpson, A., & Johnson, S.
Year
2024
Title
The effectiveness, implementation, and experiences of peer support approaches for mental health: A systematic umbrella review
Description
The umbrella review covered 35 reviews spanning 426 primary studies and found mixed evidence that paid peer support improves outcomes, with some benefit for depression (particularly perinatal depression), self efficacy and recovery. Implementation succeeded where there was co-production, clear role definition, adequate training and supervision, strong leadership and a recovery oriented culture, and failed where time, funding, certification and pay were lacking or where non-peer staff were hostile. It belongs in the library because it is the broadest available synthesis of paid peer support and it separates the question of whether peer support works from the question of whether services implement it properly.
Publication or publisher
BMC Medicine, 22, Article 72
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12916-024-03260-y
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-024-03260-y
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Cooper, R. E., Saunders, K. R. K., Greenburgh, A., Shah, P., Appleton, R., Machin, K., Jeynes, T., Barnett, P., Allan, S. M., Griffiths, J., Stuart, R., Mitchell, L., Chipp, B., Jeffreys, S., Lloyd-Evans, B., Simpson, A., & Johnson, S. (2024). The effectiveness, implementation, and experiences of peer support approaches for mental health: A systematic umbrella review. BMC Medicine, 22, Article 72. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-024-03260-y
REF-331 Paper, guideline or statement

Implementation and outcomes of peer support workers in services for people with personality disorder: A systematic review and narrative synthesis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Across 13 papers, peer support workers in personality disorder services filled varied roles including running support groups and advocating for service users, and implementation depended on sufficient supervision, training and the ability to hold boundaries. Reported service user outcomes included improvement in personality disorder related symptoms, greater satisfaction with services and feeling validated and empowered, though the authors call for larger and more diverse studies. It belongs in the library because it extends the peer support evidence to personality disorder services, where relational and boundary questions are sharpest.

Full APA reference

Begum-Meades, R., Guillemard, S., Limbachiya, R., Lean, E., Thompson, F., & Crawford, M. J. (2026). Implementation and outcomes of peer support workers in services for people with personality disorder: A systematic review and narrative synthesis. Personality and Mental Health, 20(2), Article e70066. https://doi.org/10.1002/pmh.70066

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-331
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Begum-Meades, R., Guillemard, S., Limbachiya, R., Lean, E., Thompson, F., & Crawford, M. J.
Year
2026
Title
Implementation and outcomes of peer support workers in services for people with personality disorder: A systematic review and narrative synthesis
Description
Across 13 papers, peer support workers in personality disorder services filled varied roles including running support groups and advocating for service users, and implementation depended on sufficient supervision, training and the ability to hold boundaries. Reported service user outcomes included improvement in personality disorder related symptoms, greater satisfaction with services and feeling validated and empowered, though the authors call for larger and more diverse studies. It belongs in the library because it extends the peer support evidence to personality disorder services, where relational and boundary questions are sharpest.
Publication or publisher
Personality and Mental Health, 20(2), Article e70066
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41795883/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/pmh.70066
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Begum-Meades, R., Guillemard, S., Limbachiya, R., Lean, E., Thompson, F., & Crawford, M. J. (2026). Implementation and outcomes of peer support workers in services for people with personality disorder: A systematic review and narrative synthesis. Personality and Mental Health, 20(2), Article e70066. https://doi.org/10.1002/pmh.70066
REF-332 Paper, guideline or statement

The effectiveness of peer support for individuals with mental illness: Systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The review included 30 randomised controlled trials, 28 of them (4,152 participants) in the meta-analysis, and found small but significant improvements in clinical recovery (g = 0.19) and personal recovery (g = 0.15) but not overall functional recovery (g = 0.08). Benefits were concentrated among people with serious mental illness, no significant effects were found for people with elevated depressive symptoms, and most included studies carried a high risk of bias. It belongs in the library because it gives the pooled effect sizes for peer support and shows where the benefit sits, which keeps enthusiasm for lived experience roles anchored to measured outcomes.

Full APA reference

Smit, D., Miguel, C., Vrijsen, J. N., Groeneweg, B., Spijker, J., & Cuijpers, P. (2023). The effectiveness of peer support for individuals with mental illness: Systematic review and meta-analysis. Psychological Medicine, 53(11), 5332-5341. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291722002422

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-332
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Smit, D., Miguel, C., Vrijsen, J. N., Groeneweg, B., Spijker, J., & Cuijpers, P.
Year
2023
Title
The effectiveness of peer support for individuals with mental illness: Systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
The review included 30 randomised controlled trials, 28 of them (4,152 participants) in the meta-analysis, and found small but significant improvements in clinical recovery (g = 0.19) and personal recovery (g = 0.15) but not overall functional recovery (g = 0.08). Benefits were concentrated among people with serious mental illness, no significant effects were found for people with elevated depressive symptoms, and most included studies carried a high risk of bias. It belongs in the library because it gives the pooled effect sizes for peer support and shows where the benefit sits, which keeps enthusiasm for lived experience roles anchored to measured outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Psychological Medicine, 53(11), 5332-5341
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10476060/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291722002422
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Smit, D., Miguel, C., Vrijsen, J. N., Groeneweg, B., Spijker, J., & Cuijpers, P. (2023). The effectiveness of peer support for individuals with mental illness: Systematic review and meta-analysis. Psychological Medicine, 53(11), 5332-5341. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0033291722002422
REF-333 Paper, guideline or statement

Efficacy of whole system ayurveda management protocol in major depressive disorder: A randomized controlled clinical trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Fifty patients aged 20 to 70 with DSM-V diagnosed major depressive disorder were randomised to a 60 day Whole System Ayurveda Management Protocol or escitalopram 10 mg twice daily. The Ayurveda arm showed significantly better outcomes on depression, anxiety, sleep quality and quality of life, with quality of life improving only in the Ayurveda group and mild side effects occurring in five control patients versus none in the Ayurveda group. It belongs in the library because it is a controlled comparison of a whole system traditional medicine protocol against standard antidepressant treatment, which is unusual and directly relevant to integrative practice.

Full APA reference

Punia, A., Chate, S., Tubaki, B. R., & Himaja, N. (2024). Efficacy of whole system ayurveda management protocol in major depressive disorder: A randomized controlled clinical trial. Journal of Ayurveda and Integrative Medicine, 15(2), Article 100896. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaim.2024.100896

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-333
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Punia, A., Chate, S., Tubaki, B. R., & Himaja, N.
Year
2024
Title
Efficacy of whole system ayurveda management protocol in major depressive disorder: A randomized controlled clinical trial
Description
Fifty patients aged 20 to 70 with DSM-V diagnosed major depressive disorder were randomised to a 60 day Whole System Ayurveda Management Protocol or escitalopram 10 mg twice daily. The Ayurveda arm showed significantly better outcomes on depression, anxiety, sleep quality and quality of life, with quality of life improving only in the Ayurveda group and mild side effects occurring in five control patients versus none in the Ayurveda group. It belongs in the library because it is a controlled comparison of a whole system traditional medicine protocol against standard antidepressant treatment, which is unusual and directly relevant to integrative practice.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Ayurveda and Integrative Medicine, 15(2), Article 100896
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
India
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC11016906/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaim.2024.100896
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Punia, A., Chate, S., Tubaki, B. R., & Himaja, N. (2024). Efficacy of whole system ayurveda management protocol in major depressive disorder: A randomized controlled clinical trial. Journal of Ayurveda and Integrative Medicine, 15(2), Article 100896. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jaim.2024.100896
REF-334 Paper, guideline or statement

Herbal and Ayurvedic therapies for mental health in Nepal: A scoping review with contextual insights from South and Southeast Asia

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The review maps literature on plant based and Ayurvedic interventions for mental health in Nepal and the wider South and Southeast Asian context, finding a modest number of mostly small clinical trials, animal experiments and ethnobotanical reports rather than high quality randomised trials. Evidence was strongest for Withania somnifera (ashwagandha) for anxiety, stress and sleep disturbance, while Rauvolfia serpentina, Nardostachys jatamansi, Bacopa monnieri, Tinospora cordifolia and polyherbal formulations such as Saraswatarishta and Brahmi Vati rested mainly on preclinical or small human studies. It belongs in the library because it maps the herbal and Ayurvedic evidence base for mental health in a low resource setting and is candid that most of it is preclinical or small scale.

Full APA reference

Luitel, P., K.C., B., Sapkota, R., & Thapaliya, I. (2026). Herbal and Ayurvedic therapies for mental health in Nepal: A scoping review with contextual insights from South and Southeast Asia. Europasian Journal of Medical Sciences, 8(12). https://doi.org/10.46405/ejms.v8i12.600

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-334
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Luitel, P., K.C., B., Sapkota, R., & Thapaliya, I.
Year
2026
Title
Herbal and Ayurvedic therapies for mental health in Nepal: A scoping review with contextual insights from South and Southeast Asia
Description
The review maps literature on plant based and Ayurvedic interventions for mental health in Nepal and the wider South and Southeast Asian context, finding a modest number of mostly small clinical trials, animal experiments and ethnobotanical reports rather than high quality randomised trials. Evidence was strongest for Withania somnifera (ashwagandha) for anxiety, stress and sleep disturbance, while Rauvolfia serpentina, Nardostachys jatamansi, Bacopa monnieri, Tinospora cordifolia and polyherbal formulations such as Saraswatarishta and Brahmi Vati rested mainly on preclinical or small human studies. It belongs in the library because it maps the herbal and Ayurvedic evidence base for mental health in a low resource setting and is candid that most of it is preclinical or small scale.
Publication or publisher
Europasian Journal of Medical Sciences, 8(12)
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Nepal
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.46405/ejms.v8i12.600
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.46405/ejms.v8i12.600
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Luitel, P., K.C., B., Sapkota, R., & Thapaliya, I. (2026). Herbal and Ayurvedic therapies for mental health in Nepal: A scoping review with contextual insights from South and Southeast Asia. Europasian Journal of Medical Sciences, 8(12). https://doi.org/10.46405/ejms.v8i12.600
REF-335 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) on stress and anxiety: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Explore review searched MEDLINE, EMBASE, PubMed, PsycINFO and the Cochrane Library for randomised trials published between January 2000 and January 2022, and pooled nine trials with 558 participants, finding significant effects of ashwagandha versus placebo on the Perceived Stress Scale, the Hamilton Anxiety Scale and serum cortisol. Four studies reported mild to moderate adverse events, and the authors concluded that adverse effects appear limited but long term safety is not established. The ScienceFrontier version states essentially the same search strategy and conclusion. It belongs in the library because it is the properly indexed meta-analysis on ashwagandha for stress and anxiety, and it quantifies both the effect and the limits of the safety evidence.

Full APA reference

Arumugam, V., Vijayakumar, V., Balakrishnan, A., Bhandari, R. B., Boopalan, D., Ponnurangam, R., Thirupathy, V. S., & Kuppusamy, M. (2024). Effects of ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) on stress and anxiety: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Explore, 20(6), Article 103062. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.explore.2024.103062

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-335
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Arumugam, V., Vijayakumar, V., Balakrishnan, A., Bhandari, R. B., Boopalan, D., Ponnurangam, R., Thirupathy, V. S., & Kuppusamy, M.
Year
2024
Title
Effects of ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) on stress and anxiety: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
The Explore review searched MEDLINE, EMBASE, PubMed, PsycINFO and the Cochrane Library for randomised trials published between January 2000 and January 2022, and pooled nine trials with 558 participants, finding significant effects of ashwagandha versus placebo on the Perceived Stress Scale, the Hamilton Anxiety Scale and serum cortisol. Four studies reported mild to moderate adverse events, and the authors concluded that adverse effects appear limited but long term safety is not established. The ScienceFrontier version states essentially the same search strategy and conclusion. It belongs in the library because it is the properly indexed meta-analysis on ashwagandha for stress and anxiety, and it quantifies both the effect and the limits of the safety evidence.
Publication or publisher
Explore, 20(6), Article 103062
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Integrative psychology and integrative medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39348746/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.explore.2024.103062
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Arumugam, V., Vijayakumar, V., Balakrishnan, A., Bhandari, R. B., Boopalan, D., Ponnurangam, R., Thirupathy, V. S., & Kuppusamy, M. (2024). Effects of ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) on stress and anxiety: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Explore, 20(6), Article 103062. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.explore.2024.103062
REF-336 Paper, guideline or statement

Community-based healing in Latin America

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The essay presents PRIDE, a community based and culturally relevant model that trains community health workers in cognitive behavioural techniques to widen mental health support for underserved young people in Latin America. Reported results include cognitive behavioural therapy response rates of 38 to 82 percent, half of Chelsea participants no longer meeting PTSD criteria after 12 sessions, and Roca participants who used at least one CBT skill being 66 percent less likely to drop out and 65 percent more likely to gain employment. It belongs in the library because it describes community based healing models in Latin America and shows how mental health care is organised where formal services are thin.

Full APA reference

Marques, L., & Araújo, A. B. (2025, May 22). Community-based healing in Latin America. ReVista: Harvard Review of Latin America. https://revista.drclas.harvard.edu/community-based-healing-in-latin-america/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-336
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marques, L., & Araújo, A. B.
Year
2025
Title
Community-based healing in Latin America
Description
The essay presents PRIDE, a community based and culturally relevant model that trains community health workers in cognitive behavioural techniques to widen mental health support for underserved young people in Latin America. Reported results include cognitive behavioural therapy response rates of 38 to 82 percent, half of Chelsea participants no longer meeting PTSD criteria after 12 sessions, and Roca participants who used at least one CBT skill being 66 percent less likely to drop out and 65 percent more likely to gain employment. It belongs in the library because it describes community based healing models in Latin America and shows how mental health care is organised where formal services are thin.
Publication or publisher
ReVista: Harvard Review of Latin America
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Other
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Latin America and the Caribbean
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://revista.drclas.harvard.edu/community-based-healing-in-latin-america/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Marques, L., & Araújo, A. B. (2025, May 22). Community-based healing in Latin America. ReVista: Harvard Review of Latin America. https://revista.drclas.harvard.edu/community-based-healing-in-latin-america/
REF-337 Paper, guideline or statement

Resilient health systems for better mental health outcomes in Latin America and the Caribbean

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The brief argues that mental and substance use disorders and suicide impose a large health and economic burden across Latin America and the Caribbean, while mental health spending, treatment access, preventive services and workforce capacity remain inadequate and were further strained by COVID-19, climate events, displacement and violence. It recommends resilient, integrated systems built on community and primary health care, backed by increased and better targeted financing, multisectoral governance, policy reform, digital innovation, workforce development and stronger research capacity. It belongs in the library because it links health system resilience to mental health outcomes at a regional level, connecting service design to population wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Jung, A.-S., Veillard, J., & Johnston, T. A. (2024). Resilient health systems for better mental health outcomes in Latin America and the Caribbean [Policy brief]. World Bank. https://documents.worldbank.org/en/publication/documents-reports/documentdetail/099111424112042316

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-337
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jung, A.-S., Veillard, J., & Johnston, T. A.
Year
2024
Title
Resilient health systems for better mental health outcomes in Latin America and the Caribbean
Description
The brief argues that mental and substance use disorders and suicide impose a large health and economic burden across Latin America and the Caribbean, while mental health spending, treatment access, preventive services and workforce capacity remain inadequate and were further strained by COVID-19, climate events, displacement and violence. It recommends resilient, integrated systems built on community and primary health care, backed by increased and better targeted financing, multisectoral governance, policy reform, digital innovation, workforce development and stronger research capacity. It belongs in the library because it links health system resilience to mental health outcomes at a regional level, connecting service design to population wellbeing.
Publication or publisher
World Bank
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Latin America and the Caribbean
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://documents.worldbank.org/en/publication/documents-reports/documentdetail/099111424112042316
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Jung, A.-S., Veillard, J., & Johnston, T. A. (2024). Resilient health systems for better mental health outcomes in Latin America and the Caribbean [Policy brief]. World Bank. https://documents.worldbank.org/en/publication/documents-reports/documentdetail/099111424112042316
REF-338 Paper, guideline or statement

Community health worker-delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations in the U.S.: A systematic literature review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The review covered 27 articles representing 25 trials of community health worker delivered mental health interventions for Latine people in the United States, most delivered in Spanish to immigrant populations and most commonly targeting depression, stress, and parenting or the parent-child relationship. Most studies reported significant improvements in mental health symptoms, but risk of bias was high across the evidence base, so more rigorous evaluation is needed. It belongs in the library because it synthesises community health worker delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations, which is a task sharing and cultural fit question at once.

Full APA reference

Gustafson, E. L., Moses, J. O., Pimentel, E., Lakind, D., Uribe, V., Thorpe, D., Bobadilla, G., Caglianone, L., Dickinson, G. J., Smith, D., Westrick, J., & Sánchez-Johnsen, L. (2025). Community health worker-delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations in the U.S.: A systematic literature review. Administration and Policy in Mental Health and Mental Health Services Research, 52, 1174-1198. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10488-025-01459-6

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-338
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gustafson, E. L., Moses, J. O., Pimentel, E., Lakind, D., Uribe, V., Thorpe, D., Bobadilla, G., Caglianone, L., Dickinson, G. J., Smith, D., Westrick, J., & Sánchez-Johnsen, L.
Year
2025
Title
Community health worker-delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations in the U.S.: A systematic literature review
Description
The review covered 27 articles representing 25 trials of community health worker delivered mental health interventions for Latine people in the United States, most delivered in Spanish to immigrant populations and most commonly targeting depression, stress, and parenting or the parent-child relationship. Most studies reported significant improvements in mental health symptoms, but risk of bias was high across the evidence base, so more rigorous evaluation is needed. It belongs in the library because it synthesises community health worker delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations, which is a task sharing and cultural fit question at once.
Publication or publisher
Administration and Policy in Mental Health and Mental Health Services Research, 52, 1174-1198
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s10488-025-01459-6
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10488-025-01459-6
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Gustafson, E. L., Moses, J. O., Pimentel, E., Lakind, D., Uribe, V., Thorpe, D., Bobadilla, G., Caglianone, L., Dickinson, G. J., Smith, D., Westrick, J., & Sánchez-Johnsen, L. (2025). Community health worker-delivered mental health interventions for Latine populations in the U.S.: A systematic literature review. Administration and Policy in Mental Health and Mental Health Services Research, 52, 1174-1198. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10488-025-01459-6
REF-339 Paper, guideline or statement

Task-sharing approaches to improve mental health care in rural and other low-resource settings: A systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Searching PubMed and grey literature for English language articles published before 31 August 2013 on task sharing of mental health care in rural areas of high income countries, the review found approaches centred mainly on community health workers and primary care providers, with technology used to extend specialist support into primary care and community settings. Provider education, supervision and partnerships with local communities supported task sharing, challenges such as confidentiality were often unaddressed, and the authors concluded task sharing may improve reach and effectiveness while important research questions remain. It belongs in the library because it is the reference review on task sharing in rural and low resource settings, which is the central workforce question for reaching underserved populations.

Full APA reference

Hoeft, T. J., Fortney, J. C., Patel, V., & Unützer, J. (2018). Task-sharing approaches to improve mental health care in rural and other low-resource settings: A systematic review. The Journal of Rural Health, 34(1), 48-62. https://doi.org/10.1111/jrh.12229

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-339
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hoeft, T. J., Fortney, J. C., Patel, V., & Unützer, J.
Year
2018
Title
Task-sharing approaches to improve mental health care in rural and other low-resource settings: A systematic review
Description
Searching PubMed and grey literature for English language articles published before 31 August 2013 on task sharing of mental health care in rural areas of high income countries, the review found approaches centred mainly on community health workers and primary care providers, with technology used to extend specialist support into primary care and community settings. Provider education, supervision and partnerships with local communities supported task sharing, challenges such as confidentiality were often unaddressed, and the authors concluded task sharing may improve reach and effectiveness while important research questions remain. It belongs in the library because it is the reference review on task sharing in rural and low resource settings, which is the central workforce question for reaching underserved populations.
Publication or publisher
The Journal of Rural Health, 34(1), 48-62
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/jrh.12229
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/jrh.12229
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Hoeft, T. J., Fortney, J. C., Patel, V., & Unützer, J. (2018). Task-sharing approaches to improve mental health care in rural and other low-resource settings: A systematic review. The Journal of Rural Health, 34(1), 48-62. https://doi.org/10.1111/jrh.12229
REF-340 Paper, guideline or statement

The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions on type 2 diabetes and gestational diabetes incidence and cardiometabolic outcomes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of evidence from low- and middle-income countries

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Pooling trials from low and middle income countries, comprehensive lifestyle programmes cut new type 2 diabetes cases by about a quarter and produced small but significant improvements in HbA1c, fasting glucose, weight, blood pressure and lipids. The authors conclude these interventions are effective in at-risk populations in these settings, while cautioning that heterogeneity between studies was high (The Lancet eClinicalMedicine00380-7/fulltext)). It belongs in the library because it is the low and middle income country evidence on lifestyle intervention for diabetes and cardiometabolic risk, which is where most of the global disease burden sits.

Full APA reference

Sagastume, D., Siero, I., Mertens, E., Cottam, J., Colizzi, C., & Peñalvo, J. L. (2022). The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions on type 2 diabetes and gestational diabetes incidence and cardiometabolic outcomes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of evidence from low- and middle-income countries. eClinicalMedicine, 53, 101650. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eclinm.2022.101650

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-340
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sagastume, D., Siero, I., Mertens, E., Cottam, J., Colizzi, C., & Peñalvo, J. L.
Year
2022
Title
The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions on type 2 diabetes and gestational diabetes incidence and cardiometabolic outcomes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of evidence from low- and middle-income countries
Description
Pooling trials from low and middle income countries, comprehensive lifestyle programmes cut new type 2 diabetes cases by about a quarter and produced small but significant improvements in HbA1c, fasting glucose, weight, blood pressure and lipids. The authors conclude these interventions are effective in at-risk populations in these settings, while cautioning that heterogeneity between studies was high (The Lancet eClinicalMedicine00380-7/fulltext)). It belongs in the library because it is the low and middle income country evidence on lifestyle intervention for diabetes and cardiometabolic risk, which is where most of the global disease burden sits.
Publication or publisher
eClinicalMedicine, 53, 101650
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eclinm.2022.101650
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eclinm.2022.101650
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Sagastume, D., Siero, I., Mertens, E., Cottam, J., Colizzi, C., & Peñalvo, J. L. (2022). The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions on type 2 diabetes and gestational diabetes incidence and cardiometabolic outcomes: A systematic review and meta-analysis of evidence from low- and middle-income countries. eClinicalMedicine, 53, 101650. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eclinm.2022.101650
REF-341 Paper, guideline or statement

Clinical impact of lifestyle interventions for the prevention of diabetes: an overview of systematic reviews

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This overview of 19 reviews found that long duration lifestyle programmes can delay or prevent progression to diabetes under trial conditions, with risk reductions of roughly 50 to 60 per cent in trial settings and weight reductions of about 1 to 3 kg. Results from shorter or routine care programmes were far more variable, and there was little evidence of benefit for vascular events or mortality. It belongs in the library because it separates what lifestyle programmes achieve under trial conditions from what they achieve in routine care, which is the gap that matters for policy.

Full APA reference

Howells, L., Musaddaq, B., McKay, A. J., & Majeed, A. (2016). Clinical impact of lifestyle interventions for the prevention of diabetes: An overview of systematic reviews. BMJ Open, 6(12), e013806. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2016-013806

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-341
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Howells, L., Musaddaq, B., McKay, A. J., & Majeed, A.
Year
2016
Title
Clinical impact of lifestyle interventions for the prevention of diabetes: an overview of systematic reviews
Description
This overview of 19 reviews found that long duration lifestyle programmes can delay or prevent progression to diabetes under trial conditions, with risk reductions of roughly 50 to 60 per cent in trial settings and weight reductions of about 1 to 3 kg. Results from shorter or routine care programmes were far more variable, and there was little evidence of benefit for vascular events or mortality. It belongs in the library because it separates what lifestyle programmes achieve under trial conditions from what they achieve in routine care, which is the gap that matters for policy.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open, 6(12), e013806
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2016-013806
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2016-013806
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Howells, L., Musaddaq, B., McKay, A. J., & Majeed, A. (2016). Clinical impact of lifestyle interventions for the prevention of diabetes: An overview of systematic reviews. BMJ Open, 6(12), e013806. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2016-013806
REF-342 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle Interventions to Improve Glycemic Control in Adults with Type 2 Diabetes Living in Low-and-Middle Income Countries: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials (RCTs)

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Across 30 trials in low and middle income countries, lifestyle interventions for people already living with type 2 diabetes significantly improved HbA1c, fasting blood glucose and BMI, with the largest effects for self-management education and hospital or clinic delivered programmes. The authors caution that most included studies were judged low quality and intervention designs varied widely, so further well designed trials are needed. It belongs in the library because it pools glycaemic control trials from low and middle income countries and shows the intervention components that carried the effect.

Full APA reference

O'Donoghue, G., O'Sullivan, C., Corridan, I., Daly, J., Finn, R., Melvin, K., & Peiris, C. (2021). Lifestyle interventions to improve glycemic control in adults with type 2 diabetes living in low-and-middle income countries: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials (RCTs). International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 18(12), 6273. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph18126273

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-342
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
O'Donoghue, G., O'Sullivan, C., Corridan, I., Daly, J., Finn, R., Melvin, K., & Peiris, C.
Year
2021
Title
Lifestyle Interventions to Improve Glycemic Control in Adults with Type 2 Diabetes Living in Low-and-Middle Income Countries: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials (RCTs)
Description
Across 30 trials in low and middle income countries, lifestyle interventions for people already living with type 2 diabetes significantly improved HbA1c, fasting blood glucose and BMI, with the largest effects for self-management education and hospital or clinic delivered programmes. The authors caution that most included studies were judged low quality and intervention designs varied widely, so further well designed trials are needed. It belongs in the library because it pools glycaemic control trials from low and middle income countries and shows the intervention components that carried the effect.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 18(12), 6273
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph18126273
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph18126273
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
O'Donoghue, G., O'Sullivan, C., Corridan, I., Daly, J., Finn, R., Melvin, K., & Peiris, C. (2021). Lifestyle interventions to improve glycemic control in adults with type 2 diabetes living in low-and-middle income countries: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials (RCTs). International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 18(12), 6273. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph18126273
REF-343 Paper, guideline or statement

The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions for diabetes remission on patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This review of 12 studies in 3,997 people with type 2 diabetes found that lifestyle interventions were associated with significant effects on diabetes remission, weight reduction and quality of life. The authors conclude that diet and physical activity are the components with the clearest effect on blood glucose and weight control and should be the focus of such programmes. It belongs in the library because it is a focused synthesis of lifestyle intervention for diabetes remission, sitting alongside the individual remission trials in this collection.

Full APA reference

Zhang, Y., Yang, Y., Huang, Q., Zhang, Q., Li, M., & Wu, Y. (2023). The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions for diabetes remission on patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Worldviews on Evidence-Based Nursing, 20(1), 64-78. https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12608

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-343
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, Y., Yang, Y., Huang, Q., Zhang, Q., Li, M., & Wu, Y.
Year
2023
Title
The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions for diabetes remission on patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
This review of 12 studies in 3,997 people with type 2 diabetes found that lifestyle interventions were associated with significant effects on diabetes remission, weight reduction and quality of life. The authors conclude that diet and physical activity are the components with the clearest effect on blood glucose and weight control and should be the focus of such programmes. It belongs in the library because it is a focused synthesis of lifestyle intervention for diabetes remission, sitting alongside the individual remission trials in this collection.
Publication or publisher
Worldviews on Evidence-Based Nursing, 20(1), 64-78
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12608
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12608
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Zhang, Y., Yang, Y., Huang, Q., Zhang, Q., Li, M., & Wu, Y. (2023). The effectiveness of lifestyle interventions for diabetes remission on patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Worldviews on Evidence-Based Nursing, 20(1), 64-78. https://doi.org/10.1111/wvn.12608
REF-344 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle interventions for the treatment of women with gestational diabetes

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Lifestyle intervention was the primary treatment strategy for gestational diabetes, and women receiving it were less likely to develop postnatal depression and more likely to meet postpartum weight goals. Babies were less likely to be born large for gestational age and had lower fat mass, although long term maternal and child outcomes were poorly reported. It belongs in the library because it is the Cochrane assessment of lifestyle intervention in gestational diabetes, a life stage where lifestyle change is the first line treatment.

Full APA reference

Brown, J., Alwan, N. A., West, J., Brown, S., McKinlay, C. J. D., Farrar, D., & Crowther, C. A. (2017). Lifestyle interventions for the treatment of women with gestational diabetes. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 5, CD011970. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD011970.pub2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-344
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Brown, J., Alwan, N. A., West, J., Brown, S., McKinlay, C. J. D., Farrar, D., & Crowther, C. A.
Year
2017
Title
Lifestyle interventions for the treatment of women with gestational diabetes
Description
Lifestyle intervention was the primary treatment strategy for gestational diabetes, and women receiving it were less likely to develop postnatal depression and more likely to meet postpartum weight goals. Babies were less likely to be born large for gestational age and had lower fat mass, although long term maternal and child outcomes were poorly reported. It belongs in the library because it is the Cochrane assessment of lifestyle intervention in gestational diabetes, a life stage where lifestyle change is the first line treatment.
Publication or publisher
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 5, CD011970
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD011970.pub2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD011970.pub2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Brown, J., Alwan, N. A., West, J., Brown, S., McKinlay, C. J. D., Farrar, D., & Crowther, C. A. (2017). Lifestyle interventions for the treatment of women with gestational diabetes. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 5, CD011970. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD011970.pub2
REF-345 Paper, guideline or statement

Impact of lifestyle-based interventions on absolute cardiovascular disease risk: a systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Pooling 29 studies in adults free of cardiovascular disease, lifestyle interventions produced a moderate reduction in absolute cardiovascular risk score compared with control, with the same effect size in randomised and quasi-experimental designs. Diet and physical activity components had significant effects, and the authors note that several validated risk tools can be used to monitor and communicate changes in absolute risk. It belongs in the library because it reports the effect of lifestyle intervention on absolute cardiovascular risk rather than on single risk factors, which is the clinically meaningful endpoint.

Full APA reference

Kariuki, J. K., Imes, C. C., Engberg, S. J., Scott, P. W., Klem, M. L., & Cortes, Y. I. (2024). Impact of lifestyle-based interventions on absolute cardiovascular disease risk: A systematic review and meta-analysis. JBI Evidence Synthesis, 22(1), 4-65. https://doi.org/10.11124/JBIES-22-00356

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-345
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kariuki, J. K., Imes, C. C., Engberg, S. J., Scott, P. W., Klem, M. L., & Cortes, Y. I.
Year
2024
Title
Impact of lifestyle-based interventions on absolute cardiovascular disease risk: a systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Pooling 29 studies in adults free of cardiovascular disease, lifestyle interventions produced a moderate reduction in absolute cardiovascular risk score compared with control, with the same effect size in randomised and quasi-experimental designs. Diet and physical activity components had significant effects, and the authors note that several validated risk tools can be used to monitor and communicate changes in absolute risk. It belongs in the library because it reports the effect of lifestyle intervention on absolute cardiovascular risk rather than on single risk factors, which is the clinically meaningful endpoint.
Publication or publisher
JBI Evidence Synthesis, 22(1), 4-65
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.11124/JBIES-22-00356
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.11124/JBIES-22-00356
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Kariuki, J. K., Imes, C. C., Engberg, S. J., Scott, P. W., Klem, M. L., & Cortes, Y. I. (2024). Impact of lifestyle-based interventions on absolute cardiovascular disease risk: A systematic review and meta-analysis. JBI Evidence Synthesis, 22(1), 4-65. https://doi.org/10.11124/JBIES-22-00356
REF-346 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of lifestyle interventions on cardiovascular risk factors among adults without impaired glucose tolerance or diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Across 79 studies in adults with normal glucose tolerance, lifestyle interventions produced small but statistically significant improvements in blood pressure and all four lipid measures compared with usual care. Effects were larger in participants with higher baseline glucose and for combined diet plus physical activity programmes, while physical activity alone did not reach significance. It belongs in the library because it examines how lifestyle programmes perform when translated into real world community and primary care settings.

Full APA reference

Zhang, X., Devlin, H. M., Smith, B., Imperatore, G., Thomas, W., Lobelo, F., Ali, M. K., Norris, K., Gruss, S., Bardenheier, B., Cho, P., Garcia de Quevedo, I., Mudaliar, U., Jones, C. D., Durthaler, J. M., Saaddine, J., Geiss, L. S., & Gregg, E. W. (2017). Effect of lifestyle interventions on cardiovascular risk factors among adults without impaired glucose tolerance or diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis. PLOS ONE, 12(5), e0176436. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0176436

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-346
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, X., Devlin, H. M., Smith, B., Imperatore, G., Thomas, W., Lobelo, F., Ali, M. K., Norris, K., Gruss, S., Bardenheier, B., Cho, P., Garcia de Quevedo, I., Mudaliar, U., Jones, C. D., Durthaler, J. M., Saaddine, J., Geiss, L. S., & Gregg, E. W.
Year
2017
Title
Effect of lifestyle interventions on cardiovascular risk factors among adults without impaired glucose tolerance or diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Across 79 studies in adults with normal glucose tolerance, lifestyle interventions produced small but statistically significant improvements in blood pressure and all four lipid measures compared with usual care. Effects were larger in participants with higher baseline glucose and for combined diet plus physical activity programmes, while physical activity alone did not reach significance. It belongs in the library because it examines how lifestyle programmes perform when translated into real world community and primary care settings.
Publication or publisher
PLOS ONE, 12(5), e0176436
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0176436
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0176436
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Zhang, X., Devlin, H. M., Smith, B., Imperatore, G., Thomas, W., Lobelo, F., Ali, M. K., Norris, K., Gruss, S., Bardenheier, B., Cho, P., Garcia de Quevedo, I., Mudaliar, U., Jones, C. D., Durthaler, J. M., Saaddine, J., Geiss, L. S., & Gregg, E. W. (2017). Effect of lifestyle interventions on cardiovascular risk factors among adults without impaired glucose tolerance or diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis. PLOS ONE, 12(5), e0176436. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0176436
REF-347 Paper, guideline or statement

Long-term Effect of Lifestyle Interventions on the Cardiovascular and All-Cause Mortality of Subjects With Prediabetes and Type 2 Diabetes: A Systematic Review and Meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Pooling 11 long term randomised trials in people with prediabetes or type 2 diabetes, intensive lifestyle intervention was no better than usual care at reducing cardiovascular or all-cause mortality. Subgroup, sensitivity and meta-regression analyses found no influence of intervention type, follow-up length, age, glycaemic status, location, risk of bias or weight change, with moderate certainty of evidence. It belongs in the library because it is the long term mortality synthesis for lifestyle intervention in prediabetes and type 2 diabetes, which is the hardest outcome in this field.

Full APA reference

Zucatti, K. P., Teixeira, P. P., Wayerbacher, L. F., Piccoli, G. F., Correia, P. E., Fonseca, N. K. O., Moresco, K. S., Guerra, B. A., Maduré, M. G., Farenzena, L. P., Frankenberg, A. D., Brietzke, E., Halpern, B., Franco, O., Colpani, V., & Gerchman, F. (2022). Long-term effect of lifestyle interventions on the cardiovascular and all-cause mortality of subjects with prediabetes and type 2 diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2787-2795. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc22-0642

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-347
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zucatti, K. P., Teixeira, P. P., Wayerbacher, L. F., Piccoli, G. F., Correia, P. E., Fonseca, N. K. O., Moresco, K. S., Guerra, B. A., Maduré, M. G., Farenzena, L. P., Frankenberg, A. D., Brietzke, E., Halpern, B., Franco, O., Colpani, V., & Gerchman, F.
Year
2022
Title
Long-term Effect of Lifestyle Interventions on the Cardiovascular and All-Cause Mortality of Subjects With Prediabetes and Type 2 Diabetes: A Systematic Review and Meta-analysis
Description
Pooling 11 long term randomised trials in people with prediabetes or type 2 diabetes, intensive lifestyle intervention was no better than usual care at reducing cardiovascular or all-cause mortality. Subgroup, sensitivity and meta-regression analyses found no influence of intervention type, follow-up length, age, glycaemic status, location, risk of bias or weight change, with moderate certainty of evidence. It belongs in the library because it is the long term mortality synthesis for lifestyle intervention in prediabetes and type 2 diabetes, which is the hardest outcome in this field.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2787-2795
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.2337/dc22-0642
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/dc22-0642
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Zucatti, K. P., Teixeira, P. P., Wayerbacher, L. F., Piccoli, G. F., Correia, P. E., Fonseca, N. K. O., Moresco, K. S., Guerra, B. A., Maduré, M. G., Farenzena, L. P., Frankenberg, A. D., Brietzke, E., Halpern, B., Franco, O., Colpani, V., & Gerchman, F. (2022). Long-term effect of lifestyle interventions on the cardiovascular and all-cause mortality of subjects with prediabetes and type 2 diabetes: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Diabetes Care, 45(11), 2787-2795. https://doi.org/10.2337/dc22-0642
REF-348 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle interventions in patients with coronary heart disease: a systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Across nine pooled randomised trials in patients with established coronary heart disease, patient-tailored multifactorial lifestyle interventions reduced fatal cardiovascular events by 18 per cent compared with usual care. Reductions in non-fatal events, overall mortality and hospital readmissions were not statistically significant, so the authors position these programmes as having added value specifically in secondary prevention. It belongs in the library because it covers lifestyle intervention in established coronary heart disease, extending the evidence from prevention to secondary care.

Full APA reference

de Waure, C., Lauret, G.-J., Ricciardi, W., Ferket, B., Teijink, J., Spronk, S., & Hunink, M. G. M. (2013). Lifestyle interventions in patients with coronary heart disease: A systematic review. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 45(2), 207-216. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.amepre.2013.03.020

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-348
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
de Waure, C., Lauret, G.-J., Ricciardi, W., Ferket, B., Teijink, J., Spronk, S., & Hunink, M. G. M.
Year
2013
Title
Lifestyle interventions in patients with coronary heart disease: a systematic review
Description
Across nine pooled randomised trials in patients with established coronary heart disease, patient-tailored multifactorial lifestyle interventions reduced fatal cardiovascular events by 18 per cent compared with usual care. Reductions in non-fatal events, overall mortality and hospital readmissions were not statistically significant, so the authors position these programmes as having added value specifically in secondary prevention. It belongs in the library because it covers lifestyle intervention in established coronary heart disease, extending the evidence from prevention to secondary care.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 45(2), 207-216
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.amepre.2013.03.020
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.amepre.2013.03.020
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
de Waure, C., Lauret, G.-J., Ricciardi, W., Ferket, B., Teijink, J., Spronk, S., & Hunink, M. G. M. (2013). Lifestyle interventions in patients with coronary heart disease: A systematic review. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 45(2), 207-216. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.amepre.2013.03.020
REF-349 Paper, guideline or statement

A systematic review and meta-analysis testing the effect of lifestyle modification and medication optimization programs on cholesterol and blood pressure in patients with cardiovascular disease

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Pooling 16 trials in 4,450 patients with cardiovascular disease, structured programmes of lifestyle modification, with or without medication optimization, produced significant reductions in systolic and diastolic blood pressure, total cholesterol and LDL cholesterol compared with usual care. Effects were larger when lifestyle change was combined with medication optimization, but the authors note the evidence quality was low and trial sequential analysis did not reach conclusive boundaries. It belongs in the library because it tests combined lifestyle modification and medication optimisation programmes, which is closer to how care is actually delivered.

Full APA reference

Abate, S. M., Thanigaimani, S., Sinha, M., Sun, D., & Golledge, J. (2025). A systematic review and meta-analysis testing the effect of lifestyle modification and medication optimization programs on cholesterol and blood pressure in patients with cardiovascular disease. Systematic Reviews, 14, 153. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-025-02857-5

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-349
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Abate, S. M., Thanigaimani, S., Sinha, M., Sun, D., & Golledge, J.
Year
2025
Title
A systematic review and meta-analysis testing the effect of lifestyle modification and medication optimization programs on cholesterol and blood pressure in patients with cardiovascular disease
Description
Pooling 16 trials in 4,450 patients with cardiovascular disease, structured programmes of lifestyle modification, with or without medication optimization, produced significant reductions in systolic and diastolic blood pressure, total cholesterol and LDL cholesterol compared with usual care. Effects were larger when lifestyle change was combined with medication optimization, but the authors note the evidence quality was low and trial sequential analysis did not reach conclusive boundaries. It belongs in the library because it tests combined lifestyle modification and medication optimisation programmes, which is closer to how care is actually delivered.
Publication or publisher
Systematic Reviews, 14, 153
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-025-02857-5
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-025-02857-5
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Abate, S. M., Thanigaimani, S., Sinha, M., Sun, D., & Golledge, J. (2025). A systematic review and meta-analysis testing the effect of lifestyle modification and medication optimization programs on cholesterol and blood pressure in patients with cardiovascular disease. Systematic Reviews, 14, 153. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-025-02857-5
REF-350 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle behaviors and risk of cardiovascular disease and prognosis among individuals with cardiovascular disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis of 71 prospective cohort studies

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Across 71 prospective cohorts covering more than six million people, having the healthiest combination of lifestyle behaviours was associated with a 58 per cent lower risk of developing cardiovascular disease and a 55 per cent lower risk of dying from it, with each additional healthy behaviour lowering risk further. Benefits also extended to people who already had cardiovascular disease, in whom healthier behaviour combinations were linked to lower recurrence and lower all-cause mortality. It belongs in the library because it pools prospective cohort evidence on combined lifestyle behaviours, which speaks to the cumulative rather than single behaviour question.

Full APA reference

Wu, J., Feng, Y., Zhao, Y., Guo, Z., Liu, R., Zeng, X., Yang, F., Liu, B., Gu, J., Tarimo, C. S., Shao, W., Guo, X., Li, Q., Zhao, L., Ma, M., Shen, Z., Zhao, Q., & Miao, Y. (2024). Lifestyle behaviors and risk of cardiovascular disease and prognosis among individuals with cardiovascular disease: A systematic review and meta-analysis of 71 prospective cohort studies. International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 21(1), 42. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-024-01586-7

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-350
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wu, J., Feng, Y., Zhao, Y., Guo, Z., Liu, R., Zeng, X., Yang, F., Liu, B., Gu, J., Tarimo, C. S., Shao, W., Guo, X., Li, Q., Zhao, L., Ma, M., Shen, Z., Zhao, Q., & Miao, Y.
Year
2024
Title
Lifestyle behaviors and risk of cardiovascular disease and prognosis among individuals with cardiovascular disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis of 71 prospective cohort studies
Description
Across 71 prospective cohorts covering more than six million people, having the healthiest combination of lifestyle behaviours was associated with a 58 per cent lower risk of developing cardiovascular disease and a 55 per cent lower risk of dying from it, with each additional healthy behaviour lowering risk further. Benefits also extended to people who already had cardiovascular disease, in whom healthier behaviour combinations were linked to lower recurrence and lower all-cause mortality. It belongs in the library because it pools prospective cohort evidence on combined lifestyle behaviours, which speaks to the cumulative rather than single behaviour question.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 21(1), 42
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
China
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-024-01586-7
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-024-01586-7
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026.
Full APA reference
Wu, J., Feng, Y., Zhao, Y., Guo, Z., Liu, R., Zeng, X., Yang, F., Liu, B., Gu, J., Tarimo, C. S., Shao, W., Guo, X., Li, Q., Zhao, L., Ma, M., Shen, Z., Zhao, Q., & Miao, Y. (2024). Lifestyle behaviors and risk of cardiovascular disease and prognosis among individuals with cardiovascular disease: A systematic review and meta-analysis of 71 prospective cohort studies. International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 21(1), 42. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12966-024-01586-7
REF-351 Paper, guideline or statement

Mortality in relation to smoking: 50 years' observations on male British doctors

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

This is the 50-year report of the cohort that first established smoking as a cause of lung cancer and premature death. It quantified the loss of about a decade of life in continuing smokers and the substantial recovery in those who quit. It is the reference case for how a single modifiable behaviour shapes population mortality. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Doll, R., Peto, R., Boreham, J., & Sutherland, I. (2004). Mortality in relation to smoking: 50 years' observations on male British doctors. BMJ, 328(7455), 1519. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.38142.554479.AE

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-351
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Doll, R., Peto, R., Boreham, J., & Sutherland, I
Year
2004
Title
Mortality in relation to smoking: 50 years' observations on male British doctors
Description
This is the 50-year report of the cohort that first established smoking as a cause of lung cancer and premature death. It quantified the loss of about a decade of life in continuing smokers and the substantial recovery in those who quit. It is the reference case for how a single modifiable behaviour shapes population mortality. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 328(7455), 1519
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.38142.554479.AE
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.38142.554479.AE
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Doll, R., Peto, R., Boreham, J., & Sutherland, I. (2004). Mortality in relation to smoking: 50 years' observations on male British doctors. BMJ, 328(7455), 1519. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.38142.554479.AE
REF-352 Paper, guideline or statement

Factors of risk in the development of coronary heart disease: Six year follow-up experience. The Framingham Study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This paper introduced the phrase "factors of risk", the origin of the modern concept of a risk factor. It showed that blood pressure, cholesterol and weight predicted later coronary disease in apparently healthy people. It created the template for preventive cardiovascular epidemiology. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Kannel, W. B., Dawber, T. R., Kagan, A., Revotskie, N., & Stokes, J., 3rd. (1961). Factors of risk in the development of coronary heart disease: Six year follow-up experience. The Framingham Study. Annals of Internal Medicine, 55, 33-50. https://doi.org/10.7326/0003-4819-55-1-33

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-352
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kannel, W. B., Dawber, T. R., Kagan, A., Revotskie, N., & Stokes, J., 3rd
Year
1961
Title
Factors of risk in the development of coronary heart disease: Six year follow-up experience. The Framingham Study
Description
This paper introduced the phrase "factors of risk", the origin of the modern concept of a risk factor. It showed that blood pressure, cholesterol and weight predicted later coronary disease in apparently healthy people. It created the template for preventive cardiovascular epidemiology. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
Annals of Internal Medicine, 55, 33-50
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.7326/0003-4819-55-1-33
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.7326/0003-4819-55-1-33
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Kannel, W. B., Dawber, T. R., Kagan, A., Revotskie, N., & Stokes, J., 3rd. (1961). Factors of risk in the development of coronary heart disease: Six year follow-up experience. The Framingham Study. Annals of Internal Medicine, 55, 33-50. https://doi.org/10.7326/0003-4819-55-1-33
REF-353 Paper, guideline or statement

Weight in infancy and death from ischaemic heart disease

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Cardiometabolic health

This paper linked poor early growth to adult death from ischaemic heart disease and launched the developmental origins of health and disease field. It shifted chronic disease thinking from adult behaviour alone to conditions before birth and in infancy. It is the anchor citation for life course epidemiology. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Barker, D. J., Winter, P. D., Osmond, C., Margetts, B., & Simmonds, S. J. (1989). Weight in infancy and death from ischaemic heart disease. The Lancet, 2(8663), 577-580. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(89)90710-1

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-353
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Barker, D. J., Winter, P. D., Osmond, C., Margetts, B., & Simmonds, S. J
Year
1989
Title
Weight in infancy and death from ischaemic heart disease
Description
This paper linked poor early growth to adult death from ischaemic heart disease and launched the developmental origins of health and disease field. It shifted chronic disease thinking from adult behaviour alone to conditions before birth and in infancy. It is the anchor citation for life course epidemiology. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 2(8663), 577-580
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(89)90710-1
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(89)90710-1
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Barker, D. J., Winter, P. D., Osmond, C., Margetts, B., & Simmonds, S. J. (1989). Weight in infancy and death from ischaemic heart disease. The Lancet, 2(8663), 577-580. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(89)90710-1
REF-354 Paper, guideline or statement

A life course approach to chronic disease epidemiology: Conceptual models, empirical challenges and interdisciplinary perspectives

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This paper set out the accumulation, critical period and chains of risk models that define life course epidemiology. It gave researchers a shared vocabulary for how advantage and disadvantage build up over a lifetime. It is the standard conceptual citation in the field. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Ben-Shlomo, Y., & Kuh, D. (2002). A life course approach to chronic disease epidemiology: Conceptual models, empirical challenges and interdisciplinary perspectives. International Journal of Epidemiology, 31(2), 285-293. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/11980781/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-354
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ben-Shlomo, Y., & Kuh, D
Year
2002
Title
A life course approach to chronic disease epidemiology: Conceptual models, empirical challenges and interdisciplinary perspectives
Description
This paper set out the accumulation, critical period and chains of risk models that define life course epidemiology. It gave researchers a shared vocabulary for how advantage and disadvantage build up over a lifetime. It is the standard conceptual citation in the field. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 31(2), 285-293
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/11980781/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ben-Shlomo, Y., & Kuh, D. (2002). A life course approach to chronic disease epidemiology: Conceptual models, empirical challenges and interdisciplinary perspectives. International Journal of Epidemiology, 31(2), 285-293. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/11980781/
REF-355 Paper, guideline or statement

Global burden of 87 risk factors in 204 countries and territories, 1990-2019: A systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

This is the comprehensive accounting of how much death and disability is attributable to behavioural, metabolic and environmental risks worldwide. It ranks diet, blood pressure, tobacco, air pollution and other exposures on a comparable scale. It is the standard evidence base for prevention priority setting. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

GBD 2019 Risk Factors Collaborators. (2020). Global burden of 87 risk factors in 204 countries and territories, 1990-2019: A systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019. The Lancet, 396(10258), 1223-1249. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(20)30752-2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-355
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
GBD 2019 Risk Factors Collaborators
Year
2020
Title
Global burden of 87 risk factors in 204 countries and territories, 1990-2019: A systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019
Description
This is the comprehensive accounting of how much death and disability is attributable to behavioural, metabolic and environmental risks worldwide. It ranks diet, blood pressure, tobacco, air pollution and other exposures on a comparable scale. It is the standard evidence base for prevention priority setting. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 396(10258), 1223-1249
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(20)30752-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(20)30752-2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
GBD 2019 Risk Factors Collaborators. (2020). Global burden of 87 risk factors in 204 countries and territories, 1990-2019: A systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019. The Lancet, 396(10258), 1223-1249. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(20)30752-2
REF-356 Paper, guideline or statement

Diet, lifestyle, and the risk of type 2 diabetes mellitus in women

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Following 84,941 nurses, this paper showed that most type 2 diabetes is attributable to a small set of modifiable behaviours. It gave the field its headline estimate that the great majority of cases are potentially preventable. It is the observational counterpart to the diabetes prevention trials. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Hu, F. B., Manson, J. E., Stampfer, M. J., Colditz, G., Liu, S., Solomon, C. G., & Willett, W. C. (2001). Diet, lifestyle, and the risk of type 2 diabetes mellitus in women. New England Journal of Medicine, 345(11), 790-797. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa010492

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-356
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hu, F. B., Manson, J. E., Stampfer, M. J., Colditz, G., Liu, S., Solomon, C. G., & Willett, W. C
Year
2001
Title
Diet, lifestyle, and the risk of type 2 diabetes mellitus in women
Description
Following 84,941 nurses, this paper showed that most type 2 diabetes is attributable to a small set of modifiable behaviours. It gave the field its headline estimate that the great majority of cases are potentially preventable. It is the observational counterpart to the diabetes prevention trials. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 345(11), 790-797
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa010492
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa010492
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Hu, F. B., Manson, J. E., Stampfer, M. J., Colditz, G., Liu, S., Solomon, C. G., & Willett, W. C. (2001). Diet, lifestyle, and the risk of type 2 diabetes mellitus in women. New England Journal of Medicine, 345(11), 790-797. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa010492
REF-357 Paper, guideline or statement

Vegetarian dietary patterns and mortality in Adventist Health Study 2

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

This analysis of a large Adventist cohort showed lower all-cause mortality in vegetarian dietary patterns compared with non-vegetarians. The Adventist cohorts are the classic populations used to study long-lived, health-conscious communities. It is a core citation for plant-predominant eating in lifestyle medicine. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.

Full APA reference

Orlich, M. J., Singh, P. N., Sabaté, J., Jaceldo-Siegl, K., Fan, J., Knutsen, S., Beeson, W. L., & Fraser, G. E. (2013). Vegetarian dietary patterns and mortality in Adventist Health Study 2. JAMA Internal Medicine, 173(13), 1230-1238. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2013.6473

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-357
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Orlich, M. J., Singh, P. N., Sabaté, J., Jaceldo-Siegl, K., Fan, J., Knutsen, S., Beeson, W. L., & Fraser, G. E
Year
2013
Title
Vegetarian dietary patterns and mortality in Adventist Health Study 2
Description
This analysis of a large Adventist cohort showed lower all-cause mortality in vegetarian dietary patterns compared with non-vegetarians. The Adventist cohorts are the classic populations used to study long-lived, health-conscious communities. It is a core citation for plant-predominant eating in lifestyle medicine. It is held here as foundational epidemiology underpinning the lifestyle and social determinants evidence in this collection.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Internal Medicine, 173(13), 1230-1238
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2013.6473
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2013.6473
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Orlich, M. J., Singh, P. N., Sabaté, J., Jaceldo-Siegl, K., Fan, J., Knutsen, S., Beeson, W. L., & Fraser, G. E. (2013). Vegetarian dietary patterns and mortality in Adventist Health Study 2. JAMA Internal Medicine, 173(13), 1230-1238. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2013.6473
REF-358 Paper, guideline or statement

Can lifestyle changes reverse coronary heart disease? The Lifestyle Heart Trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This is the trial that showed intensive diet, exercise, stress management and group support could produce regression of coronary atherosclerosis without lipid-lowering drugs. It is widely treated as the founding clinical trial of modern lifestyle medicine. It established that intensive lifestyle change can alter disease, not just risk scores. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Ornish, D., Brown, S. E., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., McLanahan, S. M., Kirkeeide, R. L., Brand, R. J., & Gould, K. L. (1990). Can lifestyle changes reverse coronary heart disease? The Lifestyle Heart Trial. The Lancet, 336(8708), 129-133. https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(90)91656-u

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-358
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ornish, D., Brown, S. E., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., McLanahan, S. M., Kirkeeide, R. L., Brand, R. J., & Gould, K. L
Year
1990
Title
Can lifestyle changes reverse coronary heart disease? The Lifestyle Heart Trial
Description
This is the trial that showed intensive diet, exercise, stress management and group support could produce regression of coronary atherosclerosis without lipid-lowering drugs. It is widely treated as the founding clinical trial of modern lifestyle medicine. It established that intensive lifestyle change can alter disease, not just risk scores. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 336(8708), 129-133
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(90)91656-u
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(90)91656-u
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ornish, D., Brown, S. E., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., McLanahan, S. M., Kirkeeide, R. L., Brand, R. J., & Gould, K. L. (1990). Can lifestyle changes reverse coronary heart disease? The Lifestyle Heart Trial. The Lancet, 336(8708), 129-133. https://doi.org/10.1016/0140-6736(90)91656-u
REF-359 Paper, guideline or statement

Intensive lifestyle changes for reversal of coronary heart disease

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The five-year report showed continued regression of coronary stenosis in the lifestyle group and progression in controls, with fewer cardiac events. It answered the durability question that the 1990 paper could not. It became the evidence base for intensive cardiac lifestyle programs later reimbursed in the United States. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Ornish, D., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Brown, S. E., Gould, K. L., Merritt, T. A., Sparler, S., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., Kirkeeide, R. L., Hogeboom, C., & Brand, R. J. (1998). Intensive lifestyle changes for reversal of coronary heart disease. JAMA, 280(23), 2001-2007. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.280.23.2001

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-359
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ornish, D., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Brown, S. E., Gould, K. L., Merritt, T. A., Sparler, S., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., Kirkeeide, R. L., Hogeboom, C., & Brand, R. J
Year
1998
Title
Intensive lifestyle changes for reversal of coronary heart disease
Description
The five-year report showed continued regression of coronary stenosis in the lifestyle group and progression in controls, with fewer cardiac events. It answered the durability question that the 1990 paper could not. It became the evidence base for intensive cardiac lifestyle programs later reimbursed in the United States. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 280(23), 2001-2007
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.280.23.2001
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.280.23.2001
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ornish, D., Scherwitz, L. W., Billings, J. H., Brown, S. E., Gould, K. L., Merritt, T. A., Sparler, S., Armstrong, W. T., Ports, T. A., Kirkeeide, R. L., Hogeboom, C., & Brand, R. J. (1998). Intensive lifestyle changes for reversal of coronary heart disease. JAMA, 280(23), 2001-2007. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.280.23.2001
REF-360 Paper, guideline or statement

Increased telomerase activity and comprehensive lifestyle changes: A pilot study

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

This pilot study reported increased telomerase activity after three months of comprehensive lifestyle change, linking behaviour to cellular ageing biology. It opened the lifestyle and biological ageing research line that now includes epigenetic clocks. It is the most cited early demonstration of that link in humans. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Ornish, D., Lin, J., Daubenmier, J., Weidner, G., Epel, E., Kemp, C., Magbanua, M. J. M., Marlin, R., Yglecias, L., Carroll, P. R., & Blackburn, E. H. (2008). Increased telomerase activity and comprehensive lifestyle changes: A pilot study. The Lancet Oncology, 9(11), 1048-1057. https://doi.org/10.1016/S1470-2045(08)70234-1

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-360
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ornish, D., Lin, J., Daubenmier, J., Weidner, G., Epel, E., Kemp, C., Magbanua, M. J. M., Marlin, R., Yglecias, L., Carroll, P. R., & Blackburn, E. H
Year
2008
Title
Increased telomerase activity and comprehensive lifestyle changes: A pilot study
Description
This pilot study reported increased telomerase activity after three months of comprehensive lifestyle change, linking behaviour to cellular ageing biology. It opened the lifestyle and biological ageing research line that now includes epigenetic clocks. It is the most cited early demonstration of that link in humans. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Oncology, 9(11), 1048-1057
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S1470-2045(08)70234-1
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S1470-2045(08)70234-1
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ornish, D., Lin, J., Daubenmier, J., Weidner, G., Epel, E., Kemp, C., Magbanua, M. J. M., Marlin, R., Yglecias, L., Carroll, P. R., & Blackburn, E. H. (2008). Increased telomerase activity and comprehensive lifestyle changes: A pilot study. The Lancet Oncology, 9(11), 1048-1057. https://doi.org/10.1016/S1470-2045(08)70234-1
REF-361 Paper, guideline or statement

Mediterranean diet, traditional risk factors, and the rate of cardiovascular complications after myocardial infarction: Final report of the Lyon Diet Heart Study

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

This secondary prevention trial found large reductions in cardiac events with a Mediterranean-style diet, with benefits not explained by changes in traditional risk factors. It shifted attention from single nutrients to whole dietary patterns. It is the direct forerunner of PREDIMED. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

de Lorgeril, M., Salen, P., Martin, J. L., Monjaud, I., Delaye, J., & Mamelle, N. (1999). Mediterranean diet, traditional risk factors, and the rate of cardiovascular complications after myocardial infarction: Final report of the Lyon Diet Heart Study. Circulation, 99(6), 779-785. https://doi.org/10.1161/01.cir.99.6.779

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-361
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
de Lorgeril, M., Salen, P., Martin, J. L., Monjaud, I., Delaye, J., & Mamelle, N
Year
1999
Title
Mediterranean diet, traditional risk factors, and the rate of cardiovascular complications after myocardial infarction: Final report of the Lyon Diet Heart Study
Description
This secondary prevention trial found large reductions in cardiac events with a Mediterranean-style diet, with benefits not explained by changes in traditional risk factors. It shifted attention from single nutrients to whole dietary patterns. It is the direct forerunner of PREDIMED. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
Circulation, 99(6), 779-785
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
France
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1161/01.cir.99.6.779
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1161/01.cir.99.6.779
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-465
Full APA reference
de Lorgeril, M., Salen, P., Martin, J. L., Monjaud, I., Delaye, J., & Mamelle, N. (1999). Mediterranean diet, traditional risk factors, and the rate of cardiovascular complications after myocardial infarction: Final report of the Lyon Diet Heart Study. Circulation, 99(6), 779-785. https://doi.org/10.1161/01.cir.99.6.779
REF-362 Paper, guideline or statement

Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

PREDIMED is the largest dietary pattern trial for primary cardiovascular prevention, and this is the reanalysed and republished version of record. It showed fewer major cardiovascular events with a supplemented Mediterranean diet. It remains the strongest randomised evidence that a whole diet prevents cardiovascular disease. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Estruch, R., Ros, E., Salas-Salvadó, J., Covas, M.-I., Corella, D., Arós, F., Gómez-Gracia, E., Ruiz-Gutiérrez, V., Fiol, M., Lapetra, J., Lamuela-Raventos, R. M., Serra-Majem, L., Pintó, X., Basora, J., Muñoz, M. A., Sorlí, J. V., Martínez, J. A., Fitó, M., Gea, A., Hernán, M. A., & Martínez-González, M. A. (2018). Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts. New England Journal of Medicine, 378(25), e34. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1800389

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-362
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Estruch, R., Ros, E., Salas-Salvadó, J., Covas, M.-I., Corella, D., Arós, F., Gómez-Gracia, E., Ruiz-Gutiérrez, V., Fiol, M., Lapetra, J., Lamuela-Raventos, R. M., Serra-Majem, L., Pintó, X., Basora, J., Muñoz, M. A., Sorlí, J. V., Martínez, J. A., Fitó, M., Gea, A., Hernán, M. A., & Martínez-González, M. A
Year
2018
Title
Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts
Description
PREDIMED is the largest dietary pattern trial for primary cardiovascular prevention, and this is the reanalysed and republished version of record. It showed fewer major cardiovascular events with a supplemented Mediterranean diet. It remains the strongest randomised evidence that a whole diet prevents cardiovascular disease. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 378(25), e34
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Spain
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1800389
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1800389
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Estruch, R., Ros, E., Salas-Salvadó, J., Covas, M.-I., Corella, D., Arós, F., Gómez-Gracia, E., Ruiz-Gutiérrez, V., Fiol, M., Lapetra, J., Lamuela-Raventos, R. M., Serra-Majem, L., Pintó, X., Basora, J., Muñoz, M. A., Sorlí, J. V., Martínez, J. A., Fitó, M., Gea, A., Hernán, M. A., & Martínez-González, M. A. (2018). Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts. New England Journal of Medicine, 378(25), e34. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa1800389
REF-363 Paper, guideline or statement

A clinical trial of the effects of dietary patterns on blood pressure. DASH Collaborative Research Group

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

The DASH feeding trial showed that a dietary pattern rich in fruit, vegetables and low-fat dairy lowered blood pressure to a degree comparable with drug monotherapy. It produced the dietary pattern that national guidelines still recommend for hypertension. It proved food-based treatment effects under controlled conditions. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Appel, L. J., Moore, T. J., Obarzanek, E., Vollmer, W. M., Svetkey, L. P., Sacks, F. M., Bray, G. A., Vogt, T. M., Cutler, J. A., Windhauser, M. M., Lin, P. H., & Karanja, N. (1997). A clinical trial of the effects of dietary patterns on blood pressure. DASH Collaborative Research Group. New England Journal of Medicine, 336(16), 1117-1124. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM199704173361601

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-363
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Appel, L. J., Moore, T. J., Obarzanek, E., Vollmer, W. M., Svetkey, L. P., Sacks, F. M., Bray, G. A., Vogt, T. M., Cutler, J. A., Windhauser, M. M., Lin, P. H., & Karanja, N
Year
1997
Title
A clinical trial of the effects of dietary patterns on blood pressure. DASH Collaborative Research Group
Description
The DASH feeding trial showed that a dietary pattern rich in fruit, vegetables and low-fat dairy lowered blood pressure to a degree comparable with drug monotherapy. It produced the dietary pattern that national guidelines still recommend for hypertension. It proved food-based treatment effects under controlled conditions. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 336(16), 1117-1124
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM199704173361601
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM199704173361601
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Appel, L. J., Moore, T. J., Obarzanek, E., Vollmer, W. M., Svetkey, L. P., Sacks, F. M., Bray, G. A., Vogt, T. M., Cutler, J. A., Windhauser, M. M., Lin, P. H., & Karanja, N. (1997). A clinical trial of the effects of dietary patterns on blood pressure. DASH Collaborative Research Group. New England Journal of Medicine, 336(16), 1117-1124. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM199704173361601
REF-364 Paper, guideline or statement

Reduction in the incidence of type 2 diabetes with lifestyle intervention or metformin

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

This trial showed a structured lifestyle program cut incident type 2 diabetes by more than metformin in people with impaired glucose tolerance. It is the basis of national diabetes prevention programs in many countries. It set the benchmark effect size for behavioural prevention. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Knowler, W. C., Barrett-Connor, E., Fowler, S. E., Hamman, R. F., Lachin, J. M., Walker, E. A., & Nathan, D. M. (2002). Reduction in the incidence of type 2 diabetes with lifestyle intervention or metformin. New England Journal of Medicine, 346(6), 393-403. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa012512

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-364
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Knowler, W. C., Barrett-Connor, E., Fowler, S. E., Hamman, R. F., Lachin, J. M., Walker, E. A., & Nathan, D. M
Year
2002
Title
Reduction in the incidence of type 2 diabetes with lifestyle intervention or metformin
Description
This trial showed a structured lifestyle program cut incident type 2 diabetes by more than metformin in people with impaired glucose tolerance. It is the basis of national diabetes prevention programs in many countries. It set the benchmark effect size for behavioural prevention. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 346(6), 393-403
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa012512
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa012512
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Knowler, W. C., Barrett-Connor, E., Fowler, S. E., Hamman, R. F., Lachin, J. M., Walker, E. A., & Nathan, D. M. (2002). Reduction in the incidence of type 2 diabetes with lifestyle intervention or metformin. New England Journal of Medicine, 346(6), 393-403. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJMoa012512
REF-365 Paper, guideline or statement

A 2 year multidomain intervention of diet, exercise, cognitive training, and vascular risk monitoring versus control to prevent cognitive decline in at-risk elderly people (FINGER): A randomised controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

FINGER was the first large randomised trial to show that a multidomain lifestyle intervention can protect cognition in at-risk older people. It launched the worldwide FINGERS network of replication trials. It is the reference trial behind WHO dementia risk reduction guidance. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.

Full APA reference

Ngandu, T., Lehtisalo, J., Solomon, A., Levälahti, E., Ahtiluoto, S., Antikainen, R., Bäckman, L., Hänninen, T., Jula, A., Laatikainen, T., Lindström, J., Mangialasche, F., Paajanen, T., Pajala, S., Peltonen, M., Rauramaa, R., Stigsdotter-Neely, A., Strandberg, T., Tuomilehto, J., Soininen, H., & Kivipelto, M. (2015). A 2 year multidomain intervention of diet, exercise, cognitive training, and vascular risk monitoring versus control to prevent cognitive decline in at-risk elderly people (FINGER): A randomised controlled trial. The Lancet, 385(9984), 2255-2263. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60461-5

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-365
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ngandu, T., Lehtisalo, J., Solomon, A., Levälahti, E., Ahtiluoto, S., Antikainen, R., Bäckman, L., Hänninen, T., Jula, A., Laatikainen, T., Lindström, J., Mangialasche, F., Paajanen, T., Pajala, S., Peltonen, M., Rauramaa, R., Stigsdotter-Neely, A., Strandberg, T., Tuomilehto, J., Soininen, H., & Kivipelto, M
Year
2015
Title
A 2 year multidomain intervention of diet, exercise, cognitive training, and vascular risk monitoring versus control to prevent cognitive decline in at-risk elderly people (FINGER): A randomised controlled trial
Description
FINGER was the first large randomised trial to show that a multidomain lifestyle intervention can protect cognition in at-risk older people. It launched the worldwide FINGERS network of replication trials. It is the reference trial behind WHO dementia risk reduction guidance. It is held here as one of the landmark intervention trials on which lifestyle medicine practice rests.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 385(9984), 2255-2263
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Finland
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60461-5
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60461-5
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ngandu, T., Lehtisalo, J., Solomon, A., Levälahti, E., Ahtiluoto, S., Antikainen, R., Bäckman, L., Hänninen, T., Jula, A., Laatikainen, T., Lindström, J., Mangialasche, F., Paajanen, T., Pajala, S., Peltonen, M., Rauramaa, R., Stigsdotter-Neely, A., Strandberg, T., Tuomilehto, J., Soininen, H., & Kivipelto, M. (2015). A 2 year multidomain intervention of diet, exercise, cognitive training, and vascular risk monitoring versus control to prevent cognitive decline in at-risk elderly people (FINGER): A randomised controlled trial. The Lancet, 385(9984), 2255-2263. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60461-5
REF-366 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed foods: What they are and how to identify them

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

This paper gives the operational definition of ultra-processed food used across the global evidence base. It made a whole research field measurable and comparable between countries. Almost every ultra-processed food study now cites it as the exposure definition. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.

Full APA reference

Monteiro, C. A., Cannon, G., Levy, R. B., Moubarac, J.-C., Louzada, M. L. C., Rauber, F., Khandpur, N., Cediel, G., Neri, D., Martinez-Steele, E., Baraldi, L. G., & Jaime, P. C. (2019). Ultra-processed foods: What they are and how to identify them. Public Health Nutrition, 22(5), 936-941. https://doi.org/10.1017/S1368980018003762

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-366
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Monteiro, C. A., Cannon, G., Levy, R. B., Moubarac, J.-C., Louzada, M. L. C., Rauber, F., Khandpur, N., Cediel, G., Neri, D., Martinez-Steele, E., Baraldi, L. G., & Jaime, P. C
Year
2019
Title
Ultra-processed foods: What they are and how to identify them
Description
This paper gives the operational definition of ultra-processed food used across the global evidence base. It made a whole research field measurable and comparable between countries. Almost every ultra-processed food study now cites it as the exposure definition. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Nutrition, 22(5), 936-941
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1017/S1368980018003762
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S1368980018003762
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Monteiro, C. A., Cannon, G., Levy, R. B., Moubarac, J.-C., Louzada, M. L. C., Rauber, F., Khandpur, N., Cediel, G., Neri, D., Martinez-Steele, E., Baraldi, L. G., & Jaime, P. C. (2019). Ultra-processed foods: What they are and how to identify them. Public Health Nutrition, 22(5), 936-941. https://doi.org/10.1017/S1368980018003762
REF-367 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed diets cause excess calorie intake and weight gain: An inpatient randomized controlled trial of ad libitum food intake

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

This tightly controlled inpatient crossover trial showed people ate about 500 more kilocalories a day and gained weight on an ultra-processed diet matched for nutrients. It moved ultra-processed food from association to demonstrated cause of excess intake. It is the key causal citation in the food environment debate. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.

Full APA reference

Hall, K. D., Ayuketah, A., Brychta, R., Cai, H., Cassimatis, T., Chen, K. Y., Chung, S. T., Costa, E., Courville, A., Darcey, V., Fletcher, L. A., Forde, C. G., Gharib, A. M., Guo, J., Howard, R., Joseph, P. V., McGehee, S., Ouwerkerk, R., Raisinger, K., Rozga, I., Stagliano, M., Walter, M., Walter, P. J., Yang, S., & Zhou, M. (2019). Ultra-processed diets cause excess calorie intake and weight gain: An inpatient randomized controlled trial of ad libitum food intake. Cell Metabolism, 30(1), 67-77.e3. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2019.05.008

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-367
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Hall, K. D., Ayuketah, A., Brychta, R., Cai, H., Cassimatis, T., Chen, K. Y., Chung, S. T., Costa, E., Courville, A., Darcey, V., Fletcher, L. A., Forde, C. G., Gharib, A. M., Guo, J., Howard, R., Joseph, P. V., McGehee, S., Ouwerkerk, R., Raisinger, K., Rozga, I., Stagliano, M., Walter, M., Walter, P. J., Yang, S., & Zhou, M
Year
2019
Title
Ultra-processed diets cause excess calorie intake and weight gain: An inpatient randomized controlled trial of ad libitum food intake
Description
This tightly controlled inpatient crossover trial showed people ate about 500 more kilocalories a day and gained weight on an ultra-processed diet matched for nutrients. It moved ultra-processed food from association to demonstrated cause of excess intake. It is the key causal citation in the food environment debate. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.
Publication or publisher
Cell Metabolism, 30(1), 67-77.e3
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2019.05.008
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2019.05.008
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Hall, K. D., Ayuketah, A., Brychta, R., Cai, H., Cassimatis, T., Chen, K. Y., Chung, S. T., Costa, E., Courville, A., Darcey, V., Fletcher, L. A., Forde, C. G., Gharib, A. M., Guo, J., Howard, R., Joseph, P. V., McGehee, S., Ouwerkerk, R., Raisinger, K., Rozga, I., Stagliano, M., Walter, M., Walter, P. J., Yang, S., & Zhou, M. (2019). Ultra-processed diets cause excess calorie intake and weight gain: An inpatient randomized controlled trial of ad libitum food intake. Cell Metabolism, 30(1), 67-77.e3. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2019.05.008
REF-368 Paper, guideline or statement

Food in the Anthropocene: The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy diets from sustainable food systems

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

This Commission produced the first global scientific targets for both healthy diets and sustainable food production. It set the planetary health diet that has framed food policy debate since. It is the reference point that the 2025 Commission updates. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.

Full APA reference

Willett, W., Rockström, J., Loken, B., Springmann, M., Lang, T., Vermeulen, S., Garnett, T., Tilman, D., DeClerck, F., Wood, A., Jonell, M., Clark, M., Gordon, L. J., Fanzo, J., Hawkes, C., Zurayk, R., Rivera, J. A., De Vries, W., Majele Sibanda, L., ... Murray, C. J. L. (2019). Food in the Anthropocene: The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy diets from sustainable food systems. The Lancet, 393(10170), 447-492. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31788-4

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-368
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Willett, W., Rockström, J., Loken, B., Springmann, M., Lang, T., Vermeulen, S., Garnett, T., Tilman, D., DeClerck, F., Wood, A., Jonell, M., Clark, M., Gordon, L. J., Fanzo, J., Hawkes, C., Zurayk, R., Rivera, J. A., De Vries, W., Majele Sibanda, L., ... Murray, C. J. L
Year
2019
Title
Food in the Anthropocene: The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy diets from sustainable food systems
Description
This Commission produced the first global scientific targets for both healthy diets and sustainable food production. It set the planetary health diet that has framed food policy debate since. It is the reference point that the 2025 Commission updates. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 393(10170), 447-492
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31788-4
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31788-4
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Willett, W., Rockström, J., Loken, B., Springmann, M., Lang, T., Vermeulen, S., Garnett, T., Tilman, D., DeClerck, F., Wood, A., Jonell, M., Clark, M., Gordon, L. J., Fanzo, J., Hawkes, C., Zurayk, R., Rivera, J. A., De Vries, W., Majele Sibanda, L., ... Murray, C. J. L. (2019). Food in the Anthropocene: The EAT-Lancet Commission on healthy diets from sustainable food systems. The Lancet, 393(10170), 447-492. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31788-4
REF-369 Paper, guideline or statement

The Global Syndemic of Obesity, Undernutrition, and Climate Change: The Lancet Commission report

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

The Commission argued that obesity, undernutrition and climate change share food system and commercial drivers and should be tackled together. It popularised the syndemic framing now used in obesity policy. It set out double and triple duty actions for governments. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.

Full APA reference

Swinburn, B. A., Kraak, V. I., Allender, S., Atkins, V. J., Baker, P. I., Bogard, J. R., Brinsden, H., Calvillo, A., De Schutter, O., Devarajan, R., Ezzati, M., Friel, S., Goenka, S., Hammond, R. A., Hastings, G., Hawkes, C., Herrero, M., Hovmand, P. S., Howden, M., ... Dietz, W. H. (2019). The Global Syndemic of Obesity, Undernutrition, and Climate Change: The Lancet Commission report. The Lancet, 393(10173), 791-846. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)32822-8

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-369
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Swinburn, B. A., Kraak, V. I., Allender, S., Atkins, V. J., Baker, P. I., Bogard, J. R., Brinsden, H., Calvillo, A., De Schutter, O., Devarajan, R., Ezzati, M., Friel, S., Goenka, S., Hammond, R. A., Hastings, G., Hawkes, C., Herrero, M., Hovmand, P. S., Howden, M., ... Dietz, W. H
Year
2019
Title
The Global Syndemic of Obesity, Undernutrition, and Climate Change: The Lancet Commission report
Description
The Commission argued that obesity, undernutrition and climate change share food system and commercial drivers and should be tackled together. It popularised the syndemic framing now used in obesity policy. It set out double and triple duty actions for governments. It is held here as foundational evidence on diet quality and the food environment.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 393(10173), 791-846
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health; Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)32822-8
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)32822-8
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Swinburn, B. A., Kraak, V. I., Allender, S., Atkins, V. J., Baker, P. I., Bogard, J. R., Brinsden, H., Calvillo, A., De Schutter, O., Devarajan, R., Ezzati, M., Friel, S., Goenka, S., Hammond, R. A., Hastings, G., Hawkes, C., Herrero, M., Hovmand, P. S., Howden, M., ... Dietz, W. H. (2019). The Global Syndemic of Obesity, Undernutrition, and Climate Change: The Lancet Commission report. The Lancet, 393(10173), 791-846. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)32822-8
REF-370 Paper, guideline or statement

Coronary heart-disease and physical activity of work

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Cardiometabolic health

The comparison of London bus conductors and drivers was the first credible evidence that occupational physical activity protects against coronary heart disease. It founded physical activity epidemiology. It is the origin story of exercise as preventive medicine. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.

Full APA reference

Morris, J. N., Heady, J. A., Raffle, P. A., Roberts, C. G., & Parks, J. W. (1953). Coronary heart-disease and physical activity of work. The Lancet, 262(6795), 1053-1057. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(53)90665-5

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-370
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Morris, J. N., Heady, J. A., Raffle, P. A., Roberts, C. G., & Parks, J. W
Year
1953
Title
Coronary heart-disease and physical activity of work
Description
The comparison of London bus conductors and drivers was the first credible evidence that occupational physical activity protects against coronary heart disease. It founded physical activity epidemiology. It is the origin story of exercise as preventive medicine. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 262(6795), 1053-1057
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(53)90665-5
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(53)90665-5
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Morris, J. N., Heady, J. A., Raffle, P. A., Roberts, C. G., & Parks, J. W. (1953). Coronary heart-disease and physical activity of work. The Lancet, 262(6795), 1053-1057. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(53)90665-5
REF-371 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical activity, all-cause mortality, and longevity of college alumni

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

This cohort established a graded dose-response between leisure-time physical activity and lower all-cause mortality, with estimates of added life expectancy. It provided the quantitative basis for activity recommendations. It remains the classic citation for activity volume and longevity. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.

Full APA reference

Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Hyde, R. T., Wing, A. L., & Hsieh, C. C. (1986). Physical activity, all-cause mortality, and longevity of college alumni. New England Journal of Medicine, 314(10), 605-613. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM198603063141003

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-371
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Hyde, R. T., Wing, A. L., & Hsieh, C. C
Year
1986
Title
Physical activity, all-cause mortality, and longevity of college alumni
Description
This cohort established a graded dose-response between leisure-time physical activity and lower all-cause mortality, with estimates of added life expectancy. It provided the quantitative basis for activity recommendations. It remains the classic citation for activity volume and longevity. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.
Publication or publisher
New England Journal of Medicine, 314(10), 605-613
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM198603063141003
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM198603063141003
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-484; REF-507
Full APA reference
Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Hyde, R. T., Wing, A. L., & Hsieh, C. C. (1986). Physical activity, all-cause mortality, and longevity of college alumni. New England Journal of Medicine, 314(10), 605-613. https://doi.org/10.1056/NEJM198603063141003
REF-372 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical fitness and all-cause mortality: A prospective study of healthy men and women

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Using measured treadmill fitness rather than self-reported activity, this study showed steep mortality gradients across fitness levels, with the largest gain from the least fit to the next group. It introduced cardiorespiratory fitness as a vital sign. It reframed the message from elite exercise to avoiding the lowest fitness band. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.

Full APA reference

Blair, S. N., Kohl, H. W., 3rd, Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Clark, D. G., Cooper, K. H., & Gibbons, L. W. (1989). Physical fitness and all-cause mortality: A prospective study of healthy men and women. JAMA, 262(17), 2395-2401. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.262.17.2395

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-372
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Blair, S. N., Kohl, H. W., 3rd, Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Clark, D. G., Cooper, K. H., & Gibbons, L. W
Year
1989
Title
Physical fitness and all-cause mortality: A prospective study of healthy men and women
Description
Using measured treadmill fitness rather than self-reported activity, this study showed steep mortality gradients across fitness levels, with the largest gain from the least fit to the next group. It introduced cardiorespiratory fitness as a vital sign. It reframed the message from elite exercise to avoiding the lowest fitness band. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 262(17), 2395-2401
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.262.17.2395
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.262.17.2395
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Blair, S. N., Kohl, H. W., 3rd, Paffenbarger, R. S., Jr., Clark, D. G., Cooper, K. H., & Gibbons, L. W. (1989). Physical fitness and all-cause mortality: A prospective study of healthy men and women. JAMA, 262(17), 2395-2401. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.262.17.2395
REF-373 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of physical inactivity on major non-communicable diseases worldwide: An analysis of burden of disease and life expectancy

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

This paper estimated the share of coronary heart disease, diabetes and some cancers attributable to inactivity and the life expectancy cost worldwide. It framed physical inactivity as a pandemic requiring policy, not just advice. It is the most cited quantification of inactivity's global toll. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.

Full APA reference

Lee, I.-M., Shiroma, E. J., Lobelo, F., Puska, P., Blair, S. N., & Katzmarzyk, P. T. (2012). Effect of physical inactivity on major non-communicable diseases worldwide: An analysis of burden of disease and life expectancy. The Lancet, 380(9838), 219-229. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61031-9

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-373
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lee, I.-M., Shiroma, E. J., Lobelo, F., Puska, P., Blair, S. N., & Katzmarzyk, P. T
Year
2012
Title
Effect of physical inactivity on major non-communicable diseases worldwide: An analysis of burden of disease and life expectancy
Description
This paper estimated the share of coronary heart disease, diabetes and some cancers attributable to inactivity and the life expectancy cost worldwide. It framed physical inactivity as a pandemic requiring policy, not just advice. It is the most cited quantification of inactivity's global toll. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 380(9838), 219-229
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61031-9
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61031-9
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Lee, I.-M., Shiroma, E. J., Lobelo, F., Puska, P., Blair, S. N., & Katzmarzyk, P. T. (2012). Effect of physical inactivity on major non-communicable diseases worldwide: An analysis of burden of disease and life expectancy. The Lancet, 380(9838), 219-229. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61031-9
REF-374 Paper, guideline or statement

Dose-response associations between accelerometry measured physical activity and sedentary time and all cause mortality: Systematic review and harmonised meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Pooling device-measured data across cohorts, this analysis showed steep mortality reductions with any increase in light or moderate activity and risk concentrated in the most sedentary. It removed the self-report bias that weakened earlier estimates. It directly shaped the 2020 WHO activity guidelines. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.

Full APA reference

Ekelund, U., Tarp, J., Steene-Johannessen, J., Hansen, B. H., Jefferis, B., Fagerland, M. W., Whincup, P., Diaz, K. M., Hooker, S. P., Chernofsky, A., Larson, M. G., Spartano, N., Vasan, R. S., Dohrn, I.-M., Hagströmer, M., Edwardson, C., Yates, T., Shiroma, E., Anderssen, S. A., & Lee, I.-M. (2019). Dose-response associations between accelerometry measured physical activity and sedentary time and all cause mortality: Systematic review and harmonised meta-analysis. BMJ, 366, l4570. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.l4570

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-374
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ekelund, U., Tarp, J., Steene-Johannessen, J., Hansen, B. H., Jefferis, B., Fagerland, M. W., Whincup, P., Diaz, K. M., Hooker, S. P., Chernofsky, A., Larson, M. G., Spartano, N., Vasan, R. S., Dohrn, I.-M., Hagströmer, M., Edwardson, C., Yates, T., Shiroma, E., Anderssen, S. A., & Lee, I.-M
Year
2019
Title
Dose-response associations between accelerometry measured physical activity and sedentary time and all cause mortality: Systematic review and harmonised meta-analysis
Description
Pooling device-measured data across cohorts, this analysis showed steep mortality reductions with any increase in light or moderate activity and risk concentrated in the most sedentary. It removed the self-report bias that weakened earlier estimates. It directly shaped the 2020 WHO activity guidelines. It is held here as foundational physical activity epidemiology.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 366, l4570
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.l4570
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.l4570
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-507
Full APA reference
Ekelund, U., Tarp, J., Steene-Johannessen, J., Hansen, B. H., Jefferis, B., Fagerland, M. W., Whincup, P., Diaz, K. M., Hooker, S. P., Chernofsky, A., Larson, M. G., Spartano, N., Vasan, R. S., Dohrn, I.-M., Hagströmer, M., Edwardson, C., Yates, T., Shiroma, E., Anderssen, S. A., & Lee, I.-M. (2019). Dose-response associations between accelerometry measured physical activity and sedentary time and all cause mortality: Systematic review and harmonised meta-analysis. BMJ, 366, l4570. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.l4570
REF-375 Paper, guideline or statement

Sleep duration and all-cause mortality: A systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective studies

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Physical health

This meta-analysis established the U-shaped association between sleep duration and death across many cohorts. It made sleep duration a mainstream population health exposure rather than a sleep clinic concern. It is the standard citation for sleep as a mortality risk factor. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.

Full APA reference

Cappuccio, F. P., D'Elia, L., Strazzullo, P., & Miller, M. A. (2010). Sleep duration and all-cause mortality: A systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective studies. Sleep, 33(5), 585-592. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/33.5.585

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-375
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cappuccio, F. P., D'Elia, L., Strazzullo, P., & Miller, M. A
Year
2010
Title
Sleep duration and all-cause mortality: A systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective studies
Description
This meta-analysis established the U-shaped association between sleep duration and death across many cohorts. It made sleep duration a mainstream population health exposure rather than a sleep clinic concern. It is the standard citation for sleep as a mortality risk factor. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Sleep, 33(5), 585-592
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/33.5.585
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/33.5.585
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Cappuccio, F. P., D'Elia, L., Strazzullo, P., & Miller, M. A. (2010). Sleep duration and all-cause mortality: A systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective studies. Sleep, 33(5), 585-592. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/33.5.585
REF-376 Paper, guideline or statement

The cumulative cost of additional wakefulness: Dose-response effects on neurobehavioral functions and sleep physiology from chronic sleep restriction and total sleep deprivation

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Sleep
  • Mental and physical health

This laboratory study showed that modest chronic sleep restriction produces cumulative, dose-dependent cognitive impairment that people underestimate in themselves. It is the experimental foundation for sleep debt as a real physiological state. It underpins fatigue risk management in health and transport settings. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.

Full APA reference

Van Dongen, H. P. A., Maislin, G., Mullington, J. M., & Dinges, D. F. (2003). The cumulative cost of additional wakefulness: Dose-response effects on neurobehavioral functions and sleep physiology from chronic sleep restriction and total sleep deprivation. Sleep, 26(2), 117-126. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/26.2.117

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-376
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Van Dongen, H. P. A., Maislin, G., Mullington, J. M., & Dinges, D. F
Year
2003
Title
The cumulative cost of additional wakefulness: Dose-response effects on neurobehavioral functions and sleep physiology from chronic sleep restriction and total sleep deprivation
Description
This laboratory study showed that modest chronic sleep restriction produces cumulative, dose-dependent cognitive impairment that people underestimate in themselves. It is the experimental foundation for sleep debt as a real physiological state. It underpins fatigue risk management in health and transport settings. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Sleep, 26(2), 117-126
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/26.2.117
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/26.2.117
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Van Dongen, H. P. A., Maislin, G., Mullington, J. M., & Dinges, D. F. (2003). The cumulative cost of additional wakefulness: Dose-response effects on neurobehavioral functions and sleep physiology from chronic sleep restriction and total sleep deprivation. Sleep, 26(2), 117-126. https://doi.org/10.1093/sleep/26.2.117
REF-377 Paper, guideline or statement

Insomnia as a predictor of depression: A meta-analytic evaluation of longitudinal epidemiological studies

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This meta-analysis of longitudinal studies showed that insomnia roughly doubles the risk of later depression. It reframed sleep disturbance as a modifiable antecedent rather than only a symptom. It justified treating insomnia to prevent depression. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.

Full APA reference

Baglioni, C., Battagliese, G., Feige, B., Spiegelhalder, K., Nissen, C., Voderholzer, U., Lombardo, C., & Riemann, D. (2011). Insomnia as a predictor of depression: A meta-analytic evaluation of longitudinal epidemiological studies. Journal of Affective Disorders, 135(1-3), 10-19. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2011.01.011

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-377
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Baglioni, C., Battagliese, G., Feige, B., Spiegelhalder, K., Nissen, C., Voderholzer, U., Lombardo, C., & Riemann, D
Year
2011
Title
Insomnia as a predictor of depression: A meta-analytic evaluation of longitudinal epidemiological studies
Description
This meta-analysis of longitudinal studies showed that insomnia roughly doubles the risk of later depression. It reframed sleep disturbance as a modifiable antecedent rather than only a symptom. It justified treating insomnia to prevent depression. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Affective Disorders, 135(1-3), 10-19
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2011.01.011
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2011.01.011
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Baglioni, C., Battagliese, G., Feige, B., Spiegelhalder, K., Nissen, C., Voderholzer, U., Lombardo, C., & Riemann, D. (2011). Insomnia as a predictor of depression: A meta-analytic evaluation of longitudinal epidemiological studies. Journal of Affective Disorders, 135(1-3), 10-19. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2011.01.011
REF-378 Paper, guideline or statement

Sleep disturbance, sleep duration, and inflammation: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cohort studies and experimental sleep deprivation

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental and physical health

This synthesis showed that sleep disturbance and extremes of sleep duration are associated with higher systemic inflammation. It supplies a plausible biological pathway linking poor sleep to both cardiometabolic and depressive illness. It is the key mechanistic reference in sleep and health research. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.

Full APA reference

Irwin, M. R., Olmstead, R., & Carroll, J. E. (2016). Sleep disturbance, sleep duration, and inflammation: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cohort studies and experimental sleep deprivation. Biological Psychiatry, 80(1), 40-52. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biopsych.2015.05.014

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-378
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Irwin, M. R., Olmstead, R., & Carroll, J. E
Year
2016
Title
Sleep disturbance, sleep duration, and inflammation: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cohort studies and experimental sleep deprivation
Description
This synthesis showed that sleep disturbance and extremes of sleep duration are associated with higher systemic inflammation. It supplies a plausible biological pathway linking poor sleep to both cardiometabolic and depressive illness. It is the key mechanistic reference in sleep and health research. It is held here as foundational sleep evidence linking sleep to physical and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Biological Psychiatry, 80(1), 40-52
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biopsych.2015.05.014
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biopsych.2015.05.014
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Irwin, M. R., Olmstead, R., & Carroll, J. E. (2016). Sleep disturbance, sleep duration, and inflammation: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cohort studies and experimental sleep deprivation. Biological Psychiatry, 80(1), 40-52. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biopsych.2015.05.014
REF-379 Paper, guideline or statement

Social networks, host resistance, and mortality: A nine-year follow-up study of Alameda County residents

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This study first showed that people with fewer social ties died at higher rates over nine years, independent of baseline health and behaviour. It created social epidemiology's central finding on social integration. Every later loneliness and mortality paper traces back to it. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.

Full APA reference

Berkman, L. F., & Syme, S. L. (1979). Social networks, host resistance, and mortality: A nine-year follow-up study of Alameda County residents. American Journal of Epidemiology, 109(2), 186-204. https://doi.org/10.1093/oxfordjournals.aje.a112674

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-379
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Berkman, L. F., & Syme, S. L
Year
1979
Title
Social networks, host resistance, and mortality: A nine-year follow-up study of Alameda County residents
Description
This study first showed that people with fewer social ties died at higher rates over nine years, independent of baseline health and behaviour. It created social epidemiology's central finding on social integration. Every later loneliness and mortality paper traces back to it. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Epidemiology, 109(2), 186-204
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/oxfordjournals.aje.a112674
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/oxfordjournals.aje.a112674
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Berkman, L. F., & Syme, S. L. (1979). Social networks, host resistance, and mortality: A nine-year follow-up study of Alameda County residents. American Journal of Epidemiology, 109(2), 186-204. https://doi.org/10.1093/oxfordjournals.aje.a112674
REF-380 Paper, guideline or statement

Social relationships and health

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This review consolidated the cohort evidence and argued that social relationships are a risk factor of similar magnitude to smoking and inactivity. Its framing put social connection on the mainstream public health agenda. It is one of the most cited papers in the field. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.

Full APA reference

House, J. S., Landis, K. R., & Umberson, D. (1988). Social relationships and health. Science, 241(4865), 540-545. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.3399889

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-380
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
House, J. S., Landis, K. R., & Umberson, D
Year
1988
Title
Social relationships and health
Description
This review consolidated the cohort evidence and argued that social relationships are a risk factor of similar magnitude to smoking and inactivity. Its framing put social connection on the mainstream public health agenda. It is one of the most cited papers in the field. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.
Publication or publisher
Science, 241(4865), 540-545
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.3399889
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.3399889
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
House, J. S., Landis, K. R., & Umberson, D. (1988). Social relationships and health. Science, 241(4865), 540-545. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.3399889
REF-381 Paper, guideline or statement

Social relationships and mortality risk: A meta-analytic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This meta-analysis of 148 studies produced the widely quoted 50 per cent greater survival odds for people with stronger social relationships. It gave advocates a defensible effect size. It is the most cited quantitative statement of the effect. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.

Full APA reference

Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., & Layton, J. B. (2010). Social relationships and mortality risk: A meta-analytic review. PLoS Medicine, 7(7), e1000316. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1000316

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-381
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., & Layton, J. B
Year
2010
Title
Social relationships and mortality risk: A meta-analytic review
Description
This meta-analysis of 148 studies produced the widely quoted 50 per cent greater survival odds for people with stronger social relationships. It gave advocates a defensible effect size. It is the most cited quantitative statement of the effect. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.
Publication or publisher
PLoS Medicine, 7(7), e1000316
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1000316
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1000316
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., & Layton, J. B. (2010). Social relationships and mortality risk: A meta-analytic review. PLoS Medicine, 7(7), e1000316. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pmed.1000316
REF-382 Paper, guideline or statement

Loneliness and social isolation as risk factors for mortality: A meta-analytic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This meta-analysis separated objective isolation, loneliness and living alone, and showed each independently predicted mortality. It clarified the constructs that policy needs to target. It is the standard citation for treating loneliness as a public health risk. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.

Full APA reference

Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., Baker, M., Harris, T., & Stephenson, D. (2015). Loneliness and social isolation as risk factors for mortality: A meta-analytic review. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 10(2), 227-237. https://doi.org/10.1177/1745691614568352

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-382
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., Baker, M., Harris, T., & Stephenson, D
Year
2015
Title
Loneliness and social isolation as risk factors for mortality: A meta-analytic review
Description
This meta-analysis separated objective isolation, loneliness and living alone, and showed each independently predicted mortality. It clarified the constructs that policy needs to target. It is the standard citation for treating loneliness as a public health risk. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.
Publication or publisher
Perspectives on Psychological Science, 10(2), 227-237
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/1745691614568352
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1745691614568352
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-506; REF-508
Full APA reference
Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., Baker, M., Harris, T., & Stephenson, D. (2015). Loneliness and social isolation as risk factors for mortality: A meta-analytic review. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 10(2), 227-237. https://doi.org/10.1177/1745691614568352
REF-383 Paper, guideline or statement

From loneliness to social connection: Charting a path to healthier societies. Report of the WHO Commission on Social Connection

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

This is the first WHO Commission report to treat social connection as a global health priority, with an evidence review and a policy agenda for member states. It legitimises connection interventions within health systems. It sets the international frame that national loneliness strategies now answer to. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2025). From loneliness to social connection: Charting a path to healthier societies. Report of the WHO Commission on Social Connection. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/381746

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-383
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2025
Title
From loneliness to social connection: Charting a path to healthier societies. Report of the WHO Commission on Social Connection
Description
This is the first WHO Commission report to treat social connection as a global health priority, with an evidence review and a policy agenda for member states. It legitimises connection interventions within health systems. It sets the international frame that national loneliness strategies now answer to. It is held here as foundational evidence on social connection as a determinant of health.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/381746
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-506; REF-508; REF-574
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2025). From loneliness to social connection: Charting a path to healthier societies. Report of the WHO Commission on Social Connection. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/381746
REF-384 Paper, guideline or statement

A randomised controlled trial of dietary improvement for adults with major depression (the "SMILES" trial)

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

SMILES was the first randomised controlled trial to show that dietary improvement reduces symptoms of major depression. It converted nutritional psychiatry from observational hypothesis to clinical evidence. It is the field's defining trial and an Australian one. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Jacka, F. N., O'Neil, A., Opie, R., Itsiopoulos, C., Cotton, S., Mohebbi, M., Castle, D., Dash, S., Mihalopoulos, C., Chatterton, M. L., Brazionis, L., Dean, O. M., Hodge, A. M., & Berk, M. (2017). A randomised controlled trial of dietary improvement for adults with major depression (the "SMILES" trial). BMC Medicine, 15, 23. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-017-0791-y

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-384
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jacka, F. N., O'Neil, A., Opie, R., Itsiopoulos, C., Cotton, S., Mohebbi, M., Castle, D., Dash, S., Mihalopoulos, C., Chatterton, M. L., Brazionis, L., Dean, O. M., Hodge, A. M., & Berk, M
Year
2017
Title
A randomised controlled trial of dietary improvement for adults with major depression (the "SMILES" trial)
Description
SMILES was the first randomised controlled trial to show that dietary improvement reduces symptoms of major depression. It converted nutritional psychiatry from observational hypothesis to clinical evidence. It is the field's defining trial and an Australian one. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
BMC Medicine, 15, 23
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-017-0791-y
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-017-0791-y
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-385; REF-391; REF-073
Full APA reference
Jacka, F. N., O'Neil, A., Opie, R., Itsiopoulos, C., Cotton, S., Mohebbi, M., Castle, D., Dash, S., Mihalopoulos, C., Chatterton, M. L., Brazionis, L., Dean, O. M., Hodge, A. M., & Berk, M. (2017). A randomised controlled trial of dietary improvement for adults with major depression (the "SMILES" trial). BMC Medicine, 15, 23. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-017-0791-y
REF-385 Paper, guideline or statement

A Mediterranean-style dietary intervention supplemented with fish oil improves diet quality and mental health in people with depression: A randomized controlled trial (HELFIMED)

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

HELFIMED is the second landmark Australian dietary trial in depression and showed improvements in diet quality and mental health that persisted at six months. Together with SMILES it forms the evidence base cited in lifestyle-based mental health guidelines. It also tested a group cooking workshop delivery model. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Parletta, N., Zarnowiecki, D., Cho, J., Wilson, A., Bogomolova, S., Villani, A., Itsiopoulos, C., Niyonsenga, T., Blunden, S., Meyer, B., Segal, L., Baune, B. T., & O'Dea, K. (2019). A Mediterranean-style dietary intervention supplemented with fish oil improves diet quality and mental health in people with depression: A randomized controlled trial (HELFIMED). Nutritional Neuroscience, 22(7), 474-487. https://doi.org/10.1080/1028415X.2017.1411320

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-385
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Parletta, N., Zarnowiecki, D., Cho, J., Wilson, A., Bogomolova, S., Villani, A., Itsiopoulos, C., Niyonsenga, T., Blunden, S., Meyer, B., Segal, L., Baune, B. T., & O'Dea, K
Year
2019
Title
A Mediterranean-style dietary intervention supplemented with fish oil improves diet quality and mental health in people with depression: A randomized controlled trial (HELFIMED)
Description
HELFIMED is the second landmark Australian dietary trial in depression and showed improvements in diet quality and mental health that persisted at six months. Together with SMILES it forms the evidence base cited in lifestyle-based mental health guidelines. It also tested a group cooking workshop delivery model. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
Nutritional Neuroscience, 22(7), 474-487
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1080/1028415X.2017.1411320
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/1028415X.2017.1411320
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Parletta, N., Zarnowiecki, D., Cho, J., Wilson, A., Bogomolova, S., Villani, A., Itsiopoulos, C., Niyonsenga, T., Blunden, S., Meyer, B., Segal, L., Baune, B. T., & O'Dea, K. (2019). A Mediterranean-style dietary intervention supplemented with fish oil improves diet quality and mental health in people with depression: A randomized controlled trial (HELFIMED). Nutritional Neuroscience, 22(7), 474-487. https://doi.org/10.1080/1028415X.2017.1411320
REF-386 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of exercise training on older patients with major depression

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This trial found aerobic exercise comparable with sertraline for remission of major depression in older adults. It is the study that made exercise a credible antidepressant treatment rather than an adjunct. It shaped every later exercise and depression guideline. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Moore, K. A., Craighead, W. E., Herman, S., Khatri, P., Waugh, R., Napolitano, M. A., Forman, L. M., Appelbaum, M., Doraiswamy, P. M., & Krishnan, K. R. (1999). Effects of exercise training on older patients with major depression. Archives of Internal Medicine, 159(19), 2349-2356. https://doi.org/10.1001/archinte.159.19.2349

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-386
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Moore, K. A., Craighead, W. E., Herman, S., Khatri, P., Waugh, R., Napolitano, M. A., Forman, L. M., Appelbaum, M., Doraiswamy, P. M., & Krishnan, K. R
Year
1999
Title
Effects of exercise training on older patients with major depression
Description
This trial found aerobic exercise comparable with sertraline for remission of major depression in older adults. It is the study that made exercise a credible antidepressant treatment rather than an adjunct. It shaped every later exercise and depression guideline. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
Archives of Internal Medicine, 159(19), 2349-2356
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1001/archinte.159.19.2349
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/archinte.159.19.2349
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-387; REF-388; REF-389
Full APA reference
Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Moore, K. A., Craighead, W. E., Herman, S., Khatri, P., Waugh, R., Napolitano, M. A., Forman, L. M., Appelbaum, M., Doraiswamy, P. M., & Krishnan, K. R. (1999). Effects of exercise training on older patients with major depression. Archives of Internal Medicine, 159(19), 2349-2356. https://doi.org/10.1001/archinte.159.19.2349
REF-387 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise and pharmacotherapy in the treatment of major depressive disorder

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This larger trial compared supervised exercise, home-based exercise, sertraline and placebo in adults with major depression and found broadly comparable remission rates. It addressed the placebo control question left open in 1999. It is the most rigorous head-to-head test of exercise against medication. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Doraiswamy, P. M., Watkins, L., Hoffman, B. M., Barbour, K. A., Herman, S., Craighead, W. E., Brosse, A. L., Waugh, R., Hinderliter, A., & Sherwood, A. (2007). Exercise and pharmacotherapy in the treatment of major depressive disorder. Psychosomatic Medicine, 69(7), 587-596. https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0b013e318148c19a

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-387
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Doraiswamy, P. M., Watkins, L., Hoffman, B. M., Barbour, K. A., Herman, S., Craighead, W. E., Brosse, A. L., Waugh, R., Hinderliter, A., & Sherwood, A
Year
2007
Title
Exercise and pharmacotherapy in the treatment of major depressive disorder
Description
This larger trial compared supervised exercise, home-based exercise, sertraline and placebo in adults with major depression and found broadly comparable remission rates. It addressed the placebo control question left open in 1999. It is the most rigorous head-to-head test of exercise against medication. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
Psychosomatic Medicine, 69(7), 587-596
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0b013e318148c19a
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0b013e318148c19a
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-448
Full APA reference
Blumenthal, J. A., Babyak, M. A., Doraiswamy, P. M., Watkins, L., Hoffman, B. M., Barbour, K. A., Herman, S., Craighead, W. E., Brosse, A. L., Waugh, R., Hinderliter, A., & Sherwood, A. (2007). Exercise and pharmacotherapy in the treatment of major depressive disorder. Psychosomatic Medicine, 69(7), 587-596. https://doi.org/10.1097/PSY.0b013e318148c19a
REF-388 Paper, guideline or statement

Physical activity and incident depression: A meta-analysis of prospective cohort studies

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This meta-analysis of prospective cohorts showed that higher physical activity predicts lower risk of developing depression across ages and continents. It moved exercise from treatment into primary prevention of mental illness. It is the most cited prevention estimate in the field. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Schuch, F. B., Vancampfort, D., Firth, J., Rosenbaum, S., Ward, P. B., Silva, E. S., Hallgren, M., Ponce De Leon, A., Dunn, A. L., Deslandes, A. C., Fleck, M. P., Carvalho, A. F., & Stubbs, B. (2018). Physical activity and incident depression: A meta-analysis of prospective cohort studies. American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(7), 631-648. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2018.17111194

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-388
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Schuch, F. B., Vancampfort, D., Firth, J., Rosenbaum, S., Ward, P. B., Silva, E. S., Hallgren, M., Ponce De Leon, A., Dunn, A. L., Deslandes, A. C., Fleck, M. P., Carvalho, A. F., & Stubbs, B
Year
2018
Title
Physical activity and incident depression: A meta-analysis of prospective cohort studies
Description
This meta-analysis of prospective cohorts showed that higher physical activity predicts lower risk of developing depression across ages and continents. It moved exercise from treatment into primary prevention of mental illness. It is the most cited prevention estimate in the field. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(7), 631-648
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2018.17111194
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2018.17111194
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Schuch, F. B., Vancampfort, D., Firth, J., Rosenbaum, S., Ward, P. B., Silva, E. S., Hallgren, M., Ponce De Leon, A., Dunn, A. L., Deslandes, A. C., Fleck, M. P., Carvalho, A. F., & Stubbs, B. (2018). Physical activity and incident depression: A meta-analysis of prospective cohort studies. American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(7), 631-648. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2018.17111194
REF-389 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise and the prevention of depression: Results of the HUNT cohort study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Following about 34,000 healthy adults for 11 years, this study estimated that a modest amount of regular exercise could have prevented a meaningful share of depression cases. It produced the widely quoted population attributable fraction for inactivity and depression. It is a key Australian-led contribution to prevention evidence. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Harvey, S. B., Øverland, S., Hatch, S. L., Wessely, S., Mykletun, A., & Hotopf, M. (2018). Exercise and the prevention of depression: Results of the HUNT cohort study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(1), 28-36. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2017.16111223

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-389
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Harvey, S. B., Øverland, S., Hatch, S. L., Wessely, S., Mykletun, A., & Hotopf, M
Year
2018
Title
Exercise and the prevention of depression: Results of the HUNT cohort study
Description
Following about 34,000 healthy adults for 11 years, this study estimated that a modest amount of regular exercise could have prevented a meaningful share of depression cases. It produced the widely quoted population attributable fraction for inactivity and depression. It is a key Australian-led contribution to prevention evidence. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(1), 28-36
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Norway
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2017.16111223
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2017.16111223
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Harvey, S. B., Øverland, S., Hatch, S. L., Wessely, S., Mykletun, A., & Hotopf, M. (2018). Exercise and the prevention of depression: Results of the HUNT cohort study. American Journal of Psychiatry, 175(1), 28-36. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.2017.16111223
REF-390 Paper, guideline or statement

The Lancet Psychiatry Commission: A blueprint for protecting physical health in people with mental illness

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

This Commission set out the scale of premature mortality in people with mental illness and a blueprint of lifestyle, screening and service actions to reduce it. It is the definitive statement of the physical health gap in psychiatry. It shaped Equally Well style programs internationally. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Firth, J., Siddiqi, N., Koyanagi, A., Siskind, D., Rosenbaum, S., Galletly, C., Allan, S., Caneo, C., Carney, R., Carvalho, A. F., Chatterton, M. L., Correll, C. U., Curtis, J., Gaughran, F., Heald, A., Hoare, E., Jackson, S. E., Kisely, S., Lovell, K., ... Stubbs, B. (2019). The Lancet Psychiatry Commission: A blueprint for protecting physical health in people with mental illness. The Lancet Psychiatry, 6(8), 675-712. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(19)30132-4

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-390
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Firth, J., Siddiqi, N., Koyanagi, A., Siskind, D., Rosenbaum, S., Galletly, C., Allan, S., Caneo, C., Carney, R., Carvalho, A. F., Chatterton, M. L., Correll, C. U., Curtis, J., Gaughran, F., Heald, A., Hoare, E., Jackson, S. E., Kisely, S., Lovell, K., ... Stubbs, B
Year
2019
Title
The Lancet Psychiatry Commission: A blueprint for protecting physical health in people with mental illness
Description
This Commission set out the scale of premature mortality in people with mental illness and a blueprint of lifestyle, screening and service actions to reduce it. It is the definitive statement of the physical health gap in psychiatry. It shaped Equally Well style programs internationally. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Psychiatry, 6(8), 675-712
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Sleep; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(19)30132-4
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(19)30132-4
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-301; REF-496; REF-501
Full APA reference
Firth, J., Siddiqi, N., Koyanagi, A., Siskind, D., Rosenbaum, S., Galletly, C., Allan, S., Caneo, C., Carney, R., Carvalho, A. F., Chatterton, M. L., Correll, C. U., Curtis, J., Gaughran, F., Heald, A., Hoare, E., Jackson, S. E., Kisely, S., Lovell, K., ... Stubbs, B. (2019). The Lancet Psychiatry Commission: A blueprint for protecting physical health in people with mental illness. The Lancet Psychiatry, 6(8), 675-712. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(19)30132-4
REF-391 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine for depression

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This review set out the first integrated lifestyle medicine model for depression covering diet, exercise, sleep, smoking, alcohol, and social and environmental factors. It named and framed the field that later became lifestyle psychiatry. It is the most cited conceptual paper in that transition. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Sarris, J., O'Neil, A., Coulson, C. E., Schweitzer, I., & Berk, M. (2014). Lifestyle medicine for depression. BMC Psychiatry, 14, 107. https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-244X-14-107

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-391
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sarris, J., O'Neil, A., Coulson, C. E., Schweitzer, I., & Berk, M
Year
2014
Title
Lifestyle medicine for depression
Description
This review set out the first integrated lifestyle medicine model for depression covering diet, exercise, sleep, smoking, alcohol, and social and environmental factors. It named and framed the field that later became lifestyle psychiatry. It is the most cited conceptual paper in that transition. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
BMC Psychiatry, 14, 107
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-244X-14-107
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-244X-14-107
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Sarris, J., O'Neil, A., Coulson, C. E., Schweitzer, I., & Berk, M. (2014). Lifestyle medicine for depression. BMC Psychiatry, 14, 107. https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-244X-14-107
REF-392 Paper, guideline or statement

Relationship of childhood abuse and household dysfunction to many of the leading causes of death in adults: The Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACE) Study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

The ACE Study showed a graded relationship between childhood adversity and adult smoking, obesity, depression, suicide attempts and chronic disease. It is the foundation of trauma-informed practice across health and social services. It explains why health behaviour is not simply a matter of choice. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Felitti, V. J., Anda, R. F., Nordenberg, D., Williamson, D. F., Spitz, A. M., Edwards, V., Koss, M. P., & Marks, J. S. (1998). Relationship of childhood abuse and household dysfunction to many of the leading causes of death in adults: The Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACE) Study. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 14(4), 245-258. https://doi.org/10.1016/s0749-3797(98)00017-8

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-392
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Felitti, V. J., Anda, R. F., Nordenberg, D., Williamson, D. F., Spitz, A. M., Edwards, V., Koss, M. P., & Marks, J. S
Year
1998
Title
Relationship of childhood abuse and household dysfunction to many of the leading causes of death in adults: The Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACE) Study
Description
The ACE Study showed a graded relationship between childhood adversity and adult smoking, obesity, depression, suicide attempts and chronic disease. It is the foundation of trauma-informed practice across health and social services. It explains why health behaviour is not simply a matter of choice. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 14(4), 245-258
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/s0749-3797(98)00017-8
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/s0749-3797(98)00017-8
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Felitti, V. J., Anda, R. F., Nordenberg, D., Williamson, D. F., Spitz, A. M., Edwards, V., Koss, M. P., & Marks, J. S. (1998). Relationship of childhood abuse and household dysfunction to many of the leading causes of death in adults: The Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACE) Study. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 14(4), 245-258. https://doi.org/10.1016/s0749-3797(98)00017-8
REF-393 Paper, guideline or statement

Influence of life stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Using the Dunedin birth cohort, this paper showed that the effect of stressful life events on depression varied by genotype. It launched a generation of gene-environment interaction research and debate about replication. It is the classic demonstration that environment and biology act together rather than separately. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.

Full APA reference

Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., Harrington, H., McClay, J., Mill, J., Martin, J., Braithwaite, A., & Poulton, R. (2003). Influence of life stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene. Science, 301(5631), 386-389. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1083968

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-393
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., Harrington, H., McClay, J., Mill, J., Martin, J., Braithwaite, A., & Poulton, R
Year
2003
Title
Influence of life stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene
Description
Using the Dunedin birth cohort, this paper showed that the effect of stressful life events on depression varied by genotype. It launched a generation of gene-environment interaction research and debate about replication. It is the classic demonstration that environment and biology act together rather than separately. It is held here as a landmark work in lifestyle psychiatry.
Publication or publisher
Science, 301(5631), 386-389
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1083968
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1083968
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., Harrington, H., McClay, J., Mill, J., Martin, J., Braithwaite, A., & Poulton, R. (2003). Influence of life stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene. Science, 301(5631), 386-389. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1083968
REF-394 Paper, guideline or statement

Sick individuals and sick populations

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Rose distinguished the causes of individual cases from the causes of population incidence and set out the prevention paradox. It is the intellectual basis for population-wide prevention rather than high-risk screening alone. It remains the single most quoted argument in preventive medicine. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.

Full APA reference

Rose, G. (1985). Sick individuals and sick populations. International Journal of Epidemiology, 14(1), 32-38. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/14.1.32

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-394
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rose, G
Year
1985
Title
Sick individuals and sick populations
Description
Rose distinguished the causes of individual cases from the causes of population incidence and set out the prevention paradox. It is the intellectual basis for population-wide prevention rather than high-risk screening alone. It remains the single most quoted argument in preventive medicine. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 14(1), 32-38
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/14.1.32
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/14.1.32
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Rose, G. (1985). Sick individuals and sick populations. International Journal of Epidemiology, 14(1), 32-38. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/14.1.32
REF-395 Paper, guideline or statement

Actual causes of death in the United States

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

This paper reattributed deaths from disease categories to their behavioural and environmental causes, headed by tobacco, diet and inactivity. It reframed mortality statistics around modifiable causes. It gave prevention advocates their central table of evidence. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.

Full APA reference

McGinnis, J. M., & Foege, W. H. (1993). Actual causes of death in the United States. JAMA, 270(18), 2207-2212. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8411605/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-395
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McGinnis, J. M., & Foege, W. H
Year
1993
Title
Actual causes of death in the United States
Description
This paper reattributed deaths from disease categories to their behavioural and environmental causes, headed by tobacco, diet and inactivity. It reframed mortality statistics around modifiable causes. It gave prevention advocates their central table of evidence. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 270(18), 2207-2212
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8411605/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
McGinnis, J. M., & Foege, W. H. (1993). Actual causes of death in the United States. JAMA, 270(18), 2207-2212. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8411605/
REF-396 Paper, guideline or statement

Social conditions as fundamental causes of disease

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Link and Phelan argued that socioeconomic conditions are fundamental causes because they shape access to the resources that avoid risk, so inequalities persist even as specific risk factors change. It explains why behavioural interventions alone do not close health gaps. It is the dominant theory in health inequality research. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.

Full APA reference

Link, B. G., & Phelan, J. (1995). Social conditions as fundamental causes of disease. Journal of Health and Social Behavior, Spec No, 80-94. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/7560851/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-396
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Link, B. G., & Phelan, J
Year
1995
Title
Social conditions as fundamental causes of disease
Description
Link and Phelan argued that socioeconomic conditions are fundamental causes because they shape access to the resources that avoid risk, so inequalities persist even as specific risk factors change. It explains why behavioural interventions alone do not close health gaps. It is the dominant theory in health inequality research. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Health and Social Behavior, Spec No, 80-94
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/7560851/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Link, B. G., & Phelan, J. (1995). Social conditions as fundamental causes of disease. Journal of Health and Social Behavior, Spec No, 80-94. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/7560851/
REF-397 Paper, guideline or statement

Theories for social epidemiology in the 21st century: An ecosocial perspective

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Krieger set out ecosocial theory and the idea of embodiment, that social conditions become biology across levels and over time. It gave social epidemiology an explicit theoretical framework and a critique of purely individual explanations. It is the standard citation for multilevel causal thinking about health. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.

Full APA reference

Krieger, N. (2001). Theories for social epidemiology in the 21st century: An ecosocial perspective. International Journal of Epidemiology, 30(4), 668-677. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/30.4.668

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-397
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Krieger, N
Year
2001
Title
Theories for social epidemiology in the 21st century: An ecosocial perspective
Description
Krieger set out ecosocial theory and the idea of embodiment, that social conditions become biology across levels and over time. It gave social epidemiology an explicit theoretical framework and a critique of purely individual explanations. It is the standard citation for multilevel causal thinking about health. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 30(4), 668-677
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/30.4.668
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/30.4.668
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Krieger, N. (2001). Theories for social epidemiology in the 21st century: An ecosocial perspective. International Journal of Epidemiology, 30(4), 668-677. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/30.4.668
REF-398 Paper, guideline or statement

"Weathering" and age patterns of allostatic load scores among blacks and whites in the United States

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This study showed higher and earlier-rising allostatic load in Black Americans, consistent with cumulative stress from social disadvantage and racism. It gave the weathering hypothesis biological measurement. It is a key reference for racism as a determinant of physical health. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.

Full APA reference

Geronimus, A. T., Hicken, M., Keene, D., & Bound, J. (2006). "Weathering" and age patterns of allostatic load scores among blacks and whites in the United States. American Journal of Public Health, 96(5), 826-833. https://doi.org/10.2105/AJPH.2004.060749

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-398
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Geronimus, A. T., Hicken, M., Keene, D., & Bound, J
Year
2006
Title
"Weathering" and age patterns of allostatic load scores among blacks and whites in the United States
Description
This study showed higher and earlier-rising allostatic load in Black Americans, consistent with cumulative stress from social disadvantage and racism. It gave the weathering hypothesis biological measurement. It is a key reference for racism as a determinant of physical health. It is held here as a foundational text in social epidemiology and health equity.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Public Health, 96(5), 826-833
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.2105/AJPH.2004.060749
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2105/AJPH.2004.060749
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-508
Full APA reference
Geronimus, A. T., Hicken, M., Keene, D., & Bound, J. (2006). "Weathering" and age patterns of allostatic load scores among blacks and whites in the United States. American Journal of Public Health, 96(5), 826-833. https://doi.org/10.2105/AJPH.2004.060749
REF-399 Paper, guideline or statement

The behaviour change wheel: A new method for characterising and designing behaviour change interventions

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

This paper introduced the COM-B model and the Behaviour Change Wheel, now the default framework for designing behaviour change interventions and policy. It synthesised 19 existing frameworks into one usable system. It is the most widely applied intervention design tool in health behaviour work. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.

Full APA reference

Michie, S., van Stralen, M. M., & West, R. (2011). The behaviour change wheel: A new method for characterising and designing behaviour change interventions. Implementation Science, 6, 42. https://doi.org/10.1186/1748-5908-6-42

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-399
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Michie, S., van Stralen, M. M., & West, R
Year
2011
Title
The behaviour change wheel: A new method for characterising and designing behaviour change interventions
Description
This paper introduced the COM-B model and the Behaviour Change Wheel, now the default framework for designing behaviour change interventions and policy. It synthesised 19 existing frameworks into one usable system. It is the most widely applied intervention design tool in health behaviour work. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.
Publication or publisher
Implementation Science, 6, 42
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1186/1748-5908-6-42
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/1748-5908-6-42
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Michie, S., van Stralen, M. M., & West, R. (2011). The behaviour change wheel: A new method for characterising and designing behaviour change interventions. Implementation Science, 6, 42. https://doi.org/10.1186/1748-5908-6-42
REF-400 Paper, guideline or statement

The behavior change technique taxonomy (v1) of 93 hierarchically clustered techniques: Building an international consensus for the reporting of behavior change interventions

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

This taxonomy created a shared language of 93 defined behaviour change techniques so interventions can be described, replicated and compared. It transformed reporting standards in behavioural trials. It is the parent of the Behaviour Change Technique Ontology. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.

Full APA reference

Michie, S., Richardson, M., Johnston, M., Abraham, C., Francis, J., Hardeman, W., Eccles, M. P., Cane, J., & Wood, C. E. (2013). The behavior change technique taxonomy (v1) of 93 hierarchically clustered techniques: Building an international consensus for the reporting of behavior change interventions. Annals of Behavioral Medicine, 46(1), 81-95. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12160-013-9486-6

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-400
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Michie, S., Richardson, M., Johnston, M., Abraham, C., Francis, J., Hardeman, W., Eccles, M. P., Cane, J., & Wood, C. E
Year
2013
Title
The behavior change technique taxonomy (v1) of 93 hierarchically clustered techniques: Building an international consensus for the reporting of behavior change interventions
Description
This taxonomy created a shared language of 93 defined behaviour change techniques so interventions can be described, replicated and compared. It transformed reporting standards in behavioural trials. It is the parent of the Behaviour Change Technique Ontology. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.
Publication or publisher
Annals of Behavioral Medicine, 46(1), 81-95
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12160-013-9486-6
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12160-013-9486-6
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Michie, S., Richardson, M., Johnston, M., Abraham, C., Francis, J., Hardeman, W., Eccles, M. P., Cane, J., & Wood, C. E. (2013). The behavior change technique taxonomy (v1) of 93 hierarchically clustered techniques: Building an international consensus for the reporting of behavior change interventions. Annals of Behavioral Medicine, 46(1), 81-95. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12160-013-9486-6
REF-401 Paper, guideline or statement

Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic motivation, social development, and well-being

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This paper set out autonomy, competence and relatedness as the basic psychological needs that drive sustained motivation. It is the theoretical foundation for autonomy-supportive counselling, health coaching and motivational interviewing. It explains why externally imposed lifestyle advice often fails. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.

Full APA reference

Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2000). Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic motivation, social development, and well-being. American Psychologist, 55(1), 68-78. https://doi.org/10.1037/0003-066X.55.1.68

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-401
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L
Year
2000
Title
Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic motivation, social development, and well-being
Description
This paper set out autonomy, competence and relatedness as the basic psychological needs that drive sustained motivation. It is the theoretical foundation for autonomy-supportive counselling, health coaching and motivational interviewing. It explains why externally imposed lifestyle advice often fails. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.
Publication or publisher
American Psychologist, 55(1), 68-78
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1037/0003-066X.55.1.68
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1037/0003-066X.55.1.68
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2000). Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic motivation, social development, and well-being. American Psychologist, 55(1), 68-78. https://doi.org/10.1037/0003-066X.55.1.68
REF-402 Paper, guideline or statement

Health promotion by social cognitive means

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Bandura set out how self-efficacy, outcome expectations, goals and perceived barriers govern health behaviour, and how these operate at individual and social levels. Self-efficacy remains the most used construct in behaviour change measurement. The paper connects individual agency with structural enablers. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.

Full APA reference

Bandura, A. (2004). Health promotion by social cognitive means. Health Education & Behavior, 31(2), 143-164. https://doi.org/10.1177/1090198104263660

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-402
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bandura, A
Year
2004
Title
Health promotion by social cognitive means
Description
Bandura set out how self-efficacy, outcome expectations, goals and perceived barriers govern health behaviour, and how these operate at individual and social levels. Self-efficacy remains the most used construct in behaviour change measurement. The paper connects individual agency with structural enablers. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.
Publication or publisher
Health Education & Behavior, 31(2), 143-164
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1177/1090198104263660
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/1090198104263660
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Bandura, A. (2004). Health promotion by social cognitive means. Health Education & Behavior, 31(2), 143-164. https://doi.org/10.1177/1090198104263660
REF-403 Paper, guideline or statement

Stages and processes of self-change of smoking: Toward an integrative model of change

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • General health

This paper introduced the stages of change that became the transtheoretical model, still the most recognised framework in routine lifestyle counselling. It reframed change as a process with relapse rather than a single decision. It shaped smoking cessation and brief intervention practice worldwide. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.

Full APA reference

Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C. (1983). Stages and processes of self-change of smoking: Toward an integrative model of change. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 51(3), 390-395. https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ283694

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-403
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C
Year
1983
Title
Stages and processes of self-change of smoking: Toward an integrative model of change
Description
This paper introduced the stages of change that became the transtheoretical model, still the most recognised framework in routine lifestyle counselling. It reframed change as a process with relapse rather than a single decision. It shaped smoking cessation and brief intervention practice worldwide. It is held here as a foundational behaviour change framework used across lifestyle interventions.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 51(3), 390-395
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ283694
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C. (1983). Stages and processes of self-change of smoking: Toward an integrative model of change. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 51(3), 390-395. https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ283694
REF-404 Paper, guideline or statement

Declaration of Alma-Ata

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Alma-Ata declared health a fundamental human right, defined primary health care, and named social and economic development as health issues. It is the origin of "Health for All" and of comprehensive primary care. It remains the founding document of modern global public health policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (1978). Declaration of Alma-Ata. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/teams/social-determinants-of-health/declaration-of-alma-ata

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-404
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
1978
Title
Declaration of Alma-Ata
Description
Alma-Ata declared health a fundamental human right, defined primary health care, and named social and economic development as health issues. It is the origin of "Health for All" and of comprehensive primary care. It remains the founding document of modern global public health policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/teams/social-determinants-of-health/declaration-of-alma-ata
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (1978). Declaration of Alma-Ata. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/teams/social-determinants-of-health/declaration-of-alma-ata
REF-405 Paper, guideline or statement

Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 1986 (WHO/EURO:1986-4044-43803-61677)

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

The Ottawa Charter defined health promotion and its five action areas, including building healthy public policy and creating supportive environments. It moved health promotion beyond education toward structural action. It is the reference framework for national and state health promotion strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe. (1986). Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 1986 (WHO/EURO:1986-4044-43803-61677). World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/349652

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-405
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe
Year
1986
Title
Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 1986 (WHO/EURO:1986-4044-43803-61677)
Description
The Ottawa Charter defined health promotion and its five action areas, including building healthy public policy and creating supportive environments. It moved health promotion beyond education toward structural action. It is the reference framework for national and state health promotion strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/349652
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe. (1986). Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 1986 (WHO/EURO:1986-4044-43803-61677). World Health Organization, Regional Office for Europe. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/349652
REF-406 Paper, guideline or statement

A new perspective on the health of Canadians: A working document

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

The Lalonde Report was the first national government document to argue that lifestyle and environment matter more to health than health care organisation. It introduced the health field concept that made prevention a legitimate policy domain. It is generally treated as the start of modern health promotion policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Health Canada. (1974). A new perspective on the health of Canadians: A working document. Government of Canada. https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/health-care-system/commissions-inquiries/federal-commissions-health-care/new-perspective-health-canadians-lalonde-report.html

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-406
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Health Canada
Year
1974
Title
A new perspective on the health of Canadians: A working document
Description
The Lalonde Report was the first national government document to argue that lifestyle and environment matter more to health than health care organisation. It introduced the health field concept that made prevention a legitimate policy domain. It is generally treated as the start of modern health promotion policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
Government of Canada
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/health-care-system/commissions-inquiries/federal-commissions-health-care/new-perspective-health-canadians-lalonde-report.html
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Health Canada. (1974). A new perspective on the health of Canadians: A working document. Government of Canada. https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/health-care-system/commissions-inquiries/federal-commissions-health-care/new-perspective-health-canadians-lalonde-report.html
REF-407 Paper, guideline or statement

Global action plan for the prevention and control of noncommunicable diseases 2013-2020

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

This action plan set the global voluntary targets for tobacco, alcohol, salt, inactivity, blood pressure, diabetes and obesity, and the accountability framework behind them. It is the instrument under which member states report NCD progress. It defines the shared architecture of national NCD strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2013). Global action plan for the prevention and control of noncommunicable diseases 2013-2020. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/94384

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-407
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2013
Title
Global action plan for the prevention and control of noncommunicable diseases 2013-2020
Description
This action plan set the global voluntary targets for tobacco, alcohol, salt, inactivity, blood pressure, diabetes and obesity, and the accountability framework behind them. It is the instrument under which member states report NCD progress. It defines the shared architecture of national NCD strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/94384
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2013). Global action plan for the prevention and control of noncommunicable diseases 2013-2020. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/94384
REF-408 Paper, guideline or statement

Global action plan on physical activity 2018-2030: More active people for a healthier world

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

This plan set the target of a 15 per cent relative reduction in physical inactivity and four policy action areas covering active societies, environments, people and systems. It is the main international policy instrument for physical activity. It gives governments a whole-of-system rather than education-only approach. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2018). Global action plan on physical activity 2018-2030: More active people for a healthier world. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/272722

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-408
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2018
Title
Global action plan on physical activity 2018-2030: More active people for a healthier world
Description
This plan set the target of a 15 per cent relative reduction in physical inactivity and four policy action areas covering active societies, environments, people and systems. It is the main international policy instrument for physical activity. It gives governments a whole-of-system rather than education-only approach. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/272722
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2018). Global action plan on physical activity 2018-2030: More active people for a healthier world. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/272722
REF-409 Paper, guideline or statement

Comprehensive mental health action plan 2013-2030

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This is the extended global plan for mental health, with targets on leadership, community-based services, promotion and prevention, and information systems. It commits member states to integrating mental health into general health and social policy. It is the reference document for national mental health strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2021). Comprehensive mental health action plan 2013-2030. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/345301

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-409
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2021
Title
Comprehensive mental health action plan 2013-2030
Description
This is the extended global plan for mental health, with targets on leadership, community-based services, promotion and prevention, and information systems. It commits member states to integrating mental health into general health and social policy. It is the reference document for national mental health strategies. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/345301
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2021). Comprehensive mental health action plan 2013-2030. World Health Organization. https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/345301
REF-410 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

The FCTC is the first treaty negotiated under WHO auspices and covers taxation, advertising bans, packaging, smoke-free environments and industry interference. It is the strongest example of a binding international instrument to change a health behaviour. It set the template now argued for alcohol and food. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2003). WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control. World Health Organization. https://fctc.who.int/resources/publications/i/item/9241591013

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-410
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2003
Title
WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control
Description
The FCTC is the first treaty negotiated under WHO auspices and covers taxation, advertising bans, packaging, smoke-free environments and industry interference. It is the strongest example of a binding international instrument to change a health behaviour. It set the template now argued for alcohol and food. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://fctc.who.int/resources/publications/i/item/9241591013
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2003). WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control. World Health Organization. https://fctc.who.int/resources/publications/i/item/9241591013
REF-411 Paper, guideline or statement

The Lancet Commission on global mental health and sustainable development

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This Commission reframed mental health as a global development priority, set out a staged, dimensional approach to care and made the economic case for investment. It positioned social determinants and human rights at the centre of mental health policy. It is the field's defining policy document of the last decade. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Patel, V., Saxena, S., Lund, C., Thornicroft, G., Baingana, F., Bolton, P., Chisholm, D., Collins, P. Y., Cooper, J. L., Eaton, J., Herrman, H., Herzallah, M. M., Huang, Y., Jordans, M. J. D., Kleinman, A., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Niaz, U., Omigbodun, O., ... Unützer, J. (2018). The Lancet Commission on global mental health and sustainable development. The Lancet, 392(10157), 1553-1598. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31612-X

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-411
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Patel, V., Saxena, S., Lund, C., Thornicroft, G., Baingana, F., Bolton, P., Chisholm, D., Collins, P. Y., Cooper, J. L., Eaton, J., Herrman, H., Herzallah, M. M., Huang, Y., Jordans, M. J. D., Kleinman, A., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Niaz, U., Omigbodun, O., ... Unützer, J
Year
2018
Title
The Lancet Commission on global mental health and sustainable development
Description
This Commission reframed mental health as a global development priority, set out a staged, dimensional approach to care and made the economic case for investment. It positioned social determinants and human rights at the centre of mental health policy. It is the field's defining policy document of the last decade. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 392(10157), 1553-1598
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31612-X
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31612-X
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Patel, V., Saxena, S., Lund, C., Thornicroft, G., Baingana, F., Bolton, P., Chisholm, D., Collins, P. Y., Cooper, J. L., Eaton, J., Herrman, H., Herzallah, M. M., Huang, Y., Jordans, M. J. D., Kleinman, A., Medina-Mora, M. E., Morgan, E., Niaz, U., Omigbodun, O., ... Unützer, J. (2018). The Lancet Commission on global mental health and sustainable development. The Lancet, 392(10157), 1553-1598. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(18)31612-X
REF-412 Paper, guideline or statement

The Lancet Commission on ending stigma and discrimination in mental health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This Commission synthesised global evidence on mental health stigma and set out what actually reduces it, with a central role for people with lived experience. It links stigma to exclusion from physical health care and employment. It is now the standard reference for anti-stigma policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Thornicroft, G., Sunkel, C., Alikhon Aliev, A., Baker, S., Brohan, E., El Chammay, R., Davies, K., Demissie, M., Duncan, J., Fekadu, W., Gronholm, P. C., Guerrero, Z., Gurung, D., Habtamu, K., Hanlon, C., Heim, E., Henderson, C., Hijazi, Z., Hoffman, C., ... Winkler, P. (2022). The Lancet Commission on ending stigma and discrimination in mental health. The Lancet, 400(10361), 1438-1480. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(22)01470-2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-412
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Thornicroft, G., Sunkel, C., Alikhon Aliev, A., Baker, S., Brohan, E., El Chammay, R., Davies, K., Demissie, M., Duncan, J., Fekadu, W., Gronholm, P. C., Guerrero, Z., Gurung, D., Habtamu, K., Hanlon, C., Heim, E., Henderson, C., Hijazi, Z., Hoffman, C., ... Winkler, P
Year
2022
Title
The Lancet Commission on ending stigma and discrimination in mental health
Description
This Commission synthesised global evidence on mental health stigma and set out what actually reduces it, with a central role for people with lived experience. It links stigma to exclusion from physical health care and employment. It is now the standard reference for anti-stigma policy. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 400(10361), 1438-1480
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(22)01470-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(22)01470-2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-593
Full APA reference
Thornicroft, G., Sunkel, C., Alikhon Aliev, A., Baker, S., Brohan, E., El Chammay, R., Davies, K., Demissie, M., Duncan, J., Fekadu, W., Gronholm, P. C., Guerrero, Z., Gurung, D., Habtamu, K., Hanlon, C., Heim, E., Henderson, C., Hijazi, Z., Hoffman, C., ... Winkler, P. (2022). The Lancet Commission on ending stigma and discrimination in mental health. The Lancet, 400(10361), 1438-1480. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(22)01470-2
REF-413 Paper, guideline or statement

Dementia prevention, intervention, and care: 2024 report of the Lancet standing Commission

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

This report identifies 14 modifiable risk factors accounting for close to half of dementia cases worldwide, including hearing loss, education, physical inactivity, air pollution and social isolation. It is the definitive statement that dementia is substantially preventable. It drives dementia risk reduction policy in most countries. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Livingston, G., Huntley, J., Liu, K. Y., Costafreda, S. G., Selbæk, G., Alladi, S., Ames, D., Banerjee, S., Burns, A., Brayne, C., Fox, N. C., Ferri, C. P., Gitlin, L. N., Howard, R., Kales, H. C., Kivimäki, M., Larson, E. B., Nakasujja, N., Rockwood, K., ... Mukadam, N. (2024). Dementia prevention, intervention, and care: 2024 report of the Lancet standing Commission. The Lancet, 404(10452), 572-628. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)01296-0

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-413
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Livingston, G., Huntley, J., Liu, K. Y., Costafreda, S. G., Selbæk, G., Alladi, S., Ames, D., Banerjee, S., Burns, A., Brayne, C., Fox, N. C., Ferri, C. P., Gitlin, L. N., Howard, R., Kales, H. C., Kivimäki, M., Larson, E. B., Nakasujja, N., Rockwood, K., ... Mukadam, N
Year
2024
Title
Dementia prevention, intervention, and care: 2024 report of the Lancet standing Commission
Description
This report identifies 14 modifiable risk factors accounting for close to half of dementia cases worldwide, including hearing loss, education, physical inactivity, air pollution and social isolation. It is the definitive statement that dementia is substantially preventable. It drives dementia risk reduction policy in most countries. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 404(10452), 572-628
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)01296-0
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)01296-0
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
REF-457
Full APA reference
Livingston, G., Huntley, J., Liu, K. Y., Costafreda, S. G., Selbæk, G., Alladi, S., Ames, D., Banerjee, S., Burns, A., Brayne, C., Fox, N. C., Ferri, C. P., Gitlin, L. N., Howard, R., Kales, H. C., Kivimäki, M., Larson, E. B., Nakasujja, N., Rockwood, K., ... Mukadam, N. (2024). Dementia prevention, intervention, and care: 2024 report of the Lancet standing Commission. The Lancet, 404(10452), 572-628. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(24)01296-0
REF-414 Paper, guideline or statement

National Agreement on Closing the Gap

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The National Agreement is the first Closing the Gap framework negotiated in partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peak bodies, with four priority reforms and socioeconomic outcome targets. It formalises shared decision making and community control. It governs how Australian governments must act on Indigenous health and wellbeing. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Coalition of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peak Organisations & Australian governments. (2020). National Agreement on Closing the Gap. Australian Government. https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-414
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Coalition of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peak Organisations & Australian governments
Year
2020
Title
National Agreement on Closing the Gap
Description
The National Agreement is the first Closing the Gap framework negotiated in partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peak bodies, with four priority reforms and socioeconomic outcome targets. It formalises shared decision making and community control. It governs how Australian governments must act on Indigenous health and wellbeing. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
Australian Government
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
GOV-022; REF-493; REF-494; REF-498; GOV-025
Full APA reference
Coalition of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peak Organisations & Australian governments. (2020). National Agreement on Closing the Gap. Australian Government. https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement
Same document as
GOV-025
REF-415 Paper, guideline or statement

Close the Gap Campaign Report 2025: Agency, leadership, reform. Ensuring the survival, dignity and wellbeing of First Nations peoples

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The annual Close the Gap Campaign Report is the leading community-controlled assessment of progress on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health equity, distinct from government reporting. It centres self-determination, culture and community control as health determinants. It is the standard civil society reference in this area. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Close the Gap Campaign Alliance. (2025). Close the Gap Campaign Report 2025: Agency, leadership, reform. Ensuring the survival, dignity and wellbeing of First Nations peoples. Lowitja Institute. https://lowitja.org.au/resource/close-the-gap-campaign-report-2025-agency-leadership-reform-ensuring-the-survival-dignity-and-wellbeing-of-first-nations-peoples/

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-415
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Close the Gap Campaign Alliance
Year
2025
Title
Close the Gap Campaign Report 2025: Agency, leadership, reform. Ensuring the survival, dignity and wellbeing of First Nations peoples
Description
The annual Close the Gap Campaign Report is the leading community-controlled assessment of progress on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health equity, distinct from government reporting. It centres self-determination, culture and community control as health determinants. It is the standard civil society reference in this area. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
Lowitja Institute
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://lowitja.org.au/resource/close-the-gap-campaign-report-2025-agency-leadership-reform-ensuring-the-survival-dignity-and-wellbeing-of-first-nations-peoples/
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Close the Gap Campaign Alliance. (2025). Close the Gap Campaign Report 2025: Agency, leadership, reform. Ensuring the survival, dignity and wellbeing of First Nations peoples. Lowitja Institute. https://lowitja.org.au/resource/close-the-gap-campaign-report-2025-agency-leadership-reform-ensuring-the-survival-dignity-and-wellbeing-of-first-nations-peoples/
REF-416 Paper, guideline or statement

Study protocol: Our Cultures Count, the Mayi Kuwayu Study, a national longitudinal study of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander wellbeing

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Mayi Kuwayu is the first large national longitudinal study designed to measure how culture, connection to Country and language relate to Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health and wellbeing. It was designed and governed by Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander researchers and communities. It created the measures now used across Indigenous wellbeing research. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.

Full APA reference

Jones, R., Thurber, K. A., Chapman, J., D'Este, C., Dunbar, T., Wenitong, M., Eades, S. J., Strelein, L., Davey, M., Du, W., Olsen, A., Smylie, J. K., Banks, E., & Lovett, R. (2018). Study protocol: Our Cultures Count, the Mayi Kuwayu Study, a national longitudinal study of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander wellbeing. BMJ Open, 8(6), e023861. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2018-023861

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-416
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jones, R., Thurber, K. A., Chapman, J., D'Este, C., Dunbar, T., Wenitong, M., Eades, S. J., Strelein, L., Davey, M., Du, W., Olsen, A., Smylie, J. K., Banks, E., & Lovett, R
Year
2018
Title
Study protocol: Our Cultures Count, the Mayi Kuwayu Study, a national longitudinal study of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander wellbeing
Description
Mayi Kuwayu is the first large national longitudinal study designed to measure how culture, connection to Country and language relate to Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health and wellbeing. It was designed and governed by Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander researchers and communities. It created the measures now used across Indigenous wellbeing research. It is held here as a landmark policy instrument shaping lifestyle and public health practice.
Publication or publisher
BMJ Open, 8(6), e023861
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2018-023861
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2018-023861
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Related items
GOV-022
Full APA reference
Jones, R., Thurber, K. A., Chapman, J., D'Este, C., Dunbar, T., Wenitong, M., Eades, S. J., Strelein, L., Davey, M., Du, W., Olsen, A., Smylie, J. K., Banks, E., & Lovett, R. (2018). Study protocol: Our Cultures Count, the Mayi Kuwayu Study, a national longitudinal study of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander wellbeing. BMJ Open, 8(6), e023861. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2018-023861
REF-417 Paper, guideline or statement

Safeguarding human health in the Anthropocene epoch: Report of The Rockefeller Foundation-Lancet Commission on planetary health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nature and environment
  • General health

This Commission defined planetary health and showed how human health depends on natural systems that human activity is degrading. It created the field's name, framing and research agenda. It is the founding document cited by later climate and health work. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Whitmee, S., Haines, A., Beyrer, C., Boltz, F., Capon, A. G., de Souza Dias, B. F., Ezeh, A., Frumkin, H., Gong, P., Head, P., Horton, R., Mace, G. M., Marten, R., Myers, S. S., Nishtar, S., Osofsky, S. A., Pattanayak, S. K., Pongsiri, M. J., Romanelli, C., ... Yach, D. (2015). Safeguarding human health in the Anthropocene epoch: Report of The Rockefeller Foundation-Lancet Commission on planetary health. The Lancet, 386(10007), 1973-2028. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60901-1

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-417
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Whitmee, S., Haines, A., Beyrer, C., Boltz, F., Capon, A. G., de Souza Dias, B. F., Ezeh, A., Frumkin, H., Gong, P., Head, P., Horton, R., Mace, G. M., Marten, R., Myers, S. S., Nishtar, S., Osofsky, S. A., Pattanayak, S. K., Pongsiri, M. J., Romanelli, C., ... Yach, D
Year
2015
Title
Safeguarding human health in the Anthropocene epoch: Report of The Rockefeller Foundation-Lancet Commission on planetary health
Description
This Commission defined planetary health and showed how human health depends on natural systems that human activity is degrading. It created the field's name, framing and research agenda. It is the founding document cited by later climate and health work. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 386(10007), 1973-2028
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60901-1
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60901-1
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Whitmee, S., Haines, A., Beyrer, C., Boltz, F., Capon, A. G., de Souza Dias, B. F., Ezeh, A., Frumkin, H., Gong, P., Head, P., Horton, R., Mace, G. M., Marten, R., Myers, S. S., Nishtar, S., Osofsky, S. A., Pattanayak, S. K., Pongsiri, M. J., Romanelli, C., ... Yach, D. (2015). Safeguarding human health in the Anthropocene epoch: Report of The Rockefeller Foundation-Lancet Commission on planetary health. The Lancet, 386(10007), 1973-2028. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(15)60901-1
REF-418 Paper, guideline or statement

The Lancet Commission on pollution and health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nature and environment
  • General health

This Commission estimated that pollution causes roughly nine million premature deaths a year, mostly from air pollution, and quantified the economic cost. It placed environmental exposure alongside behavioural risk factors in NCD prevention. It is the definitive reference for pollution as a health determinant. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Landrigan, P. J., Fuller, R., Acosta, N. J. R., Adeyi, O., Arnold, R., Basu, N. N., Baldé, A. B., Bertollini, R., Bose-O'Reilly, S., Boufford, J. I., Breysse, P. N., Chiles, T., Mahidol, C., Coll-Seck, A. M., Cropper, M. L., Fobil, J., Fuster, V., Greenstone, M., Haines, A., ... Zhong, M. (2018). The Lancet Commission on pollution and health. The Lancet, 391(10119), 462-512. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32345-0

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-418
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Landrigan, P. J., Fuller, R., Acosta, N. J. R., Adeyi, O., Arnold, R., Basu, N. N., Baldé, A. B., Bertollini, R., Bose-O'Reilly, S., Boufford, J. I., Breysse, P. N., Chiles, T., Mahidol, C., Coll-Seck, A. M., Cropper, M. L., Fobil, J., Fuster, V., Greenstone, M., Haines, A., ... Zhong, M
Year
2018
Title
The Lancet Commission on pollution and health
Description
This Commission estimated that pollution causes roughly nine million premature deaths a year, mostly from air pollution, and quantified the economic cost. It placed environmental exposure alongside behavioural risk factors in NCD prevention. It is the definitive reference for pollution as a health determinant. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 391(10119), 462-512
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32345-0
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32345-0
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Landrigan, P. J., Fuller, R., Acosta, N. J. R., Adeyi, O., Arnold, R., Basu, N. N., Baldé, A. B., Bertollini, R., Bose-O'Reilly, S., Boufford, J. I., Breysse, P. N., Chiles, T., Mahidol, C., Coll-Seck, A. M., Cropper, M. L., Fobil, J., Fuster, V., Greenstone, M., Haines, A., ... Zhong, M. (2018). The Lancet Commission on pollution and health. The Lancet, 391(10119), 462-512. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(17)32345-0
REF-419 Paper, guideline or statement

Defining and conceptualising the commercial determinants of health

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

This paper provides the agreed definition and conceptual model of the commercial determinants of health, covering business practices from marketing to lobbying and supply chains. It made commercial influence a formal object of public health analysis. It is now the standard citation in that literature. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Gilmore, A. B., Fabbri, A., Baum, F., Bertscher, A., Bondy, K., Chang, H.-J., Demaio, S., Erzse, A., Freudenberg, N., Friel, S., Hofman, K. J., Johns, P., Abdool Karim, S., Lacy-Nichols, J., Maranha Paes de Carvalho, C., Marten, R., McKee, M., Petticrew, M., Robertson, L., ... Thow, A. M. (2023). Defining and conceptualising the commercial determinants of health. The Lancet, 401(10383), 1194-1213. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)00013-2

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-419
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gilmore, A. B., Fabbri, A., Baum, F., Bertscher, A., Bondy, K., Chang, H.-J., Demaio, S., Erzse, A., Freudenberg, N., Friel, S., Hofman, K. J., Johns, P., Abdool Karim, S., Lacy-Nichols, J., Maranha Paes de Carvalho, C., Marten, R., McKee, M., Petticrew, M., Robertson, L., ... Thow, A. M
Year
2023
Title
Defining and conceptualising the commercial determinants of health
Description
This paper provides the agreed definition and conceptual model of the commercial determinants of health, covering business practices from marketing to lobbying and supply chains. It made commercial influence a formal object of public health analysis. It is now the standard citation in that literature. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 401(10383), 1194-1213
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)00013-2
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)00013-2
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Gilmore, A. B., Fabbri, A., Baum, F., Bertscher, A., Bondy, K., Chang, H.-J., Demaio, S., Erzse, A., Freudenberg, N., Friel, S., Hofman, K. J., Johns, P., Abdool Karim, S., Lacy-Nichols, J., Maranha Paes de Carvalho, C., Marten, R., McKee, M., Petticrew, M., Robertson, L., ... Thow, A. M. (2023). Defining and conceptualising the commercial determinants of health. The Lancet, 401(10383), 1194-1213. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)00013-2
REF-420 Paper, guideline or statement

Profits and pandemics: Prevention of harmful effects of tobacco, alcohol, and ultra-processed food and drink

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

This paper showed that tobacco, alcohol and ultra-processed food industries use similar tactics, and concluded that self-regulation and partnership approaches do not work. It is the origin of the "corporate playbook" argument in NCD prevention. It shifted policy debate toward regulation and taxation. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Moodie, R., Stuckler, D., Monteiro, C., Sheron, N., Neal, B., Thamarangsi, T., Lincoln, P., & Casswell, S. (2013). Profits and pandemics: Prevention of harmful effects of tobacco, alcohol, and ultra-processed food and drink. The Lancet, 381(9867), 670-679. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)62089-3

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.

All fields
ID
REF-420
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Moodie, R., Stuckler, D., Monteiro, C., Sheron, N., Neal, B., Thamarangsi, T., Lincoln, P., & Casswell, S
Year
2013
Title
Profits and pandemics: Prevention of harmful effects of tobacco, alcohol, and ultra-processed food and drink
Description
This paper showed that tobacco, alcohol and ultra-processed food industries use similar tactics, and concluded that self-regulation and partnership approaches do not work. It is the origin of the "corporate playbook" argument in NCD prevention. It shifted policy debate toward regulation and taxation. It is held here as foundational work on the planetary and commercial determinants of health.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 381(9867), 670-679
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)62089-3
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)62089-3
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 3 September 2026. Added as a seminal or landmark work following the September 2026 expert gap review.
Full APA reference
Moodie, R., Stuckler, D., Monteiro, C., Sheron, N., Neal, B., Thamarangsi, T., Lincoln, P., & Casswell, S. (2013). Profits and pandemics: Prevention of harmful effects of tobacco, alcohol, and ultra-processed food and drink. The Lancet, 381(9867), 670-679. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)62089-3
REF-421 Paper, guideline or statement

2019 ACC/AHA guideline on the primary prevention of cardiovascular disease: A report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The foundational United States guideline for primary cardiovascular prevention. Risk assessment uses the Pooled Cohort Equations for 10 year atherosclerotic risk in adults aged 40 to 75, with categories of low below 5 percent, borderline 5 to below 7.5 percent, intermediate 7.5 to below 20 percent and high at or above 20 percent, and coronary artery calcium is used to reclassify borderline and intermediate cases, a score of zero identifying lower risk for at least 10 years. Lifestyle targets are specific: aerobic activity of 90 to 150 minutes a week at 65 to 75 percent of heart rate reserve lowers systolic pressure by about 5 mm Hg in hypertension, sodium is optimally below 1500 mg a day with at least a 1000 mg reduction in most adults, and the DASH pattern is recommended. Social determinants are written into the recommendations rather than mentioned in passing: health literacy is reassessed every 4 to 6 years, diet counselling must assess food access and economic circumstances particularly for inner city, rural, disadvantaged and older people, exercise counselling must assess neighbourhood environment and access to facilities, and all adults are to be routinely assessed for psychosocial stressors.

Full APA reference

Arnett, D. K., Blumenthal, R. S., Albert, M. A., Buroker, A. B., Goldberger, Z. D., Hahn, E. J., Himmelfarb, C. D., Khera, A., Lloyd-Jones, D., McEvoy, J. W., Michos, E. D., Miedema, M. D., Muñoz, D., Smith, S. C., Jr., Virani, S. S., Williams, K. A., Sr., Yeboah, J., & Ziaeian, B. (2019). 2019 ACC/AHA guideline on the primary prevention of cardiovascular disease: A report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines. Circulation, 140(11), e596-e646. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000000678

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-421
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Arnett, D. K., Blumenthal, R. S., Albert, M. A., Buroker, A. B., Goldberger, Z. D., Hahn, E. J., Himmelfarb, C. D., Khera, A., Lloyd-Jones, D., McEvoy, J. W., Michos, E. D., Miedema, M. D., Muñoz, D., Smith, S. C., Jr., Virani, S. S., Williams, K. A., Sr., Yeboah, J., & Ziaeian, B.
Year
2019
Title
2019 ACC/AHA guideline on the primary prevention of cardiovascular disease: A report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines
Description
The foundational United States guideline for primary cardiovascular prevention. Risk assessment uses the Pooled Cohort Equations for 10 year atherosclerotic risk in adults aged 40 to 75, with categories of low below 5 percent, borderline 5 to below 7.5 percent, intermediate 7.5 to below 20 percent and high at or above 20 percent, and coronary artery calcium is used to reclassify borderline and intermediate cases, a score of zero identifying lower risk for at least 10 years. Lifestyle targets are specific: aerobic activity of 90 to 150 minutes a week at 65 to 75 percent of heart rate reserve lowers systolic pressure by about 5 mm Hg in hypertension, sodium is optimally below 1500 mg a day with at least a 1000 mg reduction in most adults, and the DASH pattern is recommended. Social determinants are written into the recommendations rather than mentioned in passing: health literacy is reassessed every 4 to 6 years, diet counselling must assess food access and economic circumstances particularly for inner city, rural, disadvantaged and older people, exercise counselling must assess neighbourhood environment and access to facilities, and all adults are to be routinely assessed for psychosocial stressors.
Publication or publisher
Circulation, 140(11), e596-e646
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health; Sleep
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ahajournals.org/doi/10.1161/CIR.0000000000000678
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000000678
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026.
Related items
REF-422; REF-423
Full APA reference
Arnett, D. K., Blumenthal, R. S., Albert, M. A., Buroker, A. B., Goldberger, Z. D., Hahn, E. J., Himmelfarb, C. D., Khera, A., Lloyd-Jones, D., McEvoy, J. W., Michos, E. D., Miedema, M. D., Muñoz, D., Smith, S. C., Jr., Virani, S. S., Williams, K. A., Sr., Yeboah, J., & Ziaeian, B. (2019). 2019 ACC/AHA guideline on the primary prevention of cardiovascular disease: A report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines. Circulation, 140(11), e596-e646. https://doi.org/10.1161/CIR.0000000000000678
REF-422 Paper, guideline or statement

2021 ESC guidelines on cardiovascular disease prevention in clinical practice

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The European standard for cardiovascular prevention, developed by the European Society of Cardiology with twelve medical societies. It introduces SCORE2 for 10 year fatal and non-fatal risk in apparently healthy adults aged 40 to 69 and SCORE2-OP with competing risk adjustment for those aged 70 and over, with age banded thresholds rather than a single cut point: below 50 years low to moderate is under 2.5 percent and very high is 7.5 percent or more, at 50 to 69 years the bands are 5 and 10 percent, and at 70 and over they are 7.5 and 15 percent. Treatment intensification is staged, with a STEP 1 LDL-C goal below 2.6 mmol/L moving to below 1.8 mmol/L at high risk and below 1.4 mmol/L at very high risk, and a STEP 1 blood pressure target below 140/80 mmHg moving to systolic 120 to 130 mmHg for adults aged 18 to 69. Lifestyle prescriptions are quantified: 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate activity or 75 to 150 vigorous, resistance work on at least two days, saturated fat under 10 percent of energy, salt under 5 g a day, fibre 30 to 45 g, at least 200 g each of fruit and vegetables, red meat capped at 350 to 500 g a week and alcohol at 100 g a week. Risk categories are explicitly not automatic drug triggers, with lifetime risk, comorbidity, frailty and patient preference guiding decisions.

Full APA reference

Visseren, F. L. J., Mach, F., Smulders, Y. M., Carballo, D., Koskinas, K. C., Bäck, M., Benetos, A., Biffi, A., Boavida, J.-M., Capodanno, D., Cosyns, B., Crawford, C., Davos, C. H., Desormais, I., Di Angelantonio, E., Franco, O. H., Halvorsen, S., Hobbs, F. D. R., Hollander, M., ... Williams, B. (2021). 2021 ESC guidelines on cardiovascular disease prevention in clinical practice. European Heart Journal, 42(34), 3227-3337. https://doi.org/10.1093/eurheartj/ehab484

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Updates the 2012 and 2016 European prevention guidelines. A correction appears at European Heart Journal, 43(42), 4468.

All fields
ID
REF-422
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Visseren, F. L. J., Mach, F., Smulders, Y. M., Carballo, D., Koskinas, K. C., Bäck, M., Benetos, A., Biffi, A., Boavida, J.-M., Capodanno, D., Cosyns, B., Crawford, C., Davos, C. H., Desormais, I., Di Angelantonio, E., Franco, O. H., Halvorsen, S., Hobbs, F. D. R., Hollander, M., ... Williams, B.
Year
2021
Title
2021 ESC guidelines on cardiovascular disease prevention in clinical practice
Description
The European standard for cardiovascular prevention, developed by the European Society of Cardiology with twelve medical societies. It introduces SCORE2 for 10 year fatal and non-fatal risk in apparently healthy adults aged 40 to 69 and SCORE2-OP with competing risk adjustment for those aged 70 and over, with age banded thresholds rather than a single cut point: below 50 years low to moderate is under 2.5 percent and very high is 7.5 percent or more, at 50 to 69 years the bands are 5 and 10 percent, and at 70 and over they are 7.5 and 15 percent. Treatment intensification is staged, with a STEP 1 LDL-C goal below 2.6 mmol/L moving to below 1.8 mmol/L at high risk and below 1.4 mmol/L at very high risk, and a STEP 1 blood pressure target below 140/80 mmHg moving to systolic 120 to 130 mmHg for adults aged 18 to 69. Lifestyle prescriptions are quantified: 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate activity or 75 to 150 vigorous, resistance work on at least two days, saturated fat under 10 percent of energy, salt under 5 g a day, fibre 30 to 45 g, at least 200 g each of fruit and vegetables, red meat capped at 350 to 500 g a week and alcohol at 100 g a week. Risk categories are explicitly not automatic drug triggers, with lifetime risk, comorbidity, frailty and patient preference guiding decisions.
Publication or publisher
European Heart Journal, 42(34), 3227-3337
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://academic.oup.com/eurheartj/article/42/34/3227/6358713
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/eurheartj/ehab484
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Updates the 2012 and 2016 European prevention guidelines. A correction appears at European Heart Journal, 43(42), 4468.
Related items
REF-421; REF-423
Full APA reference
Visseren, F. L. J., Mach, F., Smulders, Y. M., Carballo, D., Koskinas, K. C., Bäck, M., Benetos, A., Biffi, A., Boavida, J.-M., Capodanno, D., Cosyns, B., Crawford, C., Davos, C. H., Desormais, I., Di Angelantonio, E., Franco, O. H., Halvorsen, S., Hobbs, F. D. R., Hollander, M., ... Williams, B. (2021). 2021 ESC guidelines on cardiovascular disease prevention in clinical practice. European Heart Journal, 42(34), 3227-3337. https://doi.org/10.1093/eurheartj/ehab484
REF-423 Paper, guideline or statement

2025 AHA/ACC/AANP/AAPA/ABC/ACCP/ACPM/AGS/AMA/ASPC/NMA/PCNA/SGIM guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

The current United States hypertension guideline, which retires and replaces the 2017 version. Blood pressure categories are unchanged, with normal below 120/80, elevated at 120 to 129, stage 1 at 130 to 139 or 80 to 89 mmHg and stage 2 at 140/90 or above, against a background prevalence of 46.7 percent of American adults. Its central methodological change is replacing the Pooled Cohort Equations with the PREVENT calculator for adults aged 30 to 79 without clinical cardiovascular disease, estimating 10 and 30 year risk of myocardial infarction, stroke and heart failure with an increased risk threshold at 7.5 percent. PREVENT matters for social determinants work because it explicitly incorporates kidney function, statin therapy and place based social risk through the social deprivation index, using postcode as a proxy for social drivers of health, and it was calibrated on 3.2 million people examined between 1992 and 2022 in settings where the older equations overpredicted risk twofold. Lifestyle modification remains first line for all adults: sodium below 2300 mg a day moving toward an ideal 1500 mg, ideally no alcohol, at least 5 percent weight reduction where there is overweight or obesity, the DASH pattern, 75 to 150 minutes a week of activity, and stress management through exercise, meditation, breathing control or yoga.

Full APA reference

Jones, D. W., Ferdinand, K. C., Taler, S. J., Johnson, H. M., Shimbo, D., Abdalla, M., Altieri, M. M., Bansal, N., Bello, N. A., Bress, A. P., Carter, J., Cohen, J. B., Collins, K. J., Commodore-Mensah, Y., Davis, L. L., Egan, B., Khan, S. S., Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Melnyk, B. M., ... Williamson, J. D. (2025). 2025 AHA/ACC/AANP/AAPA/ABC/ACCP/ACPM/AGS/AMA/ASPC/NMA/PCNA/SGIM guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults. Journal of the American College of Cardiology, 86(18), 1567-1678. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2025.05.007

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no 2023 edition of this guideline: the 2025 document retires and replaces the 2017 ACC/AHA hypertension guideline, and the American Society of Hypertension is not among the 2025 issuing societies. Also published in Circulation, doi 10.1161/CIR.0000000000001356, and in Hypertension, doi 10.1161/HYP.0000000000000249.

All fields
ID
REF-423
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jones, D. W., Ferdinand, K. C., Taler, S. J., Johnson, H. M., Shimbo, D., Abdalla, M., Altieri, M. M., Bansal, N., Bello, N. A., Bress, A. P., Carter, J., Cohen, J. B., Collins, K. J., Commodore-Mensah, Y., Davis, L. L., Egan, B., Khan, S. S., Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Melnyk, B. M., ... Williamson, J. D.
Year
2025
Title
2025 AHA/ACC/AANP/AAPA/ABC/ACCP/ACPM/AGS/AMA/ASPC/NMA/PCNA/SGIM guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults
Description
The current United States hypertension guideline, which retires and replaces the 2017 version. Blood pressure categories are unchanged, with normal below 120/80, elevated at 120 to 129, stage 1 at 130 to 139 or 80 to 89 mmHg and stage 2 at 140/90 or above, against a background prevalence of 46.7 percent of American adults. Its central methodological change is replacing the Pooled Cohort Equations with the PREVENT calculator for adults aged 30 to 79 without clinical cardiovascular disease, estimating 10 and 30 year risk of myocardial infarction, stroke and heart failure with an increased risk threshold at 7.5 percent. PREVENT matters for social determinants work because it explicitly incorporates kidney function, statin therapy and place based social risk through the social deprivation index, using postcode as a proxy for social drivers of health, and it was calibrated on 3.2 million people examined between 1992 and 2022 in settings where the older equations overpredicted risk twofold. Lifestyle modification remains first line for all adults: sodium below 2300 mg a day moving toward an ideal 1500 mg, ideally no alcohol, at least 5 percent weight reduction where there is overweight or obesity, the DASH pattern, 75 to 150 minutes a week of activity, and stress management through exercise, meditation, breathing control or yoga.
Publication or publisher
Journal of the American College of Cardiology, 86(18), 1567-1678
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40815242/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2025.05.007
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no 2023 edition of this guideline: the 2025 document retires and replaces the 2017 ACC/AHA hypertension guideline, and the American Society of Hypertension is not among the 2025 issuing societies. Also published in Circulation, doi 10.1161/CIR.0000000000001356, and in Hypertension, doi 10.1161/HYP.0000000000000249.
Related items
REF-421; REF-422
Full APA reference
Jones, D. W., Ferdinand, K. C., Taler, S. J., Johnson, H. M., Shimbo, D., Abdalla, M., Altieri, M. M., Bansal, N., Bello, N. A., Bress, A. P., Carter, J., Cohen, J. B., Collins, K. J., Commodore-Mensah, Y., Davis, L. L., Egan, B., Khan, S. S., Lloyd-Jones, D. M., Melnyk, B. M., ... Williamson, J. D. (2025). 2025 AHA/ACC/AANP/AAPA/ABC/ACCP/ACPM/AGS/AMA/ASPC/NMA/PCNA/SGIM guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults. Journal of the American College of Cardiology, 86(18), 1567-1678. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2025.05.007
REF-424 Paper, guideline or statement

Diet, nutrition, physical activity and cancer: A global perspective. Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018 (Third Expert Report)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

The definitive global synthesis linking specific lifestyle exposures to specific cancer risks, and the evidence base behind almost all cancer prevention lifestyle advice. It issues ten Cancer Prevention Recommendations and its key shift from the 2007 Second Expert Report is that they should be followed as an integrated lifestyle package rather than picked off individually. Judgements use a formal grading system of convincing, probable, limited suggestive, limited no conclusion, or substantial effect on risk unlikely, and only convincing or probable judgements normally support a Recommendation. The evidence rests on eighteen systematic literature reviews covering seventeen cancers plus breast cancer survivors and a review of energy balance and body fatness, analysed at Imperial College London with mechanism reviews and peer review from the International Agency for Research on Cancer, spanning sixteen cancer sites and exposure domains including body fatness and weight gain, alcohol, meat, fish and dairy, non-alcoholic drinks, physical activity, food preservation and processing, and wholegrains, vegetables and fruit. It is maintained continuously rather than reissued, with new studies added to the Continuous Update Project database and recommendations reviewed at intervals.

Full APA reference

World Cancer Research Fund & American Institute for Cancer Research. (2018). Diet, nutrition, physical activity and cancer: A global perspective. Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018. World Cancer Research Fund International. https://www.wcrf.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Summary-of-Third-Expert-Report-2018.pdf

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. ISBN 978-1-912259-46-5 print and 978-1-912259-47-2 PDF. No DOI is issued. The publisher recommends citing it as the Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018.

All fields
ID
REF-424
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Cancer Research Fund & American Institute for Cancer Research
Year
2018
Title
Diet, nutrition, physical activity and cancer: A global perspective. Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018 (Third Expert Report)
Description
The definitive global synthesis linking specific lifestyle exposures to specific cancer risks, and the evidence base behind almost all cancer prevention lifestyle advice. It issues ten Cancer Prevention Recommendations and its key shift from the 2007 Second Expert Report is that they should be followed as an integrated lifestyle package rather than picked off individually. Judgements use a formal grading system of convincing, probable, limited suggestive, limited no conclusion, or substantial effect on risk unlikely, and only convincing or probable judgements normally support a Recommendation. The evidence rests on eighteen systematic literature reviews covering seventeen cancers plus breast cancer survivors and a review of energy balance and body fatness, analysed at Imperial College London with mechanism reviews and peer review from the International Agency for Research on Cancer, spanning sixteen cancer sites and exposure domains including body fatness and weight gain, alcohol, meat, fish and dairy, non-alcoholic drinks, physical activity, food preservation and processing, and wholegrains, vegetables and fruit. It is maintained continuously rather than reissued, with new studies added to the Continuous Update Project database and recommendations reviewed at intervals.
Publication or publisher
World Cancer Research Fund International
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.wcrf.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Summary-of-Third-Expert-Report-2018.pdf
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. ISBN 978-1-912259-46-5 print and 978-1-912259-47-2 PDF. No DOI is issued. The publisher recommends citing it as the Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018.
Related items
REF-020; REF-142
Full APA reference
World Cancer Research Fund & American Institute for Cancer Research. (2018). Diet, nutrition, physical activity and cancer: A global perspective. Continuous Update Project Expert Report 2018. World Cancer Research Fund International. https://www.wcrf.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/Summary-of-Third-Expert-Report-2018.pdf
REF-425 Paper, guideline or statement

Consensus development conference on antipsychotic drugs and obesity and diabetes

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Mental and physical health

The foundational document establishing metabolic monitoring for people prescribed second generation antipsychotics, and still the source of the monitoring tables used in current UK and Australian practice. It sets out the schedule directly: personal and family history at baseline and annually, weight and BMI at baseline then 4, 8 and 12 weeks and quarterly thereafter, waist circumference at baseline and annually, and blood pressure, fasting plasma glucose and fasting lipids at baseline, 12 weeks and annually, with lipids then every 5 years. Named action thresholds include overweight at BMI 25.0 to 29.9, obesity at 30 or more, pre-diabetes at fasting glucose 100 to 125 mg/dL, diabetes at 126 or more and hypertension above 140/90 mmHg, and a gain of 5 percent or more of initial body weight at any point should prompt consideration of switching the antipsychotic by cross-titration. It ranks the drugs by metabolic risk, with clozapine and olanzapine carrying the greatest weight gain and diabetes and dyslipidaemia risk and aripiprazole and ziprasidone the least, and notes that diabetes and obesity run at roughly 1.5 to 2 times general population prevalence in schizophrenia and affective disorders. It also insists on parity of care: nutrition and physical activity counselling wherever a metabolic problem is identified, patient self-monitoring of weight, and the same blood pressure, lipid and glycaemic goals for people with psychiatric disorders as for anyone else with diabetes.

Full APA reference

American Diabetes Association, American Psychiatric Association, American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, & North American Association for the Study of Obesity. (2004). Consensus development conference on antipsychotic drugs and obesity and diabetes. Diabetes Care, 27(2), 596-601. https://doi.org/10.2337/diacare.27.2.596

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Conference held 19 to 21 November 2003. No formal supersession is recorded, and the 2023 UK Lester resource states that its monitoring table derives from this consensus.

All fields
ID
REF-425
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American Diabetes Association, American Psychiatric Association, American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, & North American Association for the Study of Obesity
Year
2004
Title
Consensus development conference on antipsychotic drugs and obesity and diabetes
Description
The foundational document establishing metabolic monitoring for people prescribed second generation antipsychotics, and still the source of the monitoring tables used in current UK and Australian practice. It sets out the schedule directly: personal and family history at baseline and annually, weight and BMI at baseline then 4, 8 and 12 weeks and quarterly thereafter, waist circumference at baseline and annually, and blood pressure, fasting plasma glucose and fasting lipids at baseline, 12 weeks and annually, with lipids then every 5 years. Named action thresholds include overweight at BMI 25.0 to 29.9, obesity at 30 or more, pre-diabetes at fasting glucose 100 to 125 mg/dL, diabetes at 126 or more and hypertension above 140/90 mmHg, and a gain of 5 percent or more of initial body weight at any point should prompt consideration of switching the antipsychotic by cross-titration. It ranks the drugs by metabolic risk, with clozapine and olanzapine carrying the greatest weight gain and diabetes and dyslipidaemia risk and aripiprazole and ziprasidone the least, and notes that diabetes and obesity run at roughly 1.5 to 2 times general population prevalence in schizophrenia and affective disorders. It also insists on parity of care: nutrition and physical activity counselling wherever a metabolic problem is identified, patient self-monitoring of weight, and the same blood pressure, lipid and glycaemic goals for people with psychiatric disorders as for anyone else with diabetes.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes Care, 27(2), 596-601
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/14747245/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2337/diacare.27.2.596
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Conference held 19 to 21 November 2003. No formal supersession is recorded, and the 2023 UK Lester resource states that its monitoring table derives from this consensus.
Related items
REF-301; REF-390; REF-426; REF-427
Full APA reference
American Diabetes Association, American Psychiatric Association, American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, & North American Association for the Study of Obesity. (2004). Consensus development conference on antipsychotic drugs and obesity and diabetes. Diabetes Care, 27(2), 596-601. https://doi.org/10.2337/diacare.27.2.596
REF-426 Paper, guideline or statement

Lester UK adaptation: Positive cardiometabolic health resource. An intervention framework for people experiencing psychosis and schizophrenia (2023 update)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The practical UK clinical framework for cardiometabolic care in psychosis, produced with NHS England and the National Clinical Audit of Psychosis, and the closest thing to an auditable standard for physical health in severe mental illness. Its operating principle is stated bluntly as do not just screen, intervene for all people in the red zone, using a red, amber and green traffic light layout with shared decision making and explicit collaboration between primary care and specialist mental health teams. The 2023 update adds ethnicity specific cut-offs for BMI and waist circumference, requires weight to be checked weekly after a new antipsychotic is started, strengthens the case for metformin including the modified release form licensed for diabetes prevention where behaviour change alone has not worked, and warns that standard cardiovascular risk prediction tools are likely to underestimate risk in young people with severe mental illness. It is tied to accountability structures, with screening and intervention standards in the mandatory annual National Clinical Audit of Psychosis and annual reviews sitting in the Quality and Outcomes Framework, against a backdrop of severe mental illness affecting around 3 percent of the population over the life course and shortening life expectancy by about 15 years.

Full APA reference

Perry, B. I., Holt, R. I. G., Chew-Graham, C. A., Tiffin, E., French, P., Pratt, P., Byrne, P., & Shiers, D. E. (2023). Lester UK adaptation: Positive cardiometabolic health resource. An intervention framework for people experiencing psychosis and schizophrenia (2023 update). Royal College of Psychiatrists. https://www.hpft.nhs.uk/media/7085/ncap-lester-tool-intervention-framework.pdf

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no stand-alone NICE guideline titled for physical health in severe mental illness; this resource is the most citable current UK document and it supports NICE CG178, CG155 and QS80. It supersedes the 2014 UK version, which adapted the 2012 original by the late Helen Lester. A companion summary appears in the British Journal of General Practice, 73(736), 488.

All fields
ID
REF-426
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Perry, B. I., Holt, R. I. G., Chew-Graham, C. A., Tiffin, E., French, P., Pratt, P., Byrne, P., & Shiers, D. E.
Year
2023
Title
Lester UK adaptation: Positive cardiometabolic health resource. An intervention framework for people experiencing psychosis and schizophrenia (2023 update)
Description
The practical UK clinical framework for cardiometabolic care in psychosis, produced with NHS England and the National Clinical Audit of Psychosis, and the closest thing to an auditable standard for physical health in severe mental illness. Its operating principle is stated bluntly as do not just screen, intervene for all people in the red zone, using a red, amber and green traffic light layout with shared decision making and explicit collaboration between primary care and specialist mental health teams. The 2023 update adds ethnicity specific cut-offs for BMI and waist circumference, requires weight to be checked weekly after a new antipsychotic is started, strengthens the case for metformin including the modified release form licensed for diabetes prevention where behaviour change alone has not worked, and warns that standard cardiovascular risk prediction tools are likely to underestimate risk in young people with severe mental illness. It is tied to accountability structures, with screening and intervention standards in the mandatory annual National Clinical Audit of Psychosis and annual reviews sitting in the Quality and Outcomes Framework, against a backdrop of severe mental illness affecting around 3 percent of the population over the life course and shortening life expectancy by about 15 years.
Publication or publisher
Royal College of Psychiatrists, with NHS England and the National Clinical Audit of Psychosis
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.hpft.nhs.uk/media/7085/ncap-lester-tool-intervention-framework.pdf
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no stand-alone NICE guideline titled for physical health in severe mental illness; this resource is the most citable current UK document and it supports NICE CG178, CG155 and QS80. It supersedes the 2014 UK version, which adapted the 2012 original by the late Helen Lester. A companion summary appears in the British Journal of General Practice, 73(736), 488.
Related items
REF-425; REF-427; REF-301; REF-390
Full APA reference
Perry, B. I., Holt, R. I. G., Chew-Graham, C. A., Tiffin, E., French, P., Pratt, P., Byrne, P., & Shiers, D. E. (2023). Lester UK adaptation: Positive cardiometabolic health resource. An intervention framework for people experiencing psychosis and schizophrenia (2023 update). Royal College of Psychiatrists. https://www.hpft.nhs.uk/media/7085/ncap-lester-tool-intervention-framework.pdf
REF-427 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychosis and schizophrenia in adults: Quality standard QS80, quality statement 6, assessing physical health

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Mental and physical health

The NICE quality standard that turns physical health monitoring in psychosis into a measurable service requirement, drawn from recommendations 1.5.3.2 and 1.5.3.3 of clinical guideline CG178. It states the intervals plainly: weight plotted weekly for the first 6 weeks then at 12 weeks, at 1 year and annually thereafter; waist circumference annually; pulse and blood pressure at 12 weeks, 1 year and then annually; and fasting glucose or HbA1c and blood lipids at 12 weeks, 1 year and then annually. Its quality measures require a comprehensive physical health assessment within 12 weeks of starting treatment for a first episode of psychosis and again at 1 year, and an annual comprehensive assessment for every adult with psychosis or schizophrenia. No numeric thresholds, targets or risk tools are set in the statement itself, which is why it is normally used alongside an intervention framework. A parallel standard, QS167 statement 6, adds an equity requirement that people from Black, Asian and other minority ethnic groups with serious mental illness receive a physical health assessment at least annually covering weight and BMI, diet, nutritional status, activity level, pulse, blood pressure, glucose or HbA1c, lipids, liver, renal and thyroid function, and calcium for anyone on long term lithium.

Full APA reference

National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2015). Psychosis and schizophrenia in adults (Quality standard QS80), quality statement 6: Assessing physical health. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/qs80/chapter/quality-statement-6-assessing-physical-health

Verified on the NICE page on 8 September 2026. NICE shows 12 February 2015 as the review date for QS80 and does not state a separate publication date. The source guideline is CG178, published 2014.

All fields
ID
REF-427
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Year
2015
Title
Psychosis and schizophrenia in adults: Quality standard QS80, quality statement 6, assessing physical health
Description
The NICE quality standard that turns physical health monitoring in psychosis into a measurable service requirement, drawn from recommendations 1.5.3.2 and 1.5.3.3 of clinical guideline CG178. It states the intervals plainly: weight plotted weekly for the first 6 weeks then at 12 weeks, at 1 year and annually thereafter; waist circumference annually; pulse and blood pressure at 12 weeks, 1 year and then annually; and fasting glucose or HbA1c and blood lipids at 12 weeks, 1 year and then annually. Its quality measures require a comprehensive physical health assessment within 12 weeks of starting treatment for a first episode of psychosis and again at 1 year, and an annual comprehensive assessment for every adult with psychosis or schizophrenia. No numeric thresholds, targets or risk tools are set in the statement itself, which is why it is normally used alongside an intervention framework. A parallel standard, QS167 statement 6, adds an equity requirement that people from Black, Asian and other minority ethnic groups with serious mental illness receive a physical health assessment at least annually covering weight and BMI, diet, nutritional status, activity level, pulse, blood pressure, glucose or HbA1c, lipids, liver, renal and thyroid function, and calcium for anyone on long term lithium.
Publication or publisher
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/qs80/chapter/quality-statement-6-assessing-physical-health
Verification note
Verified on the NICE page on 8 September 2026. NICE shows 12 February 2015 as the review date for QS80 and does not state a separate publication date. The source guideline is CG178, published 2014.
Related items
REF-425; REF-426
Full APA reference
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2015). Psychosis and schizophrenia in adults (Quality standard QS80), quality statement 6: Assessing physical health. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/qs80/chapter/quality-statement-6-assessing-physical-health
REF-428 Paper, guideline or statement

Behaviour change: individual approaches (Public health guideline PH49)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

The reference standard for how health professionals should actually deliver behaviour change support to individuals, covering people aged 16 and over across alcohol misuse, poor eating patterns, inactivity, unsafe sexual behaviour and smoking. Its named intervention components are goals and planning, feedback and monitoring, and social support, which map directly onto the behaviour change technique taxonomy. What distinguishes it from a purely clinical guideline is that it makes equity structural: local behaviour change policy must be built on a health equity audit so that inequalities will not increase and if possible will decrease, and it names proportionate universalism explicitly, requiring the content, scale and intensity of each intervention to be proportionate to the social, economic or environmental disadvantage a person faces. Strategies must be grounded in joint strategic needs assessments and local data, developed with the community and led by a named leader such as the director of public health, and organisations must embed behaviour change competencies in job descriptions, decide which public facing staff deliver which intensity of intervention, and provide training, supervision, mentoring and continuing development in behaviour change theory and skills.

Full APA reference

National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2019). Behaviour change: Individual approaches (Public health guideline PH49). https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph49

Verified on the NICE page on 8 September 2026. The guidance code is PH49, not NG6: NICE NG6 covers excess winter deaths and the health risks of cold homes. NICE states the guidance was last reviewed on 6 March 2019 with no new evidence affecting the recommendations, and does not display an original publication date, so 2019 is used here as the review year.

All fields
ID
REF-428
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Year
2019
Title
Behaviour change: individual approaches (Public health guideline PH49)
Description
The reference standard for how health professionals should actually deliver behaviour change support to individuals, covering people aged 16 and over across alcohol misuse, poor eating patterns, inactivity, unsafe sexual behaviour and smoking. Its named intervention components are goals and planning, feedback and monitoring, and social support, which map directly onto the behaviour change technique taxonomy. What distinguishes it from a purely clinical guideline is that it makes equity structural: local behaviour change policy must be built on a health equity audit so that inequalities will not increase and if possible will decrease, and it names proportionate universalism explicitly, requiring the content, scale and intensity of each intervention to be proportionate to the social, economic or environmental disadvantage a person faces. Strategies must be grounded in joint strategic needs assessments and local data, developed with the community and led by a named leader such as the director of public health, and organisations must embed behaviour change competencies in job descriptions, decide which public facing staff deliver which intensity of intervention, and provide training, supervision, mentoring and continuing development in behaviour change theory and skills.
Publication or publisher
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Behaviour change and adherence; Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph49
Verification note
Verified on the NICE page on 8 September 2026. The guidance code is PH49, not NG6: NICE NG6 covers excess winter deaths and the health risks of cold homes. NICE states the guidance was last reviewed on 6 March 2019 with no new evidence affecting the recommendations, and does not display an original publication date, so 2019 is used here as the review year.
Related items
REF-399; REF-400
Full APA reference
National Institute for Health and Care Excellence. (2019). Behaviour change: Individual approaches (Public health guideline PH49). https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ph49
REF-429 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise is Medicine fact sheet

  • Web resource
  • Web resource
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • General health

The core statement of the Exercise is Medicine initiative, founded in 2007 by the American College of Sports Medicine with the American Medical Association, and the practical framework behind treating physical activity as a vital sign. It asks clinicians to assess physical activity at every patient visit, give brief advice or a written exercise prescription, and refer to appropriate programmes, professionals and facilities. The named target is 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate intensity activity, with the important qualifications that inactive people gain substantial benefit well below that range, that all activity counts, that replacing sedentary time with light activity has positive effects, and that bouts of any length count, which retires the old 10 minute minimum. It carries condition specific claims for advocacy use: exercise two to three times a week combining strengthening with stretching or aerobic work can prevent lower back pain, aerobic and resistance exercise is the first line non-pharmacological recommendation for knee and hip osteoarthritis, exercise produces systolic reductions comparable to commonly prescribed antihypertensives, and the Diabetes Prevention Program lifestyle arm cut type 2 diabetes risk by 58 percent overall and 71 percent in people over 60. Its system level asks are to build the physical activity vital sign and referral sets into the electronic health record, partner with community activity providers, and secure reimbursement for physical activity counselling.

Full APA reference

Exercise is Medicine, & American College of Sports Medicine. (2019). Exercise is Medicine fact sheet. https://www.exerciseismedicine.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/EIM-Fact-Sheet.pdf

Verified against the source documents on 8 September 2026. Exercise is Medicine is an ongoing initiative rather than a versioned guideline, so this 2019 fact sheet is the most citable fixed document; the official initiative page is https://acsm.org/eim/about/.

All fields
ID
REF-429
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Exercise is Medicine & American College of Sports Medicine
Year
2019
Title
Exercise is Medicine fact sheet
Description
The core statement of the Exercise is Medicine initiative, founded in 2007 by the American College of Sports Medicine with the American Medical Association, and the practical framework behind treating physical activity as a vital sign. It asks clinicians to assess physical activity at every patient visit, give brief advice or a written exercise prescription, and refer to appropriate programmes, professionals and facilities. The named target is 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate intensity activity, with the important qualifications that inactive people gain substantial benefit well below that range, that all activity counts, that replacing sedentary time with light activity has positive effects, and that bouts of any length count, which retires the old 10 minute minimum. It carries condition specific claims for advocacy use: exercise two to three times a week combining strengthening with stretching or aerobic work can prevent lower back pain, aerobic and resistance exercise is the first line non-pharmacological recommendation for knee and hip osteoarthritis, exercise produces systolic reductions comparable to commonly prescribed antihypertensives, and the Diabetes Prevention Program lifestyle arm cut type 2 diabetes risk by 58 percent overall and 71 percent in people over 60. Its system level asks are to build the physical activity vital sign and referral sets into the electronic health record, partner with community activity providers, and secure reimbursement for physical activity counselling.
Publication or publisher
Exercise is Medicine / American College of Sports Medicine
Resource type
Web resource
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.exerciseismedicine.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/EIM-Fact-Sheet.pdf
Verification note
Verified against the source documents on 8 September 2026. Exercise is Medicine is an ongoing initiative rather than a versioned guideline, so this 2019 fact sheet is the most citable fixed document; the official initiative page is https://acsm.org/eim/about/.
Related items
REF-135; REF-298
Full APA reference
Exercise is Medicine, & American College of Sports Medicine. (2019). Exercise is Medicine fact sheet. https://www.exerciseismedicine.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/EIM-Fact-Sheet.pdf
REF-430 Paper, guideline or statement

Sustainable healthy diets: Guiding principles

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

The official intergovernmental definition of a sustainable healthy diet, and the natural companion to the EAT-Lancet work because it supplies the agreed principles rather than a modelled reference diet. It defines sustainable healthy diets as patterns that promote all dimensions of health and wellbeing, carry low environmental pressure and impact, and are accessible, affordable, safe, equitable and culturally acceptable, aiming to prevent all forms of malnutrition while reducing diet related noncommunicable disease and supporting biodiversity. Sixteen guiding principles are grouped into health, principles 1 to 8, environment, 9 to 13, and sociocultural and equity, 14 to 16. The health principles start in infancy with early initiation of breastfeeding, exclusive breastfeeding to 6 months and continued breastfeeding to 2 years and beyond, then build diets on a wide variety of unprocessed or minimally processed foods while restricting highly processed products, with wholegrains, legumes, nuts and abundant fruit and vegetables, moderate eggs, dairy, poultry and fish, small amounts of red meat and safe drinking water as the fluid of choice. The environmental principles set limits on greenhouse gases, water, land, nitrogen and phosphorus and chemical pollution and require preservation of biodiversity, while the sociocultural principles require diets to respect local culture, culinary practice and values, to avoid adverse gender impacts especially in the time spent acquiring water, fuel and food, and to be accessible and desirable.

Full APA reference

Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, & World Health Organization. (2019). Sustainable healthy diets: Guiding principles. FAO and WHO. https://www.fao.org/4/ca6640en/ca6640en.pdf

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. ISBN 978-92-5-131875-1 for FAO and 978-92-4-151664-8 for WHO. Based on an international expert consultation held from 1 to 3 July 2019 at FAO headquarters in Rome. 44 pages, licensed CC BY-NC-SA 3.0 IGO.

All fields
ID
REF-430
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations & World Health Organization
Year
2019
Title
Sustainable healthy diets: Guiding principles
Description
The official intergovernmental definition of a sustainable healthy diet, and the natural companion to the EAT-Lancet work because it supplies the agreed principles rather than a modelled reference diet. It defines sustainable healthy diets as patterns that promote all dimensions of health and wellbeing, carry low environmental pressure and impact, and are accessible, affordable, safe, equitable and culturally acceptable, aiming to prevent all forms of malnutrition while reducing diet related noncommunicable disease and supporting biodiversity. Sixteen guiding principles are grouped into health, principles 1 to 8, environment, 9 to 13, and sociocultural and equity, 14 to 16. The health principles start in infancy with early initiation of breastfeeding, exclusive breastfeeding to 6 months and continued breastfeeding to 2 years and beyond, then build diets on a wide variety of unprocessed or minimally processed foods while restricting highly processed products, with wholegrains, legumes, nuts and abundant fruit and vegetables, moderate eggs, dairy, poultry and fish, small amounts of red meat and safe drinking water as the fluid of choice. The environmental principles set limits on greenhouse gases, water, land, nitrogen and phosphorus and chemical pollution and require preservation of biodiversity, while the sociocultural principles require diets to respect local culture, culinary practice and values, to avoid adverse gender impacts especially in the time spent acquiring water, fuel and food, and to be accessible and desirable.
Publication or publisher
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations and World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.fao.org/4/ca6640en/ca6640en.pdf
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. ISBN 978-92-5-131875-1 for FAO and 978-92-4-151664-8 for WHO. Based on an international expert consultation held from 1 to 3 July 2019 at FAO headquarters in Rome. 44 pages, licensed CC BY-NC-SA 3.0 IGO.
Related items
REF-244; REF-368
Full APA reference
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, & World Health Organization. (2019). Sustainable healthy diets: Guiding principles. FAO and WHO. https://www.fao.org/4/ca6640en/ca6640en.pdf
REF-431 Paper, guideline or statement

Behavioral and psychological treatments for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The global reference guideline establishing cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia as first line treatment, and the single most useful citation for putting a psychological treatment ahead of medication in lifestyle psychiatry. It issues six graded recommendations, and multicomponent CBT-I is the only STRONG one, meaning clinicians should use it under most circumstances. Conditional recommendations cover multicomponent brief therapies and the single component approaches of stimulus control, sleep restriction and relaxation therapy, and there is a conditional recommendation against using sleep hygiene on its own, which is a useful corrective to the common practice of handing out a sleep hygiene sheet and calling it treatment. The task force conducted a systematic review and applied GRADE, weighing evidence quality, the balance of clinically relevant benefits and harms, patient values and preferences, and resource use, with final approval by the AASM Board of Directors.

Full APA reference

Edinger, J. D., Arnedt, J. T., Bertisch, S. M., Carney, C. E., Harrington, J. J., Lichstein, K. L., Sateia, M. J., Troxel, W. M., Zhou, E. S., Kazmi, U., Heald, J. L., & Martin, J. L. (2021). Behavioral and psychological treatments for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline. Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 17(2), 255-262. https://doi.org/10.5664/jcsm.8986

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no AASM document titled Clinical Practice Guideline for the Cognitive Behavioral Treatment of Insomnia in Adults; this is the correct current behavioural and psychological treatment guideline. Not superseded. The 2026 AASM combination treatment guideline at REF-432 addresses a different question.

All fields
ID
REF-431
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Edinger, J. D., Arnedt, J. T., Bertisch, S. M., Carney, C. E., Harrington, J. J., Lichstein, K. L., Sateia, M. J., Troxel, W. M., Zhou, E. S., Kazmi, U., Heald, J. L., & Martin, J. L.
Year
2021
Title
Behavioral and psychological treatments for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline
Description
The global reference guideline establishing cognitive behavioural therapy for insomnia as first line treatment, and the single most useful citation for putting a psychological treatment ahead of medication in lifestyle psychiatry. It issues six graded recommendations, and multicomponent CBT-I is the only STRONG one, meaning clinicians should use it under most circumstances. Conditional recommendations cover multicomponent brief therapies and the single component approaches of stimulus control, sleep restriction and relaxation therapy, and there is a conditional recommendation against using sleep hygiene on its own, which is a useful corrective to the common practice of handing out a sleep hygiene sheet and calling it treatment. The task force conducted a systematic review and applied GRADE, weighing evidence quality, the balance of clinically relevant benefits and harms, patient values and preferences, and resource use, with final approval by the AASM Board of Directors.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 17(2), 255-262
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33164742/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.5664/jcsm.8986
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. There is no AASM document titled Clinical Practice Guideline for the Cognitive Behavioral Treatment of Insomnia in Adults; this is the correct current behavioural and psychological treatment guideline. Not superseded. The 2026 AASM combination treatment guideline at REF-432 addresses a different question.
Related items
REF-117; REF-432
Full APA reference
Edinger, J. D., Arnedt, J. T., Bertisch, S. M., Carney, C. E., Harrington, J. J., Lichstein, K. L., Sateia, M. J., Troxel, W. M., Zhou, E. S., Kazmi, U., Heald, J. L., & Martin, J. L. (2021). Behavioral and psychological treatments for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline. Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 17(2), 255-262. https://doi.org/10.5664/jcsm.8986
REF-432 Paper, guideline or statement

Combination treatment for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The newest AASM insomnia guideline, and important because of what it declines to recommend. It conditionally suggests combining CBT-I with insomnia medication in preference to medication alone, but conditionally suggests against combining them in preference to CBT-I alone, which keeps CBT-I on its own as the preferred first line approach rather than a component of combination therapy. The evidence base is thin and the certainty low: six randomised trials reported across seven articles, five delivering CBT-I in person and one self administered, with lormetazepam, temazepam, zolpidem and zopiclone as the medications studied. Combination treatment improved global insomnia severity and sleep continuity over medication alone but not total sleep time, where the point estimate favoured medication alone, daytime outcome differences were not clinically meaningful, and morning sleepiness was more frequent with combination treatment. Health equity is addressed directly, with the guideline noting that no direct evidence on equity effects was available and that in settings where CBT-I is unavailable or unaffordable the recommendation could worsen inequity.

Full APA reference

Buysse, D. J., Arnedt, J. T., Buenaver, L., Chang, J. L., Fernandez-Mendoza, J., Patel, S. I., Zhou, E. S., Falck-Ytter, Y., Hyer, S., Kazmi, U., Singh, M., & Wickwire, E. M. (2026). Combination treatment for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline. Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 22(1), Article 56. https://doi.org/10.1007/s44470-025-00038-8

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Published 13 April 2026. It does not supersede the 2021 AASM behavioural and psychological treatment guideline at REF-431.

All fields
ID
REF-432
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Buysse, D. J., Arnedt, J. T., Buenaver, L., Chang, J. L., Fernandez-Mendoza, J., Patel, S. I., Zhou, E. S., Falck-Ytter, Y., Hyer, S., Kazmi, U., Singh, M., & Wickwire, E. M.
Year
2026
Title
Combination treatment for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline
Description
The newest AASM insomnia guideline, and important because of what it declines to recommend. It conditionally suggests combining CBT-I with insomnia medication in preference to medication alone, but conditionally suggests against combining them in preference to CBT-I alone, which keeps CBT-I on its own as the preferred first line approach rather than a component of combination therapy. The evidence base is thin and the certainty low: six randomised trials reported across seven articles, five delivering CBT-I in person and one self administered, with lormetazepam, temazepam, zolpidem and zopiclone as the medications studied. Combination treatment improved global insomnia severity and sleep continuity over medication alone but not total sleep time, where the point estimate favoured medication alone, daytime outcome differences were not clinically meaningful, and morning sleepiness was more frequent with combination treatment. Health equity is addressed directly, with the guideline noting that no direct evidence on equity effects was available and that in settings where CBT-I is unavailable or unaffordable the recommendation could worsen inequity.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 22(1), Article 56
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13076838/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s44470-025-00038-8
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 8 September 2026. Published 13 April 2026. It does not supersede the 2021 AASM behavioural and psychological treatment guideline at REF-431.
Related items
REF-431; REF-117
Full APA reference
Buysse, D. J., Arnedt, J. T., Buenaver, L., Chang, J. L., Fernandez-Mendoza, J., Patel, S. I., Zhou, E. S., Falck-Ytter, Y., Hyer, S., Kazmi, U., Singh, M., & Wickwire, E. M. (2026). Combination treatment for chronic insomnia disorder in adults: An American Academy of Sleep Medicine clinical practice guideline. Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, 22(1), Article 56. https://doi.org/10.1007/s44470-025-00038-8
REF-433 Paper, guideline or statement

World mental health report: Transforming mental health for all

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The definitive global statement on mental health need, spending and the treatment gap, and the natural anchor for any argument that mental health is shaped by social and economic conditions. It counts 970 million people, 13 percent of the world population or 1 in 8, living with a mental disorder in 2019, with 82 percent in low and middle income countries, including 301 million with anxiety disorders, 280 million with depressive disorders, 40 million with bipolar disorder and 24 million with schizophrenia. The resourcing figures are the ones most worth quoting: a median 2 percent of government health budgets goes to mental health globally and 1 percent in low and middle income countries, two of every three of those dollars go to stand alone psychiatric hospitals rather than community services, and only 0.3 percent of development assistance for health went to mental health across 2006 to 2016, against an economic cost of US$2.5 trillion in 2010 of which US$1.7 trillion was lost productivity. The consequences are stated in equity terms: 71 percent of people with psychosis receive no services, 70 percent are treated in high income countries against 12 percent in low income countries, minimally adequate depression treatment reaches 23 percent in high income and 3 percent in low and lower middle income countries, people with severe mental health conditions die 10 to 20 years earlier, and mental disorders account for 1 in 6 years lived with disability. It organises action into three paths to transformation, deepen value and commitment, reshape environments, and strengthen mental health care, and notes that 20 countries still criminalise attempted suicide.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2022). World mental health report: Transforming mental health for all. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240049338

Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 17 September 2026. Published 16 June 2022 and launched 17 June 2022. ISBN 978-92-4-004933-8 electronic and 978-92-4-004934-5 print. No DOI is issued. WHO IRIS gives the extent as x, 272 pages while the WHO catalogue page states 296, an unresolved discrepancy between WHO sources. A 13 page executive summary is published separately.

All fields
ID
REF-433
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2022
Title
World mental health report: Transforming mental health for all
Description
The definitive global statement on mental health need, spending and the treatment gap, and the natural anchor for any argument that mental health is shaped by social and economic conditions. It counts 970 million people, 13 percent of the world population or 1 in 8, living with a mental disorder in 2019, with 82 percent in low and middle income countries, including 301 million with anxiety disorders, 280 million with depressive disorders, 40 million with bipolar disorder and 24 million with schizophrenia. The resourcing figures are the ones most worth quoting: a median 2 percent of government health budgets goes to mental health globally and 1 percent in low and middle income countries, two of every three of those dollars go to stand alone psychiatric hospitals rather than community services, and only 0.3 percent of development assistance for health went to mental health across 2006 to 2016, against an economic cost of US$2.5 trillion in 2010 of which US$1.7 trillion was lost productivity. The consequences are stated in equity terms: 71 percent of people with psychosis receive no services, 70 percent are treated in high income countries against 12 percent in low income countries, minimally adequate depression treatment reaches 23 percent in high income and 3 percent in low and lower middle income countries, people with severe mental health conditions die 10 to 20 years earlier, and mental disorders account for 1 in 6 years lived with disability. It organises action into three paths to transformation, deepen value and commitment, reshape environments, and strengthen mental health care, and notes that 20 countries still criminalise attempted suicide.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization, Geneva
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240049338
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the source record on 17 September 2026. Published 16 June 2022 and launched 17 June 2022. ISBN 978-92-4-004933-8 electronic and 978-92-4-004934-5 print. No DOI is issued. WHO IRIS gives the extent as x, 272 pages while the WHO catalogue page states 296, an unresolved discrepancy between WHO sources. A 13 page executive summary is published separately.
Related items
REF-411; REF-211; REF-446
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2022). World mental health report: Transforming mental health for all. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240049338
REF-434 Paper, guideline or statement

Stress and the individual: Mechanisms leading to disease

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

The paper that coined allostatic load, and therefore the origin point for the physiological wear and tear mechanism linking chronic social adversity to physical disease. It defines allostatic load as the cost of chronic exposure to fluctuating or heightened neural or neuroendocrine response resulting from repeated or chronic environmental challenge, extending the concept of allostasis across time rather than treating each stressor as an isolated event. Its central argument is that homeostasis is the wrong model for chronic stress, because the systems that protect the body in the short term are the same systems that damage it when activation is prolonged or poorly regulated. This reframing is what allows socioeconomic disadvantage to be treated as a biological exposure rather than only a social circumstance, and it underlies the later weathering and allostatic load index literature.

Full APA reference

McEwen, B. S., & Stellar, E. (1993). Stress and the individual: Mechanisms leading to disease. Archives of Internal Medicine, 153(18), 2093-2101. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8379800/

Verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 27 September 1993. No DOI is recorded. This is the correct foundational citation: a widely circulated citation to McEwen, "Physiological foundations of allostasis, allostatic load, and allostatic overload", Psychoneuroendocrinology, 118, 1-13 (2017) does not exist. That DOI is unregistered, volume 118 is the August 2020 issue and uses six digit article numbers rather than page ranges, and it contains no such paper. The wording appears to blend McEwen and Wingfield 2003 with McEwen's 2017 Chronic Stress review. A further companion paper is McEwen (1998), Protective and damaging effects of stress mediators, New England Journal of Medicine, 338(3), 171-179, doi 10.1056/NEJM199801153380307.

All fields
ID
REF-434
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McEwen, B. S., & Stellar, E.
Year
1993
Title
Stress and the individual: Mechanisms leading to disease
Description
The paper that coined allostatic load, and therefore the origin point for the physiological wear and tear mechanism linking chronic social adversity to physical disease. It defines allostatic load as the cost of chronic exposure to fluctuating or heightened neural or neuroendocrine response resulting from repeated or chronic environmental challenge, extending the concept of allostasis across time rather than treating each stressor as an isolated event. Its central argument is that homeostasis is the wrong model for chronic stress, because the systems that protect the body in the short term are the same systems that damage it when activation is prolonged or poorly regulated. This reframing is what allows socioeconomic disadvantage to be treated as a biological exposure rather than only a social circumstance, and it underlies the later weathering and allostatic load index literature.
Publication or publisher
Archives of Internal Medicine, 153(18), 2093-2101
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8379800/
Verification note
Verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 27 September 1993. No DOI is recorded. This is the correct foundational citation: a widely circulated citation to McEwen, "Physiological foundations of allostasis, allostatic load, and allostatic overload", Psychoneuroendocrinology, 118, 1-13 (2017) does not exist. That DOI is unregistered, volume 118 is the August 2020 issue and uses six digit article numbers rather than page ranges, and it contains no such paper. The wording appears to blend McEwen and Wingfield 2003 with McEwen's 2017 Chronic Stress review. A further companion paper is McEwen (1998), Protective and damaging effects of stress mediators, New England Journal of Medicine, 338(3), 171-179, doi 10.1056/NEJM199801153380307.
Related items
REF-435; REF-398; REF-158
Full APA reference
McEwen, B. S., & Stellar, E. (1993). Stress and the individual: Mechanisms leading to disease. Archives of Internal Medicine, 153(18), 2093-2101. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/8379800/
REF-435 Paper, guideline or statement

The concept of allostasis in biology and biomedicine

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

The paper that defines allostatic overload and separates it into two types, which matters because the two types imply different interventions. Type 1 overload occurs when energy demand exceeds what the environment can supply, triggering an emergency life history stage in which the stress response is adaptive and resolves once the challenge passes. Type 2 overload occurs where there is sufficient or even excess energy consumption combined with social conflict and dysfunction, produces no escape response, and is not resolved by the organism adapting; the authors argue it can be counteracted only through learning and through change to social structures. That distinction is the theoretical basis for treating persistent poverty and chronic social adversity as a different biological problem from acute stress, and for arguing that individual coping advice cannot substitute for structural change. It also traces allostasis to Sterling and Eyer in 1988 and situates the concept against the three named types of allostatic load described in McEwen's 1998 work: frequent activation, failure to shut off the response after the stressor ends, and inadequate response leading to compensatory elevation in other systems.

Full APA reference

McEwen, B. S., & Wingfield, J. C. (2003). The concept of allostasis in biology and biomedicine. Hormones and Behavior, 43(1), 2-15. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0018-506X(02)00024-7

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. This is the source of the specific vocabulary of allostasis, allostatic load and allostatic overload that is often misattributed to a non-existent 2017 Psychoneuroendocrinology paper.

All fields
ID
REF-435
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McEwen, B. S., & Wingfield, J. C.
Year
2003
Title
The concept of allostasis in biology and biomedicine
Description
The paper that defines allostatic overload and separates it into two types, which matters because the two types imply different interventions. Type 1 overload occurs when energy demand exceeds what the environment can supply, triggering an emergency life history stage in which the stress response is adaptive and resolves once the challenge passes. Type 2 overload occurs where there is sufficient or even excess energy consumption combined with social conflict and dysfunction, produces no escape response, and is not resolved by the organism adapting; the authors argue it can be counteracted only through learning and through change to social structures. That distinction is the theoretical basis for treating persistent poverty and chronic social adversity as a different biological problem from acute stress, and for arguing that individual coping advice cannot substitute for structural change. It also traces allostasis to Sterling and Eyer in 1988 and situates the concept against the three named types of allostatic load described in McEwen's 1998 work: frequent activation, failure to shut off the response after the stressor ends, and inadequate response leading to compensatory elevation in other systems.
Publication or publisher
Hormones and Behavior, 43(1), 2-15
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/12614627/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0018-506X(02)00024-7
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. This is the source of the specific vocabulary of allostasis, allostatic load and allostatic overload that is often misattributed to a non-existent 2017 Psychoneuroendocrinology paper.
Related items
REF-434; REF-398; REF-158
Full APA reference
McEwen, B. S., & Wingfield, J. C. (2003). The concept of allostasis in biology and biomedicine. Hormones and Behavior, 43(1), 2-15. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0018-506X(02)00024-7
REF-436 Paper, guideline or statement

Can poverty get under your skin? Basal cortisol levels and cognitive function in children from low and high socioeconomic status

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

A direct empirical test of whether childhood poverty registers in the body's stress physiology, and the more precisely on-topic of the Lupien group's work for a poverty and health argument. In 307 children aged 6 to 16 in Montreal, children from low socioeconomic status backgrounds aged 6 to 10 had significantly higher morning salivary cortisol than their high status peers. The finding is notably conditional rather than uniform: the difference disappeared around the school transition and was absent in the high school aged group, which the authors interpret through an equalization process in which the class patterning of a biological marker is not constant across development. No socioeconomic differences appeared in memory, attention or language performance, so the physiological signal preceded any measurable cognitive deficit. Mothers of the low status children reported more depressive feelings and more unhealthy behaviours, and the authors set out four social explanatory factors linking status to child cortisol.

Full APA reference

Lupien, S. J., King, S., Meaney, M. J., & McEwen, B. S. (2001). Can poverty get under your skin? Basal cortisol levels and cognitive function in children from low and high socioeconomic status. Development and Psychopathology, 13(3), 653-676. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0954579401003133

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. A related earlier paper by the same group is Lupien et al. (2000), Biological Psychiatry, 48, 976-980, doi 10.1016/s0006-3223(00)00965-3.

All fields
ID
REF-436
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lupien, S. J., King, S., Meaney, M. J., & McEwen, B. S.
Year
2001
Title
Can poverty get under your skin? Basal cortisol levels and cognitive function in children from low and high socioeconomic status
Description
A direct empirical test of whether childhood poverty registers in the body's stress physiology, and the more precisely on-topic of the Lupien group's work for a poverty and health argument. In 307 children aged 6 to 16 in Montreal, children from low socioeconomic status backgrounds aged 6 to 10 had significantly higher morning salivary cortisol than their high status peers. The finding is notably conditional rather than uniform: the difference disappeared around the school transition and was absent in the high school aged group, which the authors interpret through an equalization process in which the class patterning of a biological marker is not constant across development. No socioeconomic differences appeared in memory, attention or language performance, so the physiological signal preceded any measurable cognitive deficit. Mothers of the low status children reported more depressive feelings and more unhealthy behaviours, and the authors set out four social explanatory factors linking status to child cortisol.
Publication or publisher
Development and Psychopathology, 13(3), 653-676
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/11523853/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0954579401003133
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. A related earlier paper by the same group is Lupien et al. (2000), Biological Psychiatry, 48, 976-980, doi 10.1016/s0006-3223(00)00965-3.
Related items
REF-437; REF-434; REF-392
Full APA reference
Lupien, S. J., King, S., Meaney, M. J., & McEwen, B. S. (2001). Can poverty get under your skin? Basal cortisol levels and cognitive function in children from low and high socioeconomic status. Development and Psychopathology, 13(3), 653-676. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0954579401003133
REF-437 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of stress throughout the lifespan on the brain, behaviour and cognition

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

The standard review of how stress exposure shapes the brain across the life course, and the citation to use when arguing that timing of disadvantage matters as much as its presence. Its central claim is that the effects of stress depend on when in development the exposure occurs and how long it lasts, and on interactions between genetic vulnerability and prior adversity rather than on stress exposure alone. From this the authors build a model that explains why different disorders emerge depending on the developmental window in which the stress falls, which is why the same socioeconomic exposure can produce different outcomes in early childhood, adolescence and adulthood. For a poverty and mental health argument this supplies the developmental mechanism that sits between the physiological account of allostatic load and the population level social gradient.

Full APA reference

Lupien, S. J., McEwen, B. S., Gunnar, M. R., & Heim, C. (2009). Effects of stress throughout the lifespan on the brain, behaviour and cognition. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 10(6), 434-445. https://doi.org/10.1038/nrn2639

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the June 2009 issue, e-published 29 April 2009, no retraction. This is the correct Lupien citation: a circulated reference to Lupien et al. (2009), "Parental socioeconomic status and child development", Child Development, 80(4), 1313-1328 does not exist. That DOI is unregistered and Child Development 80(4) contains no Lupien article, page 1313 being the final page of an unrelated paper.

All fields
ID
REF-437
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lupien, S. J., McEwen, B. S., Gunnar, M. R., & Heim, C.
Year
2009
Title
Effects of stress throughout the lifespan on the brain, behaviour and cognition
Description
The standard review of how stress exposure shapes the brain across the life course, and the citation to use when arguing that timing of disadvantage matters as much as its presence. Its central claim is that the effects of stress depend on when in development the exposure occurs and how long it lasts, and on interactions between genetic vulnerability and prior adversity rather than on stress exposure alone. From this the authors build a model that explains why different disorders emerge depending on the developmental window in which the stress falls, which is why the same socioeconomic exposure can produce different outcomes in early childhood, adolescence and adulthood. For a poverty and mental health argument this supplies the developmental mechanism that sits between the physiological account of allostatic load and the population level social gradient.
Publication or publisher
Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 10(6), 434-445
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/19401723/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/nrn2639
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the June 2009 issue, e-published 29 April 2009, no retraction. This is the correct Lupien citation: a circulated reference to Lupien et al. (2009), "Parental socioeconomic status and child development", Child Development, 80(4), 1313-1328 does not exist. That DOI is unregistered and Child Development 80(4) contains no Lupien article, page 1313 being the final page of an unrelated paper.
Related items
REF-436; REF-434; REF-435; REF-508
Full APA reference
Lupien, S. J., McEwen, B. S., Gunnar, M. R., & Heim, C. (2009). Effects of stress throughout the lifespan on the brain, behaviour and cognition. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 10(6), 434-445. https://doi.org/10.1038/nrn2639
REF-438 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO European review of social determinants of health and the health divide

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The regional successor to the 2008 Commission on Social Determinants of Health, covering all 53 WHO European Member States and commissioned to underpin the Health 2020 policy framework. It extends the Commission's global analysis into a setting of wide within-region inequality, examining the health divide both between countries and along the social gradient inside them. Its recommendations run on three fronts: action on the social determinants of health, action across the life course, and action in the wider social and economic spheres beyond the health sector. It is useful in a lifestyle and public health library because it is the most policy-operational of the Marmot documents at supranational level, and because the consortium behind it names more than forty collaborators including Amartya Sen, Johan Mackenbach, Margaret Whitehead and Ilona Kickbusch, which makes it a compact map of the field.

Full APA reference

Marmot, M., Allen, J., Bell, R., Bloomer, E., & Goldblatt, P. (2012). WHO European review of social determinants of health and the health divide. The Lancet, 380(9846), 1011-1029. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61228-8

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Issue dated 15 September 2012, e-published 8 September 2012, no retraction. A circulated citation to Marmot et al. (2010), "Social determinants of health", The Lancet, 376(7650), 1340-1353 is not a real article: Lancet volume 376 uses 9700 series issue numbers, and the DOI attached to it resolves instead to an unrelated 2010 correspondence reply on hepatic hydrothorax. A genuine single-author companion piece is Marmot (2005), Social determinants of health inequalities, The Lancet, 365(9464), 1099-1104.

All fields
ID
REF-438
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marmot, M., Allen, J., Bell, R., Bloomer, E., & Goldblatt, P., on behalf of the Consortium for the European Review of Social Determinants of Health and the Health Divide
Year
2012
Title
WHO European review of social determinants of health and the health divide
Description
The regional successor to the 2008 Commission on Social Determinants of Health, covering all 53 WHO European Member States and commissioned to underpin the Health 2020 policy framework. It extends the Commission's global analysis into a setting of wide within-region inequality, examining the health divide both between countries and along the social gradient inside them. Its recommendations run on three fronts: action on the social determinants of health, action across the life course, and action in the wider social and economic spheres beyond the health sector. It is useful in a lifestyle and public health library because it is the most policy-operational of the Marmot documents at supranational level, and because the consortium behind it names more than forty collaborators including Amartya Sen, Johan Mackenbach, Margaret Whitehead and Ilona Kickbusch, which makes it a compact map of the field.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 380(9846), 1011-1029
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/22964159/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61228-8
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Issue dated 15 September 2012, e-published 8 September 2012, no retraction. A circulated citation to Marmot et al. (2010), "Social determinants of health", The Lancet, 376(7650), 1340-1353 is not a real article: Lancet volume 376 uses 9700 series issue numbers, and the DOI attached to it resolves instead to an unrelated 2010 correspondence reply on hepatic hydrothorax. A genuine single-author companion piece is Marmot (2005), Social determinants of health inequalities, The Lancet, 365(9464), 1099-1104.
Related items
REF-207; REF-208; REF-072
Full APA reference
Marmot, M., Allen, J., Bell, R., Bloomer, E., & Goldblatt, P. (2012). WHO European review of social determinants of health and the health divide. The Lancet, 380(9846), 1011-1029. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(12)61228-8
REF-439 Paper, guideline or statement

Access to affordable and nutritious food: Measuring and understanding food deserts and their consequences. Report to Congress

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

The report that established how food deserts are actually measured in the United States, prepared for Congress under a mandate in the Food, Conservation, and Energy Act of 2008. It is worth citing precisely because its headline conclusion is more cautious than the popular food desert narrative: it finds that only a small percentage of consumers are genuinely constrained in accessing affordable nutritious food because they live far from a supermarket and lack easy transportation. The measurement definitions it seeded remain in use, with low access to a food store defined at more than 0.5 mile or more than 1.0 mile in urban tracts and more than 10 miles or more than 20 miles in rural tracts, and low income tracts defined by the Treasury New Markets Tax Credit rule of a poverty rate of 20 percent or more or a median family income at or below 80 percent of the state or metropolitan median. Those thresholds now drive the four low income and low access measures in the USDA Food Access Research Atlas, each requiring at least 500 people or at least 33 percent of the tract population beyond the distance threshold, or at least 100 housing units without a vehicle beyond 0.5 mile. On the standard 1 mile urban and 10 mile rural pairing, about 6 percent of the United States population, roughly 19 million people, lived in low income and low access areas in 2019, in every state and the District of Columbia.

Full APA reference

Ver Ploeg, M., Breneman, V., Farrigan, T., Hamrick, K., Hopkins, D., Kaufman, P., Lin, B.-H., Nord, M., Smith, T. A., Williams, R., Kinnison, K., Olander, C., Singh, A., & Tuckermanty, E. (2009). Access to affordable and nutritious food: Measuring and understanding food deserts and their consequences. Report to Congress (AP-036). United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service. https://www.ers.usda.gov/publications/pub-details?pubid=42729

Verified against the USDA Economic Research Service publication record on 17 September 2026. Released 25 June 2009. No DOI or ISBN is issued. A circulated citation to "USDA Economic Research Service. (2021). Food access and nutrition in low-income communities" could not be found and appears not to exist; this Report to Congress is the citable USDA food desert publication. The distance thresholds and the 2019 low income and low access population figure were confirmed from the current Food Access Research Atlas technical documentation and Congressional Research Service brief IF11841.

All fields
ID
REF-439
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ver Ploeg, M., Breneman, V., Farrigan, T., Hamrick, K., Hopkins, D., Kaufman, P., Lin, B.-H., Nord, M., Smith, T. A., Williams, R., Kinnison, K., Olander, C., Singh, A., & Tuckermanty, E.
Year
2009
Title
Access to affordable and nutritious food: Measuring and understanding food deserts and their consequences. Report to Congress
Description
The report that established how food deserts are actually measured in the United States, prepared for Congress under a mandate in the Food, Conservation, and Energy Act of 2008. It is worth citing precisely because its headline conclusion is more cautious than the popular food desert narrative: it finds that only a small percentage of consumers are genuinely constrained in accessing affordable nutritious food because they live far from a supermarket and lack easy transportation. The measurement definitions it seeded remain in use, with low access to a food store defined at more than 0.5 mile or more than 1.0 mile in urban tracts and more than 10 miles or more than 20 miles in rural tracts, and low income tracts defined by the Treasury New Markets Tax Credit rule of a poverty rate of 20 percent or more or a median family income at or below 80 percent of the state or metropolitan median. Those thresholds now drive the four low income and low access measures in the USDA Food Access Research Atlas, each requiring at least 500 people or at least 33 percent of the tract population beyond the distance threshold, or at least 100 housing units without a vehicle beyond 0.5 mile. On the standard 1 mile urban and 10 mile rural pairing, about 6 percent of the United States population, roughly 19 million people, lived in low income and low access areas in 2019, in every state and the District of Columbia.
Publication or publisher
United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service, report AP-036
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ers.usda.gov/publications/pub-details?pubid=42729
Verification note
Verified against the USDA Economic Research Service publication record on 17 September 2026. Released 25 June 2009. No DOI or ISBN is issued. A circulated citation to "USDA Economic Research Service. (2021). Food access and nutrition in low-income communities" could not be found and appears not to exist; this Report to Congress is the citable USDA food desert publication. The distance thresholds and the 2019 low income and low access population figure were confirmed from the current Food Access Research Atlas technical documentation and Congressional Research Service brief IF11841.
Related items
REF-440; REF-226; REF-227
Full APA reference
Ver Ploeg, M., Breneman, V., Farrigan, T., Hamrick, K., Hopkins, D., Kaufman, P., Lin, B.-H., Nord, M., Smith, T. A., Williams, R., Kinnison, K., Olander, C., Singh, A., & Tuckermanty, E. (2009). Access to affordable and nutritious food: Measuring and understanding food deserts and their consequences. Report to Congress (AP-036). United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service. https://www.ers.usda.gov/publications/pub-details?pubid=42729
REF-440 Paper, guideline or statement

Household food security in the United States in 2024

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

The current official United States food insecurity prevalence estimate, and the companion any food desert citation needs because access and insecurity are different measures. Drawn from the Current Population Survey Food Security Supplement collected in December 2024, it reports 86.3 percent of households food secure and 13.7 percent food insecure in 2024, statistically similar to 13.5 percent in 2023 and 12.8 percent in 2022, with 5.4 percent experiencing very low food security. Among households with children, 9.1 percent were food insecure among both children and adults and 0.9 percent had very low food security among children. Two figures are particularly useful for a social determinants argument: food secure households spent 11.1 percent more on food than food insecure households of the same size and composition, so insecurity is not explained by different spending preferences, and 58.9 percent of food insecure households had used SNAP, WIC or the National School Lunch Program in the previous month, so the majority were already inside the safety net.

Full APA reference

Rabbitt, M. P., Reed-Jones, M., Hales, L. J., Suttles, S., & Burke, M. P. (2025). Household food security in the United States in 2024 (Economic Research Report No. 358). United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service. https://ers.usda.gov/sites/default/files/_laserfiche/publications/113623/ERR-358.pdf

Verified against the USDA Economic Research Service report on 17 September 2026. Published December 2025. No DOI is issued. The prior edition is Economic Research Report 337, covering 2023.

All fields
ID
REF-440
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rabbitt, M. P., Reed-Jones, M., Hales, L. J., Suttles, S., & Burke, M. P.
Year
2025
Title
Household food security in the United States in 2024
Description
The current official United States food insecurity prevalence estimate, and the companion any food desert citation needs because access and insecurity are different measures. Drawn from the Current Population Survey Food Security Supplement collected in December 2024, it reports 86.3 percent of households food secure and 13.7 percent food insecure in 2024, statistically similar to 13.5 percent in 2023 and 12.8 percent in 2022, with 5.4 percent experiencing very low food security. Among households with children, 9.1 percent were food insecure among both children and adults and 0.9 percent had very low food security among children. Two figures are particularly useful for a social determinants argument: food secure households spent 11.1 percent more on food than food insecure households of the same size and composition, so insecurity is not explained by different spending preferences, and 58.9 percent of food insecure households had used SNAP, WIC or the National School Lunch Program in the previous month, so the majority were already inside the safety net.
Publication or publisher
United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service, Economic Research Report 358
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://ers.usda.gov/sites/default/files/_laserfiche/publications/113623/ERR-358.pdf
Verification note
Verified against the USDA Economic Research Service report on 17 September 2026. Published December 2025. No DOI is issued. The prior edition is Economic Research Report 337, covering 2023.
Related items
REF-439; REF-226; REF-228
Full APA reference
Rabbitt, M. P., Reed-Jones, M., Hales, L. J., Suttles, S., & Burke, M. P. (2025). Household food security in the United States in 2024 (Economic Research Report No. 358). United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service. https://ers.usda.gov/sites/default/files/_laserfiche/publications/113623/ERR-358.pdf
REF-441 Paper, guideline or statement

Poverty impedes cognitive function

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The primary experimental evidence that poverty itself consumes cognitive capacity, and the citation that should be used wherever the scarcity mindset is invoked. Four laboratory experiments with shoppers at a New Jersey mall, with samples of 101, 100 and 96, primed participants with a hypothetical car repair costing either $1,500 or $150 before administering Raven's Progressive Matrices and a spatial compatibility cognitive control task. In the easy condition there was no difference between richer and poorer participants, t(50) = 0.13, P = 0.90, but in the hard condition poorer participants performed markedly worse, t(47) = 3.21, P less than 0.01 on Raven's and t(47) = 5.22, P less than 0.001 on cognitive control. The effect size, Cohen's d of 0.88 to 0.94, is equivalent to roughly 13 IQ points, comparable in standard deviation terms to losing a full night of sleep, and paying participants $0.25 per correct answer did not remove it, with poorer participants still earning 18 percent less. The field study is what makes the finding hard to dismiss: 464 small sugarcane farmers on 1.5 to 3 acre plots across 54 villages in Tamil Nadu, tested before and after harvest, improved from 4.35 to 5.45 correct on Raven's and from 146 to 131 seconds on the Stroop task, all P less than 0.001, with farmer and month fixed effects confirming the shift; pre-harvest, 78 percent had pawned items and 99 percent had loans, against 4 and 13 percent after harvest. Time, nutrition, work effort and stress are each ruled out as explanations, leaving cognitive load from financial pressure itself.

Full APA reference

Mani, A., Mullainathan, S., Shafir, E., & Zhao, J. (2013). Poverty impedes cognitive function. Science, 341(6149), 976-980. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1238041

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the Crossref entry on 17 September 2026. Published 30 August 2013. No retraction, correction or erratum.

All fields
ID
REF-441
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mani, A., Mullainathan, S., Shafir, E., & Zhao, J.
Year
2013
Title
Poverty impedes cognitive function
Description
The primary experimental evidence that poverty itself consumes cognitive capacity, and the citation that should be used wherever the scarcity mindset is invoked. Four laboratory experiments with shoppers at a New Jersey mall, with samples of 101, 100 and 96, primed participants with a hypothetical car repair costing either $1,500 or $150 before administering Raven's Progressive Matrices and a spatial compatibility cognitive control task. In the easy condition there was no difference between richer and poorer participants, t(50) = 0.13, P = 0.90, but in the hard condition poorer participants performed markedly worse, t(47) = 3.21, P less than 0.01 on Raven's and t(47) = 5.22, P less than 0.001 on cognitive control. The effect size, Cohen's d of 0.88 to 0.94, is equivalent to roughly 13 IQ points, comparable in standard deviation terms to losing a full night of sleep, and paying participants $0.25 per correct answer did not remove it, with poorer participants still earning 18 percent less. The field study is what makes the finding hard to dismiss: 464 small sugarcane farmers on 1.5 to 3 acre plots across 54 villages in Tamil Nadu, tested before and after harvest, improved from 4.35 to 5.45 correct on Raven's and from 146 to 131 seconds on the Stroop task, all P less than 0.001, with farmer and month fixed effects confirming the shift; pre-harvest, 78 percent had pawned items and 99 percent had loans, against 4 and 13 percent after harvest. Time, nutrition, work effort and stress are each ruled out as explanations, leaving cognitive load from financial pressure itself.
Publication or publisher
Science, 341(6149), 976-980
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Social determinants and equity; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/23990553/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1238041
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the Crossref entry on 17 September 2026. Published 30 August 2013. No retraction, correction or erratum.
Related items
REF-442; REF-443; REF-211
Full APA reference
Mani, A., Mullainathan, S., Shafir, E., & Zhao, J. (2013). Poverty impedes cognitive function. Science, 341(6149), 976-980. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1238041
REF-442 Paper, guideline or statement

Scarcity: Why having too little means so much

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The book that gave the scarcity mindset its vocabulary, and the accessible companion to the experimental evidence. Its argument is that scarcity of any resource, money, time or calories, captures attention in a way that produces both a benefit and a cost. The benefit is the focus dividend, a sharpening of attention on the pressing shortfall. The costs are tunneling, in which attention narrows onto the immediate lack; the tunneling tax, the neglect of everything outside the tunnel including preventive health behaviour and long term planning; goal inhibition, in which competing goals are suppressed; and a reduction in bandwidth, the general cognitive and executive capacity available for decisions. For lifestyle and public health work its practical implication is that advice-heavy interventions asking people to plan ahead, attend appointments and adhere to regimens are asking most of the people who have least bandwidth to give, which reframes non-adherence as a predictable consequence of scarcity rather than a character trait.

Full APA reference

Mullainathan, S., & Shafir, E. (2013). Scarcity: Why having too little means so much. Times Books.

Verified on 17 September 2026. This is a book, not a journal article. Published 3 September 2013, ISBN-13 9780805092646 and ISBN-10 0805092641, no DOI. The publisher is Times Books at Henry Holt under Macmillan, not "time Press" as is sometimes cited. Listed extent is 288 pages in the Google Books record and 304 pages for the hardcover elsewhere; the publisher page blocks automated access so the discrepancy is unresolved. The peer reviewed evidence behind the book is at REF-441.

All fields
ID
REF-442
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mullainathan, S., & Shafir, E.
Year
2013
Title
Scarcity: Why having too little means so much
Description
The book that gave the scarcity mindset its vocabulary, and the accessible companion to the experimental evidence. Its argument is that scarcity of any resource, money, time or calories, captures attention in a way that produces both a benefit and a cost. The benefit is the focus dividend, a sharpening of attention on the pressing shortfall. The costs are tunneling, in which attention narrows onto the immediate lack; the tunneling tax, the neglect of everything outside the tunnel including preventive health behaviour and long term planning; goal inhibition, in which competing goals are suppressed; and a reduction in bandwidth, the general cognitive and executive capacity available for decisions. For lifestyle and public health work its practical implication is that advice-heavy interventions asking people to plan ahead, attend appointments and adhere to regimens are asking most of the people who have least bandwidth to give, which reframes non-adherence as a predictable consequence of scarcity rather than a character trait.
Publication or publisher
Times Books, an imprint of Henry Holt (Macmillan), New York
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Other
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Behaviour change and adherence; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://books.google.com/books/about/Scarcity.html?id=xUCqAAAAQBAJ
Verification note
Verified on 17 September 2026. This is a book, not a journal article. Published 3 September 2013, ISBN-13 9780805092646 and ISBN-10 0805092641, no DOI. The publisher is Times Books at Henry Holt under Macmillan, not "time Press" as is sometimes cited. Listed extent is 288 pages in the Google Books record and 304 pages for the hardcover elsewhere; the publisher page blocks automated access so the discrepancy is unresolved. The peer reviewed evidence behind the book is at REF-441.
Related items
REF-441
Full APA reference
Mullainathan, S., & Shafir, E. (2013). Scarcity: Why having too little means so much. Times Books.
REF-443 Paper, guideline or statement

Poverty, depression, and anxiety: Causal evidence and mechanisms

  • Report or review
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The most rigorous available synthesis of causal evidence on the poverty and mental health relationship, and the strongest single citation for the claim that the causation runs in both directions rather than one. Reviewing experimental and quasi-experimental studies, it finds that mental illness reduces employment and income, that psychological interventions generate measurable economic gains, that negative economic shocks cause mental illness, and that antipoverty programmes including cash transfers improve mental health outcomes. That two way structure matters practically, because it means clinical treatment and income support are complements rather than competing priorities, and that either one alone leaves part of the loop intact. It sets this against baseline epidemiology in which 3 to 4 percent of the world population has depression or anxiety at any given time, together accounting for about 8 percent of global years lived with disability, and it argues explicitly that these are not diseases of affluence.

Full APA reference

Ridley, M., Rao, G., Schilbach, F., & Patel, V. (2020). Poverty, depression, and anxiety: Causal evidence and mechanisms. Science, 370(6522), Article eaay0214. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.aay0214

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 11 December 2020. Not retracted, but corrected: see the erratum at Science, 383(6689), eadp1916, 22 March 2024, doi 10.1126/science.adp1916.

All fields
ID
REF-443
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ridley, M., Rao, G., Schilbach, F., & Patel, V.
Year
2020
Title
Poverty, depression, and anxiety: Causal evidence and mechanisms
Description
The most rigorous available synthesis of causal evidence on the poverty and mental health relationship, and the strongest single citation for the claim that the causation runs in both directions rather than one. Reviewing experimental and quasi-experimental studies, it finds that mental illness reduces employment and income, that psychological interventions generate measurable economic gains, that negative economic shocks cause mental illness, and that antipoverty programmes including cash transfers improve mental health outcomes. That two way structure matters practically, because it means clinical treatment and income support are complements rather than competing priorities, and that either one alone leaves part of the loop intact. It sets this against baseline epidemiology in which 3 to 4 percent of the world population has depression or anxiety at any given time, together accounting for about 8 percent of global years lived with disability, and it argues explicitly that these are not diseases of affluence.
Publication or publisher
Science, 370(6522), Article eaay0214
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33303583/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1126/science.aay0214
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 11 December 2020. Not retracted, but corrected: see the erratum at Science, 383(6689), eadp1916, 22 March 2024, doi 10.1126/science.adp1916.
Related items
REF-441; REF-211; REF-444
Full APA reference
Ridley, M., Rao, G., Schilbach, F., & Patel, V. (2020). Poverty, depression, and anxiety: Causal evidence and mechanisms. Science, 370(6522), Article eaay0214. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.aay0214
REF-444 Paper, guideline or statement

The association between income and life expectancy in the United States, 2001-2014

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The definitive quantification of the income and lifespan gradient, built from 1.4 billion tax records covering 1,408,287,218 person years for ages 40 to 76, with 4,114,380 male deaths and 2,694,808 female deaths. The headline gap between the richest and poorest 1 percent is 14.6 years of life expectancy for men, 95 percent confidence interval 14.4 to 14.8, and 10.1 years for women, 9.9 to 10.3. The trend is as important as the level: between 2001 and 2014 the top 5 percent gained 2.34 years for men and 2.91 for women while the bottom 5 percent gained 0.32 and 0.04 years, P less than 0.001, so the gradient widened. Its most useful finding for lifestyle and public health work is what explains the roughly 4.5 years of geographic variation within the bottom income quartile: life expectancy for the poorest correlated with smoking at r = -0.69, immigrant share at r = 0.72, college graduate share at r = 0.42 and local government expenditure at r = 0.57, and showed no significant correlation with access to medical care, physical environment measures, income inequality or labour market conditions. Where a poor person lives, and the health behaviours and civic resources of that place, tracked their lifespan more closely than medical access did.

Full APA reference

Chetty, R., Stepner, M., Abraham, S., Lin, S., Scuderi, B., Turner, N., Bergeron, A., & Cutler, D. (2016). The association between income and life expectancy in the United States, 2001-2014. JAMA, 315(16), 1750-1766. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2016.4226

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 26 April 2016. Not retracted, but corrected: "Missing Negative Symbol", JAMA, 317(1), 90, 3 January 2017, doi 10.1001/jama.2016.18691.

All fields
ID
REF-444
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Chetty, R., Stepner, M., Abraham, S., Lin, S., Scuderi, B., Turner, N., Bergeron, A., & Cutler, D.
Year
2016
Title
The association between income and life expectancy in the United States, 2001-2014
Description
The definitive quantification of the income and lifespan gradient, built from 1.4 billion tax records covering 1,408,287,218 person years for ages 40 to 76, with 4,114,380 male deaths and 2,694,808 female deaths. The headline gap between the richest and poorest 1 percent is 14.6 years of life expectancy for men, 95 percent confidence interval 14.4 to 14.8, and 10.1 years for women, 9.9 to 10.3. The trend is as important as the level: between 2001 and 2014 the top 5 percent gained 2.34 years for men and 2.91 for women while the bottom 5 percent gained 0.32 and 0.04 years, P less than 0.001, so the gradient widened. Its most useful finding for lifestyle and public health work is what explains the roughly 4.5 years of geographic variation within the bottom income quartile: life expectancy for the poorest correlated with smoking at r = -0.69, immigrant share at r = 0.72, college graduate share at r = 0.42 and local government expenditure at r = 0.57, and showed no significant correlation with access to medical care, physical environment measures, income inequality or labour market conditions. Where a poor person lives, and the health behaviours and civic resources of that place, tracked their lifespan more closely than medical access did.
Publication or publisher
JAMA, 315(16), 1750-1766
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/27063997/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2016.4226
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 26 April 2016. Not retracted, but corrected: "Missing Negative Symbol", JAMA, 317(1), 90, 3 January 2017, doi 10.1001/jama.2016.18691.
Related items
REF-210; REF-438; REF-443
Full APA reference
Chetty, R., Stepner, M., Abraham, S., Lin, S., Scuderi, B., Turner, N., Bergeron, A., & Cutler, D. (2016). The association between income and life expectancy in the United States, 2001-2014. JAMA, 315(16), 1750-1766. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2016.4226
REF-445 Paper, guideline or statement

Vital Signs: Estimated proportion of adult health problems attributable to adverse childhood experiences and implications for prevention, 25 states, 2015-2017

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

The population level counterpart to the original ACE study, and the citation that converts adverse childhood experiences from a risk factor into an attributable disease burden. Using Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System data from the 25 states that added ACE items between 2015 and 2017, it finds that 15.6 percent of adults, nearly one in six, reported four or more ACE types. Its population attributable fractions are the numbers worth quoting: from 1.7 percent for overweight or obesity up to 23.9 percent for heavy drinking, 27.0 percent for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and 44.1 percent for depression. Current CDC estimates put the reach higher still in adolescents, with three in four high school students reporting one or more ACEs and one in five reporting four or more, and model preventing ACEs as capable of reducing student suicide attempts by up to 89 percent, prescription pain medication misuse by up to 84 percent, persistent sadness or hopelessness by up to 66 percent, adult depression by 78 percent and adult heart disease cases by 22 percent. The named mechanism is toxic stress affecting brain development, immune function and stress response systems, explicitly tied to under-resourced neighbourhoods and poverty, at an estimated annual United States cost of $14.1 trillion in direct medical spending and lost healthy life years.

Full APA reference

Merrick, M. T., Ford, D. C., Ports, K. A., Guinn, A. S., Chen, J., Klevens, J., Metzler, M., Jones, C. M., Simon, T. R., Daniel, V. M., Ottley, P., & Mercy, J. A. (2019). Vital Signs: Estimated proportion of adult health problems attributable to adverse childhood experiences and implications for prevention, 25 states, 2015-2017. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 68(44), 999-1005. https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/volumes/68/wr/mm6844e1.htm

Verified against the MMWR record on 17 September 2026. Weekly issue dated 8 November 2019, early release 5 November 2019. No DOI is issued and no correction notice is recorded. A circulated citation to "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (1999). Selected provider messages: Adverse childhood experiences (ACEs)" could not be located and appears not to exist; the primary ACE study citation is Felitti et al. (1998) at REF-392, which was also reprinted at American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 56(6), 774-786 in 2019.

All fields
ID
REF-445
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Merrick, M. T., Ford, D. C., Ports, K. A., Guinn, A. S., Chen, J., Klevens, J., Metzler, M., Jones, C. M., Simon, T. R., Daniel, V. M., Ottley, P., & Mercy, J. A.
Year
2019
Title
Vital Signs: Estimated proportion of adult health problems attributable to adverse childhood experiences and implications for prevention, 25 states, 2015-2017
Description
The population level counterpart to the original ACE study, and the citation that converts adverse childhood experiences from a risk factor into an attributable disease burden. Using Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System data from the 25 states that added ACE items between 2015 and 2017, it finds that 15.6 percent of adults, nearly one in six, reported four or more ACE types. Its population attributable fractions are the numbers worth quoting: from 1.7 percent for overweight or obesity up to 23.9 percent for heavy drinking, 27.0 percent for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and 44.1 percent for depression. Current CDC estimates put the reach higher still in adolescents, with three in four high school students reporting one or more ACEs and one in five reporting four or more, and model preventing ACEs as capable of reducing student suicide attempts by up to 89 percent, prescription pain medication misuse by up to 84 percent, persistent sadness or hopelessness by up to 66 percent, adult depression by 78 percent and adult heart disease cases by 22 percent. The named mechanism is toxic stress affecting brain development, immune function and stress response systems, explicitly tied to under-resourced neighbourhoods and poverty, at an estimated annual United States cost of $14.1 trillion in direct medical spending and lost healthy life years.
Publication or publisher
Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 68(44), 999-1005
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/volumes/68/wr/mm6844e1.htm
Verification note
Verified against the MMWR record on 17 September 2026. Weekly issue dated 8 November 2019, early release 5 November 2019. No DOI is issued and no correction notice is recorded. A circulated citation to "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (1999). Selected provider messages: Adverse childhood experiences (ACEs)" could not be located and appears not to exist; the primary ACE study citation is Felitti et al. (1998) at REF-392, which was also reprinted at American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 56(6), 774-786 in 2019.
Related items
REF-392; REF-436
Full APA reference
Merrick, M. T., Ford, D. C., Ports, K. A., Guinn, A. S., Chen, J., Klevens, J., Metzler, M., Jones, C. M., Simon, T. R., Daniel, V. M., Ottley, P., & Mercy, J. A. (2019). Vital Signs: Estimated proportion of adult health problems attributable to adverse childhood experiences and implications for prevention, 25 states, 2015-2017. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, 68(44), 999-1005. https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/volumes/68/wr/mm6844e1.htm
REF-446 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of mental health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The document that applies the social determinants framework specifically to mental health, filling the gap between general social determinants reports and clinical mental health guidance. Its argument is that mental health and common mental disorders are shaped by the social, economic and physical environments people live in across every life stage, and that the risk factors for many mental disorders are heavily associated with social inequalities, with the general rule that the greater the inequality the higher the inequality in risk. From this it derives a life course action agenda covering the period before birth, early childhood, older childhood and adolescence, family building and working years, and older age, rather than treating mental health promotion as a single intervention point. It is one of four papers in the WHO and Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation Global Mental Health Platform series, and at 54 pages it is short enough to be genuinely usable as a briefing document with policymakers.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization, & Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation. (2014). Social determinants of mental health. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241506809

Bibliographic details verified against the WHO publication record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 May 2014, 54 pages, ISBN 978 92 4 150680 9, no DOI.

All fields
ID
REF-446
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization & Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation
Year
2014
Title
Social determinants of mental health
Description
The document that applies the social determinants framework specifically to mental health, filling the gap between general social determinants reports and clinical mental health guidance. Its argument is that mental health and common mental disorders are shaped by the social, economic and physical environments people live in across every life stage, and that the risk factors for many mental disorders are heavily associated with social inequalities, with the general rule that the greater the inequality the higher the inequality in risk. From this it derives a life course action agenda covering the period before birth, early childhood, older childhood and adolescence, family building and working years, and older age, rather than treating mental health promotion as a single intervention point. It is one of four papers in the WHO and Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation Global Mental Health Platform series, and at 54 pages it is short enough to be genuinely usable as a briefing document with policymakers.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization, Geneva
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241506809
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the WHO publication record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 May 2014, 54 pages, ISBN 978 92 4 150680 9, no DOI.
Related items
REF-211; REF-208; REF-433
Full APA reference
World Health Organization, & Calouste Gulbenkian Foundation. (2014). Social determinants of mental health. World Health Organization. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789241506809
REF-447 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of health (SDOH)

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The current United States framing of social determinants of health, useful mainly because it supplies the five domain Healthy People 2030 structure that most American policy and program documents organise themselves around: healthcare access and quality, education access and quality, social and community context, economic stability, and neighbourhood and built environment. CDC adopts the WHO style definition of social determinants as the nonmedical factors influencing health outcomes, the conditions in which people are born, grow, work, live, worship and age, and states plainly that these conditions influence health more than genetic factors or access to healthcare, with poverty highly correlated with poorer outcomes and higher risk of premature death. Social determinants is one of three CDC priority areas alongside health equity and health literacy. The page also names the implementation scaffolding worth knowing, including the REACH program, running since 1999 in racial and ethnic minority urban, rural and tribal communities, and the 10 Essential Public Health Services, Pathways to Population Health Equity, and Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships frameworks.

Full APA reference

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (n.d.). Social determinants of health (SDOH). https://www.cdc.gov/about/priorities/why-is-addressing-sdoh-important.html

Verified on 17 September 2026. CDC does not display a publication or review date on this page, so no year is recorded. A circulated citation to "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (2020). Social determinants of health: Theories and concepts" at cdc.gov/healthcommunications/info_campaigns/sdoh/index.html could not be found: that path returns an error and the Internet Archive holds no snapshot of it at all, so it appears never to have existed. A parallel current page is the CDC Public Health Gateway social determinants of health page.

All fields
ID
REF-447
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Year
n.d.
Title
Social determinants of health (SDOH)
Description
The current United States framing of social determinants of health, useful mainly because it supplies the five domain Healthy People 2030 structure that most American policy and program documents organise themselves around: healthcare access and quality, education access and quality, social and community context, economic stability, and neighbourhood and built environment. CDC adopts the WHO style definition of social determinants as the nonmedical factors influencing health outcomes, the conditions in which people are born, grow, work, live, worship and age, and states plainly that these conditions influence health more than genetic factors or access to healthcare, with poverty highly correlated with poorer outcomes and higher risk of premature death. Social determinants is one of three CDC priority areas alongside health equity and health literacy. The page also names the implementation scaffolding worth knowing, including the REACH program, running since 1999 in racial and ethnic minority urban, rural and tribal communities, and the 10 Essential Public Health Services, Pathways to Population Health Equity, and Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships frameworks.
Publication or publisher
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cdc.gov/about/priorities/why-is-addressing-sdoh-important.html
Verification note
Verified on 17 September 2026. CDC does not display a publication or review date on this page, so no year is recorded. A circulated citation to "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (2020). Social determinants of health: Theories and concepts" at cdc.gov/healthcommunications/info_campaigns/sdoh/index.html could not be found: that path returns an error and the Internet Archive holds no snapshot of it at all, so it appears never to have existed. A parallel current page is the CDC Public Health Gateway social determinants of health page.
Related items
REF-208; REF-207
Full APA reference
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (n.d.). Social determinants of health (SDOH). https://www.cdc.gov/about/priorities/why-is-addressing-sdoh-important.html
REF-448 Paper, guideline or statement

Canadian Network for Mood and Anxiety Treatments (CANMAT) 2023 update on clinical guidelines for management of major depressive disorder in adults

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The major depression guideline that gives lifestyle interventions a formal place in the treatment algorithm rather than an appendix, and the first CANMAT update since 2016. It is built as eight question and answer topics tracing a patient journey from assessment through evidence based treatment, prevention of recurrence and strategies for inadequate response, with recommendations organised by lines of treatment and graded on CANMAT levels of evidence supplemented by clinical support covering safety, tolerability and feasibility. The lifestyle recommendations are specific enough to prescribe from. Supervised exercise at low to moderate intensity for 30 to 40 minutes at a time, 3 to 4 times a week, for a minimum of 9 weeks, is first line monotherapy for mild depression and second line adjunctive treatment at moderate severity, and the guideline notes exercise can also reduce suicidal ideation and works well combined with antidepressants, with adjunctive exercise showing medium to large effects against no treatment and treatment as usual. Diet is treated more cautiously: many observational studies link a Western pattern high in refined carbohydrates and saturated fat and low in fruit and vegetables to greater prevalence and severity of depressive symptoms, but only one randomised trial of a Mediterranean type diet in adults with major depressive disorder exists, supporting a third line recommendation only, and evidence on probiotics is judged equivocal and insufficient to recommend. Sleep is framed as a treatment target in its own right, with sleep hygiene instruction judged likely beneficial despite limited trial evidence and small sample trials of insomnia focused cognitive behavioural therapy showing promise, while sleep deprivation or wake therapy remains third line because a recent meta-analysis found no benefit when compared against the same treatment without it, and carries a caution that it may precipitate hypomania in susceptible people not previously diagnosed with bipolar disorder. Throughout, the guideline adopts a personalised care approach built on shared decision making that reflects the values, preferences and treatment history of the individual, and it states its caveats and limitations openly.

Full APA reference

Lam, R. W., Kennedy, S. H., Adams, C., Bahji, A., Beaulieu, S., Bhat, V., Blier, P., Blumberger, D. M., Brietzke, E., Chakrabarty, T., Do, A., Frey, B. N., Giacobbe, P., Gratzer, D., Grigoriadis, S., Habert, J., Husain, M. I., Ismail, Z., McGirr, A., McIntyre, R. S., Michalak, E. E., Müller, D. J., Parikh, S. V., Quilty, L. C., Ravindran, A. V., Ravindran, N., Renaud, J., Rosenblat, J. D., Samaan, Z., Saraf, G., Schade, K., Schaffer, A., Sinyor, M., Soares, C. N., Swainson, J., Taylor, V. H., Tourjman, S. V., Uher, R., van Ameringen, M., Vazquez, G., Vigod, S., Voineskos, D., Yatham, L. N., & Milev, R. V. (2024). Canadian Network for Mood and Anxiety Treatments (CANMAT) 2023 update on clinical guidelines for management of major depressive disorder in adults. The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 69(9), 641-687. https://doi.org/10.1177/07067437241245384

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published online ahead of print 6 May 2024, print issue September 2024. Publication type Practice Guideline. A corrigendum was published in The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 2025 August, 70(8), 652, https://doi.org/10.1177/07067437251349087, PMID 40490255; the guideline itself is not retracted or superseded.

All fields
ID
REF-448
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lam, R. W., Kennedy, S. H., Adams, C., Bahji, A., Beaulieu, S., Bhat, V., Blier, P., Blumberger, D. M., Brietzke, E., Chakrabarty, T., Do, A., Frey, B. N., Giacobbe, P., Gratzer, D., Grigoriadis, S., Habert, J., Husain, M. I., Ismail, Z., McGirr, A., McIntyre, R. S., Michalak, E. E., Müller, D. J., Parikh, S. V., Quilty, L. C., Ravindran, A. V., Ravindran, N., Renaud, J., Rosenblat, J. D., Samaan, Z., Saraf, G., Schade, K., Schaffer, A., Sinyor, M., Soares, C. N., Swainson, J., Taylor, V. H., Tourjman, S. V., Uher, R., van Ameringen, M., Vazquez, G., Vigod, S., Voineskos, D., Yatham, L. N., & Milev, R. V.
Year
2024
Title
Canadian Network for Mood and Anxiety Treatments (CANMAT) 2023 update on clinical guidelines for management of major depressive disorder in adults
Description
The major depression guideline that gives lifestyle interventions a formal place in the treatment algorithm rather than an appendix, and the first CANMAT update since 2016. It is built as eight question and answer topics tracing a patient journey from assessment through evidence based treatment, prevention of recurrence and strategies for inadequate response, with recommendations organised by lines of treatment and graded on CANMAT levels of evidence supplemented by clinical support covering safety, tolerability and feasibility. The lifestyle recommendations are specific enough to prescribe from. Supervised exercise at low to moderate intensity for 30 to 40 minutes at a time, 3 to 4 times a week, for a minimum of 9 weeks, is first line monotherapy for mild depression and second line adjunctive treatment at moderate severity, and the guideline notes exercise can also reduce suicidal ideation and works well combined with antidepressants, with adjunctive exercise showing medium to large effects against no treatment and treatment as usual. Diet is treated more cautiously: many observational studies link a Western pattern high in refined carbohydrates and saturated fat and low in fruit and vegetables to greater prevalence and severity of depressive symptoms, but only one randomised trial of a Mediterranean type diet in adults with major depressive disorder exists, supporting a third line recommendation only, and evidence on probiotics is judged equivocal and insufficient to recommend. Sleep is framed as a treatment target in its own right, with sleep hygiene instruction judged likely beneficial despite limited trial evidence and small sample trials of insomnia focused cognitive behavioural therapy showing promise, while sleep deprivation or wake therapy remains third line because a recent meta-analysis found no benefit when compared against the same treatment without it, and carries a caution that it may precipitate hypomania in susceptible people not previously diagnosed with bipolar disorder. Throughout, the guideline adopts a personalised care approach built on shared decision making that reflects the values, preferences and treatment history of the individual, and it states its caveats and limitations openly.
Publication or publisher
The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 69(9), 641-687
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38711351/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/07067437241245384
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published online ahead of print 6 May 2024, print issue September 2024. Publication type Practice Guideline. A corrigendum was published in The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 2025 August, 70(8), 652, https://doi.org/10.1177/07067437251349087, PMID 40490255; the guideline itself is not retracted or superseded.
Related items
REF-073; REF-387; REF-449; REF-450; REF-481; REF-482; REF-483
Full APA reference
Lam, R. W., Kennedy, S. H., Adams, C., Bahji, A., Beaulieu, S., Bhat, V., Blier, P., Blumberger, D. M., Brietzke, E., Chakrabarty, T., Do, A., Frey, B. N., Giacobbe, P., Gratzer, D., Grigoriadis, S., Habert, J., Husain, M. I., Ismail, Z., McGirr, A., McIntyre, R. S., Michalak, E. E., Müller, D. J., Parikh, S. V., Quilty, L. C., Ravindran, A. V., Ravindran, N., Renaud, J., Rosenblat, J. D., Samaan, Z., Saraf, G., Schade, K., Schaffer, A., Sinyor, M., Soares, C. N., Swainson, J., Taylor, V. H., Tourjman, S. V., Uher, R., van Ameringen, M., Vazquez, G., Vigod, S., Voineskos, D., Yatham, L. N., & Milev, R. V. (2024). Canadian Network for Mood and Anxiety Treatments (CANMAT) 2023 update on clinical guidelines for management of major depressive disorder in adults. The Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 69(9), 641-687. https://doi.org/10.1177/07067437241245384
REF-449 Paper, guideline or statement

Association between physical activity and depression in university students: A systematic review and meta-analysis with public health implications

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A careful meta-analysis of physical activity and depression in university students that is useful as much for its honesty about its own limits as for its estimates. Following PRISMA, the authors searched PubMed, Web of Science, Embase, Scopus and PsycINFO from inception to 31 March 2026 and included 36 observational studies, 30 in the linear correlation analysis and 6 in the binary analysis, with 31 effect sizes covering 30,307 individuals. Pooled correlations ran in the expected inverse direction but with substantial to extreme heterogeneity, Pearson r = -0.19, 95 percent CI -0.28 to -0.11, I squared 94.4 percent, and Spearman r = -0.44, 95 percent CI -0.73 to -0.01, I squared 99.2 percent, and the authors state plainly that these should be read as average directional trends rather than precise or universally applicable effect sizes. After trim and fill correction the Pearson estimate remained significant at r = -0.114, 95 percent CI -0.209 to -0.016. The binary results are the more interesting finding: higher physical activity showed only a non-significant protective trend, pooled odds ratio 0.53, 95 percent CI 0.27 to 1.07 from 4 studies, while higher sedentary behaviour was significantly associated with increased depression risk, pooled odds ratio 1.60, 95 percent CI 1.26 to 2.04 from 2 studies, which suggests reducing sitting may matter at least as much as adding exercise. Subgroup analysis found a stronger negative association during and after the COVID-19 period. The public health implications are deliberately modest and practical, including brief activity breaks during long lectures, low threshold exercise opportunities and support for active commuting, and the authors caution that most included studies were cross-sectional, geographically skewed toward Chinese samples and highly heterogeneous, so the conclusions are public health directions rather than causal or universally generalisable recommendations.

Full APA reference

Wang, Y., Mao, H., Zhang, X., Li, D., Liu, Z., Shang, W., & Song, G. (2026). Association between physical activity and depression in university students: A systematic review and meta-analysis with public health implications. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, Article 1850043. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1850043

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 20 July 2026, PMID 42549181, PMCID PMC13430555, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-449
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, Y., Mao, H., Zhang, X., Li, D., Liu, Z., Shang, W., & Song, G.
Year
2026
Title
Association between physical activity and depression in university students: A systematic review and meta-analysis with public health implications
Description
A careful meta-analysis of physical activity and depression in university students that is useful as much for its honesty about its own limits as for its estimates. Following PRISMA, the authors searched PubMed, Web of Science, Embase, Scopus and PsycINFO from inception to 31 March 2026 and included 36 observational studies, 30 in the linear correlation analysis and 6 in the binary analysis, with 31 effect sizes covering 30,307 individuals. Pooled correlations ran in the expected inverse direction but with substantial to extreme heterogeneity, Pearson r = -0.19, 95 percent CI -0.28 to -0.11, I squared 94.4 percent, and Spearman r = -0.44, 95 percent CI -0.73 to -0.01, I squared 99.2 percent, and the authors state plainly that these should be read as average directional trends rather than precise or universally applicable effect sizes. After trim and fill correction the Pearson estimate remained significant at r = -0.114, 95 percent CI -0.209 to -0.016. The binary results are the more interesting finding: higher physical activity showed only a non-significant protective trend, pooled odds ratio 0.53, 95 percent CI 0.27 to 1.07 from 4 studies, while higher sedentary behaviour was significantly associated with increased depression risk, pooled odds ratio 1.60, 95 percent CI 1.26 to 2.04 from 2 studies, which suggests reducing sitting may matter at least as much as adding exercise. Subgroup analysis found a stronger negative association during and after the COVID-19 period. The public health implications are deliberately modest and practical, including brief activity breaks during long lectures, low threshold exercise opportunities and support for active commuting, and the authors caution that most included studies were cross-sectional, geographically skewed toward Chinese samples and highly heterogeneous, so the conclusions are public health directions rather than causal or universally generalisable recommendations.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, Article 1850043
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42549181/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1850043
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 20 July 2026, PMID 42549181, PMCID PMC13430555, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-053; REF-448; REF-450; REF-453
Full APA reference
Wang, Y., Mao, H., Zhang, X., Li, D., Liu, Z., Shang, W., & Song, G. (2026). Association between physical activity and depression in university students: A systematic review and meta-analysis with public health implications. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, Article 1850043. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1850043
REF-450 Paper, guideline or statement

Sedentary behavior and physical activity in individuals with bipolar disorder: An evidence synthesis and position statement from the ISBD Nutrition and Exercise Task Force (NExT)

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

The first position statement from the International Society for Bipolar Disorders Nutrition and Exercise Task Force on movement in bipolar disorder, and the document to cite when arguing that sedentary behaviour is a clinical problem in its own right. A best evidence synthesis in question and answer format searched PsycINFO, SPORTDiscus, Embase, PubMed and Web of Science from inception to 1 March 2026. The sedentary figures are stark: a meta-analytic estimate of 613 minutes a day, and in accelerometer comparisons people with bipolar disorder sat for 812 minutes a day against 539 for healthy controls, a difference of 273 minutes, or roughly 13 hours 32 minutes versus 8 hours 59 minutes. The statement notes the WHO sets no explicit sedentary threshold but advises minimising total sedentary time and prolonged bouts beyond 2 hours, and that more than 6 to 8 hours a day sedentary raises cardiovascular disease and all cause mortality risk in the general population. Moderate intensity activity in the more recent objective studies ranged from 98 to 238 minutes a week, from 98 in the United States and 155 in Brazil to 238 in Denmark, so many people fall short of the WHO guideline of 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate to vigorous activity although some approach the lower threshold. Movement also tracks mood state, with moderate to vigorous activity significantly higher in the manic phase at 206 minutes than the euthymic 125 or depressive 102, and the synthesis flags notable discrepancies between self-reported and objective measurement. Evidence that activity protects against bipolar onset is mixed across prospective and Mendelian randomisation studies, with some finding reduced risk and others bidirectional or null associations. Clinical trial evidence is preliminary but points one way: exercise improved overall functioning, reduced mood episode frequency and hospitalisations and eased depressive symptoms, with one pilot study reporting an 82 percent antidepressant response rate, and signals for reduced anxiety and better sleep. The task force is candid that high quality evidence is limited and calls for multicentre randomised trials, better assessment tools and accessible tailored programs built into routine bipolar care.

Full APA reference

Lafer, B., Neves, L. M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Gonzalez-Pinto, A., Nierenberg, A., Olagunju, A. T., Goldstein, B. I., Vieta, E., Koning, E., Gomes, F. A., Saraf, G., Fiedorowicz, J. G., Yatham, L. N., Sylvia, L., Vinberg, M., Gardea-Resendez, M., Solmi, M., Frye, M. A., Berk, M., Alsuwaidan, M., Mansur, R. B., Milev, R., Rosenbaum, S., Van Rheenen, T., Balanzá-Martínez, V., Marx, W., Schuch, F., & Brietzke, E. (2026). Sedentary behavior and physical activity in individuals with bipolar disorder: An evidence synthesis and position statement from the ISBD Nutrition and Exercise Task Force (NExT). Bipolar Disorders, 28(5), Article e70164. https://doi.org/10.1111/bdi.70164

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published August 2026, PMID 42545207, PMCID PMC13431146, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-450
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lafer, B., Neves, L. M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Gonzalez-Pinto, A., Nierenberg, A., Olagunju, A. T., Goldstein, B. I., Vieta, E., Koning, E., Gomes, F. A., Saraf, G., Fiedorowicz, J. G., Yatham, L. N., Sylvia, L., Vinberg, M., Gardea-Resendez, M., Solmi, M., Frye, M. A., Berk, M., Alsuwaidan, M., Mansur, R. B., Milev, R., Rosenbaum, S., Van Rheenen, T., Balanzá-Martínez, V., Marx, W., Schuch, F., & Brietzke, E.
Year
2026
Title
Sedentary behavior and physical activity in individuals with bipolar disorder: An evidence synthesis and position statement from the ISBD Nutrition and Exercise Task Force (NExT)
Description
The first position statement from the International Society for Bipolar Disorders Nutrition and Exercise Task Force on movement in bipolar disorder, and the document to cite when arguing that sedentary behaviour is a clinical problem in its own right. A best evidence synthesis in question and answer format searched PsycINFO, SPORTDiscus, Embase, PubMed and Web of Science from inception to 1 March 2026. The sedentary figures are stark: a meta-analytic estimate of 613 minutes a day, and in accelerometer comparisons people with bipolar disorder sat for 812 minutes a day against 539 for healthy controls, a difference of 273 minutes, or roughly 13 hours 32 minutes versus 8 hours 59 minutes. The statement notes the WHO sets no explicit sedentary threshold but advises minimising total sedentary time and prolonged bouts beyond 2 hours, and that more than 6 to 8 hours a day sedentary raises cardiovascular disease and all cause mortality risk in the general population. Moderate intensity activity in the more recent objective studies ranged from 98 to 238 minutes a week, from 98 in the United States and 155 in Brazil to 238 in Denmark, so many people fall short of the WHO guideline of 150 to 300 minutes a week of moderate to vigorous activity although some approach the lower threshold. Movement also tracks mood state, with moderate to vigorous activity significantly higher in the manic phase at 206 minutes than the euthymic 125 or depressive 102, and the synthesis flags notable discrepancies between self-reported and objective measurement. Evidence that activity protects against bipolar onset is mixed across prospective and Mendelian randomisation studies, with some finding reduced risk and others bidirectional or null associations. Clinical trial evidence is preliminary but points one way: exercise improved overall functioning, reduced mood episode frequency and hospitalisations and eased depressive symptoms, with one pilot study reporting an 82 percent antidepressant response rate, and signals for reduced anxiety and better sleep. The task force is candid that high quality evidence is limited and calls for multicentre randomised trials, better assessment tools and accessible tailored programs built into routine bipolar care.
Publication or publisher
Bipolar Disorders, 28(5), Article e70164
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42545207/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/bdi.70164
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published August 2026, PMID 42545207, PMCID PMC13431146, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-135; REF-298; REF-448; REF-449; REF-481; REF-482
Full APA reference
Lafer, B., Neves, L. M., Vancampfort, D., Stubbs, B., Gonzalez-Pinto, A., Nierenberg, A., Olagunju, A. T., Goldstein, B. I., Vieta, E., Koning, E., Gomes, F. A., Saraf, G., Fiedorowicz, J. G., Yatham, L. N., Sylvia, L., Vinberg, M., Gardea-Resendez, M., Solmi, M., Frye, M. A., Berk, M., Alsuwaidan, M., Mansur, R. B., Milev, R., Rosenbaum, S., Van Rheenen, T., Balanzá-Martínez, V., Marx, W., Schuch, F., & Brietzke, E. (2026). Sedentary behavior and physical activity in individuals with bipolar disorder: An evidence synthesis and position statement from the ISBD Nutrition and Exercise Task Force (NExT). Bipolar Disorders, 28(5), Article e70164. https://doi.org/10.1111/bdi.70164
REF-451 Paper, guideline or statement

An mHealth intervention promoting physical activity to reduce psychological distress among workers: Randomized controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A large and unusually self-critical workplace trial of a physical activity app, valuable precisely because it reports how small and how short lived the benefit was. This open label, two arm, parallel group randomised trial in Japan ran over 6 months with assessments at baseline, 3 months and 6 months, recruiting workers aged 18 or older who could complete Japanese questionnaires and owned compatible smartphones, and excluding anyone currently absent from work or with a sickness absence in the past 12 months. A total of 793 workers were randomised 1 to 1, 397 to the intervention and 396 to control. The intervention group used a stand alone app that passively monitored physical activity and mental health for 3 months; controls received a booklet on job stress. The primary outcome was psychological distress on the 6 item Kessler scale, analysed by intention to treat using linear mixed models for repeated measures. Distress fell significantly in the intervention group at 3 months, mean difference -0.56, 95 percent CI -1.11 to -0.02, P = .04, Cohen's d -0.17, but the effect was not sustained at 6 months. Self-reported physical activity declined in both groups with no significant between group difference, while digitally recorded activity in the intervention group rose by 7.92 minutes, 95 percent CI 1.36 to 14.49, P = .02, though those data were not comparable with the control group. The subgroup effect was larger among participants with no or minimal baseline distress, mean difference -0.63, 95 percent CI -1.16 to -0.11, P = .02, Cohen's d -0.19. The authors conclude the reduction was modest, that it remains unclear whether the app works through increased physical activity or other biological and psychosocial mechanisms, that the benefit may be short lived rather than durable with limited clinical and practical significance, and that booster engagement strategies are needed to sustain any gain.

Full APA reference

Watanabe, K., Inoue, A., Sakuraya, A., Imamura, K., Yoshikawa, T., & Tsutsumi, A. (2026). An mHealth intervention promoting physical activity to reduce psychological distress among workers: Randomized controlled trial. Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28, Article e96072. https://doi.org/10.2196/96072

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 August 2026, PMID 42600102. Publication type Randomized Controlled Trial. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-451
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Watanabe, K., Inoue, A., Sakuraya, A., Imamura, K., Yoshikawa, T., & Tsutsumi, A.
Year
2026
Title
An mHealth intervention promoting physical activity to reduce psychological distress among workers: Randomized controlled trial
Description
A large and unusually self-critical workplace trial of a physical activity app, valuable precisely because it reports how small and how short lived the benefit was. This open label, two arm, parallel group randomised trial in Japan ran over 6 months with assessments at baseline, 3 months and 6 months, recruiting workers aged 18 or older who could complete Japanese questionnaires and owned compatible smartphones, and excluding anyone currently absent from work or with a sickness absence in the past 12 months. A total of 793 workers were randomised 1 to 1, 397 to the intervention and 396 to control. The intervention group used a stand alone app that passively monitored physical activity and mental health for 3 months; controls received a booklet on job stress. The primary outcome was psychological distress on the 6 item Kessler scale, analysed by intention to treat using linear mixed models for repeated measures. Distress fell significantly in the intervention group at 3 months, mean difference -0.56, 95 percent CI -1.11 to -0.02, P = .04, Cohen's d -0.17, but the effect was not sustained at 6 months. Self-reported physical activity declined in both groups with no significant between group difference, while digitally recorded activity in the intervention group rose by 7.92 minutes, 95 percent CI 1.36 to 14.49, P = .02, though those data were not comparable with the control group. The subgroup effect was larger among participants with no or minimal baseline distress, mean difference -0.63, 95 percent CI -1.16 to -0.11, P = .02, Cohen's d -0.19. The authors conclude the reduction was modest, that it remains unclear whether the app works through increased physical activity or other biological and psychosocial mechanisms, that the benefit may be short lived rather than durable with limited clinical and practical significance, and that booster engagement strategies are needed to sustain any gain.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28, Article e96072
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Occupational and organisational psychology
Jurisdiction
Japan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42600102/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2196/96072
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 August 2026, PMID 42600102. Publication type Randomized Controlled Trial. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-047; REF-178; REF-449; REF-453
Full APA reference
Watanabe, K., Inoue, A., Sakuraya, A., Imamura, K., Yoshikawa, T., & Tsutsumi, A. (2026). An mHealth intervention promoting physical activity to reduce psychological distress among workers: Randomized controlled trial. Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28, Article e96072. https://doi.org/10.2196/96072
REF-452 Paper, guideline or statement

Voluntary work for the physical and mental health of older volunteers: A systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

The most rigorous synthesis available on whether volunteering actually improves the health of older volunteers, and the one to cite because it is unusually disciplined about what the evidence does not show. A Campbell review searching bibliographic databases to December 2018 plus grey literature, hand searching, citation tracking and expert contact through 2019, restricted to formal volunteering, described as voluntary, ongoing, planned helping behaviour intended to increase the wellbeing of strangers, offering no monetary compensation and typically occurring within an organisation, in people aged 65 or over, and to designs with a well defined control group. It located 90 studies covering 47 populations, but excluded 46 of them as carrying too high a risk of bias to inform rather than mislead, leaving 26 studies covering 19 populations in the synthesis and 24 in meta-analysis, 3 randomised trials and 21 nonrandomised studies from Australia, Ireland, Israel, Japan, Korea and the United States, involving over 47,000 volunteers. Mortality is where the evidence holds: a pooled hazard ratio of 0.76, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.80 across 8 studies with no heterogeneity, and a pooled odds ratio of 0.69, 95 percent CI 0.58 to 0.83 in 2 further studies, which the authors translate into a 43 percent chance of the volunteer dying first against the 50 percent expected if volunteering had no effect. Function shows smaller signals: incident functional disability hazard ratio 0.83, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.97, and maintenance of functional competence odds ratio 0.81, 95 percent CI 0.70 to 0.94, while decline in instrumental activities of daily living was not significant at odds ratio 0.73, 95 percent CI 0.53 to 1.01. Depression reached significance but barely, a standardised mean difference of 0.12, 95 percent CI 0.00 to 0.23 from only 3 studies. The authors state that with the exception of mortality there was insufficient evidence available, that the mortality effect is small, and that no adverse effects were found. All 84 nonrandomised studies were judged at high risk of bias for sequence generation and allocation concealment, and 43 scored the worst possible rating for confounding, though sensitivity analysis found no appreciable change in results across risk of bias components.

Full APA reference

Filges, T., Siren, A., Fridberg, T., & Nielsen, B. C. V. (2020). Voluntary work for the physical and mental health of older volunteers: A systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews, 16(4), Article e1124. https://doi.org/10.1002/cl2.1124

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published 23 October 2020, print collection December 2020, PMID 37016617, PMCID PMC8356337, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded. The source prints the largest meta-analysis sample as 244.428 using a decimal point as a thousands separator, that is 244,428.

All fields
ID
REF-452
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Filges, T., Siren, A., Fridberg, T., & Nielsen, B. C. V.
Year
2020
Title
Voluntary work for the physical and mental health of older volunteers: A systematic review
Description
The most rigorous synthesis available on whether volunteering actually improves the health of older volunteers, and the one to cite because it is unusually disciplined about what the evidence does not show. A Campbell review searching bibliographic databases to December 2018 plus grey literature, hand searching, citation tracking and expert contact through 2019, restricted to formal volunteering, described as voluntary, ongoing, planned helping behaviour intended to increase the wellbeing of strangers, offering no monetary compensation and typically occurring within an organisation, in people aged 65 or over, and to designs with a well defined control group. It located 90 studies covering 47 populations, but excluded 46 of them as carrying too high a risk of bias to inform rather than mislead, leaving 26 studies covering 19 populations in the synthesis and 24 in meta-analysis, 3 randomised trials and 21 nonrandomised studies from Australia, Ireland, Israel, Japan, Korea and the United States, involving over 47,000 volunteers. Mortality is where the evidence holds: a pooled hazard ratio of 0.76, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.80 across 8 studies with no heterogeneity, and a pooled odds ratio of 0.69, 95 percent CI 0.58 to 0.83 in 2 further studies, which the authors translate into a 43 percent chance of the volunteer dying first against the 50 percent expected if volunteering had no effect. Function shows smaller signals: incident functional disability hazard ratio 0.83, 95 percent CI 0.72 to 0.97, and maintenance of functional competence odds ratio 0.81, 95 percent CI 0.70 to 0.94, while decline in instrumental activities of daily living was not significant at odds ratio 0.73, 95 percent CI 0.53 to 1.01. Depression reached significance but barely, a standardised mean difference of 0.12, 95 percent CI 0.00 to 0.23 from only 3 studies. The authors state that with the exception of mortality there was insufficient evidence available, that the mortality effect is small, and that no adverse effects were found. All 84 nonrandomised studies were judged at high risk of bias for sequence generation and allocation concealment, and 43 scored the worst possible rating for confounding, though sensitivity analysis found no appreciable change in results across risk of bias components.
Publication or publisher
Campbell Systematic Reviews, 16(4), Article e1124
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37016617/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/cl2.1124
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the PubMed Central full text on 17 September 2026. Published 23 October 2020, print collection December 2020, PMID 37016617, PMCID PMC8356337, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded. The source prints the largest meta-analysis sample as 244.428 using a decimal point as a thousands separator, that is 244,428.
Related items
REF-083; REF-454; REF-455; REF-456
Full APA reference
Filges, T., Siren, A., Fridberg, T., & Nielsen, B. C. V. (2020). Voluntary work for the physical and mental health of older volunteers: A systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews, 16(4), Article e1124. https://doi.org/10.1002/cl2.1124
REF-453 Paper, guideline or statement

Replacing sedentary behavior with physical activity reduces symptoms of anxiety and depression: A study with young adults

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A large isotemporal substitution study that asks the practically useful question, not whether activity helps but what happens if sitting time is swapped for movement. It draws on a multicentre survey of undergraduates at eight public universities in Brazil, collected by online questionnaire between October 2021 and February 2022, with anxiety and depression symptoms measured on the Depression, Anxiety and Stress Scale-21, sitting time and activity type, frequency and duration self-reported, and participants grouped by complete, partial or non-adherence to the 24-hour movement guidelines. Of 8,059 young adults with a mean age of 23.9 years, standard deviation 6.28, most reported more than 9 hours a day sedentary at 55.09 percent and 48.28 percent were physically inactive. Non-adherence to the movement guidelines was associated with mental health on multivariate analysis at P less than 0.001 with a dose response gradient, and students not meeting the guidelines were more likely to report anxiety symptoms, odds ratio 1.89, 95 percent CI 1.67 to 2.14, and depressive symptoms, odds ratio 2.49, 95 percent CI 2.19 to 2.82. In the isotemporal analysis, replacing sedentary time with equivalent amounts of moderate or vigorous intensity activity reduced the odds of symptoms across every model tested. The authors argue for public policies that raise activity and cut sitting in university settings. One caveat matters when citing it: despite the causal wording of the title, the design is cross-sectional, so the substitution results are modelled reallocations within a single snapshot rather than observed change over time.

Full APA reference

Barbosa, B. C. R., de Menezes-Júnior, L. A. A., Fróis, L. F., Vidigal, M. C. A., de Paula, W., Chagas, C. M. S., Machado, E. L., Nobre, L. N., de Freitas, E. D., Vidigal, F. de C., Cardoso, C. S., da Silva, L. S., & Meireles, A. L. (2025). Replacing sedentary behavior with physical activity reduces symptoms of anxiety and depression: A study with young adults. BMC Public Health, 25(1), Article 2971. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-23523-4

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 30 August 2025, PMID 40885938, PMCID PMC12398085, free full text available. Publication type Multicenter Study. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded. The study is cross-sectional despite the causal phrasing of its title.

All fields
ID
REF-453
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Barbosa, B. C. R., de Menezes-Júnior, L. A. A., Fróis, L. F., Vidigal, M. C. A., de Paula, W., Chagas, C. M. S., Machado, E. L., Nobre, L. N., de Freitas, E. D., Vidigal, F. de C., Cardoso, C. S., da Silva, L. S., & Meireles, A. L.
Year
2025
Title
Replacing sedentary behavior with physical activity reduces symptoms of anxiety and depression: A study with young adults
Description
A large isotemporal substitution study that asks the practically useful question, not whether activity helps but what happens if sitting time is swapped for movement. It draws on a multicentre survey of undergraduates at eight public universities in Brazil, collected by online questionnaire between October 2021 and February 2022, with anxiety and depression symptoms measured on the Depression, Anxiety and Stress Scale-21, sitting time and activity type, frequency and duration self-reported, and participants grouped by complete, partial or non-adherence to the 24-hour movement guidelines. Of 8,059 young adults with a mean age of 23.9 years, standard deviation 6.28, most reported more than 9 hours a day sedentary at 55.09 percent and 48.28 percent were physically inactive. Non-adherence to the movement guidelines was associated with mental health on multivariate analysis at P less than 0.001 with a dose response gradient, and students not meeting the guidelines were more likely to report anxiety symptoms, odds ratio 1.89, 95 percent CI 1.67 to 2.14, and depressive symptoms, odds ratio 2.49, 95 percent CI 2.19 to 2.82. In the isotemporal analysis, replacing sedentary time with equivalent amounts of moderate or vigorous intensity activity reduced the odds of symptoms across every model tested. The authors argue for public policies that raise activity and cut sitting in university settings. One caveat matters when citing it: despite the causal wording of the title, the design is cross-sectional, so the substitution results are modelled reallocations within a single snapshot rather than observed change over time.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 25(1), Article 2971
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Brazil
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40885938/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-23523-4
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 30 August 2025, PMID 40885938, PMCID PMC12398085, free full text available. Publication type Multicenter Study. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded. The study is cross-sectional despite the causal phrasing of its title.
Related items
REF-449; REF-450; REF-451
Full APA reference
Barbosa, B. C. R., de Menezes-Júnior, L. A. A., Fróis, L. F., Vidigal, M. C. A., de Paula, W., Chagas, C. M. S., Machado, E. L., Nobre, L. N., de Freitas, E. D., Vidigal, F. de C., Cardoso, C. S., da Silva, L. S., & Meireles, A. L. (2025). Replacing sedentary behavior with physical activity reduces symptoms of anxiety and depression: A study with young adults. BMC Public Health, 25(1), Article 2971. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-23523-4
REF-454 Paper, guideline or statement

Competencies and needs of older volunteers: A comparative survey

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

A workforce study rather than an outcome study, and useful for anyone designing a volunteer program instead of merely recommending volunteering. Set against Taiwan's approach to becoming a super aged society, it starts from the observation that older volunteers act as first line care providers yet existing training programs contain no pretraining assessment of readiness for that role. A comparative cross-sectional survey used simple random sampling of 73 community care centres in a southern Taiwanese city, enrolling 1,000 older adult volunteer caregivers. Participants averaged 71.79 years, 80.8 percent were female, 64.2 percent married, 51.9 percent had senior high school education or above and 68.0 percent had more than 5 years of volunteering experience. On the Older Volunteer Competency Scale the overall mean was 3.91, standard deviation 2.66, with volunteer service skills highest at 4.49, standard deviation 2.76, then service awareness at 3.91, standard deviation 2.85, and interpersonal interaction lowest at 3.54, standard deviation 2.86. Age, volunteering experience and education level each significantly influenced need. The oldest group reported higher overall need than the middle aged group, and those with the least experience and lowest education had the highest needs across service skills, interpersonal interaction and overall. For service awareness both the youngest and oldest groups needed more support than the middle aged group, and people with only elementary or junior high schooling needed more than those with senior high school or above. The practical reading is that interpersonal skill, not task skill, is the weakest point, and that education level is a marker for who will need the most training support.

Full APA reference

Yang, L.-C., Lai, C.-Y., Chen, K.-M., Chen, M.-C., Chang, C.-C., Lin, T.-Y., & Kuo, C.-F. (2025). Competencies and needs of older volunteers: A comparative survey. The Journal of Nursing Research, 33(6), Article e427. https://doi.org/10.1097/jnr.0000000000000712

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 December 2025, PMID 41292089, PMCID PMC12662141, free full text available. Publication type Comparative Study. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-454
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Yang, L.-C., Lai, C.-Y., Chen, K.-M., Chen, M.-C., Chang, C.-C., Lin, T.-Y., & Kuo, C.-F.
Year
2025
Title
Competencies and needs of older volunteers: A comparative survey
Description
A workforce study rather than an outcome study, and useful for anyone designing a volunteer program instead of merely recommending volunteering. Set against Taiwan's approach to becoming a super aged society, it starts from the observation that older volunteers act as first line care providers yet existing training programs contain no pretraining assessment of readiness for that role. A comparative cross-sectional survey used simple random sampling of 73 community care centres in a southern Taiwanese city, enrolling 1,000 older adult volunteer caregivers. Participants averaged 71.79 years, 80.8 percent were female, 64.2 percent married, 51.9 percent had senior high school education or above and 68.0 percent had more than 5 years of volunteering experience. On the Older Volunteer Competency Scale the overall mean was 3.91, standard deviation 2.66, with volunteer service skills highest at 4.49, standard deviation 2.76, then service awareness at 3.91, standard deviation 2.85, and interpersonal interaction lowest at 3.54, standard deviation 2.86. Age, volunteering experience and education level each significantly influenced need. The oldest group reported higher overall need than the middle aged group, and those with the least experience and lowest education had the highest needs across service skills, interpersonal interaction and overall. For service awareness both the youngest and oldest groups needed more support than the middle aged group, and people with only elementary or junior high schooling needed more than those with senior high school or above. The practical reading is that interpersonal skill, not task skill, is the weakest point, and that education level is a marker for who will need the most training support.
Publication or publisher
The Journal of Nursing Research, 33(6), Article e427
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Taiwan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41292089/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/jnr.0000000000000712
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 December 2025, PMID 41292089, PMCID PMC12662141, free full text available. Publication type Comparative Study. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-452; REF-455; REF-456
Full APA reference
Yang, L.-C., Lai, C.-Y., Chen, K.-M., Chen, M.-C., Chang, C.-C., Lin, T.-Y., & Kuo, C.-F. (2025). Competencies and needs of older volunteers: A comparative survey. The Journal of Nursing Research, 33(6), Article e427. https://doi.org/10.1097/jnr.0000000000000712
REF-455 Paper, guideline or statement

Health benefits and harms of older adult volunteering: Mixed methods systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

The review that takes seriously a question the volunteering literature usually skips, namely whether volunteering can also harm older people. A mixed methods systematic review searching MEDLINE, CINAHL, AgeLine and PsycINFO, registered on PROSPERO as CRD42023456281RO, it yielded 182 papers covering a wide range of health outcomes, categorised into biological, psychological, social and biopsychosocial intersect domains. Randomised trials were appraised with CASP checklists, and there were only 11 randomised trial papers drawn from five trials, all judged at high risk of bias. Most papers reported multiple health benefits, and reports of harm were negligible by comparison, which the authors treat as a signal about the literature rather than about volunteering, stating plainly that harms may be under-reported. Their conclusion is deliberately hedged: volunteering is seemingly beneficial to older adults, but more experimental evidence is needed to clarify discrepancies and substantiate current recommendations. The applied argument is that greater clarity would let more older adults take part while maximising benefit and avoiding harm, and that better evidence could guide governments and volunteer organisations on how to implement and advertise programs appropriately. Read alongside the Campbell review, it explains why confident health claims for volunteering keep outrunning the trial evidence behind them.

Full APA reference

Williams, N., Maghidman, M., Pu, D., Mitchell, D., & Haines, T. (2026). Health benefits and harms of older adult volunteering: Mixed methods systematic review. The Gerontologist, 66(5), Article gnag043. https://doi.org/10.1093/geront/gnag043

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 13 April 2026, PMID 41950400, PMCID PMC13131962, free full text available. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-455
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Williams, N., Maghidman, M., Pu, D., Mitchell, D., & Haines, T.
Year
2026
Title
Health benefits and harms of older adult volunteering: Mixed methods systematic review
Description
The review that takes seriously a question the volunteering literature usually skips, namely whether volunteering can also harm older people. A mixed methods systematic review searching MEDLINE, CINAHL, AgeLine and PsycINFO, registered on PROSPERO as CRD42023456281RO, it yielded 182 papers covering a wide range of health outcomes, categorised into biological, psychological, social and biopsychosocial intersect domains. Randomised trials were appraised with CASP checklists, and there were only 11 randomised trial papers drawn from five trials, all judged at high risk of bias. Most papers reported multiple health benefits, and reports of harm were negligible by comparison, which the authors treat as a signal about the literature rather than about volunteering, stating plainly that harms may be under-reported. Their conclusion is deliberately hedged: volunteering is seemingly beneficial to older adults, but more experimental evidence is needed to clarify discrepancies and substantiate current recommendations. The applied argument is that greater clarity would let more older adults take part while maximising benefit and avoiding harm, and that better evidence could guide governments and volunteer organisations on how to implement and advertise programs appropriately. Read alongside the Campbell review, it explains why confident health claims for volunteering keep outrunning the trial evidence behind them.
Publication or publisher
The Gerontologist, 66(5), Article gnag043
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41950400/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/geront/gnag043
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 13 April 2026, PMID 41950400, PMCID PMC13131962, free full text available. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-452; REF-454; REF-456
Full APA reference
Williams, N., Maghidman, M., Pu, D., Mitchell, D., & Haines, T. (2026). Health benefits and harms of older adult volunteering: Mixed methods systematic review. The Gerontologist, 66(5), Article gnag043. https://doi.org/10.1093/geront/gnag043
REF-456 Paper, guideline or statement

A review of different types of volunteer programs for older adults with and without cognitive impairment

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A practical survey of what older volunteer programs actually look like, and the only one here that covers volunteers living with cognitive impairment rather than treating them solely as recipients of care. The authors note that while theory and evidence link volunteering to health outcomes in later life, far less is known about the programs themselves, especially for volunteers with cognitive impairment. Following a literature search the review presents eight example programs, delivered either in person or remotely. Five involve older volunteers without cognitive impairment in intergenerational engagement, support and referral, home visiting and dementia care services. The other three specifically recruit older volunteers who have cognitive impairment, offering intergenerational engagement and individualised volunteer activities. Strengths and challenges are discussed for each, and the authors highlight remote programs as a valuable alternative both during a pandemic and for volunteers living with cognitive impairment, a point that reframes participation as adjustable rather than all or nothing. They are explicit that program effects on older volunteers need testing in more rigorously designed studies. Note when citing it that the search was non-systematic by the authors' own description, so this is a descriptive map of program models rather than an effectiveness review.

Full APA reference

Zhu, X., Dong, Z., Wu, Y., & Xu, D.-W. (2023). A review of different types of volunteer programs for older adults with and without cognitive impairment. Frontiers in Public Health, 11, Article 1164952. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2023.1164952

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 15 June 2023, PMID 37397711, PMCID PMC10311508, free full text available. Publication type Review. The abstract states the search was non-systematic. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-456
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhu, X., Dong, Z., Wu, Y., & Xu, D.-W.
Year
2023
Title
A review of different types of volunteer programs for older adults with and without cognitive impairment
Description
A practical survey of what older volunteer programs actually look like, and the only one here that covers volunteers living with cognitive impairment rather than treating them solely as recipients of care. The authors note that while theory and evidence link volunteering to health outcomes in later life, far less is known about the programs themselves, especially for volunteers with cognitive impairment. Following a literature search the review presents eight example programs, delivered either in person or remotely. Five involve older volunteers without cognitive impairment in intergenerational engagement, support and referral, home visiting and dementia care services. The other three specifically recruit older volunteers who have cognitive impairment, offering intergenerational engagement and individualised volunteer activities. Strengths and challenges are discussed for each, and the authors highlight remote programs as a valuable alternative both during a pandemic and for volunteers living with cognitive impairment, a point that reframes participation as adjustable rather than all or nothing. They are explicit that program effects on older volunteers need testing in more rigorously designed studies. Note when citing it that the search was non-systematic by the authors' own description, so this is a descriptive map of program models rather than an effectiveness review.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 11, Article 1164952
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37397711/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2023.1164952
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 15 June 2023, PMID 37397711, PMCID PMC10311508, free full text available. Publication type Review. The abstract states the search was non-systematic. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-452; REF-455; REF-457
Full APA reference
Zhu, X., Dong, Z., Wu, Y., & Xu, D.-W. (2023). A review of different types of volunteer programs for older adults with and without cognitive impairment. Frontiers in Public Health, 11, Article 1164952. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2023.1164952
REF-457 Paper, guideline or statement

Campbell and Cochrane evidence on promoting cognitive capacity across life course: A mapping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A map of where the high quality evidence on cognitive capacity actually sits, and an unusually direct audit of how badly that evidence handles equity. The authors searched the Cochrane and Campbell libraries to 1 May 2024 for systematic reviews of interventions measuring cognitive capacity at any age, coding interventions and outcomes with the International Classification of Function and the International Classification of Health Interventions, coding equity characteristics with PROGRESS-Plus and assessing methodological quality with AMSTAR2. They included 34 Campbell and 31 Cochrane reviews, with just over half, 55 percent, rated high quality. The gaps are the finding. Eighty percent of reviews included studies from high income countries and only 12 percent included any from low income countries. Of the 30 reviews that planned a subgroup analysis across equity characteristics, only eight actually carried one out. Most reviews, 63 percent, spanned multiple age groups, yet none evaluated differences in cognitive outcomes across more than two age categories. Practical support interventions dominated at 60 percent and intellectual function outcomes at 51 percent, with the mix shifting across life stages from development in younger ages to maintaining function and preventing decline in older ages. The conclusion calls for a comprehensive life course approach to cognitive interventions that incorporates equity considerations and age appropriate outcome measures, which makes this a useful citation when arguing that social position is systematically missing from the cognitive intervention evidence base rather than merely under-examined.

Full APA reference

Welch, V. A., Conde, M., Barbeau, V. I., Ghogomu, E., Kuria, S., Sabri, H., Li, Y., Tong, K., Abud, A. S., Vithlani, K., De Rubeis, V., Jacob, C. M., & Sadana, R. (2025). Campbell and Cochrane evidence on promoting cognitive capacity across life course: A mapping review. Age and Ageing, 54(10), Article afaf306. https://doi.org/10.1093/ageing/afaf306

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 29 August 2025 in volume 54, issue 10, PMID 41139307, PMCID PMC12554095, free full text available. Publication type Systematic Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-457
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Welch, V. A., Conde, M., Barbeau, V. I., Ghogomu, E., Kuria, S., Sabri, H., Li, Y., Tong, K., Abud, A. S., Vithlani, K., De Rubeis, V., Jacob, C. M., & Sadana, R.
Year
2025
Title
Campbell and Cochrane evidence on promoting cognitive capacity across life course: A mapping review
Description
A map of where the high quality evidence on cognitive capacity actually sits, and an unusually direct audit of how badly that evidence handles equity. The authors searched the Cochrane and Campbell libraries to 1 May 2024 for systematic reviews of interventions measuring cognitive capacity at any age, coding interventions and outcomes with the International Classification of Function and the International Classification of Health Interventions, coding equity characteristics with PROGRESS-Plus and assessing methodological quality with AMSTAR2. They included 34 Campbell and 31 Cochrane reviews, with just over half, 55 percent, rated high quality. The gaps are the finding. Eighty percent of reviews included studies from high income countries and only 12 percent included any from low income countries. Of the 30 reviews that planned a subgroup analysis across equity characteristics, only eight actually carried one out. Most reviews, 63 percent, spanned multiple age groups, yet none evaluated differences in cognitive outcomes across more than two age categories. Practical support interventions dominated at 60 percent and intellectual function outcomes at 51 percent, with the mix shifting across life stages from development in younger ages to maintaining function and preventing decline in older ages. The conclusion calls for a comprehensive life course approach to cognitive interventions that incorporates equity considerations and age appropriate outcome measures, which makes this a useful citation when arguing that social position is systematically missing from the cognitive intervention evidence base rather than merely under-examined.
Publication or publisher
Age and Ageing, 54(10), Article afaf306
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41139307/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ageing/afaf306
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 29 August 2025 in volume 54, issue 10, PMID 41139307, PMCID PMC12554095, free full text available. Publication type Systematic Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-139; REF-413; REF-456
Full APA reference
Welch, V. A., Conde, M., Barbeau, V. I., Ghogomu, E., Kuria, S., Sabri, H., Li, Y., Tong, K., Abud, A. S., Vithlani, K., De Rubeis, V., Jacob, C. M., & Sadana, R. (2025). Campbell and Cochrane evidence on promoting cognitive capacity across life course: A mapping review. Age and Ageing, 54(10), Article afaf306. https://doi.org/10.1093/ageing/afaf306
REF-458 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine: Prevention, treatment, and reversal of disease

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

A concise statement of what lifestyle medicine claims to be, useful as the citation for the six pillar model when you need a clinical journal source rather than a society website. The authors position lifestyle medicine as expanding the scope of preventive medicine, promoting healthy lifestyles while preventing, treating and reversing the vast majority of chronic diseases caused by behaviours and environmental factors. The six pillars are named explicitly: a plant predominant eating pattern, physical movement, restorative sleep, management of stress, avoidance of risky substances and positive social connections. They argue that competencies, education, certification, resources and practice models are all accelerating, with particular need and focus on underserved and most seriously impacted patients and communities, and that a comprehensive integrated strategy addressing whole person health is emerging as a compelling framework for providers and health systems. That strategy combines a foundational commitment to prevention with a systematic approach to the actual and root causes of premature disease, disability and death. Note that this is an argued position piece in a clinical review series, not a synthesis of effect estimates, so cite it for the framework and the equity emphasis rather than for evidence of effect.

Full APA reference

Parkinson, M. D., Stout, R., & Dysinger, W. (2023). Lifestyle medicine: Prevention, treatment, and reversal of disease. Medical Clinics of North America, 107(6), 1109-1120. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mcna.2023.06.007

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published November 2023, epub 16 July 2023, PMID 37806726. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed, so the full text is not free. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-458
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Parkinson, M. D., Stout, R., & Dysinger, W.
Year
2023
Title
Lifestyle medicine: Prevention, treatment, and reversal of disease
Description
A concise statement of what lifestyle medicine claims to be, useful as the citation for the six pillar model when you need a clinical journal source rather than a society website. The authors position lifestyle medicine as expanding the scope of preventive medicine, promoting healthy lifestyles while preventing, treating and reversing the vast majority of chronic diseases caused by behaviours and environmental factors. The six pillars are named explicitly: a plant predominant eating pattern, physical movement, restorative sleep, management of stress, avoidance of risky substances and positive social connections. They argue that competencies, education, certification, resources and practice models are all accelerating, with particular need and focus on underserved and most seriously impacted patients and communities, and that a comprehensive integrated strategy addressing whole person health is emerging as a compelling framework for providers and health systems. That strategy combines a foundational commitment to prevention with a systematic approach to the actual and root causes of premature disease, disability and death. Note that this is an argued position piece in a clinical review series, not a synthesis of effect estimates, so cite it for the framework and the equity emphasis rather than for evidence of effect.
Publication or publisher
Medical Clinics of North America, 107(6), 1109-1120
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37806726/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mcna.2023.06.007
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published November 2023, epub 16 July 2023, PMID 37806726. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed, so the full text is not free. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-035; REF-094; REF-110; REF-196
Full APA reference
Parkinson, M. D., Stout, R., & Dysinger, W. (2023). Lifestyle medicine: Prevention, treatment, and reversal of disease. Medical Clinics of North America, 107(6), 1109-1120. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mcna.2023.06.007
REF-459 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle or pharmacotherapy in cardio-metabolic disease prevention

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A blunt argument that no health system can medicate its way out of cardio-metabolic multimorbidity, and a useful citation when the question is lifestyle instead of, not merely alongside, more prescribing. The review notes that cardio-metabolic diseases including diabetes, hypertension, coronary heart disease and stroke are the leading causes of premature death worldwide, and that people living with them face higher all-cause mortality and reduced life expectancy compared with those without. Its central point is that treating our way out requires multiple medications, which brings improper prescribing, insufficient compliance, overdosing or underdosing, improper drug choice, insufficient monitoring, unfavourable drug effects, drug interactions, and inappropriate waste and cost. The authors argue that people with these conditions should be empowered to adopt lifestyle changes that support independent living, and that healthy lifestyles including smoking cessation, improved dietary habits, sleep hygiene and physical activity are a suitable adjunctive measure to polypharmacy, if not an alternative to it. No pooled estimates or effect sizes are reported, so this is a reasoned case rather than a quantitative synthesis.

Full APA reference

Seidu, B. S., Osman, H., & Seidu, S. (2023). Lifestyle or pharmacotherapy in cardio-metabolic disease prevention. Therapeutic Advances in Cardiovascular Disease, 17, Article 17539447231177175. https://doi.org/10.1177/17539447231177175

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the January to December 2023 volume 17, PMID 37381922, PMCID PMC10334018, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-459
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Seidu, B. S., Osman, H., & Seidu, S.
Year
2023
Title
Lifestyle or pharmacotherapy in cardio-metabolic disease prevention
Description
A blunt argument that no health system can medicate its way out of cardio-metabolic multimorbidity, and a useful citation when the question is lifestyle instead of, not merely alongside, more prescribing. The review notes that cardio-metabolic diseases including diabetes, hypertension, coronary heart disease and stroke are the leading causes of premature death worldwide, and that people living with them face higher all-cause mortality and reduced life expectancy compared with those without. Its central point is that treating our way out requires multiple medications, which brings improper prescribing, insufficient compliance, overdosing or underdosing, improper drug choice, insufficient monitoring, unfavourable drug effects, drug interactions, and inappropriate waste and cost. The authors argue that people with these conditions should be empowered to adopt lifestyle changes that support independent living, and that healthy lifestyles including smoking cessation, improved dietary habits, sleep hygiene and physical activity are a suitable adjunctive measure to polypharmacy, if not an alternative to it. No pooled estimates or effect sizes are reported, so this is a reasoned case rather than a quantitative synthesis.
Publication or publisher
Therapeutic Advances in Cardiovascular Disease, 17, Article 17539447231177175
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37381922/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/17539447231177175
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the January to December 2023 volume 17, PMID 37381922, PMCID PMC10334018, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-272; REF-318; REF-422
Full APA reference
Seidu, B. S., Osman, H., & Seidu, S. (2023). Lifestyle or pharmacotherapy in cardio-metabolic disease prevention. Therapeutic Advances in Cardiovascular Disease, 17, Article 17539447231177175. https://doi.org/10.1177/17539447231177175
REF-460 Paper, guideline or statement

Daily lifestyle and inflammatory skin diseases

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

A mechanism review that extends the lifestyle argument into dermatology, a field where behaviour is usually discussed only as a trigger rather than a driver. The authors note that daily lifestyles are closely related to human health but that far less attention has been paid to how obesity from excessive energy intake, smoking and alcohol consumption contributes to the development of inflammatory skin disease. Their organising claim is immunological: gluten or wheat protein, smoking and alcohol, sleep disturbance and obesity drive the helper T cell Th1, Th2 and Th17 immune response, while dietary fibre and omega-3 fatty acids negatively regulate inflammatory cytokine production. They also frame the daily Earth cycle as distinct from human circadian rhythm and treat the capacity to adapt to it as part of human evolution. Useful when arguing that lifestyle behaviour operates through shared inflammatory pathways rather than organ by organ, though it is a mechanistic narrative review with no clinical effect estimates.

Full APA reference

Sawada, Y., Saito-Sasaki, N., Mashima, E., & Nakamura, M. (2021). Daily lifestyle and inflammatory skin diseases. International Journal of Molecular Sciences, 22(10), Article 5204. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijms22105204

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 May 2021, PMID 34069063, PMCID PMC8156947, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-460
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sawada, Y., Saito-Sasaki, N., Mashima, E., & Nakamura, M.
Year
2021
Title
Daily lifestyle and inflammatory skin diseases
Description
A mechanism review that extends the lifestyle argument into dermatology, a field where behaviour is usually discussed only as a trigger rather than a driver. The authors note that daily lifestyles are closely related to human health but that far less attention has been paid to how obesity from excessive energy intake, smoking and alcohol consumption contributes to the development of inflammatory skin disease. Their organising claim is immunological: gluten or wheat protein, smoking and alcohol, sleep disturbance and obesity drive the helper T cell Th1, Th2 and Th17 immune response, while dietary fibre and omega-3 fatty acids negatively regulate inflammatory cytokine production. They also frame the daily Earth cycle as distinct from human circadian rhythm and treat the capacity to adapt to it as part of human evolution. Useful when arguing that lifestyle behaviour operates through shared inflammatory pathways rather than organ by organ, though it is a mechanistic narrative review with no clinical effect estimates.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Molecular Sciences, 22(10), Article 5204
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Sleep
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34069063/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijms22105204
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 May 2021, PMID 34069063, PMCID PMC8156947, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-458; REF-480
Full APA reference
Sawada, Y., Saito-Sasaki, N., Mashima, E., & Nakamura, M. (2021). Daily lifestyle and inflammatory skin diseases. International Journal of Molecular Sciences, 22(10), Article 5204. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijms22105204
REF-461 Paper, guideline or statement

Microglia, circadian rhythm and lifestyle factors

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The mechanistic bridge between everyday timing behaviour and brain health, and the paper to cite when explaining why irregular sleep and late eating are not merely uncomfortable. The authors describe microglia as vital homeostasis keepers of the central nervous system, performing synaptic pruning, clearance of cellular debris and participation in neuroinflammatory processes, and note that microglia themselves exhibit strong circadian rhythms that regulate their own immune activity and affect neuronal function. Disruption of the circadian clock has been linked to higher risk of a variety of diseases. The review then works through three specific lifestyle disruptions, namely irregular sleep-wake patterns, reduced physical activity, and eating at the wrong time of day, and discusses the potential connection between those factors, disrupted circadian rhythm, and the role of microglia in maintaining brain health. It is a preclinical mechanism review rather than a clinical evidence synthesis, so it supports why questions about timing rather than claims about treatment effect.

Full APA reference

Jiao, H., Kalsbeek, A., & Yi, C.-X. (2024). Microglia, circadian rhythm and lifestyle factors. Neuropharmacology, 257, Article 110029. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neuropharm.2024.110029

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 October 2024, epub 7 June 2024, PMID 38852838. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-461
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jiao, H., Kalsbeek, A., & Yi, C.-X.
Year
2024
Title
Microglia, circadian rhythm and lifestyle factors
Description
The mechanistic bridge between everyday timing behaviour and brain health, and the paper to cite when explaining why irregular sleep and late eating are not merely uncomfortable. The authors describe microglia as vital homeostasis keepers of the central nervous system, performing synaptic pruning, clearance of cellular debris and participation in neuroinflammatory processes, and note that microglia themselves exhibit strong circadian rhythms that regulate their own immune activity and affect neuronal function. Disruption of the circadian clock has been linked to higher risk of a variety of diseases. The review then works through three specific lifestyle disruptions, namely irregular sleep-wake patterns, reduced physical activity, and eating at the wrong time of day, and discusses the potential connection between those factors, disrupted circadian rhythm, and the role of microglia in maintaining brain health. It is a preclinical mechanism review rather than a clinical evidence synthesis, so it supports why questions about timing rather than claims about treatment effect.
Publication or publisher
Neuropharmacology, 257, Article 110029
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Psychological mechanisms; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38852838/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neuropharm.2024.110029
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 October 2024, epub 7 June 2024, PMID 38852838. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-055; REF-144; REF-472
Full APA reference
Jiao, H., Kalsbeek, A., & Yi, C.-X. (2024). Microglia, circadian rhythm and lifestyle factors. Neuropharmacology, 257, Article 110029. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neuropharm.2024.110029
REF-462 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle interventions for non-obese patients both with, and at risk, of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A corrective to the assumption that fatty liver disease is a problem of visible obesity, and a reminder that lifestyle risk is not readable from body size. The authors describe non-obese non-alcoholic fatty liver disease as a highly prevalent but neglected liver condition, closely associated with metabolic disorders and suboptimal lifestyles. They report that landmark studies show lifestyle interventions, usually meaning changes in eating habits and physical activity, are potentially beneficial both in decreasing the risk of developing non-obese fatty liver disease and in improving it in non-obese people who already have it, with a powerful effect on the condition and on its risk factors. Their applied point is about awareness rather than efficacy: patients and health care professionals currently have poor awareness and understanding of both the condition and the benefit of lifestyle intervention in this group. The review discusses the changes needed among medical personnel and other stakeholders to raise that awareness. No pooled effect sizes are reported in the abstract.

Full APA reference

Zhang, X.-L., Wang, T.-Y., Targher, G., Byrne, C. D., & Zheng, M.-H. (2022). Lifestyle interventions for non-obese patients both with, and at risk, of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease. Diabetes & Metabolism Journal, 46(3), 391-401. https://doi.org/10.4093/dmj.2022.0048

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published May 2022, epub 25 May 2022, PMID 35656562, PMCID PMC9171159, free full text available. Publication types Review and Research Support, Non-U.S. Gov't. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-462
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, X.-L., Wang, T.-Y., Targher, G., Byrne, C. D., & Zheng, M.-H.
Year
2022
Title
Lifestyle interventions for non-obese patients both with, and at risk, of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
Description
A corrective to the assumption that fatty liver disease is a problem of visible obesity, and a reminder that lifestyle risk is not readable from body size. The authors describe non-obese non-alcoholic fatty liver disease as a highly prevalent but neglected liver condition, closely associated with metabolic disorders and suboptimal lifestyles. They report that landmark studies show lifestyle interventions, usually meaning changes in eating habits and physical activity, are potentially beneficial both in decreasing the risk of developing non-obese fatty liver disease and in improving it in non-obese people who already have it, with a powerful effect on the condition and on its risk factors. Their applied point is about awareness rather than efficacy: patients and health care professionals currently have poor awareness and understanding of both the condition and the benefit of lifestyle intervention in this group. The review discusses the changes needed among medical personnel and other stakeholders to raise that awareness. No pooled effect sizes are reported in the abstract.
Publication or publisher
Diabetes & Metabolism Journal, 46(3), 391-401
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/35656562/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.4093/dmj.2022.0048
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published May 2022, epub 25 May 2022, PMID 35656562, PMCID PMC9171159, free full text available. Publication types Review and Research Support, Non-U.S. Gov't. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-474
Full APA reference
Zhang, X.-L., Wang, T.-Y., Targher, G., Byrne, C. D., & Zheng, M.-H. (2022). Lifestyle interventions for non-obese patients both with, and at risk, of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease. Diabetes & Metabolism Journal, 46(3), 391-401. https://doi.org/10.4093/dmj.2022.0048
REF-463 Paper, guideline or statement

Nutrition strategy and life style in polycystic ovary syndrome: Narrative review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

A wide ranging account of lifestyle modification in polycystic ovary syndrome, valuable because it treats the condition as a whole-body metabolic and psychological problem rather than a reproductive one. The authors analysed the PubMed database by combining polycystic ovary syndrome entries with causes, diseases, diet supplementation, lifestyle, physical activity and use of herbs. They describe the metabolic pathways producing disturbances in lipid, carbohydrate and hormonal metabolism, and explicitly cover sleep disorders, changes in mental health parameters, and the causes of oxidative stress and inflammation. Those conditions are described as leading consistently to severe disease, listing diabetes, fatty degeneration of internal organs, infertility, atherosclerosis, cardiovascular disease, dysbiosis and cancer. Proposed interventions span modification of lifestyle, diet patterns, proper selection of nutrients, pharmacological supplementation, natural supplementation in the form of herbs, and physical activity. The authors conclude that the progress and consequences of the syndrome are largely modifiable and depend on the patient's approach, while genetic determinants must also be taken into account. It is a narrative review with no effect estimates, and the herbal supplementation coverage should be read with that in mind.

Full APA reference

Szczuko, M., Kikut, J., Szczuko, U., Szydłowska, I., Nawrocka-Rutkowska, J., Ziętek, M., Verbanac, D., & Saso, L. (2021). Nutrition strategy and life style in polycystic ovary syndrome: Narrative review. Nutrients, 13(7), Article 2452. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu13072452

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 July 2021, PMID 34371961, PMCID PMC8308732, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-463
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Szczuko, M., Kikut, J., Szczuko, U., Szydłowska, I., Nawrocka-Rutkowska, J., Ziętek, M., Verbanac, D., & Saso, L.
Year
2021
Title
Nutrition strategy and life style in polycystic ovary syndrome: Narrative review
Description
A wide ranging account of lifestyle modification in polycystic ovary syndrome, valuable because it treats the condition as a whole-body metabolic and psychological problem rather than a reproductive one. The authors analysed the PubMed database by combining polycystic ovary syndrome entries with causes, diseases, diet supplementation, lifestyle, physical activity and use of herbs. They describe the metabolic pathways producing disturbances in lipid, carbohydrate and hormonal metabolism, and explicitly cover sleep disorders, changes in mental health parameters, and the causes of oxidative stress and inflammation. Those conditions are described as leading consistently to severe disease, listing diabetes, fatty degeneration of internal organs, infertility, atherosclerosis, cardiovascular disease, dysbiosis and cancer. Proposed interventions span modification of lifestyle, diet patterns, proper selection of nutrients, pharmacological supplementation, natural supplementation in the form of herbs, and physical activity. The authors conclude that the progress and consequences of the syndrome are largely modifiable and depend on the patient's approach, while genetic determinants must also be taken into account. It is a narrative review with no effect estimates, and the herbal supplementation coverage should be read with that in mind.
Publication or publisher
Nutrients, 13(7), Article 2452
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34371961/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/nu13072452
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 July 2021, PMID 34371961, PMCID PMC8308732, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-024
Full APA reference
Szczuko, M., Kikut, J., Szczuko, U., Szydłowska, I., Nawrocka-Rutkowska, J., Ziętek, M., Verbanac, D., & Saso, L. (2021). Nutrition strategy and life style in polycystic ovary syndrome: Narrative review. Nutrients, 13(7), Article 2452. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu13072452
REF-464 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle and mental health

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The paper that named the problem for a generation of psychologists, and still the sharpest statement of why lifestyle sits outside mainstream mental health practice. Walsh argues that mental health professionals have significantly underestimated the importance of lifestyle factors as contributors to and treatments for multiple psychopathologies, for fostering individual and social wellbeing, and for preserving and optimising cognitive function. He introduces therapeutic lifestyle changes as a category and states they are underutilised despite considerable evidence of effectiveness in both clinical and normal populations, are sometimes as effective as either psychotherapy or pharmacotherapy, and can offer significant therapeutic advantages. The eight changes he names are exercise, nutrition and diet, time in nature, relationships, recreation, relaxation and stress management, religious or spiritual involvement, and service to others, a list notably broader than the physical behaviours that dominate later lifestyle psychiatry frameworks. The article reviews the evidence, the principles, advantages and challenges of implementation, and the economic, institutional and professional forces hindering use, and deliberately distils recommendations into easily communicable principles because ease of communication strongly influences whether therapists recommend and patients adopt an intervention. His conclusion is that in the twenty first century therapeutic lifestyles may need to be a central focus of mental, medical and public health. This is a landmark American Psychologist review and the standard citation for the phrase therapeutic lifestyle change.

Full APA reference

Walsh, R. (2011). Lifestyle and mental health. American Psychologist, 66(7), 579-592. https://doi.org/10.1037/a0021769

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2011, PMID 21244124. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-464
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Walsh, R.
Year
2011
Title
Lifestyle and mental health
Description
The paper that named the problem for a generation of psychologists, and still the sharpest statement of why lifestyle sits outside mainstream mental health practice. Walsh argues that mental health professionals have significantly underestimated the importance of lifestyle factors as contributors to and treatments for multiple psychopathologies, for fostering individual and social wellbeing, and for preserving and optimising cognitive function. He introduces therapeutic lifestyle changes as a category and states they are underutilised despite considerable evidence of effectiveness in both clinical and normal populations, are sometimes as effective as either psychotherapy or pharmacotherapy, and can offer significant therapeutic advantages. The eight changes he names are exercise, nutrition and diet, time in nature, relationships, recreation, relaxation and stress management, religious or spiritual involvement, and service to others, a list notably broader than the physical behaviours that dominate later lifestyle psychiatry frameworks. The article reviews the evidence, the principles, advantages and challenges of implementation, and the economic, institutional and professional forces hindering use, and deliberately distils recommendations into easily communicable principles because ease of communication strongly influences whether therapists recommend and patients adopt an intervention. His conclusion is that in the twenty first century therapeutic lifestyles may need to be a central focus of mental, medical and public health. This is a landmark American Psychologist review and the standard citation for the phrase therapeutic lifestyle change.
Publication or publisher
American Psychologist, 66(7), 579-592
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Nature and environment; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Implementation and barriers; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/21244124/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1037/a0021769
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2011, PMID 21244124. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-041; REF-076; REF-096; REF-166
Full APA reference
Walsh, R. (2011). Lifestyle and mental health. American Psychologist, 66(7), 579-592. https://doi.org/10.1037/a0021769
REF-465 Paper, guideline or statement

Mediterranean diet in healthy aging

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

A short review linking the Mediterranean dietary pattern to healthy aging, defined here as the disease free aging process. The authors open with the demographic pressure, noting the world elderly population is expected to double before 2050, and that unhealthy habits and unhealthy lifestyles are commonly associated with age related diseases or their worsening. Their argument is that modification of daily lifestyle and diet may help prevent the onset of age related disease and efficiently affect its evolution, thereby promoting healthy aging. They highlight the role of nutrition science in that process and conclude that the Mediterranean model has demonstrated itself a useful style in supporting healthy aging, and that promotion of this lifestyle through health policy seems the best approach to achieving the target. The policy framing is the reason to keep it, since it moves the Mediterranean diet argument from individual choice to population strategy. No pooled effect estimates or trial results are reported in the abstract, so cite the landmark trials for effect and this for the aging and policy framing.

Full APA reference

Mazza, E., Ferro, Y., Pujia, R., Mare, R., Maurotti, S., Montalcini, T., & Pujia, A. (2021). Mediterranean diet in healthy aging. The Journal of Nutrition, Health & Aging, 25(9), 1076-1083. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12603-021-1675-6

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in volume 25 issue 9, 2021, PMID 34725664, PMCID PMC8442641, free full text available. Publication type Review. No month is stated on the record. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-465
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mazza, E., Ferro, Y., Pujia, R., Mare, R., Maurotti, S., Montalcini, T., & Pujia, A.
Year
2021
Title
Mediterranean diet in healthy aging
Description
A short review linking the Mediterranean dietary pattern to healthy aging, defined here as the disease free aging process. The authors open with the demographic pressure, noting the world elderly population is expected to double before 2050, and that unhealthy habits and unhealthy lifestyles are commonly associated with age related diseases or their worsening. Their argument is that modification of daily lifestyle and diet may help prevent the onset of age related disease and efficiently affect its evolution, thereby promoting healthy aging. They highlight the role of nutrition science in that process and conclude that the Mediterranean model has demonstrated itself a useful style in supporting healthy aging, and that promotion of this lifestyle through health policy seems the best approach to achieving the target. The policy framing is the reason to keep it, since it moves the Mediterranean diet argument from individual choice to population strategy. No pooled effect estimates or trial results are reported in the abstract, so cite the landmark trials for effect and this for the aging and policy framing.
Publication or publisher
The Journal of Nutrition, Health & Aging, 25(9), 1076-1083
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34725664/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12603-021-1675-6
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in volume 25 issue 9, 2021, PMID 34725664, PMCID PMC8442641, free full text available. Publication type Review. No month is stated on the record. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-361; REF-362; REF-471
Full APA reference
Mazza, E., Ferro, Y., Pujia, R., Mare, R., Maurotti, S., Montalcini, T., & Pujia, A. (2021). Mediterranean diet in healthy aging. The Journal of Nutrition, Health & Aging, 25(9), 1076-1083. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12603-021-1675-6
REF-466 Paper, guideline or statement

Cancer burden: Incorrect lifestyle or bad luck?

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

A short editorial putting the question that sits underneath most lifestyle prevention messaging, namely how much of the cancer burden is attributable to modifiable behaviour and how much to chance. It is worth holding in the collection precisely because that framing shapes whether prevention policy is read as public responsibility or personal blame, a tension that runs through the social determinants literature. Two caveats matter when citing it. PubMed indexes no abstract for this item, so the argument cannot be summarised from the record and the full text must be read directly. It is also indexed as an editorial rather than a review, so it carries the weight of expert commentary rather than synthesis. Included as a pointer to the debate rather than as evidence about attributable fractions.

Full APA reference

Testino, G., & Balbinot, P. (2024). Cancer burden: Incorrect lifestyle or bad luck? Minerva Medica, 115(3), 263-265. https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4806.24.09298-X

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Testino G and Balbinot P, Minerva Medica, June 2024, volume 115, issue 3, pages 263-265, English language, epub 24 April 2024, PMID 38695634. Publication type Editorial, not Review. No abstract is indexed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-466
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Testino, G., & Balbinot, P.
Year
2024
Title
Cancer burden: Incorrect lifestyle or bad luck?
Description
A short editorial putting the question that sits underneath most lifestyle prevention messaging, namely how much of the cancer burden is attributable to modifiable behaviour and how much to chance. It is worth holding in the collection precisely because that framing shapes whether prevention policy is read as public responsibility or personal blame, a tension that runs through the social determinants literature. Two caveats matter when citing it. PubMed indexes no abstract for this item, so the argument cannot be summarised from the record and the full text must be read directly. It is also indexed as an editorial rather than a review, so it carries the weight of expert commentary rather than synthesis. Included as a pointer to the debate rather than as evidence about attributable fractions.
Publication or publisher
Minerva Medica, 115(3), 263-265
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38695634/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4806.24.09298-X
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Testino G and Balbinot P, Minerva Medica, June 2024, volume 115, issue 3, pages 263-265, English language, epub 24 April 2024, PMID 38695634. Publication type Editorial, not Review. No abstract is indexed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-458
Full APA reference
Testino, G., & Balbinot, P. (2024). Cancer burden: Incorrect lifestyle or bad luck? Minerva Medica, 115(3), 263-265. https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4806.24.09298-X
REF-467 Paper, guideline or statement

Riesgo y factores de estilo de vida asociados a la enfermedad renal crónica [Risk and lifestyle factors associated to chronic kidney disease]

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

A Spanish language review from the Mexican Social Security Institute journal, useful both for its content and because it widens the collection beyond English language sources. The authors argue that lifestyle has a determining influence on the progression of chronic kidney disease, which begins with some kidney damage that can persist and progress under the influence of risk factors, with further damage accumulating across life. They note the disease is more common in adults and frequently remains hidden from routine analysis, and that early detection may allow treatment and healthy lifestyle change to stop or lengthen the progression of kidney damage and avoid the need for transplant or dialysis. The specific lifestyle actions named are visits to the doctor, not smoking, intense to moderate physical activity, consuming enough vegetables and fruit, and avoiding diets high in carbohydrate and lipids. Literature was drawn from freely accessible databases covering 1980 to 2017 using the keywords chronic kidney disease, lifestyle and risk factors, and their Spanish equivalents. The search is narrative rather than systematic and the cutoff is now dated, so treat it as a regional practice oriented overview.

Full APA reference

López-Heydeck, S. M., Robles-Navarro, J. B., Montenegro-Morales, L. P., Garduño-García, J. J., & López-Arriaga, J. A. (2020). Riesgo y factores de estilo de vida asociados a la enfermedad renal crónica [Risk and lifestyle factors associated to chronic kidney disease]. Revista Médica del Instituto Mexicano del Seguro Social, 58(3), 305-316. https://doi.org/10.24875/RMIMSS.M20000035

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 May 2020, volume 58 issue 3, pages 305-316, PMID 34002990. Language Spanish with abstracts in both English and Spanish. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-467
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
López-Heydeck, S. M., Robles-Navarro, J. B., Montenegro-Morales, L. P., Garduño-García, J. J., & López-Arriaga, J. A.
Year
2020
Title
Riesgo y factores de estilo de vida asociados a la enfermedad renal crónica [Risk and lifestyle factors associated to chronic kidney disease]
Description
A Spanish language review from the Mexican Social Security Institute journal, useful both for its content and because it widens the collection beyond English language sources. The authors argue that lifestyle has a determining influence on the progression of chronic kidney disease, which begins with some kidney damage that can persist and progress under the influence of risk factors, with further damage accumulating across life. They note the disease is more common in adults and frequently remains hidden from routine analysis, and that early detection may allow treatment and healthy lifestyle change to stop or lengthen the progression of kidney damage and avoid the need for transplant or dialysis. The specific lifestyle actions named are visits to the doctor, not smoking, intense to moderate physical activity, consuming enough vegetables and fruit, and avoiding diets high in carbohydrate and lipids. Literature was drawn from freely accessible databases covering 1980 to 2017 using the keywords chronic kidney disease, lifestyle and risk factors, and their Spanish equivalents. The search is narrative rather than systematic and the cutoff is now dated, so treat it as a regional practice oriented overview.
Publication or publisher
Revista Médica del Instituto Mexicano del Seguro Social, 58(3), 305-316
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Mexico
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34002990/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.24875/RMIMSS.M20000035
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 18 May 2020, volume 58 issue 3, pages 305-316, PMID 34002990. Language Spanish with abstracts in both English and Spanish. Publication type Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-458
Full APA reference
López-Heydeck, S. M., Robles-Navarro, J. B., Montenegro-Morales, L. P., Garduño-García, J. J., & López-Arriaga, J. A. (2020). Riesgo y factores de estilo de vida asociados a la enfermedad renal crónica [Risk and lifestyle factors associated to chronic kidney disease]. Revista Médica del Instituto Mexicano del Seguro Social, 58(3), 305-316. https://doi.org/10.24875/RMIMSS.M20000035
REF-468 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle factors affecting the pathogenesis of androgenetic alopecia: A literature review

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

A 2026 review of an unusual application of lifestyle thinking, and one that makes the psychological consequences explicit. The authors note that androgenetic alopecia significantly impairs patients' social interactions and psychological wellbeing and is widespread worldwide, and that treatment is a long term process which is difficult to stick to. That adherence problem is why they argue establishing effective lifestyle intervention protocols to delay disease progression has become a central focus for both clinicians and patients. They are candid that only limited and fragmented studies have characterised the impact of lifestyle on the condition. The review examines dietary habits, sleep patterns, ultraviolet radiation, exercise and hairstyles, and works through the underlying pathogenic mechanisms by which each may induce or exacerbate the condition, with inflammation and oxidative stress the stated mechanistic themes. Worth holding as an example of how far the lifestyle frame now reaches, and of the reciprocal link between a physical condition, appearance and mental health, though the evidence base it reviews is acknowledged as thin.

Full APA reference

Huang, F., Tang, L., Zhou, X., Fu, Q., & Lu, Y. (2026). Lifestyle factors affecting the pathogenesis of androgenetic alopecia: A literature review. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, Article 1739298. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1739298

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 4 February 2026, PMID 41717597, PMCID PMC12913381, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-468
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Huang, F., Tang, L., Zhou, X., Fu, Q., & Lu, Y.
Year
2026
Title
Lifestyle factors affecting the pathogenesis of androgenetic alopecia: A literature review
Description
A 2026 review of an unusual application of lifestyle thinking, and one that makes the psychological consequences explicit. The authors note that androgenetic alopecia significantly impairs patients' social interactions and psychological wellbeing and is widespread worldwide, and that treatment is a long term process which is difficult to stick to. That adherence problem is why they argue establishing effective lifestyle intervention protocols to delay disease progression has become a central focus for both clinicians and patients. They are candid that only limited and fragmented studies have characterised the impact of lifestyle on the condition. The review examines dietary habits, sleep patterns, ultraviolet radiation, exercise and hairstyles, and works through the underlying pathogenic mechanisms by which each may induce or exacerbate the condition, with inflammation and oxidative stress the stated mechanistic themes. Worth holding as an example of how far the lifestyle frame now reaches, and of the reciprocal link between a physical condition, appearance and mental health, though the evidence base it reviews is acknowledged as thin.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 14, Article 1739298
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41717597/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1739298
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 4 February 2026, PMID 41717597, PMCID PMC12913381, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-460
Full APA reference
Huang, F., Tang, L., Zhou, X., Fu, Q., & Lu, Y. (2026). Lifestyle factors affecting the pathogenesis of androgenetic alopecia: A literature review. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, Article 1739298. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1739298
REF-469 Paper, guideline or statement

Seikatsu shūkan to kenkō [Lifestyle and health]

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

An early Japanese synthesis that is worth keeping because it measured what most lifestyle research only asserts. Morimoto frames the total environments a person is exposed to across life stages as composing individual and community lifestyles, and treats those lifestyles as determining risk for cancers, circulatory diseases and other chronic disease. In a cohort of industrial workers, correlations between lifestyles, described as ways of daily living, and comprehensive health potentials were quantitatively investigated in order to build new theory and practice programs for disease prevention and health promotion in environmental and preventive medicine. Total lifestyle was scored using 8 health practices covering smoking, alcohol drinking, physical exercise, and working and sleeping patterns. People with good lifestyles showed much younger health ages calculated from health check-up data and lower risk of developing lifestyle related disease than those with poor lifestyles. What makes the paper distinctive is the measurement: physical health potential was assessed with biomarkers including lymphocyte chromosome DNA alterations, natural killer activity and serum IgE, while psycho-mental health potential used quality of life questionnaires alongside stress related hormones and cytokines including cortisol and interleukins. Comprehensive health potentials were significantly lower in people with poor lifestyles, and change from poor to good lifestyles through health education produced improvement. An early integrated biological and psychological account of the lifestyle and health link, published in Japanese with an English abstract.

Full APA reference

Morimoto, K. (2000). Seikatsu shūkan to kenkō [Lifestyle and health]. Nihon Eiseigaku Zasshi [Japanese Journal of Hygiene], 54(4), 572-591. https://doi.org/10.1265/jjh.54.572

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Morimoto K, Nihon Eiseigaku Zasshi, January 2000, volume 54, issue 4, pages 572-591, PMID 10714146. Language Japanese, indexed as English Abstract, Journal Article and Review. The volume 54 issue 4 and January 2000 combination is as printed in the record. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-469
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Morimoto, K.
Year
2000
Title
Seikatsu shūkan to kenkō [Lifestyle and health]
Description
An early Japanese synthesis that is worth keeping because it measured what most lifestyle research only asserts. Morimoto frames the total environments a person is exposed to across life stages as composing individual and community lifestyles, and treats those lifestyles as determining risk for cancers, circulatory diseases and other chronic disease. In a cohort of industrial workers, correlations between lifestyles, described as ways of daily living, and comprehensive health potentials were quantitatively investigated in order to build new theory and practice programs for disease prevention and health promotion in environmental and preventive medicine. Total lifestyle was scored using 8 health practices covering smoking, alcohol drinking, physical exercise, and working and sleeping patterns. People with good lifestyles showed much younger health ages calculated from health check-up data and lower risk of developing lifestyle related disease than those with poor lifestyles. What makes the paper distinctive is the measurement: physical health potential was assessed with biomarkers including lymphocyte chromosome DNA alterations, natural killer activity and serum IgE, while psycho-mental health potential used quality of life questionnaires alongside stress related hormones and cytokines including cortisol and interleukins. Comprehensive health potentials were significantly lower in people with poor lifestyles, and change from poor to good lifestyles through health education produced improvement. An early integrated biological and psychological account of the lifestyle and health link, published in Japanese with an English abstract.
Publication or publisher
Nihon Eiseigaku Zasshi [Japanese Journal of Hygiene], 54(4), 572-591
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Japan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/10714146/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1265/jjh.54.572
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Morimoto K, Nihon Eiseigaku Zasshi, January 2000, volume 54, issue 4, pages 572-591, PMID 10714146. Language Japanese, indexed as English Abstract, Journal Article and Review. The volume 54 issue 4 and January 2000 combination is as printed in the record. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-479; REF-487
Full APA reference
Morimoto, K. (2000). Seikatsu shūkan to kenkō [Lifestyle and health]. Nihon Eiseigaku Zasshi [Japanese Journal of Hygiene], 54(4), 572-591. https://doi.org/10.1265/jjh.54.572
REF-470 Paper, guideline or statement

The relation between lifestyles and positive mental health in Portuguese higher education students

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A large student survey that measures mental health as something present rather than absent, which makes it a useful counterweight to the symptom focused literature. The design was cross-sectional, descriptive, correlational and multicentric, applying the Positive Mental Health Questionnaire and using k-means clustering to derive four clusters based on positive mental health level. The sample was 3,647 higher education students, 78.8 percent female, 89.5 percent single, average age 23 years with a standard deviation of 6.68. Differences between clusters emerged on both sociodemographic characteristics and lifestyles, with cluster 1 containing students at the higher level of positive mental health. Higher positive mental health was associated with greater satisfaction in affective relationships, higher recreational and sports activity, better sleep quality, a healthy diet, lower medication consumption and lower illicit drug consumption. The authors emphasise the promotion of healthy lifestyles and the importance of positive mental health in promoting the health of higher education students. Note that relationship satisfaction sits alongside the behavioural factors, and that a cross-sectional design cannot establish direction between lifestyle and mental health.

Full APA reference

Valentim, O., Vilelas, J., Carvalho, J. C., Andrade, C. M. S. M., Tomás, C., Costa, P. S., & Sequeira, C. (2023). The relation between lifestyles and positive mental health in Portuguese higher education students. Global Health Promotion, 30(1), 23-32. https://doi.org/10.1177/17579759221112552

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published March 2023, epub 24 August 2022, volume 30 issue 1, pages 23-32, PMID 36000814. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-470
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Valentim, O., Vilelas, J., Carvalho, J. C., Andrade, C. M. S. M., Tomás, C., Costa, P. S., & Sequeira, C.
Year
2023
Title
The relation between lifestyles and positive mental health in Portuguese higher education students
Description
A large student survey that measures mental health as something present rather than absent, which makes it a useful counterweight to the symptom focused literature. The design was cross-sectional, descriptive, correlational and multicentric, applying the Positive Mental Health Questionnaire and using k-means clustering to derive four clusters based on positive mental health level. The sample was 3,647 higher education students, 78.8 percent female, 89.5 percent single, average age 23 years with a standard deviation of 6.68. Differences between clusters emerged on both sociodemographic characteristics and lifestyles, with cluster 1 containing students at the higher level of positive mental health. Higher positive mental health was associated with greater satisfaction in affective relationships, higher recreational and sports activity, better sleep quality, a healthy diet, lower medication consumption and lower illicit drug consumption. The authors emphasise the promotion of healthy lifestyles and the importance of positive mental health in promoting the health of higher education students. Note that relationship satisfaction sits alongside the behavioural factors, and that a cross-sectional design cannot establish direction between lifestyle and mental health.
Publication or publisher
Global Health Promotion, 30(1), 23-32
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
Portugal
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/36000814/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/17579759221112552
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published March 2023, epub 24 August 2022, volume 30 issue 1, pages 23-32, PMID 36000814. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-053; REF-449
Full APA reference
Valentim, O., Vilelas, J., Carvalho, J. C., Andrade, C. M. S. M., Tomás, C., Costa, P. S., & Sequeira, C. (2023). The relation between lifestyles and positive mental health in Portuguese higher education students. Global Health Promotion, 30(1), 23-32. https://doi.org/10.1177/17579759221112552
REF-471 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle predictors of healthy ageing in men

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

A review that treats gender as central rather than incidental to healthy ageing, and is honest about how unstable the outcome itself is. It examines physical activity and sedentary behaviour, smoking, diet and alcohol consumption as predictors of healthy ageing in men, reporting that healthy lifestyles are associated with men surviving longer, with good health maintained for longer, and with disability postponed and compressed into fewer years at the end of life. Physical activity and smoking in midlife and late adulthood are identified as factors that both impact and predict healthy ageing in men. The author is explicit that healthy ageing has no clear phenotypic definition, which is a real limitation on any such literature, and that more research is needed to establish the impact of dietary and sedentary behaviour specifically. The practical conclusion is that adopting healthier lifestyles could postpone age associated disease or slow the ageing process, allow independent living for longer, and reduce the burden on social and health care sectors. No pooled effect sizes are reported in the abstract.

Full APA reference

Södergren, M. (2013). Lifestyle predictors of healthy ageing in men. Maturitas, 75(2), 113-117. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.maturitas.2013.02.011

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published June 2013, epub 21 March 2013, volume 75 issue 2, pages 113-117, PMID 23522750. Publication types Review and Research Support, Non-U.S. Gov't. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-471
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Södergren, M.
Year
2013
Title
Lifestyle predictors of healthy ageing in men
Description
A review that treats gender as central rather than incidental to healthy ageing, and is honest about how unstable the outcome itself is. It examines physical activity and sedentary behaviour, smoking, diet and alcohol consumption as predictors of healthy ageing in men, reporting that healthy lifestyles are associated with men surviving longer, with good health maintained for longer, and with disability postponed and compressed into fewer years at the end of life. Physical activity and smoking in midlife and late adulthood are identified as factors that both impact and predict healthy ageing in men. The author is explicit that healthy ageing has no clear phenotypic definition, which is a real limitation on any such literature, and that more research is needed to establish the impact of dietary and sedentary behaviour specifically. The practical conclusion is that adopting healthier lifestyles could postpone age associated disease or slow the ageing process, allow independent living for longer, and reduce the burden on social and health care sectors. No pooled effect sizes are reported in the abstract.
Publication or publisher
Maturitas, 75(2), 113-117
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/23522750/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.maturitas.2013.02.011
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published June 2013, epub 21 March 2013, volume 75 issue 2, pages 113-117, PMID 23522750. Publication types Review and Research Support, Non-U.S. Gov't. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-143; REF-465
Full APA reference
Södergren, M. (2013). Lifestyle predictors of healthy ageing in men. Maturitas, 75(2), 113-117. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.maturitas.2013.02.011
REF-472 Paper, guideline or statement

The role of lifestyle factors in cognitive health and dementia in oldest-old: A systematic review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

A systematic review of the age group usually excluded from dementia prevention research, which matters because prevention advice is routinely extrapolated to the very old without evidence. Searches covered PubMed, EMBASE, Scopus and Web of Science, and 27 observational cohort studies met the inclusion criteria. The finding is that eating a healthy diet with plenty of fruit and vegetables, and participating in leisure and physical activities, may protect against cognitive decline and cognitive impairment among the oldest-old regardless of APOE genotype, a point of real practical importance since it means genetic risk does not remove the benefit. The authors also report that combined lifestyles may generate multiplicative effects compared with individual factors, and conclude that interventions involving diet, leisure, or a combination of lifestyles could be beneficial for cognitive function in this group. They note that interventional studies are warranted to strengthen the evidence, since the included body of work is observational rather than experimental.

Full APA reference

Ye, K. X., Sun, L., Wang, L., Khoo, A. L. Y., Lim, K. X., Lu, G., Yu, L., Li, C., Maier, A. B., & Feng, L. (2023). The role of lifestyle factors in cognitive health and dementia in oldest-old: A systematic review. Neuroscience & Biobehavioral Reviews, 152, Article 105286. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neubiorev.2023.105286

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published September 2023, epub 13 June 2023, volume 152, article 105286, PMID 37321363. Publication type Systematic Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-472
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ye, K. X., Sun, L., Wang, L., Khoo, A. L. Y., Lim, K. X., Lu, G., Yu, L., Li, C., Maier, A. B., & Feng, L.
Year
2023
Title
The role of lifestyle factors in cognitive health and dementia in oldest-old: A systematic review
Description
A systematic review of the age group usually excluded from dementia prevention research, which matters because prevention advice is routinely extrapolated to the very old without evidence. Searches covered PubMed, EMBASE, Scopus and Web of Science, and 27 observational cohort studies met the inclusion criteria. The finding is that eating a healthy diet with plenty of fruit and vegetables, and participating in leisure and physical activities, may protect against cognitive decline and cognitive impairment among the oldest-old regardless of APOE genotype, a point of real practical importance since it means genetic risk does not remove the benefit. The authors also report that combined lifestyles may generate multiplicative effects compared with individual factors, and conclude that interventions involving diet, leisure, or a combination of lifestyles could be beneficial for cognitive function in this group. They note that interventional studies are warranted to strengthen the evidence, since the included body of work is observational rather than experimental.
Publication or publisher
Neuroscience & Biobehavioral Reviews, 152, Article 105286
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37321363/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neubiorev.2023.105286
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published September 2023, epub 13 June 2023, volume 152, article 105286, PMID 37321363. Publication type Systematic Review. Listed as a free article with no PMCID stated. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-139; REF-365; REF-413
Full APA reference
Ye, K. X., Sun, L., Wang, L., Khoo, A. L. Y., Lim, K. X., Lu, G., Yu, L., Li, C., Maier, A. B., & Feng, L. (2023). The role of lifestyle factors in cognitive health and dementia in oldest-old: A systematic review. Neuroscience & Biobehavioral Reviews, 152, Article 105286. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.neubiorev.2023.105286
REF-473 Paper, guideline or statement

What should the recommendations be for lifestyle factors in obstructive sleep apnea?

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A short editorial raising a genuine gap, namely that obstructive sleep apnoea guidance concentrates on device and surgical treatment while lifestyle guidance for the condition remains comparatively unspecified. It sits usefully in the collection alongside the sleep and cardiometabolic material, since sleep apnoea is where sleep, weight, activity and metabolic risk visibly converge. Two caveats when citing it. PubMed indexes no abstract, so the argument cannot be summarised from the record and the full text must be read directly; the indexed keywords are comorbidities, diet, healthy lifestyles, inflammation, metabolic disorders, obstructive sleep apnoea, physical activity and sleep. It is indexed as an editorial rather than a review, so it carries the weight of expert commentary rather than synthesis. Held as a pointer to the recommendation gap rather than as a source of recommendations.

Full APA reference

Huang, T. (2022). What should the recommendations be for lifestyle factors in obstructive sleep apnea? Expert Review of Respiratory Medicine, 16(6), 601-604. https://doi.org/10.1080/17476348.2022.2099377

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Huang T, Expert Review of Respiratory Medicine, June 2022, volume 16, issue 6, pages 601-604, English language, epub 11 July 2022, PMID 35792739. Publication types Editorial and Research Support, N.I.H., Extramural. No abstract is indexed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-473
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Huang, T.
Year
2022
Title
What should the recommendations be for lifestyle factors in obstructive sleep apnea?
Description
A short editorial raising a genuine gap, namely that obstructive sleep apnoea guidance concentrates on device and surgical treatment while lifestyle guidance for the condition remains comparatively unspecified. It sits usefully in the collection alongside the sleep and cardiometabolic material, since sleep apnoea is where sleep, weight, activity and metabolic risk visibly converge. Two caveats when citing it. PubMed indexes no abstract, so the argument cannot be summarised from the record and the full text must be read directly; the indexed keywords are comorbidities, diet, healthy lifestyles, inflammation, metabolic disorders, obstructive sleep apnoea, physical activity and sleep. It is indexed as an editorial rather than a review, so it carries the weight of expert commentary rather than synthesis. Held as a pointer to the recommendation gap rather than as a source of recommendations.
Publication or publisher
Expert Review of Respiratory Medicine, 16(6), 601-604
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Sleep; Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/35792739/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/17476348.2022.2099377
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Huang T, Expert Review of Respiratory Medicine, June 2022, volume 16, issue 6, pages 601-604, English language, epub 11 July 2022, PMID 35792739. Publication types Editorial and Research Support, N.I.H., Extramural. No abstract is indexed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-459
Full APA reference
Huang, T. (2022). What should the recommendations be for lifestyle factors in obstructive sleep apnea? Expert Review of Respiratory Medicine, 16(6), 601-604. https://doi.org/10.1080/17476348.2022.2099377
REF-474 Paper, guideline or statement

Management of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease: Lifestyle changes

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A short editorial that states the treatment hierarchy plainly, which is why it is worth citing. Written as commentary on a manuscript by Zeng and colleagues in the same journal, it describes non-alcoholic fatty liver disease as a hepatic manifestation of metabolic syndrome that ultimately leads to advanced hepatic fibrosis, cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma, affecting more than 25 percent of the population globally. Existing therapeutic strategies including pharmacologic therapy focus on liver protection, anti-inflammation and regulation of disease related metabolic disorder symptoms, and although several drugs are in late stage development, potent drugs against the disease are lacking, while surgical approaches such as bariatric surgery are not routinely used for it. On that basis the authors state that intervening in patients' unhealthy lifestyles, specifically weight loss through dietary change and exercise to ameliorate associated metabolic disorders and metabolic syndrome, is the first-line treatment for the condition. They add the conditional that matters clinically: with sufficient intrinsic motivation and adherence, managing unhealthy lifestyles can reduce disease severity, improve quality of life and increase survival expectancy. Indexed as an editorial rather than a research article.

Full APA reference

Lv, H., & Liu, Y. (2024). Management of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease: Lifestyle changes. World Journal of Gastroenterology, 30(22), 2829-2833. https://doi.org/10.3748/wjg.v30.i22.2829

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 June 2024, volume 30 issue 22, pages 2829-2833, PMID 38947294, PMCID PMC11212717, free full text available. Publication type Editorial. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-474
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lv, H., & Liu, Y.
Year
2024
Title
Management of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease: Lifestyle changes
Description
A short editorial that states the treatment hierarchy plainly, which is why it is worth citing. Written as commentary on a manuscript by Zeng and colleagues in the same journal, it describes non-alcoholic fatty liver disease as a hepatic manifestation of metabolic syndrome that ultimately leads to advanced hepatic fibrosis, cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma, affecting more than 25 percent of the population globally. Existing therapeutic strategies including pharmacologic therapy focus on liver protection, anti-inflammation and regulation of disease related metabolic disorder symptoms, and although several drugs are in late stage development, potent drugs against the disease are lacking, while surgical approaches such as bariatric surgery are not routinely used for it. On that basis the authors state that intervening in patients' unhealthy lifestyles, specifically weight loss through dietary change and exercise to ameliorate associated metabolic disorders and metabolic syndrome, is the first-line treatment for the condition. They add the conditional that matters clinically: with sufficient intrinsic motivation and adherence, managing unhealthy lifestyles can reduce disease severity, improve quality of life and increase survival expectancy. Indexed as an editorial rather than a research article.
Publication or publisher
World Journal of Gastroenterology, 30(22), 2829-2833
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38947294/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3748/wjg.v30.i22.2829
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 14 June 2024, volume 30 issue 22, pages 2829-2833, PMID 38947294, PMCID PMC11212717, free full text available. Publication type Editorial. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-462
Full APA reference
Lv, H., & Liu, Y. (2024). Management of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease: Lifestyle changes. World Journal of Gastroenterology, 30(22), 2829-2833. https://doi.org/10.3748/wjg.v30.i22.2829
REF-475 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle modifications and erectile dysfunction: What can be expected?

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

A review that gives lifestyle counselling a clear physiological rationale in a domain where it is often skipped in favour of prescribing. The authors note that erectile dysfunction is a common disorder whose prevalence is increasing worldwide, and list its modifiable risk factors as smoking, lack of physical activity, poor diet, overweight or obesity, metabolic syndrome and excessive alcohol consumption. Their mechanistic argument is that all of these metabolic conditions are strongly associated with a pro-inflammatory state that produces endothelial dysfunction by decreasing the availability of nitric oxide, the driving force of blood genital flow. Lifestyle and nutrition are recognised as central factors influencing vascular nitric oxide production, testosterone levels and erectile function, and habits that decrease low grade clinical inflammation may therefore have a role in improving erectile function. They report that in clinical trials lifestyle modifications were effective in ameliorating erectile dysfunction or restoring absent erectile dysfunction in people with obesity or metabolic syndrome, and conclude that promoting healthful lifestyles would yield great benefit in reducing the burden of sexual dysfunction, calling for educative strategies to implement it. Specific trial effect sizes are not given in the abstract.

Full APA reference

Maiorino, M. I., Bellastella, G., & Esposito, K. (2015). Lifestyle modifications and erectile dysfunction: What can be expected? Asian Journal of Andrology, 17(1), 5-10. https://doi.org/10.4103/1008-682X.137687

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the January to February 2015 issue, volume 17 issue 1, pages 5-10, PMID 25248655, PMCID PMC4291878, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-475
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Maiorino, M. I., Bellastella, G., & Esposito, K.
Year
2015
Title
Lifestyle modifications and erectile dysfunction: What can be expected?
Description
A review that gives lifestyle counselling a clear physiological rationale in a domain where it is often skipped in favour of prescribing. The authors note that erectile dysfunction is a common disorder whose prevalence is increasing worldwide, and list its modifiable risk factors as smoking, lack of physical activity, poor diet, overweight or obesity, metabolic syndrome and excessive alcohol consumption. Their mechanistic argument is that all of these metabolic conditions are strongly associated with a pro-inflammatory state that produces endothelial dysfunction by decreasing the availability of nitric oxide, the driving force of blood genital flow. Lifestyle and nutrition are recognised as central factors influencing vascular nitric oxide production, testosterone levels and erectile function, and habits that decrease low grade clinical inflammation may therefore have a role in improving erectile function. They report that in clinical trials lifestyle modifications were effective in ameliorating erectile dysfunction or restoring absent erectile dysfunction in people with obesity or metabolic syndrome, and conclude that promoting healthful lifestyles would yield great benefit in reducing the burden of sexual dysfunction, calling for educative strategies to implement it. Specific trial effect sizes are not given in the abstract.
Publication or publisher
Asian Journal of Andrology, 17(1), 5-10
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/25248655/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.4103/1008-682X.137687
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published in the January to February 2015 issue, volume 17 issue 1, pages 5-10, PMID 25248655, PMCID PMC4291878, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-478
Full APA reference
Maiorino, M. I., Bellastella, G., & Esposito, K. (2015). Lifestyle modifications and erectile dysfunction: What can be expected? Asian Journal of Andrology, 17(1), 5-10. https://doi.org/10.4103/1008-682X.137687
REF-476 Paper, guideline or statement

Environment, lifestyle and infertility: An inter-generational issue

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

An early statement of an argument that has since become central to life course public health, namely that lifestyle exposure does not stop with the person who is exposed. The authors identify the effects of adult lifestyle, primarily smoking and diet in women and sedentary habits generally, as important factors affecting the fertility of both men and women, and state that adult lifestyle can also affect the fertility of their children. The review summarises the effects of season, modern lifestyles and environmental chemicals, and discusses the implications for future generations. Its value in this collection is conceptual rather than quantitative: it treats lifestyle and environmental exposure together and places the consequences across generations rather than within one, which is the framing that later work on early life determinants and intergenerational risk builds on. No numbers, effect sizes or sample sizes are reported in the abstract, and the evidence base is now more than two decades old, so cite it for the framing.

Full APA reference

Sharpe, R. M., & Franks, S. (2002). Environment, lifestyle and infertility: An inter-generational issue. Nature Cell Biology, 4(Suppl.), s33-s40. https://doi.org/10.1038/ncb-nm-fertilityS33

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Sharpe RM and Franks S, Nature Cell Biology, October 2002, volume 4 Supplement, pages s33-40, English language, PMID 12479613. Publication types Journal Article and Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-476
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sharpe, R. M., & Franks, S.
Year
2002
Title
Environment, lifestyle and infertility: An inter-generational issue
Description
An early statement of an argument that has since become central to life course public health, namely that lifestyle exposure does not stop with the person who is exposed. The authors identify the effects of adult lifestyle, primarily smoking and diet in women and sedentary habits generally, as important factors affecting the fertility of both men and women, and state that adult lifestyle can also affect the fertility of their children. The review summarises the effects of season, modern lifestyles and environmental chemicals, and discusses the implications for future generations. Its value in this collection is conceptual rather than quantitative: it treats lifestyle and environmental exposure together and places the consequences across generations rather than within one, which is the framing that later work on early life determinants and intergenerational risk builds on. No numbers, effect sizes or sample sizes are reported in the abstract, and the evidence base is now more than two decades old, so cite it for the framing.
Publication or publisher
Nature Cell Biology, 4(Suppl.), s33-s40
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Climate, heat and environmental health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/12479613/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/ncb-nm-fertilityS33
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record and the NCBI E-utilities summary on 17 September 2026, which confirm Sharpe RM and Franks S, Nature Cell Biology, October 2002, volume 4 Supplement, pages s33-40, English language, PMID 12479613. Publication types Journal Article and Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-463
Full APA reference
Sharpe, R. M., & Franks, S. (2002). Environment, lifestyle and infertility: An inter-generational issue. Nature Cell Biology, 4(Suppl.), s33-s40. https://doi.org/10.1038/ncb-nm-fertilityS33
REF-477 Paper, guideline or statement

Are we doing enough? Lifestyle interventions for enhancing spine health

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

A surgical journal asking whether its own field over-reaches, which makes it an unusually candid citation for the lifestyle case. The authors describe spine related health problems as a growing global concern driven by ageing populations, sedentary lifestyles and obesity rates, particularly in Western industrialised nations. They accept that spine surgery remains a crucial intervention for severe cases, but argue that lifestyle modification including anti-inflammatory diets, smoking cessation and physical activity offers significant potential both to prevent spinal conditions and to improve surgical outcomes. The mechanism they propose is inflammatory: inflammation and pro-inflammatory cytokines are implicated in degenerative spinal disease, and addressing them through diet and exercise could reduce the need for surgical intervention, while smoking cessation and perioperative nutritional optimisation have shown promise in enhancing post-surgical recovery. Most usefully, they name the obstacles directly as patient adherence challenges and systemic biases toward surgical solutions, and advocate a balanced patient-centred approach combining lifestyle intervention with surgical care. No effect estimates are reported in the abstract.

Full APA reference

El Choueiri, J., Pellicanò, F., Laurelli, F., & Caimi, E. (2025). Are we doing enough? Lifestyle interventions for enhancing spine health. Journal of Clinical Neuroscience, 133, Article 111023. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jocn.2024.111023

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published March 2025, epub 31 December 2024, volume 133, article 111023, PMID 39742776. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-477
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
El Choueiri, J., Pellicanò, F., Laurelli, F., & Caimi, E.
Year
2025
Title
Are we doing enough? Lifestyle interventions for enhancing spine health
Description
A surgical journal asking whether its own field over-reaches, which makes it an unusually candid citation for the lifestyle case. The authors describe spine related health problems as a growing global concern driven by ageing populations, sedentary lifestyles and obesity rates, particularly in Western industrialised nations. They accept that spine surgery remains a crucial intervention for severe cases, but argue that lifestyle modification including anti-inflammatory diets, smoking cessation and physical activity offers significant potential both to prevent spinal conditions and to improve surgical outcomes. The mechanism they propose is inflammatory: inflammation and pro-inflammatory cytokines are implicated in degenerative spinal disease, and addressing them through diet and exercise could reduce the need for surgical intervention, while smoking cessation and perioperative nutritional optimisation have shown promise in enhancing post-surgical recovery. Most usefully, they name the obstacles directly as patient adherence challenges and systemic biases toward surgical solutions, and advocate a balanced patient-centred approach combining lifestyle intervention with surgical care. No effect estimates are reported in the abstract.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Clinical Neuroscience, 133, Article 111023
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39742776/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jocn.2024.111023
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published March 2025, epub 31 December 2024, volume 133, article 111023, PMID 39742776. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-458
Full APA reference
El Choueiri, J., Pellicanò, F., Laurelli, F., & Caimi, E. (2025). Are we doing enough? Lifestyle interventions for enhancing spine health. Journal of Clinical Neuroscience, 133, Article 111023. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jocn.2024.111023
REF-478 Paper, guideline or statement

Metabolic syndrome severity and lifestyle factors among adolescents

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A paediatric review that treats metabolic syndrome as a graded severity marker rather than a yes or no diagnosis, which is the more useful framing for prevention. The authors situate it in the continued global rise of paediatric obesity and the concern about related sequelae, describing metabolic syndrome as a marker of risk consisting of a cluster of cardiovascular risk factors associated with future cardiovascular disease and type 2 diabetes, with visceral adipocyte dysfunction from excess fat content at its core. In children and adolescents they link it to unhealthy lifestyle practices including sedentary lifestyles and excess calorie consumption. Their conclusion is that the optimal means of addressing it is targeting a decrease in adiposity through lifestyle modification, and that a decrease in metabolic syndrome follows increases in physical activity and improvements in the quality and content of food intake. They close on the harder problem, that effort remains needed in increasing motivation to make these changes and maintaining adherence in order to avoid long term sequelae. A narrative review without pooled estimates.

Full APA reference

Wang, L. X., Gurka, M. J., & DeBoer, M. D. (2018). Metabolic syndrome severity and lifestyle factors among adolescents. Minerva Pediatrica, 70(5), 467-475. https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4946.18.05290-8

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2018, epub 2 July 2018, volume 70 issue 5, pages 467-475, PMID 29968453, PMCID PMC6590909, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-478
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, L. X., Gurka, M. J., & DeBoer, M. D.
Year
2018
Title
Metabolic syndrome severity and lifestyle factors among adolescents
Description
A paediatric review that treats metabolic syndrome as a graded severity marker rather than a yes or no diagnosis, which is the more useful framing for prevention. The authors situate it in the continued global rise of paediatric obesity and the concern about related sequelae, describing metabolic syndrome as a marker of risk consisting of a cluster of cardiovascular risk factors associated with future cardiovascular disease and type 2 diabetes, with visceral adipocyte dysfunction from excess fat content at its core. In children and adolescents they link it to unhealthy lifestyle practices including sedentary lifestyles and excess calorie consumption. Their conclusion is that the optimal means of addressing it is targeting a decrease in adiposity through lifestyle modification, and that a decrease in metabolic syndrome follows increases in physical activity and improvements in the quality and content of food intake. They close on the harder problem, that effort remains needed in increasing motivation to make these changes and maintaining adherence in order to avoid long term sequelae. A narrative review without pooled estimates.
Publication or publisher
Minerva Pediatrica, 70(5), 467-475
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/29968453/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4946.18.05290-8
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2018, epub 2 July 2018, volume 70 issue 5, pages 467-475, PMID 29968453, PMCID PMC6590909, free full text available. Publication type Review. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-459; REF-488; REF-489
Full APA reference
Wang, L. X., Gurka, M. J., & DeBoer, M. D. (2018). Metabolic syndrome severity and lifestyle factors among adolescents. Minerva Pediatrica, 70(5), 467-475. https://doi.org/10.23736/S0026-4946.18.05290-8
REF-479 Paper, guideline or statement

Westernization of lifestyle and atherosclerosis in the Japanese: Lessons from the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study

  • Report or review
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A 50 year migration study that comes as close as observational research gets to separating genetic predisposition from lifestyle, and one of the strongest natural experiments in this collection. Japanese Americans, comprising first generation migrants from Japan and their later generation offspring, share genetic predisposition with native Japanese but their lifestyles were westernised rapidly and extensively. The Hawaii, Los Angeles and Hiroshima Study surveyed atherosclerosis in Japanese Americans living in Hawaii and Los Angeles alongside native Japanese living in Hiroshima for 50 years from 1970. In the 1990s the westernised lifestyle induced hyperlipidaemia among Japanese Americans, and on carotid artery intima-media wall thickness atherosclerosis was apparently more advanced in Japanese Americans than in native Japanese, with the advancement corresponding to the degree of westernisation across both generations. The convergence is the interesting part: by the 2010s serum total cholesterol and low density lipoprotein cholesterol in native Japanese were significantly higher than in Japanese Americans, and the difference in carotid intima-media thickness progression between the two groups had narrowed. The authors conclude that maintaining a healthy Japanese lifestyle from childhood may suppress future worsening of atherosclerosis risk factors such as obesity and diabetes. Read as evidence that population risk tracks the diffusion of a dietary and activity pattern rather than ancestry.

Full APA reference

Yoneda, M., Kubota, M., Watanabe, H., & Egusa, G. (2021). Westernization of lifestyle and atherosclerosis in the Japanese: Lessons from the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study. Journal of Atherosclerosis and Thrombosis, 28(3), 214-222. https://doi.org/10.5551/jat.RV17046

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 March 2021, epub 25 November 2020, volume 28 issue 3, pages 214-222, PMID 33239481, PMCID PMC8048945, free full text available. Publication type Review, reporting a 50 year cohort survey. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-479
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Yoneda, M., Kubota, M., Watanabe, H., & Egusa, G.
Year
2021
Title
Westernization of lifestyle and atherosclerosis in the Japanese: Lessons from the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study
Description
A 50 year migration study that comes as close as observational research gets to separating genetic predisposition from lifestyle, and one of the strongest natural experiments in this collection. Japanese Americans, comprising first generation migrants from Japan and their later generation offspring, share genetic predisposition with native Japanese but their lifestyles were westernised rapidly and extensively. The Hawaii, Los Angeles and Hiroshima Study surveyed atherosclerosis in Japanese Americans living in Hawaii and Los Angeles alongside native Japanese living in Hiroshima for 50 years from 1970. In the 1990s the westernised lifestyle induced hyperlipidaemia among Japanese Americans, and on carotid artery intima-media wall thickness atherosclerosis was apparently more advanced in Japanese Americans than in native Japanese, with the advancement corresponding to the degree of westernisation across both generations. The convergence is the interesting part: by the 2010s serum total cholesterol and low density lipoprotein cholesterol in native Japanese were significantly higher than in Japanese Americans, and the difference in carotid intima-media thickness progression between the two groups had narrowed. The authors conclude that maintaining a healthy Japanese lifestyle from childhood may suppress future worsening of atherosclerosis risk factors such as obesity and diabetes. Read as evidence that population risk tracks the diffusion of a dietary and activity pattern rather than ancestry.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Atherosclerosis and Thrombosis, 28(3), 214-222
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Japan and United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33239481/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.5551/jat.RV17046
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published 1 March 2021, epub 25 November 2020, volume 28 issue 3, pages 214-222, PMID 33239481, PMCID PMC8048945, free full text available. Publication type Review, reporting a 50 year cohort survey. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-361; REF-469; REF-487; REF-490; REF-491
Full APA reference
Yoneda, M., Kubota, M., Watanabe, H., & Egusa, G. (2021). Westernization of lifestyle and atherosclerosis in the Japanese: Lessons from the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study. Journal of Atherosclerosis and Thrombosis, 28(3), 214-222. https://doi.org/10.5551/jat.RV17046
REF-480 Paper, guideline or statement

The global human gut microbiome: Genes, lifestyles, and diet

  • Report or review
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

A review that undercuts a common assumption in gut health advice, namely that there is one healthy microbiome to aim at. The authors note that gut microbiome studies consistently describe differences between human populations, and work through how host genetics, ethnicity, lifestyle and geographic location help explain that variation. Studies from contrasting environmental scenarios identify diet and lifestyle as the most influential factors. Their most useful evidence comes from human migration and displacement, which demonstrates that the microbiome adapts to newly adopted lifestyles and contributes to the profound biological and health consequences attributed to migration. From this they argue strongly against a universal scale for healthy or dysbiotic gut microbiomes, call for additional microbiome population surveys particularly from less industrialised nations, and conclude that accounting for these differences will be critical to designing strategies for diagnosing and restoring dysbiosis in different human populations. A direct argument that a biological marker of lifestyle is population and place specific rather than universal, which matters for how such measures get used clinically. No numbers or effect sizes are reported in the abstract.

Full APA reference

Parizadeh, M., & Arrieta, M.-C. (2023). The global human gut microbiome: Genes, lifestyles, and diet. Trends in Molecular Medicine, 29(10), 789-801. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molmed.2023.07.002

Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2023, epub 27 July 2023, volume 29 issue 10, pages 789-801, PMID 37516570. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.

All fields
ID
REF-480
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Parizadeh, M., & Arrieta, M.-C.
Year
2023
Title
The global human gut microbiome: Genes, lifestyles, and diet
Description
A review that undercuts a common assumption in gut health advice, namely that there is one healthy microbiome to aim at. The authors note that gut microbiome studies consistently describe differences between human populations, and work through how host genetics, ethnicity, lifestyle and geographic location help explain that variation. Studies from contrasting environmental scenarios identify diet and lifestyle as the most influential factors. Their most useful evidence comes from human migration and displacement, which demonstrates that the microbiome adapts to newly adopted lifestyles and contributes to the profound biological and health consequences attributed to migration. From this they argue strongly against a universal scale for healthy or dysbiotic gut microbiomes, call for additional microbiome population surveys particularly from less industrialised nations, and conclude that accounting for these differences will be critical to designing strategies for diagnosing and restoring dysbiosis in different human populations. A direct argument that a biological marker of lifestyle is population and place specific rather than universal, which matters for how such measures get used clinically. No numbers or effect sizes are reported in the abstract.
Publication or publisher
Trends in Molecular Medicine, 29(10), 789-801
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/37516570/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molmed.2023.07.002
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified against the PubMed record on 17 September 2026. Published October 2023, epub 27 July 2023, volume 29 issue 10, pages 789-801, PMID 37516570. Publication type Review. No PMCID listed. No retraction, correction or erratum recorded.
Related items
REF-460
Full APA reference
Parizadeh, M., & Arrieta, M.-C. (2023). The global human gut microbiome: Genes, lifestyles, and diet. Trends in Molecular Medicine, 29(10), 789-801. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molmed.2023.07.002
REF-481 Paper, guideline or statement

Factors that influence participation in physical activity for people with bipolar disorder: A synthesis of qualitative evidence

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

The clearest account yet of why people living with bipolar disorder often cannot take up the exercise that is recommended to them, and it points squarely at shame, cost and services rather than motivation. This Cochrane qualitative evidence synthesis searched MEDLINE, PsycINFO and eight other databases to March 2021 with no language limits, and included 12 studies covering 592 people, 422 of whom answered an online survey and 170 who took part in qualitative research. Almost all the studies came from high income countries, only one from a middle income country, and there were almost no views from family carers, and none at all from service providers about how they support this part of care. The barriers people described were rarely about willpower. Shame and stigma about body appearance and about carrying a psychiatric diagnosis came up repeatedly. Some people felt their sporting skills had been lost when they left school, while those who kept exercising through the move into adulthood were more likely to still have it in their routine. Physical health limits, bipolar medication, carrying extra weight, smoking, alcohol use, poor diet and poor sleep all got in the way, and so did affordability, transport, accessibility and the weather. The lack of any real opportunity to exercise in inpatient mental health settings was named as a problem. What helped was being psychologically stable and ready, being active outdoors and in nature, and finding a rhythm and routine that supported mood management, with walking the most common workable choice. The review also warns that over exercising or under exercising can backfire and accelerate depressive or manic mood. Very few people had ever been told by a clinician that physical activity would help. The authors rate confidence in several findings down from high to moderate or low because of thin data and narrow country coverage, and they call for better education and training of health professionals so physical and mental wellbeing are handled together.

Full APA reference

McCartan, C. J., Yap, J., Best, P., Breedvelt, J., Breslin, G., Firth, J., Tully, M. A., Webb, P., White, C., Gilbody, S., Churchill, R., & Davidson, G. (2024). Factors that influence participation in physical activity for people with bipolar disorder: A synthesis of qualitative evidence. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 6(6), CD013557. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD013557.pub2

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-481
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
McCartan, C. J., Yap, J., Best, P., Breedvelt, J., Breslin, G., Firth, J., Tully, M. A., Webb, P., White, C., Gilbody, S., Churchill, R., & Davidson, G.
Year
2024
Title
Factors that influence participation in physical activity for people with bipolar disorder: A synthesis of qualitative evidence
Description
The clearest account yet of why people living with bipolar disorder often cannot take up the exercise that is recommended to them, and it points squarely at shame, cost and services rather than motivation. This Cochrane qualitative evidence synthesis searched MEDLINE, PsycINFO and eight other databases to March 2021 with no language limits, and included 12 studies covering 592 people, 422 of whom answered an online survey and 170 who took part in qualitative research. Almost all the studies came from high income countries, only one from a middle income country, and there were almost no views from family carers, and none at all from service providers about how they support this part of care. The barriers people described were rarely about willpower. Shame and stigma about body appearance and about carrying a psychiatric diagnosis came up repeatedly. Some people felt their sporting skills had been lost when they left school, while those who kept exercising through the move into adulthood were more likely to still have it in their routine. Physical health limits, bipolar medication, carrying extra weight, smoking, alcohol use, poor diet and poor sleep all got in the way, and so did affordability, transport, accessibility and the weather. The lack of any real opportunity to exercise in inpatient mental health settings was named as a problem. What helped was being psychologically stable and ready, being active outdoors and in nature, and finding a rhythm and routine that supported mood management, with walking the most common workable choice. The review also warns that over exercising or under exercising can backfire and accelerate depressive or manic mood. Very few people had ever been told by a clinician that physical activity would help. The authors rate confidence in several findings down from high to moderate or low because of thin data and narrow country coverage, and they call for better education and training of health professionals so physical and mental wellbeing are handled together.
Publication or publisher
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 6(6), CD013557
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38837220/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD013557.pub2
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-448; REF-450; REF-041; REF-070; REF-509
Full APA reference
McCartan, C. J., Yap, J., Best, P., Breedvelt, J., Breslin, G., Firth, J., Tully, M. A., Webb, P., White, C., Gilbody, S., Churchill, R., & Davidson, G. (2024). Factors that influence participation in physical activity for people with bipolar disorder: A synthesis of qualitative evidence. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews, 6(6), CD013557. https://doi.org/10.1002/14651858.CD013557.pub2
REF-482 Paper, guideline or statement

Association of healthy lifestyle factors and genetic liability with bipolar disorder: Findings from the UK Biobank

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Useful evidence that genetic risk for bipolar disorder does not settle the question, because lifestyle adds risk on top of it and appears to interact with it. The study followed 365,517 UK Biobank participants for 12.9 years, during which 529 people developed bipolar disorder. A lifestyle score built from smoking, physical activity, diet, alcohol consumption, sedentary behaviour, sleep duration and social contact was grouped as favourable, intermediate or unfavourable, and a bipolar polygenic risk score was split into thirds. People with unfavourable lifestyles had 3.28 times the hazard of developing bipolar disorder compared with those with favourable lifestyles, a figure close to the 3.20 seen for high versus low polygenic risk. Those carrying both high genetic risk and an unfavourable lifestyle had 6.31 times the hazard of those with low genetic risk and a favourable lifestyle. The authors also report a relative excess risk due to interaction of 1.74 and an attributable proportion due to interaction of 0.37, meaning about a third of the risk in that combined group came from the interaction itself rather than from genes or lifestyle alone. The practical reading is that lifestyle carries roughly comparable weight to measured genetic liability in this cohort, and that people with the highest inherited risk may have the most to gain from lifestyle support. As an observational cohort in a volunteer sample that skews healthier and whiter than the UK population, it cannot prove that changing lifestyle changes onset.

Full APA reference

Li, G., He, Q., Sun, M., Ma, Z., Zhao, H., Wang, Y., Feng, Z., Li, T., Chu, J., Hu, W., Chen, X., Han, Q., Sun, N., Liu, X., Sun, H., & Shen, Y. (2024). Association of healthy lifestyle factors and genetic liability with bipolar disorder: Findings from the UK Biobank. Journal of Affective Disorders, 364, 279-285. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2024.08.011

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-482
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Li, G., He, Q., Sun, M., Ma, Z., Zhao, H., Wang, Y., Feng, Z., Li, T., Chu, J., Hu, W., Chen, X., Han, Q., Sun, N., Liu, X., Sun, H., & Shen, Y.
Year
2024
Title
Association of healthy lifestyle factors and genetic liability with bipolar disorder: Findings from the UK Biobank
Description
Useful evidence that genetic risk for bipolar disorder does not settle the question, because lifestyle adds risk on top of it and appears to interact with it. The study followed 365,517 UK Biobank participants for 12.9 years, during which 529 people developed bipolar disorder. A lifestyle score built from smoking, physical activity, diet, alcohol consumption, sedentary behaviour, sleep duration and social contact was grouped as favourable, intermediate or unfavourable, and a bipolar polygenic risk score was split into thirds. People with unfavourable lifestyles had 3.28 times the hazard of developing bipolar disorder compared with those with favourable lifestyles, a figure close to the 3.20 seen for high versus low polygenic risk. Those carrying both high genetic risk and an unfavourable lifestyle had 6.31 times the hazard of those with low genetic risk and a favourable lifestyle. The authors also report a relative excess risk due to interaction of 1.74 and an attributable proportion due to interaction of 0.37, meaning about a third of the risk in that combined group came from the interaction itself rather than from genes or lifestyle alone. The practical reading is that lifestyle carries roughly comparable weight to measured genetic liability in this cohort, and that people with the highest inherited risk may have the most to gain from lifestyle support. As an observational cohort in a volunteer sample that skews healthier and whiter than the UK population, it cannot prove that changing lifestyle changes onset.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Affective Disorders, 364, 279-285
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39137837/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2024.08.011
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-023; REF-448; REF-450; REF-481
Full APA reference
Li, G., He, Q., Sun, M., Ma, Z., Zhao, H., Wang, Y., Feng, Z., Li, T., Chu, J., Hu, W., Chen, X., Han, Q., Sun, N., Liu, X., Sun, H., & Shen, Y. (2024). Association of healthy lifestyle factors and genetic liability with bipolar disorder: Findings from the UK Biobank. Journal of Affective Disorders, 364, 279-285. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2024.08.011
REF-483 Paper, guideline or statement

Older men with bipolar disorder diagnosed in early and later life: Physical health morbidity and general hospital service use

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

An Australian cohort study showing that the physical health cost of bipolar disorder persists into old age and shows up in general hospitals, not just mental health services. Drawing on a community representative sample of 37,183 men aged 65 to 85 years, the researchers identified 250 older men with a recorded bipolar diagnosis, 75 of them diagnosed at age 60 or later. Diabetes, stroke and diseases of the respiratory and digestive systems were all more common in men with bipolar disorder than in men without it. Followed for up to 17.7 years, men diagnosed early in life had a 33 per cent higher hazard of contact with general hospital services and men diagnosed later in life a 27 per cent higher hazard, after accounting for age and existing medical conditions. Men with early onset bipolar disorder had the highest total number of hospital contacts over follow up, though early and late onset groups did not differ in contacts driven by mania or depression episodes, and their medical reasons for presenting overlapped without being identical. The age at diagnosis turned out to matter less than the diagnosis itself. For lifestyle informed practice the message is that cardiometabolic and respiratory risk in this group needs active management decades before old age, and that general hospital contact is a signal of unmet physical health need rather than a separate problem from the psychiatric one.

Full APA reference

Almeida, O. P., Hankey, G. J., Yeap, B. B., Golledge, J., & Flicker, L. (2018). Older men with bipolar disorder diagnosed in early and later life: Physical health morbidity and general hospital service use. Journal of Affective Disorders, 241, 269-274. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2018.08.035

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-483
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Almeida, O. P., Hankey, G. J., Yeap, B. B., Golledge, J., & Flicker, L.
Year
2018
Title
Older men with bipolar disorder diagnosed in early and later life: Physical health morbidity and general hospital service use
Description
An Australian cohort study showing that the physical health cost of bipolar disorder persists into old age and shows up in general hospitals, not just mental health services. Drawing on a community representative sample of 37,183 men aged 65 to 85 years, the researchers identified 250 older men with a recorded bipolar diagnosis, 75 of them diagnosed at age 60 or later. Diabetes, stroke and diseases of the respiratory and digestive systems were all more common in men with bipolar disorder than in men without it. Followed for up to 17.7 years, men diagnosed early in life had a 33 per cent higher hazard of contact with general hospital services and men diagnosed later in life a 27 per cent higher hazard, after accounting for age and existing medical conditions. Men with early onset bipolar disorder had the highest total number of hospital contacts over follow up, though early and late onset groups did not differ in contacts driven by mania or depression episodes, and their medical reasons for presenting overlapped without being identical. The age at diagnosis turned out to matter less than the diagnosis itself. For lifestyle informed practice the message is that cardiometabolic and respiratory risk in this group needs active management decades before old age, and that general hospital contact is a signal of unmet physical health need rather than a separate problem from the psychiatric one.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Affective Disorders, 241, 269-274
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/30138812/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2018.08.035
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-448; REF-070; REF-481
Full APA reference
Almeida, O. P., Hankey, G. J., Yeap, B. B., Golledge, J., & Flicker, L. (2018). Older men with bipolar disorder diagnosed in early and later life: Physical health morbidity and general hospital service use. Journal of Affective Disorders, 241, 269-274. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jad.2018.08.035
REF-484 Paper, guideline or statement

Health benefits of leisure-time physical activity by socioeconomic status, lifestyle risk, and mental health: A multicohort study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Strong evidence that physical activity gives the biggest health return to the people who are usually the hardest to reach, which turns exercise promotion into an equity strategy rather than a lifestyle extra. The analysis pooled eight IPD-Work consortium studies covering 107,959 initially healthy European adults with UK Biobank data on 428,899 participants who had at least one physical activity measure. Baseline leisure-time physical activity from 1986 to 2010 was grouped as low, intermediate, or meeting the WHO recommendation of at least 2.5 hours of moderate or 1.25 hours of vigorous activity per week, and the authors counted years lived free of coronary heart disease, stroke, type 2 diabetes, cancer, asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease between ages 40 and 75. Across 1.6 million person-years in IPD-Work and 4.8 million in UK Biobank, 21,231 and 101,319 participants respectively developed a non-communicable disease. Meeting the recommended level bought between 1.1 and 2.0 extra disease-free years overall. The gradient inside that average is the finding that matters. Among men, gains were 2.4 years for current smokers against 0.7 for never smokers, 1.7 years for those of low socioeconomic status against 0.9 for high, 1.4 years for those with low education against 0.8 for high, and 1.6 years for men with depressive symptoms against 1.0 for those without. Women showed the same pattern for smoking, socioeconomic status and depressive symptoms, plus 1.4 years for heavy drinkers against 0.9 for moderate drinkers. No such difference appeared by body mass index or by history of depression. The authors conclude that broad population physical activity initiatives could narrow health disparities, and that building activity into programmes aimed at social disadvantage, unhealthy behaviour and depression could make those programmes work better.

Full APA reference

Nyberg, S. T., Frank, P., Pentti, J., Alfredsson, L., Ervasti, J., Goldberg, M., Knutsson, A., Koskinen, A., Lallukka, T., Nordin, M., Rahkonen, O., Strandberg, T., Suominen, S., Vaananen, A., Vahtera, J., Virtanen, M., Westerlund, H., Zins, M., Stenholm, S., Sabia, S., Singh-Manoux, A., Hamer, M., & Kivimaki, M. (2025). Health benefits of leisure-time physical activity by socioeconomic status, lifestyle risk, and mental health: A multicohort study. The Lancet Public Health, 10(2), e124-e135. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(24)00300-1

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-484
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Nyberg, S. T., Frank, P., Pentti, J., Alfredsson, L., Ervasti, J., Goldberg, M., Knutsson, A., Koskinen, A., Lallukka, T., Nordin, M., Rahkonen, O., Strandberg, T., Suominen, S., Vaananen, A., Vahtera, J., Virtanen, M., Westerlund, H., Zins, M., Stenholm, S., Sabia, S., Singh-Manoux, A., Hamer, M., & Kivimaki, M.
Year
2025
Title
Health benefits of leisure-time physical activity by socioeconomic status, lifestyle risk, and mental health: A multicohort study
Description
Strong evidence that physical activity gives the biggest health return to the people who are usually the hardest to reach, which turns exercise promotion into an equity strategy rather than a lifestyle extra. The analysis pooled eight IPD-Work consortium studies covering 107,959 initially healthy European adults with UK Biobank data on 428,899 participants who had at least one physical activity measure. Baseline leisure-time physical activity from 1986 to 2010 was grouped as low, intermediate, or meeting the WHO recommendation of at least 2.5 hours of moderate or 1.25 hours of vigorous activity per week, and the authors counted years lived free of coronary heart disease, stroke, type 2 diabetes, cancer, asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease between ages 40 and 75. Across 1.6 million person-years in IPD-Work and 4.8 million in UK Biobank, 21,231 and 101,319 participants respectively developed a non-communicable disease. Meeting the recommended level bought between 1.1 and 2.0 extra disease-free years overall. The gradient inside that average is the finding that matters. Among men, gains were 2.4 years for current smokers against 0.7 for never smokers, 1.7 years for those of low socioeconomic status against 0.9 for high, 1.4 years for those with low education against 0.8 for high, and 1.6 years for men with depressive symptoms against 1.0 for those without. Women showed the same pattern for smoking, socioeconomic status and depressive symptoms, plus 1.4 years for heavy drinkers against 0.9 for moderate drinkers. No such difference appeared by body mass index or by history of depression. The authors conclude that broad population physical activity initiatives could narrow health disparities, and that building activity into programmes aimed at social disadvantage, unhealthy behaviour and depression could make those programmes work better.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Public Health, 10(2), e124-e135
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39909687/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(24)00300-1
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-223; REF-371; REF-486; REF-506
Full APA reference
Nyberg, S. T., Frank, P., Pentti, J., Alfredsson, L., Ervasti, J., Goldberg, M., Knutsson, A., Koskinen, A., Lallukka, T., Nordin, M., Rahkonen, O., Strandberg, T., Suominen, S., Vaananen, A., Vahtera, J., Virtanen, M., Westerlund, H., Zins, M., Stenholm, S., Sabia, S., Singh-Manoux, A., Hamer, M., & Kivimaki, M. (2025). Health benefits of leisure-time physical activity by socioeconomic status, lifestyle risk, and mental health: A multicohort study. The Lancet Public Health, 10(2), e124-e135. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(24)00300-1
REF-485 Paper, guideline or statement

Perspectives of stakeholders in Danish voluntary sports clubs on engaging in potential social prescribing programmes: A qualitative case study

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

A rare look at social prescribing from the receiving end, asking the volunteers who would actually have to absorb referred patients whether they can and want to do it. The study used a collective case design across five Danish voluntary sports clubs, combining roughly 55 hours of ethnographic observation of activities for adults aged 18 and over and for participants aged 65 and over, with semi-structured face-to-face focus groups held in each club two to six months later. Eighteen club stakeholders took part, including members, instructors and board members. Stakeholders said they would welcome referred patients as ordinary community members, but only on the same footing as everyone else, meaning people who join out of personal interest and take responsibility for their own participation rather than arriving as patients to be managed. For referral to work, clubs said they need to know what a person can actually do and which activity would suit them. The sharper concern was about responsibility being quietly transferred onto unpaid instructors, and whether specific qualifications would now be expected of them, which the authors read as a clear need for support to build confidence in the sector. The conclusion is that social prescribing has to match people to activities by motivation and capacity while respecting the resources and culture of community providers, and that a community level approach to those barriers may be essential for programmes involving voluntary clubs. It is a corrective to social prescribing designs that treat community assets as unlimited free capacity.

Full APA reference

Rasmussen, L. G., Nielsen, R. O., Brok, L. H., Hawkins, J., Kallestrup, P., & Ryom, K. (2026). Perspectives of stakeholders in Danish voluntary sports clubs on engaging in potential social prescribing programmes: A qualitative case study. BMC Primary Care, 27(1), Article 175. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-026-03282-w

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-485
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Rasmussen, L. G., Nielsen, R. O., Brok, L. H., Hawkins, J., Kallestrup, P., & Ryom, K.
Year
2026
Title
Perspectives of stakeholders in Danish voluntary sports clubs on engaging in potential social prescribing programmes: A qualitative case study
Description
A rare look at social prescribing from the receiving end, asking the volunteers who would actually have to absorb referred patients whether they can and want to do it. The study used a collective case design across five Danish voluntary sports clubs, combining roughly 55 hours of ethnographic observation of activities for adults aged 18 and over and for participants aged 65 and over, with semi-structured face-to-face focus groups held in each club two to six months later. Eighteen club stakeholders took part, including members, instructors and board members. Stakeholders said they would welcome referred patients as ordinary community members, but only on the same footing as everyone else, meaning people who join out of personal interest and take responsibility for their own participation rather than arriving as patients to be managed. For referral to work, clubs said they need to know what a person can actually do and which activity would suit them. The sharper concern was about responsibility being quietly transferred onto unpaid instructors, and whether specific qualifications would now be expected of them, which the authors read as a clear need for support to build confidence in the sector. The conclusion is that social prescribing has to match people to activities by motivation and capacity while respecting the resources and culture of community providers, and that a community level approach to those barriers may be essential for programmes involving voluntary clubs. It is a corrective to social prescribing designs that treat community assets as unlimited free capacity.
Publication or publisher
BMC Primary Care, 27(1), Article 175
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Denmark
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41888715/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-026-03282-w
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-069; REF-193
Full APA reference
Rasmussen, L. G., Nielsen, R. O., Brok, L. H., Hawkins, J., Kallestrup, P., & Ryom, K. (2026). Perspectives of stakeholders in Danish voluntary sports clubs on engaging in potential social prescribing programmes: A qualitative case study. BMC Primary Care, 27(1), Article 175. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12875-026-03282-w
REF-486 Paper, guideline or statement

Socioeconomic status and the 25 x 25 risk factors as determinants of premature mortality: A multicohort study and meta-analysis of 1.7 million men and women

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

The study that made the case for treating social position as a risk factor in its own right, and it is still the most quotable number for that argument. In 2011 WHO member states signed up to the 25 x 25 initiative, a plan to cut non-communicable disease mortality by 25 per cent by 2025, but that plan left out socioeconomic factors entirely. This meta-analysis pooled individual level data from 48 independent prospective cohorts across seven high income WHO member countries, a total population of 1,751,479 people, 54 per cent of them women, with occupational position as the measure of socioeconomic status. Over 26.6 million person-years and a mean 13.3 years of follow up, 310,277 participants died. Low socioeconomic status carried a 42 per cent higher mortality hazard in men and 34 per cent in women, and that association held at 26 per cent even after mutual adjustment for all six of the 25 x 25 risk factors, meaning high alcohol intake, physical inactivity, current smoking, hypertension, diabetes and obesity. The years of life lost between ages 40 and 85 put the scale in plain terms: 4.8 years for current smoking, 3.9 for diabetes, 2.4 for physical inactivity, 2.1 for low socioeconomic status, 1.6 for hypertension, 0.7 for obesity and 0.5 for high alcohol intake. Low socioeconomic status cost more life expectancy than obesity, hypertension or heavy drinking. Only smoking and physical inactivity had a larger population attributable fraction. The authors conclude that socioeconomic circumstances should be targeted directly by local and global health strategies and included in health risk surveillance, not treated as background to behaviour.

Full APA reference

Stringhini, S., Carmeli, C., Jokela, M., Avendano, M., Muennig, P., Guida, F., Ricceri, F., d’Errico, A., Barros, H., Bochud, M., Chadeau-Hyam, M., Clavel-Chapelon, F., Costa, G., Delpierre, C., Fraga, S., Goldberg, M., Giles, G. G., Krogh, V., Kelly-Irving, M., Layte, R., Lasserre, A. M., Marmot, M. G., Preisig, M., Shipley, M. J., Vollenweider, P., Zins, M., Kawachi, I., Steptoe, A., Mackenbach, J. P., Vineis, P., Kivimaki, M., & LIFEPATH Consortium. (2017). Socioeconomic status and the 25 x 25 risk factors as determinants of premature mortality: A multicohort study and meta-analysis of 1.7 million men and women. The Lancet, 389(10075), 1229-1237. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(16)32380-7

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-486
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Stringhini, S., Carmeli, C., Jokela, M., Avendano, M., Muennig, P., Guida, F., Ricceri, F., d’Errico, A., Barros, H., Bochud, M., Chadeau-Hyam, M., Clavel-Chapelon, F., Costa, G., Delpierre, C., Fraga, S., Goldberg, M., Giles, G. G., Krogh, V., Kelly-Irving, M., Layte, R., Lasserre, A. M., Marmot, M. G., Preisig, M., Shipley, M. J., Vollenweider, P., Zins, M., Kawachi, I., Steptoe, A., Mackenbach, J. P., Vineis, P., Kivimaki, M., & LIFEPATH Consortium
Year
2017
Title
Socioeconomic status and the 25 x 25 risk factors as determinants of premature mortality: A multicohort study and meta-analysis of 1.7 million men and women
Description
The study that made the case for treating social position as a risk factor in its own right, and it is still the most quotable number for that argument. In 2011 WHO member states signed up to the 25 x 25 initiative, a plan to cut non-communicable disease mortality by 25 per cent by 2025, but that plan left out socioeconomic factors entirely. This meta-analysis pooled individual level data from 48 independent prospective cohorts across seven high income WHO member countries, a total population of 1,751,479 people, 54 per cent of them women, with occupational position as the measure of socioeconomic status. Over 26.6 million person-years and a mean 13.3 years of follow up, 310,277 participants died. Low socioeconomic status carried a 42 per cent higher mortality hazard in men and 34 per cent in women, and that association held at 26 per cent even after mutual adjustment for all six of the 25 x 25 risk factors, meaning high alcohol intake, physical inactivity, current smoking, hypertension, diabetes and obesity. The years of life lost between ages 40 and 85 put the scale in plain terms: 4.8 years for current smoking, 3.9 for diabetes, 2.4 for physical inactivity, 2.1 for low socioeconomic status, 1.6 for hypertension, 0.7 for obesity and 0.5 for high alcohol intake. Low socioeconomic status cost more life expectancy than obesity, hypertension or heavy drinking. Only smoking and physical inactivity had a larger population attributable fraction. The authors conclude that socioeconomic circumstances should be targeted directly by local and global health strategies and included in health risk surveillance, not treated as background to behaviour.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 389(10075), 1229-1237
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/28159391/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(16)32380-7
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-223; REF-203; REF-484
Full APA reference
Stringhini, S., Carmeli, C., Jokela, M., Avendano, M., Muennig, P., Guida, F., Ricceri, F., d’Errico, A., Barros, H., Bochud, M., Chadeau-Hyam, M., Clavel-Chapelon, F., Costa, G., Delpierre, C., Fraga, S., Goldberg, M., Giles, G. G., Krogh, V., Kelly-Irving, M., Layte, R., Lasserre, A. M., Marmot, M. G., Preisig, M., Shipley, M. J., Vollenweider, P., Zins, M., Kawachi, I., Steptoe, A., Mackenbach, J. P., Vineis, P., Kivimaki, M., & LIFEPATH Consortium. (2017). Socioeconomic status and the 25 x 25 risk factors as determinants of premature mortality: A multicohort study and meta-analysis of 1.7 million men and women. The Lancet, 389(10075), 1229-1237. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(16)32380-7
REF-487 Paper, guideline or statement

A 50-year history of the health impacts of Westernization on the lifestyle of Japanese Americans: A focus on the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

A natural experiment that separates genes from lifestyle about as cleanly as population research ever manages, and this review is the 50-year summary of it. Medical surveys of Japanese Americans have run since 1970, following emigrants from Hiroshima in Japan to Hawaii or Los Angeles in the United States, and their children. The design compares two populations who are genetically the same but who live very differently, the native Japanese residents of Hiroshima against Japanese Americans who experienced rapid and intense Westernization of daily life. The authors compare nutrient intake, the frequency of obesity, the prevalence of metabolic syndrome and diabetes, and the progression of atherosclerosis across the two groups. Their argument is forward looking as well as historical: what happened to the health of Japanese Americans can be read as a preview of what awaits native Japanese people as Westernized lifestyles spread inside Japan itself. For a lifestyle library this is one of the strongest available demonstrations that population level differences in cardiometabolic disease are driven by how people live and eat rather than by inherited risk. It is the companion paper to the atherosclerosis focused review from the same cohort already held as REF-479, and it is written from a diabetes and metabolic angle rather than a vascular one.

Full APA reference

Yoneda, M., & Kobuke, K. (2020). A 50-year history of the health impacts of Westernization on the lifestyle of Japanese Americans: A focus on the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study. Journal of Diabetes Investigation, 11(6), 1382-1387. https://doi.org/10.1111/jdi.13278

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-487
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Yoneda, M., & Kobuke, K.
Year
2020
Title
A 50-year history of the health impacts of Westernization on the lifestyle of Japanese Americans: A focus on the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study
Description
A natural experiment that separates genes from lifestyle about as cleanly as population research ever manages, and this review is the 50-year summary of it. Medical surveys of Japanese Americans have run since 1970, following emigrants from Hiroshima in Japan to Hawaii or Los Angeles in the United States, and their children. The design compares two populations who are genetically the same but who live very differently, the native Japanese residents of Hiroshima against Japanese Americans who experienced rapid and intense Westernization of daily life. The authors compare nutrient intake, the frequency of obesity, the prevalence of metabolic syndrome and diabetes, and the progression of atherosclerosis across the two groups. Their argument is forward looking as well as historical: what happened to the health of Japanese Americans can be read as a preview of what awaits native Japanese people as Westernized lifestyles spread inside Japan itself. For a lifestyle library this is one of the strongest available demonstrations that population level differences in cardiometabolic disease are driven by how people live and eat rather than by inherited risk. It is the companion paper to the atherosclerosis focused review from the same cohort already held as REF-479, and it is written from a diabetes and metabolic angle rather than a vascular one.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Diabetes Investigation, 11(6), 1382-1387
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Japan and United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32311224/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/jdi.13278
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-479; REF-469; REF-490; REF-491; REF-492
Full APA reference
Yoneda, M., & Kobuke, K. (2020). A 50-year history of the health impacts of Westernization on the lifestyle of Japanese Americans: A focus on the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima Study. Journal of Diabetes Investigation, 11(6), 1382-1387. https://doi.org/10.1111/jdi.13278
REF-488 Paper, guideline or statement

Exploring the prevalence and components of metabolic syndrome in sub-Saharan African type 2 diabetes mellitus patients: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

The clearest figure available on how heavily metabolic syndrome sits on top of type 2 diabetes across sub-Saharan Africa, and it is high enough to reframe diabetes care there as cardiometabolic care. The authors searched PubMed, Embase, Scopus, Google Scholar, African Index Medicus and African Journal Online from inception to 31 July 2023, screened 1,421 articles under PRISMA, and pooled 30 studies using a random effects model with Joanna Briggs Institute quality appraisal. Among people with type 2 diabetes, the weighted pooled prevalence of metabolic syndrome was 63.1 per cent under the 2004 National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel criteria and 60.8 per cent under International Diabetes Federation criteria. The sex gap is large and consistent across both definitions: 73.5 per cent of women against 50.5 per cent of men under the NCEP criteria, and 71.6 per cent against 44.5 per cent under the IDF criteria. Central obesity was the single most common component, at 55.9 per cent and 61.6 per cent respectively. There was no statistical evidence of publication bias in either pooled estimate. The authors call for lifestyle modification through regular exercise and balanced diets, routine obesity screening and early intervention, alongside broader public health measures aimed at central obesity. The record is a useful counterweight in a library where most cardiometabolic evidence comes from high income settings.

Full APA reference

Musilanga, N., Nasib, H., Jackson, G., Shayo, F., Nhanga, C., Girukwigomba, S., Mwakibolwa, A., Henry, S., Kijusya, K., & Msonge, E. (2024). Exploring the prevalence and components of metabolic syndrome in sub-Saharan African type 2 diabetes mellitus patients: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Journal of Obesity, 2024, Article 1240457. https://doi.org/10.1155/2024/1240457

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-488
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Musilanga, N., Nasib, H., Jackson, G., Shayo, F., Nhanga, C., Girukwigomba, S., Mwakibolwa, A., Henry, S., Kijusya, K., & Msonge, E.
Year
2024
Title
Exploring the prevalence and components of metabolic syndrome in sub-Saharan African type 2 diabetes mellitus patients: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
The clearest figure available on how heavily metabolic syndrome sits on top of type 2 diabetes across sub-Saharan Africa, and it is high enough to reframe diabetes care there as cardiometabolic care. The authors searched PubMed, Embase, Scopus, Google Scholar, African Index Medicus and African Journal Online from inception to 31 July 2023, screened 1,421 articles under PRISMA, and pooled 30 studies using a random effects model with Joanna Briggs Institute quality appraisal. Among people with type 2 diabetes, the weighted pooled prevalence of metabolic syndrome was 63.1 per cent under the 2004 National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel criteria and 60.8 per cent under International Diabetes Federation criteria. The sex gap is large and consistent across both definitions: 73.5 per cent of women against 50.5 per cent of men under the NCEP criteria, and 71.6 per cent against 44.5 per cent under the IDF criteria. Central obesity was the single most common component, at 55.9 per cent and 61.6 per cent respectively. There was no statistical evidence of publication bias in either pooled estimate. The authors call for lifestyle modification through regular exercise and balanced diets, routine obesity screening and early intervention, alongside broader public health measures aimed at central obesity. The record is a useful counterweight in a library where most cardiometabolic evidence comes from high income settings.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Obesity, 2024, Article 1240457
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Sub-Saharan Africa
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/38410415/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1155/2024/1240457
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-489; REF-478
Full APA reference
Musilanga, N., Nasib, H., Jackson, G., Shayo, F., Nhanga, C., Girukwigomba, S., Mwakibolwa, A., Henry, S., Kijusya, K., & Msonge, E. (2024). Exploring the prevalence and components of metabolic syndrome in sub-Saharan African type 2 diabetes mellitus patients: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Journal of Obesity, 2024, Article 1240457. https://doi.org/10.1155/2024/1240457
REF-489 Paper, guideline or statement

Prevalence and determinants of metabolic syndrome among patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus in the Buea Health District, South West Region, Cameroon

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

A local Cameroonian study that puts named lifestyle and self-management factors behind the regional prevalence figures, which makes it more directly usable in practice than a pooled estimate. This hospital based cross-sectional study recruited 139 patients with type 2 diabetes by systematic sampling in the Buea Health District between February and May 2024, with a mean age of 59.5 years. Alongside sociodemographic, lifestyle and clinical data, the team measured anthropometry, fasting plasma glucose, triglycerides, high density lipoprotein cholesterol, blood pressure and glycated haemoglobin. Metabolic syndrome prevalence was 64.0 per cent under International Diabetes Federation criteria and 56.8 per cent under National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel criteria, significantly higher in women. Central obesity, hyperglycaemia and hypertension were the most common components and all were more prevalent in women. The determinants that reached significance are the practical part: being female, being older, consuming alcohol, not practising self glucose monitoring, and having poor glycaemic control all raised the likelihood of metabolic syndrome. The authors recommend lifestyle change together with good glycaemic control as prevention. As a single site cross-sectional study of 139 people it cannot establish causal direction, but it identifies modifiable targets, including self monitoring behaviour, that sit squarely in lifestyle medicine territory.

Full APA reference

Mbota, C. F., Ojong, E. W., Ufuan, A. A., & Tambe, A. B. (2026). Prevalence and determinants of metabolic syndrome among patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus in the Buea Health District, South West Region, Cameroon. Pan African Medical Journal, 53, Article 88. https://doi.org/10.11604/pamj.2026.53.88.46412

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-489
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mbota, C. F., Ojong, E. W., Ufuan, A. A., & Tambe, A. B.
Year
2026
Title
Prevalence and determinants of metabolic syndrome among patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus in the Buea Health District, South West Region, Cameroon
Description
A local Cameroonian study that puts named lifestyle and self-management factors behind the regional prevalence figures, which makes it more directly usable in practice than a pooled estimate. This hospital based cross-sectional study recruited 139 patients with type 2 diabetes by systematic sampling in the Buea Health District between February and May 2024, with a mean age of 59.5 years. Alongside sociodemographic, lifestyle and clinical data, the team measured anthropometry, fasting plasma glucose, triglycerides, high density lipoprotein cholesterol, blood pressure and glycated haemoglobin. Metabolic syndrome prevalence was 64.0 per cent under International Diabetes Federation criteria and 56.8 per cent under National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel criteria, significantly higher in women. Central obesity, hyperglycaemia and hypertension were the most common components and all were more prevalent in women. The determinants that reached significance are the practical part: being female, being older, consuming alcohol, not practising self glucose monitoring, and having poor glycaemic control all raised the likelihood of metabolic syndrome. The authors recommend lifestyle change together with good glycaemic control as prevention. As a single site cross-sectional study of 139 people it cannot establish causal direction, but it identifies modifiable targets, including self monitoring behaviour, that sit squarely in lifestyle medicine territory.
Publication or publisher
Pan African Medical Journal, 53, Article 88
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Cameroon
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42375556/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.11604/pamj.2026.53.88.46412
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-488; REF-478
Full APA reference
Mbota, C. F., Ojong, E. W., Ufuan, A. A., & Tambe, A. B. (2026). Prevalence and determinants of metabolic syndrome among patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus in the Buea Health District, South West Region, Cameroon. Pan African Medical Journal, 53, Article 88. https://doi.org/10.11604/pamj.2026.53.88.46412
REF-490 Paper, guideline or statement

Association of dietary nutrient intake with early age-related macular degeneration in Japanese-Americans

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Evidence that Westernized eating patterns show up in the eye as well as the artery, drawn from the same Japanese American population used to study atherosclerosis and diabetes. This cross-sectional study surveyed Japanese immigrants and their descendants living in Los Angeles, combining dietary habit interviews with fundus photography and physical examination, and classifying participants into early age-related macular degeneration or control groups on the basis of the retinal photographs. Of 555 participants, 111, or 20.0 per cent, had early age-related macular degeneration, and none had late stage disease. In multivariate logistic regression, higher intake of animal fat and of saturated fatty acids was positively associated with early disease, with p for trend of 0.01 and 0.02 respectively. Higher intake of vegetable fat, total carbohydrate, simple carbohydrate, sugar and fructose was inversely associated with it, with p for trend values between 0.02 and 0.046. The authors read this as excessive animal fat and saturated fat intake raising the risk of early macular degeneration in a population whose lifestyle has been Westernized. The inverse findings for sugar and simple carbohydrate deserve caution: in a cross-sectional design with correlated food groups, they may reflect displacement of animal fat rather than any protective effect, and the authors do not claim otherwise.

Full APA reference

Edo, A., Pertiwi, Y. D., Hirooka, K., Masuda, S., Kamaruddin, M. I., Yanagi, M., Nagao, A., Ohno, H., Yoneda, M., & Kiuchi, Y. (2021). Association of dietary nutrient intake with early age-related macular degeneration in Japanese-Americans. Metabolites, 11(10), Article 673. https://doi.org/10.3390/metabo11100673

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-490
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Edo, A., Pertiwi, Y. D., Hirooka, K., Masuda, S., Kamaruddin, M. I., Yanagi, M., Nagao, A., Ohno, H., Yoneda, M., & Kiuchi, Y.
Year
2021
Title
Association of dietary nutrient intake with early age-related macular degeneration in Japanese-Americans
Description
Evidence that Westernized eating patterns show up in the eye as well as the artery, drawn from the same Japanese American population used to study atherosclerosis and diabetes. This cross-sectional study surveyed Japanese immigrants and their descendants living in Los Angeles, combining dietary habit interviews with fundus photography and physical examination, and classifying participants into early age-related macular degeneration or control groups on the basis of the retinal photographs. Of 555 participants, 111, or 20.0 per cent, had early age-related macular degeneration, and none had late stage disease. In multivariate logistic regression, higher intake of animal fat and of saturated fatty acids was positively associated with early disease, with p for trend of 0.01 and 0.02 respectively. Higher intake of vegetable fat, total carbohydrate, simple carbohydrate, sugar and fructose was inversely associated with it, with p for trend values between 0.02 and 0.046. The authors read this as excessive animal fat and saturated fat intake raising the risk of early macular degeneration in a population whose lifestyle has been Westernized. The inverse findings for sugar and simple carbohydrate deserve caution: in a cross-sectional design with correlated food groups, they may reflect displacement of animal fat rather than any protective effect, and the authors do not claim otherwise.
Publication or publisher
Metabolites, 11(10), Article 673
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34677388/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/metabo11100673
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-479; REF-487; REF-492
Full APA reference
Edo, A., Pertiwi, Y. D., Hirooka, K., Masuda, S., Kamaruddin, M. I., Yanagi, M., Nagao, A., Ohno, H., Yoneda, M., & Kiuchi, Y. (2021). Association of dietary nutrient intake with early age-related macular degeneration in Japanese-Americans. Metabolites, 11(10), Article 673. https://doi.org/10.3390/metabo11100673
REF-491 Paper, guideline or statement

The impact of overseas assignments on metabolic factors: Panasonic cohort study 23

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

A well matched null result, and a useful one, because it tests the assumption that relocating to a different food and work environment reliably damages metabolic health. Using annual health examination data from Panasonic Corporation employees in Japan, this retrospective cohort study compared changes in body mass index, blood pressure, plasma glucose, lipid profiles, liver enzymes and uric acid between employees posted overseas and those who stayed. Propensity score matching produced two groups of 899 people each, both with a median age of 46 years, and the average overseas posting lasted 4.1 years. Notably, 65.4 per cent of those posted overseas went alone rather than with family. No significant differences emerged in any of the measured metabolic factors between the overseas and non-overseas groups, and subgroup analyses found that neither family accompaniment nor destination changed that. The negative finding sits interestingly against migration studies such as the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima work, where Westernization over decades and generations produced marked metabolic divergence. The difference is probably one of duration, age and permanence: a four year corporate posting in middle age is a very different exposure from permanent emigration and raising children in a new food environment. Worth holding for anyone reasoning about how long an environmental change needs to last before it moves cardiometabolic risk.

Full APA reference

Murano, T., Okada, H., Hamaguchi, M., Kurogi, K., Tatsumi, Y., Murata, H., Yoshida, N., Ito, M., & Fukui, M. (2024). The impact of overseas assignments on metabolic factors: Panasonic cohort study 23. Journal of Occupational Health, 66(1), Article uiae071. https://doi.org/10.1093/joccuh/uiae071

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-491
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Murano, T., Okada, H., Hamaguchi, M., Kurogi, K., Tatsumi, Y., Murata, H., Yoshida, N., Ito, M., & Fukui, M.
Year
2024
Title
The impact of overseas assignments on metabolic factors: Panasonic cohort study 23
Description
A well matched null result, and a useful one, because it tests the assumption that relocating to a different food and work environment reliably damages metabolic health. Using annual health examination data from Panasonic Corporation employees in Japan, this retrospective cohort study compared changes in body mass index, blood pressure, plasma glucose, lipid profiles, liver enzymes and uric acid between employees posted overseas and those who stayed. Propensity score matching produced two groups of 899 people each, both with a median age of 46 years, and the average overseas posting lasted 4.1 years. Notably, 65.4 per cent of those posted overseas went alone rather than with family. No significant differences emerged in any of the measured metabolic factors between the overseas and non-overseas groups, and subgroup analyses found that neither family accompaniment nor destination changed that. The negative finding sits interestingly against migration studies such as the Hawaii, Los Angeles, Hiroshima work, where Westernization over decades and generations produced marked metabolic divergence. The difference is probably one of duration, age and permanence: a four year corporate posting in middle age is a very different exposure from permanent emigration and raising children in a new food environment. Worth holding for anyone reasoning about how long an environmental change needs to last before it moves cardiometabolic risk.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Occupational Health, 66(1), Article uiae071
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Japan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39572004/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/joccuh/uiae071
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-479; REF-487
Full APA reference
Murano, T., Okada, H., Hamaguchi, M., Kurogi, K., Tatsumi, Y., Murata, H., Yoshida, N., Ito, M., & Fukui, M. (2024). The impact of overseas assignments on metabolic factors: Panasonic cohort study 23. Journal of Occupational Health, 66(1), Article uiae071. https://doi.org/10.1093/joccuh/uiae071
REF-492 Paper, guideline or statement

Diet in the general United States Asian American population: A scoping review

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Nutrition and diet
  • General health

A mapping exercise that starts from an equity problem rather than a clinical one: Asian American populations are underrepresented in dietary programmes and nutrition specific funding, and what is known about their eating tends to come from people who already have a diagnosed condition. This scoping review, conducted between December 2023 and December 2024, set out to describe food group consumption among Asian American people without noncommunicable disease. Seven databases were searched for articles published since 2000, three reviewers independently screened 1,486 articles leaving 165 for inclusion, and 15 grey literature sources were reviewed separately. Asian American adults and children generally consume more refined grains and less dairy than the general United States population, but the review is emphatic that the aggregate hides real variation. South Asian people report higher saturated fat and dairy intake, while Chinese, Filipino and Southeast Asian groups often fall short of recommended fruit and vegetable intake. Dietary staples differ by ethnicity too, from white rice and noodles in East and Southeast Asian diets to breads and buns among South Asian and Filipino communities. The recommendations point to culturally tailored nutrition education that works with traditional diets, promotes whole grain substitution and takes a family focused approach, with future research needed on meal sharing practices and cooking methods. The review is registered on the Open Science Framework. It is a direct argument against treating any pan-ethnic population as one dietary group.

Full APA reference

Chan, S. W. C., Godbole, N., LeCroy, M. N., Kuang, K. M., Cheng, J., Beasley, J. M., Laynor, G., Wang, V. H., Ali, S. H., & Yi, S. S. (2026). Diet in the general United States Asian American population: A scoping review. Current Developments in Nutrition, 10(5), Article 107693. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cdnut.2026.107693

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-492
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Chan, S. W. C., Godbole, N., LeCroy, M. N., Kuang, K. M., Cheng, J., Beasley, J. M., Laynor, G., Wang, V. H., Ali, S. H., & Yi, S. S.
Year
2026
Title
Diet in the general United States Asian American population: A scoping review
Description
A mapping exercise that starts from an equity problem rather than a clinical one: Asian American populations are underrepresented in dietary programmes and nutrition specific funding, and what is known about their eating tends to come from people who already have a diagnosed condition. This scoping review, conducted between December 2023 and December 2024, set out to describe food group consumption among Asian American people without noncommunicable disease. Seven databases were searched for articles published since 2000, three reviewers independently screened 1,486 articles leaving 165 for inclusion, and 15 grey literature sources were reviewed separately. Asian American adults and children generally consume more refined grains and less dairy than the general United States population, but the review is emphatic that the aggregate hides real variation. South Asian people report higher saturated fat and dairy intake, while Chinese, Filipino and Southeast Asian groups often fall short of recommended fruit and vegetable intake. Dietary staples differ by ethnicity too, from white rice and noodles in East and Southeast Asian diets to breads and buns among South Asian and Filipino communities. The recommendations point to culturally tailored nutrition education that works with traditional diets, promotes whole grain substitution and takes a family focused approach, with future research needed on meal sharing practices and cooking methods. The review is registered on the Open Science Framework. It is a direct argument against treating any pan-ethnic population as one dietary group.
Publication or publisher
Current Developments in Nutrition, 10(5), Article 107693
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42180656/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cdnut.2026.107693
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-490; REF-487
Full APA reference
Chan, S. W. C., Godbole, N., LeCroy, M. N., Kuang, K. M., Cheng, J., Beasley, J. M., Laynor, G., Wang, V. H., Ali, S. H., & Yi, S. S. (2026). Diet in the general United States Asian American population: A scoping review. Current Developments in Nutrition, 10(5), Article 107693. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cdnut.2026.107693
REF-493 Paper, guideline or statement

To what extent do Australian health policy documents address social determinants of health and health equity?

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The paper that documents, with evidence rather than assertion, that Australian health policy talks about social determinants and then funds health services instead. The authors analysed health policy documents published by nine Australian national or regional governments, asking how far the health sector had taken up the stewardship role that the 2008 Commission on the Social Determinants of Health asked of health agencies, meaning acting themselves and drawing other government sectors in. Policies across every jurisdiction commonly recognised the evidence on social determinants and health equity, and commonly stated goals to improve equity. What happened next is the finding. Those goals were predominantly operationalised through health care delivery and individualised behaviour change strategies. Relatively few strategies addressed social determinants beyond access to health care, and those that did were often limited in scope. National policies on Aboriginal health did the most to address determinants systemically. The authors used Kingdon multiple streams theory from 2011 to examine how problems, policies and politics combine to enable, partially allow or prevent action. For anyone working in lifestyle medicine this is the essential caution: a policy that names structural causes and then prescribes individual behaviour change has quietly shifted responsibility onto the person. Published in a social policy journal rather than a biomedical one, and not indexed in PubMed.

Full APA reference

Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D. (2016). To what extent do Australian health policy documents address social determinants of health and health equity? Journal of Social Policy, 45(3), 545–564. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0047279415000756

Bibliographic details verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record and the publisher abstract page on Cambridge Core.

All fields
ID
REF-493
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D.
Year
2016
Title
To what extent do Australian health policy documents address social determinants of health and health equity?
Description
The paper that documents, with evidence rather than assertion, that Australian health policy talks about social determinants and then funds health services instead. The authors analysed health policy documents published by nine Australian national or regional governments, asking how far the health sector had taken up the stewardship role that the 2008 Commission on the Social Determinants of Health asked of health agencies, meaning acting themselves and drawing other government sectors in. Policies across every jurisdiction commonly recognised the evidence on social determinants and health equity, and commonly stated goals to improve equity. What happened next is the finding. Those goals were predominantly operationalised through health care delivery and individualised behaviour change strategies. Relatively few strategies addressed social determinants beyond access to health care, and those that did were often limited in scope. National policies on Aboriginal health did the most to address determinants systemically. The authors used Kingdon multiple streams theory from 2011 to examine how problems, policies and politics combine to enable, partially allow or prevent action. For anyone working in lifestyle medicine this is the essential caution: a policy that names structural causes and then prescribes individual behaviour change has quietly shifted responsibility onto the person. Published in a social policy journal rather than a biomedical one, and not indexed in PubMed.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Social Policy, 45(3), 545–564
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/journal-of-social-policy/article/to-what-extent-do-australian-health-policy-documents-address-social-determinants-of-health-and-health-equity/BB5C219E2D0B05C7A80262DD1418A74C
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0047279415000756
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record and the publisher abstract page on Cambridge Core.
Related items
REF-494; REF-495; REF-221; REF-414; REF-497; REF-498; REF-499; REF-501
Full APA reference
Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D. (2016). To what extent do Australian health policy documents address social determinants of health and health equity? Journal of Social Policy, 45(3), 545–564. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0047279415000756
REF-494 Paper, guideline or statement

To what extent do Australian child and youth health policies address the social determinants of health and health equity? A document analysis study

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The child and youth companion to the broader Australian policy analysis, and it finds the same drift back to the individual at the point in life when structural action would matter most. The team conducted a document analysis of seventeen strategic level child and youth health policies from across Australia, using a coding framework built in advance to assess how far health departments address social determinants and health equity. Policies were drawn from a review of all federal and state or territory strategic health department policies dated between 2008 and 2013, included if the title addressed children, youth, paediatric health or families, or if they were whole of government policies covering child and youth health issues linked to the health department, or health promotion policies with a substantial section on children. The authors note that the health and wellbeing of Australian children and youth sits middle of the road against other OECD countries, and that no systematic analysis of these policies through a social determinants lens had been done before. Policies addressed health inequities to some extent, with the best examples in Aboriginal health, child protection and whole of government policies. Action on social determinants was limited. Every policy acknowledged social determinants, but the strategies were predominantly about improving health service delivery or access. Even policies that appeared to tackle important determinants such as early childhood development and healthy settings often took a narrow view of the evidence and drifted back to the individual. The conclusion asks for a shift away from a dominant medical or behavioural approach toward the structural determinants of child and youth health.

Full APA reference

Phillips, C., Fisher, M., Baum, F., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D. (2016). To what extent do Australian child and youth health policies address the social determinants of health and health equity? A document analysis study. BMC Public Health, 16, Article 512. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-016-3187-6

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-494
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Phillips, C., Fisher, M., Baum, F., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D.
Year
2016
Title
To what extent do Australian child and youth health policies address the social determinants of health and health equity? A document analysis study
Description
The child and youth companion to the broader Australian policy analysis, and it finds the same drift back to the individual at the point in life when structural action would matter most. The team conducted a document analysis of seventeen strategic level child and youth health policies from across Australia, using a coding framework built in advance to assess how far health departments address social determinants and health equity. Policies were drawn from a review of all federal and state or territory strategic health department policies dated between 2008 and 2013, included if the title addressed children, youth, paediatric health or families, or if they were whole of government policies covering child and youth health issues linked to the health department, or health promotion policies with a substantial section on children. The authors note that the health and wellbeing of Australian children and youth sits middle of the road against other OECD countries, and that no systematic analysis of these policies through a social determinants lens had been done before. Policies addressed health inequities to some extent, with the best examples in Aboriginal health, child protection and whole of government policies. Action on social determinants was limited. Every policy acknowledged social determinants, but the strategies were predominantly about improving health service delivery or access. Even policies that appeared to tackle important determinants such as early childhood development and healthy settings often took a narrow view of the evidence and drifted back to the individual. The conclusion asks for a shift away from a dominant medical or behavioural approach toward the structural determinants of child and youth health.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 16, Article 512
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/27301393/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-016-3187-6
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract content verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-493; REF-495; REF-221; REF-414; REF-497; REF-499
Full APA reference
Phillips, C., Fisher, M., Baum, F., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., & McDermott, D. (2016). To what extent do Australian child and youth health policies address the social determinants of health and health equity? A document analysis study. BMC Public Health, 16, Article 512. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-016-3187-6
REF-495 Paper, guideline or statement

People’s health and the social determinants of health

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

A short agenda-setting editorial from one of the most influential Australian voices on health equity, written from the Southgate Institute for Health, Society and Equity at Flinders University. At two pages it is a position piece rather than a study, and its value is as a concise statement of the argument that population health depends on the economic and political arrangements people live under, not on individual choices. The reference list signals the frame directly: it draws on Oxfam Reward Work, Not Wealth from 2018, Fioramonti on the wellbeing economy from 2017, and Raworth Doughnut Economics from 2017, alongside the Australian Senate inquiry into the domestic response to the World Health Organization Commission on Social Determinants of Health, the Canadian Senate work on the federal role in health, and Australian social health atlas data. It also cites the Fisher and colleagues analysis of Australian health policy documents held here as REF-493. Indexed by PubMed as an Editorial, so it carries no abstract, methods or results, and should be cited as commentary. Useful as a compact reference point when explaining why a lifestyle framing that stops at individual behaviour is incomplete.

Full APA reference

Baum, F. (2018). People’s health and the social determinants of health. Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 29(1), 8–9. https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.49

Bibliographic details and article type verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, and authorship, affiliation and reference list verified against the Crossref API record.

All fields
ID
REF-495
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Baum, F.
Year
2018
Title
People’s health and the social determinants of health
Description
A short agenda-setting editorial from one of the most influential Australian voices on health equity, written from the Southgate Institute for Health, Society and Equity at Flinders University. At two pages it is a position piece rather than a study, and its value is as a concise statement of the argument that population health depends on the economic and political arrangements people live under, not on individual choices. The reference list signals the frame directly: it draws on Oxfam Reward Work, Not Wealth from 2018, Fioramonti on the wellbeing economy from 2017, and Raworth Doughnut Economics from 2017, alongside the Australian Senate inquiry into the domestic response to the World Health Organization Commission on Social Determinants of Health, the Canadian Senate work on the federal role in health, and Australian social health atlas data. It also cites the Fisher and colleagues analysis of Australian health policy documents held here as REF-493. Indexed by PubMed as an Editorial, so it carries no abstract, methods or results, and should be cited as commentary. Useful as a compact reference point when explaining why a lifestyle framing that stops at individual behaviour is incomplete.
Publication or publisher
Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 29(1), 8–9
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/29700943/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.49
Verification note
Bibliographic details and article type verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, and authorship, affiliation and reference list verified against the Crossref API record.
Related items
REF-493; REF-494; REF-221; REF-497
Full APA reference
Baum, F. (2018). People’s health and the social determinants of health. Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 29(1), 8–9. https://doi.org/10.1002/hpja.49
REF-496 Paper, guideline or statement

Implementing lifestyle interventions in mental health care: Third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The document that moves the field past arguing that lifestyle interventions work and onto the harder question of how to actually deliver them inside mental health services. This is the third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission, building on the Commission blueprint published in 2019 and held here as REF-390, and it extends that earlier guidance on health promotion, multiprofessional clinical care and future research. The report takes as settled that people living with mental illness carry a heavy load of lifestyle risk: high smoking rates, low physical activity, high sedentary behaviour, low cardiorespiratory fitness, lower diet quality, detrimental eating behaviour and poor sleep hygiene. It treats lifestyle interventions targeting those factors as effective adjunctive therapies that ease mental health symptoms, protect physical health and promote wellbeing. Having accepted the efficacy case, the Commission deliberately reframes the problem as one of implementation research: how these interventions become core clinical practice rather than optional add-ons or research projects. Critically for a library concerned with social determinants, it insists that implementation must account for the social and economic circumstances in which behavioural risk factors arise, because otherwise equal delivery will produce unequal outcomes. The author list spans authors from Australia, the United Kingdom, Nigeria, Indonesia, Brazil, Rwanda, Bangladesh, Colombia, India and Myanmar, alongside the Commission consortium, which makes it far less high income centric than most work in this area. Indexed as a Review, with no structured abstract on PubMed.

Full APA reference

Teasdale, S. B., Machaczek, K. K., Marx, W., Eaton, M., Chapman, J., Milton, A., Oyeyemi, A. L., Pelupessy, D. C., Schuch, F. B., Gatera, G., Ahmed, H. U., Diatri, H., Jidda, I. M., Gutiérrez-Peláez, M., Elshazly, M., Fugu, M. A., Grinko, N., Indu, P. S., Oo, S. S., … Rosenbaum, S. (2025). Implementing lifestyle interventions in mental health care: Third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission. The Lancet Psychiatry, 12(9), 700–722. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(25)00170-1

Bibliographic details and article type verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, and content verified against the article page on thelancet.com.

All fields
ID
REF-496
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Teasdale, S. B., Machaczek, K. K., Marx, W., Eaton, M., Chapman, J., Milton, A., Oyeyemi, A. L., Pelupessy, D. C., Schuch, F. B., Gatera, G., Ahmed, H. U., Diatri, H., Jidda, I. M., Gutiérrez-Peláez, M., Elshazly, M., Fugu, M. A., Grinko, N., Indu, P. S., Oo, S. S., … Rosenbaum, S.
Year
2025
Title
Implementing lifestyle interventions in mental health care: Third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission
Description
The document that moves the field past arguing that lifestyle interventions work and onto the harder question of how to actually deliver them inside mental health services. This is the third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission, building on the Commission blueprint published in 2019 and held here as REF-390, and it extends that earlier guidance on health promotion, multiprofessional clinical care and future research. The report takes as settled that people living with mental illness carry a heavy load of lifestyle risk: high smoking rates, low physical activity, high sedentary behaviour, low cardiorespiratory fitness, lower diet quality, detrimental eating behaviour and poor sleep hygiene. It treats lifestyle interventions targeting those factors as effective adjunctive therapies that ease mental health symptoms, protect physical health and promote wellbeing. Having accepted the efficacy case, the Commission deliberately reframes the problem as one of implementation research: how these interventions become core clinical practice rather than optional add-ons or research projects. Critically for a library concerned with social determinants, it insists that implementation must account for the social and economic circumstances in which behavioural risk factors arise, because otherwise equal delivery will produce unequal outcomes. The author list spans authors from Australia, the United Kingdom, Nigeria, Indonesia, Brazil, Rwanda, Bangladesh, Colombia, India and Myanmar, alongside the Commission consortium, which makes it far less high income centric than most work in this area. Indexed as a Review, with no structured abstract on PubMed.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Psychiatry, 12(9), 700–722
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/40812962/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(25)00170-1
Verification note
Bibliographic details and article type verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, and content verified against the article page on thelancet.com.
Related items
REF-390; REF-166; REF-041; REF-027; REF-499; REF-501; REF-509
Full APA reference
Teasdale, S. B., Machaczek, K. K., Marx, W., Eaton, M., Chapman, J., Milton, A., Oyeyemi, A. L., Pelupessy, D. C., Schuch, F. B., Gatera, G., Ahmed, H. U., Diatri, H., Jidda, I. M., Gutiérrez-Peláez, M., Elshazly, M., Fugu, M. A., Grinko, N., Indu, P. S., Oo, S. S., … Rosenbaum, S. (2025). Implementing lifestyle interventions in mental health care: Third report of the Lancet Psychiatry Physical Health Commission. The Lancet Psychiatry, 12(9), 700–722. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(25)00170-1
REF-497 Paper, guideline or statement

Intersectoral action on SDH and equity in Australian health policy

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The largest of this research group’s Australian policy analyses, and the one that puts a number on the problem. Intersectoral action between agencies across policy sectors and between levels of government is widely treated as essential if governments are to act on social determinants and reduce health inequities, with the health sector holding a stewardship role to engage other sectors about the health impacts of their policies. The team gathered and individually analysed 266 policy documents, being every published strategic health policy of the national Australian government and the eight state and territory governments current when sampled in late 2012 and early 2013. Strategies for intersectoral action turned out to be common in Australian health policy, but predominantly concerned with extending access to individualised medical or behavioural interventions to client groups sitting in other policy sectors. Where intersectoral strategies did propose action on social determinants beyond health care access, they were mostly limited to proximal factors rather than the policy settings that shape how socioeconomic resources are distributed. There was little evidence of engagement between the health sector and the policy sectors most able to influence systemic socioeconomic inequality in Australia. Read alongside REF-493 and REF-494, this completes the picture: cross-sector language is present, cross-sector power is not.

Full APA reference

Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., McDermott, D., & Phillips, C. (2017). Intersectoral action on SDH and equity in Australian health policy. Health Promotion International, 32(6), 953–963. https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daw035

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-497
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., McDermott, D., & Phillips, C.
Year
2017
Title
Intersectoral action on SDH and equity in Australian health policy
Description
The largest of this research group’s Australian policy analyses, and the one that puts a number on the problem. Intersectoral action between agencies across policy sectors and between levels of government is widely treated as essential if governments are to act on social determinants and reduce health inequities, with the health sector holding a stewardship role to engage other sectors about the health impacts of their policies. The team gathered and individually analysed 266 policy documents, being every published strategic health policy of the national Australian government and the eight state and territory governments current when sampled in late 2012 and early 2013. Strategies for intersectoral action turned out to be common in Australian health policy, but predominantly concerned with extending access to individualised medical or behavioural interventions to client groups sitting in other policy sectors. Where intersectoral strategies did propose action on social determinants beyond health care access, they were mostly limited to proximal factors rather than the policy settings that shape how socioeconomic resources are distributed. There was little evidence of engagement between the health sector and the policy sectors most able to influence systemic socioeconomic inequality in Australia. Read alongside REF-493 and REF-494, this completes the picture: cross-sector language is present, cross-sector power is not.
Publication or publisher
Health Promotion International, 32(6), 953–963
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/27162245/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daw035
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-493; REF-494; REF-495; REF-498; REF-499
Full APA reference
Fisher, M., Baum, F. E., MacDougall, C., Newman, L., McDermott, D., & Phillips, C. (2017). Intersectoral action on SDH and equity in Australian health policy. Health Promotion International, 32(6), 953–963. https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daw035
REF-498 Paper, guideline or statement

Theories of Indigenous and non-Indigenous wellbeing in Australian health policies

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

A policy analysis that asks a question most wellbeing strategies never answer: which theory of wellbeing is this actually built on? Governments in Australia and internationally show growing interest in wellbeing as a policy goal, and the authors argue that how wellbeing gets defined will delimit the strategies that follow. Wholly individualised conceptualisations of wellbeing tend to produce policy focused narrowly on improving individuals rather than on creating favourable social conditions. The paper also takes seriously that Indigenous theories of wellbeing may have a great deal to offer public wellbeing policy, while noting that little research had examined whether that potential was being considered. Working with a representative sample of current Australian health policy documents, the authors examine what theories or definitions of wellbeing are present, whether policies recognise social determinants of health, whether lifestyle drift is present, how Indigenous and non-Indigenous theories of wellbeing are positioned relative to each other, and whether the strategies proposed are actually consistent with the definitions of wellbeing the policies adopt. Directly relevant to anyone writing or reading a wellbeing framework, and one of the earlier papers in this collection to name lifestyle drift explicitly as an analytic category.

Full APA reference

Shakespeare, M., Fisher, M., Mackean, T., & Wilson, R. (2021). Theories of Indigenous and non-Indigenous wellbeing in Australian health policies. Health Promotion International, 36(3), 669–679. https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daaa097

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.

All fields
ID
REF-498
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Shakespeare, M., Fisher, M., Mackean, T., & Wilson, R.
Year
2021
Title
Theories of Indigenous and non-Indigenous wellbeing in Australian health policies
Description
A policy analysis that asks a question most wellbeing strategies never answer: which theory of wellbeing is this actually built on? Governments in Australia and internationally show growing interest in wellbeing as a policy goal, and the authors argue that how wellbeing gets defined will delimit the strategies that follow. Wholly individualised conceptualisations of wellbeing tend to produce policy focused narrowly on improving individuals rather than on creating favourable social conditions. The paper also takes seriously that Indigenous theories of wellbeing may have a great deal to offer public wellbeing policy, while noting that little research had examined whether that potential was being considered. Working with a representative sample of current Australian health policy documents, the authors examine what theories or definitions of wellbeing are present, whether policies recognise social determinants of health, whether lifestyle drift is present, how Indigenous and non-Indigenous theories of wellbeing are positioned relative to each other, and whether the strategies proposed are actually consistent with the definitions of wellbeing the policies adopt. Directly relevant to anyone writing or reading a wellbeing framework, and one of the earlier papers in this collection to name lifestyle drift explicitly as an analytic category.
Publication or publisher
Health Promotion International, 36(3), 669–679
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Wellbeing measurement; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32968777/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daaa097
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services.
Related items
REF-493; REF-497; REF-499; REF-326; REF-414
Full APA reference
Shakespeare, M., Fisher, M., Mackean, T., & Wilson, R. (2021). Theories of Indigenous and non-Indigenous wellbeing in Australian health policies. Health Promotion International, 36(3), 669–679. https://doi.org/10.1093/heapro/daaa097
REF-499 Paper, guideline or statement

Tracing the undercurrents: A scoping review of the lifestyle drift concept

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The paper that gives the whole pattern a name and a literature. Lifestyle drift is the tendency for health interventions originally intended to address upstream social determinants to shift focus toward downstream efforts targeting individual behaviours. The authors note that although the term is increasingly cited, no scoping or systematic review of the concept existed before this one, so the aim was to summarise the literature, describe how lifestyle drift is defined, identify the causes or mechanisms that produce it, and collect the ways it might be addressed. A comprehensive search strategy was developed with a librarian and seven databases were searched, with title, abstract and full text screening in Covidence and thematic analysis in NVivo. From 318 articles identified, 32 met the inclusion criteria with lifestyle drift as a focus or major theme. Definitions shared some common elements but varied considerably. Neoliberalism and the biomedical model were the drivers named most often across the included articles. Many counter-strategies were proposed, and the two most commonly suggested were applying a health in all policies approach and securing participation from priority populations. The authors conclude that lifestyle drift is a recognised concern in public health, health promotion and chronic disease prevention, but that empirical research on its mechanisms and mitigation remains thin. This is the conceptual key to the Australian document analyses held here as REF-493, REF-494, REF-497 and REF-498, and it is the single most useful reference in this library for explaining why lifestyle interventions can undermine equity even when they work.

Full APA reference

Halsall, T., Orpana, H., & Jan, M. (2026). Tracing the undercurrents: A scoping review of the lifestyle drift concept. BMC Public Health, 26(1), Article 321. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-25616-6

Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services. PubMed records the electronic publication date as 23 December 2025 while the article sits in volume 26, article 321, which the publisher cites as 2026. The publisher page could not be fetched directly.

All fields
ID
REF-499
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Halsall, T., Orpana, H., & Jan, M.
Year
2026
Title
Tracing the undercurrents: A scoping review of the lifestyle drift concept
Description
The paper that gives the whole pattern a name and a literature. Lifestyle drift is the tendency for health interventions originally intended to address upstream social determinants to shift focus toward downstream efforts targeting individual behaviours. The authors note that although the term is increasingly cited, no scoping or systematic review of the concept existed before this one, so the aim was to summarise the literature, describe how lifestyle drift is defined, identify the causes or mechanisms that produce it, and collect the ways it might be addressed. A comprehensive search strategy was developed with a librarian and seven databases were searched, with title, abstract and full text screening in Covidence and thematic analysis in NVivo. From 318 articles identified, 32 met the inclusion criteria with lifestyle drift as a focus or major theme. Definitions shared some common elements but varied considerably. Neoliberalism and the biomedical model were the drivers named most often across the included articles. Many counter-strategies were proposed, and the two most commonly suggested were applying a health in all policies approach and securing participation from priority populations. The authors conclude that lifestyle drift is a recognised concern in public health, health promotion and chronic disease prevention, but that empirical research on its mechanisms and mitigation remains thin. This is the conceptual key to the Australian document analyses held here as REF-493, REF-494, REF-497 and REF-498, and it is the single most useful reference in this library for explaining why lifestyle interventions can undermine equity even when they work.
Publication or publisher
BMC Public Health, 26(1), Article 321
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle medicine as a discipline
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41436996/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-25616-6
Verification note
Bibliographic details, article type and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary and efetch services. PubMed records the electronic publication date as 23 December 2025 while the article sits in volume 26, article 321, which the publisher cites as 2026. The publisher page could not be fetched directly.
Related items
REF-493; REF-494; REF-497; REF-498; REF-496; REF-501; REF-504; REF-508
Full APA reference
Halsall, T., Orpana, H., & Jan, M. (2026). Tracing the undercurrents: A scoping review of the lifestyle drift concept. BMC Public Health, 26(1), Article 321. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-025-25616-6
REF-500 Paper, guideline or statement

The social and economic benefits of improving mental health: Productivity Commission issues paper

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The opening document of the inquiry that reframed Australian mental health policy as an economic and social participation question rather than a purely clinical one. Released in January 2019 at 54 pages, its purpose was to help individuals and organisations prepare submissions, setting out the scope of the inquiry, the Commission procedures, the matters on which comment was sought and how to make a submission. The document records the key inquiry dates: terms of reference received 23 November 2018, initial consultations from November 2018 to April 2019, initial submissions due 5 April 2019, consultations on the draft report from November 2019 to February 2020, and the final report to Government due 23 May 2020. It explicitly invited participants not to restrict themselves to matters raised in the paper. Worth holding in a lifestyle and social determinants library because it shows the framing decisions made at the very start of a major inquiry, and because the Commission describes itself as the Australian Government independent research and advisory body on economic, social and environmental issues affecting the welfare of Australians, with independence underpinned by an Act of Parliament. Read alongside the final report to see which of the questions asked here survived into findings.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2019). The social and economic benefits of improving mental health: Productivity Commission issues paper. Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/issues/mental-health-issues.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-500
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2019
Title
The social and economic benefits of improving mental health: Productivity Commission issues paper
Description
The opening document of the inquiry that reframed Australian mental health policy as an economic and social participation question rather than a purely clinical one. Released in January 2019 at 54 pages, its purpose was to help individuals and organisations prepare submissions, setting out the scope of the inquiry, the Commission procedures, the matters on which comment was sought and how to make a submission. The document records the key inquiry dates: terms of reference received 23 November 2018, initial consultations from November 2018 to April 2019, initial submissions due 5 April 2019, consultations on the draft report from November 2019 to February 2020, and the final report to Government due 23 May 2020. It explicitly invited participants not to restrict themselves to matters raised in the paper. Worth holding in a lifestyle and social determinants library because it shows the framing decisions made at the very start of a major inquiry, and because the Commission describes itself as the Australian Government independent research and advisory body on economic, social and environmental issues affecting the welfare of Australians, with independence underpinned by an Act of Parliament. Read alongside the final report to see which of the questions asked here survived into findings.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/issues/mental-health-issues.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-501; REF-502; REF-503; REF-504; REF-505
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2019). The social and economic benefits of improving mental health: Productivity Commission issues paper. Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/issues/mental-health-issues.pdf
REF-501 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 1 (Report No. 95)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The volume to read first, and one of the most consequential Australian policy documents in this library. Volume 1 of Inquiry Report No. 95, dated 30 June 2020 and 99 pages long, carries the transmittal letter to then Treasurer Josh Frydenberg under section 11 of the Productivity Commission Act 1998, the terms of reference, the key points, the overview and the full list of recommendations. The commissioners were Stephen King as Presiding Commissioner, Julie Abramson as Commissioner and Harvey Whiteford as Associate Commissioner. The economic case is stated plainly: the cost to the Australian economy of mental illness and suicide is estimated conservatively at up to about $70 billion per year, with at least $0.5 billion spent annually on reducing prevalence and preventing suicide and $9.2 billion on treating people who developed mental illness, plus a further largely avoidable cost of roughly $150 billion a year from diminished health and reduced life expectancy. In total the Commission puts the cost at about $200 to $220 billion per year, just over one tenth of Australia’s entire economic production in 2019. Almost half of Australian adults have met diagnostic criteria for a mental illness at some point, almost one in five in a given year, and about three quarters of adults with mental illness first experienced it before age 25. For this collection the critical passage is the Commission’s own list of system failures, which opens with a disproportionate focus on clinical services that overlooks other determinants of and contributors to mental health, including family, kinship groups, carers and social support providers, and which names a culture of superiority placing clinicians and clinical interventions above other service providers, consumers, families and carers. The overview also acknowledges that the vast majority of people manage their health themselves, including through positive adjustments to diet, exercise or sleep, and candidly states that risk factors arising from deeply entrenched social, economic and environmental challenges lie beyond the inquiry scope. That last admission is itself an example of the boundary drawing that the lifestyle drift literature examines.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 1 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume1.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-501
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2020
Title
Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 1 (Report No. 95)
Description
The volume to read first, and one of the most consequential Australian policy documents in this library. Volume 1 of Inquiry Report No. 95, dated 30 June 2020 and 99 pages long, carries the transmittal letter to then Treasurer Josh Frydenberg under section 11 of the Productivity Commission Act 1998, the terms of reference, the key points, the overview and the full list of recommendations. The commissioners were Stephen King as Presiding Commissioner, Julie Abramson as Commissioner and Harvey Whiteford as Associate Commissioner. The economic case is stated plainly: the cost to the Australian economy of mental illness and suicide is estimated conservatively at up to about $70 billion per year, with at least $0.5 billion spent annually on reducing prevalence and preventing suicide and $9.2 billion on treating people who developed mental illness, plus a further largely avoidable cost of roughly $150 billion a year from diminished health and reduced life expectancy. In total the Commission puts the cost at about $200 to $220 billion per year, just over one tenth of Australia’s entire economic production in 2019. Almost half of Australian adults have met diagnostic criteria for a mental illness at some point, almost one in five in a given year, and about three quarters of adults with mental illness first experienced it before age 25. For this collection the critical passage is the Commission’s own list of system failures, which opens with a disproportionate focus on clinical services that overlooks other determinants of and contributors to mental health, including family, kinship groups, carers and social support providers, and which names a culture of superiority placing clinicians and clinical interventions above other service providers, consumers, families and carers. The overview also acknowledges that the vast majority of people manage their health themselves, including through positive adjustments to diet, exercise or sleep, and candidly states that risk factors arising from deeply entrenched social, economic and environmental challenges lie beyond the inquiry scope. That last admission is itself an example of the boundary drawing that the lifestyle drift literature examines.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume1.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-500; REF-502; REF-503; REF-504; REF-505; GOV-020; REF-499
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 1 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume1.pdf
REF-502 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health: Inquiry report, Actions and findings (Report No. 95)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The single most useful volume for practitioners, because it collates every finding and action from across the three volumes into 74 pages, numbered to match the chapter that supplies the supporting detail. Finding 1.1 is the reason this document belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library. It states that a person’s mental health reflects the interaction of a lifetime of individual and lifestyle factors with a range of environmental, community and family risk factors, that regular exercise, eating a healthy diet and consistently getting enough sleep can reduce the risks of mental illness, and that genetic vulnerability and experiences such as trauma, socioeconomic disadvantage, isolation, discrimination and environmental stressors can all harm mental health and wellbeing. That is an Australian Government inquiry finding placing lifestyle and structural determinants in the same sentence, which is unusually direct. Other findings collated here record that mental illness is the second largest contributor to years lived in ill health, that almost half of all Australians will experience mental illness at some point, that most cases have onset before age 21, that suicide is the leading cause of death for Australians aged 15 to 44 and that suicide rates are higher in regional areas. Direct economic costs of mental ill health and suicide were estimated at $43 to $70 billion in 2018-19, comprising $16 billion in direct expenditure on healthcare and other supports, $12 to $39 billion in lower economic participation and lost productivity, and $15 billion in informal care by family and friends, with a further $151 billion for disability and premature death. The modelled benefits of the recommended reforms reach up to $18 billion per year in quality of life, corresponding to up to 84,000 quality-adjusted life years annually, plus up to $1.3 billion from increased economic participation, against expenditure of up to $4.2 billion per year and savings of up to $1.7 billion. Actions begin with Action 5.1 calling for coordinated government action to achieve universal screening for perinatal mental illness for all new parents.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Actions and findings (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-actions-findings.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-502
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2020
Title
Mental health: Inquiry report, Actions and findings (Report No. 95)
Description
The single most useful volume for practitioners, because it collates every finding and action from across the three volumes into 74 pages, numbered to match the chapter that supplies the supporting detail. Finding 1.1 is the reason this document belongs in a lifestyle and social determinants library. It states that a person’s mental health reflects the interaction of a lifetime of individual and lifestyle factors with a range of environmental, community and family risk factors, that regular exercise, eating a healthy diet and consistently getting enough sleep can reduce the risks of mental illness, and that genetic vulnerability and experiences such as trauma, socioeconomic disadvantage, isolation, discrimination and environmental stressors can all harm mental health and wellbeing. That is an Australian Government inquiry finding placing lifestyle and structural determinants in the same sentence, which is unusually direct. Other findings collated here record that mental illness is the second largest contributor to years lived in ill health, that almost half of all Australians will experience mental illness at some point, that most cases have onset before age 21, that suicide is the leading cause of death for Australians aged 15 to 44 and that suicide rates are higher in regional areas. Direct economic costs of mental ill health and suicide were estimated at $43 to $70 billion in 2018-19, comprising $16 billion in direct expenditure on healthcare and other supports, $12 to $39 billion in lower economic participation and lost productivity, and $15 billion in informal care by family and friends, with a further $151 billion for disability and premature death. The modelled benefits of the recommended reforms reach up to $18 billion per year in quality of life, corresponding to up to 84,000 quality-adjusted life years annually, plus up to $1.3 billion from increased economic participation, against expenditure of up to $4.2 billion per year and savings of up to $1.7 billion. Actions begin with Action 5.1 calling for coordinated government action to achieve universal screening for perinatal mental illness for all new parents.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-actions-findings.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-500; REF-501; REF-503; REF-504; REF-505; GOV-020
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Actions and findings (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-actions-findings.pdf
REF-503 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 2 (Report No. 95)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

The evidence engine of the inquiry, and at 747 pages the largest single document in this library. Volume 2 contains Part I on the case for major reform and Part II on prevention and early intervention. Part I runs through the inquiry scope and approach, including a dedicated section 1.2 titled What affects mental health and wellbeing, which is where the Commission sets out its model of individual, lifestyle, environmental, community and family risk factors. It then covers the state of Australia’s mental health, including the prevalence of mental ill health, the reduction in years of healthy life lived due to mental illness, and the diversity of needs and outcomes. Chapter 3 examines the effects and costs of mental ill health and suicide, and chapter 4 sets out the way forward, covering steps toward a person-centred mental health system, estimates of the benefits from additional productivity and better quality of life, how consumers would benefit, and the enablers of such a system. Part II moves into prevention and early intervention, beginning with early childhood and schooling. This is the volume to cite for the underlying analysis rather than the headline numbers, and the place to look when you need to know how the Commission reasoned about the relationship between lifestyle behaviours, social conditions and mental health rather than simply what it concluded.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 2 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume2.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-503
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2020
Title
Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 2 (Report No. 95)
Description
The evidence engine of the inquiry, and at 747 pages the largest single document in this library. Volume 2 contains Part I on the case for major reform and Part II on prevention and early intervention. Part I runs through the inquiry scope and approach, including a dedicated section 1.2 titled What affects mental health and wellbeing, which is where the Commission sets out its model of individual, lifestyle, environmental, community and family risk factors. It then covers the state of Australia’s mental health, including the prevalence of mental ill health, the reduction in years of healthy life lived due to mental illness, and the diversity of needs and outcomes. Chapter 3 examines the effects and costs of mental ill health and suicide, and chapter 4 sets out the way forward, covering steps toward a person-centred mental health system, estimates of the benefits from additional productivity and better quality of life, how consumers would benefit, and the enablers of such a system. Part II moves into prevention and early intervention, beginning with early childhood and schooling. This is the volume to cite for the underlying analysis rather than the headline numbers, and the place to look when you need to know how the Commission reasoned about the relationship between lifestyle behaviours, social conditions and mental health rather than simply what it concluded.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume2.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-500; REF-501; REF-502; REF-504; REF-505
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 2 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume2.pdf
REF-504 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 3 (Report No. 95)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The volume that takes mental health reform outside the health portfolio, which makes it the most relevant of the three to a social determinants reading of the inquiry. Running to 503 pages, Volume 3 carries Part III on re-orienting healthcare, Part IV on re-orienting services and supports beyond health, and Part V on the enablers of reform. Part IV is the section that matters most here, because it addresses the domains where mental health is actually made or broken: income and employment support, workplaces, housing, education and the justice system. Part V covers the machinery questions of governance, funding and accountability across the tiers of government, which the Commission identified in its overview as a source of persistent wasteful overlaps and yawning gaps in service provision. If you are looking for the inquiry’s answer to the criticism that mental health policy stops at clinical services, this is the volume that contains it, and it is also the volume that shows how far a bounded inquiry can go before it runs into the structural determinants the Commission explicitly placed outside its scope.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 3 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume3.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-504
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2020
Title
Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 3 (Report No. 95)
Description
The volume that takes mental health reform outside the health portfolio, which makes it the most relevant of the three to a social determinants reading of the inquiry. Running to 503 pages, Volume 3 carries Part III on re-orienting healthcare, Part IV on re-orienting services and supports beyond health, and Part V on the enablers of reform. Part IV is the section that matters most here, because it addresses the domains where mental health is actually made or broken: income and employment support, workplaces, housing, education and the justice system. Part V covers the machinery questions of governance, funding and accountability across the tiers of government, which the Commission identified in its overview as a source of persistent wasteful overlaps and yawning gaps in service provision. If you are looking for the inquiry’s answer to the criticism that mental health policy stops at clinical services, this is the volume that contains it, and it is also the volume that shows how far a bounded inquiry can go before it runs into the structural determinants the Commission explicitly placed outside its scope.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume3.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-500; REF-501; REF-502; REF-503; REF-505; REF-499
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Volume 3 (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-volume3.pdf
REF-505 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health: Inquiry report, Appendices B to K (Report No. 95)

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

The online-only supporting material, and the place to go for method rather than conclusions. Across 268 pages, Part VI holds ten appendices: B on public consultations, C on income and employment support, D on employment and mental health, E on bullying and mental health, F on mental health and the workers compensation system, G on funding and commissioning arrangements, H on calculating the cost of mental ill health and suicide in Australia, I on the benefits and costs of improved mental health, J on mental health, labour market outcomes and health-related quality of life, and K on the detailed assumptions behind the benefit and cost estimates. Appendices C, D, E, F and J are the social determinants evidence base of the inquiry, covering income, work, bullying and compensation systems. Appendices H, I and K are where the headline dollar figures can be audited. Appendix B documents the scale of consultation: six roundtables covering consumers and carers, early childhood services, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people in urban areas, mental health modelling, the education system and workplace mental health; 13 days of public hearings across Adelaide, Brisbane, Broken Hill, Canberra, Darwin, Geraldton, Launceston, Melbourne and other locations between November 2019 and February 2020; 278 meetings with individual stakeholders across Australia; and 1,244 public submissions, of which 564 came before the draft report, plus 191 online comments before the draft report and 297 after it. Volume 1 records that this was one of the largest inquiries in the Commission’s history and attracted the most submissions it had ever received.

Full APA reference

Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Appendices B to K (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-appendices.pdf

PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.

All fields
ID
REF-505
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Productivity Commission
Year
2020
Title
Mental health: Inquiry report, Appendices B to K (Report No. 95)
Description
The online-only supporting material, and the place to go for method rather than conclusions. Across 268 pages, Part VI holds ten appendices: B on public consultations, C on income and employment support, D on employment and mental health, E on bullying and mental health, F on mental health and the workers compensation system, G on funding and commissioning arrangements, H on calculating the cost of mental ill health and suicide in Australia, I on the benefits and costs of improved mental health, J on mental health, labour market outcomes and health-related quality of life, and K on the detailed assumptions behind the benefit and cost estimates. Appendices C, D, E, F and J are the social determinants evidence base of the inquiry, covering income, work, bullying and compensation systems. Appendices H, I and K are where the headline dollar figures can be audited. Appendix B documents the scale of consultation: six roundtables covering consumers and carers, early childhood services, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people in urban areas, mental health modelling, the education system and workplace mental health; 13 days of public hearings across Adelaide, Brisbane, Broken Hill, Canberra, Darwin, Geraldton, Launceston, Melbourne and other locations between November 2019 and February 2020; 278 meetings with individual stakeholders across Australia; and 1,244 public submissions, of which 564 came before the draft report, plus 191 online comments before the draft report and 297 after it. Volume 1 records that this was one of the largest inquiries in the Commission’s history and attracted the most submissions it had ever received.
Publication or publisher
Productivity Commission, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Workplace and occupational health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-appendices.pdf
Verification note
PDF downloaded and read directly from assets.pc.gov.au on 17 September 2026. Title, report number, date, page count and quoted content taken from the document itself.
Related items
REF-500; REF-501; REF-502; REF-503; REF-504
Full APA reference
Productivity Commission. (2020). Mental health: Inquiry report, Appendices B to K (Report No. 95). Australian Government. https://assets.pc.gov.au/inquiries/completed/mental-health/report/mental-health-appendices.pdf
REF-506 Paper, guideline or statement

Bidirectional associations between loneliness and physical multimorbidity and the mediating role of social inactivity

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

The study that turns loneliness and chronic disease from a correlation into a documented feedback loop, and then names the behaviour in the middle of it. Physical multimorbidity and loneliness are both treated as public health concerns, but the direction of travel between them had stayed unclear. The authors pooled longitudinal data on adults aged 45 and over across 19 countries and five prospective cohorts: the US Health and Retirement Study, the English Longitudinal Study on Ageing, the Survey of Health, Ageing and Retirement in Europe, the China Health and Retirement Longitudinal Study and the Korean Longitudinal Study of Aging. From 111,332 people with baseline information, 70,176 entered the analysis running from physical multimorbidity to loneliness and 48,243 entered the analysis running the other way, with 80,643 in the mediation models. Cox regression found associations in both directions. Physical multimorbidity predicted later loneliness with an adjusted hazard ratio of 1.25, 95% confidence interval 1.20 to 1.30, and loneliness predicted later physical multimorbidity with an adjusted hazard ratio of 1.10, 95% confidence interval 1.05 to 1.17. Random-intercept cross-lagged panel models confirmed the association between physical multimorbidity at the first time point and loneliness at the third, with social inactivity at the second time point acting as the mediator. Mean age in the multimorbidity to loneliness analysis was 64.4 years with a standard deviation of 8.3, and 54.7% were women. Only 48.6% of people in the mediation analysis reported being socially active at baseline. The authors conclude that the two conditions may create a vicious cycle in which each worsens the other, with social inactivity carrying the effect from multimorbidity toward loneliness. For lifestyle medicine this is a directly actionable finding, because social activity is the modifiable link rather than an outcome, and it suggests that treating multimorbidity without attending to social participation leaves the loop running. Note that this is an association study across observational cohorts, so the mediation is statistical rather than experimental.

Full APA reference

Zhou, Y., Zhu, S., Holt-Lunstad, J., Kivimäki, M., & Xu, X. (2026). Bidirectional associations between loneliness and physical multimorbidity and the mediating role of social inactivity. Nature Communications, 17, Article 9806. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41467-026-76770-3

Bibliographic details verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service and the publisher landing page at doi.org. Abstract, cohort composition and sample sizes verified against the open access full text in PubMed Central, PMC13575247. PubMed records the electronic publication date as 15 August 2026.

All fields
ID
REF-506
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhou, Y., Zhu, S., Holt-Lunstad, J., Kivimäki, M., & Xu, X.
Year
2026
Title
Bidirectional associations between loneliness and physical multimorbidity and the mediating role of social inactivity
Description
The study that turns loneliness and chronic disease from a correlation into a documented feedback loop, and then names the behaviour in the middle of it. Physical multimorbidity and loneliness are both treated as public health concerns, but the direction of travel between them had stayed unclear. The authors pooled longitudinal data on adults aged 45 and over across 19 countries and five prospective cohorts: the US Health and Retirement Study, the English Longitudinal Study on Ageing, the Survey of Health, Ageing and Retirement in Europe, the China Health and Retirement Longitudinal Study and the Korean Longitudinal Study of Aging. From 111,332 people with baseline information, 70,176 entered the analysis running from physical multimorbidity to loneliness and 48,243 entered the analysis running the other way, with 80,643 in the mediation models. Cox regression found associations in both directions. Physical multimorbidity predicted later loneliness with an adjusted hazard ratio of 1.25, 95% confidence interval 1.20 to 1.30, and loneliness predicted later physical multimorbidity with an adjusted hazard ratio of 1.10, 95% confidence interval 1.05 to 1.17. Random-intercept cross-lagged panel models confirmed the association between physical multimorbidity at the first time point and loneliness at the third, with social inactivity at the second time point acting as the mediator. Mean age in the multimorbidity to loneliness analysis was 64.4 years with a standard deviation of 8.3, and 54.7% were women. Only 48.6% of people in the mediation analysis reported being socially active at baseline. The authors conclude that the two conditions may create a vicious cycle in which each worsens the other, with social inactivity carrying the effect from multimorbidity toward loneliness. For lifestyle medicine this is a directly actionable finding, because social activity is the modifiable link rather than an outcome, and it suggests that treating multimorbidity without attending to social participation leaves the loop running. Note that this is an association study across observational cohorts, so the mediation is statistical rather than experimental.
Publication or publisher
Nature Communications, 17, Article 9806
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
International
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Psychological mechanisms; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42736300/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41467-026-76770-3
Verification note
Bibliographic details verified 17 September 2026 against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service and the publisher landing page at doi.org. Abstract, cohort composition and sample sizes verified against the open access full text in PubMed Central, PMC13575247. PubMed records the electronic publication date as 15 August 2026.
Related items
REF-095; REF-107; REF-382; REF-190; REF-383; REF-278; REF-196; REF-126; REF-508
Full APA reference
Zhou, Y., Zhu, S., Holt-Lunstad, J., Kivimäki, M., & Xu, X. (2026). Bidirectional associations between loneliness and physical multimorbidity and the mediating role of social inactivity. Nature Communications, 17, Article 9806. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41467-026-76770-3
REF-507 Paper, guideline or statement

Effect of exercise on bone health in middle aged and older adults: Hierarchical network meta-analysis of randomised trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

A rare thing in exercise research: a large synthesis that answers not just whether exercise helps bone but which type and how much. The objective was to determine the type and dose of exercise needed to maintain bone mineral density and reduce fracture risk in adults aged 40 and over, using a hierarchical Bayesian network meta-analysis alongside a multivariable dose-response network meta-analysis. PubMed, Embase, the Cochrane Library and Web of Science were searched from inception to January 2026 for randomised controlled trials comparing structured exercise against non-exercise control or alternative exercise modalities in middle aged adults of 40 to 60 years and older adults over 60. Primary outcomes were changes in bone mineral density at the lumbar spine, femoral neck and total hip, with fracture incidence as secondary, and certainty rated with the Confidence in Network Meta-Analysis tool across six predefined domains. A total of 124 trials covering 18,429 participants was included. For lumbar spine density, brisk walking or jogging showed a mean difference of 0.013 g/cm2 with a 95% credible interval of 0.006 to 0.021 on low certainty evidence, and combined aerobic and resistance exercise showed 0.013 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.010 to 0.016 on low to moderate certainty. For the femoral neck, brisk walking or jogging gave 0.009 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.001 to 0.018 on low to moderate certainty, and mind-body exercise gave 0.007 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.002 to 0.013 on moderate certainty, the strongest certainty rating in the paper. For total hip, only brisk walking or jogging showed benefit at 0.021 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.005 to 0.038 on low certainty. The dose-response relations were non-linear and generally an inverted U shape, meaning more is not simply better. The minimal clinically important difference might be reached at about 400 metabolic equivalent minutes per week for the lumbar spine and around 600 for the femoral neck and total hip, which the authors equate to roughly 2 to 3 hours of brisk walking or jogging. In the fracture analysis of 26 trials and 11,132 participants, mixed aerobic exercise gave an odds ratio of 0.29 with an interval of 0.11 to 0.78 and mind-body exercise 0.58 with an interval of 0.36 to 0.93, both on low certainty, while other modalities were neutral. The authors are careful about their own limits, describing the findings as cautious support for integrating dose specific and modality tailored exercise prescriptions into bone health guidelines given the low to moderate confidence in several estimates. Two things make this useful in practice: walking and jogging outperform more elaborate protocols across all three sites, and mind-body exercise earns a genuine place for the femoral neck and for fracture risk rather than only for mood.

Full APA reference

Lu, C., Li, L., Zhang, L., Gao, Q., Meng, J., Xue, Y., Jiang, H., Yuan, T., Qian, H., Bao, N., Luo, Z., & Yang, X. (2026). Effect of exercise on bone health in middle aged and older adults: Hierarchical network meta-analysis of randomised trials. BMJ, 394, Article e100561. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2026-100561

Bibliographic details, title, volume, article number, full author list and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI and independently against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service. PubMed indexes it as a Network Meta-Analysis published 9 September 2026, BMJ volume 394, page e100561, accepted 30 July 2026, with 40 references. The article reports its systematic review registration as PROSPERO NCT42024553562, which uses a ClinicalTrials.gov style prefix rather than the usual PROSPERO CRD prefix.

All fields
ID
REF-507
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Lu, C., Li, L., Zhang, L., Gao, Q., Meng, J., Xue, Y., Jiang, H., Yuan, T., Qian, H., Bao, N., Luo, Z., & Yang, X.
Year
2026
Title
Effect of exercise on bone health in middle aged and older adults: Hierarchical network meta-analysis of randomised trials
Description
A rare thing in exercise research: a large synthesis that answers not just whether exercise helps bone but which type and how much. The objective was to determine the type and dose of exercise needed to maintain bone mineral density and reduce fracture risk in adults aged 40 and over, using a hierarchical Bayesian network meta-analysis alongside a multivariable dose-response network meta-analysis. PubMed, Embase, the Cochrane Library and Web of Science were searched from inception to January 2026 for randomised controlled trials comparing structured exercise against non-exercise control or alternative exercise modalities in middle aged adults of 40 to 60 years and older adults over 60. Primary outcomes were changes in bone mineral density at the lumbar spine, femoral neck and total hip, with fracture incidence as secondary, and certainty rated with the Confidence in Network Meta-Analysis tool across six predefined domains. A total of 124 trials covering 18,429 participants was included. For lumbar spine density, brisk walking or jogging showed a mean difference of 0.013 g/cm2 with a 95% credible interval of 0.006 to 0.021 on low certainty evidence, and combined aerobic and resistance exercise showed 0.013 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.010 to 0.016 on low to moderate certainty. For the femoral neck, brisk walking or jogging gave 0.009 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.001 to 0.018 on low to moderate certainty, and mind-body exercise gave 0.007 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.002 to 0.013 on moderate certainty, the strongest certainty rating in the paper. For total hip, only brisk walking or jogging showed benefit at 0.021 g/cm2 with an interval of 0.005 to 0.038 on low certainty. The dose-response relations were non-linear and generally an inverted U shape, meaning more is not simply better. The minimal clinically important difference might be reached at about 400 metabolic equivalent minutes per week for the lumbar spine and around 600 for the femoral neck and total hip, which the authors equate to roughly 2 to 3 hours of brisk walking or jogging. In the fracture analysis of 26 trials and 11,132 participants, mixed aerobic exercise gave an odds ratio of 0.29 with an interval of 0.11 to 0.78 and mind-body exercise 0.58 with an interval of 0.36 to 0.93, both on low certainty, while other modalities were neutral. The authors are careful about their own limits, describing the findings as cautious support for integrating dose specific and modality tailored exercise prescriptions into bone health guidelines given the low to moderate confidence in several estimates. Two things make this useful in practice: walking and jogging outperform more elaborate protocols across all three sites, and mind-body exercise earns a genuine place for the femoral neck and for fracture risk rather than only for mood.
Publication or publisher
BMJ, 394, Article e100561
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
General lifestyle and wellbeing; Prevention and public health; Integrative and mind body approaches; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42716561/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2026-100561
Verification note
Bibliographic details, title, volume, article number, full author list and abstract verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI and independently against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service. PubMed indexes it as a Network Meta-Analysis published 9 September 2026, BMJ volume 394, page e100561, accepted 30 July 2026, with 40 references. The article reports its systematic review registration as PROSPERO NCT42024553562, which uses a ClinicalTrials.gov style prefix rather than the usual PROSPERO CRD prefix.
Related items
REF-008; REF-371; REF-374; REF-066; REF-162; REF-163; REF-143; REF-018; REF-509
Full APA reference
Lu, C., Li, L., Zhang, L., Gao, Q., Meng, J., Xue, Y., Jiang, H., Yuan, T., Qian, H., Bao, N., Luo, Z., & Yang, X. (2026). Effect of exercise on bone health in middle aged and older adults: Hierarchical network meta-analysis of randomised trials. BMJ, 394, Article e100561. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj-2026-100561
REF-508 Paper, guideline or statement

Social determinants of health in psychiatric disorders: Exciting opportunities for biopsychosocial research and clinical care

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Close to a keystone paper for this library, because it does the one thing most social determinants writing avoids: it explains the biological route from social conditions into psychiatric illness, and it does so in the flagship American psychiatry journal. The authors start from the observation that social determinants of health are increasingly recognised as contributors to the development, course and outcomes of psychiatric disorders, yet their integration into clinical psychiatry and into mechanistic models remains limited. Two distinctions do a lot of work. The first separates individual level, clinically actionable health related social needs from structural determinants operating at family, community and society level, which is exactly the boundary that lifestyle drift blurs. The second insists on counting protective social factors, not only adverse ones. From there the paper sets out how social experience becomes biologically embedded, through interacting pathways including exposomics, epigenetics, allostatic load, accelerated inflammaging, immune dysregulation and gut-brain-microbiome signalling, and how those pathways in turn shape neural circuitry for stress regulation, reward processing and social cognition. Psychological processes are given real standing rather than treated as soft: individual differences in resilience, wisdom, compassion and purpose in life shape how people respond to social determinants and have identifiable neurobiological substrates. Social connection is named as the central and potentially modifiable determinant, strongly associated with whole health and longevity, with loneliness and social isolation described as major global public health challenges. The proposed biopsychosocial framework integrates social exposures, biological mechanisms, neural systems and psychological processes to account for risk, course and prevention of mental illness. The clinical implications are practical and stated plainly: routine assessment of social determinants, deliberate incorporation of protective factors at both individual and societal levels, and development of pragmatic multidomain interventions. The paper closes on digital technology and artificial intelligence, which it treats as genuine opportunity requiring careful governance, and argues for advancing toward human centred artificial wisdom so that technology can promote whole health for people with mental illness globally. It is an overview and framework paper rather than new primary data, drawing on 106 references. Its practical value here is that it supplies the mechanistic middle layer between the social determinants policy literature in this collection and the lifestyle psychiatry intervention literature.

Full APA reference

Jeste, D. V., & Gyan, E. (2026). Social determinants of health in psychiatric disorders: Exciting opportunities for biopsychosocial research and clinical care. American Journal of Psychiatry, 183(7), 450-460. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.20260402

Title, authors, journal, volume, issue and pagination verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI, which lists American Journal of Psychiatry volume 183, issue 7, pages 450 to 460, published 1 July 2026 with 106 references. Independently confirmed against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, which indexes it as a Review, and the abstract was read in full from PubMed. PubMed author keywords are Artificial Wisdom, Biopsychosocial, Exposomics, Social Connections, Well-Being and Whole Health.

All fields
ID
REF-508
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Jeste, D. V., & Gyan, E.
Year
2026
Title
Social determinants of health in psychiatric disorders: Exciting opportunities for biopsychosocial research and clinical care
Description
Close to a keystone paper for this library, because it does the one thing most social determinants writing avoids: it explains the biological route from social conditions into psychiatric illness, and it does so in the flagship American psychiatry journal. The authors start from the observation that social determinants of health are increasingly recognised as contributors to the development, course and outcomes of psychiatric disorders, yet their integration into clinical psychiatry and into mechanistic models remains limited. Two distinctions do a lot of work. The first separates individual level, clinically actionable health related social needs from structural determinants operating at family, community and society level, which is exactly the boundary that lifestyle drift blurs. The second insists on counting protective social factors, not only adverse ones. From there the paper sets out how social experience becomes biologically embedded, through interacting pathways including exposomics, epigenetics, allostatic load, accelerated inflammaging, immune dysregulation and gut-brain-microbiome signalling, and how those pathways in turn shape neural circuitry for stress regulation, reward processing and social cognition. Psychological processes are given real standing rather than treated as soft: individual differences in resilience, wisdom, compassion and purpose in life shape how people respond to social determinants and have identifiable neurobiological substrates. Social connection is named as the central and potentially modifiable determinant, strongly associated with whole health and longevity, with loneliness and social isolation described as major global public health challenges. The proposed biopsychosocial framework integrates social exposures, biological mechanisms, neural systems and psychological processes to account for risk, course and prevention of mental illness. The clinical implications are practical and stated plainly: routine assessment of social determinants, deliberate incorporation of protective factors at both individual and societal levels, and development of pragmatic multidomain interventions. The paper closes on digital technology and artificial intelligence, which it treats as genuine opportunity requiring careful governance, and argues for advancing toward human centred artificial wisdom so that technology can promote whole health for people with mental illness globally. It is an overview and framework paper rather than new primary data, drawing on 106 references. Its practical value here is that it supplies the mechanistic middle layer between the social determinants policy literature in this collection and the lifestyle psychiatry intervention literature.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Psychiatry, 183(7), 450-460
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Psychological mechanisms; Prevention and public health; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42380754/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.20260402
Verification note
Title, authors, journal, volume, issue and pagination verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI, which lists American Journal of Psychiatry volume 183, issue 7, pages 450 to 460, published 1 July 2026 with 106 references. Independently confirmed against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, which indexes it as a Review, and the abstract was read in full from PubMed. PubMed author keywords are Artificial Wisdom, Biopsychosocial, Exposomics, Social Connections, Well-Being and Whole Health.
Related items
REF-506; REF-382; REF-383; REF-196; REF-041; REF-158; REF-437; REF-157; REF-114; REF-398; REF-499; REF-175
Full APA reference
Jeste, D. V., & Gyan, E. (2026). Social determinants of health in psychiatric disorders: Exciting opportunities for biopsychosocial research and clinical care. American Journal of Psychiatry, 183(7), 450-460. https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ajp.20260402
REF-509 Paper, guideline or statement

Psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, barriers and facilitators: A scoping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The rare paper that turns the lens on the practitioner rather than the client, and asks whether psychologists actually do the thing the evidence says works. The authors start from the position that strong evidence supports integrating physical activity promotion into psychotherapy, and that psychologists, as mental health practitioners with expertise in behaviour change, are well placed to promote physical activity as an adjunctive psychological intervention. The review systematically synthesised evidence on psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, including their knowledge, confidence and prior training, and mapped the reported barriers and facilitators onto the 14 domains of the Theoretical Domains Framework. Systematic searches yielded 11 studies meeting inclusion criteria. Of the nine studies measuring how often psychologists promote physical activity, 67 per cent reported that more than half of psychologists do so with clients. The more pointed finding comes from the four studies reporting on training: almost two thirds of psychologists have received no formal training in physical activity promotion at all. Mapped to the framework, the domains most often identified as barriers were social influences and skills, while the domains most often identified as facilitators were beliefs about consequences and beliefs about capabilities. In plain terms, psychologists are largely convinced it works and believe they could do it, but lack the skills and the professional and workplace expectations that would make it routine. The authors conclude that because physical activity promotion in psychotherapy is an effective intervention yet psychologists lack formal training in it, tailored training may improve their capability to promote physical activity safely and effectively. The evidence base is small at 11 studies, so this maps a gap rather than measures it precisely. The author list matters for placing it: it brings together the Australian exercise and mental health group including Rosenbaum and Lederman with Stubbs and Faulkner, so it connects directly to the lifestyle psychiatry meta-review literature already in this collection. Practically, it is a training and workforce argument aimed at the profession most of this library's intervention evidence assumes will deliver.

Full APA reference

Dissanayake, I., Lamble, R., Wall, P. L., Fassnacht, D. B., Ali, K., Szuhany, K. L., White, R. L., Faulkner, G., Rosenbaum, S., Stubbs, B., Home, R. L., & Lederman, O. (2026). Psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, barriers and facilitators: A scoping review. Health Psychology Review. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1080/17437199.2026.2726379

Title, full 12 author list, journal, pagination and publication date verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI, which lists Health Psychology Review, pages 1 to 25, published online 5 September 2026, with 74 references under a CC BY-NC-ND licence. Independently confirmed against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, which indexes it as a Review, and the abstract was read in full from PubMed. No volume or issue number has been assigned yet because the article is advance online publication, so it is cited here without one. Lead author affiliation is the University of the Sunshine Coast.

All fields
ID
REF-509
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dissanayake, I., Lamble, R., Wall, P. L., Fassnacht, D. B., Ali, K., Szuhany, K. L., White, R. L., Faulkner, G., Rosenbaum, S., Stubbs, B., Home, R. L., & Lederman, O.
Year
2026
Title
Psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, barriers and facilitators: A scoping review
Description
The rare paper that turns the lens on the practitioner rather than the client, and asks whether psychologists actually do the thing the evidence says works. The authors start from the position that strong evidence supports integrating physical activity promotion into psychotherapy, and that psychologists, as mental health practitioners with expertise in behaviour change, are well placed to promote physical activity as an adjunctive psychological intervention. The review systematically synthesised evidence on psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, including their knowledge, confidence and prior training, and mapped the reported barriers and facilitators onto the 14 domains of the Theoretical Domains Framework. Systematic searches yielded 11 studies meeting inclusion criteria. Of the nine studies measuring how often psychologists promote physical activity, 67 per cent reported that more than half of psychologists do so with clients. The more pointed finding comes from the four studies reporting on training: almost two thirds of psychologists have received no formal training in physical activity promotion at all. Mapped to the framework, the domains most often identified as barriers were social influences and skills, while the domains most often identified as facilitators were beliefs about consequences and beliefs about capabilities. In plain terms, psychologists are largely convinced it works and believe they could do it, but lack the skills and the professional and workplace expectations that would make it routine. The authors conclude that because physical activity promotion in psychotherapy is an effective intervention yet psychologists lack formal training in it, tailored training may improve their capability to promote physical activity safely and effectively. The evidence base is small at 11 studies, so this maps a gap rather than measures it precisely. The author list matters for placing it: it brings together the Australian exercise and mental health group including Rosenbaum and Lederman with Stubbs and Faulkner, so it connects directly to the lifestyle psychiatry meta-review literature already in this collection. Practically, it is a training and workforce argument aimed at the profession most of this library's intervention evidence assumes will deliver.
Publication or publisher
Health Psychology Review, advance online publication, 1-25
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Behaviour change and adherence; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42700365/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1080/17437199.2026.2726379
Verification note
Title, full 12 author list, journal, pagination and publication date verified 17 September 2026 against the Crossref API record for the DOI, which lists Health Psychology Review, pages 1 to 25, published online 5 September 2026, with 74 references under a CC BY-NC-ND licence. Independently confirmed against the PubMed record via the NCBI E-utilities esummary service, which indexes it as a Review, and the abstract was read in full from PubMed. No volume or issue number has been assigned yet because the article is advance online publication, so it is cited here without one. Lead author affiliation is the University of the Sunshine Coast.
Related items
REF-041; REF-116; REF-064; REF-152; REF-025; REF-087; REF-125; REF-027; REF-170; REF-122; REF-056; REF-015; REF-078; REF-496; REF-148; REF-481; REF-038
Full APA reference
Dissanayake, I., Lamble, R., Wall, P. L., Fassnacht, D. B., Ali, K., Szuhany, K. L., White, R. L., Faulkner, G., Rosenbaum, S., Stubbs, B., Home, R. L., & Lederman, O. (2026). Psychologists' physical activity promotion practices, barriers and facilitators: A scoping review. Health Psychology Review. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1080/17437199.2026.2726379
REF-510 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in children

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

First global WHO guideline for children aged 29 days to under 10 years. Strongly recommends structured diet, physical activity and behaviour-change interventions in primary care and does not recommend medicines, bariatric surgery or weight-loss devices for children aged 0 to 9.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in children. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123397

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123397 (date on page: 7 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-510
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in children
Description
First global WHO guideline for children aged 29 days to under 10 years. Strongly recommends structured diet, physical activity and behaviour-change interventions in primary care and does not recommend medicines, bariatric surgery or weight-loss devices for children aged 0 to 9.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123397
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123397 (date on page: 7 October 2026).
Related items
REF-511; REF-535
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). *WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in children*. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123397
REF-511 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in adolescents

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Physical health

Companion adolescent guideline released the same day. Approved medicines or bariatric surgery may be considered for adolescents only under specified conditions, with lifestyle care first. WHO reports 170 million people aged 5 to 19 living with obesity in 2024.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in adolescents. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123878

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/news/item/07-10-2026-who-issues-first-global-guidelines-on-child-and-adolescent-obesity (date on page: 7 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-511
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in adolescents
Description
Companion adolescent guideline released the same day. Approved medicines or bariatric surgery may be considered for adolescents only under specified conditions, with lifestyle care first. WHO reports 170 million people aged 5 to 19 living with obesity in 2024.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/news/item/07-10-2026-who-issues-first-global-guidelines-on-child-and-adolescent-obesity
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/news/item/07-10-2026-who-issues-first-global-guidelines-on-child-and-adolescent-obesity (date on page: 7 October 2026).
Related items
REF-510; REF-535; REF-538
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). *WHO guidelines on the integrated management of obesity in adolescents*. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240123878
REF-512 Paper, guideline or statement

World Mental Health Day 10 October 2026: Lived experiences heard: Real voices, real change

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Calls for people with lived experience to shape policy and services as equal partners and for a planned shift from institutions to community, rights-based care. Only 9% of countries have fully moved to community-based care, and 49% of reported psychiatric admissions are involuntary.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). World Mental Health Day 10 October 2026: Lived experiences heard: Real voices, real change. https://www.who.int/campaigns/world-mental-health-day/2026

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/campaigns/world-mental-health-day/2026 (date on page: Campaign for 10 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-512
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
World Mental Health Day 10 October 2026: Lived experiences heard: Real voices, real change
Description
Calls for people with lived experience to shape policy and services as equal partners and for a planned shift from institutions to community, rights-based care. Only 9% of countries have fully moved to community-based care, and 49% of reported psychiatric admissions are involuntary.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/campaigns/world-mental-health-day/2026
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/campaigns/world-mental-health-day/2026 (date on page: Campaign for 10 October 2026).
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). *World Mental Health Day 10 October 2026: Lived experiences heard: Real voices, real change*. https://www.who.int/campaigns/world-mental-health-day/2026
REF-513 Paper, guideline or statement

Helping consumers make healthier choices with front-of-pack nutrition labelling

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

WHO-supported Nutri-Level labels grade beverages A to D on sugar, salt and fat. MoH Decree 301 of 2026 is voluntary for ready-to-serve drinks; BPOM Regulation 10 of 2026 makes labels mandatory for packaged beverages within two years. Adult obesity rose from 15.4% to 23.4% in a decade.

Full APA reference

Kania, D. (2026, October 7). Helping consumers make healthier choices with front-of-pack nutrition labelling. World Health Organization Indonesia. https://www.who.int/indonesia/news/detail/07-10-2026-helping-consumers-make-healthier-choices-with-front-of-pack-nutrition-labelling

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/indonesia/news/detail/07-10-2026-helping-consumers-make-healthier-choices-with-front-of-pack-nutrition-labelling (date on page: 7 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-513
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kania, D.
Year
2026
Title
Helping consumers make healthier choices with front-of-pack nutrition labelling
Description
WHO-supported Nutri-Level labels grade beverages A to D on sugar, salt and fat. MoH Decree 301 of 2026 is voluntary for ready-to-serve drinks; BPOM Regulation 10 of 2026 makes labels mandatory for packaged beverages within two years. Adult obesity rose from 15.4% to 23.4% in a decade.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization Indonesia
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Indonesia
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/indonesia/news/detail/07-10-2026-helping-consumers-make-healthier-choices-with-front-of-pack-nutrition-labelling
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/indonesia/news/detail/07-10-2026-helping-consumers-make-healthier-choices-with-front-of-pack-nutrition-labelling (date on page: 7 October 2026).
Related items
REF-560
Full APA reference
Kania, D. (2026, October 7). *Helping consumers make healthier choices with front-of-pack nutrition labelling*. World Health Organization Indonesia. https://www.who.int/indonesia/news/detail/07-10-2026-helping-consumers-make-healthier-choices-with-front-of-pack-nutrition-labelling
REF-514 Paper, guideline or statement

Virtual launch: New report on ethics oversight of AI-related health research

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Launch of WHO recommendations for researchers, ethics committees, regulators and funders on AI-enabled health research, covering consent, bias, ethics committee capacity and risks in low-income settings.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026, September 21). Virtual launch: New report on ethics oversight of AI-related health research [Event page for the report Artificial intelligence-related health research: Ethics review and oversight]. https://www.who.int/news-room/events/detail/2026/09/21/default-calendar/virtual-launch-new-report-on-ethics-oversight-of-ai-related-health-research

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/news-room/events/detail/2026/09/21/default-calendar/virtual-launch-new-report-on-ethics-oversight-of-ai-related-health-research (date on page: Launch event 21 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-514
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Virtual launch: New report on ethics oversight of AI-related health research
Description
Launch of WHO recommendations for researchers, ethics committees, regulators and funders on AI-enabled health research, covering consent, bias, ethics committee capacity and risks in low-income settings.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/news-room/events/detail/2026/09/21/default-calendar/virtual-launch-new-report-on-ethics-oversight-of-ai-related-health-research
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/news-room/events/detail/2026/09/21/default-calendar/virtual-launch-new-report-on-ethics-oversight-of-ai-related-health-research (date on page: Launch event 21 September 2026).
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026, September 21). *Virtual launch: New report on ethics oversight of AI-related health research* [Event page for the report *Artificial intelligence-related health research: Ethics review and oversight*]. https://www.who.int/news-room/events/detail/2026/09/21/default-calendar/virtual-launch-new-report-on-ethics-oversight-of-ai-related-health-research
REF-515 Paper, guideline or statement

The psychosocial working environment: Global developments and pathways for action

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Social determinants of health

Estimates that psychosocial risks at work cause more than 840,000 deaths and nearly 45 million DALYs each year, equal to 1.37% of global GDP. Sets out job demands, autonomy, working time and fair processes as levers for prevention.

Full APA reference

International Labour Organization. (2026). The psychosocial working environment: Global developments and pathways for action. https://doi.org/10.54394/00033223

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.ilo.org/publications/psychosocial-working-environment-global-developments-and-pathways-action (date on page: 22 April 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-515
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
International Labour Organization
Year
2026
Title
The psychosocial working environment: Global developments and pathways for action
Description
Estimates that psychosocial risks at work cause more than 840,000 deaths and nearly 45 million DALYs each year, equal to 1.37% of global GDP. Sets out job demands, autonomy, working time and fair processes as levers for prevention.
Publication or publisher
International Labour Organization
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - ILO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Workplace and occupational health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.ilo.org/publications/psychosocial-working-environment-global-developments-and-pathways-action
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.54394/00033223
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.ilo.org/publications/psychosocial-working-environment-global-developments-and-pathways-action (date on page: 22 April 2026).
Related items
REF-547
Full APA reference
International Labour Organization. (2026). *The psychosocial working environment: Global developments and pathways for action*. https://doi.org/10.54394/00033223
REF-516 Paper, guideline or statement

Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Updated national guidelines combining physical activity, sedentary behaviour and sleep across the day, with recommendations for adults with disability and chronic conditions. Developed by a University of Wollongong-led team; about 46% of adults are not active enough.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+ years). https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.gov.au/ministers/the-hon-rebecca-white-mp/media/new-movement-guidelines-for-healthier-adults (date on page: 13 March 2026 (report page); ministerial release 6 May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-516
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2026
Title
Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years)
Description
Updated national guidelines combining physical activity, sedentary behaviour and sleep across the day, with recommendations for adults with disability and chronic conditions. Developed by a University of Wollongong-led team; about 46% of adults are not active enough.
Publication or publisher
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.gov.au/ministers/the-hon-rebecca-white-mp/media/new-movement-guidelines-for-healthier-adults (date on page: 13 March 2026 (report page); ministerial release 6 May 2026).
Related items
REF-517; REF-540; GOV-002; REF-566
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). *Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+ years)*. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years
Same document as
GOV-002
REF-517 Paper, guideline or statement

UK Chief Medical Officers' physical activity guidelines

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Refresh of the 2019 guidance. Keeps 150 minutes a week for adults but stresses that the largest gains come from moving from inactivity to any activity, plus light activity, less sitting, and strength and balance work across life. One quarter of adults in England do under 30 minutes a week.

Full APA reference

UK Chief Medical Officers. (2026). UK Chief Medical Officers' physical activity guidelines. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/physical-activity-guidelines-uk-chief-medical-officers-report/uk-chief-medical-officers-physical-activity-guidelines

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.gov.uk/government/news/new-uk-cmo-activity-guidelines-show-every-movement-counts (date on page: 10 July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-517
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
UK Chief Medical Officers
Year
2026
Title
UK Chief Medical Officers' physical activity guidelines
Description
Refresh of the 2019 guidance. Keeps 150 minutes a week for adults but stresses that the largest gains come from moving from inactivity to any activity, plus light activity, less sitting, and strength and balance work across life. One quarter of adults in England do under 30 minutes a week.
Publication or publisher
GOV.UK
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.gov.uk/government/news/new-uk-cmo-activity-guidelines-show-every-movement-counts
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.gov.uk/government/news/new-uk-cmo-activity-guidelines-show-every-movement-counts (date on page: 10 July 2026).
Related items
REF-516; REF-540; REF-566
Full APA reference
UK Chief Medical Officers. (2026). *UK Chief Medical Officers' physical activity guidelines*. GOV.UK. https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/physical-activity-guidelines-uk-chief-medical-officers-report/uk-chief-medical-officers-physical-activity-guidelines
REF-518 Paper, guideline or statement

Kennedy, Rollins unveil historic reset of U.S. nutrition policy, put real food back at center of health

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Cardiometabolic health

Releases the 2025-2030 Dietary Guidelines, which prioritise whole, nutrient-dense foods and limit highly processed foods, added sugars and refined carbohydrates. Notably recommends protein at every meal and full-fat dairy, a contested change from earlier editions.

Full APA reference

U.S. Department of Agriculture. (2026, January 7). Kennedy, Rollins unveil historic reset of U.S. nutrition policy, put real food back at center of health [Press release on the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 2025-2030]. https://www.usda.gov/about-usda/news/press-releases/2026/01/07/kennedy-rollins-unveil-historic-reset-us-nutrition-policy-put-real-food-back-center-health

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.usda.gov/about-usda/news/press-releases/2026/01/07/kennedy-rollins-unveil-historic-reset-us-nutrition-policy-put-real-food-back-center-health (date on page: 7 January 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-518
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
U.S. Department of Agriculture
Year
2026
Title
Kennedy, Rollins unveil historic reset of U.S. nutrition policy, put real food back at center of health
Description
Releases the 2025-2030 Dietary Guidelines, which prioritise whole, nutrient-dense foods and limit highly processed foods, added sugars and refined carbohydrates. Notably recommends protein at every meal and full-fat dairy, a contested change from earlier editions.
Publication or publisher
U.S. Department of Agriculture (press release on the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 2025-2030)
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.usda.gov/about-usda/news/press-releases/2026/01/07/kennedy-rollins-unveil-historic-reset-us-nutrition-policy-put-real-food-back-center-health
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.usda.gov/about-usda/news/press-releases/2026/01/07/kennedy-rollins-unveil-historic-reset-us-nutrition-policy-put-real-food-back-center-health (date on page: 7 January 2026).
Full APA reference
U.S. Department of Agriculture. (2026, January 7). *Kennedy, Rollins unveil historic reset of U.S. nutrition policy, put real food back at center of health* [Press release on the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 2025-2030]. https://www.usda.gov/about-usda/news/press-releases/2026/01/07/kennedy-rollins-unveil-historic-reset-us-nutrition-policy-put-real-food-back-center-health
REF-519 Paper, guideline or statement

General wellness: Policy for low risk devices: Guidance for industry and Food and Drug Administration staff

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Updated January 2026 guidance on software and wearables intended to maintain or encourage a healthy lifestyle, which sit outside device regulation when not linked to diagnosing or treating disease. Widens the space for consumer wellness wearables.

Full APA reference

U.S. Food and Drug Administration. (2026). General wellness: Policy for low risk devices: Guidance for industry and Food and Drug Administration staff. https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/general-wellness-policy-low-risk-devices

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/general-wellness-policy-low-risk-devices (date on page: January 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-519
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
U.S. Food and Drug Administration
Year
2026
Title
General wellness: Policy for low risk devices: Guidance for industry and Food and Drug Administration staff
Description
Updated January 2026 guidance on software and wearables intended to maintain or encourage a healthy lifestyle, which sit outside device regulation when not linked to diagnosing or treating disease. Widens the space for consumer wellness wearables.
Publication or publisher
U.S. Food and Drug Administration
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/general-wellness-policy-low-risk-devices
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/general-wellness-policy-low-risk-devices (date on page: January 2026).
Related items
REF-520; REF-549
Full APA reference
U.S. Food and Drug Administration. (2026). *General wellness: Policy for low risk devices: Guidance for industry and Food and Drug Administration staff*. https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/general-wellness-policy-low-risk-devices
REF-520 Paper, guideline or statement

Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Explains when apps, websites and platforms for mental health assessment, therapy or self-management are regulated medical devices requiring ARTG listing, and when they are excluded. Includes consumer safety and privacy advice.

Full APA reference

Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2026, February 11). Digital mental health tools (DMHTs). Australian Government. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts (date on page: 11 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-520
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Therapeutic Goods Administration
Year
2026
Title
Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)
Description
Explains when apps, websites and platforms for mental health assessment, therapy or self-management are regulated medical devices requiring ARTG listing, and when they are excluded. Includes consumer safety and privacy advice.
Publication or publisher
Therapeutic Goods Administration, Australian Government
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts (date on page: 11 February 2026).
Related items
REF-519; REF-530; REF-553; GOV-180
Full APA reference
Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2026, February 11). *Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)*. Australian Government. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts
Same document as
GOV-180
REF-521 Paper, guideline or statement

Māori Health Strategy 2026: Whiria te Ora

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Social determinants of health

Sets direction to 2030 with priorities on prevention and early intervention, quality and accountability, workforce, and Māori health leadership. Notes life-expectancy gaps of 6.9 years for Māori men and 6.3 years for Māori women.

Full APA reference

Ministry of Health. (2026). Māori Health Strategy 2026: Whiria te Ora. New Zealand Government. https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/2026-08/maori-health-strategy-2026.pdf

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/2026-08/maori-health-strategy-2026.pdf (date on page: July 2026 (ISBN 978-1-991324-80-1)).

All fields
ID
REF-521
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ministry of Health
Year
2026
Title
Māori Health Strategy 2026: Whiria te Ora
Description
Sets direction to 2030 with priorities on prevention and early intervention, quality and accountability, workforce, and Māori health leadership. Notes life-expectancy gaps of 6.9 years for Māori men and 6.3 years for Māori women.
Publication or publisher
Ministry of Health, New Zealand Government
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/2026-08/maori-health-strategy-2026.pdf
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/2026-08/maori-health-strategy-2026.pdf (date on page: July 2026 (ISBN 978-1-991324-80-1)).
Related items
REF-558; REF-577
Full APA reference
Ministry of Health. (2026). *Māori Health Strategy 2026: Whiria te Ora*. New Zealand Government. https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/2026-08/maori-health-strategy-2026.pdf
REF-522 Paper, guideline or statement

Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report

  • Report or review
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Draws on 14 waves of the Longitudinal Study of Indigenous Children. Culture, family, community and school are protective; young people who felt safe and supported at school were about 50% less likely to report self-harm or suicidal thoughts.

Full APA reference

Australian National University. (2026). Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report. Department of Social Services. https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report (date on page: 26 May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-522
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian National University
Year
2026
Title
Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report
Description
Draws on 14 waves of the Longitudinal Study of Indigenous Children. Culture, family, community and school are protective; young people who felt safe and supported at school were about 50% less likely to report self-harm or suicidal thoughts.
Publication or publisher
Department of Social Services, Australian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report (date on page: 26 May 2026).
Related items
REF-536; REF-557; GOV-182
Full APA reference
Australian National University. (2026). *Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report*. Department of Social Services. https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report
Same document as
GOV-182
REF-523 Paper, guideline or statement

Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Tracks the Royal Commission's 74 recommendations: 19 delivered and work underway on 95%. More than 41,000 people have received care through 22 Local Services at 24 locations.

Full APA reference

Department of Health. (2026). Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf (date on page: May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-523
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Department of Health
Year
2026
Title
Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026
Description
Tracks the Royal Commission's 74 recommendations: 19 delivered and work underway on 95%. More than 41,000 people have received care through 22 Local Services at 24 locations.
Publication or publisher
Department of Health, Victorian Government
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf (date on page: May 2026).
Related items
GOV-181
Full APA reference
Department of Health. (2026). *Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf
Same document as
GOV-181
REF-524 Paper, guideline or statement

NSW Preventive Health Summit gets underway in Parramatta

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Two-day summit on preventive health and equity, launched with the Health of the People of NSW 2026 report. Residents aged 85 and over are projected to almost double by 2041.

Full APA reference

NSW Government. (2026, October 7). NSW Preventive Health Summit gets underway in Parramatta [Media release]. https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-preventive-health-summit-gets-underway-parramatta

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-preventive-health-summit-gets-underway-parramatta (date on page: 7 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-524
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
NSW Government
Year
2026
Title
NSW Preventive Health Summit gets underway in Parramatta
Description
Two-day summit on preventive health and equity, launched with the Health of the People of NSW 2026 report. Residents aged 85 and over are projected to almost double by 2041.
Publication or publisher
NSW Government (media release)
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-preventive-health-summit-gets-underway-parramatta
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-preventive-health-summit-gets-underway-parramatta (date on page: 7 October 2026).
Full APA reference
NSW Government. (2026, October 7). *NSW Preventive Health Summit gets underway in Parramatta* [Media release]. https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-preventive-health-summit-gets-underway-parramatta
REF-525 Paper, guideline or statement

Wales leads globally in recognising social connections as a public health priority

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Release of Loneliness, social isolation and social connection in Wales: A public health perspective. 13% of people aged 16 and over are lonely and 13% socially isolated; it calls for stronger evaluation of what works and for whom.

Full APA reference

Public Health Wales. (2026, February 18). Wales leads globally in recognising social connections as a public health priority. https://phw.nhs.wales/2026/02/18/wales-leads-globally-in-recognising-social-connections-as-a-public-health-priority/

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://phw.nhs.wales/2026/02/18/wales-leads-globally-in-recognising-social-connections-as-a-public-health-priority/ (date on page: 18 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-525
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Public Health Wales
Year
2026
Title
Wales leads globally in recognising social connections as a public health priority
Description
Release of Loneliness, social isolation and social connection in Wales: A public health perspective. 13% of people aged 16 and over are lonely and 13% socially isolated; it calls for stronger evaluation of what works and for whom.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Wales
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Wales
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://phw.nhs.wales/2026/02/18/wales-leads-globally-in-recognising-social-connections-as-a-public-health-priority/
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://phw.nhs.wales/2026/02/18/wales-leads-globally-in-recognising-social-connections-as-a-public-health-priority/ (date on page: 18 February 2026).
Related items
REF-527; REF-547
Full APA reference
Public Health Wales. (2026, February 18). *Wales leads globally in recognising social connections as a public health priority*. https://phw.nhs.wales/2026/02/18/wales-leads-globally-in-recognising-social-connections-as-a-public-health-priority/
REF-526 Paper, guideline or statement

Eurobarometer survey on teens' screen use and mental health

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Survey of 26,297 teenagers and 12,750 parents across all EU countries. 25% of teens report more than six hours of screen time on school days (46% on weekends); nine in ten met harmful content in the past three months.

Full APA reference

EU Children's Participation Platform. (2026, June 22). Eurobarometer survey on teens' screen use and mental health. European Commission. https://eu-for-children.europa.eu/activities-news/latest/eurobarometer-survey-on-teens-screen-use-and-mental-health_en

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://eu-for-children.europa.eu/activities-news/latest/eurobarometer-survey-on-teens-screen-use-and-mental-health_en (date on page: 22 June 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-526
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
EU Children's Participation Platform
Year
2026
Title
Eurobarometer survey on teens' screen use and mental health
Description
Survey of 26,297 teenagers and 12,750 parents across all EU countries. 25% of teens report more than six hours of screen time on school days (46% on weekends); nine in ten met harmful content in the past three months.
Publication or publisher
European Commission, EU Children's Participation Platform
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
European Union
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://eu-for-children.europa.eu/activities-news/latest/eurobarometer-survey-on-teens-screen-use-and-mental-health_en
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://eu-for-children.europa.eu/activities-news/latest/eurobarometer-survey-on-teens-screen-use-and-mental-health_en (date on page: 22 June 2026).
Full APA reference
EU Children's Participation Platform. (2026, June 22). *Eurobarometer survey on teens' screen use and mental health*. European Commission. https://eu-for-children.europa.eu/activities-news/latest/eurobarometer-survey-on-teens-screen-use-and-mental-health_en
REF-527 Paper, guideline or statement

WHO Commission on Social Connection online event: Creating connected places for health and well-being (June 25, 2026)

  • Website or organisation page
  • Web resource
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Japan's Minister for Loneliness and Isolation outlines national policy and community systems that link isolated people to local spaces and support, at a WHO Commission event with Wales and Geneva.

Full APA reference

Cabinet Office, Government of Japan. (2026). WHO Commission on Social Connection online event: Creating connected places for health and well-being (June 25, 2026). https://www.cao.go.jp/kodoku_koritsu/20260625_iinkai-e.html

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.cao.go.jp/kodoku_koritsu/20260625_iinkai-e.html (date on page: Event 25 June 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-527
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Cabinet Office, Government of Japan
Year
2026
Title
WHO Commission on Social Connection online event: Creating connected places for health and well-being (June 25, 2026)
Description
Japan's Minister for Loneliness and Isolation outlines national policy and community systems that link isolated people to local spaces and support, at a WHO Commission event with Wales and Geneva.
Publication or publisher
Cabinet Office, Government of Japan
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Web resource
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Japan
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cao.go.jp/kodoku_koritsu/20260625_iinkai-e.html
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.cao.go.jp/kodoku_koritsu/20260625_iinkai-e.html (date on page: Event 25 June 2026).
Related items
REF-525; REF-547
Full APA reference
Cabinet Office, Government of Japan. (2026). *WHO Commission on Social Connection online event: Creating connected places for health and well-being (June 25, 2026)*. https://www.cao.go.jp/kodoku_koritsu/20260625_iinkai-e.html
REF-528 Paper, guideline or statement

New ACLM framework aims to standardize lifestyle medicine data collection across healthcare systems

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Reports the American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine paper Optimal data collection in lifestyle medicine at the point of care (Michael, Patel et al.). Proposes common data elements for lifestyle behaviours, outcomes, costs and patient experience in electronic records.

Full APA reference

American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2026, September 23). New ACLM framework aims to standardize lifestyle medicine data collection across healthcare systems [Press release]. PR Newswire. https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/new-aclm-framework-aims-to-standardize-lifestyle-medicine-data-collection-across-healthcare-systems-302886736.html

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/new-aclm-framework-aims-to-standardize-lifestyle-medicine-data-collection-across-healthcare-systems-302886736.html (date on page: 23 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-528
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
2026
Title
New ACLM framework aims to standardize lifestyle medicine data collection across healthcare systems
Description
Reports the American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine paper Optimal data collection in lifestyle medicine at the point of care (Michael, Patel et al.). Proposes common data elements for lifestyle behaviours, outcomes, costs and patient experience in electronic records.
Publication or publisher
American College of Lifestyle Medicine (press release, PR Newswire)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/new-aclm-framework-aims-to-standardize-lifestyle-medicine-data-collection-across-healthcare-systems-302886736.html
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/new-aclm-framework-aims-to-standardize-lifestyle-medicine-data-collection-across-healthcare-systems-302886736.html (date on page: 23 September 2026).
Full APA reference
American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2026, September 23). *New ACLM framework aims to standardize lifestyle medicine data collection across healthcare systems* [Press release]. PR Newswire. https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/new-aclm-framework-aims-to-standardize-lifestyle-medicine-data-collection-across-healthcare-systems-302886736.html
REF-529 Paper, guideline or statement

American College of Lifestyle Medicine welcomes national resolution advancing nature as a foundation for health and well-being

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

A wildlife agencies resolution recognises nature as supporting all six lifestyle medicine pillars. 83% of surveyed Americans would spend more time outside if a clinician advised it, but only 20% had been told to.

Full APA reference

American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2026, October 5). American College of Lifestyle Medicine welcomes national resolution advancing nature as a foundation for health and well-being [Press release]. PR Newswire. https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/american-college-of-lifestyle-medicine-welcomes-national-resolution-advancing-nature-as-a-foundation-for-health-and-well-being-302897766.html

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/american-college-of-lifestyle-medicine-welcomes-national-resolution-advancing-nature-as-a-foundation-for-health-and-well-being-302897766.html (date on page: 5 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-529
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
2026
Title
American College of Lifestyle Medicine welcomes national resolution advancing nature as a foundation for health and well-being
Description
A wildlife agencies resolution recognises nature as supporting all six lifestyle medicine pillars. 83% of surveyed Americans would spend more time outside if a clinician advised it, but only 20% had been told to.
Publication or publisher
American College of Lifestyle Medicine (press release, PR Newswire)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; General lifestyle and wellbeing
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/american-college-of-lifestyle-medicine-welcomes-national-resolution-advancing-nature-as-a-foundation-for-health-and-well-being-302897766.html
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/american-college-of-lifestyle-medicine-welcomes-national-resolution-advancing-nature-as-a-foundation-for-health-and-well-being-302897766.html (date on page: 5 October 2026).
Full APA reference
American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (2026, October 5). *American College of Lifestyle Medicine welcomes national resolution advancing nature as a foundation for health and well-being* [Press release]. PR Newswire. https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/american-college-of-lifestyle-medicine-welcomes-national-resolution-advancing-nature-as-a-foundation-for-health-and-well-being-302897766.html
REF-530 Paper, guideline or statement

Australians at risk as AI and digital mental health services roll out without appropriate evaluation

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Linked to the APS 2026-27 Pre-Budget Submission. Calls for benchmarking, safety and effectiveness standards and psychologically informed governance for AI and digital mental health services.

Full APA reference

Australian Psychological Society. (2026, February 3). Australians at risk as AI and digital mental health services roll out without appropriate evaluation [Media release]. https://psychology.org.au/about-us/news-and-media/media-releases/2026/australians-at-risk-as-ai-and-digital-mental-healt

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://psychology.org.au/about-us/news-and-media/media-releases/2026/australians-at-risk-as-ai-and-digital-mental-healt (date on page: 3 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-530
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Psychological Society
Year
2026
Title
Australians at risk as AI and digital mental health services roll out without appropriate evaluation
Description
Linked to the APS 2026-27 Pre-Budget Submission. Calls for benchmarking, safety and effectiveness standards and psychologically informed governance for AI and digital mental health services.
Publication or publisher
Australian Psychological Society (media release)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://psychology.org.au/about-us/news-and-media/media-releases/2026/australians-at-risk-as-ai-and-digital-mental-healt
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://psychology.org.au/about-us/news-and-media/media-releases/2026/australians-at-risk-as-ai-and-digital-mental-healt (date on page: 3 February 2026).
Related items
REF-520; REF-533
Full APA reference
Australian Psychological Society. (2026, February 3). *Australians at risk as AI and digital mental health services roll out without appropriate evaluation* [Media release]. https://psychology.org.au/about-us/news-and-media/media-releases/2026/australians-at-risk-as-ai-and-digital-mental-healt
REF-531 Paper, guideline or statement

Guidelines for preventive activities in general practice

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

First Red Book update in eight years, now using GRADE. Adds anxiety, sleep and gambling as preventive topics, including a conditional recommendation to use the GAD-2 for patients aged 8 to 64 suspected of anxiety.

Full APA reference

Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2026). Guidelines for preventive activities in general practice (10th ed.). https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/preventive-activities-in-general-practice/what-s-new-in-the-10th-ed-red-book

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.medicalrepublic.com.au/anxiety-welcome-to-the-red-book/108750 (date on page: January 2026 (Medical Republic report)).

All fields
ID
REF-531
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners
Year
2026
Title
Guidelines for preventive activities in general practice
Description
First Red Book update in eight years, now using GRADE. Adds anxiety, sleep and gambling as preventive topics, including a conditional recommendation to use the GAD-2 for patients aged 8 to 64 suspected of anxiety.
Publication or publisher
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners, 10th edition
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.medicalrepublic.com.au/anxiety-welcome-to-the-red-book/108750
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.medicalrepublic.com.au/anxiety-welcome-to-the-red-book/108750 (date on page: January 2026 (Medical Republic report)).
Full APA reference
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2026). *Guidelines for preventive activities in general practice* (10th ed.). https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/preventive-activities-in-general-practice/what-s-new-in-the-10th-ed-red-book
REF-532 Paper, guideline or statement

Consumer sleep technology: A position statement from the National Sleep Foundation

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Sleep
  • Mental and physical health

National Sleep Foundation position on wearables and other consumer sleep trackers. Supports their use for personal insight while calling on the public, clinicians, industry and funders to understand their limits.

Full APA reference

Dzierzewski, J. M., Erickson, A. J., Ferri, R., Kanady, J., Kirchhoff, T., Lopos, J., Seixas, A., & Sullivan, S. S. (2026). Consumer sleep technology: A position statement from the National Sleep Foundation. Sleep Health, 12(2), 380-385. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sleh.2026.02.003

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41792005/ (date on page: 5 March 2026 (epub)).

All fields
ID
REF-532
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dzierzewski, J. M., Erickson, A. J., Ferri, R., Kanady, J., Kirchhoff, T., Lopos, J., Seixas, A., & Sullivan, S. S.
Year
2026
Title
Consumer sleep technology: A position statement from the National Sleep Foundation
Description
National Sleep Foundation position on wearables and other consumer sleep trackers. Supports their use for personal insight while calling on the public, clinicians, industry and funders to understand their limits.
Publication or publisher
Sleep Health, 12(2), 380-385
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41792005/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sleh.2026.02.003
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41792005/ (date on page: 5 March 2026 (epub)).
Related items
REF-552; REF-554
Full APA reference
Dzierzewski, J. M., Erickson, A. J., Ferri, R., Kanady, J., Kirchhoff, T., Lopos, J., Seixas, A., & Sullivan, S. S. (2026). Consumer sleep technology: A position statement from the National Sleep Foundation. *Sleep Health, 12*(2), 380-385. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.sleh.2026.02.003
REF-533 Paper, guideline or statement

More people seeking early support as Australia's mental health remains under pressure

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Survey of 5,146 adults. 41% sought support in the past year, 50% reported recent anxiety or depression symptoms and 47% named cost of living as a driver of distress. 16% used generative AI for mental health advice and 86% had concerns about it.

Full APA reference

Beyond Blue. (2026, October 8). More people seeking early support as Australia's mental health remains under pressure [Media release on Australia's Mental Health and Wellbeing Check 2026]. https://www.beyondblue.org.au/about/media/media-releases/australias-mental-health-survey-2026

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.beyondblue.org.au/about/media/media-releases/australias-mental-health-survey-2026 (date on page: 8 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-533
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Beyond Blue
Year
2026
Title
More people seeking early support as Australia's mental health remains under pressure
Description
Survey of 5,146 adults. 41% sought support in the past year, 50% reported recent anxiety or depression symptoms and 47% named cost of living as a driver of distress. 16% used generative AI for mental health advice and 86% had concerns about it.
Publication or publisher
Beyond Blue (media release on Australia's Mental Health and Wellbeing Check 2026)
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.beyondblue.org.au/about/media/media-releases/australias-mental-health-survey-2026
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.beyondblue.org.au/about/media/media-releases/australias-mental-health-survey-2026 (date on page: 8 October 2026).
Related items
REF-530; REF-534
Full APA reference
Beyond Blue. (2026, October 8). *More people seeking early support as Australia's mental health remains under pressure* [Media release on Australia's Mental Health and Wellbeing Check 2026]. https://www.beyondblue.org.au/about/media/media-releases/australias-mental-health-survey-2026
REF-534 Paper, guideline or statement

The future we choose: New Beyond Blue report explores the forces shaping the next decade of mental health in Australia

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Foresight report (lead author A. Bratanova) with four scenarios and five shifts: prevention, community connection, trusted technology, easier navigation and earlier support.

Full APA reference

CSIRO. (2026, September 9). The future we choose: New Beyond Blue report explores the forces shaping the next decade of mental health in Australia. https://www.csiro.au/en/news/all/news/2026/september/new-beyond-blue-report-explores-the-forces-shaping-the-next-decade-of-mental-health-in-australia

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.csiro.au/en/news/all/news/2026/september/new-beyond-blue-report-explores-the-forces-shaping-the-next-decade-of-mental-health-in-australia (date on page: 9 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-534
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
CSIRO
Year
2026
Title
The future we choose: New Beyond Blue report explores the forces shaping the next decade of mental health in Australia
Description
Foresight report (lead author A. Bratanova) with four scenarios and five shifts: prevention, community connection, trusted technology, easier navigation and earlier support.
Publication or publisher
CSIRO (news item on a Beyond Blue report)
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.csiro.au/en/news/all/news/2026/september/new-beyond-blue-report-explores-the-forces-shaping-the-next-decade-of-mental-health-in-australia
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.csiro.au/en/news/all/news/2026/september/new-beyond-blue-report-explores-the-forces-shaping-the-next-decade-of-mental-health-in-australia (date on page: 9 September 2026).
Related items
REF-533
Full APA reference
CSIRO. (2026, September 9). *The future we choose: New Beyond Blue report explores the forces shaping the next decade of mental health in Australia*. https://www.csiro.au/en/news/all/news/2026/september/new-beyond-blue-report-explores-the-forces-shaping-the-next-decade-of-mental-health-in-australia
REF-535 Paper, guideline or statement

World obesity atlas 2026: Childhood obesity

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Released for World Obesity Day on 4 March 2026. Childhood obesity is rising in more than 180 countries, and the campaign frames obesity as a systems problem, not individual blame.

Full APA reference

World Obesity Federation. (2026). World obesity atlas 2026: Childhood obesity (2nd ed.). https://www.worldobesity.org/resources/resource-library/world-obesity-atlas-2026

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.worldobesity.org/news/world-obesity-day-2026-8-billion-reasons-one-shared-challenge (date on page: 4 March 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-535
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Obesity Federation
Year
2026
Title
World obesity atlas 2026: Childhood obesity
Description
Released for World Obesity Day on 4 March 2026. Childhood obesity is rising in more than 180 countries, and the campaign frames obesity as a systems problem, not individual blame.
Publication or publisher
World Obesity Federation, 2nd edition
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.worldobesity.org/news/world-obesity-day-2026-8-billion-reasons-one-shared-challenge
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.worldobesity.org/news/world-obesity-day-2026-8-billion-reasons-one-shared-challenge (date on page: 4 March 2026).
Full APA reference
World Obesity Federation. (2026). *World obesity atlas 2026: Childhood obesity* (2nd ed.). https://www.worldobesity.org/resources/resource-library/world-obesity-atlas-2026
REF-536 Paper, guideline or statement

Walking together: Strategies to support Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander children and families

  • Report or review
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Workforce survey (3,064 responses) found low self-rated competence and limited cultural supervision. Recommends Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander-led cultural governance, cultural supervision, community-led training and data sovereignty.

Full APA reference

WellMob, & Emerging Minds. (2026). Walking together: Strategies to support Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander children and families. https://emergingminds-cdn.b-cdn.net/content/uploads/2026/08/06135143/Walking-together-report-2026.pdf

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://emergingminds-cdn.b-cdn.net/content/uploads/2026/08/06135143/Walking-together-report-2026.pdf (date on page: April 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-536
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
WellMob, & Emerging Minds
Year
2026
Title
Walking together: Strategies to support Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander children and families
Description
Workforce survey (3,064 responses) found low self-rated competence and limited cultural supervision. Recommends Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander-led cultural governance, cultural supervision, community-led training and data sovereignty.
Publication or publisher
Emerging Minds and WellMob
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://emergingminds-cdn.b-cdn.net/content/uploads/2026/08/06135143/Walking-together-report-2026.pdf
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://emergingminds-cdn.b-cdn.net/content/uploads/2026/08/06135143/Walking-together-report-2026.pdf (date on page: April 2026).
Related items
REF-522; REF-557
Full APA reference
WellMob, & Emerging Minds. (2026). *Walking together: Strategies to support Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander children and families*. https://emergingminds-cdn.b-cdn.net/content/uploads/2026/08/06135143/Walking-together-report-2026.pdf
REF-537 Paper, guideline or statement

Ultra-processed foods: Challenging corporate power and promoting local food systems to reclaim health

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

World Obesity Federation policy committee commentary treating ultra-processed foods as a structural, commercial determinant of health. Recommends taxes, warning labels, marketing limits and support for local and small-scale food systems.

Full APA reference

Carriedo, A., Labbé, M., Samuels, T. A., et al. (2026). Ultra-processed foods: Challenging corporate power and promoting local food systems to reclaim health. Globalization and Health, 22, Article 49. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0 (date on page: 2026 (volume 22)).

All fields
ID
REF-537
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Carriedo, A., Labbé, M., Samuels, T. A., et al
Year
2026
Title
Ultra-processed foods: Challenging corporate power and promoting local food systems to reclaim health
Description
World Obesity Federation policy committee commentary treating ultra-processed foods as a structural, commercial determinant of health. Recommends taxes, warning labels, marketing limits and support for local and small-scale food systems.
Publication or publisher
Globalization and Health, 22, Article 49
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0 (date on page: 2026 (volume 22)).
Related items
REF-543; REF-560; REF-513
Full APA reference
Carriedo, A., Labbé, M., Samuels, T. A., et al. (2026). Ultra-processed foods: Challenging corporate power and promoting local food systems to reclaim health. *Globalization and Health, 22*, Article 49. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12992-026-01212-0
REF-538 Paper, guideline or statement

Consensus-based clinical and research recommendations for use of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in the context of eating disorders: A modified Delphi study

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Mental and physical health

International Delphi consensus on when and how GLP-1 medicines should be used, or avoided, in people with eating disorders. Relevant as obesity medicines spread alongside lifestyle care.

Full APA reference

Keshen, A., Koning, E., Allison, K. C., Amaro, A., Bartel, S., Belliveau, P., Boniferro, L., Brar, S., et al. (2026). Consensus-based clinical and research recommendations for use of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in the context of eating disorders: A modified Delphi study. World Psychiatry, 25(3), 465-474. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/20515545

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/20515545 (date on page: 15 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-538
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Keshen, A., Koning, E., Allison, K. C., Amaro, A., Bartel, S., Belliveau, P., Boniferro, L., Brar, S., et al
Year
2026
Title
Consensus-based clinical and research recommendations for use of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in the context of eating disorders: A modified Delphi study
Description
International Delphi consensus on when and how GLP-1 medicines should be used, or avoided, in people with eating disorders. Relevant as obesity medicines spread alongside lifestyle care.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 25(3), 465-474
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/20515545
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/20515545 (date on page: 15 September 2026).
Full APA reference
Keshen, A., Koning, E., Allison, K. C., Amaro, A., Bartel, S., Belliveau, P., Boniferro, L., Brar, S., et al. (2026). Consensus-based clinical and research recommendations for use of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in the context of eating disorders: A modified Delphi study. *World Psychiatry, 25*(3), 465-474. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/20515545
REF-539 Paper, guideline or statement

Multidomain lifestyle intervention for the prevention of cognitive decline in at-risk older adults in Latin America (LatAm-FINGERS): A single-blind, multicentre, randomised controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

1,065 at-risk adults aged 60 to 77 in 11 Latin American countries. A culturally adapted, structured two-year programme improved global cognition more than a flexible programme (difference 0.11 SD a year). Note: abbreviated author list; the full list has 102 authors.

Full APA reference

Crivelli, L., Suemoto, C. K., Sosa, A. L., Lopera, F., Aguillón, D., Allegri, R. F., Nitrini, R., Calandri, I. L., ... LatAm-FINGERS Study Group. (2026). Multidomain lifestyle intervention for the prevention of cognitive decline in at-risk older adults in Latin America (LatAm-FINGERS): A single-blind, multicentre, randomised controlled trial. The Lancet, 408(10553), 417-429. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01278-X

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42442374/ (date on page: 13 July 2026 (epub); issue 1 August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-539
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Crivelli, L., Suemoto, C. K., Sosa, A. L., Lopera, F., Aguillón, D., Allegri, R. F., Nitrini, R., Calandri, I. L., ... LatAm-FINGERS Study Group
Year
2026
Title
Multidomain lifestyle intervention for the prevention of cognitive decline in at-risk older adults in Latin America (LatAm-FINGERS): A single-blind, multicentre, randomised controlled trial
Description
1,065 at-risk adults aged 60 to 77 in 11 Latin American countries. A culturally adapted, structured two-year programme improved global cognition more than a flexible programme (difference 0.11 SD a year). Note: abbreviated author list; the full list has 102 authors.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet, 408(10553), 417-429
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Latin America (11 countries)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42442374/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01278-X
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42442374/ (date on page: 13 July 2026 (epub); issue 1 August 2026).
Related items
REF-541
Full APA reference
Crivelli, L., Suemoto, C. K., Sosa, A. L., Lopera, F., Aguillón, D., Allegri, R. F., Nitrini, R., Calandri, I. L., ... LatAm-FINGERS Study Group. (2026). Multidomain lifestyle intervention for the prevention of cognitive decline in at-risk older adults in Latin America (LatAm-FINGERS): A single-blind, multicentre, randomised controlled trial. *The Lancet, 408*(10553), 417-429. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01278-X
REF-540 Paper, guideline or statement

The burden of low physical activity in Australia: A comprehensive comparative risk assessment

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Counting the direct effects on depression and anxiety raises the Australian burden of low physical activity to 200,000 DALYs in 2024, 68% above standard estimates. About 40,100 of the extra DALYs come from depression and anxiety.

Full APA reference

Bourke, E., Maddison, R., & Blakely, T. (2026). The burden of low physical activity in Australia: A comprehensive comparative risk assessment. The Lancet Public Health, 11(9), e642-e649. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00144-1

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42612649/ (date on page: September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-540
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bourke, E., Maddison, R., & Blakely, T.
Year
2026
Title
The burden of low physical activity in Australia: A comprehensive comparative risk assessment
Description
Counting the direct effects on depression and anxiety raises the Australian burden of low physical activity to 200,000 DALYs in 2024, 68% above standard estimates. About 40,100 of the extra DALYs come from depression and anxiety.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Public Health, 11(9), e642-e649
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42612649/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00144-1
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42612649/ (date on page: September 2026).
Related items
REF-516; REF-541
Full APA reference
Bourke, E., Maddison, R., & Blakely, T. (2026). The burden of low physical activity in Australia: A comprehensive comparative risk assessment. *The Lancet Public Health, 11*(9), e642-e649. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00144-1
REF-541 Paper, guideline or statement

Domain-specific physical activity levels and risk of dementia: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

74 studies, 4.2 million people in 30 countries. Leisure-time activity was linked to 24% lower dementia risk, but occupational activity (RR 1.20) and commuting activity (RR 1.10) were linked to higher risk. The authors call for equitable leisure time and safe spaces to exercise.

Full APA reference

Feter, N., Iso-Markku, P., Markarian, T., Luong, D. M., Gunnink, J., Schröder, N., Caputo, E. L., Feter, J., Nanda, A., Hourihan, S., da Silva, G. S., Ventura, A., Bumaguin, D. B., Klimentidis, Y. C., Alexander, G. E., Umpierre, D., Hallal, P. C., Rombaldi, A. J., & Raichlen, D. A. (2026). Domain-specific physical activity levels and risk of dementia: A systematic review and meta-analysis. The Lancet Public Health, 11(9), e650-e664. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00142-8

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13532401/ (date on page: September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-541
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Feter, N., Iso-Markku, P., Markarian, T., Luong, D. M., Gunnink, J., Schröder, N., Caputo, E. L., Feter, J., Nanda, A., Hourihan, S., da Silva, G. S., Ventura, A., Bumaguin, D. B., Klimentidis, Y. C., Alexander, G. E., Umpierre, D., Hallal, P. C., Rombaldi, A. J., & Raichlen, D. A.
Year
2026
Title
Domain-specific physical activity levels and risk of dementia: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
74 studies, 4.2 million people in 30 countries. Leisure-time activity was linked to 24% lower dementia risk, but occupational activity (RR 1.20) and commuting activity (RR 1.10) were linked to higher risk. The authors call for equitable leisure time and safe spaces to exercise.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Public Health, 11(9), e650-e664
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Workplace and occupational health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13532401/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00142-8
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13532401/ (date on page: September 2026).
Related items
REF-540; REF-539; REF-578
Full APA reference
Feter, N., Iso-Markku, P., Markarian, T., Luong, D. M., Gunnink, J., Schröder, N., Caputo, E. L., Feter, J., Nanda, A., Hourihan, S., da Silva, G. S., Ventura, A., Bumaguin, D. B., Klimentidis, Y. C., Alexander, G. E., Umpierre, D., Hallal, P. C., Rombaldi, A. J., & Raichlen, D. A. (2026). Domain-specific physical activity levels and risk of dementia: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *The Lancet Public Health, 11*(9), e650-e664. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2468-2667(26)00142-8
REF-542 Paper, guideline or statement

The Lancet Commission on 21st century global threats to health

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Ranks threats by avoidable health loss to 2100 and identifies 15 catastrophic threats; media coverage reports obesity as the largest avoidable burden. Stresses the unequal impact on low-income and marginalised groups.

Full APA reference

Murray, C. J. L., Vollset, S. E., Ahlstrom, A., Altay, U., Bhattacharjee, N., Bisignano, C., Brauer, M., Bryazka, D., et al. (2026). The Lancet Commission on 21st century global threats to health. The Lancet. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01714-9

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.healthdata.org/research-analysis/library/lancet-commission-21st-century-global-threats-health (date on page: 10 to 11 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-542
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Murray, C. J. L., Vollset, S. E., Ahlstrom, A., Altay, U., Bhattacharjee, N., Bisignano, C., Brauer, M., Bryazka, D., et al
Year
2026
Title
The Lancet Commission on 21st century global threats to health
Description
Ranks threats by avoidable health loss to 2100 and identifies 15 catastrophic threats; media coverage reports obesity as the largest avoidable burden. Stresses the unequal impact on low-income and marginalised groups.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
General health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Climate, heat and environmental health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.healthdata.org/research-analysis/library/lancet-commission-21st-century-global-threats-health
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01714-9
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.healthdata.org/research-analysis/library/lancet-commission-21st-century-global-threats-health (date on page: 10 to 11 October 2026).
Related items
REF-535; REF-546
Full APA reference
Murray, C. J. L., Vollset, S. E., Ahlstrom, A., Altay, U., Bhattacharjee, N., Bisignano, C., Brauer, M., Bryazka, D., et al. (2026). The Lancet Commission on 21st century global threats to health. *The Lancet*. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(26)01714-9
REF-543 Paper, guideline or statement

Reducing ultraprocessed foods from the diets of patients with depression: A pilot crossover trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

20 adults with depression and metabolic problems cut ultra-processed food by more than 85% for four weeks, with moderate-to-large gains on three depression measures. A small pilot that supports a larger trial.

Full APA reference

Chagwedera, D. N., Kim, E., Chiu, D. T., Jin, C., Lee, C., Tye, S., & Krystal, A. (2026). Reducing ultraprocessed foods from the diets of patients with depression: A pilot crossover trial. JAMA Psychiatry. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://media.jamanetwork.com/media-releases/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320 (date on page: 23 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-543
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Chagwedera, D. N., Kim, E., Chiu, D. T., Jin, C., Lee, C., Tye, S., & Krystal, A.
Year
2026
Title
Reducing ultraprocessed foods from the diets of patients with depression: A pilot crossover trial
Description
20 adults with depression and metabolic problems cut ultra-processed food by more than 85% for four weeks, with moderate-to-large gains on three depression measures. A small pilot that supports a larger trial.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Psychiatry. Advance online publication
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://media.jamanetwork.com/media-releases/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://media.jamanetwork.com/media-releases/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320 (date on page: 23 September 2026).
Related items
REF-561; REF-562; REF-537
Full APA reference
Chagwedera, D. N., Kim, E., Chiu, D. T., Jin, C., Lee, C., Tye, S., & Krystal, A. (2026). Reducing ultraprocessed foods from the diets of patients with depression: A pilot crossover trial. *JAMA Psychiatry*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamapsychiatry.2026.2320
REF-544 Paper, guideline or statement

Effectiveness of a nature-based social prescribing intervention on loneliness and health-related quality of life among vulnerable urban adults (RECETAS-BCN): An observer-blinded randomised controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

320 lonely adults in 12 low-income Barcelona neighbourhoods. Loneliness fell about 10.5% in both group nature sessions and active signposting, with no difference between arms; group sessions helped more for those lonelier or with lower wellbeing at baseline.

Full APA reference

Coll-Planas, L., Masó-Aguado, M., Briones-Buixassa, L., Morató, A., Mendez, S., Carbó, A., Fuente-Vidal, A., Olivella-Cirici, M., et al. (2026). Effectiveness of a nature-based social prescribing intervention on loneliness and health-related quality of life among vulnerable urban adults (RECETAS-BCN): An observer-blinded randomised controlled trial. The Lancet Regional Health - Europe, 69, Article 101821. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanepe.2026.101821

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42662493/ (date on page: 18 August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-544
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Coll-Planas, L., Masó-Aguado, M., Briones-Buixassa, L., Morató, A., Mendez, S., Carbó, A., Fuente-Vidal, A., Olivella-Cirici, M., et al
Year
2026
Title
Effectiveness of a nature-based social prescribing intervention on loneliness and health-related quality of life among vulnerable urban adults (RECETAS-BCN): An observer-blinded randomised controlled trial
Description
320 lonely adults in 12 low-income Barcelona neighbourhoods. Loneliness fell about 10.5% in both group nature sessions and active signposting, with no difference between arms; group sessions helped more for those lonelier or with lower wellbeing at baseline.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Regional Health - Europe, 69, Article 101821
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Environmental and conservation psychology
Jurisdiction
Spain
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42662493/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanepe.2026.101821
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42662493/ (date on page: 18 August 2026).
Related items
REF-545; REF-529; REF-525
Full APA reference
Coll-Planas, L., Masó-Aguado, M., Briones-Buixassa, L., Morató, A., Mendez, S., Carbó, A., Fuente-Vidal, A., Olivella-Cirici, M., et al. (2026). Effectiveness of a nature-based social prescribing intervention on loneliness and health-related quality of life among vulnerable urban adults (RECETAS-BCN): An observer-blinded randomised controlled trial. *The Lancet Regional Health - Europe, 69*, Article 101821. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lanepe.2026.101821
REF-545 Paper, guideline or statement

A randomized controlled trial of social prescribing: Comparing a comprehensive navigation model with signposting

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Social connection
  • Social determinants of health

In Ontario primary care, longitudinal navigation beat 211 signposting for getting people to a needed health or social resource (50.3% vs 35.8%), and improved language-concordant access for Francophones.

Full APA reference

Dahrouge, S., Gauthier, A. P., Durand, F., Lemonde, M., Timony, P., Saluja, K., Kendall, C. E., Premji, K., Chomienne, M.-H., Taljaard, M., Hoyles, J., Toal-Sullivan, D., James, K., Presseau, J., & Prud'homme, D. (2026). A randomized controlled trial of social prescribing: Comparing a comprehensive navigation model with signposting. Annals of Family Medicine, 24(4), 301-310. https://doi.org/10.1370/afm.250265

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42509165/ (date on page: 27 July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-545
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dahrouge, S., Gauthier, A. P., Durand, F., Lemonde, M., Timony, P., Saluja, K., Kendall, C. E., Premji, K., Chomienne, M.-H., Taljaard, M., Hoyles, J., Toal-Sullivan, D., James, K., Presseau, J., & Prud'homme, D.
Year
2026
Title
A randomized controlled trial of social prescribing: Comparing a comprehensive navigation model with signposting
Description
In Ontario primary care, longitudinal navigation beat 211 signposting for getting people to a needed health or social resource (50.3% vs 35.8%), and improved language-concordant access for Francophones.
Publication or publisher
Annals of Family Medicine, 24(4), 301-310
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42509165/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1370/afm.250265
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42509165/ (date on page: 27 July 2026).
Related items
REF-544
Full APA reference
Dahrouge, S., Gauthier, A. P., Durand, F., Lemonde, M., Timony, P., Saluja, K., Kendall, C. E., Premji, K., Chomienne, M.-H., Taljaard, M., Hoyles, J., Toal-Sullivan, D., James, K., Presseau, J., & Prud'homme, D. (2026). A randomized controlled trial of social prescribing: Comparing a comprehensive navigation model with signposting. *Annals of Family Medicine, 24*(4), 301-310. https://doi.org/10.1370/afm.250265
REF-546 Paper, guideline or statement

First global synthesis of heat-related mental health impacts in children and young people: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Nature and environment
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Each 1°C rise in daily temperature was linked to 0.9% more mental health morbidity in people aged 0 to 25. No studies came from Africa or the Pacific, the hottest and most disadvantaged regions.

Full APA reference

Kwan, S., Stephens, J., Bradshaw, C. J. A., Varghese, B. M., Thompson, K., Judge, M. A., Le Souëf, P. N., & Fatima, S. H. (2026). First global synthesis of heat-related mental health impacts in children and young people: A systematic review and meta-analysis. International Journal of Epidemiology, 55(4), Article dyag121. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag121

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13401444/ (date on page: 25 July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-546
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kwan, S., Stephens, J., Bradshaw, C. J. A., Varghese, B. M., Thompson, K., Judge, M. A., Le Souëf, P. N., & Fatima, S. H.
Year
2026
Title
First global synthesis of heat-related mental health impacts in children and young people: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Each 1°C rise in daily temperature was linked to 0.9% more mental health morbidity in people aged 0 to 25. No studies came from Africa or the Pacific, the hottest and most disadvantaged regions.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 55(4), Article dyag121
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13401444/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag121
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13401444/ (date on page: 25 July 2026).
Related items
REF-542; REF-575
Full APA reference
Kwan, S., Stephens, J., Bradshaw, C. J. A., Varghese, B. M., Thompson, K., Judge, M. A., Le Souëf, P. N., & Fatima, S. H. (2026). First global synthesis of heat-related mental health impacts in children and young people: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *International Journal of Epidemiology, 55*(4), Article dyag121. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag121
REF-547 Paper, guideline or statement

Social cohesion, social capital and mental health: Current evidence and future research directions

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Review finding that social cohesion in neighbourhoods, schools and workplaces protects against common mental disorders, suicidality and substance misuse, drawing on studies from the US, Japan, Korea, Canada, the UK and Denmark.

Full APA reference

Kawachi, I. (2026). Social cohesion, social capital and mental health: Current evidence and future research directions. World Psychiatry, 25(2), 168-189. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70040

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.wpanet.org/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/World-Psychiatry_June-2026.pdf (date on page: June 2026 issue).

All fields
ID
REF-547
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kawachi, I.
Year
2026
Title
Social cohesion, social capital and mental health: Current evidence and future research directions
Description
Review finding that social cohesion in neighbourhoods, schools and workplaces protects against common mental disorders, suicidality and substance misuse, drawing on studies from the US, Japan, Korea, Canada, the UK and Denmark.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 25(2), 168-189
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.wpanet.org/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/World-Psychiatry_June-2026.pdf
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70040
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.wpanet.org/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/World-Psychiatry_June-2026.pdf (date on page: June 2026 issue).
Related items
REF-525; REF-527
Full APA reference
Kawachi, I. (2026). Social cohesion, social capital and mental health: Current evidence and future research directions. *World Psychiatry, 25*(2), 168-189. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70040
REF-548 Paper, guideline or statement

Real-world comprehensive care of people living with schizophrenia: Recommendations across different settings and clinical stages

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Recommendations for high, middle and low-resource settings covering physical health, lifestyle, social determinants, peer support and culturally adapted care, including work with traditional and faith healers where appropriate.

Full APA reference

Fusar-Poli, P., Pillinger, T., McCutcheon, R. A., Rangaswamy, T., Asmal, L., Singh, S. P., Oliver, D., Stefanelli, R., et al. (2026). Real-world comprehensive care of people living with schizophrenia: Recommendations across different settings and clinical stages. World Psychiatry, 25(2), 231-264. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70066

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13176881/ (date on page: 15 May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-548
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Fusar-Poli, P., Pillinger, T., McCutcheon, R. A., Rangaswamy, T., Asmal, L., Singh, S. P., Oliver, D., Stefanelli, R., et al
Year
2026
Title
Real-world comprehensive care of people living with schizophrenia: Recommendations across different settings and clinical stages
Description
Recommendations for high, middle and low-resource settings covering physical health, lifestyle, social determinants, peer support and culturally adapted care, including work with traditional and faith healers where appropriate.
Publication or publisher
World Psychiatry, 25(2), 231-264
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Global
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13176881/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70066
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13176881/ (date on page: 15 May 2026).
Related items
REF-538
Full APA reference
Fusar-Poli, P., Pillinger, T., McCutcheon, R. A., Rangaswamy, T., Asmal, L., Singh, S. P., Oliver, D., Stefanelli, R., et al. (2026). Real-world comprehensive care of people living with schizophrenia: Recommendations across different settings and clinical stages. *World Psychiatry, 25*(2), 231-264. https://doi.org/10.1002/wps.70066
REF-549 Paper, guideline or statement

Continuous glucose monitoring in type 2 diabetes and beyond: A review

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Weight and metabolic health
  • Cardiometabolic health

Finds no evidence that continuous glucose monitors improve health or prevent disease in people without diabetes, and warns of needless food restriction, anxiety and diverted resources.

Full APA reference

Dower, J. A., Johansson, M., Camp, A., Montori, V. M., & Lipska, K. J. (2026). Continuous glucose monitoring in type 2 diabetes and beyond: A review. JAMA Internal Medicine. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2026.2772

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.gu.se/en/news/no-evidence-that-continuous-glucose-monitors-improve-health-in-people-without-diabetes (date on page: August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-549
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Dower, J. A., Johansson, M., Camp, A., Montori, V. M., & Lipska, K. J.
Year
2026
Title
Continuous glucose monitoring in type 2 diabetes and beyond: A review
Description
Finds no evidence that continuous glucose monitors improve health or prevent disease in people without diabetes, and warns of needless food restriction, anxiety and diverted resources.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Internal Medicine. Advance online publication
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Weight and metabolic health
All lifestyle domains
Weight and metabolic health; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.gu.se/en/news/no-evidence-that-continuous-glucose-monitors-improve-health-in-people-without-diabetes
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2026.2772
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.gu.se/en/news/no-evidence-that-continuous-glucose-monitors-improve-health-in-people-without-diabetes (date on page: August 2026).
Related items
REF-550; REF-519
Full APA reference
Dower, J. A., Johansson, M., Camp, A., Montori, V. M., & Lipska, K. J. (2026). Continuous glucose monitoring in type 2 diabetes and beyond: A review. *JAMA Internal Medicine*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2026.2772
REF-550 Paper, guideline or statement

DARE to wear: Digital health promotion and disease prevention using wearable devices

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • General health

Describes 16 Italian DARE studies using 18 wearables from 12 makers to track activity, sleep, heart rate variability, nutrition and glucose in more than 8,000 participants, with frank notes on device limits.

Full APA reference

D'Ascanio, I., Moscato, S., Albites-Sanabria, J., Bacalini, M. G., Bellafiore, M., Belli, L., Berti, L., Bhuyan, M. J., ... Chiari, L. (2026). DARE to wear: Digital health promotion and disease prevention using wearable devices. npj Digital Medicine. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z (date on page: 19 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-550
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
D'Ascanio, I., Moscato, S., Albites-Sanabria, J., Bacalini, M. G., Bellafiore, M., Belli, L., Berti, L., Bhuyan, M. J., ... Chiari, L.
Year
2026
Title
DARE to wear: Digital health promotion and disease prevention using wearable devices
Description
Describes 16 Italian DARE studies using 18 wearables from 12 makers to track activity, sleep, heart rate variability, nutrition and glucose in more than 8,000 participants, with frank notes on device limits.
Publication or publisher
npj Digital Medicine
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Italy
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z (date on page: 19 September 2026).
Related items
REF-551; REF-549
Full APA reference
D'Ascanio, I., Moscato, S., Albites-Sanabria, J., Bacalini, M. G., Bellafiore, M., Belli, L., Berti, L., Bhuyan, M. J., ... Chiari, L. (2026). DARE to wear: Digital health promotion and disease prevention using wearable devices. *npj Digital Medicine*. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41746-026-03230-z
REF-551 Paper, guideline or statement

Assessing the use of wearable mobile-monitoring devices among individuals with serious mental illness: Qualitative acceptability and feasibility study

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Veterans with serious mental illness found Fitbit devices acceptable for tracking activity, sleep and mood, but needed help interpreting data and handling technical problems.

Full APA reference

Freitas, A. M., Chavez, J. G., Chinchilla, M., Calderon, R., Chassman, S., Hoffmann, L., & Young, A. S. (2026). Assessing the use of wearable mobile-monitoring devices among individuals with serious mental illness: Qualitative acceptability and feasibility study. Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28(1), Article e85087. https://doi.org/10.2196/85087

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.jmir.org/2026/1/e85087/PDF (date on page: 15 May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-551
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Freitas, A. M., Chavez, J. G., Chinchilla, M., Calderon, R., Chassman, S., Hoffmann, L., & Young, A. S.
Year
2026
Title
Assessing the use of wearable mobile-monitoring devices among individuals with serious mental illness: Qualitative acceptability and feasibility study
Description
Veterans with serious mental illness found Fitbit devices acceptable for tracking activity, sleep and mood, but needed help interpreting data and handling technical problems.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28(1), Article e85087
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.jmir.org/2026/1/e85087/PDF
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2196/85087
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.jmir.org/2026/1/e85087/PDF (date on page: 15 May 2026).
Related items
REF-552; REF-550
Full APA reference
Freitas, A. M., Chavez, J. G., Chinchilla, M., Calderon, R., Chassman, S., Hoffmann, L., & Young, A. S. (2026). Assessing the use of wearable mobile-monitoring devices among individuals with serious mental illness: Qualitative acceptability and feasibility study. *Journal of Medical Internet Research, 28*(1), Article e85087. https://doi.org/10.2196/85087
REF-552 Paper, guideline or statement

Using wearables in mental health care for children and adolescents: A scoping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

85 studies; most monitored sleep, and wearables were used almost only for assessment rather than intervention.

Full APA reference

Bergwerff, C. E., Buisman, R. S. M., Nibbering, N., & Noordermeer, S. D. S. (2026). Using wearables in mental health care for children and adolescents: A scoping review. Research on Child and Adolescent Psychopathology, 54(1), Article 16. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10802-025-01408-9

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41588150/ (date on page: 26 January 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-552
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bergwerff, C. E., Buisman, R. S. M., Nibbering, N., & Noordermeer, S. D. S.
Year
2026
Title
Using wearables in mental health care for children and adolescents: A scoping review
Description
85 studies; most monitored sleep, and wearables were used almost only for assessment rather than intervention.
Publication or publisher
Research on Child and Adolescent Psychopathology, 54(1), Article 16
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41588150/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10802-025-01408-9
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41588150/ (date on page: 26 January 2026).
Related items
REF-551; REF-532; REF-550
Full APA reference
Bergwerff, C. E., Buisman, R. S. M., Nibbering, N., & Noordermeer, S. D. S. (2026). Using wearables in mental health care for children and adolescents: A scoping review. *Research on Child and Adolescent Psychopathology, 54*(1), Article 16. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10802-025-01408-9
REF-553 Paper, guideline or statement

Comparative efficacy of digital health interventions for depression and anxiety symptoms in adolescents and young adults: A systematic review and Bayesian network meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

18 RCTs (5,821 young people aged 12 to 25). CBT-based digital tools ranked best and reduced anxiety; the effect on depression was not statistically significant, and evidence quality was low to moderate.

Full APA reference

Wang, H., Yao, J., Jia, S., Chen, W., Guan, Y., Liu, J., Liao, M., Hu, E., & Zhang, Q. (2026). Comparative efficacy of digital health interventions for depression and anxiety symptoms in adolescents and young adults: A systematic review and Bayesian network meta-analysis. Child and Adolescent Psychiatry and Mental Health. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13034-026-01042-3

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41691290/ (date on page: 14 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-553
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, H., Yao, J., Jia, S., Chen, W., Guan, Y., Liu, J., Liao, M., Hu, E., & Zhang, Q.
Year
2026
Title
Comparative efficacy of digital health interventions for depression and anxiety symptoms in adolescents and young adults: A systematic review and Bayesian network meta-analysis
Description
18 RCTs (5,821 young people aged 12 to 25). CBT-based digital tools ranked best and reduced anxiety; the effect on depression was not statistically significant, and evidence quality was low to moderate.
Publication or publisher
Child and Adolescent Psychiatry and Mental Health
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Clinical and counselling psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41691290/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13034-026-01042-3
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41691290/ (date on page: 14 February 2026).
Related items
REF-520
Full APA reference
Wang, H., Yao, J., Jia, S., Chen, W., Guan, Y., Liu, J., Liao, M., Hu, E., & Zhang, Q. (2026). Comparative efficacy of digital health interventions for depression and anxiety symptoms in adolescents and young adults: A systematic review and Bayesian network meta-analysis. *Child and Adolescent Psychiatry and Mental Health*. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13034-026-01042-3
REF-554 Paper, guideline or statement

Defining the dose-response curve of digital CBT for insomnia: A model-based network meta-analysis of treatment duration and clinical effectiveness

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Sleep
  • Mental health and wellbeing

73 RCTs (14,465 people). Benefit from digital CBT-I rose with treatment time and plateaued beyond about 300 minutes; insomnia with comorbidities responded at lower doses.

Full APA reference

Huang, Y.-B., Yuan, L., Zhu, Y., Chen, M., & Zheng, H. (2026). Defining the dose-response curve of digital CBT for insomnia: A model-based network meta-analysis of treatment duration and clinical effectiveness. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 200, Article 105017. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.brat.2026.105017

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41830655/ (date on page: 11 March 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-554
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Huang, Y.-B., Yuan, L., Zhu, Y., Chen, M., & Zheng, H.
Year
2026
Title
Defining the dose-response curve of digital CBT for insomnia: A model-based network meta-analysis of treatment duration and clinical effectiveness
Description
73 RCTs (14,465 people). Benefit from digital CBT-I rose with treatment time and plateaued beyond about 300 minutes; insomnia with comorbidities responded at lower doses.
Publication or publisher
Behaviour Research and Therapy, 200, Article 105017
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Health psychology and behavioural medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Sleep
All lifestyle domains
Sleep
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41830655/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.brat.2026.105017
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41830655/ (date on page: 11 March 2026).
Full APA reference
Huang, Y.-B., Yuan, L., Zhu, Y., Chen, M., & Zheng, H. (2026). Defining the dose-response curve of digital CBT for insomnia: A model-based network meta-analysis of treatment duration and clinical effectiveness. *Behaviour Research and Therapy, 200*, Article 105017. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.brat.2026.105017
REF-555 Paper, guideline or statement

Comparative efficacy of exercise interventions for anxiety disorders: A Bayesian network meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental health and wellbeing

45 studies (2,643 people). Meditation (g = -0.72), yoga (-0.59) and tai chi or qigong (-0.52) had the largest effects on anxiety; resistance, aerobic and walking also helped.

Full APA reference

Liu, J., Wang, H., Lan, Y., Yuan, D., Du, B., Zhou, Y., Zhang, W., Ke, X.-W., Jiang, Q., Wang, F., Cao, S., & Sun, J. (2026). Comparative efficacy of exercise interventions for anxiety disorders: A Bayesian network meta-analysis. Psychology Research and Behavior Management, 19, Article 570270. https://doi.org/10.2147/PRBM.S570270

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41737993/ (date on page: 17 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-555
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Liu, J., Wang, H., Lan, Y., Yuan, D., Du, B., Zhou, Y., Zhang, W., Ke, X.-W., Jiang, Q., Wang, F., Cao, S., & Sun, J.
Year
2026
Title
Comparative efficacy of exercise interventions for anxiety disorders: A Bayesian network meta-analysis
Description
45 studies (2,643 people). Meditation (g = -0.72), yoga (-0.59) and tai chi or qigong (-0.52) had the largest effects on anxiety; resistance, aerobic and walking also helped.
Publication or publisher
Psychology Research and Behavior Management, 19, Article 570270
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41737993/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2147/PRBM.S570270
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41737993/ (date on page: 17 February 2026).
Related items
REF-556
Full APA reference
Liu, J., Wang, H., Lan, Y., Yuan, D., Du, B., Zhou, Y., Zhang, W., Ke, X.-W., Jiang, Q., Wang, F., Cao, S., & Sun, J. (2026). Comparative efficacy of exercise interventions for anxiety disorders: A Bayesian network meta-analysis. *Psychology Research and Behavior Management, 19*, Article 570270. https://doi.org/10.2147/PRBM.S570270
REF-556 Paper, guideline or statement

Adverse experiences in brief meditation practices: Randomized controlled trial

  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Randomised controlled trial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

5,049 adults in the US and UK. Brief meditation did not raise distressing experiences compared with internet use and lowered increases in negative affect, though 10-minute sessions caused more distress than 5-minute ones.

Full APA reference

Simonsson, O., Jiwani, Z., Ruiz, M., Narayanan, J., Osika, W., Hirshberg, M. J., & Goldberg, S. B. (2026). Adverse experiences in brief meditation practices: Randomized controlled trial. JMIR Mental Health, 13(1), Article e95628. https://doi.org/10.2196/95628

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://mental.jmir.org/2026/1/e95628 (date on page: 14 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-556
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Simonsson, O., Jiwani, Z., Ruiz, M., Narayanan, J., Osika, W., Hirshberg, M. J., & Goldberg, S. B.
Year
2026
Title
Adverse experiences in brief meditation practices: Randomized controlled trial
Description
5,049 adults in the US and UK. Brief meditation did not raise distressing experiences compared with internet use and lowered increases in negative affect, though 10-minute sessions caused more distress than 5-minute ones.
Publication or publisher
JMIR Mental Health, 13(1), Article e95628
Resource type
Randomised controlled trial
Evidence type
Randomised controlled trial
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Positive psychology and wellbeing science
Jurisdiction
United States; United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Stress, mind and positive psychology
All lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://mental.jmir.org/2026/1/e95628
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.2196/95628
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://mental.jmir.org/2026/1/e95628 (date on page: 14 September 2026).
Related items
REF-555
Full APA reference
Simonsson, O., Jiwani, Z., Ruiz, M., Narayanan, J., Osika, W., Hirshberg, M. J., & Goldberg, S. B. (2026). Adverse experiences in brief meditation practices: Randomized controlled trial. *JMIR Mental Health, 13*(1), Article e95628. https://doi.org/10.2196/95628
REF-557 Paper, guideline or statement

Being heard, being valued, being understood: Aboriginal community perspectives on adapting a healthy lifestyle program for Boorloo/Perth, Western Australia: A qualitative study

  • Journal article
  • Qualitative or perspectives study
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

29 Aboriginal advisors, including 28 Elders, identified 16 barriers and 28 enablers for culturally safe adaptation of a family healthy lifestyle programme.

Full APA reference

Paull, S., Smith, S., Bill, J., Moullin, J. C., Harris, T., & Anderson, Y. C. (2026). Being heard, being valued, being understood: Aboriginal community perspectives on adapting a healthy lifestyle program for Boorloo/Perth, Western Australia: A qualitative study. Health Expectations, 29(4), Article e70754. https://doi.org/10.1111/hex.70754

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/hex.70754 (date on page: 16 July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-557
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Paull, S., Smith, S., Bill, J., Moullin, J. C., Harris, T., & Anderson, Y. C.
Year
2026
Title
Being heard, being valued, being understood: Aboriginal community perspectives on adapting a healthy lifestyle program for Boorloo/Perth, Western Australia: A qualitative study
Description
29 Aboriginal advisors, including 28 Elders, identified 16 barriers and 28 enablers for culturally safe adaptation of a family healthy lifestyle programme.
Publication or publisher
Health Expectations, 29(4), Article e70754
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Qualitative or perspectives study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/hex.70754
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/hex.70754
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/hex.70754 (date on page: 16 July 2026).
Related items
REF-522; REF-536; REF-558
Full APA reference
Paull, S., Smith, S., Bill, J., Moullin, J. C., Harris, T., & Anderson, Y. C. (2026). Being heard, being valued, being understood: Aboriginal community perspectives on adapting a healthy lifestyle program for Boorloo/Perth, Western Australia: A qualitative study. *Health Expectations, 29*(4), Article e70754. https://doi.org/10.1111/hex.70754
REF-558 Paper, guideline or statement

Culturally adapted multimodal lifestyle approaches for metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease: Role of diet, physical activity and sleep

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Cardiometabolic health

Australian review urging culturally safe, co-designed diet, activity and sleep programmes for culturally and linguistically diverse and First Nations people, beyond a one-size Mediterranean model.

Full APA reference

George, E. S., Sood, S., Sualeheen, A., Cartledge, S., Roberts, S. K., Daly, R. M., Tan, S.-Y., Scott, D., Wheeler, K., George, J., & Keating, S. E. (2026). Culturally adapted multimodal lifestyle approaches for metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease: Role of diet, physical activity and sleep. Proceedings of the Nutrition Society. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665126103048

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/proceedings-of-the-nutrition-society/article/culturally-adapted-multimodal-lifestyle-approaches-for-metabolic-dysfunctionassociated-steatotic-liver-disease-role-of-diet-physical-activity-and-sleep/C3E1D5609C8ACDD0D7D662B7A952735A (date on page: 20 May 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-558
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
George, E. S., Sood, S., Sualeheen, A., Cartledge, S., Roberts, S. K., Daly, R. M., Tan, S.-Y., Scott, D., Wheeler, K., George, J., & Keating, S. E.
Year
2026
Title
Culturally adapted multimodal lifestyle approaches for metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease: Role of diet, physical activity and sleep
Description
Australian review urging culturally safe, co-designed diet, activity and sleep programmes for culturally and linguistically diverse and First Nations people, beyond a one-size Mediterranean model.
Publication or publisher
Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, advance online publication, 1-13
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/proceedings-of-the-nutrition-society/article/culturally-adapted-multimodal-lifestyle-approaches-for-metabolic-dysfunctionassociated-steatotic-liver-disease-role-of-diet-physical-activity-and-sleep/C3E1D5609C8ACDD0D7D662B7A952735A
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665126103048
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/proceedings-of-the-nutrition-society/article/culturally-adapted-multimodal-lifestyle-approaches-for-metabolic-dysfunctionassociated-steatotic-liver-disease-role-of-diet-physical-activity-and-sleep/C3E1D5609C8ACDD0D7D662B7A952735A (date on page: 20 May 2026).
Related items
REF-557; REF-521
Full APA reference
George, E. S., Sood, S., Sualeheen, A., Cartledge, S., Roberts, S. K., Daly, R. M., Tan, S.-Y., Scott, D., Wheeler, K., George, J., & Keating, S. E. (2026). Culturally adapted multimodal lifestyle approaches for metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease: Role of diet, physical activity and sleep. *Proceedings of the Nutrition Society*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665126103048
REF-559 Paper, guideline or statement

Socioeconomic inequalities in the prevalence of chronic non-communicable disease risk factors in the DIMAMO health and demographic surveillance system

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Social determinants of health

In rural Limpopo, South Africa, smoking, inactivity and low fruit and vegetable intake clustered among poorer adults while diabetes and alcohol use were more common among wealthier adults.

Full APA reference

Ravhuhali, K. G., Ntimana, C. B., & Maimela, E. (2026). Socioeconomic inequalities in the prevalence of chronic non-communicable disease risk factors in the DIMAMO health and demographic surveillance system. Frontiers in Public Health, 14, Article 1756409. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1756409

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41778124/ (date on page: 16 February 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-559
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ravhuhali, K. G., Ntimana, C. B., & Maimela, E.
Year
2026
Title
Socioeconomic inequalities in the prevalence of chronic non-communicable disease risk factors in the DIMAMO health and demographic surveillance system
Description
In rural Limpopo, South Africa, smoking, inactivity and low fruit and vegetable intake clustered among poorer adults while diabetes and alcohol use were more common among wealthier adults.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Public Health, 14, Article 1756409
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
South Africa
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41778124/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1756409
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41778124/ (date on page: 16 February 2026).
Related items
REF-563; REF-564
Full APA reference
Ravhuhali, K. G., Ntimana, C. B., & Maimela, E. (2026). Socioeconomic inequalities in the prevalence of chronic non-communicable disease risk factors in the DIMAMO health and demographic surveillance system. *Frontiers in Public Health, 14*, Article 1756409. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2026.1756409
REF-560 Paper, guideline or statement

Food-environment policies for child nutrition in Ecuador and Latin America: Beyond front-of-package labels and advertising restrictions

  • Journal article
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Social determinants of health

Argues that warning labels and marketing limits are not enough where healthy food is unaffordable, and proposes school food, fiscal incentives, digital marketing rules and protection from industry capture.

Full APA reference

López-Gil, J. F., Quiroz-Cárdenas, F., & López-Moreno, M. (2026). Food-environment policies for child nutrition in Ecuador and Latin America: Beyond front-of-package labels and advertising restrictions. The Lancet Regional Health - Americas, 61, Article 101532. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lana.2026.101532

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42375986/ (date on page: 18 June 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-560
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
López-Gil, J. F., Quiroz-Cárdenas, F., & López-Moreno, M.
Year
2026
Title
Food-environment policies for child nutrition in Ecuador and Latin America: Beyond front-of-package labels and advertising restrictions
Description
Argues that warning labels and marketing limits are not enough where healthy food is unaffordable, and proposes school food, fiscal incentives, digital marketing rules and protection from industry capture.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Regional Health - Americas, 61, Article 101532
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Nutrition and dietary science
Jurisdiction
Ecuador; Latin America
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Weight and metabolic health
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Prevention and public health; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42375986/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lana.2026.101532
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42375986/ (date on page: 18 June 2026).
Related items
REF-537; REF-513
Full APA reference
López-Gil, J. F., Quiroz-Cárdenas, F., & López-Moreno, M. (2026). Food-environment policies for child nutrition in Ecuador and Latin America: Beyond front-of-package labels and advertising restrictions. *The Lancet Regional Health - Americas, 61*, Article 101532. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.lana.2026.101532
REF-561 Paper, guideline or statement

Integrating nutrition into mental health care: An exploratory cross-sectional survey of training, practices, barriers, and collaboration among mental health and nutrition professionals

  • Journal article
  • Cross-sectional or survey study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

196 professionals. 78% of mental health professionals address nutrition, but 51% have no formal training in it; 99% want interdisciplinary training.

Full APA reference

Gurrieri, R., Hedrih, V., & Morphew-Lu, E. (2026). Integrating nutrition into mental health care: An exploratory cross-sectional survey of training, practices, barriers, and collaboration among mental health and nutrition professionals. Nutrients, 18(16), Article 2601. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu18162601

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13516848/ (date on page: 8 August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-561
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Gurrieri, R., Hedrih, V., & Morphew-Lu, E.
Year
2026
Title
Integrating nutrition into mental health care: An exploratory cross-sectional survey of training, practices, barriers, and collaboration among mental health and nutrition professionals
Description
196 professionals. 78% of mental health professionals address nutrition, but 51% have no formal training in it; 99% want interdisciplinary training.
Publication or publisher
Nutrients, 18(16), Article 2601
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cross-sectional or survey study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13516848/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3390/nu18162601
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC13516848/ (date on page: 8 August 2026).
Related items
REF-543
Full APA reference
Gurrieri, R., Hedrih, V., & Morphew-Lu, E. (2026). Integrating nutrition into mental health care: An exploratory cross-sectional survey of training, practices, barriers, and collaboration among mental health and nutrition professionals. *Nutrients, 18*(16), Article 2601. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu18162601
REF-562 Paper, guideline or statement

We are what we eat

  • Website or organisation page
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

American Psychological Association feature on nutritional psychiatry and ultra-processed food for psychologists, summarising SMILES and later evidence.

Full APA reference

Abrams, Z. (2026, March 1). We are what we eat. Monitor on Psychology, 57(2). https://www.apa.org/monitor/2026/03/nutrition-food-mental-health

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.apa.org/monitor/2026/03/nutrition-food-mental-health (date on page: 1 March 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-562
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Abrams, Z.
Year
2026
Title
We are what we eat
Description
American Psychological Association feature on nutritional psychiatry and ultra-processed food for psychologists, summarising SMILES and later evidence.
Publication or publisher
Monitor on Psychology, 57(2)
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.apa.org/monitor/2026/03/nutrition-food-mental-health
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.apa.org/monitor/2026/03/nutrition-food-mental-health (date on page: 1 March 2026).
Related items
REF-543
Full APA reference
Abrams, Z. (2026, March 1). We are what we eat. *Monitor on Psychology, 57*(2). https://www.apa.org/monitor/2026/03/nutrition-food-mental-health
REF-563 Paper, guideline or statement

At BRICS summit, India takes the lead on noncommunicable diseases

  • Website or organisation page
  • Narrative review or commentary
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Commentary on BRICS-endorsed initiatives including a Mission for Healthy Lifestyle, a 2026-29 roadmap and NIMHANS-coordinated mental health training hubs, and the need for targets and financing.

Full APA reference

Roul, A. (2026, September 23). At BRICS summit, India takes the lead on noncommunicable diseases. Think Global Health. https://www.thinkglobalhealth.org/article/at-brics-summit-india-takes-the-lead-on-noncommunicable-diseases

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.thinkglobalhealth.org/article/at-brics-summit-india-takes-the-lead-on-noncommunicable-diseases (date on page: 23 September 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-563
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Roul, A.
Year
2026
Title
At BRICS summit, India takes the lead on noncommunicable diseases
Description
Commentary on BRICS-endorsed initiatives including a Mission for Healthy Lifestyle, a 2026-29 roadmap and NIMHANS-coordinated mental health training hubs, and the need for targets and financing.
Publication or publisher
Think Global Health
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Narrative review or commentary
Source type
Other
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
India; BRICS
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.thinkglobalhealth.org/article/at-brics-summit-india-takes-the-lead-on-noncommunicable-diseases
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.thinkglobalhealth.org/article/at-brics-summit-india-takes-the-lead-on-noncommunicable-diseases (date on page: 23 September 2026).
Related items
REF-559
Full APA reference
Roul, A. (2026, September 23). *At BRICS summit, India takes the lead on noncommunicable diseases*. Think Global Health. https://www.thinkglobalhealth.org/article/at-brics-summit-india-takes-the-lead-on-noncommunicable-diseases
REF-564 Paper, guideline or statement

Group therapy for depression in sub-Saharan Africa: A conversation with StrongMinds

  • Website or organisation page
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Practitioner account (not formal research) of lay-delivered group interpersonal therapy in six African countries, with reported gains in work attendance and children's meals.

Full APA reference

Happier Lives Institute. (2026, August 12). Group therapy for depression in sub-Saharan Africa: A conversation with StrongMinds. https://www.happierlivesinstitute.org/2026/08/12/strongminds-depression-africa-conversation/

October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.happierlivesinstitute.org/2026/08/12/strongminds-depression-africa-conversation/ (date on page: 12 August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-564
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Happier Lives Institute
Year
2026
Title
Group therapy for depression in sub-Saharan Africa: A conversation with StrongMinds
Description
Practitioner account (not formal research) of lay-delivered group interpersonal therapy in six African countries, with reported gains in work attendance and children's meals.
Publication or publisher
Happier Lives Institute
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Community, social and cultural psychology
Jurisdiction
Sub-Saharan Africa
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Global and regional health differences; Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.happierlivesinstitute.org/2026/08/12/strongminds-depression-africa-conversation/
Verification note
October 2026 scan. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 17 October 2026 against https://www.happierlivesinstitute.org/2026/08/12/strongminds-depression-africa-conversation/ (date on page: 12 August 2026).
Related items
REF-559
Full APA reference
Happier Lives Institute. (2026, August 12). *Group therapy for depression in sub-Saharan Africa: A conversation with StrongMinds*. https://www.happierlivesinstitute.org/2026/08/12/strongminds-depression-africa-conversation/
REF-565 Paper, guideline or statement

Longitudinal associations between dietary intake and common mental disorders among adolescents in Australia

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Strong Australian evidence that what teenagers eat and drink tracks with later depression and anxiety. The study followed 6,537 students (average age about 12.5) from 71 secondary schools in NSW, Queensland and Western Australia, excluding those who already had symptoms at the start. Each extra daily serve of fruit was linked to a 13% lower risk of depression symptoms (aRR 0.87, 95% CI 0.82 to 0.93) and a 7% lower risk of anxiety symptoms (aRR 0.93, 0.87 to 0.99). Higher intake of sugar-sweetened drinks such as soft drinks, cordials and sports drinks was linked to higher risk in both sexes, more strongly in boys: risk ratios of 3.25 for depression and 5.50 for anxiety in boys, and 3.10 and 2.04 in girls. Analyses accounted for physical activity, age, sex and socioeconomic status. Average fruit intake was only 2 to 2.5 serves a day.

Full APA reference

Davidson, L., Ashtree, D. N., Osman, B., Smout, S., Newton, N. C., Gardner, L. A., O'Neil, A., Jacka, F., Orr, R., Lane, M., Teesson, M., & Champion, K. E. (2026). Longitudinal associations between dietary intake and common mental disorders among adolescents in Australia. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Article camh.70129. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1111/camh.70129

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/camh.70129 and the University of Sydney release (date on page: published online 18 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-565
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Davidson, L., Ashtree, D. N., Osman, B., Smout, S., Newton, N. C., Gardner, L. A., O'Neil, A., Jacka, F., Orr, R., Lane, M., Teesson, M., & Champion, K. E.
Year
2026
Title
Longitudinal associations between dietary intake and common mental disorders among adolescents in Australia
Description
Strong Australian evidence that what teenagers eat and drink tracks with later depression and anxiety. The study followed 6,537 students (average age about 12.5) from 71 secondary schools in NSW, Queensland and Western Australia, excluding those who already had symptoms at the start. Each extra daily serve of fruit was linked to a 13% lower risk of depression symptoms (aRR 0.87, 95% CI 0.82 to 0.93) and a 7% lower risk of anxiety symptoms (aRR 0.93, 0.87 to 0.99). Higher intake of sugar-sweetened drinks such as soft drinks, cordials and sports drinks was linked to higher risk in both sexes, more strongly in boys: risk ratios of 3.25 for depression and 5.50 for anxiety in boys, and 3.10 and 2.04 in girls. Analyses accounted for physical activity, age, sex and socioeconomic status. Average fruit intake was only 2 to 2.5 serves a day.
Publication or publisher
Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Article camh.70129 (online ahead of issue)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Nutrition and diet
All lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.sydney.edu.au/news-opinion/news/2026/10/19/an-extra-serve-of-fruit-linked-to-lower-risk-of-depression-and-anxiety-in-teenagers.html
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/camh.70129
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/camh.70129 and the University of Sydney release (date on page: published online 18 October 2026).
Related items
REF-102
Full APA reference
Davidson, L., Ashtree, D. N., Osman, B., Smout, S., Newton, N. C., Gardner, L. A., O'Neil, A., Jacka, F., Orr, R., Lane, M., Teesson, M., & Champion, K. E. (2026). Longitudinal associations between dietary intake and common mental disorders among adolescents in Australia. *Child and Adolescent Mental Health*, Article camh.70129. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1111/camh.70129
REF-566 Paper, guideline or statement

Exercise prescriptions for cardiovascular health in adults: 2026 ACC scientific statement: A report of the American College of Cardiology

  • Position or consensus statement
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Cardiometabolic health

Authoritative cardiology guidance that puts the biggest gains where people start from nothing. The American College of Cardiology statement says the largest health benefits come when inactive people begin to move, and it sets out how to prescribe aerobic, resistance, balance and flexibility training. Routine exercise testing before starting is not needed for most people without symptoms. Wearables are treated as useful add-ons, with explicit attention to equity and digital literacy so that device-based advice does not widen gaps.

Full APA reference

Myers, J., Beckie, T. M., Chastin, S., Fleg, J. L., Kitzman, D. W., Thompson, P. D., & Wasfy, M. M. (2026). Exercise prescriptions for cardiovascular health in adults: 2026 ACC scientific statement: A report of the American College of Cardiology. Journal of the American College of Cardiology. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2026.09.008

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878712/ and Crossref (date on page: published online 15 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-566
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Myers, J., Beckie, T. M., Chastin, S., Fleg, J. L., Kitzman, D. W., Thompson, P. D., & Wasfy, M. M.
Year
2026
Title
Exercise prescriptions for cardiovascular health in adults: 2026 ACC scientific statement: A report of the American College of Cardiology
Description
Authoritative cardiology guidance that puts the biggest gains where people start from nothing. The American College of Cardiology statement says the largest health benefits come when inactive people begin to move, and it sets out how to prescribe aerobic, resistance, balance and flexibility training. Routine exercise testing before starting is not needed for most people without symptoms. Wearables are treated as useful add-ons, with explicit attention to equity and digital literacy so that device-based advice does not widen gaps.
Publication or publisher
Journal of the American College of Cardiology (online ahead of print)
Resource type
Position or consensus statement
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Cardiometabolic health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Behaviour change and adherence; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878712/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2026.09.008
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878712/ and Crossref (date on page: published online 15 October 2026).
Related items
REF-516; REF-517
Full APA reference
Myers, J., Beckie, T. M., Chastin, S., Fleg, J. L., Kitzman, D. W., Thompson, P. D., & Wasfy, M. M. (2026). Exercise prescriptions for cardiovascular health in adults: 2026 ACC scientific statement: A report of the American College of Cardiology. *Journal of the American College of Cardiology*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jacc.2026.09.008
REF-567 Paper, guideline or statement

Alcohol Intake and Health Study: No protective effect at low levels, with mortality increasing to 1 in 25 at 14 drinks per week

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Major US government-commissioned evidence that there is no safe level of drinking. The study modelled lifetime risk of alcohol-caused death and illness using national survey, census, CDC mortality and IHME morbidity data, plus a review of drinking patterns. No protective net effect appeared at low levels. Lifetime risk of an alcohol-caused death passed 1 in 1,000 above about 6.5 drinks a week for men and 7.0 for women, and passed 1 in 100 above 8.5 drinks a week for both. At 14 drinks a week for men, the former US upper limit, the risk was 1 in 25 (4%). More than 1 drink per occasion raised risks of breast cancer, cardiovascular disease and injury. The authors support tightening US guidance to no more than 1 drink a day for both sexes.

Full APA reference

George, S., Naimi, T. S., Keyes, K., Martinez-Matyszczyk, P., Milam, A. J., Rehm, J., Alonso, A., Bell, S., Britton, A., Llamosas-Falcón, L., Hobin, E., Judd, S. E., Justice, A., Kahler, C., Liangpunsakul, S., Jones, S. K., Marcus, G., McGlynn, K., Satre, D., . . . Shield, K. (2026). Alcohol Intake and Health Study: No protective effect at low levels, with mortality increasing to 1 in 25 at 14 drinks per week. Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 87(4), 621-638. https://doi.org/10.15288/jsad.25-00435

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42420014/ and Crossref (date on page: July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-567
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
George, S., Naimi, T. S., Keyes, K., Martinez-Matyszczyk, P., Milam, A. J., Rehm, J., Alonso, A., Bell, S., Britton, A., Llamosas-Falcón, L., Hobin, E., Judd, S. E., Justice, A., Kahler, C., Liangpunsakul, S., Jones, S. K., Marcus, G., McGlynn, K., Satre, D., . . . Shield, K.
Year
2026
Title
Alcohol Intake and Health Study: No protective effect at low levels, with mortality increasing to 1 in 25 at 14 drinks per week
Description
Major US government-commissioned evidence that there is no safe level of drinking. The study modelled lifetime risk of alcohol-caused death and illness using national survey, census, CDC mortality and IHME morbidity data, plus a review of drinking patterns. No protective net effect appeared at low levels. Lifetime risk of an alcohol-caused death passed 1 in 1,000 above about 6.5 drinks a week for men and 7.0 for women, and passed 1 in 100 above 8.5 drinks a week for both. At 14 drinks a week for men, the former US upper limit, the risk was 1 in 25 (4%). More than 1 drink per occasion raised risks of breast cancer, cardiovascular disease and injury. The authors support tightening US guidance to no more than 1 drink a day for both sexes.
Publication or publisher
Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 87(4), 621-638
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42420014/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.15288/jsad.25-00435
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42420014/ and Crossref (date on page: July 2026).
Related items
REF-082; REF-017; REF-568; REF-577
Full APA reference
George, S., Naimi, T. S., Keyes, K., Martinez-Matyszczyk, P., Milam, A. J., Rehm, J., Alonso, A., Bell, S., Britton, A., Llamosas-Falcón, L., Hobin, E., Judd, S. E., Justice, A., Kahler, C., Liangpunsakul, S., Jones, S. K., Marcus, G., McGlynn, K., Satre, D., . . . Shield, K. (2026). Alcohol Intake and Health Study: No protective effect at low levels, with mortality increasing to 1 in 25 at 14 drinks per week. *Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 87*(4), 621-638. https://doi.org/10.15288/jsad.25-00435
REF-568 Paper, guideline or statement

Trends in Australian alcohol consumption and related harms, 2010–2023

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Important Australian warning that falling drinking in surveys has not meant falling harm. Survey and wastewater measures of consumption declined between 2010 and 2023, but tax-based per-person consumption rose slightly and most alcohol-related harms rose substantially. The authors question how well surveys capture drinking and call for evidence-based alcohol policy rather than relying on reported declines.

Full APA reference

Vieira, E., Miller, M., Peacock, A., Man, N., & Livingston, M. (2026). Trends in Australian alcohol consumption and related harms, 2010–2023. Drug and Alcohol Review, 45(7), Article e70261. https://doi.org/10.1111/dar.70261

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/dar.70261 (date on page: 19 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-568
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Vieira, E., Miller, M., Peacock, A., Man, N., & Livingston, M.
Year
2026
Title
Trends in Australian alcohol consumption and related harms, 2010–2023
Description
Important Australian warning that falling drinking in surveys has not meant falling harm. Survey and wastewater measures of consumption declined between 2010 and 2023, but tax-based per-person consumption rose slightly and most alcohol-related harms rose substantially. The authors question how well surveys capture drinking and call for evidence-based alcohol policy rather than relying on reported declines.
Publication or publisher
Drug and Alcohol Review, 45(7), e70261
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Wellbeing measurement
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1111/dar.70261
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/dar.70261
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/dar.70261 (date on page: 19 October 2026).
Related items
REF-280; GOV-026; REF-567; REF-576; REF-577
Full APA reference
Vieira, E., Miller, M., Peacock, A., Man, N., & Livingston, M. (2026). Trends in Australian alcohol consumption and related harms, 2010–2023. *Drug and Alcohol Review, 45*(7), Article e70261. https://doi.org/10.1111/dar.70261
REF-569 Paper, guideline or statement

Alcohol use trajectories across disasters: Associations with depression and illness anxiety

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Useful long view of how repeated disasters shape drinking and mental health together. The study followed 941 adults in the US Gulf Coast STRONG cohort from 2016 to 2024, through the Deepwater Horizon oil spill aftermath, hurricanes and COVID-19. Four drinking patterns emerged: low and stable (36%), elevated and stable (47%), decreasing (11%) and increasing (7%). Depression rose among people whose drinking stayed elevated or increased, linking alcohol to cumulative disaster stress.

Full APA reference

Ayer, L., Atshan, S., Seelam, R., Ghosh-Dastidar, B., Harding, A. B., Parker, A., & Parks, V. (2026). Alcohol use trajectories across disasters: Associations with depression and illness anxiety. Alcohol, Clinical and Experimental Research, 50(10), Article e70389. https://doi.org/10.1111/acer.70389

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/acer.70389 (date on page: October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-569
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Ayer, L., Atshan, S., Seelam, R., Ghosh-Dastidar, B., Harding, A. B., Parker, A., & Parks, V.
Year
2026
Title
Alcohol use trajectories across disasters: Associations with depression and illness anxiety
Description
Useful long view of how repeated disasters shape drinking and mental health together. The study followed 941 adults in the US Gulf Coast STRONG cohort from 2016 to 2024, through the Deepwater Horizon oil spill aftermath, hurricanes and COVID-19. Four drinking patterns emerged: low and stable (36%), elevated and stable (47%), decreasing (11%) and increasing (7%). Depression rose among people whose drinking stayed elevated or increased, linking alcohol to cumulative disaster stress.
Publication or publisher
Alcohol, Clinical and Experimental Research, 50(10), e70389
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1111/acer.70389
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1111/acer.70389
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1111/acer.70389 (date on page: October 2026).
Related items
REF-241; REF-243
Full APA reference
Ayer, L., Atshan, S., Seelam, R., Ghosh-Dastidar, B., Harding, A. B., Parker, A., & Parks, V. (2026). Alcohol use trajectories across disasters: Associations with depression and illness anxiety. *Alcohol, Clinical and Experimental Research, 50*(10), Article e70389. https://doi.org/10.1111/acer.70389
REF-570 Paper, guideline or statement

Investigating the interplay of loneliness and social isolation across adolescence: Findings from a nationally representative longitudinal study

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Strong cohort evidence that loneliness and isolation in early adolescence each cast a long shadow. Using the UK E-Risk cohort of 2,232 twins born in 1994 and 1995, assessed at ages 12 and 18, the study found that loneliness and social isolation at 12 were each independently linked to poorer mental health, wellbeing and socioeconomic outcomes at 18. Neither buffered the other. The findings challenge the idea that feeling lonely reliably drives young people to reconnect, and support early action on both.

Full APA reference

Bryan, B. T., Thompson, K. N., Fisher, H. L., Matthews, T., Milne, B., & Arseneault, L. (2026). Investigating the interplay of loneliness and social isolation across adolescence: Findings from a nationally representative longitudinal study. Development and Psychopathology, 38(4), 2012-2028. https://doi.org/10.1017/s0954579426101758

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1017/s0954579426101758 (date on page: 28 July 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-570
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Bryan, B. T., Thompson, K. N., Fisher, H. L., Matthews, T., Milne, B., & Arseneault, L.
Year
2026
Title
Investigating the interplay of loneliness and social isolation across adolescence: Findings from a nationally representative longitudinal study
Description
Strong cohort evidence that loneliness and isolation in early adolescence each cast a long shadow. Using the UK E-Risk cohort of 2,232 twins born in 1994 and 1995, assessed at ages 12 and 18, the study found that loneliness and social isolation at 12 were each independently linked to poorer mental health, wellbeing and socioeconomic outcomes at 18. Neither buffered the other. The findings challenge the idea that feeling lonely reliably drives young people to reconnect, and support early action on both.
Publication or publisher
Development and Psychopathology, 38(4), 2012-2028
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Psychological mechanisms
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1017/s0954579426101758
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1017/s0954579426101758
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1017/s0954579426101758 (date on page: 28 July 2026).
Related items
REF-095; REF-190
Full APA reference
Bryan, B. T., Thompson, K. N., Fisher, H. L., Matthews, T., Milne, B., & Arseneault, L. (2026). Investigating the interplay of loneliness and social isolation across adolescence: Findings from a nationally representative longitudinal study. *Development and Psychopathology, 38*(4), 2012-2028. https://doi.org/10.1017/s0954579426101758
REF-571 Paper, guideline or statement

The effectiveness of physical activity interventions on non-physiological symptoms of menopause: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Fills a real gap: physical activity for the mood and quality-of-life side of menopause. The review pooled 12 randomised trials with 1,003 women aged 40 to 65. Activity reduced depression (g = −1.37) and improved mood (g = 0.84), psychological quality of life (g = 0.66) and overall quality of life (g = 1.10). Aerobic-based programs helped depression, mood and quality of life, while mind-body programs helped psychological quality of life.

Full APA reference

Saidel, S., Hardy, R., He, L., Desai, R., Robinson, K., & Spector, A. (2026). The effectiveness of physical activity interventions on non-physiological symptoms of menopause: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Menopause. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827 (date on page: published online 13 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-571
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Saidel, S., Hardy, R., He, L., Desai, R., Robinson, K., & Spector, A.
Year
2026
Title
The effectiveness of physical activity interventions on non-physiological symptoms of menopause: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Fills a real gap: physical activity for the mood and quality-of-life side of menopause. The review pooled 12 randomised trials with 1,003 women aged 40 to 65. Activity reduced depression (g = −1.37) and improved mood (g = 0.84), psychological quality of life (g = 0.66) and overall quality of life (g = 1.10). Aerobic-based programs helped depression, mood and quality of life, while mind-body programs helped psychological quality of life.
Publication or publisher
Menopause (online ahead of print)
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827 (date on page: published online 13 October 2026).
Related items
REF-572; REF-573; REF-579; REF-580
Full APA reference
Saidel, S., Hardy, R., He, L., Desai, R., Robinson, K., & Spector, A. (2026). The effectiveness of physical activity interventions on non-physiological symptoms of menopause: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *Menopause*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1097/gme.0000000000002827
REF-572 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of exercise interventions on health-related quality of life in healthy older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Solid but cautious evidence that structured exercise lifts quality of life in healthy people aged 60 and over. Thirteen randomised trials were pooled. Exercise improved overall quality of life (g = 0.78, 95% CI 0.45 to 1.11), physical quality of life (g = 1.50, 1.04 to 1.96) and mental quality of life (g = 0.41, 0.23 to 0.60). Prediction intervals crossed zero for overall and mental quality of life, so results may vary across settings. No exercise type was clearly better (P = 0.17), and longer sessions were linked to smaller effects. Adherence, reported in 5 of 13 trials, ranged from 68.7% to 88%. Certainty was low for overall and physical quality of life and moderate for mental quality of life.

Full APA reference

Zhang, S., Lu, P., & Gu, Y. (2026). Effects of exercise interventions on health-related quality of life in healthy older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. BMC Geriatrics. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9 (date on page: 13 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-572
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Zhang, S., Lu, P., & Gu, Y.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of exercise interventions on health-related quality of life in healthy older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials
Description
Solid but cautious evidence that structured exercise lifts quality of life in healthy people aged 60 and over. Thirteen randomised trials were pooled. Exercise improved overall quality of life (g = 0.78, 95% CI 0.45 to 1.11), physical quality of life (g = 1.50, 1.04 to 1.96) and mental quality of life (g = 0.41, 0.23 to 0.60). Prediction intervals crossed zero for overall and mental quality of life, so results may vary across settings. No exercise type was clearly better (P = 0.17), and longer sessions were linked to smaller effects. Adherence, reported in 5 of 13 trials, ranged from 68.7% to 88%. Certainty was low for overall and physical quality of life and moderate for mental quality of life.
Publication or publisher
BMC Geriatrics
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Wellbeing measurement; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9 (date on page: 13 October 2026).
Related items
REF-066; REF-573; REF-571
Full APA reference
Zhang, S., Lu, P., & Gu, Y. (2026). Effects of exercise interventions on health-related quality of life in healthy older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. *BMC Geriatrics*. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12877-026-08481-9
REF-573 Paper, guideline or statement

Effects of physical activity intervention on active ageing and physical function among older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Shows activity programs build the social and mental side of ageing well, not just the physical. Pooling 25 randomised trials with 7,861 older adults, physical activity improved overall active ageing (SMD 1.38), social participation (SMD 1.03) and mental health (SMD 0.6). The functional health domain did not reach significance (p = 0.07). Short Physical Performance Battery, chair stand and Timed Up and Go scores improved, but gait speed, grip strength and balance did not.

Full APA reference

Wang, W., & Yao, L. (2026). Effects of physical activity intervention on active ageing and physical function among older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis. Frontiers in Psychology, 17, Article 1958928. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928 (date on page: 12 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-573
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wang, W., & Yao, L.
Year
2026
Title
Effects of physical activity intervention on active ageing and physical function among older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
Shows activity programs build the social and mental side of ageing well, not just the physical. Pooling 25 randomised trials with 7,861 older adults, physical activity improved overall active ageing (SMD 1.38), social participation (SMD 1.03) and mental health (SMD 0.6). The functional health domain did not reach significance (p = 0.07). Short Physical Performance Battery, chair stand and Timed Up and Go scores improved, but gait speed, grip strength and balance did not.
Publication or publisher
Frontiers in Psychology, 17, 1958928
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928 (date on page: 12 October 2026).
Related items
REF-152; REF-572; REF-571
Full APA reference
Wang, W., & Yao, L. (2026). Effects of physical activity intervention on active ageing and physical function among older adults: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *Frontiers in Psychology, 17*, Article 1958928. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2026.1958928
REF-574 Paper, guideline or statement

Supporting the transition to community-based mental health and social care: Practical guide to the deinstitutionalization of psychiatric hospitals

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Landmark WHO guidance that treats housing, work and community life as part of mental health care. The 146-page guide helps hospital leaders and decision-makers move adults out of long psychiatric hospital stays (six months or more) into supported community living. It sets out actions across three phases (plan, prepare, provide) and three areas: reducing admissions and length of stay, changing care inside hospitals, and supported discharge with continuity of care. WHO says this cannot be done by hospitals alone: housing, health care, social support, education, employment and family support are essential, and people with lived experience must be partners. WHO's Mental Health Atlas found only 9% of reporting countries had fully shifted to community-based care, 53% were at an early stage, and 28% of people admitted to psychiatric hospitals stayed longer than six months.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). Supporting the transition to community-based mental health and social care: Practical guide to the deinstitutionalization of psychiatric hospitals. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240124134

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240124134 and the WHO news release of 9 October 2026 (date on page: 9 October 2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012413-4).

All fields
ID
REF-574
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Supporting the transition to community-based mental health and social care: Practical guide to the deinstitutionalization of psychiatric hospitals
Description
Landmark WHO guidance that treats housing, work and community life as part of mental health care. The 146-page guide helps hospital leaders and decision-makers move adults out of long psychiatric hospital stays (six months or more) into supported community living. It sets out actions across three phases (plan, prepare, provide) and three areas: reducing admissions and length of stay, changing care inside hospitals, and supported discharge with continuity of care. WHO says this cannot be done by hospitals alone: housing, health care, social support, education, employment and family support are essential, and people with lived experience must be partners. WHO's Mental Health Atlas found only 9% of reporting countries had fully shifted to community-based care, 53% were at an early stage, and 28% of people admitted to psychiatric hospitals stayed longer than six months.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Social connection
All lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240124134
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240124134 and the WHO news release of 9 October 2026 (date on page: 9 October 2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012413-4).
Related items
REF-383
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). *Supporting the transition to community-based mental health and social care: Practical guide to the deinstitutionalization of psychiatric hospitals*. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240124134
REF-575 Paper, guideline or statement

Priority indicators to monitor the impact of heat exposure on maternal, newborn and child health

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Nature and environment
  • General health

First shared measuring stick for how extreme heat affects pregnant women, newborns and children. Developed by WHO with the World Meteorological Organization, UNICEF and UNFPA, the 56-page framework sets core and additional indicators across four domains: routine maternal, newborn and child health monitoring; public health surveillance; climate and health monitoring; and measures of heat exposure. It also guides joint analysis of health and heat data so countries can spot trends, flag likely impacts and adapt programs.

Full APA reference

World Health Organization. (2026). Priority indicators to monitor the impact of heat exposure on maternal, newborn and child health. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240125063

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240125063 (date on page: 21 October 2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012506-3).

All fields
ID
REF-575
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
World Health Organization
Year
2026
Title
Priority indicators to monitor the impact of heat exposure on maternal, newborn and child health
Description
First shared measuring stick for how extreme heat affects pregnant women, newborns and children. Developed by WHO with the World Meteorological Organization, UNICEF and UNFPA, the 56-page framework sets core and additional indicators across four domains: routine maternal, newborn and child health monitoring; public health surveillance; climate and health monitoring; and measures of heat exposure. It also guides joint analysis of health and heat data so countries can spot trends, flag likely impacts and adapt programs.
Publication or publisher
World Health Organization
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Intergovernmental
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Global - WHO
Region
Global
Primary lifestyle domain
Nature and environment
All lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
General health
Themes
Climate, heat and environmental health; Wellbeing measurement; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240125063
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240125063 (date on page: 21 October 2026; ISBN 978-92-4-012506-3).
Related items
REF-251; REF-546; GOV-183
Full APA reference
World Health Organization. (2026). *Priority indicators to monitor the impact of heat exposure on maternal, newborn and child health*. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/9789240125063
REF-576 Paper, guideline or statement

Monash evaluation confirms success of Victoria's Public Intoxication Reform, calls for sustained care over criminalisation

  • Website or organisation page
  • Implementation or service evaluation
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Social determinants of health

Clear Australian evidence that treating public drunkenness as a health issue, not a crime, works, while inequities persist. Victoria decriminalised public intoxication on 7 November 2023 and, unlike other states, added no replacement police powers. Monash University's independent 22-month evaluation, led by Professor Kyllie Cripps using Indigenous research methods, found no deaths in police custody and no one placed in a police cell solely for being drunk in public. Police referrals to health and sobering services rose from 6.5% to 15.4%. Arrests for other offences occurred in 5% of events overall but 9% for Aboriginal people. Aboriginal people were referred to dedicated services at more than triple the rate of others (20% vs 6%). The report makes 25 recommendations, including an independent body to oversee police discretion, a commitment against replacement police powers, 24/7 sobering outreach in regional Victoria, multi-year funding for Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Organisations, and six-monthly statewide monitoring. Co-author Professor Narelle Warren called for direct links to housing, mental health support and alcohol treatment. This record is the university's release; the report document itself was not located online.

Full APA reference

Monash University. (2026, October 16). Monash evaluation confirms success of Victoria's Public Intoxication Reform, calls for sustained care over criminalisation [Press release]. https://www.monash.edu/news/articles/monash-evaluation-confirms-success-of-victorias-public-intoxication-reform,-calls-for-sustained-care-over-criminalisation

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against the Monash University news release and the Monash research project page https://research.monash.edu/en/projects/evaluation-of-the-justice-based-impacts-of-the-public-intoxicatio/ (date on page: 16 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-576
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Monash University
Year
2026
Title
Monash evaluation confirms success of Victoria's Public Intoxication Reform, calls for sustained care over criminalisation
Description
Clear Australian evidence that treating public drunkenness as a health issue, not a crime, works, while inequities persist. Victoria decriminalised public intoxication on 7 November 2023 and, unlike other states, added no replacement police powers. Monash University's independent 22-month evaluation, led by Professor Kyllie Cripps using Indigenous research methods, found no deaths in police custody and no one placed in a police cell solely for being drunk in public. Police referrals to health and sobering services rose from 6.5% to 15.4%. Arrests for other offences occurred in 5% of events overall but 9% for Aboriginal people. Aboriginal people were referred to dedicated services at more than triple the rate of others (20% vs 6%). The report makes 25 recommendations, including an independent body to oversee police discretion, a commitment against replacement police powers, 24/7 sobering outreach in regional Victoria, multi-year funding for Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Organisations, and six-monthly statewide monitoring. Co-author Professor Narelle Warren called for direct links to housing, mental health support and alcohol treatment. This record is the university's release; the report document itself was not located online.
Publication or publisher
Monash University
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Implementation or service evaluation
Source type
University research centre
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.monash.edu/news/articles/monash-evaluation-confirms-success-of-victorias-public-intoxication-reform,-calls-for-sustained-care-over-criminalisation
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 28 October 2026 against the Monash University news release and the Monash research project page https://research.monash.edu/en/projects/evaluation-of-the-justice-based-impacts-of-the-public-intoxicatio/ (date on page: 16 October 2026).
Related items
GOV-068; REF-568; REF-591; REF-593
Full APA reference
Monash University. (2026, October 16). *Monash evaluation confirms success of Victoria's Public Intoxication Reform, calls for sustained care over criminalisation* [Press release]. https://www.monash.edu/news/articles/monash-evaluation-confirms-success-of-victorias-public-intoxication-reform,-calls-for-sustained-care-over-criminalisation
REF-577 Paper, guideline or statement

Health risks of alcohol consumption in Aotearoa New Zealand: Modelling to inform low-risk-drinking guidelines

  • Journal article
  • Primary study or article
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Strong regional evidence that New Zealand's drinking guidelines are out of date, with risk falling hardest on Māori. Using a life-table model that followed a cohort of 12-year-olds across their lives with 2018 New Zealand data, the study estimated alcohol-caused deaths at 0 to 100 g of alcohol a day. With WHO risk estimates, men reached a 1 in 100 lifetime risk of alcohol-caused death at 8.6 standard drinks (10 g each) a week and women at 9.2. Excluding conditions with the weakest evidence cut these to 2.7 drinks a week for men and 3.5 for women. Global Burden of Disease risk estimates gave more permissive results. Māori crossed the risk thresholds at lower levels of drinking than non-Māori. The authors conclude the guidelines need updating.

Full APA reference

Mizdrak, A., Sherk, A., Maynard, K., & Chambers, T. (2026). Health risks of alcohol consumption in Aotearoa New Zealand: Modelling to inform low-risk-drinking guidelines. International Journal of Epidemiology, 55(6), Article dyag191. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag191

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1093/ije/dyag191 and PubMed 42893797 (date on page: 14 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-577
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Mizdrak, A., Sherk, A., Maynard, K., & Chambers, T.
Year
2026
Title
Health risks of alcohol consumption in Aotearoa New Zealand: Modelling to inform low-risk-drinking guidelines
Description
Strong regional evidence that New Zealand's drinking guidelines are out of date, with risk falling hardest on Māori. Using a life-table model that followed a cohort of 12-year-olds across their lives with 2018 New Zealand data, the study estimated alcohol-caused deaths at 0 to 100 g of alcohol a day. With WHO risk estimates, men reached a 1 in 100 lifetime risk of alcohol-caused death at 8.6 standard drinks (10 g each) a week and women at 9.2. Excluding conditions with the weakest evidence cut these to 2.7 drinks a week for men and 3.5 for women. Global Burden of Disease risk estimates gave more permissive results. Māori crossed the risk thresholds at lower levels of drinking than non-Māori. The authors conclude the guidelines need updating.
Publication or publisher
International Journal of Epidemiology, 55(6), dyag191
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Primary study or article
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
New Zealand
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity; Global and regional health differences
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://academic.oup.com/ije/article/55/6/dyag191/8917292
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag191
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://api.crossref.org/works/10.1093/ije/dyag191 and PubMed 42893797 (date on page: 14 October 2026).
Related items
REF-567; REF-568; REF-521
Full APA reference
Mizdrak, A., Sherk, A., Maynard, K., & Chambers, T. (2026). Health risks of alcohol consumption in Aotearoa New Zealand: Modelling to inform low-risk-drinking guidelines. *International Journal of Epidemiology, 55*(6), Article dyag191. https://doi.org/10.1093/ije/dyag191
REF-578 Paper, guideline or statement

Aerobic physical activity is associated with lower pneumonia and COVID-19 mortality in adults with cognitive impairment

  • Journal article
  • Cohort or longitudinal study
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

Large registry evidence that even modest activity matters for people living with cognitive impairment. The study linked 116,563 Koreans with clinically confirmed mild cognitive impairment or dementia (Korean Dementia Relief Center registry, 2016 to 2021) to health screening and death records, with 400,500 person-years of follow-up (mean 3.4 years); 5,022 (4.31%) died. Compared with inactivity, low, moderate and high aerobic activity were linked to lower death from any cause (HR 0.728, 0.704 and 0.636). High activity was linked to lower pneumonia deaths (sHR 0.554) and COVID-19 deaths (sHR 0.520), and pneumonia deaths were lower at every activity level. The authors caution that activity may partly reflect better underlying health, so the findings do not show cause and effect.

Full APA reference

Shin, S., & Kim, M. (2026). Aerobic physical activity is associated with lower pneumonia and COVID-19 mortality in adults with cognitive impairment. GeroScience. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11357-026-02596-y

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42925461/ and Crossref (date on page: published online 24 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-578
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Shin, S., & Kim, M.
Year
2026
Title
Aerobic physical activity is associated with lower pneumonia and COVID-19 mortality in adults with cognitive impairment
Description
Large registry evidence that even modest activity matters for people living with cognitive impairment. The study linked 116,563 Koreans with clinically confirmed mild cognitive impairment or dementia (Korean Dementia Relief Center registry, 2016 to 2021) to health screening and death records, with 400,500 person-years of follow-up (mean 3.4 years); 5,022 (4.31%) died. Compared with inactivity, low, moderate and high aerobic activity were linked to lower death from any cause (HR 0.728, 0.704 and 0.636). High activity was linked to lower pneumonia deaths (sHR 0.554) and COVID-19 deaths (sHR 0.520), and pneumonia deaths were lower at every activity level. The authors caution that activity may partly reflect better underlying health, so the findings do not show cause and effect.
Publication or publisher
GeroScience (online ahead of print)
Resource type
Journal article
Evidence type
Cohort or longitudinal study
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Exercise and physical activity science
Jurisdiction
Republic of Korea
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42925461/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11357-026-02596-y
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42925461/ and Crossref (date on page: published online 24 October 2026).
Related items
REF-541; REF-139; GOV-009
Full APA reference
Shin, S., & Kim, M. (2026). Aerobic physical activity is associated with lower pneumonia and COVID-19 mortality in adults with cognitive impairment. *GeroScience*. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11357-026-02596-y
REF-579 Paper, guideline or statement

Management of vasomotor and genitourinary symptoms of menopause (C-Gyn 9)

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Mental and physical health

RANZCOG's first evidence-based (GRADE) menopause guideline, and a useful reality check on lifestyle claims. It covers hot flushes, night sweats and genitourinary symptoms in women aged 40 and over, including women with current or past breast cancer, but not bone health, joint pain, libido, depression or anxiety. Menopausal hormone therapy is the first-line medicine for troublesome hot flushes where there are no contraindications, with annual review. The guideline advises against physical activity as the only treatment for hot flushes because its effect is uncertain, while the quick reference guide notes exercise may improve quality of life, mental health, cognition, sleep, muscle mass and bone density. Hypnosis may slightly reduce hot flushes. It asks clinicians to raise symptoms proactively, especially with First Nations, Māori and Pacific women and others facing cultural, rural or remote barriers, and to weigh costs and availability in shared decisions.

Full APA reference

Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists. (2026). Management of vasomotor and genitourinary symptoms of menopause (C-Gyn 9) [Clinical guideline]. https://ranzcog.edu.au/wp-content/uploads/Managing-Menopausal-Symptoms.pdf

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the RANZCOG news release, guideline PDF https://ranzcog.edu.au/wp-content/uploads/Managing-Menopausal-Symptoms.pdf and quick reference guide (date on page: 16 October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-579
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists
Year
2026
Title
Management of vasomotor and genitourinary symptoms of menopause (C-Gyn 9)
Description
RANZCOG's first evidence-based (GRADE) menopause guideline, and a useful reality check on lifestyle claims. It covers hot flushes, night sweats and genitourinary symptoms in women aged 40 and over, including women with current or past breast cancer, but not bone health, joint pain, libido, depression or anxiety. Menopausal hormone therapy is the first-line medicine for troublesome hot flushes where there are no contraindications, with annual review. The guideline advises against physical activity as the only treatment for hot flushes because its effect is uncertain, while the quick reference guide notes exercise may improve quality of life, mental health, cognition, sleep, muscle mass and bone density. Hypnosis may slightly reduce hot flushes. It asks clinicians to raise symptoms proactively, especially with First Nations, Māori and Pacific women and others facing cultural, rural or remote barriers, and to weigh costs and availability in shared decisions.
Publication or publisher
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia and New Zealand
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Physical activity and exercise
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Sleep
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Integrative and mind body approaches
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://ranzcog.edu.au/news/menopause-guideline-vasomotor-genitourinary-symptoms/
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the RANZCOG news release, guideline PDF https://ranzcog.edu.au/wp-content/uploads/Managing-Menopausal-Symptoms.pdf and quick reference guide (date on page: 16 October 2026).
Related items
REF-571; REF-580
Full APA reference
Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists. (2026). *Management of vasomotor and genitourinary symptoms of menopause (C-Gyn 9)* [Clinical guideline]. https://ranzcog.edu.au/wp-content/uploads/Managing-Menopausal-Symptoms.pdf
REF-580 Paper, guideline or statement

ACOG clinical practice guideline: Management of menopause-related vasomotor, sleep, and mood symptoms

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Multiple lifestyle domains
  • Mental and physical health

Major US guideline that brings sleep, mood and non-drug care into menopause treatment. Clinical Practice Guideline No. 13 replaces ACOG's 2014 guidance and covers spontaneous and induced menopause from age 40, using a modified GRADE approach. Systemic hormone therapy is strongly recommended for hot flushes, night sweats and related sleep disruption without contraindications, ideally started before 60 or within 10 years of menopause. Neurokinin receptor antagonists and SSRIs or SNRIs are strongly recommended, the latter for hot flushes and depressive symptoms together. Cognitive behavioural therapy, mindfulness-based interventions, exercise, clinical hypnosis and acupuncture are conditionally recommended for vasomotor, sleep and mood symptoms, usually alongside medication. Soy and other phytoestrogens and herbal supplements are not supported. Clinicians are asked to screen every midlife patient for hot flushes, sleep problems and mood changes.

Full APA reference

American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists' Committee on Clinical Practice Guidelines–Gynecology. (2026). ACOG clinical practice guideline: Management of menopause-related vasomotor, sleep, and mood symptoms (Clinical Practice Guideline No. 13). Obstetrics & Gynecology, 148(5), e345-e369. https://doi.org/10.1097/AOG.0000000000006428

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878500/ and the ACOOG endorsement summary https://www.acoog.org/news/acoog-endorses-acog-menopause-guideline (date on page: published 15 October 2026; issue 1 November 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-580
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists' Committee on Clinical Practice Guidelines–Gynecology
Year
2026
Title
ACOG clinical practice guideline: Management of menopause-related vasomotor, sleep, and mood symptoms
Description
Major US guideline that brings sleep, mood and non-drug care into menopause treatment. Clinical Practice Guideline No. 13 replaces ACOG's 2014 guidance and covers spontaneous and induced menopause from age 40, using a modified GRADE approach. Systemic hormone therapy is strongly recommended for hot flushes, night sweats and related sleep disruption without contraindications, ideally started before 60 or within 10 years of menopause. Neurokinin receptor antagonists and SSRIs or SNRIs are strongly recommended, the latter for hot flushes and depressive symptoms together. Cognitive behavioural therapy, mindfulness-based interventions, exercise, clinical hypnosis and acupuncture are conditionally recommended for vasomotor, sleep and mood symptoms, usually alongside medication. Soy and other phytoestrogens and herbal supplements are not supported. Clinicians are asked to screen every midlife patient for hot flushes, sleep problems and mood changes.
Publication or publisher
Obstetrics & Gynecology, 148(5), e345-e369
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Multiple lifestyle domains
All lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Integrative and mind body approaches; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878500/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1097/AOG.0000000000006428
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/42878500/ and the ACOOG endorsement summary https://www.acoog.org/news/acoog-endorses-acog-menopause-guideline (date on page: published 15 October 2026; issue 1 November 2026).
Related items
REF-571; REF-579
Full APA reference
American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists' Committee on Clinical Practice Guidelines–Gynecology. (2026). ACOG clinical practice guideline: Management of menopause-related vasomotor, sleep, and mood symptoms (Clinical Practice Guideline No. 13). *Obstetrics & Gynecology, 148*(5), e345-e369. https://doi.org/10.1097/AOG.0000000000006428
REF-581 Paper, guideline or statement

Health expenditure Australia 2024–25

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Key structural evidence that Australian health spending keeps tilting toward hospitals rather than prevention and primary care. Total health spending reached $290.7 billion in 2024–25 ($10,614 per person, 10.5% of GDP), up 3.4% after inflation. Hospital spending rose 4% to $123.4 billion, while primary health care including public health rose only 1.2% to $93 billion. Governments funded 70% of spending. Of the $195.1 billion that could be linked to specific diseases and injuries, cancer cost the most ($21.7 billion), followed by cardiovascular disease ($18.4 billion) and musculoskeletal disorders ($17.5 billion). Population growth drove 44.3% of spending growth and population ageing 16.0%.

Full APA reference

Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). Health expenditure Australia 2024–25. Australian Government. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/health-welfare-expenditure/health-expenditure

Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the AIHW news release published on Scimex (the AIHW report page blocks automated access, so the APA link points to the AIHW health expenditure topic page, which carries the latest edition) (date on page: October 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-581
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Year
2026
Title
Health expenditure Australia 2024–25
Description
Key structural evidence that Australian health spending keeps tilting toward hospitals rather than prevention and primary care. Total health spending reached $290.7 billion in 2024–25 ($10,614 per person, 10.5% of GDP), up 3.4% after inflation. Hospital spending rose 4% to $123.4 billion, while primary health care including public health rose only 1.2% to $93 billion. Governments funded 70% of spending. Of the $195.1 billion that could be linked to specific diseases and injuries, cancer cost the most ($21.7 billion), followed by cardiovascular disease ($18.4 billion) and musculoskeletal disorders ($17.5 billion). Population growth drove 44.3% of spending growth and population ageing 16.0%.
Publication or publisher
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.scimex.org/newsfeed/australias-health-services-tops290-7-billion-in-2024
Verification note
Digest cross-check, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the AIHW news release published on Scimex (the AIHW report page blocks automated access, so the APA link points to the AIHW health expenditure topic page, which carries the latest edition) (date on page: October 2026).
Related items
GOV-019; GOV-018
Full APA reference
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2026). *Health expenditure Australia 2024–25*. Australian Government. https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports/health-welfare-expenditure/health-expenditure
REF-582 Paper, guideline or statement

Risky substance avoidance

  • Website or organisation page
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

The American College of Lifestyle Medicine's own definition of the substance pillar, which is broader on paper than in practice. The pillar covers tobacco and nicotine, alcohol, nonmedical drug use, prescription medication misuse and other harmful exposures. ACLM frames it as nonjudgmental and person-centred: it is "not about blame, stigma, or moral judgment", but about understanding risk, making informed choices, reducing harm and getting support, tailored to a person's history, environment and readiness for change. Useful for comparing the stated scope of lifestyle medicine with what its programs and training actually cover.

Full APA reference

American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). Risky substance avoidance. Retrieved October 29, 2026, from https://lifestylemedicine.org/about-lifestyle-medicine/risky-substance-avoidance/

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://lifestylemedicine.org/about-lifestyle-medicine/risky-substance-avoidance/ (date on page: no date shown).

All fields
ID
REF-582
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
n.d.
Title
Risky substance avoidance
Description
The American College of Lifestyle Medicine's own definition of the substance pillar, which is broader on paper than in practice. The pillar covers tobacco and nicotine, alcohol, nonmedical drug use, prescription medication misuse and other harmful exposures. ACLM frames it as nonjudgmental and person-centred: it is "not about blame, stigma, or moral judgment", but about understanding risk, making informed choices, reducing harm and getting support, tailored to a person's history, environment and readiness for change. Useful for comparing the stated scope of lifestyle medicine with what its programs and training actually cover.
Publication or publisher
American College of Lifestyle Medicine
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://lifestylemedicine.org/about-lifestyle-medicine/risky-substance-avoidance/
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://lifestylemedicine.org/about-lifestyle-medicine/risky-substance-avoidance/ (date on page: no date shown).
Related items
REF-583; REF-584
Full APA reference
American College of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). *Risky substance avoidance*. Retrieved October 29, 2026, from https://lifestylemedicine.org/about-lifestyle-medicine/risky-substance-avoidance/
REF-583 Paper, guideline or statement

Harmful substances

  • Website or organisation page
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Shows how one lifestyle medicine society thinks about the substance pillar and is widening it. BSLM calls it the "negative" pillar because it is about not doing something, and centres it on alcohol, tobacco and recreational drugs, noting that alcohol and tobacco problems often go together. It now argues for a broader definition that includes excessive internet and social media use, gambling, and excessive or inappropriate use of prescription drugs. Its recommended approach is nonjudgemental: motivational interviewing, health coaching, screening, brief and extended interventions, replacing harmful ways of feeling good with activity, nature, sleep, food, meditation, music and social connection, and referral to treatment services. BSLM advocates wider use of lifestyle medicine in harm reduction and prevention.

Full APA reference

British Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). Harmful substances. Retrieved October 29, 2026, from https://bslm.org.uk/harmful-substances/

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://bslm.org.uk/harmful-substances/ (date on page: no date shown).

All fields
ID
REF-583
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
British Society of Lifestyle Medicine
Year
n.d.
Title
Harmful substances
Description
Shows how one lifestyle medicine society thinks about the substance pillar and is widening it. BSLM calls it the "negative" pillar because it is about not doing something, and centres it on alcohol, tobacco and recreational drugs, noting that alcohol and tobacco problems often go together. It now argues for a broader definition that includes excessive internet and social media use, gambling, and excessive or inappropriate use of prescription drugs. Its recommended approach is nonjudgemental: motivational interviewing, health coaching, screening, brief and extended interventions, replacing harmful ways of feeling good with activity, nature, sleep, food, meditation, music and social connection, and referral to treatment services. BSLM advocates wider use of lifestyle medicine in harm reduction and prevention.
Publication or publisher
British Society of Lifestyle Medicine
Resource type
Website or organisation page
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United Kingdom
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://bslm.org.uk/harmful-substances/
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://bslm.org.uk/harmful-substances/ (date on page: no date shown).
Related items
REF-582; REF-584
Full APA reference
British Society of Lifestyle Medicine. (n.d.). *Harmful substances*. Retrieved October 29, 2026, from https://bslm.org.uk/harmful-substances/
REF-584 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle medicine pillars and pedagogies in pre-registration health profession degrees: A scoping review

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Direct evidence that the substance pillar is one of the least taught parts of lifestyle medicine. Reviewing 52 articles on lifestyle medicine teaching in health profession degrees, the authors found that avoidance of risky substances was taught in only 37% of programs, and social connection and sleep were also uncommonly taught. The authors note that substance use may be taught under other headings, such as Making Every Contact Count.

Full APA reference

Natin, J., Ashfaque, M. A., Hickey, A., Doyle, F., & Pertl, M. (2025). Lifestyle medicine pillars and pedagogies in pre-registration health profession degrees: A scoping review. Medical Science Educator, 35(3), 1787-1801. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40670-025-02359-y

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against Crossref and Europe PMC (PMID 40625957) (date on page: published 17 March 2025).

All fields
ID
REF-584
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Natin, J., Ashfaque, M. A., Hickey, A., Doyle, F., & Pertl, M.
Year
2025
Title
Lifestyle medicine pillars and pedagogies in pre-registration health profession degrees: A scoping review
Description
Direct evidence that the substance pillar is one of the least taught parts of lifestyle medicine. Reviewing 52 articles on lifestyle medicine teaching in health profession degrees, the authors found that avoidance of risky substances was taught in only 37% of programs, and social connection and sleep were also uncommonly taught. The authors note that substance use may be taught under other headings, such as Making Every Contact Count.
Publication or publisher
Medical Science Educator, 35(3), 1787-1801
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
All lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Sleep; Social connection
Health focus
General health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC12228630/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1007/s40670-025-02359-y
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against Crossref and Europe PMC (PMID 40625957) (date on page: published 17 March 2025).
Related items
REF-582; REF-583
Full APA reference
Natin, J., Ashfaque, M. A., Hickey, A., Doyle, F., & Pertl, M. (2025). Lifestyle medicine pillars and pedagogies in pre-registration health profession degrees: A scoping review. *Medical Science Educator, 35*(3), 1787-1801. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40670-025-02359-y
REF-585 Paper, guideline or statement

Lifestyle interventions for substance use disorder

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Australian general practice review showing what lifestyle care can offer people with any substance use disorder, not just smokers and drinkers. Physical activity, especially moderate to high-intensity aerobic exercise, may raise abstinence and ease withdrawal across opioid, alcohol, tobacco and polydrug use, though the evidence is weak. Nutritional deficiencies are common. Poor sleep worsens severity, mood and suicidal behaviour, and CBT for insomnia improves sleep in alcohol use disorder without changing relapse. Loneliness is widespread (69% saw it as a problem), and strong community ties were linked to a 50% higher likelihood of survival; peer-led recovery and 12-step programs feature strongly. The authors also note that quitting smoking during treatment for other drugs does not worsen outcomes.

Full APA reference

Naren, T., Cook, J., Armstrong, F., & Manger, S. (2022). Lifestyle interventions for substance use disorder. Australian Journal of General Practice, 51(8), 560-564. https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-02-22-6331

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the AJGP article page and Crossref (date on page: August 2022).

All fields
ID
REF-585
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Naren, T., Cook, J., Armstrong, F., & Manger, S.
Year
2022
Title
Lifestyle interventions for substance use disorder
Description
Australian general practice review showing what lifestyle care can offer people with any substance use disorder, not just smokers and drinkers. Physical activity, especially moderate to high-intensity aerobic exercise, may raise abstinence and ease withdrawal across opioid, alcohol, tobacco and polydrug use, though the evidence is weak. Nutritional deficiencies are common. Poor sleep worsens severity, mood and suicidal behaviour, and CBT for insomnia improves sleep in alcohol use disorder without changing relapse. Loneliness is widespread (69% saw it as a problem), and strong community ties were linked to a 50% higher likelihood of survival; peer-led recovery and 12-step programs feature strongly. The authors also note that quitting smoking during treatment for other drugs does not worsen outcomes.
Publication or publisher
Australian Journal of General Practice, 51(8), 560-564
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Sleep; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Behaviour change and adherence
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www1.racgp.org.au/ajgp/2022/august/lifestyle-interventions-for-substance-use-disorder
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-02-22-6331
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the AJGP article page and Crossref (date on page: August 2022).
Related items
REF-586; REF-006; REF-592
Full APA reference
Naren, T., Cook, J., Armstrong, F., & Manger, S. (2022). Lifestyle interventions for substance use disorder. *Australian Journal of General Practice, 51*(8), 560-564. https://doi.org/10.31128/AJGP-02-22-6331
REF-586 Paper, guideline or statement

Primary care at the intersection of lifestyle interventions and unhealthy substance use

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Argues that lifestyle medicine and addiction medicine belong in the same consultation. The authors propose integrating the two fields in primary care, citing evidence that exercise increases abstinence and mindfulness reduces misuse, and note that most physicians miss prevention counselling opportunities.

Full APA reference

Nakaishi, L., Sugden, S. G., & Merlo, G. (2023). Primary care at the intersection of lifestyle interventions and unhealthy substance use. American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 17(4), 494-501. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221111047

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against Crossref and Europe PMC (PMID 37426739) (date on page: online 27 June 2022; issue July 2023).

All fields
ID
REF-586
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Nakaishi, L., Sugden, S. G., & Merlo, G.
Year
2023
Title
Primary care at the intersection of lifestyle interventions and unhealthy substance use
Description
Argues that lifestyle medicine and addiction medicine belong in the same consultation. The authors propose integrating the two fields in primary care, citing evidence that exercise increases abstinence and mindfulness reduces misuse, and note that most physicians miss prevention counselling opportunities.
Publication or publisher
American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 17(4), 494-501
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle medicine
Jurisdiction
United States
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Lifestyle medicine as a discipline; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10328212/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221111047
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against Crossref and Europe PMC (PMID 37426739) (date on page: online 27 June 2022; issue July 2023).
Related items
REF-585
Full APA reference
Nakaishi, L., Sugden, S. G., & Merlo, G. (2023). Primary care at the intersection of lifestyle interventions and unhealthy substance use. *American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, 17*(4), 494-501. https://doi.org/10.1177/15598276221111047
REF-587 Paper, guideline or statement

A systematic review and meta-analysis of the prevalence of alcohol and other drug use and problematic use among people accessing mental health treatment in Australia

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Key Australian evidence that substance use is routine, not exceptional, in mental health care. Drawing on 59 studies (55 meta-analysed), past-year use among people in mental health treatment ranged from 5% to 58% depending on the substance, and problematic use from 7% to 53%. Tobacco was the most common (58% use, 53% problematic), followed by cannabis (38% and 37%). The authors conclude that screening and assessment for alcohol and other drugs should be part of routine mental health care, including treatment for tobacco.

Full APA reference

Marel, C., Siedlecka, E., Wilson, J., Eugene Dit Rochesson, S., Chu, D., Fisher, A., & Mills, K. L. (2025). A systematic review and meta-analysis of the prevalence of alcohol and other drug use and problematic use among people accessing mental health treatment in Australia. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 59(4), 361-377. https://doi.org/10.1177/00048674251321272

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39996272/ and Crossref (date on page: 2025, volume 59 issue 4).

All fields
ID
REF-587
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Marel, C., Siedlecka, E., Wilson, J., Eugene Dit Rochesson, S., Chu, D., Fisher, A., & Mills, K. L.
Year
2025
Title
A systematic review and meta-analysis of the prevalence of alcohol and other drug use and problematic use among people accessing mental health treatment in Australia
Description
Key Australian evidence that substance use is routine, not exceptional, in mental health care. Drawing on 59 studies (55 meta-analysed), past-year use among people in mental health treatment ranged from 5% to 58% depending on the substance, and problematic use from 7% to 53%. Tobacco was the most common (58% use, 53% problematic), followed by cannabis (38% and 37%). The authors conclude that screening and assessment for alcohol and other drugs should be part of routine mental health care, including treatment for tobacco.
Publication or publisher
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 59(4), 361-377
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39996272/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1177/00048674251321272
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/39996272/ and Crossref (date on page: 2025, volume 59 issue 4).
Related items
REF-588; REF-589
Full APA reference
Marel, C., Siedlecka, E., Wilson, J., Eugene Dit Rochesson, S., Chu, D., Fisher, A., & Mills, K. L. (2025). A systematic review and meta-analysis of the prevalence of alcohol and other drug use and problematic use among people accessing mental health treatment in Australia. *Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 59*(4), 361-377. https://doi.org/10.1177/00048674251321272
REF-588 Paper, guideline or statement

The efficacy and safety of cannabinoids for the treatment of mental disorders and substance use disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The largest review of medicinal cannabis for mental health, led from Sydney, and a clear finding of little benefit. Across 54 randomised trials with 2,477 participants, cannabinoids showed no significant benefit for anxiety, anorexia nervosa, psychotic disorders, PTSD or opioid use disorder, and there were no trials at all for depression. Combined CBD and THC reduced withdrawal (SMD −0.29) and weekly use (−1.00) in cannabis use disorder, and there was low-quality evidence of benefit for tics (SMD −0.68) and autistic traits (−0.36). Cannabinoids increased cocaine craving and raised the odds of any adverse event (OR 1.75, number needed to harm 7). 44% of trials had a high risk of bias. The authors conclude routine use for mental disorders is rarely justified.

Full APA reference

Wilson, J., Dobson, O., Langcake, A., Mishra, P., Bryant, Z., Leung, J., Dawson, D., Graham, M., Teesson, M., Freeman, T. P., Hall, W., Chan, G. C. K., & Stockings, E. (2026). The efficacy and safety of cannabinoids for the treatment of mental disorders and substance use disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis. The Lancet Psychiatry, 13(4), 304-315. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(26)00015-5

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41856154 and Crossref (date on page: online 16 March 2026; issue April 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-588
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Wilson, J., Dobson, O., Langcake, A., Mishra, P., Bryant, Z., Leung, J., Dawson, D., Graham, M., Teesson, M., Freeman, T. P., Hall, W., Chan, G. C. K., & Stockings, E.
Year
2026
Title
The efficacy and safety of cannabinoids for the treatment of mental disorders and substance use disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis
Description
The largest review of medicinal cannabis for mental health, led from Sydney, and a clear finding of little benefit. Across 54 randomised trials with 2,477 participants, cannabinoids showed no significant benefit for anxiety, anorexia nervosa, psychotic disorders, PTSD or opioid use disorder, and there were no trials at all for depression. Combined CBD and THC reduced withdrawal (SMD −0.29) and weekly use (−1.00) in cannabis use disorder, and there was low-quality evidence of benefit for tics (SMD −0.68) and autistic traits (−0.36). Cannabinoids increased cocaine craving and raised the odds of any adverse event (OR 1.75, number needed to harm 7). 44% of trials had a high risk of bias. The authors conclude routine use for mental disorders is rarely justified.
Publication or publisher
The Lancet Psychiatry, 13(4), 304-315
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41856154/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(26)00015-5
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41856154 and Crossref (date on page: online 16 March 2026; issue April 2026).
Related items
REF-589; REF-590; REF-587
Full APA reference
Wilson, J., Dobson, O., Langcake, A., Mishra, P., Bryant, Z., Leung, J., Dawson, D., Graham, M., Teesson, M., Freeman, T. P., Hall, W., Chan, G. C. K., & Stockings, E. (2026). The efficacy and safety of cannabinoids for the treatment of mental disorders and substance use disorders: A systematic review and meta-analysis. *The Lancet Psychiatry, 13*(4), 304-315. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2215-0366(26)00015-5
REF-589 Paper, guideline or statement

Cannabis and mental health: A review

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Clinician-focused review that treats cannabis as a modifiable risk factor worth raising in every mental health consultation. Benefits for mental health conditions remain poorly studied: THC-predominant cannabis may not help PTSD, evidence on anxiety, depression and ADHD is insufficient, and CBD alone may modestly reduce anxiety (low certainty). Harms are clearer. THC can worsen mania in bipolar disorder and psychotic symptoms in psychotic disorders. About 3 in 10 people who used cannabis in the past year have cannabis use disorder. Regular high-THC use in adolescents and young adults is linked to a roughly 2-fold to 11-fold higher risk of psychosis. The authors advise avoiding cannabis in young people, pregnancy, and people with bipolar or psychotic disorders or at risk of substance use disorders.

Full APA reference

Kansagara, D., Terry, G. E., Ayers, C. K., & D'Souza, D. C. (2026). Cannabis and mental health: A review. JAMA Internal Medicine, 186(5), 618-628. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2025.8215

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41801216 and Crossref (date on page: issue 186(5), 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-589
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Kansagara, D., Terry, G. E., Ayers, C. K., & D'Souza, D. C.
Year
2026
Title
Cannabis and mental health: A review
Description
Clinician-focused review that treats cannabis as a modifiable risk factor worth raising in every mental health consultation. Benefits for mental health conditions remain poorly studied: THC-predominant cannabis may not help PTSD, evidence on anxiety, depression and ADHD is insufficient, and CBD alone may modestly reduce anxiety (low certainty). Harms are clearer. THC can worsen mania in bipolar disorder and psychotic symptoms in psychotic disorders. About 3 in 10 people who used cannabis in the past year have cannabis use disorder. Regular high-THC use in adolescents and young adults is linked to a roughly 2-fold to 11-fold higher risk of psychosis. The authors advise avoiding cannabis in young people, pregnancy, and people with bipolar or psychotic disorders or at risk of substance use disorders.
Publication or publisher
JAMA Internal Medicine, 186(5), 618-628
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Lifestyle psychiatry
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care; Prevention and public health
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41801216/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2025.8215
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41801216 and Crossref (date on page: issue 186(5), 2026).
Related items
REF-588; REF-590; REF-587
Full APA reference
Kansagara, D., Terry, G. E., Ayers, C. K., & D'Souza, D. C. (2026). Cannabis and mental health: A review. *JAMA Internal Medicine, 186*(5), 618-628. https://doi.org/10.1001/jamainternmed.2025.8215
REF-590 Paper, guideline or statement

Growing concerns: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cannabis use and mental health risks in youth

  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Systematic review or meta-analysis
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Pooled evidence that cannabis use in young people tracks with depression, anxiety and suicidal behaviour. The review included 36 studies of people aged 15 to 30 (18 in the meta-analysis). Young cannabis users had higher odds of depression (OR 1.51; adjusted 1.28), anxiety (OR 1.58), suicidal ideation (adjusted OR 1.65) and suicide attempt (adjusted OR 1.80).

Full APA reference

Sanz-Pérez, A., Serrano, D. R., Fraguas-Sánchez, A. I., Pardo, M. C., Sánchez de León, J. M. R., Estupiñá, F. J., Pérez, T., & González-Burgos, E. (2026). Growing concerns: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cannabis use and mental health risks in youth. Addictive Behaviors, 172, Article 108528. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.addbeh.2025.108528

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41145103 and Crossref (date on page: online 24 October 2025; issue January 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-590
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Sanz-Pérez, A., Serrano, D. R., Fraguas-Sánchez, A. I., Pardo, M. C., Sánchez de León, J. M. R., Estupiñá, F. J., Pérez, T., & González-Burgos, E.
Year
2026
Title
Growing concerns: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cannabis use and mental health risks in youth
Description
Pooled evidence that cannabis use in young people tracks with depression, anxiety and suicidal behaviour. The review included 36 studies of people aged 15 to 30 (18 in the meta-analysis). Young cannabis users had higher odds of depression (OR 1.51; adjusted 1.28), anxiety (OR 1.58), suicidal ideation (adjusted OR 1.65) and suicide attempt (adjusted OR 1.80).
Publication or publisher
Addictive Behaviors, 172, 108528
Resource type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Evidence type
Systematic review or meta-analysis
Source type
Academic journal
Field or discipline
Developmental and paediatric psychology
Jurisdiction
Research literature (no single jurisdiction)
Region
Not jurisdiction-specific
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Themes
Prevention and public health; Lifestyle psychiatry and mental health care
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/41145103/
DOI link
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.addbeh.2025.108528
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against PubMed 41145103 and Crossref (date on page: online 24 October 2025; issue January 2026).
Related items
REF-588; REF-589
Full APA reference
Sanz-Pérez, A., Serrano, D. R., Fraguas-Sánchez, A. I., Pardo, M. C., Sánchez de León, J. M. R., Estupiñá, F. J., Pérez, T., & González-Burgos, E. (2026). Growing concerns: A systematic review and meta-analysis of cannabis use and mental health risks in youth. *Addictive Behaviors, 172*, Article 108528. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.addbeh.2025.108528
REF-591 Paper, guideline or statement

Australia's annual overdose report 2026

  • Report or review
  • Report or review
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Shows the scale of drug harm that lifestyle practice rarely addresses. Drug-induced deaths in Australia reached a record 2,596 in 2024, up 10.7% from 2,345 in 2023, or 7 people a day and just under twice the road toll (1,307). Unintentional deaths passed 2,000 for the first time. Opioids were involved in 1,083 deaths, stimulants in 843 and benzodiazepines in 696, with record deaths involving heroin, cocaine and amphetamine-type stimulants. Drug-induced deaths are among the leading causes of death for Australians in their 20s, 30s and 40s and cost 76,887 years of potential life. The report says the widening burden among First Nations people should be a national policy priority.

Full APA reference

Penington Institute. (2026). Australia's annual overdose report 2026. https://www.penington.org.au/australias-annual-overdose-report-2026/

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://www.penington.org.au/australias-annual-overdose-report-2026/ (date on page: August 2026).

All fields
ID
REF-591
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Penington Institute
Year
2026
Title
Australia's annual overdose report 2026
Description
Shows the scale of drug harm that lifestyle practice rarely addresses. Drug-induced deaths in Australia reached a record 2,596 in 2024, up 10.7% from 2,345 in 2023, or 7 people a day and just under twice the road toll (1,307). Unintentional deaths passed 2,000 for the first time. Opioids were involved in 1,083 deaths, stimulants in 843 and benzodiazepines in 696, with record deaths involving heroin, cocaine and amphetamine-type stimulants. Drug-induced deaths are among the leading causes of death for Australians in their 20s, 30s and 40s and cost 76,887 years of potential life. The report says the widening burden among First Nations people should be a national policy priority.
Publication or publisher
Penington Institute
Resource type
Report or review
Evidence type
Report or review
Source type
NGO or charity
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Themes
Prevention and public health; Social determinants and equity
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.penington.org.au/australias-annual-overdose-report-2026/
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://www.penington.org.au/australias-annual-overdose-report-2026/ (date on page: August 2026).
Related items
GOV-029; REF-576
Full APA reference
Penington Institute. (2026). *Australia's annual overdose report 2026*. https://www.penington.org.au/australias-annual-overdose-report-2026/
REF-592 Paper, guideline or statement

Prescribing drugs of dependence in general practice, Part A: Clinical governance framework

  • Clinical or practice guideline
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

The main Australian general practice guidance on prescription drugs of dependence, a substance problem that sits inside the clinic itself. It covers benzodiazepines and prescription opioids and states that reducing misuse of pharmaceutical drugs is a national priority. It sets out a clinical governance framework for practices, asks GPs to optimise non-pharmacological interventions, and suggests "substance use disorder" as less stigmatising language. Linked parts of the guideline cover benzodiazepines and opioids in more detail.

Full APA reference

Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2015). Prescribing drugs of dependence in general practice, Part A: Clinical governance framework. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/drugs-of-dependence

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the RACGP guideline page and the Part A PDF (date on page: published 2015).

All fields
ID
REF-592
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners
Year
2015
Title
Prescribing drugs of dependence in general practice, Part A: Clinical governance framework
Description
The main Australian general practice guidance on prescription drugs of dependence, a substance problem that sits inside the clinic itself. It covers benzodiazepines and prescription opioids and states that reducing misuse of pharmaceutical drugs is a national priority. It sets out a clinical governance framework for practices, asks GPs to optimise non-pharmacological interventions, and suggests "substance use disorder" as less stigmatising language. Linked parts of the guideline cover benzodiazepines and opioids in more detail.
Publication or publisher
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners
Resource type
Clinical or practice guideline
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Professional body or society
Field or discipline
Clinical guidelines and professional statements
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Region
Australia
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Themes
Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/drugs-of-dependence
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against the RACGP guideline page and the Part A PDF (date on page: published 2015).
Related items
REF-585
Full APA reference
Royal Australian College of General Practitioners. (2015). *Prescribing drugs of dependence in general practice, Part A: Clinical governance framework*. https://www.racgp.org.au/clinical-resources/clinical-guidelines/key-racgp-guidelines/view-all-racgp-guidelines/drugs-of-dependence
REF-593 Paper, guideline or statement

A primer to reduce substance use stigma in the Canadian health system

  • Policy, strategy or framework
  • Guideline, policy or statement
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Social determinants of health

Practical government guide to one of the main reasons drugs other than alcohol and tobacco get pushed out of everyday care: stigma. It explains public, self and systemic stigma, including abstinence requirements before services and limited training, and the view that substance use reflects choice or weak willpower. Responses include trauma- and violence-informed care, cultural safety, harm reduction services that do not require abstinence (supervised consumption, needle exchange, naloxone, managed alcohol programs), wrap-around services covering housing and nutrition, peer support, person-first language, and training on substance use. It warns that messaging which equates recovery with abstinence can marginalise people.

Full APA reference

Public Health Agency of Canada. (2020). A primer to reduce substance use stigma in the Canadian health system. https://www.canada.ca/en/public-health/services/publications/healthy-living/primer-reduce-substance-use-stigma-health-system.html

Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://www.canada.ca/en/public-health/services/publications/healthy-living/primer-reduce-substance-use-stigma-health-system.html (date on page: January 2020).

All fields
ID
REF-593
Source list
Added 2026
Year added to library
2026
Author or organisation
Public Health Agency of Canada
Year
2020
Title
A primer to reduce substance use stigma in the Canadian health system
Description
Practical government guide to one of the main reasons drugs other than alcohol and tobacco get pushed out of everyday care: stigma. It explains public, self and systemic stigma, including abstinence requirements before services and limited training, and the view that substance use reflects choice or weak willpower. Responses include trauma- and violence-informed care, cultural safety, harm reduction services that do not require abstinence (supervised consumption, needle exchange, naloxone, managed alcohol programs), wrap-around services covering housing and nutrition, peer support, person-first language, and training on substance use. It warns that messaging which equates recovery with abstinence can marginalise people.
Publication or publisher
Public Health Agency of Canada
Resource type
Policy, strategy or framework
Evidence type
Guideline, policy or statement
Source type
Government
Field or discipline
Public health policy and prevention
Jurisdiction
Canada
Region
International
Primary lifestyle domain
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
All lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Social determinants of health
Themes
Social determinants and equity; Implementation and barriers
Curated section
Not in original curated sections
In curated section
No
URL
https://www.canada.ca/en/public-health/services/publications/healthy-living/primer-reduce-substance-use-stigma-health-system.html
Verification note
Substance scope search, October 2026. Title, authors, date and publication details checked 29 October 2026 against https://www.canada.ca/en/public-health/services/publications/healthy-living/primer-reduce-substance-use-stigma-health-system.html (date on page: January 2020).
Related items
REF-085; REF-412; REF-576
Full APA reference
Public Health Agency of Canada. (2020). *A primer to reduce substance use stigma in the Canadian health system*. https://www.canada.ca/en/public-health/services/publications/healthy-living/primer-reduce-substance-use-stigma-health-system.html

Australian Government policy register

Ordered by record ID. Current, under review, and draft instruments are included.

GOV-001 Policy instrument

National Health Reform Agreement Addendum 2026-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Intergovernmental agreement; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Commonwealth, state and territory governments agreed this addendum for 1 July 2026 to 30 June 2031, lifting the Commonwealth contribution rate from 40.5% to 42.5%. It delivers at least $15 billion in extra public hospital funding, requires a National Health Reform Strategy by 30 September 2026, and embeds prevention and social and cultural determinants.

Full APA reference

Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2026). National health reform agreement addendum 2026-2031. Commonwealth of Australia. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2026-04/nhra-2026-31-addendum-consolidated.pdf

Consolidated Addendum PDF states operation from 1 July 2026 to 30 June 2031 and a minimum $15.0 billion in additional National Health Reform funding

All fields
ID
GOV-001
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Council on Federal Financial Relations
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Health Reform Agreement Addendum 2026-2031
Description
Commonwealth, state and territory governments agreed this addendum for 1 July 2026 to 30 June 2031, lifting the Commonwealth contribution rate from 40.5% to 42.5%. It delivers at least $15 billion in extra public hospital funding, requires a National Health Reform Strategy by 30 September 2026, and embeds prevention and social and cultural determinants.
Operative period
2026-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Intergovernmental agreement; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2026-04/nhra-2026-31-addendum-consolidated.pdf
Full APA reference
Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2026). *National health reform agreement addendum 2026-2031*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2026-04/nhra-2026-31-addendum-consolidated.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Consolidated Addendum PDF states operation from 1 July 2026 to 30 June 2031 and a minimum $15.0 billion in additional National Health Reform funding
GOV-002 Policy instrument

Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years)

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
  • Physical and mental health

Issued in March 2026 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, these guidelines advise 30 minutes of activity on most days, strength work twice weekly, and 7 to 9 hours sleep. Developed by a University of Wollongong led team to address health inequities, they respond to the 46% of adults not active enough.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years). Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years

Media release from Assistant Minister Rebecca White states "An estimated 46 per cent of Australian adults and older adults don't do enough physical activity"; guideline PDF is filed under 2026-03

All fields
ID
GOV-002
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years)
Description
Issued in March 2026 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, these guidelines advise 30 minutes of activity on most days, strength work twice weekly, and 7 to 9 hours sleep. Developed by a University of Wollongong led team to address health inequities, they respond to the 46% of adults not active enough.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). *Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for adults (18 to 64 years) and older adults (65+years)*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australian-24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-adults-18-to-64-years-and-older-adults-65years
Verified date or evidence
Media release from Assistant Minister Rebecca White states "An estimated 46 per cent of Australian adults and older adults don't do enough physical activity"; guideline PDF is filed under 2026-03
Related items
REF-516
Same document as
REF-516
GOV-003 Policy instrument

National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions

  • Health portfolio
  • Chronic conditions; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical and mental health

Published in 2026 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, this ten year framework sets five focus areas spanning health promotion, prevention, continuity of care, multimorbidity and priority populations. An accompanying Prevention and Integrated Care Program provides $109.9 million over three years from 2026, responding to $82 billion in annual chronic condition spending.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). National strategic framework for chronic conditions 2026-35. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-03/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions_0.pdf

PDF states "© 2026 Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing" and "All information in this publication is correct as at October 2025"

All fields
ID
GOV-003
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Strategic Framework for Chronic Conditions
Description
Published in 2026 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, this ten year framework sets five focus areas spanning health promotion, prevention, continuity of care, multimorbidity and priority populations. An accompanying Prevention and Integrated Care Program provides $109.9 million over three years from 2026, responding to $82 billion in annual chronic condition spending.
Operative period
2026-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Chronic conditions; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-03/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2026). *National strategic framework for chronic conditions 2026-35*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-03/national-strategic-framework-for-chronic-conditions_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© 2026 Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing" and "All information in this publication is correct as at October 2025"
Related items
REF-010
Same document as
REF-010
GOV-004 Policy instrument

National Suicide Prevention Strategy 2025-2035

  • Health portfolio
  • Suicide prevention
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health

The National Suicide Prevention Office released this ten year strategy in 2025 across three domains, Prevention, Support and Critical Enablers, carrying 14 key objectives and 106 recommended actions. It directs governments beyond clinical services to the disadvantage and adversity that drive distress, responding to roughly 3,000 suicide deaths and 55,000 suicide attempts each year.

Full APA reference

National Suicide Prevention Office. (2025). National suicide prevention strategy 2025-2035. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/national-suicide-prevention-strategy

Download page states publication date "January 2025" and "Last updated: 14 August 2026"

All fields
ID
GOV-004
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
National Suicide Prevention Office
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Suicide Prevention Strategy 2025-2035
Description
The National Suicide Prevention Office released this ten year strategy in 2025 across three domains, Prevention, Support and Critical Enablers, carrying 14 key objectives and 106 recommended actions. It directs governments beyond clinical services to the disadvantage and adversity that drive distress, responding to roughly 3,000 suicide deaths and 55,000 suicide attempts each year.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Suicide prevention
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/national-suicide-prevention-strategy
Full APA reference
National Suicide Prevention Office. (2025). *National suicide prevention strategy 2025-2035*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/national-suicide-prevention-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Download page states publication date "January 2025" and "Last updated: 14 August 2026"
GOV-005 Policy instrument

National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Suicide Prevention Strategy 2025-2035

  • Health portfolio
  • Suicide prevention
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health

Developed with Gayaa Dhuwi (Proud Spirit) Australia, this 26 page strategy for 2025 to 2035 sets a path for culturally safe suicide and self harm prevention. It obliges all governments to work in genuine partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities, delivering community led solutions connecting social and emotional wellbeing with lower suicide rates.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2025). National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander suicide prevention strategy 2025-2035. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-12/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-suicide-prevention-strategy.pdf

Publication page states the strategy was developed in partnership with Gayaa Dhuwi (Proud Spirit) Australia and covers 2025 to 2035

All fields
ID
GOV-005
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Suicide Prevention Strategy 2025-2035
Description
Developed with Gayaa Dhuwi (Proud Spirit) Australia, this 26 page strategy for 2025 to 2035 sets a path for culturally safe suicide and self harm prevention. It obliges all governments to work in genuine partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities, delivering community led solutions connecting social and emotional wellbeing with lower suicide rates.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Suicide prevention
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-12/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-suicide-prevention-strategy.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2025). *National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander suicide prevention strategy 2025-2035*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-12/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-suicide-prevention-strategy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Publication page states the strategy was developed in partnership with Gayaa Dhuwi (Proud Spirit) Australia and covers 2025 to 2035
GOV-006 Policy instrument

National Autism Strategy 2025-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion; Mental health plan or strategy
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Released for 2025 to 2031 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, it sets four outcome areas covering social inclusion, economic inclusion, services and supports, and health and mental health. Its First Action Plan 2025-2026 includes the National Roadmap to Improve the Health and Mental Health of Autistic People, addressing health inequities.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2025). National autism strategy 2025-2031. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-autism-strategy

Department of Health, Disability and Ageing pages read in September 2026. They name the strategy, its 2025 to 2031 period, the First Action Plan 2025-2026, the four outcome areas covering social inclusion, economic inclusion, diagnosis, services and supports, and health and mental health, and the Autism Health Roadmap. The National Autism Strategy Reference Group first met on 23 February 2026. A second record for this strategy, previously GOV-178, was merged into this one in September 2026 because both pointed to the same document and page.

All fields
ID
GOV-006
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Autism Strategy 2025-2031
Description
Released for 2025 to 2031 by the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, it sets four outcome areas covering social inclusion, economic inclusion, services and supports, and health and mental health. Its First Action Plan 2025-2026 includes the National Roadmap to Improve the Health and Mental Health of Autistic People, addressing health inequities.
Operative period
2025-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion; Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-autism-strategy
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2025). *National autism strategy 2025-2031*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-autism-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Department of Health, Disability and Ageing pages read in September 2026. They name the strategy, its 2025 to 2031 period, the First Action Plan 2025-2026, the four outcome areas covering social inclusion, economic inclusion, diagnosis, services and supports, and health and mental health, and the Autism Health Roadmap. The National Autism Strategy Reference Group first met on 23 February 2026. A second record for this strategy, previously GOV-178, was merged into this one in September 2026 because both pointed to the same document and page.
GOV-007 Policy instrument

Therapeutic Goods and Other Legislation Amendment (Vaping Reforms) Act 2024

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Commencing on 1 July 2024, this Act bans the importation, domestic manufacture, supply, commercial possession and advertising of disposable and non therapeutic vapes. From 1 October 2024 the Therapeutic Goods Administration made therapeutic vapes containing 20 mg per mL nicotine or less available from participating pharmacies to adults aged 18 and over without prescription.

Full APA reference

Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2024). Therapeutic Goods and Other Legislation Amendment (Vaping Reforms) Act 2024: Changes to the regulation of vapes. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/unapproved-therapeutic-goods/therapeutic-vaping-goods/vaping-hub/changes-regulation-vapes

TGA page states the Act commenced on 1 July 2024, with further changes applying from 1 October 2024 and strengthened standards implemented in stages during the first half of 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-007
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Therapeutic Goods Administration
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Therapeutic Goods and Other Legislation Amendment (Vaping Reforms) Act 2024
Description
Commencing on 1 July 2024, this Act bans the importation, domestic manufacture, supply, commercial possession and advertising of disposable and non therapeutic vapes. From 1 October 2024 the Therapeutic Goods Administration made therapeutic vapes containing 20 mg per mL nicotine or less available from participating pharmacies to adults aged 18 and over without prescription.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.tga.gov.au/products/unapproved-therapeutic-goods/therapeutic-vaping-goods/vaping-hub/changes-regulation-vapes
Full APA reference
Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2024). *Therapeutic Goods and Other Legislation Amendment (Vaping Reforms) Act 2024: Changes to the regulation of vapes*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/unapproved-therapeutic-goods/therapeutic-vaping-goods/vaping-hub/changes-regulation-vapes
Verified date or evidence
TGA page states the Act commenced on 1 July 2024, with further changes applying from 1 October 2024 and strengthened standards implemented in stages during the first half of 2025
GOV-008 Policy instrument

Early Years Strategy 2024-2034

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Social Services published this 2024 to 2034 strategy for more than 1.82 million children aged 0 to 5, with four priority focus areas and eight outcomes. Outcomes include children being socially, emotionally, physically and mentally healthy and having basic needs met, delivered through three action plans, the first covering 2024 to 2027.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Social Services. (2024). Early years strategy 2024-2034. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.dss.gov.au/early-years-strategy/resource/early-years-strategy-2024-2034

Page states "Date published: 7 May 2024" and the strategy covers children aged 0 to 5 across four priority focus areas

All fields
ID
GOV-008
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Social Services
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Early Years Strategy 2024-2034
Description
The Department of Social Services published this 2024 to 2034 strategy for more than 1.82 million children aged 0 to 5, with four priority focus areas and eight outcomes. Outcomes include children being socially, emotionally, physically and mentally healthy and having basic needs met, delivered through three action plans, the first covering 2024 to 2027.
Operative period
2024-2034
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/early-years-strategy/resource/early-years-strategy-2024-2034
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Social Services. (2024). *Early years strategy 2024-2034*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.dss.gov.au/early-years-strategy/resource/early-years-strategy-2024-2034
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date published: 7 May 2024" and the strategy covers children aged 0 to 5 across four priority focus areas
GOV-009 Policy instrument

National Dementia Action Plan 2024-2034

  • Health portfolio
  • Chronic conditions
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Released in December 2024 by Australian, state and territory governments, it runs to 2034 through eight high level actions and a first Collective Priority Framework for 2025 to 2027. Action 3 empowers individuals and communities to minimise dementia risk and delay onset and progression, while other actions tackle stigma and promote equity and human rights.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2024). National dementia action plan 2024-2034. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2025-08/national-dementia-action-plan-2024-2034.pdf

Departmental page states the plan was released in December 2024, sets eight actions to 2034, and includes a Collective Priority Framework 2025-2027

All fields
ID
GOV-009
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Dementia Action Plan 2024-2034
Description
Released in December 2024 by Australian, state and territory governments, it runs to 2034 through eight high level actions and a first Collective Priority Framework for 2025 to 2027. Action 3 empowers individuals and communities to minimise dementia risk and delay onset and progression, while other actions tackle stigma and promote equity and human rights.
Operative period
2024-2034
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Chronic conditions
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2025-08/national-dementia-action-plan-2024-2034.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2024). *National dementia action plan 2024-2034*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2025-08/national-dementia-action-plan-2024-2034.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Departmental page states the plan was released in December 2024, sets eight actions to 2034, and includes a Collective Priority Framework 2025-2027
Related items
REF-578
GOV-010 Policy instrument

Play Well: Australia's Sport Participation Strategy

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Australian Sports Commission launched Australia's first sport participation strategy on 23 November 2023, built on six priority areas including Driving Lifelong Involvement and Equitable Access. Horizon 1 runs to 2026 and opened a $10.3 million participation grant program for national sporting organisations and local councils, keeping people active in sport toward Brisbane 2032.

Full APA reference

Australian Sports Commission. (2023). Play well: Australia's sport participation strategy. Australian Sports Commission. https://www.ausport.gov.au/playwell/strategy

ASC media release dated 23 November 2023 announces Australia's first Sport Participation Strategy; launch news page states a "$10.3 million Play Well Participation Grant program" and a roadmap over three horizons to 2032

All fields
ID
GOV-010
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Sports Commission
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Play Well: Australia's Sport Participation Strategy
Description
The Australian Sports Commission launched Australia's first sport participation strategy on 23 November 2023, built on six priority areas including Driving Lifelong Involvement and Equitable Access. Horizon 1 runs to 2026 and opened a $10.3 million participation grant program for national sporting organisations and local councils, keeping people active in sport toward Brisbane 2032.
Operative period
2023-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.ausport.gov.au/playwell/strategy
Full APA reference
Australian Sports Commission. (2023). *Play well: Australia's sport participation strategy*. Australian Sports Commission. https://www.ausport.gov.au/playwell/strategy
Verified date or evidence
ASC media release dated 23 November 2023 announces Australia's first Sport Participation Strategy; launch news page states a "$10.3 million Play Well Participation Grant program" and a roadmap over three horizons to 2032
GOV-011 Policy instrument

National Tobacco Strategy 2023-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

The Department of Health and Aged Care's 2023 to 2030 strategy sets 12 objectives and 11 priority areas, including regulating e-cigarettes and expanding cessation services. Governments commit to cutting daily smoking prevalence below 10% by 2025 and to 5% or less by 2030, and to 27% or less among Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2023). National tobacco strategy 2023-2030. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-05/national-tobacco-strategy-2023-2030.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health and Aged Care 2023" and sets a target of 5% or less daily smoking by 2030, with a mid-point review in 2026-27

All fields
ID
GOV-011
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Tobacco Strategy 2023-2030
Description
The Department of Health and Aged Care's 2023 to 2030 strategy sets 12 objectives and 11 priority areas, including regulating e-cigarettes and expanding cessation services. Governments commit to cutting daily smoking prevalence below 10% by 2025 and to 5% or less by 2030, and to 27% or less among Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people.
Operative period
2023-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-05/national-tobacco-strategy-2023-2030.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2023). *National tobacco strategy 2023-2030*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-05/national-tobacco-strategy-2023-2030.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health and Aged Care 2023" and sets a target of 5% or less daily smoking by 2030, with a mid-point review in 2026-27
GOV-012 Policy instrument

Measuring What Matters: Australia's First Wellbeing Framework

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

The Treasury published Australia's first national wellbeing framework in July 2023, organising 50 key indicators across five themes, Healthy, Secure, Sustainable, Cohesive and Prosperous. Healthy indicators track life expectancy, mental health and chronic condition prevalence, though the Auditor General reported no arrangements are in place for the intended second statement in 2026.

Full APA reference

The Treasury. (2023). Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework. Commonwealth of Australia. https://treasury.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-07/measuring-what-matters-statement020230721_0.pdf

Statement PDF is dated July 2023 with ISBN 978-1-925832-78-5; ANAO Report No.34 of 2024-25 states "The second MWM statement is intended to be released in 2026"

All fields
ID
GOV-012
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
The Treasury
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Measuring What Matters: Australia's First Wellbeing Framework
Description
The Treasury published Australia's first national wellbeing framework in July 2023, organising 50 key indicators across five themes, Healthy, Secure, Sustainable, Cohesive and Prosperous. Healthy indicators track life expectancy, mental health and chronic condition prevalence, though the Auditor General reported no arrangements are in place for the intended second statement in 2026.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://treasury.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-07/measuring-what-matters-statement020230721_0.pdf
Full APA reference
The Treasury. (2023). *Measuring what matters: Australia's first wellbeing framework*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://treasury.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-07/measuring-what-matters-statement020230721_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Statement PDF is dated July 2023 with ISBN 978-1-925832-78-5; ANAO Report No.34 of 2024-25 states "The second MWM statement is intended to be released in 2026"
Related items
REF-011
Same document as
REF-011
GOV-013 Policy instrument

National Digital Health Strategy 2023-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical and mental health

The Australian Digital Health Agency's 2023 to 2028 strategy, agreed by Commonwealth, state and territory governments, pursues four outcomes across 12 priority areas covering inclusive, person centred and data driven care. It commits jurisdictions to shared digital infrastructure and information sharing that supports chronic condition and mental health care.

Full APA reference

Australian Digital Health Agency. (2023). National digital health strategy 2023-2028. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.digitalhealth.gov.au/national-digital-health-strategy

Page states "Date last updated: 9 December 2025" and describes four outcomes, four change enablers and 12 priority areas

All fields
ID
GOV-013
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Digital Health Agency
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Digital Health Strategy 2023-2028
Description
The Australian Digital Health Agency's 2023 to 2028 strategy, agreed by Commonwealth, state and territory governments, pursues four outcomes across 12 priority areas covering inclusive, person centred and data driven care. It commits jurisdictions to shared digital infrastructure and information sharing that supports chronic condition and mental health care.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.digitalhealth.gov.au/national-digital-health-strategy
Full APA reference
Australian Digital Health Agency. (2023). *National digital health strategy 2023-2028*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.digitalhealth.gov.au/national-digital-health-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date last updated: 9 December 2025" and describes four outcomes, four change enablers and 12 priority areas
GOV-014 Policy instrument

Australian Cancer Plan

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet
  • Physical and mental health

Cancer Australia's ten year national framework, published in 2023, sets six strategic objectives each with a 10 year ambition, led by maximising cancer prevention and early detection. Objective 6 targets equity for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people, and named priority populations include people living with mental illness facing compounding social, cultural and commercial determinants.

Full APA reference

Cancer Australia. (2023). Australian cancer plan. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.australiancancerplan.gov.au/aim-vision-conceptual-framework-and-guiding-principles

Page describes a "future-focused, ten-year" framework with six Strategic Objectives, each carrying a 10-year Ambition Statement plus 2-year and 5-year goals; summary report PDF is dated 2023

All fields
ID
GOV-014
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Cancer Australia
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian Cancer Plan
Description
Cancer Australia's ten year national framework, published in 2023, sets six strategic objectives each with a 10 year ambition, led by maximising cancer prevention and early detection. Objective 6 targets equity for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people, and named priority populations include people living with mental illness facing compounding social, cultural and commercial determinants.
Operative period
2023-2033
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.australiancancerplan.gov.au/aim-vision-conceptual-framework-and-guiding-principles
Full APA reference
Cancer Australia. (2023). *Australian cancer plan*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.australiancancerplan.gov.au/aim-vision-conceptual-framework-and-guiding-principles
Verified date or evidence
Page describes a "future-focused, ten-year" framework with six Strategic Objectives, each carrying a 10-year Ambition Statement plus 2-year and 5-year goals; summary report PDF is dated 2023
GOV-015 Policy instrument

National Health and Climate Strategy

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical and mental health

Published in 2023, it guides five years of Commonwealth action from 2024 to 2028 through four objectives and 49 named actions. Actions build a climate resilient net zero health system and whole of government work towards healthy, climate resilient communities, elevating First Nations leadership and linking environmental determinants to physical and mental health outcomes.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2023). National health and climate strategy. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.cdc.gov.au/system/files/2025-10/national-health-and-climate-strategy_0.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health and Aged Care 2023" and that the strategy guides action for five years from 2024 to 2028 through 49 actions

All fields
ID
GOV-015
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Health and Climate Strategy
Description
Published in 2023, it guides five years of Commonwealth action from 2024 to 2028 through four objectives and 49 named actions. Actions build a climate resilient net zero health system and whole of government work towards healthy, climate resilient communities, elevating First Nations leadership and linking environmental determinants to physical and mental health outcomes.
Operative period
2024-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.cdc.gov.au/system/files/2025-10/national-health-and-climate-strategy_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care. (2023). *National health and climate strategy*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.cdc.gov.au/system/files/2025-10/national-health-and-climate-strategy_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health and Aged Care 2023" and that the strategy guides action for five years from 2024 to 2028 through 49 actions
Related items
GOV-183
GOV-016 Policy instrument

National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Agreement

  • Health portfolio
  • Intergovernmental agreement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
  • Mental health

Signed in April 2022 by the Commonwealth and all eight states and territories, it covers prevention and early intervention, suicide prevention, treatment, supporting the vulnerable, and workforce and governance. The 2026 Budget extended it to 30 June 2027 with $206.8 million, and its schedule names homelessness, alcohol and other drugs, and family violence.

Full APA reference

Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2022). National mental health and suicide prevention agreement. Commonwealth of Australia. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2022-05/nmh_suicide_prevention_agreement.pdf

Agreement PDF is dated 11 04 2022 and states it "will expire on 30 June 2026"; National Mental Health Commission news page states a "$206.8 million investment in the extension of the National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Agreement (the National Agreement) to 30 June 2027"

All fields
ID
GOV-016
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Council on Federal Financial Relations
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Agreement
Description
Signed in April 2022 by the Commonwealth and all eight states and territories, it covers prevention and early intervention, suicide prevention, treatment, supporting the vulnerable, and workforce and governance. The 2026 Budget extended it to 30 June 2027 with $206.8 million, and its schedule names homelessness, alcohol and other drugs, and family violence.
Operative period
2022-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Intergovernmental agreement
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2022-05/nmh_suicide_prevention_agreement.pdf
Full APA reference
Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2022). *National mental health and suicide prevention agreement*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2022-05/nmh_suicide_prevention_agreement.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Agreement PDF is dated 11 04 2022 and states it "will expire on 30 June 2026"; National Mental Health Commission news page states a "$206.8 million investment in the extension of the National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Agreement (the National Agreement) to 30 June 2027"
GOV-017 Policy instrument

The National Obesity Strategy 2022-2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

Agreed by the Health Ministers Meeting for 2022 to 2032, it pursues three ambitions on healthy environments, empowering people to stay healthy. Targets include halting the rise in adult obesity by 2030, cutting childhood overweight by 5%, five vegetable and two fruit serves daily, and reducing discretionary food energy below 20%.

Full APA reference

Health Ministers Meeting. (2022). The national obesity strategy 2022-2032. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2022/03/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework_0.pdf

At a glance PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Health Ministers Meeting 2022" and lists targets for 2025 and 2030

All fields
ID
GOV-017
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Health Ministers Meeting
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
The National Obesity Strategy 2022-2032
Description
Agreed by the Health Ministers Meeting for 2022 to 2032, it pursues three ambitions on healthy environments, empowering people to stay healthy. Targets include halting the rise in adult obesity by 2030, cutting childhood overweight by 5%, five vegetable and two fruit serves daily, and reducing discretionary food energy below 20%.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2022/03/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Health Ministers Meeting. (2022). *The national obesity strategy 2022-2032*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2022/03/national-obesity-strategy-2022-2032-at-a-glance-summary-with-a-logic-framework_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
At a glance PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Health Ministers Meeting 2022" and lists targets for 2025 and 2030
GOV-018 Policy instrument

Australia's Primary Health Care 10 Year Plan 2022-2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

The Department of Health's plan for 2022 to 2032 sets 12 action areas across three reform streams, future focused care, person centred care supported by funding reform, and locally delivered care. It builds capacity for prevention and chronic condition care and incorporates the National Roadmap for Improving the Health of People with Intellectual Disability.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2022). Australia's primary health care 10 year plan 2022-2032. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australias-primary-health-care-10-year-plan-2022-2032

Plan document is dated March 2022 and states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health", listing 12 action areas under three reform streams

All fields
ID
GOV-018
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australia's Primary Health Care 10 Year Plan 2022-2032
Description
The Department of Health's plan for 2022 to 2032 sets 12 action areas across three reform streams, future focused care, person centred care supported by funding reform, and locally delivered care. It builds capacity for prevention and chronic condition care and incorporates the National Roadmap for Improving the Health of People with Intellectual Disability.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australias-primary-health-care-10-year-plan-2022-2032
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2022). *Australia's primary health care 10 year plan 2022-2032*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/australias-primary-health-care-10-year-plan-2022-2032
Verified date or evidence
Plan document is dated March 2022 and states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health", listing 12 action areas under three reform streams
Related items
REF-581
GOV-019 Policy instrument

National Preventive Health Strategy 2021-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Health's 2021 to 2030 prevention strategy names seven initial focus areas, including tobacco, healthy diet, physical activity, alcohol and other drug harm, and mental health promotion. Targets include lifting preventive health spending to 5% of total health expenditure by 2030 and adding three years of healthy life for the most disadvantaged.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). National preventive health strategy 2021-2030. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/12/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030_1.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2021" and sets targets to 2030

All fields
ID
GOV-019
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Preventive Health Strategy 2021-2030
Description
The Department of Health's 2021 to 2030 prevention strategy names seven initial focus areas, including tobacco, healthy diet, physical activity, alcohol and other drug harm, and mental health promotion. Targets include lifting preventive health spending to 5% of total health expenditure by 2030 and adding three years of healthy life for the most disadvantaged.
Operative period
2021-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/12/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030_1.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). *National preventive health strategy 2021-2030*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/12/national-preventive-health-strategy-2021-2030_1.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2021" and sets targets to 2030
Related items
REF-007; REF-581
Same document as
REF-007
GOV-020 Policy instrument

The Australian Government's National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Plan

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health

The Australian Government's 2021 response to the Productivity Commission inquiry is built on five pillars: prevention and early intervention, suicide prevention, treatment, supporting the vulnerable, and workforce and governance. It allocated $2.3 billion from the 2021 Budget, including $1.7 billion to 31 Primary Health Networks, funding aftercare and support for people facing social disadvantage.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). The Australian Government's national mental health and suicide prevention plan. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/the-australian-government-s-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2021" and details the 2021-22 Budget investment of $2.3 billion

All fields
ID
GOV-020
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
The Australian Government's National Mental Health and Suicide Prevention Plan
Description
The Australian Government's 2021 response to the Productivity Commission inquiry is built on five pillars: prevention and early intervention, suicide prevention, treatment, supporting the vulnerable, and workforce and governance. It allocated $2.3 billion from the 2021 Budget, including $1.7 billion to 31 Primary Health Networks, funding aftercare and support for people facing social disadvantage.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/the-australian-government-s-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). *The Australian Government's national mental health and suicide prevention plan*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/the-australian-government-s-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan-national-mental-health-and-suicide-prevention-plan.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2021" and details the 2021-22 Budget investment of $2.3 billion
Related items
REF-501; REF-502
GOV-021 Policy instrument

Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for all Australians

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Health, Disability and Ageing sets movement, sedentary behaviour and sleep guidelines for every life stage from birth to older age, including pregnancy and people with disability. Children aged 5 to 17 are advised an hour of daily activity, under 2 hours recreational screen time and 9 to 11 hours sleep.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2021). Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for all Australians. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity/24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-all-australians

Topic page lists guidelines by age band and states children aged 5 to 17 need at least 60 minutes of moderate to vigorous physical activity each day and no more than 2 hours of sedentary recreational screen time

All fields
ID
GOV-021
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for all Australians
Description
The Department of Health, Disability and Ageing sets movement, sedentary behaviour and sleep guidelines for every life stage from birth to older age, including pregnancy and people with disability. Children aged 5 to 17 are advised an hour of daily activity, under 2 hours recreational screen time and 9 to 11 hours sleep.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Sleep
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity/24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-all-australians
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2021). *Australian 24-hour movement guidelines for all Australians*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/topics/physical-activity/24-hour-movement-guidelines-for-all-australians
Verified date or evidence
Topic page lists guidelines by age band and states children aged 5 to 17 need at least 60 minutes of moderate to vigorous physical activity each day and no more than 2 hours of sedentary recreational screen time
GOV-022 Policy instrument

National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Plan 2021-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

Developed in full partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people in 2021, it sets 12 priorities including health promotion, early intervention, social and emotional wellbeing and eliminating racism. Built on cultural and social determinants and a life course approach, it drives Commonwealth implementation plans, with a mid cycle progress review due in 2026.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health plan 2021-2031. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health-plan-2021-2031

Plan document states "© 2021 Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health", names 12 priorities, and schedules a mid-cycle progress review in 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-022
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Plan 2021-2031
Description
Developed in full partnership with Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people in 2021, it sets 12 priorities including health promotion, early intervention, social and emotional wellbeing and eliminating racism. Built on cultural and social determinants and a life course approach, it drives Commonwealth implementation plans, with a mid cycle progress review due in 2026.
Operative period
2021-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health-plan-2021-2031
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). *National Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health plan 2021-2031*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health-plan-2021-2031
Verified date or evidence
Plan document states "© 2021 Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health", names 12 priorities, and schedules a mid-cycle progress review in 2026
Related items
REF-414; REF-416
GOV-023 Policy instrument

Australian National Diabetes Strategy 2021-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Chronic conditions
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

The Department of Health's 2021 to 2030 diabetes strategy sets seven goals, beginning with preventing type 2 diabetes by reducing modifiable risk factors in the general population. Further goals target earlier detection, complications and quality of life, pregnancy, and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, guided by principles of self management and reducing health inequities.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). Australian national diabetes strategy 2021-2030. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/11/australian-national-diabetes-strategy-2021-2030_0.pdf

PDF states "All information in this publication is correct as at November 2021" and anticipates a mid-term review in 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-023
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian National Diabetes Strategy 2021-2030
Description
The Department of Health's 2021 to 2030 diabetes strategy sets seven goals, beginning with preventing type 2 diabetes by reducing modifiable risk factors in the general population. Further goals target earlier detection, complications and quality of life, pregnancy, and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, guided by principles of self management and reducing health inequities.
Operative period
2021-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Chronic conditions
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/11/australian-national-diabetes-strategy-2021-2030_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2021). *Australian national diabetes strategy 2021-2030*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/11/australian-national-diabetes-strategy-2021-2030_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "All information in this publication is correct as at November 2021" and anticipates a mid-term review in 2025
GOV-024 Policy instrument

The National Children's Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health

The National Mental Health Commission's strategy for children aged 0 to 12 sets four focus areas: Family and Community, the Service System, Education Settings, and Evidence and Evaluation. Prevention focused and needs based, not diagnosis driven, it seeks supported families and wellbeing cultures in schools, noting about half of mental illness begins before age 14.

Full APA reference

National Mental Health Commission. (2021). The national children's mental health and wellbeing strategy. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-04/national-children-s-mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy---summary.pdf

Summary PDF states it "was written by the National Mental Health Commission", is focused on "children aged 0-12" and notes "About half of mental illness begins before 14 years old"; ministerial media release records the 2021 launch

All fields
ID
GOV-024
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
National Mental Health Commission
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
The National Children's Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy
Description
The National Mental Health Commission's strategy for children aged 0 to 12 sets four focus areas: Family and Community, the Service System, Education Settings, and Evidence and Evaluation. Prevention focused and needs based, not diagnosis driven, it seeks supported families and wellbeing cultures in schools, noting about half of mental illness begins before age 14.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-04/national-children-s-mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy---summary.pdf
Full APA reference
National Mental Health Commission. (2021). *The national children's mental health and wellbeing strategy*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.mentalhealthcommission.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-04/national-children-s-mental-health-and-wellbeing-strategy---summary.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Summary PDF states it "was written by the National Mental Health Commission", is focused on "children aged 0-12" and notes "About half of mental illness begins before 14 years old"; ministerial media release records the 2021 launch
GOV-025 Policy instrument

National Agreement on Closing the Gap

  • Health portfolio
  • Intergovernmental agreement
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Signed in 2020 by all Australian governments and the Coalition of Peaks, it sets 19 national socio-economic targets and four Priority Reforms, with progress monitored by the Productivity Commission. Health related targets include closing the life expectancy gap by 2031, lifting healthy birthweight to 91%, and a significant sustained reduction in suicide toward zero.

Full APA reference

Joint Council on Closing the Gap. (2020). National agreement on Closing the Gap. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement/targets

Targets page lists 19 socio-economic targets with deadlines of 2025, 2026, 2030 and 2031, including Target 2 on 91% healthy birthweight by 2031 and Target 14 on reducing suicide

All fields
ID
GOV-025
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Joint Council on Closing the Gap
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Agreement on Closing the Gap
Description
Signed in 2020 by all Australian governments and the Coalition of Peaks, it sets 19 national socio-economic targets and four Priority Reforms, with progress monitored by the Productivity Commission. Health related targets include closing the life expectancy gap by 2031, lifting healthy birthweight to 91%, and a significant sustained reduction in suicide toward zero.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Intergovernmental agreement
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement/targets
Full APA reference
Joint Council on Closing the Gap. (2020). *National agreement on Closing the Gap*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.closingthegap.gov.au/national-agreement/targets
Verified date or evidence
Targets page lists 19 socio-economic targets with deadlines of 2025, 2026, 2030 and 2031, including Target 2 on 91% healthy birthweight by 2031 and Target 14 on reducing suicide
Related items
REF-414
Same document as
REF-414
GOV-026 Policy instrument

National Alcohol Strategy 2019-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical and mental health

Endorsed by the Ministerial Drug and Alcohol Forum as a sub strategy of the National Drug Strategy, this 2019 to 2028 framework targets a 10% reduction in harmful alcohol consumption. Four priority areas cover community safety and amenity, availability, price and promotion, help seeking and system response, and promoting healthier communities.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). National alcohol strategy 2019-2028. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2020/11/national-alcohol-strategy-2019-2028.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2019", footer "12045 Oct 2019", and "targeting a 10% reduction in harmful alcohol consumption"

All fields
ID
GOV-026
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Alcohol Strategy 2019-2028
Description
Endorsed by the Ministerial Drug and Alcohol Forum as a sub strategy of the National Drug Strategy, this 2019 to 2028 framework targets a 10% reduction in harmful alcohol consumption. Four priority areas cover community safety and amenity, availability, price and promotion, help seeking and system response, and promoting healthier communities.
Operative period
2019-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2020/11/national-alcohol-strategy-2019-2028.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). *National alcohol strategy 2019-2028*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2020/11/national-alcohol-strategy-2019-2028.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2019", footer "12045 Oct 2019", and "targeting a 10% reduction in harmful alcohol consumption"
Related items
REF-568
GOV-027 Policy instrument

National Men's Health Strategy 2020-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Health's 2020 to 2030 men's health strategy names five priority health issues: mental health, chronic conditions, sexual and reproductive health, injuries and risk taking, and healthy ageing. It works across boys, adolescents, adult men and older men, addressing social and economic determinants and prioritising preventive health and equity between male population groups.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). National men's health strategy 2020-2030. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-men-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf

PDF carries a 2019 copyright year, states it "will guide action over the ten years from 2020-2030" and schedules a mid-point review in 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-027
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Men's Health Strategy 2020-2030
Description
The Department of Health's 2020 to 2030 men's health strategy names five priority health issues: mental health, chronic conditions, sexual and reproductive health, injuries and risk taking, and healthy ageing. It works across boys, adolescents, adult men and older men, addressing social and economic determinants and prioritising preventive health and equity between male population groups.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-men-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2019). *National men's health strategy 2020-2030*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-men-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF carries a 2019 copyright year, states it "will guide action over the ten years from 2020-2030" and schedules a mid-point review in 2025
GOV-028 Policy instrument

National Women's Health Strategy 2020-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Health's 2020 to 2030 women's health strategy rests on policy principles including gender equity and health equity between women across all life stages. It highlights gender as a key determinant of health and wellbeing and directs equitable and accessible prevention and care to women and girls at greatest risk of poor health.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2018). National women's health strategy 2020-2030. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-women-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf

PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2018" and sets a strategy period of 2020 to 2030 with a five-year review cycle

All fields
ID
GOV-028
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2018
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Women's Health Strategy 2020-2030
Description
The Department of Health's 2020 to 2030 women's health strategy rests on policy principles including gender equity and health equity between women across all life stages. It highlights gender as a key determinant of health and wellbeing and directs equitable and accessible prevention and care to women and girls at greatest risk of poor health.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-women-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2018). *National women's health strategy 2020-2030*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/2021/05/national-women-s-health-strategy-2020-2030_0.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "© Commonwealth of Australia as represented by the Department of Health 2018" and sets a strategy period of 2020 to 2030 with a five-year review cycle
GOV-029 Policy instrument

National Drug Strategy 2017-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical and mental health

Covering 2017 to 2026, this national framework commits Australia to harm minimisation through the balanced pillars of demand reduction, supply reduction and harm reduction. It guides action on alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in partnership with service providers and communities, addressing health, social, cultural and economic harms, and reaches its stated end date in 2026.

Full APA reference

Australian Government Department of Health. (2017). National drug strategy 2017-2026. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-drug-strategy-2017-2026

Publication page states the strategy "identifies national priorities" and aims to reduce drug-related health, social, cultural and economic harms; National Alcohol Strategy PDF confirms it as the parent National Drug Strategy 2017-2026

All fields
ID
GOV-029
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government Department of Health
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Drug Strategy 2017-2026
Description
Covering 2017 to 2026, this national framework commits Australia to harm minimisation through the balanced pillars of demand reduction, supply reduction and harm reduction. It guides action on alcohol, tobacco and other drugs in partnership with service providers and communities, addressing health, social, cultural and economic harms, and reaches its stated end date in 2026.
Operative period
2017-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-drug-strategy-2017-2026
Full APA reference
Australian Government Department of Health. (2017). *National drug strategy 2017-2026*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.health.gov.au/resources/publications/national-drug-strategy-2017-2026
Verified date or evidence
Publication page states the strategy "identifies national priorities" and aims to reduce drug-related health, social, cultural and economic harms; National Alcohol Strategy PDF confirms it as the parent National Drug Strategy 2017-2026
Related items
REF-591
GOV-030 Policy instrument

Australian Dietary Guidelines

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2013 guidelines set five principal recommendations on the five food groups, limiting saturated fat, salt, added sugars and alcohol, and breastfeeding. They underpin Commonwealth nutrition advice, and an expert review is underway prioritising sustainable diets and dietary patterns, with updated guidelines scheduled for delivery in 2026.

Full APA reference

National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). Australian dietary guidelines. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/guidelines

NHMRC update page dated 26 February 2024 states updated guidelines are "scheduled for delivery in 2026" and that until then people should follow the 2013 Dietary Guidelines

All fields
ID
GOV-030
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
National Health and Medical Research Council
Year
2013
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian Dietary Guidelines
Description
The National Health and Medical Research Council's 2013 guidelines set five principal recommendations on the five food groups, limiting saturated fat, salt, added sugars and alcohol, and breastfeeding. They underpin Commonwealth nutrition advice, and an expert review is underway prioritising sustainable diets and dietary patterns, with updated guidelines scheduled for delivery in 2026.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/guidelines
Full APA reference
National Health and Medical Research Council. (2013). *Australian dietary guidelines*. Commonwealth of Australia. https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/guidelines
Verified date or evidence
NHMRC update page dated 26 February 2024 states updated guidelines are "scheduled for delivery in 2026" and that until then people should follow the 2013 Dietary Guidelines
Related items
REF-081
Same document as
REF-081
GOV-031 Policy instrument

Homes for Australia: A National Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Treasury published this $47 billion national housing plan on 28 May 2026, structured around three pillars covering building more homes, levelling the playing field for first home buyers and fairer renting. New supply and tenancy measures target the housing insecurity that shapes chronic disease risk and psychological distress.

Full APA reference

Treasury. (2026). Homes for Australia: A national plan. Australian Government. https://treasury.gov.au/publication/p2026-773858

Page states 'On 28 May 2026, the Australian Government released Homes for Australia' and carries a 2026 copyright line.

All fields
ID
GOV-031
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Treasury
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Homes for Australia: A National Plan
Description
Treasury published this $47 billion national housing plan on 28 May 2026, structured around three pillars covering building more homes, levelling the playing field for first home buyers and fairer renting. New supply and tenancy measures target the housing insecurity that shapes chronic disease risk and psychological distress.
Operative period
2026 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://treasury.gov.au/publication/p2026-773858
Full APA reference
Treasury. (2026). *Homes for Australia: A national plan*. Australian Government. https://treasury.gov.au/publication/p2026-773858
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'On 28 May 2026, the Australian Government released Homes for Australia' and carries a 2026 copyright line.
GOV-032 Policy instrument

Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 Annual Report and 2026 Implementation Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

The Prime Minister delivered this National Indigenous Australians Agency report and forward plan on 12 February 2026, assessing delivery against the 2025 plan and setting Commonwealth priorities for the year ahead with supporting appendices. Annual accountability keeps the Closing the Gap socio-economic targets, which span health, housing and education, under public review.

Full APA reference

National Indigenous Australians Agency. (2026). Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 annual report and 2026 implementation plan. Australian Government. https://www.niaa.gov.au/resource-centre/commonwealth-closing-gap-2025-annual-report-and-2026-implementation-plan

Page states 'The Prime Minister delivered the Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 Annual Report and 2026 Implementation Plan on 12 February 2026'.

All fields
ID
GOV-032
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
National Indigenous Australians Agency
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 Annual Report and 2026 Implementation Plan
Description
The Prime Minister delivered this National Indigenous Australians Agency report and forward plan on 12 February 2026, assessing delivery against the 2025 plan and setting Commonwealth priorities for the year ahead with supporting appendices. Annual accountability keeps the Closing the Gap socio-economic targets, which span health, housing and education, under public review.
Operative period
2026 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.niaa.gov.au/resource-centre/commonwealth-closing-gap-2025-annual-report-and-2026-implementation-plan
Full APA reference
National Indigenous Australians Agency. (2026). *Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 annual report and 2026 implementation plan*. Australian Government. https://www.niaa.gov.au/resource-centre/commonwealth-closing-gap-2025-annual-report-and-2026-implementation-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The Prime Minister delivered the Commonwealth Closing the Gap 2025 Annual Report and 2026 Implementation Plan on 12 February 2026'.
GOV-033 Policy instrument

Defence and Veteran Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2025-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Veterans wellbeing
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Launched on 4 September 2025 by Defence and the Department of Veterans' Affairs, this five year strategy runs to 2030 with priorities spanning prevention, early intervention, suicide prevention and coordinated care across service and civilian life. Serving members, veterans and families gain funded pathways addressing a group with elevated suicide and distress risk.

Full APA reference

Department of Defence & Department of Veterans' Affairs. (2025). Defence and veteran mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025-2030. Australian Government. https://www.defence.gov.au/about/strategic-planning/defence-veteran-mental-health-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2030

Page states the strategy was 'launched on 4 September 2025' and covers the period to 2030.

All fields
ID
GOV-033
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Defence and Department of Veterans' Affairs
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Defence and Veteran Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2025-2030
Description
Launched on 4 September 2025 by Defence and the Department of Veterans' Affairs, this five year strategy runs to 2030 with priorities spanning prevention, early intervention, suicide prevention and coordinated care across service and civilian life. Serving members, veterans and families gain funded pathways addressing a group with elevated suicide and distress risk.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Veterans wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.defence.gov.au/about/strategic-planning/defence-veteran-mental-health-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2030
Full APA reference
Department of Defence & Department of Veterans' Affairs. (2025). *Defence and veteran mental health and wellbeing strategy 2025-2030*. Australian Government. https://www.defence.gov.au/about/strategic-planning/defence-veteran-mental-health-wellbeing-strategy-2025-2030
Verified date or evidence
Page states the strategy was 'launched on 4 September 2025' and covers the period to 2030.
GOV-034 Policy instrument

National Urban Policy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Planning and built environment
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The department set this policy in 2024 to guide Commonwealth urban investment, backing 1.2 million well located homes over five years and a $100 million Community Solar Banks program. It commits governments to green and blue space that supports physical and mental health and active lifestyles, shaping the built determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development, Communications and the Arts. (2024). National urban policy. Australian Government. https://www.infrastructure.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-urban-policy.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2024' and states the target of 1.2 million new well located homes over five years from 2024.

All fields
ID
GOV-034
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development, Communications and the Arts
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Urban Policy
Description
The department set this policy in 2024 to guide Commonwealth urban investment, backing 1.2 million well located homes over five years and a $100 million Community Solar Banks program. It commits governments to green and blue space that supports physical and mental health and active lifestyles, shaping the built determinants of health.
Operative period
2024 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Planning and built environment
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.infrastructure.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-urban-policy.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development, Communications and the Arts. (2024). *National urban policy*. Australian Government. https://www.infrastructure.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-urban-policy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2024' and states the target of 1.2 million new well located homes over five years from 2024.
GOV-035 Policy instrument

Working for Women: A Strategy for Gender Equality

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Social inclusion and connection
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet released this ten year strategy in 2024 across five priority areas including health, and it records the extension of paid parental leave from 20 to 26 weeks by July 2026. Gendered economic security, safety and unpaid care are treated as measurable determinants of women's health.

Full APA reference

Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet. (2024). Working for women: A strategy for gender equality. Australian Government. https://genderequality.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-03/working-for-women-a-strategy-for-gender-equality.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2024' and names health as one of five priority areas over the decade to 2034.

All fields
ID
GOV-035
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Working for Women: A Strategy for Gender Equality
Description
The Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet released this ten year strategy in 2024 across five priority areas including health, and it records the extension of paid parental leave from 20 to 26 weeks by July 2026. Gendered economic security, safety and unpaid care are treated as measurable determinants of women's health.
Operative period
2024-2034
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Social inclusion and connection
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://genderequality.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-03/working-for-women-a-strategy-for-gender-equality.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet. (2024). *Working for women: A strategy for gender equality*. Australian Government. https://genderequality.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-03/working-for-women-a-strategy-for-gender-equality.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2024' and names health as one of five priority areas over the decade to 2034.
GOV-036 Policy instrument

Australian Government Early Years Strategy 2024-2034 First Action Plan 2024-2027

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Early years and families
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Nutrition and diet
  • Physical and mental health

Published in December 2024 by the Department of Social Services, this first action plan covers 2024 to 2027 and includes a guaranteed three days of subsidised early education and a 15 per cent wage increase for early childhood educators over two years. Funded actions cover perinatal mental health and family support in the first years.

Full APA reference

Department of Social Services. (2024). Australian Government early years strategy 2024-2034 first action plan 2024-2027. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-12/eys-first-action-plan.pdf

Source page records 'Date published: 20 December 2024' and an action plan period of 2024 to 2027.

All fields
ID
GOV-036
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Social Services
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian Government Early Years Strategy 2024-2034 First Action Plan 2024-2027
Description
Published in December 2024 by the Department of Social Services, this first action plan covers 2024 to 2027 and includes a guaranteed three days of subsidised early education and a 15 per cent wage increase for early childhood educators over two years. Funded actions cover perinatal mental health and family support in the first years.
Operative period
2024-2027
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Early years and families
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-12/eys-first-action-plan.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Social Services. (2024). *Australian Government early years strategy 2024-2034 first action plan 2024-2027*. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-12/eys-first-action-plan.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Source page records 'Date published: 20 December 2024' and an action plan period of 2024 to 2027.
GOV-037 Policy instrument

National Agreement on Social Housing and Homelessness

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Commencing on 1 July 2024, this intergovernmental agreement provides a Commonwealth contribution of $1,779.0 million in 2024-25 and requires states and territories to match Commonwealth homelessness funding. Ongoing funding for social housing and homelessness services secures the housing determinant that underpins physical health, mental health and service engagement.

Full APA reference

Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2024). National agreement on social housing and homelessness. Australian Government. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2024-06/nashh-final.pdf

Document states 'This Agreement will commence on 1 July 2024' and lists ongoing Commonwealth funding schedules.

All fields
ID
GOV-037
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Council on Federal Financial Relations
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Agreement on Social Housing and Homelessness
Description
Commencing on 1 July 2024, this intergovernmental agreement provides a Commonwealth contribution of $1,779.0 million in 2024-25 and requires states and territories to match Commonwealth homelessness funding. Ongoing funding for social housing and homelessness services secures the housing determinant that underpins physical health, mental health and service engagement.
Operative period
2024 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2024-06/nashh-final.pdf
Full APA reference
Council on Federal Financial Relations. (2024). *National agreement on social housing and homelessness*. Australian Government. https://federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/sites/federalfinancialrelations.gov.au/files/2024-06/nashh-final.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'This Agreement will commence on 1 July 2024' and lists ongoing Commonwealth funding schedules.
GOV-038 Policy instrument

Defence and Veteran Family Wellbeing Strategy and First Action Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Veterans wellbeing
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Defence and the Department of Veterans' Affairs issued this strategy with a first action plan covering five years of targeted support to Defence and veteran families, including partners, children and carers. Recognition of family level impacts funds services that address relocation stress, caring load and social isolation in military connected households.

Full APA reference

Department of Defence & Department of Veterans' Affairs. (2024). Defence and veteran family wellbeing strategy and first action plan. Australian Government. https://www.dva.gov.au/documents-and-publications/defence-and-veteran-family-wellbeing-strategy-and-first-action-plan

Page presents the strategy and first action plan as current publications setting five years of family wellbeing action to 2030.

All fields
ID
GOV-038
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Defence and Department of Veterans' Affairs
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Defence and Veteran Family Wellbeing Strategy and First Action Plan
Description
Defence and the Department of Veterans' Affairs issued this strategy with a first action plan covering five years of targeted support to Defence and veteran families, including partners, children and carers. Recognition of family level impacts funds services that address relocation stress, caring load and social isolation in military connected households.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Veterans wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dva.gov.au/documents-and-publications/defence-and-veteran-family-wellbeing-strategy-and-first-action-plan
Full APA reference
Department of Defence & Department of Veterans' Affairs. (2024). *Defence and veteran family wellbeing strategy and first action plan*. Australian Government. https://www.dva.gov.au/documents-and-publications/defence-and-veteran-family-wellbeing-strategy-and-first-action-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page presents the strategy and first action plan as current publications setting five years of family wellbeing action to 2030.
GOV-039 Policy instrument

Online Safety Amendment (Social Media Minimum Age) Act 2024

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Digital and online safety
  • Sleep; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Assented on 10 December 2024 and in force, this Act requires age restricted social media platforms to take reasonable steps to prevent Australians under 16 from holding accounts, with enforcement by the eSafety Commissioner. Platform level obligations act on adolescent screen exposure now widely linked with sleep loss and psychological distress.

Full APA reference

Parliament of Australia. (2024). Online Safety Amendment (Social Media Minimum Age) Act 2024. Australian Government. https://www.legislation.gov.au/C2024A00127/asmade

Register entry records assent on 10 December 2024 and an 'In force' status for the amending Act.

All fields
ID
GOV-039
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Parliament of Australia
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Online Safety Amendment (Social Media Minimum Age) Act 2024
Description
Assented on 10 December 2024 and in force, this Act requires age restricted social media platforms to take reasonable steps to prevent Australians under 16 from holding accounts, with enforcement by the eSafety Commissioner. Platform level obligations act on adolescent screen exposure now widely linked with sleep loss and psychological distress.
Operative period
2024 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Digital and online safety
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Sleep; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.legislation.gov.au/C2024A00127/asmade
Full APA reference
Parliament of Australia. (2024). *Online Safety Amendment (Social Media Minimum Age) Act 2024*. Australian Government. https://www.legislation.gov.au/C2024A00127/asmade
Verified date or evidence
Register entry records assent on 10 December 2024 and an 'In force' status for the amending Act.
GOV-040 Policy instrument

Australian Work Health and Safety Strategy 2023-2033

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical and mental health

Safe Work Australia published this ten year strategy for 2023 to 2033, seeking a 30 per cent reduction in worker fatalities from traumatic injuries and no new cases of accelerated silicosis by 2033. It directs regulators and employers to build capability on psychosocial hazards, making work a managed determinant of mental and physical health.

Full APA reference

Safe Work Australia. (2023). Australian work health and safety strategy 2023-2033. Safe Work Australia. https://www.safeworkaustralia.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-02/Australian%20WHS%20Strategy%202023-33.pdf

Document records 'Year of publication: 2023' and states targets to be achieved by 2033.

All fields
ID
GOV-040
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Safe Work Australia
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australian Work Health and Safety Strategy 2023-2033
Description
Safe Work Australia published this ten year strategy for 2023 to 2033, seeking a 30 per cent reduction in worker fatalities from traumatic injuries and no new cases of accelerated silicosis by 2033. It directs regulators and employers to build capability on psychosocial hazards, making work a managed determinant of mental and physical health.
Operative period
2023-2033
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.safeworkaustralia.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-02/Australian%20WHS%20Strategy%202023-33.pdf
Full APA reference
Safe Work Australia. (2023). *Australian work health and safety strategy 2023-2033*. Safe Work Australia. https://www.safeworkaustralia.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-02/Australian%20WHS%20Strategy%202023-33.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document records 'Year of publication: 2023' and states targets to be achieved by 2033.
GOV-041 Policy instrument

Revive: a place for every story, a story for every place

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Arts and culture wellbeing
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Office for the Arts runs this five year national cultural policy from 2023 to 2028, funding an $80.0 million National Aboriginal Art Gallery and First Nations languages teaching in 60 primary schools. Stating that culture is central to First Nations health, wellbeing and identity, it resources cultural participation as a wellbeing determinant.

Full APA reference

Office for the Arts. (2023). Revive: A place for every story, a story for every place. Australian Government. https://www.arts.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-culturalpolicy-8february2023.pdf

Document is dated 8 February 2023 and describes itself as a five year plan covering 2023 to 2028.

All fields
ID
GOV-041
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Office for the Arts
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Revive: a place for every story, a story for every place
Description
The Office for the Arts runs this five year national cultural policy from 2023 to 2028, funding an $80.0 million National Aboriginal Art Gallery and First Nations languages teaching in 60 primary schools. Stating that culture is central to First Nations health, wellbeing and identity, it resources cultural participation as a wellbeing determinant.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Arts and culture wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.arts.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-culturalpolicy-8february2023.pdf
Full APA reference
Office for the Arts. (2023). *Revive: A place for every story, a story for every place*. Australian Government. https://www.arts.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/national-culturalpolicy-8february2023.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated 8 February 2023 and describes itself as a five year plan covering 2023 to 2028.
GOV-042 Policy instrument

National Plan to End Violence against Women and Children 2022-2032

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Justice and community safety
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Social Services coordinates this ten year plan for 2022 to 2032, delivered through two five year action plans and targeting a 50 per cent reduction in violence against First Nations women and children by 2031. Prevention, early intervention, response and recovery funding addresses violence as a leading driver of women's ill health.

Full APA reference

Department of Social Services. (2022). National plan to end violence against women and children 2022-2032. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/resources/national-plan-end-violence-against-women-and-children-2022-2032.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2022' and sets the ambition of ending gender based violence within one generation.

All fields
ID
GOV-042
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Social Services
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Plan to End Violence against Women and Children 2022-2032
Description
The Department of Social Services coordinates this ten year plan for 2022 to 2032, delivered through two five year action plans and targeting a 50 per cent reduction in violence against First Nations women and children by 2031. Prevention, early intervention, response and recovery funding addresses violence as a leading driver of women's ill health.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Justice and community safety
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/resources/national-plan-end-violence-against-women-and-children-2022-2032.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Social Services. (2022). *National plan to end violence against women and children 2022-2032*. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/resources/national-plan-end-violence-against-women-and-children-2022-2032.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2022' and sets the ambition of ending gender based violence within one generation.
GOV-043 Policy instrument

National Road Safety Strategy 2021-30

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Infrastructure and Transport Ministers adopted this strategy for 2021 to 2030, targeting a halving of annual road deaths to fewer than 571 and a 30 per cent cut in serious injuries. It binds jurisdictions to Safe System action on a $30 billion annual trauma burden that removes people from work and community life.

Full APA reference

Infrastructure and Transport Ministers. (2021). National road safety strategy 2021-30. Australian Government. https://www.roadsafety.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/National-Road-Safety-Strategy-2021-30.pdf

Document states 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2021' with a December 2021 release note and sets targets to be met by 2030.

All fields
ID
GOV-043
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Infrastructure and Transport Ministers
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Road Safety Strategy 2021-30
Description
Infrastructure and Transport Ministers adopted this strategy for 2021 to 2030, targeting a halving of annual road deaths to fewer than 571 and a 30 per cent cut in serious injuries. It binds jurisdictions to Safe System action on a $30 billion annual trauma burden that removes people from work and community life.
Operative period
2021-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.roadsafety.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/National-Road-Safety-Strategy-2021-30.pdf
Full APA reference
Infrastructure and Transport Ministers. (2021). *National road safety strategy 2021-30*. Australian Government. https://www.roadsafety.gov.au/sites/default/files/documents/National-Road-Safety-Strategy-2021-30.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2021' with a December 2021 release note and sets targets to be met by 2030.
GOV-044 Policy instrument

Safe and Supported: the National Framework for Protecting Australia's Children 2021-2031

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Early years and families
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Department of Social Services leads this framework running 2021 to 2031, with a target to cut over representation of First Nations children in out of home care by 45 per cent by 2031. Successive action plans fund prevention and early support, addressing childhood adversity that drives lifelong mental and physical ill health.

Full APA reference

Department of Social Services. (2021). Safe and supported: The national framework for protecting Australia's children 2021-2031. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-10/dess5016-national-framework-protecting-childrenaccessible.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2021' and describes the First Action Plan 2023-2026 as the current delivery vehicle.

All fields
ID
GOV-044
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Social Services
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Safe and Supported: the National Framework for Protecting Australia's Children 2021-2031
Description
The Department of Social Services leads this framework running 2021 to 2031, with a target to cut over representation of First Nations children in out of home care by 45 per cent by 2031. Successive action plans fund prevention and early support, addressing childhood adversity that drives lifelong mental and physical ill health.
Operative period
2021-2031
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Early years and families
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-10/dess5016-national-framework-protecting-childrenaccessible.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Social Services. (2021). *Safe and supported: The national framework for protecting Australia's children 2021-2031*. Australian Government. https://www.dss.gov.au/system/files/documents/2024-10/dess5016-national-framework-protecting-childrenaccessible.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2021' and describes the First Action Plan 2023-2026 as the current delivery vehicle.
GOV-045 Policy instrument

TPG26-02 NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

NSW Treasury issued this mandatory guidance on 25 February 2026, setting the requirements for agency performance reporting and superseding TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting. Compliance is mandatory for General Government Sector and GSF Act agencies, which must link the performance of services to the wellbeing of people in NSW and report resource allocation by outcome.

Full APA reference

NSW Treasury. (2026). TPG26-02 NSW performance and wellbeing framework. NSW Government. https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework

Page states Issued 25 February 2026, Status Active, Compliance Mandatory, supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting

All fields
ID
GOV-045
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Treasury
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
TPG26-02 NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework
Description
NSW Treasury issued this mandatory guidance on 25 February 2026, setting the requirements for agency performance reporting and superseding TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting. Compliance is mandatory for General Government Sector and GSF Act agencies, which must link the performance of services to the wellbeing of people in NSW and report resource allocation by outcome.
Operative period
Active, mandatory, no end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework
Full APA reference
NSW Treasury. (2026). *TPG26-02 NSW performance and wellbeing framework*. NSW Government. https://arp.nsw.gov.au/tpg26-02-nsw-performance-and-wellbeing-framework
Verified date or evidence
Page states Issued 25 February 2026, Status Active, Compliance Mandatory, supersedes TPP18-09 Outcome Budgeting
Related items
REF-090
Same document as
REF-090
GOV-046 Policy instrument

Social Policy and Health Equity branch programs and priorities

  • Health portfolio
  • Health equity or social determinants
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

The NSW Ministry of Health branch develops equity focused policies and programs covering disability, LGBTIQ+ health, men's and women's health, multicultural and refugee health, palliative care, carer support and transport for health. Its remit is ongoing, linking the health system with social care to improve wellbeing now, across people's lives and for future generations.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2026). Social Policy and Health Equity. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/ministry/Pages/sphe.aspx

Page states "Current as at: Monday 23 February 2026". This is a standing branch function rather than a dated strategy

All fields
ID
GOV-046
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health, Social Policy and Health Equity branch
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Social Policy and Health Equity branch programs and priorities
Description
The NSW Ministry of Health branch develops equity focused policies and programs covering disability, LGBTIQ+ health, men's and women's health, multicultural and refugee health, palliative care, carer support and transport for health. Its remit is ongoing, linking the health system with social care to improve wellbeing now, across people's lives and for future generations.
Operative period
Ongoing function, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Health equity or social determinants
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/ministry/Pages/sphe.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2026). *Social Policy and Health Equity*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/ministry/Pages/sphe.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Current as at: Monday 23 February 2026". This is a standing branch function rather than a dated strategy
GOV-047 Policy instrument

NSW Forensic Mental Health Strategic Plan 2025-2035

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Published by the NSW Ministry of Health for 2025 to 2035, it covers forensic mental health care across Local Health Districts and Specialty Health Networks and prioritises early intervention, continuity of care and cultural safety. It highlights distinct challenges for young people, Aboriginal people and rural and regional patients.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2025). NSW forensic mental health strategic plan 2025-2035. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/default.aspx

Mental health landing page lists the plan and states "Current as at: Monday 17 August 2026"

All fields
ID
GOV-047
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Forensic Mental Health Strategic Plan 2025-2035
Description
Published by the NSW Ministry of Health for 2025 to 2035, it covers forensic mental health care across Local Health Districts and Specialty Health Networks and prioritises early intervention, continuity of care and cultural safety. It highlights distinct challenges for young people, Aboriginal people and rural and regional patients.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/default.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2025). *NSW forensic mental health strategic plan 2025-2035*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/default.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Mental health landing page lists the plan and states "Current as at: Monday 17 August 2026"
GOV-048 Policy instrument

NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework and first Performance and Wellbeing Statement

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Launched with the 2025 to 2026 NSW Budget, it organises reporting around eight wellbeing themes, Healthy, Skilled, Prosperous, Housed, Secure, Community, Connected and Sustainable, and 28 NSW Outcomes. Metrics including life expectancy are disaggregated where possible for women, men and First Nations people, linking budget decisions to quality of life.

Full APA reference

NSW Government. (2025). NSW performance and wellbeing framework. https://www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-government/public-sector/financial-information-for-public-entities/centre-for-economic-evidence/nsw-government-investment-framework/performance-wellbeing-framework

Page describes the first Performance and Wellbeing Statement released with the 2025-26 Budget

All fields
ID
GOV-048
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Government, Centre for Economic Evidence
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Performance and Wellbeing Framework and first Performance and Wellbeing Statement
Description
Launched with the 2025 to 2026 NSW Budget, it organises reporting around eight wellbeing themes, Healthy, Skilled, Prosperous, Housed, Secure, Community, Connected and Sustainable, and 28 NSW Outcomes. Metrics including life expectancy are disaggregated where possible for women, men and First Nations people, linking budget decisions to quality of life.
Operative period
Ongoing from the 2025-26 Budget
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-government/public-sector/financial-information-for-public-entities/centre-for-economic-evidence/nsw-government-investment-framework/performance-wellbeing-framework
Full APA reference
NSW Government. (2025). *NSW performance and wellbeing framework*. https://www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-government/public-sector/financial-information-for-public-entities/centre-for-economic-evidence/nsw-government-investment-framework/performance-wellbeing-framework
Verified date or evidence
Page describes the first Performance and Wellbeing Statement released with the 2025-26 Budget
GOV-049 Policy instrument

A new Strategy for Mental Health and Wellbeing in NSW, consultation paper

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The Mental Health Commission of NSW released this consultation paper in June 2025 to shape a ten year whole of government mental health and wellbeing strategy, with submissions closing on 29 August 2025. It proposes work on both the mental health service system and the social determinants of mental health, seeking parity with physical health.

Full APA reference

NSW Mental Health Commission. (2025). A new strategy for mental health and wellbeing in NSW: Consultation paper. NSW Government. https://www.nswmentalhealthcommission.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-06/Mental%20Health%20Strategy_Consultation_2025.pdf

Document hosted in the June 2025 folder and titled as a consultation paper; no successor strategy published as at 2 September 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-049
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Mental Health Commission
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
A new Strategy for Mental Health and Wellbeing in NSW, consultation paper
Description
The Mental Health Commission of NSW released this consultation paper in June 2025 to shape a ten year whole of government mental health and wellbeing strategy, with submissions closing on 29 August 2025. It proposes work on both the mental health service system and the social determinants of mental health, seeking parity with physical health.
Operative period
Consultation paper, strategy not yet released
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Draft or consultation
URL
https://www.nswmentalhealthcommission.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-06/Mental%20Health%20Strategy_Consultation_2025.pdf
Full APA reference
NSW Mental Health Commission. (2025). *A new strategy for mental health and wellbeing in NSW: Consultation paper*. NSW Government. https://www.nswmentalhealthcommission.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-06/Mental%20Health%20Strategy_Consultation_2025.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document hosted in the June 2025 folder and titled as a consultation paper; no successor strategy published as at 2 September 2026
GOV-050 Policy instrument

Healthy Food and Drink in NSW Health Facilities for Staff and Visitors Framework (GL2024_011)

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Issued by NSW Health in September 2024 as guideline GL2024_011, it sets a Food and Drink Benchmark for staff and visitor outlets covering availability, quality, size and marketing. Facilities are guided to remove sugar sweetened drinks from sale, increase Everyday options and prefer packaged items with a Health Star Rating of 3.5 or higher.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2024). Healthy food and drink in NSW Health facilities for staff and visitors framework (GL2024_011). NSW Government. https://www1.health.nsw.gov.au/pds/ActivePDSDocuments/GL2024_011.pdf

Guideline number GL2024_011 sits in the Active Policy Distribution System, indicating an in force document

All fields
ID
GOV-050
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Food and Drink in NSW Health Facilities for Staff and Visitors Framework (GL2024_011)
Description
Issued by NSW Health in September 2024 as guideline GL2024_011, it sets a Food and Drink Benchmark for staff and visitor outlets covering availability, quality, size and marketing. Facilities are guided to remove sugar sweetened drinks from sale, increase Everyday options and prefer packaged items with a Health Star Rating of 3.5 or higher.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/healthy-food-framework.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2024). *Healthy food and drink in NSW Health facilities for staff and visitors framework* (GL2024_011). NSW Government. https://www1.health.nsw.gov.au/pds/ActivePDSDocuments/GL2024_011.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Guideline number GL2024_011 sits in the Active Policy Distribution System, indicating an in force document
GOV-051 Policy instrument

NSW Aboriginal Health Plan 2024-2034

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

NSW Ministry of Health and the Aboriginal Health and Medical Research Council set five strategic directions for 2024 to 2034, including growing the Aboriginal health workforce and addressing the social, cultural, economic, political, commercial and planetary determinants of health. Five enablers sit underneath, including formal partnerships, shared decision making and building the Community Controlled sector.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2024). NSW Aboriginal health plan 2024-2034. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aboriginal/plan/Pages/default.aspx

Page states "Current as at: Tuesday 26 November 2024"

All fields
ID
GOV-051
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Aboriginal Health Plan 2024-2034
Description
NSW Ministry of Health and the Aboriginal Health and Medical Research Council set five strategic directions for 2024 to 2034, including growing the Aboriginal health workforce and addressing the social, cultural, economic, political, commercial and planetary determinants of health. Five enablers sit underneath, including formal partnerships, shared decision making and building the Community Controlled sector.
Operative period
2024-2034
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aboriginal/plan/Pages/default.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2024). *NSW Aboriginal health plan 2024-2034*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aboriginal/plan/Pages/default.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Current as at: Tuesday 26 November 2024"
GOV-052 Policy instrument

Everyone Plays Here: NSW Office of Sport Strategic Plan 2024-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical health

NSW Office of Sport set five focus areas for 2024 to 2028: Sector Growth, Facilities and Spaces, For all People, Partnerships and Investment, and Organisation Development. Intended results include improved participant retention across all age groups, more inclusive and accessible facilities, and lifelong participation opportunities for every person in NSW.

Full APA reference

NSW Office of Sport. (2024). Everyone plays here: NSW Office of Sport strategic plan 2024-2028. NSW Government. https://www.sport.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-10/Office-of-Sport-Strategic-Plan-2024-2028.pdf

PDF states "This report was published in October 2024" and the period 2024-2028

All fields
ID
GOV-052
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Office of Sport
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Everyone Plays Here: NSW Office of Sport Strategic Plan 2024-2028
Description
NSW Office of Sport set five focus areas for 2024 to 2028: Sector Growth, Facilities and Spaces, For all People, Partnerships and Investment, and Organisation Development. Intended results include improved participant retention across all age groups, more inclusive and accessible facilities, and lifelong participation opportunities for every person in NSW.
Operative period
2024-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.sport.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-10/Office-of-Sport-Strategic-Plan-2024-2028.pdf
Full APA reference
NSW Office of Sport. (2024). *Everyone plays here: NSW Office of Sport strategic plan 2024-2028*. NSW Government. https://www.sport.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2024-10/Office-of-Sport-Strategic-Plan-2024-2028.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "This report was published in October 2024" and the period 2024-2028
GOV-053 Policy instrument

Future Health: Guiding the next decade of health care in NSW 2022-2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

NSW Ministry of Health's decade plan for 2022 to 2032 names priorities including New Beginnings, Towards Zero Suicides, Ageing Well, Mentally Healthy Living and Closing the Gap. It sets strategic outcomes covering patient experience, safe care and people being healthy and well, backed by a focus on prevention, wellness and health promotion.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). Future Health: Guiding the next decade of health care in NSW 2022-2032. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/nswhealth/Pages/future-health.aspx

Page states "Current as at: Wednesday 22 October 2025"; title carries 2022-2032

All fields
ID
GOV-053
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Future Health: Guiding the next decade of health care in NSW 2022-2032
Description
NSW Ministry of Health's decade plan for 2022 to 2032 names priorities including New Beginnings, Towards Zero Suicides, Ageing Well, Mentally Healthy Living and Closing the Gap. It sets strategic outcomes covering patient experience, safe care and people being healthy and well, backed by a focus on prevention, wellness and health promotion.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/nswhealth/Pages/future-health.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). *Future Health: Guiding the next decade of health care in NSW 2022-2032*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/about/nswhealth/Pages/future-health.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Current as at: Wednesday 22 October 2025"; title carries 2022-2032
GOV-054 Policy instrument

NSW Healthy Eating and Active Living Strategy 2022-2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

NSW Health's Centre for Population Health sets four action areas for 2022 to 2032: prevention programs, routine advice on healthy eating and active living in clinical care, social marketing, and healthy food and built environments. The goal is preventing overweight and obesity community wide, with NSW Health and partner agencies collaborating on delivery.

Full APA reference

NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). NSW healthy eating and active living strategy 2022-2032. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx

Page states "Date of Publication: 06 September 2022"

All fields
ID
GOV-054
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Ministry of Health, Centre for Population Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Healthy Eating and Active Living Strategy 2022-2032
Description
NSW Health's Centre for Population Health sets four action areas for 2022 to 2032: prevention programs, routine advice on healthy eating and active living in clinical care, social marketing, and healthy food and built environments. The goal is preventing overweight and obesity community wide, with NSW Health and partner agencies collaborating on delivery.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). *NSW healthy eating and active living strategy 2022-2032*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/heal/Pages/nsw-healthy-eating-strategy.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date of Publication: 06 September 2022"
Related items
REF-088
Same document as
REF-088
GOV-055 Policy instrument

Strategic Framework for Suicide Prevention in NSW 2022-2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

NSW's whole of government approach for 2022 to 2027 organises effort around preventing suicidal distress, intervening earlier, supporting people in distress, caring for people after a suicide attempt and postvention support. It sits behind $87 million invested in 15 Towards Zero Suicides initiatives and a further $143.4 million to continue them for four years.

Full APA reference

NSW Mental Health Commission & NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). Strategic framework for suicide prevention in NSW 2022-2027. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/key-plans.aspx

Listed as a key current plan on the NSW Health mental health key plans page

All fields
ID
GOV-055
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Mental Health Commission and NSW Ministry of Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Strategic Framework for Suicide Prevention in NSW 2022-2027
Description
NSW's whole of government approach for 2022 to 2027 organises effort around preventing suicidal distress, intervening earlier, supporting people in distress, caring for people after a suicide attempt and postvention support. It sits behind $87 million invested in 15 Towards Zero Suicides initiatives and a further $143.4 million to continue them for four years.
Operative period
2022-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/key-plans.aspx
Full APA reference
NSW Mental Health Commission & NSW Ministry of Health. (2022). *Strategic framework for suicide prevention in NSW 2022-2027*. NSW Government. https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/mentalhealth/Pages/key-plans.aspx
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a key current plan on the NSW Health mental health key plans page
GOV-056 Policy instrument

2026 Road Safety Action Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Transport for NSW published this action plan carrying new targets to halve road deaths and reduce serious injuries by 30 per cent by 2030, alongside stronger local government action, education programs and safety technology. Delivery measures target crash trauma, a leading cause of preventable death and disability among young people.

Full APA reference

Transport for NSW. (2026). 2026 road safety action plan. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/transport-for-nsw/transport-strategies-and-plans/2026-road-safety-action-plan

Page titled 2026 Road Safety Action Plan states 'new targets to halve deaths and reduce serious injuries by 30% on NSW roads by 2030'.

All fields
ID
GOV-056
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Transport for NSW
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
2026 Road Safety Action Plan
Description
Transport for NSW published this action plan carrying new targets to halve road deaths and reduce serious injuries by 30 per cent by 2030, alongside stronger local government action, education programs and safety technology. Delivery measures target crash trauma, a leading cause of preventable death and disability among young people.
Operative period
2026 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/transport-for-nsw/transport-strategies-and-plans/2026-road-safety-action-plan
Full APA reference
Transport for NSW. (2026). *2026 road safety action plan*. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/transport-for-nsw/transport-strategies-and-plans/2026-road-safety-action-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page titled 2026 Road Safety Action Plan states 'new targets to halve deaths and reduce serious injuries by 30% on NSW roads by 2030'.
GOV-057 Policy instrument

NSW Disability Inclusion Plan 2026-2029

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical and mental health

Required under the Disability Inclusion Act 2014, this four year plan runs from January 2026 to December 2029 and delivers 30 actions across four focus areas, while obliging NSW departments and councils to prepare Disability Inclusion Action Plans. Actions target barriers in housing, education, transport, health and cultural participation.

Full APA reference

Department of Communities and Justice. (2026). NSW disability inclusion plan 2026-2029. NSW Government. https://lpab.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/dcj/dcj-website/documents/community-inclusion/disability-inclusion/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan-2026-2029-factsheet.pdf

Factsheet states 'The NSW DIP is a four year plan being implemented from January 2026 to December 2029' with 30 actions.

All fields
ID
GOV-057
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Department of Communities and Justice
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Disability Inclusion Plan 2026-2029
Description
Required under the Disability Inclusion Act 2014, this four year plan runs from January 2026 to December 2029 and delivers 30 actions across four focus areas, while obliging NSW departments and councils to prepare Disability Inclusion Action Plans. Actions target barriers in housing, education, transport, health and cultural participation.
Operative period
2026-2029
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://lpab.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/dcj/dcj-website/documents/community-inclusion/disability-inclusion/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan-2026-2029-factsheet.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Communities and Justice. (2026). *NSW disability inclusion plan 2026-2029*. NSW Government. https://lpab.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/dcj/dcj-website/documents/community-inclusion/disability-inclusion/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan/nsw-disability-inclusion-plan-2026-2029-factsheet.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Factsheet states 'The NSW DIP is a four year plan being implemented from January 2026 to December 2029' with 30 actions.
GOV-058 Policy instrument

Homes for NSW Strategy 2025-2035

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Homes NSW set this ten year plan for 2025 to 2035, backed by the $6.6 billion Building Homes for NSW program and 8,400 new social homes, half reserved for women and children escaping domestic violence. Targeted social housing supply and homelessness support address the housing determinant behind chronic illness and psychological distress.

Full APA reference

Homes NSW. (2025). Homes for NSW strategy 2025-2035. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/homes-nsw/housing-reforms-and-initiatives/homes-for-nsw-strategy

Page describes the strategy as 'a 10-year plan' for 2025 to 2035 and lists the $6.6 billion Building Homes for NSW commitment.

All fields
ID
GOV-058
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Homes NSW
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Homes for NSW Strategy 2025-2035
Description
Homes NSW set this ten year plan for 2025 to 2035, backed by the $6.6 billion Building Homes for NSW program and 8,400 new social homes, half reserved for women and children escaping domestic violence. Targeted social housing supply and homelessness support address the housing determinant behind chronic illness and psychological distress.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/homes-nsw/housing-reforms-and-initiatives/homes-for-nsw-strategy
Full APA reference
Homes NSW. (2025). *Homes for NSW strategy 2025-2035*. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/homes-nsw/housing-reforms-and-initiatives/homes-for-nsw-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page describes the strategy as 'a 10-year plan' for 2025 to 2035 and lists the $6.6 billion Building Homes for NSW commitment.
GOV-059 Policy instrument

Closing the Gap 2025-2028 Implementation Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

Aboriginal Affairs NSW released this three year implementation plan for 2025 to 2028 with $206 million of new funding across 14 initiatives plus 31 continuing programs against the 17 socio-economic targets. Shared decision making with Aboriginal partners directs spending across housing, justice, families and health determinants.

Full APA reference

Aboriginal Affairs NSW. (2025). Closing the gap 2025-2028 implementation plan. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/aboriginal-affairs-nsw/resources/closing-gap-2025-2028-implementation-plan

Page records 'File last updated on: 25 March 2026' and lists $206 million in new funding across 14 initiatives.

All fields
ID
GOV-059
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Aboriginal Affairs NSW
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Closing the Gap 2025-2028 Implementation Plan
Description
Aboriginal Affairs NSW released this three year implementation plan for 2025 to 2028 with $206 million of new funding across 14 initiatives plus 31 continuing programs against the 17 socio-economic targets. Shared decision making with Aboriginal partners directs spending across housing, justice, families and health determinants.
Operative period
2025-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/aboriginal-affairs-nsw/resources/closing-gap-2025-2028-implementation-plan
Full APA reference
Aboriginal Affairs NSW. (2025). *Closing the gap 2025-2028 implementation plan*. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/aboriginal-affairs-nsw/resources/closing-gap-2025-2028-implementation-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page records 'File last updated on: 25 March 2026' and lists $206 million in new funding across 14 initiatives.
GOV-060 Policy instrument

DCJ Strategic Plan 2026-2031

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Justice and community safety
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

First published in December 2025, this five year plan for 2026 to 2031 sets Department of Communities and Justice priorities including Aboriginal families being strong and connected, shared clients supported to thrive and customer informed service improvement. Commitments cover safe housing, freedom from violence and children growing up able to thrive.

Full APA reference

Department of Communities and Justice. (2025). DCJ strategic plan 2026-2031. NSW Government. https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/about-us/who-we-are-and-what-we-do/strategic-plan/dcj-strategic-plan-2026-2031.pdf

Document records 'First published: December 2025' and covers the operating period 2026 to 2031.

All fields
ID
GOV-060
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Department of Communities and Justice
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
DCJ Strategic Plan 2026-2031
Description
First published in December 2025, this five year plan for 2026 to 2031 sets Department of Communities and Justice priorities including Aboriginal families being strong and connected, shared clients supported to thrive and customer informed service improvement. Commitments cover safe housing, freedom from violence and children growing up able to thrive.
Operative period
2026-2031
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Justice and community safety
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/about-us/who-we-are-and-what-we-do/strategic-plan/dcj-strategic-plan-2026-2031.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Communities and Justice. (2025). *DCJ strategic plan 2026-2031*. NSW Government. https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/about-us/who-we-are-and-what-we-do/strategic-plan/dcj-strategic-plan-2026-2031.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document records 'First published: December 2025' and covers the operating period 2026 to 2031.
GOV-061 Policy instrument

Psychological Health and Safety Strategy 2024-2026

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

SafeWork NSW launched this three year strategy in May 2024, targeting 125,000 workplaces taking effective action on psychosocial risk and requiring a Psychosocial WHS Check for organisations with 200 or more workers. Regulator activity moves employers from awareness to control of workplace mental health hazards across the state.

Full APA reference

SafeWork NSW. (2024). Psychological health and safety strategy 2024-2026. NSW Government. https://www.safework.nsw.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1289646/safework-nsw-psychological-health-and-safety-strategy-2024-2026.pdf

Document timeline records a May 2024 launch and sets the 125,000 workplace target for the 2024 to 2026 period.

All fields
ID
GOV-061
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
SafeWork NSW
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Psychological Health and Safety Strategy 2024-2026
Description
SafeWork NSW launched this three year strategy in May 2024, targeting 125,000 workplaces taking effective action on psychosocial risk and requiring a Psychosocial WHS Check for organisations with 200 or more workers. Regulator activity moves employers from awareness to control of workplace mental health hazards across the state.
Operative period
2024-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.safework.nsw.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1289646/safework-nsw-psychological-health-and-safety-strategy-2024-2026.pdf
Full APA reference
SafeWork NSW. (2024). *Psychological health and safety strategy 2024-2026*. NSW Government. https://www.safework.nsw.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1289646/safework-nsw-psychological-health-and-safety-strategy-2024-2026.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document timeline records a May 2024 launch and sets the 125,000 workplace target for the 2024 to 2026 period.
GOV-062 Policy instrument

Creative Communities: NSW Arts, Culture and Creative Industries Policy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Arts and culture wellbeing
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Create NSW published this ten year policy in December 2023 for 2024 to 2033, committing $160 million to Western Sydney cultural infrastructure, a $500,000 Generations fellowship and a legislated Creative Statement every three years. Funded participation in arts and culture supports social connection and mental wellbeing across communities.

Full APA reference

Create NSW. (2023). Creative communities: NSW arts, culture and creative industries policy. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-12/creative-communities-arts-culture-and-creative-industries-policy.pdf

Document imprint reads 'Sydney, December 2023' and sets a policy horizon of 2024 to 2033.

All fields
ID
GOV-062
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Create NSW
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Creative Communities: NSW Arts, Culture and Creative Industries Policy
Description
Create NSW published this ten year policy in December 2023 for 2024 to 2033, committing $160 million to Western Sydney cultural infrastructure, a $500,000 Generations fellowship and a legislated Creative Statement every three years. Funded participation in arts and culture supports social connection and mental wellbeing across communities.
Operative period
2024-2033
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Arts and culture wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-12/creative-communities-arts-culture-and-creative-industries-policy.pdf
Full APA reference
Create NSW. (2023). *Creative communities: NSW arts, culture and creative industries policy*. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-12/creative-communities-arts-culture-and-creative-industries-policy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document imprint reads 'Sydney, December 2023' and sets a policy horizon of 2024 to 2033.
GOV-063 Policy instrument

Greener Places: An urban green infrastructure design framework for New South Wales

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Open space and green infrastructure
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Government Architect NSW issued this framework in June 2020 to guide green infrastructure across the state, with commitments including one million new trees and walkable access to quality green space for every household. Councils and agencies apply it through planning instruments, expanding shade, parkland and walking routes that support activity and heat resilience.

Full APA reference

Government Architect NSW. (2020). Greener places: An urban green infrastructure design framework for New South Wales. NSW Government. https://www.planning.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-10/greener-places.pdf

Document is dated June 2020 and states its role under the Environmental Planning and Assessment Act for local environmental plans.

All fields
ID
GOV-063
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Government Architect NSW
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Greener Places: An urban green infrastructure design framework for New South Wales
Description
Government Architect NSW issued this framework in June 2020 to guide green infrastructure across the state, with commitments including one million new trees and walkable access to quality green space for every household. Councils and agencies apply it through planning instruments, expanding shade, parkland and walking routes that support activity and heat resilience.
Operative period
Ongoing
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Open space and green infrastructure
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.planning.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-10/greener-places.pdf
Full APA reference
Government Architect NSW. (2020). *Greener places: An urban green infrastructure design framework for New South Wales*. NSW Government. https://www.planning.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-10/greener-places.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated June 2020 and states its role under the Environmental Planning and Assessment Act for local environmental plans.
GOV-064 Policy instrument

NSW Volunteering Strategy 2020-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Social inclusion and connection
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The NSW Government published this ten year strategy in 2020 and refreshed it in 2023, citing 4.3 million volunteers contributing 893.9 million hours and scheduling an interim evaluation in 2025-26. Sector investment builds volunteering that the strategy links to reduced symptoms of depression and less social isolation.

Full APA reference

NSW Government. (2020). NSW volunteering strategy 2020-2030. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-06/NSW-Volunteering-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf

Document states 'Copyright State of NSW 2020. Refreshed 2023.' and schedules an interim evaluation in financial year 2025-26.

All fields
ID
GOV-064
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Government
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
NSW Volunteering Strategy 2020-2030
Description
The NSW Government published this ten year strategy in 2020 and refreshed it in 2023, citing 4.3 million volunteers contributing 893.9 million hours and scheduling an interim evaluation in 2025-26. Sector investment builds volunteering that the strategy links to reduced symptoms of depression and less social isolation.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Social inclusion and connection
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-06/NSW-Volunteering-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf
Full APA reference
NSW Government. (2020). *NSW volunteering strategy 2020-2030*. NSW Government. https://www.nsw.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-06/NSW-Volunteering-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'Copyright State of NSW 2020. Refreshed 2023.' and schedules an interim evaluation in financial year 2025-26.
GOV-065 Policy instrument

Ageing Well in NSW: Seniors Strategy 2021-2031

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Communities and Justice issued this ten year seniors strategy for 2021 to 2031, noting that about 2.4 million people, or 24.7 per cent of the population, will be aged 60 and over by 2031. Two yearly action plans fund age friendly environments, inclusive communities and staying safe, active and healthy.

Full APA reference

Department of Communities and Justice. (2020). Ageing well in NSW: Seniors strategy 2021-2031. NSW Government. https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/community-inclusion/seniors/ageing-well-in-nsw-seniors-strategy-2021-2031.pdf

Document imprint DCJ0049-12/2020 and states action plans will be released every two years over the ten year life of the strategy.

All fields
ID
GOV-065
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
Department of Communities and Justice
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Ageing Well in NSW: Seniors Strategy 2021-2031
Description
The Department of Communities and Justice issued this ten year seniors strategy for 2021 to 2031, noting that about 2.4 million people, or 24.7 per cent of the population, will be aged 60 and over by 2031. Two yearly action plans fund age friendly environments, inclusive communities and staying safe, active and healthy.
Operative period
2021-2031
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/community-inclusion/seniors/ageing-well-in-nsw-seniors-strategy-2021-2031.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Communities and Justice. (2020). *Ageing well in NSW: Seniors strategy 2021-2031*. NSW Government. https://dcj.nsw.gov.au/documents/community-inclusion/seniors/ageing-well-in-nsw-seniors-strategy-2021-2031.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document imprint DCJ0049-12/2020 and states action plans will be released every two years over the ten year life of the strategy.
GOV-066 Policy instrument

The Wellbeing Framework for Schools

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Education and school wellbeing
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

The NSW Department of Education and Communities published this framework in April 2015 around the domains Connect, Succeed and Thrive, and it requires every public school to have a planned, whole school approach to student wellbeing. School level obligations embed belonging, resilience and help seeking for more than 800,000 students.

Full APA reference

NSW Department of Education and Communities. (2015). The wellbeing framework for schools. NSW Government. https://education.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/main-education/student-wellbeing/whole-school-approach/Wellbeing_Framework_for_Schools.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright April 2015' and is presented on the department's current whole school approach pages.

All fields
ID
GOV-066
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Issuing body
NSW Department of Education and Communities
Year
2015
Year added to library
2026
Title
The Wellbeing Framework for Schools
Description
The NSW Department of Education and Communities published this framework in April 2015 around the domains Connect, Succeed and Thrive, and it requires every public school to have a planned, whole school approach to student wellbeing. School level obligations embed belonging, resilience and help seeking for more than 800,000 students.
Operative period
Ongoing
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Education and school wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://education.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/main-education/student-wellbeing/whole-school-approach/Wellbeing_Framework_for_Schools.pdf
Full APA reference
NSW Department of Education and Communities. (2015). *The wellbeing framework for schools*. NSW Government. https://education.nsw.gov.au/content/dam/main-education/student-wellbeing/whole-school-approach/Wellbeing_Framework_for_Schools.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright April 2015' and is presented on the department's current whole school approach pages.
GOV-067 Policy instrument

Wellbeing in Victoria: A strategy to promote good mental health 2025-2035

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Victoria's Department of Health set eight priorities for 2025 to 2035, including prioritising wellbeing in economic and social decision making, wellbeing centred leadership, embedding respect and inclusion, and strengthening people's agency over their wellbeing. The first action plan covers two years, citing evidence that high wellbeing cuts mental illness risk by up to eight times.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2025). Wellbeing in Victoria: A strategy to promote good mental health 2025-2035. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2025-08/wellbeing-in-victoria-a-strategy-to-promote-good-mental-health.pdf

Strategy PDF states August 2025 publication and a 10 year period 2025-2035, with Wellbeing Action Plan 1 covering 2025/26 to 2026/27

All fields
ID
GOV-067
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Wellbeing in Victoria: A strategy to promote good mental health 2025-2035
Description
Victoria's Department of Health set eight priorities for 2025 to 2035, including prioritising wellbeing in economic and social decision making, wellbeing centred leadership, embedding respect and inclusion, and strengthening people's agency over their wellbeing. The first action plan covers two years, citing evidence that high wellbeing cuts mental illness risk by up to eight times.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/mental-health/prevention-and-promotion/wellbeing-strategy
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2025). *Wellbeing in Victoria: A strategy to promote good mental health 2025-2035*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2025-08/wellbeing-in-victoria-a-strategy-to-promote-good-mental-health.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Strategy PDF states August 2025 publication and a 10 year period 2025-2035, with Wellbeing Action Plan 1 covering 2025/26 to 2026/27
GOV-068 Policy instrument

Victorian Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2025-35

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

The Victorian Government's alcohol and other drug strategy for 2025 to 2035 sets five priorities: easier access to services, more flexible harm reduction and treatment, culturally safe care for Aboriginal Victorians, system innovation, and coordination with mental health, housing and justice. Its first three years strengthen existing services and complete Statewide Action Plan initiatives.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2025). Victorian alcohol and other drugs strategy 2025-35. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2025-35.pdf

Strategy page names the 2025-35 period; the PDF is hosted in the 2026-05 folder, indicating a 2026 republication

All fields
ID
GOV-068
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victorian Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2025-35
Description
The Victorian Government's alcohol and other drug strategy for 2025 to 2035 sets five priorities: easier access to services, more flexible harm reduction and treatment, culturally safe care for Aboriginal Victorians, system innovation, and coordination with mental health, housing and justice. Its first three years strengthen existing services and complete Statewide Action Plan initiatives.
Operative period
2025-2035
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/alcohol-other-drugs/victorian-aod-strategy
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2025). *Victorian alcohol and other drugs strategy 2025-35*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2025-35.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Strategy page names the 2025-35 period; the PDF is hosted in the 2026-05 folder, indicating a 2026 republication
Related items
REF-576
GOV-069 Policy instrument

Victorian public health and wellbeing outcomes framework and data dictionary

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Refreshed in 2025, it reports across five domains covering population health across the lifespan, social connectedness and community wellbeing, learning and development opportunities, economic participation, and health sustaining natural and built environments. It adds 25 targets across three domains and gives state departments and local councils common indicators aligned with the social determinants of health.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2025). Victorian public health and wellbeing outcomes framework and data dictionary. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-outcomes-framework-and-data-dictionary

Page states "Date published 27 Oct 2025" and describes a 2025 refresh

All fields
ID
GOV-069
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victorian public health and wellbeing outcomes framework and data dictionary
Description
Refreshed in 2025, it reports across five domains covering population health across the lifespan, social connectedness and community wellbeing, learning and development opportunities, economic participation, and health sustaining natural and built environments. It adds 25 targets across three domains and gives state departments and local councils common indicators aligned with the social determinants of health.
Operative period
Ongoing, refreshed 2025
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-outcomes-framework-and-data-dictionary
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2025). *Victorian public health and wellbeing outcomes framework and data dictionary*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-outcomes-framework-and-data-dictionary
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date published 27 Oct 2025" and describes a 2025 refresh
GOV-070 Policy instrument

Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Victoria's plan under the Public Health and Wellbeing Act 2008 sets ten priorities for 2023 to 2027, including tobacco use, mental health and wellbeing, healthy eating and active living. Its mental health and wellbeing priority aims to reduce mental distress, suicidality and alcohol and drug harm while increasing social connection and improving physical health.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2023). Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2023-27

Page describes it as the fourth plan made under the Public Health and Wellbeing Act 2008, covering 2023 to 2027

All fields
ID
GOV-070
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27
Description
Victoria's plan under the Public Health and Wellbeing Act 2008 sets ten priorities for 2023 to 2027, including tobacco use, mental health and wellbeing, healthy eating and active living. Its mental health and wellbeing priority aims to reduce mental distress, suicidality and alcohol and drug harm while increasing social connection and improving physical health.
Operative period
2023-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2023-27
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2023). *Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2023-27
Verified date or evidence
Page describes it as the fourth plan made under the Public Health and Wellbeing Act 2008, covering 2023 to 2027
GOV-071 Policy instrument

Our Strategic Plan 2023-27

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

The Victorian Department of Health's plan for 2023 to 2027, updated in 2025, sets seven strategic directions, among them keeping people healthy and safe in the community and improving Aboriginal health and wellbeing. It sets the vision that Victorians are the healthiest people in the world, with progress tracked through a priority outcomes framework.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2025). Our strategic plan 2023-27 (2025 update). Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/our-strategic-plan-2023-27

Page carries date 28 Aug 2026 and describes the 2025 update

All fields
ID
GOV-071
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2023 (2025 update)
Year added to library
2026
Title
Our Strategic Plan 2023-27
Description
The Victorian Department of Health's plan for 2023 to 2027, updated in 2025, sets seven strategic directions, among them keeping people healthy and safe in the community and improving Aboriginal health and wellbeing. It sets the vision that Victorians are the healthiest people in the world, with progress tracked through a priority outcomes framework.
Operative period
2023-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/our-strategic-plan-2023-27
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2025). *Our strategic plan 2023-27* (2025 update). Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/our-strategic-plan-2023-27
Verified date or evidence
Page carries date 28 Aug 2026 and describes the 2025 update
GOV-072 Policy instrument

Active Victoria 2022-2026: A strategic framework for sport and active recreation in Victoria

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical health

Sport and Recreation Victoria's framework for 2022 to 2026 sets six priority outcomes: equitable participation, accessible and inclusive infrastructure, workforce capability, good governance, a pipeline of sporting events, and high performance success. It covers grassroots and elite sport, citing Reclink's women's basketball league growing from 65 participants in 2019 to 155 in 2021.

Full APA reference

Sport and Recreation Victoria. (2022). Active Victoria 2022-2026: A strategic framework for sport and active recreation in Victoria. Victorian Government. https://sport.vic.gov.au/about-us/active-victoria-2022-2026-a-strategic-framework-for-sport-and-active-recreation-in-victoria

Page title and content state the 2022-2026 framework period

All fields
ID
GOV-072
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Government, Sport and Recreation Victoria
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Active Victoria 2022-2026: A strategic framework for sport and active recreation in Victoria
Description
Sport and Recreation Victoria's framework for 2022 to 2026 sets six priority outcomes: equitable participation, accessible and inclusive infrastructure, workforce capability, good governance, a pipeline of sporting events, and high performance success. It covers grassroots and elite sport, citing Reclink's women's basketball league growing from 65 participants in 2019 to 155 in 2021.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://sport.vic.gov.au/about-us/active-victoria-2022-2026-a-strategic-framework-for-sport-and-active-recreation-in-victoria
Full APA reference
Sport and Recreation Victoria. (2022). *Active Victoria 2022-2026: A strategic framework for sport and active recreation in Victoria*. Victorian Government. https://sport.vic.gov.au/about-us/active-victoria-2022-2026-a-strategic-framework-for-sport-and-active-recreation-in-victoria
Verified date or evidence
Page title and content state the 2022-2026 framework period
GOV-073 Policy instrument

Healthy choices: policy directive for Victorian public health services

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Announced by the Victorian Department of Health in mid 2021, it requires public health services to meet food and drink standards in in house managed retail outlets, vending machines and staff and event catering. Progress is reported annually each September with support from the Healthy Eating Advisory Service.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Health. (2026). Healthy choices: Policy directive and guidelines for health services. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/healthy-choices-policy-directive-and-guidelines-for-health-services

Page states "Date published: 19 Feb 2026" for the current version of the directive and guidelines

All fields
ID
GOV-073
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy choices: policy directive for Victorian public health services
Description
Announced by the Victorian Department of Health in mid 2021, it requires public health services to meet food and drink standards in in house managed retail outlets, vending machines and staff and event catering. Progress is reported annually each September with support from the Healthy Eating Advisory Service.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/healthy-choices-policy-directive-and-guidelines-for-health-services
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Health. (2026). *Healthy choices: Policy directive and guidelines for health services*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/publications/healthy-choices-policy-directive-and-guidelines-for-health-services
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date published: 19 Feb 2026" for the current version of the directive and guidelines
GOV-074 Policy instrument

Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Victoria's Department of Families, Fairness and Housing set five domains for 2017 to 2027: Aboriginal community leadership, prioritising Aboriginal culture and community, system reform, safe, secure, strong families, and physically, socially and emotionally healthy Aboriginal communities. It commits to eliminating systemic racism in the health and human service sectors, and is reviewed every three years.

Full APA reference

Victorian Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2017). Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027. Victorian Government. https://www.dffh.vic.gov.au/publications/korin-korin-balit-djak

Page names the 2017-2027 period and states the plan is reviewed every three years

All fields
ID
GOV-074
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Victorian Department of Families, Fairness and Housing
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027
Description
Victoria's Department of Families, Fairness and Housing set five domains for 2017 to 2027: Aboriginal community leadership, prioritising Aboriginal culture and community, system reform, safe, secure, strong families, and physically, socially and emotionally healthy Aboriginal communities. It commits to eliminating systemic racism in the health and human service sectors, and is reviewed every three years.
Operative period
2017-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dffh.vic.gov.au/publications/korin-korin-balit-djak
Full APA reference
Victorian Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2017). *Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027*. Victorian Government. https://www.dffh.vic.gov.au/publications/korin-korin-balit-djak
Verified date or evidence
Page names the 2017-2027 period and states the plan is reviewed every three years
GOV-075 Policy instrument

Psychological health regulations

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

WorkSafe Victoria administers these occupational health and safety regulations, which commence on 1 December 2025 and require employers to identify psychosocial hazards and eliminate or reduce the associated risks so far as is reasonably practicable. Duty holders must act on bullying, high job demands and exposure to violence as measurable workplace mental health risks.

Full APA reference

WorkSafe Victoria. (2025). Psychological health regulations. State of Victoria. https://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/psychological-health-regulations-frequently-asked-questions

Page states 'The Regulations will commence on 1 December 2025' and lists duties to identify psychosocial hazards and control risks.

All fields
ID
GOV-075
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
WorkSafe Victoria
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Psychological health regulations
Description
WorkSafe Victoria administers these occupational health and safety regulations, which commence on 1 December 2025 and require employers to identify psychosocial hazards and eliminate or reduce the associated risks so far as is reasonably practicable. Duty holders must act on bullying, high job demands and exposure to violence as measurable workplace mental health risks.
Operative period
2025 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/psychological-health-regulations-frequently-asked-questions
Full APA reference
WorkSafe Victoria. (2025). *Psychological health regulations*. State of Victoria. https://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/psychological-health-regulations-frequently-asked-questions
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The Regulations will commence on 1 December 2025' and lists duties to identify psychosocial hazards and control risks.
GOV-076 Policy instrument

Victoria's Housing Statement

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Victoria's 2023 housing statement covers the decade 2024 to 2034 with a target of 800,000 new homes, a pathway to 1.6 million homes by 2051 and a 7.5 per cent short stay accommodation platform levy. Planning and rental reforms address housing costs the statement links to holding a job and getting a good education.

Full APA reference

Department of Premier and Cabinet. (2023). Victoria's housing statement: The decade ahead 2024-2034. State of Victoria. https://content.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/DTP0424_Housing_Statement_v6_FA_WEB.pdf

Document subtitle reads 'The decade ahead 2024-2034' and states the 800,000 home target over the next decade.

All fields
ID
GOV-076
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Premier and Cabinet
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victoria's Housing Statement
Description
Victoria's 2023 housing statement covers the decade 2024 to 2034 with a target of 800,000 new homes, a pathway to 1.6 million homes by 2051 and a 7.5 per cent short stay accommodation platform levy. Planning and rental reforms address housing costs the statement links to holding a job and getting a good education.
Operative period
2024-2034
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://content.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/DTP0424_Housing_Statement_v6_FA_WEB.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Premier and Cabinet. (2023). *Victoria's housing statement: The decade ahead 2024-2034*. State of Victoria. https://content.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/DTP0424_Housing_Statement_v6_FA_WEB.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document subtitle reads 'The decade ahead 2024-2034' and states the 800,000 home target over the next decade.
GOV-077 Policy instrument

Victorian Volunteer Strategy 2022-2027

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Social inclusion and connection
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Released on 18 May 2022 by the Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, this five year strategy pursues three goals covering inclusive and accessible volunteering, flexible and easier volunteering, and resilient, supported and empowered volunteers. Sector funding sustains participation the strategy ties to stronger, more resilient and inclusive communities.

Full APA reference

Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). Victorian volunteer strategy 2022-2027. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/victorian-volunteer-strategy-2022-2027

Page carries a publication date of 18 May 2022 and presents the strategy as current for 2022 to 2027.

All fields
ID
GOV-077
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victorian Volunteer Strategy 2022-2027
Description
Released on 18 May 2022 by the Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, this five year strategy pursues three goals covering inclusive and accessible volunteering, flexible and easier volunteering, and resilient, supported and empowered volunteers. Sector funding sustains participation the strategy ties to stronger, more resilient and inclusive communities.
Operative period
2022-2027
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Social inclusion and connection
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.vic.gov.au/victorian-volunteer-strategy-2022-2027
Full APA reference
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). *Victorian volunteer strategy 2022-2027*. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/victorian-volunteer-strategy-2022-2027
Verified date or evidence
Page carries a publication date of 18 May 2022 and presents the strategy as current for 2022 to 2027.
GOV-078 Policy instrument

Ageing well in Victoria: an action plan for strengthening wellbeing for senior Victorians 2022-2026

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Published in June 2022, this four year action plan for senior Victorians is built on resilient, connected seniors and includes Jobs Victoria wage subsidies of up to $20,000 with $50 million set aside for women over 45. Funded actions cover social, cultural and intergenerational connection, exercise, nutrition and mental health support.

Full APA reference

Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). Ageing well in Victoria: An action plan for strengthening wellbeing for senior Victorians 2022-2026. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-06/Ageing%20well%20in%20Victoria.pdf

Document states 'Copyright State of Victoria, Australia, Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, June 2022' for the 2022 to 2026 period.

All fields
ID
GOV-078
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Ageing well in Victoria: an action plan for strengthening wellbeing for senior Victorians 2022-2026
Description
Published in June 2022, this four year action plan for senior Victorians is built on resilient, connected seniors and includes Jobs Victoria wage subsidies of up to $20,000 with $50 million set aside for women over 45. Funded actions cover social, cultural and intergenerational connection, exercise, nutrition and mental health support.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-06/Ageing%20well%20in%20Victoria.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). *Ageing well in Victoria: An action plan for strengthening wellbeing for senior Victorians 2022-2026*. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-06/Ageing%20well%20in%20Victoria.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'Copyright State of Victoria, Australia, Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, June 2022' for the 2022 to 2026 period.
GOV-079 Policy instrument

Inclusive Victoria: state disability plan (2022-2026)

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical and mental health

Required every four years under the Disability Act 2006, this March 2022 plan sets 22 priority areas including a Health, housing and wellbeing pillar and nearly $1.6 billion for students with disability through a Disability Inclusion package. Whole of government actions target access to housing and health care meeting individual needs.

Full APA reference

Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). Inclusive Victoria: State disability plan (2022-2026). State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-03/Inclusive-Victoria-state-disability-plan-2022-2026.pdf

Document states 'Copyright State of Victoria, Australia, Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, March 2022' and cites the four yearly legislative requirement.

All fields
ID
GOV-079
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Inclusive Victoria: state disability plan (2022-2026)
Description
Required every four years under the Disability Act 2006, this March 2022 plan sets 22 priority areas including a Health, housing and wellbeing pillar and nearly $1.6 billion for students with disability through a Disability Inclusion package. Whole of government actions target access to housing and health care meeting individual needs.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-03/Inclusive-Victoria-state-disability-plan-2022-2026.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Families, Fairness and Housing. (2022). *Inclusive Victoria: State disability plan (2022-2026)*. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-03/Inclusive-Victoria-state-disability-plan-2022-2026.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'Copyright State of Victoria, Australia, Department of Families, Fairness and Housing, March 2022' and cites the four yearly legislative requirement.
GOV-080 Policy instrument

Built Environment Climate Change Adaptation Action Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Climate and environmental health
  • Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical and mental health

Delivered over five years from 2022 to 2026 and updated every five years to 2050, this plan introduces minimum energy efficiency standards for around 320,000 rented homes and requires planning schemes to respond to coastal inundation and sea level rise. Adaptation duties reduce exposure to heatwaves, bushfire smoke and flooding.

Full APA reference

Department of Transport and Planning. (2022). Built environment climate change adaptation action plan. State of Victoria. https://www.planning.vic.gov.au/guides-and-resources/strategies-and-initiatives/built-environment-climate-change-adaptation-action-plan

Page states 'The plan will be delivered over the next 5 years (2022-2026), then updated every 5 years to 2050'.

All fields
ID
GOV-080
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Transport and Planning
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Built Environment Climate Change Adaptation Action Plan
Description
Delivered over five years from 2022 to 2026 and updated every five years to 2050, this plan introduces minimum energy efficiency standards for around 320,000 rented homes and requires planning schemes to respond to coastal inundation and sea level rise. Adaptation duties reduce exposure to heatwaves, bushfire smoke and flooding.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Climate and environmental health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.planning.vic.gov.au/guides-and-resources/strategies-and-initiatives/built-environment-climate-change-adaptation-action-plan
Full APA reference
Department of Transport and Planning. (2022). *Built environment climate change adaptation action plan*. State of Victoria. https://www.planning.vic.gov.au/guides-and-resources/strategies-and-initiatives/built-environment-climate-change-adaptation-action-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The plan will be delivered over the next 5 years (2022-2026), then updated every 5 years to 2050'.
GOV-081 Policy instrument

Open Space for Everyone

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Open space and green infrastructure
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

This 2021 open space strategy for metropolitan Melbourne is backed by the $315 million Suburban Parks Program delivering more than 6,500 hectares of new and upgraded open space, $13.4 million for dog parks and $11.95 million to plant 500,000 trees. Improved park access supports exercise, recreation and community health and wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Department of Energy, Environment and Climate Action. (2021). Open space for everyone. State of Victoria. https://www.environment.vic.gov.au/open-space-for-everyone/open-space-for-everyone-strategy

Page presents 'Open Space for Everyone (2021)' as the current strategy and lists the $315 million Suburban Parks Program.

All fields
ID
GOV-081
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Energy, Environment and Climate Action
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Open Space for Everyone
Description
This 2021 open space strategy for metropolitan Melbourne is backed by the $315 million Suburban Parks Program delivering more than 6,500 hectares of new and upgraded open space, $13.4 million for dog parks and $11.95 million to plant 500,000 trees. Improved park access supports exercise, recreation and community health and wellbeing.
Operative period
2021 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Open space and green infrastructure
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.environment.vic.gov.au/open-space-for-everyone/open-space-for-everyone-strategy
Full APA reference
Department of Energy, Environment and Climate Action. (2021). *Open space for everyone*. State of Victoria. https://www.environment.vic.gov.au/open-space-for-everyone/open-space-for-everyone-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page presents 'Open Space for Everyone (2021)' as the current strategy and lists the $315 million Suburban Parks Program.
GOV-082 Policy instrument

The Victorian Closing the Gap Implementation Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

First Peoples - State Relations administers this implementation plan, originally covering 2021 to 2023 and extended until mid 2026 while a new plan is developed with First Peoples stakeholders. Priority reform commitments against the 17 national socio-economic targets direct government action on the determinants shaping Aboriginal life outcomes in Victoria.

Full APA reference

First Peoples - State Relations. (2021). The Victorian closing the gap implementation plan. State of Victoria. https://www.firstpeoplesrelations.vic.gov.au/victorian-closing-gap-implementation-plan

Page states 'It has been extended until mid 2026 to partner with First Peoples stakeholders to develop a new implementation plan'.

All fields
ID
GOV-082
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
First Peoples - State Relations
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
The Victorian Closing the Gap Implementation Plan
Description
First Peoples - State Relations administers this implementation plan, originally covering 2021 to 2023 and extended until mid 2026 while a new plan is developed with First Peoples stakeholders. Priority reform commitments against the 17 national socio-economic targets direct government action on the determinants shaping Aboriginal life outcomes in Victoria.
Operative period
2021-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://www.firstpeoplesrelations.vic.gov.au/victorian-closing-gap-implementation-plan
Full APA reference
First Peoples - State Relations. (2021). *The Victorian closing the gap implementation plan*. State of Victoria. https://www.firstpeoplesrelations.vic.gov.au/victorian-closing-gap-implementation-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'It has been extended until mid 2026 to partner with First Peoples stakeholders to develop a new implementation plan'.
GOV-083 Policy instrument

Victorian Cycling Strategy 2018-28

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

Dated December 2017, this ten year strategy for 2018 to 2028 prioritises investment in strategic cycling corridors with the highest current and potential demand and commits to a safer, lower stress, better connected network. Corridor funding and inclusion measures pursue cycling that the strategy links to fighting chronic disease, obesity and poor mental health.

Full APA reference

Transport for Victoria. (2017). Victorian cycling strategy 2018-28. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/Victorian-Cycling-Strategy-2018-28.pdf

Document is dated December 2017 and sets a strategy period running to 2028.

All fields
ID
GOV-083
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Transport for Victoria
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
Victorian Cycling Strategy 2018-28
Description
Dated December 2017, this ten year strategy for 2018 to 2028 prioritises investment in strategic cycling corridors with the highest current and potential demand and commits to a safer, lower stress, better connected network. Corridor funding and inclusion measures pursue cycling that the strategy links to fighting chronic disease, obesity and poor mental health.
Operative period
2018-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/Victorian-Cycling-Strategy-2018-28.pdf
Full APA reference
Transport for Victoria. (2017). *Victorian cycling strategy 2018-28*. State of Victoria. https://www.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-09/Victorian-Cycling-Strategy-2018-28.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated December 2017 and sets a strategy period running to 2028.
GOV-084 Policy instrument

Queensland Spirit: The Road to 2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical health

Announced in July 2026, Queensland's sport plan to 2032 has four priorities: Games On, the home of Australian sport, Play On, and Beyond 2032. It funds $200 Sports Vouchers for children, Learn to Swim vouchers up to $150 for eligible children aged 0 to 4, plus grassroots infrastructure and club equipment grants.

Full APA reference

Queensland Government. (2026, July 23). Queensland Spirit: The road to 2032. https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647

Ministerial statement states "Published Thursday, 23 July, 2026 at 01:20 PM"; strategy page at https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/sport-strategy

All fields
ID
GOV-084
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Government
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Spirit: The Road to 2032
Description
Announced in July 2026, Queensland's sport plan to 2032 has four priorities: Games On, the home of Australian sport, Play On, and Beyond 2032. It funds $200 Sports Vouchers for children, Learn to Swim vouchers up to $150 for eligible children aged 0 to 4, plus grassroots infrastructure and club equipment grants.
Operative period
To 2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647
Full APA reference
Queensland Government. (2026, July 23). *Queensland Spirit: The road to 2032*. https://statements.qld.gov.au/statements/105647
Verified date or evidence
Ministerial statement states "Published Thursday, 23 July, 2026 at 01:20 PM"; strategy page at https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/sport-strategy
Related items
REF-101
Same document as
REF-101
GOV-085 Policy instrument

Department of Health Strategic Plan 2025-2029

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Queensland Health's core planning document for 2025 to 2029 sets five objectives: workforce, sustainability, access, innovation and health assets. Measures of success include a sustained year on year increase in the First Nations health workforce, lower WorkCover injury downtime, and stronger prevention and early intervention to reduce high acuity costs.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (2025). Department of Health strategic plan 2025-2029. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans

Listed as a current plan on the Queensland Health strategic plans index

All fields
ID
GOV-085
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Department of Health Strategic Plan 2025-2029
Description
Queensland Health's core planning document for 2025 to 2029 sets five objectives: workforce, sustainability, access, innovation and health assets. Measures of success include a sustained year on year increase in the First Nations health workforce, lower WorkCover injury downtime, and stronger prevention and early intervention to reduce high acuity costs.
Operative period
2025-2029
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (2025). *Department of Health strategic plan 2025-2029*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current plan on the Queensland Health strategic plans index
GOV-086 Policy instrument

A Better Choice Food and Drink Supply Strategy for Queensland Healthcare Facilities

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Health and Wellbeing Queensland requires public healthcare facilities to stock at least 50 per cent green category food in retail outlets, cap red category food at 20 per cent and sell no red category drinks. Vending machines must be at least 30 per cent green, and Hospital and Health Services report performance annually each December.

Full APA reference

Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2025). A better choice food and drink supply strategy for Queensland healthcare facilities (Sept. 2025 version). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/A-Better-Choice-Food-and-Drink-Supply-Strategy-for-Queensland-Healthcare-Facilities_Sept162025.pdf

PDF filename and content carry a 16 September 2025 version date; the supporting Health Service Directive took effect 6 November 2023

All fields
ID
GOV-086
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
A Better Choice Food and Drink Supply Strategy for Queensland Healthcare Facilities
Description
Health and Wellbeing Queensland requires public healthcare facilities to stock at least 50 per cent green category food in retail outlets, cap red category food at 20 per cent and sell no red category drinks. Vending machines must be at least 30 per cent green, and Hospital and Health Services report performance annually each December.
Operative period
In force, September 2025 version
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://hw.qld.gov.au/a-better-choice/healthcare/
Full APA reference
Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2025). *A better choice food and drink supply strategy for Queensland healthcare facilities* (Sept. 2025 version). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/A-Better-Choice-Food-and-Drink-Supply-Strategy-for-Queensland-Healthcare-Facilities_Sept162025.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF filename and content carry a 16 September 2025 version date; the supporting Health Service Directive took effect 6 November 2023
GOV-087 Policy instrument

Health and Wellbeing Queensland Strategic Plan 2023-2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Health and Wellbeing Queensland, the state's prevention agency, sets five objectives for 2023 to 2027: make a healthier Queensland, champion prevention, drive systems change, commit to impact and thrive together. Reviewed in April 2025, it commits to advancing health equity for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples and targeting the risk factors driving chronic disease.

Full APA reference

Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2026). Health and Wellbeing Queensland strategic plan 2023-27 (April 2026 review). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/HWQld_Strategic_Plan_2023-27_APRIL_26.pdf

PDF states "This strategic plan was reviewed in April 2026 and remains current for the reporting period 2026-2027"

All fields
ID
GOV-087
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Year
2023, reviewed 2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Health and Wellbeing Queensland Strategic Plan 2023-2027
Description
Health and Wellbeing Queensland, the state's prevention agency, sets five objectives for 2023 to 2027: make a healthier Queensland, champion prevention, drive systems change, commit to impact and thrive together. Reviewed in April 2025, it commits to advancing health equity for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples and targeting the risk factors driving chronic disease.
Operative period
2023-2027, reviewed April 2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://hw.qld.gov.au/about-us/strategic-plan/
Full APA reference
Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2026). *Health and Wellbeing Queensland strategic plan 2023-27* (April 2026 review). Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/HWQld_Strategic_Plan_2023-27_APRIL_26.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states "This strategic plan was reviewed in April 2026 and remains current for the reporting period 2026-2027"
Related items
REF-050
Same document as
REF-050
GOV-088 Policy instrument

Better Care Together: a plan for Queensland's state-funded mental health, alcohol and other drug services to 2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Queensland Health's plan to 2027 for mental health, alcohol and other drug services sets priorities including responding to mental health crisis and suicidality, improving services with First Nations peoples, and workforce capability. Developed with more than 500 stakeholders, it funds initiatives promoting mental health and wellbeing and extending drug responses beyond the health system.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (2023). Better care together: A plan for Queensland's state-funded mental health, alcohol and other drug services to 2027. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/better-care-together

Page states "Last updated: 18 February 2025" and the plan runs to 2027

All fields
ID
GOV-088
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Better Care Together: a plan for Queensland's state-funded mental health, alcohol and other drug services to 2027
Description
Queensland Health's plan to 2027 for mental health, alcohol and other drug services sets priorities including responding to mental health crisis and suicidality, improving services with First Nations peoples, and workforce capability. Developed with more than 500 stakeholders, it funds initiatives promoting mental health and wellbeing and extending drug responses beyond the health system.
Operative period
To 2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/better-care-together
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (2023). *Better care together: A plan for Queensland's state-funded mental health, alcohol and other drug services to 2027*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/better-care-together
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Last updated: 18 February 2025" and the plan runs to 2027
GOV-089 Policy instrument

Shifting minds: The Queensland Mental Health, Alcohol and Other Drugs, and Suicide Prevention Strategic Plan 2023-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Queensland Mental Health Commission's 2023 to 2028 plan spans whole of community, person and system priorities, including getting in early for ages 0 to 25, advancing First Nations health equity, and active social and economic participation. It targets housing, employment and social connection alongside alcohol, other drug and gambling harm.

Full APA reference

Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2023). Shifting minds: The Queensland mental health, alcohol and other drugs, and suicide prevention strategic plan 2023-2028. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028

Page describes it as the Queensland Government's five year whole of government plan for 2023-2028

All fields
ID
GOV-089
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Mental Health Commission
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Shifting minds: The Queensland Mental Health, Alcohol and Other Drugs, and Suicide Prevention Strategic Plan 2023-2028
Description
Queensland Mental Health Commission's 2023 to 2028 plan spans whole of community, person and system priorities, including getting in early for ages 0 to 25, advancing First Nations health equity, and active social and economic participation. It targets housing, employment and social connection alongside alcohol, other drug and gambling harm.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Full APA reference
Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2023). *Shifting minds: The Queensland mental health, alcohol and other drugs, and suicide prevention strategic plan 2023-2028*. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Verified date or evidence
Page describes it as the Queensland Government's five year whole of government plan for 2023-2028
GOV-090 Policy instrument

HEALTHQ32: A vision for Queensland's health system

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Queensland Health's ten year vision to 2032 organises reform around three focus areas, maximise wellbeing, care in the community and care in hospital. It shifts emphasis from illness to wellness and drives strategies including First Nations First Strategy 2032, with outcomes spanning equitable access, a good start to life and healthy ageing.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (2022). HEALTHQ32: A vision for Queensland's health system. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans

Listed as a current vision document on the Queensland Health strategic plans index

All fields
ID
GOV-090
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
HEALTHQ32: A vision for Queensland's health system
Description
Queensland Health's ten year vision to 2032 organises reform around three focus areas, maximise wellbeing, care in the community and care in hospital. It shifts emphasis from illness to wellness and drives strategies including First Nations First Strategy 2032, with outcomes spanning equitable access, a good start to life and healthy ageing.
Operative period
To 2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (2022). *HEALTHQ32: A vision for Queensland's health system*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current vision document on the Queensland Health strategic plans index
GOV-091 Policy instrument

Making Healthy Happen 2032, with Making Healthy Happen Action Plan 2024-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Queensland's obesity prevention strategy to 2032 sets three ambitions: create healthy environments, empower people to stay healthy, and enable access to prevention, early intervention and supportive healthcare. Targeted changes include affordable, culturally appropriate healthy food, less unhealthy food advertising and communities designed for active travel, with Health and Wellbeing Queensland driving implementation across government.

Full APA reference

Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2022). Making healthy happen 2032 and Making healthy happen action plan 2024-2026. Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/making-healthy-happen/

Page presents the 2032 strategy and the current 2024-2026 action plan

All fields
ID
GOV-091
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Health and Wellbeing Queensland
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Making Healthy Happen 2032, with Making Healthy Happen Action Plan 2024-2026
Description
Queensland's obesity prevention strategy to 2032 sets three ambitions: create healthy environments, empower people to stay healthy, and enable access to prevention, early intervention and supportive healthcare. Targeted changes include affordable, culturally appropriate healthy food, less unhealthy food advertising and communities designed for active travel, with Health and Wellbeing Queensland driving implementation across government.
Operative period
Strategy to 2032, action plan 2024-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://hw.qld.gov.au/making-healthy-happen/
Full APA reference
Health and Wellbeing Queensland. (2022). *Making healthy happen 2032* and *Making healthy happen action plan 2024-2026*. Queensland Government. https://hw.qld.gov.au/making-healthy-happen/
Verified date or evidence
Page presents the 2032 strategy and the current 2024-2026 action plan
GOV-092 Policy instrument

Achieving balance: The Queensland Alcohol and Other Drugs Plan 2022-2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Queensland's alcohol and other drugs plan for 2022 to 2027 sets five priorities: prevention and early intervention, better treatment and support systems, expanded diversion, reduced stigma and discrimination, and reduced harm. It seeks cross sector action spanning housing, child safety, corrections, justice, employment, education and policing, balancing harm, demand and supply reduction.

Full APA reference

Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2022). Achieving balance: The Queensland alcohol and other drugs plan 2022-2027. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028

Named on the Shifting minds page as a current sub plan for 2022-2027

All fields
ID
GOV-092
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Mental Health Commission
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Achieving balance: The Queensland Alcohol and Other Drugs Plan 2022-2027
Description
Queensland's alcohol and other drugs plan for 2022 to 2027 sets five priorities: prevention and early intervention, better treatment and support systems, expanded diversion, reduced stigma and discrimination, and reduced harm. It seeks cross sector action spanning housing, child safety, corrections, justice, employment, education and policing, balancing harm, demand and supply reduction.
Operative period
2022-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Full APA reference
Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2022). *Achieving balance: The Queensland alcohol and other drugs plan 2022-2027*. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Verified date or evidence
Named on the Shifting minds page as a current sub plan for 2022-2027
GOV-093 Policy instrument

HEALTHQ32: First Nations First Strategy 2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Queensland Health's First Nations First Strategy runs to 2032 under HEALTHQ32, built on four interdependent focus areas and outcomes covering equitable access, healthy ageing and an empowered workforce. Action plans roll out across three horizons, and every part of Queensland Health must embed a First Nations First approach.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (2022). HEALTHQ32: First Nations First strategy 2032. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans

Listed as a current strategy on the Queensland Health strategic plans index

All fields
ID
GOV-093
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
HEALTHQ32: First Nations First Strategy 2032
Description
Queensland Health's First Nations First Strategy runs to 2032 under HEALTHQ32, built on four interdependent focus areas and outcomes covering equitable access, healthy ageing and an empowered workforce. Action plans roll out across three horizons, and every part of Queensland Health must embed a First Nations First approach.
Operative period
To 2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (2022). *HEALTHQ32: First Nations First strategy 2032*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current strategy on the Queensland Health strategic plans index
GOV-094 Policy instrument

Making Tracks Together: Queensland's Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Equity Framework

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Queensland Health and the Queensland Aboriginal and Islander Health Council launched this framework in 2021 to implement legislation requiring all 16 Hospital and Health Services to co-develop Health Equity Strategies. Each service must eliminate institutional racism, influence the social, cultural and economic determinants of health, and report publicly each year.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health & Queensland Aboriginal and Islander Health Council. (2021). Making Tracks Together: Queensland's Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health equity framework. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/public-health/groups/atsihealth/making-tracks-together-queenslands-atsi-health-equity-framework

Page states the framework was co-launched on 26 October 2021 and underpins legislated Hospital and Health Service Health Equity Strategies

All fields
ID
GOV-094
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health and Queensland Aboriginal and Islander Health Council
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Making Tracks Together: Queensland's Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Health Equity Framework
Description
Queensland Health and the Queensland Aboriginal and Islander Health Council launched this framework in 2021 to implement legislation requiring all 16 Hospital and Health Services to co-develop Health Equity Strategies. Each service must eliminate institutional racism, influence the social, cultural and economic determinants of health, and report publicly each year.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/public-health/groups/atsihealth/making-tracks-together-queenslands-atsi-health-equity-framework
Full APA reference
Queensland Health & Queensland Aboriginal and Islander Health Council. (2021). *Making Tracks Together: Queensland's Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health equity framework*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/public-health/groups/atsihealth/making-tracks-together-queenslands-atsi-health-equity-framework
Verified date or evidence
Page states the framework was co-launched on 26 October 2021 and underpins legislated Hospital and Health Service Health Equity Strategies
GOV-095 Policy instrument

Every life: The Queensland Suicide Prevention Plan 2019-2029

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Queensland's suicide prevention plan runs 2019 to 2029, with Phase Two covering 2023 to 2026 through four action areas: building resilience, reducing vulnerability, enhancing responsiveness and enabling reform. It prioritises men's suicide prevention, links reduced distress to economic, employment and housing security, and expands after hours, peer and emergency department diversion options.

Full APA reference

Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2019). Every life: The Queensland suicide prevention plan 2019-2029. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028

Named on the Shifting minds page as a current sub plan for 2019-2029

All fields
ID
GOV-095
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Mental Health Commission
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Every life: The Queensland Suicide Prevention Plan 2019-2029
Description
Queensland's suicide prevention plan runs 2019 to 2029, with Phase Two covering 2023 to 2026 through four action areas: building resilience, reducing vulnerability, enhancing responsiveness and enabling reform. It prioritises men's suicide prevention, links reduced distress to economic, employment and housing security, and expands after hours, peer and emergency department diversion options.
Operative period
2019-2029
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Full APA reference
Queensland Mental Health Commission. (2019). *Every life: The Queensland suicide prevention plan 2019-2029*. Queensland Government. https://www.qmhc.qld.gov.au/shifting-minds-2023-2028
Verified date or evidence
Named on the Shifting minds page as a current sub plan for 2019-2029
GOV-096 Policy instrument

Activate! Queensland 2019-2029

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical health

Queensland's physical activity strategy for 2019 to 2029 aims to lift children active for an hour a day from 41 to 60 percent, and adults sufficiently active from 60 to 75 percent. Action plans such as Accelerate 2022 to 2025 fund FairPlay vouchers, Active Clubs grants and infrastructure to cut cost barriers.

Full APA reference

Queensland Government. (2019). Activate! Queensland 2019-2029. https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/activate-queensland

Page describes the ten year strategy released in July 2019 and was last updated 20 November 2024. Its Accelerate action plan 2022-2025 has ended

All fields
ID
GOV-096
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Government, Department of Sport
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Activate! Queensland 2019-2029
Description
Queensland's physical activity strategy for 2019 to 2029 aims to lift children active for an hour a day from 41 to 60 percent, and adults sufficiently active from 60 to 75 percent. Action plans such as Accelerate 2022 to 2025 fund FairPlay vouchers, Active Clubs grants and infrastructure to cut cost barriers.
Operative period
2019-2029
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/activate-queensland
Full APA reference
Queensland Government. (2019). *Activate! Queensland 2019-2029*. https://www.sport.qld.gov.au/sport/activate-queensland
Verified date or evidence
Page describes the ten year strategy released in July 2019 and was last updated 20 November 2024. Its Accelerate action plan 2022-2025 has ended
GOV-097 Policy instrument

Prevention Strategic Framework 2017 to 2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

Queensland Health's prevention framework for 2017 to 2026 targets four modifiable behaviours, unhealthy eating, physical inactivity, tobacco smoking and unsafe sun exposure, pairing healthier places where people live, work, learn and play with empowering individuals. Its goal is increasing the share of Queenslanders adopting healthy behaviours to cut cardiovascular disease, diabetes and some cancers.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (2017). Prevention strategic framework 2017 to 2026. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/health-wellbeing

Page states the Prevention Strategic Framework 2017 to 2026 replaced the earlier Health and Wellbeing Strategic Framework 2017-2026

All fields
ID
GOV-097
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
Prevention Strategic Framework 2017 to 2026
Description
Queensland Health's prevention framework for 2017 to 2026 targets four modifiable behaviours, unhealthy eating, physical inactivity, tobacco smoking and unsafe sun exposure, pairing healthier places where people live, work, learn and play with empowering individuals. Its goal is increasing the share of Queenslanders adopting healthy behaviours to cut cardiovascular disease, diabetes and some cancers.
Operative period
2017-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/health-wellbeing
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (2017). *Prevention strategic framework 2017 to 2026*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans/health-wellbeing
Verified date or evidence
Page states the Prevention Strategic Framework 2017 to 2026 replaced the earlier Health and Wellbeing Strategic Framework 2017-2026
Related items
REF-100
Same document as
REF-100
GOV-098 Policy instrument

Queensland Health Equity, Diversity and Inclusion Statement of Commitment

  • Health portfolio
  • Health equity or social determinants
  • Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Queensland Health's commitment covers nine areas, including reflecting the communities we serve, diversity at all levels, fair and inclusive practices and visible leaders. Through the Equity and Diversity Plan 2024 to 2026, it sets workforce targets for women in leadership, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, culturally diverse people and people with disability.

Full APA reference

Queensland Health. (n.d.). Queensland Health equity, diversity and inclusion statement of commitment. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans

Listed among current strategic documents on the Queensland Health strategic plans index

All fields
ID
GOV-098
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Health
Year
Not stated
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Health Equity, Diversity and Inclusion Statement of Commitment
Description
Queensland Health's commitment covers nine areas, including reflecting the communities we serve, diversity at all levels, fair and inclusive practices and visible leaders. Through the Equity and Diversity Plan 2024 to 2026, it sets workforce targets for women in leadership, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples, culturally diverse people and people with disability.
Operative period
Ongoing, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Health equity or social determinants
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Full APA reference
Queensland Health. (n.d.). *Queensland Health equity, diversity and inclusion statement of commitment*. Queensland Government. https://www.health.qld.gov.au/system-governance/strategic-direction/plans
Verified date or evidence
Listed among current strategic documents on the Queensland Health strategic plans index
GOV-099 Policy instrument

Homes for Queenslanders

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Queensland's housing plan targets one million new homes by 2046 including 53,500 social homes, a $350 million Incentivising Infill Fund and a First Home Owners Grant doubled to $30,000 until 30 June 2025. Supply and support measures pursue housing the plan links to financial security, social engagement and community wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Department of Housing, Local Government, Planning and Public Works. (2024). Homes for Queenslanders. Queensland Government. https://www.housing.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0022/48163/homes-for-queenslanders.pdf

Document sets a 2046 horizon and states the doubled First Home Owners Grant applies until 30 June 2025, confirming a 2024 release.

All fields
ID
GOV-099
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Housing, Local Government, Planning and Public Works
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Homes for Queenslanders
Description
Queensland's housing plan targets one million new homes by 2046 including 53,500 social homes, a $350 million Incentivising Infill Fund and a First Home Owners Grant doubled to $30,000 until 30 June 2025. Supply and support measures pursue housing the plan links to financial security, social engagement and community wellbeing.
Operative period
2024-2046
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.housing.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0022/48163/homes-for-queenslanders.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Housing, Local Government, Planning and Public Works. (2024). *Homes for Queenslanders*. Queensland Government. https://www.housing.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0022/48163/homes-for-queenslanders.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document sets a 2046 horizon and states the doubled First Home Owners Grant applies until 30 June 2025, confirming a 2024 release.
GOV-100 Policy instrument

Queensland Volunteering Strategy 2024-2032

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Social inclusion and connection
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

This eight year strategy for 2024 to 2032 organises action around the volunteering experience and a vibrant and inclusive sector, including over $2.4 million invested in a state volunteering peak body. Sector investment sustains volunteering the strategy describes as a catalyst for social networks essential to physical, social and emotional health.

Full APA reference

Department of Treaty, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Partnerships, Communities and the Arts. (2024). Queensland volunteering strategy 2024-2032. Queensland Government. https://www.dwatsipm.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/our-work/community-support/communities-2032/queensland-volunteering-strategy/volunteering-strategy-2024-2032.docx

Document is titled Queensland Volunteering Strategy 2024-2032 and states over $2.4 million invested in a volunteering peak body.

All fields
ID
GOV-100
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Treaty, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Partnerships, Communities and the Arts
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Volunteering Strategy 2024-2032
Description
This eight year strategy for 2024 to 2032 organises action around the volunteering experience and a vibrant and inclusive sector, including over $2.4 million invested in a state volunteering peak body. Sector investment sustains volunteering the strategy describes as a catalyst for social networks essential to physical, social and emotional health.
Operative period
2024-2032
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Social inclusion and connection
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dwatsipm.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/our-work/community-support/communities-2032/queensland-volunteering-strategy/volunteering-strategy-2024-2032.docx
Full APA reference
Department of Treaty, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Partnerships, Communities and the Arts. (2024). *Queensland volunteering strategy 2024-2032*. Queensland Government. https://www.dwatsipm.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/our-work/community-support/communities-2032/queensland-volunteering-strategy/volunteering-strategy-2024-2032.docx
Verified date or evidence
Document is titled Queensland Volunteering Strategy 2024-2032 and states over $2.4 million invested in a volunteering peak body.
GOV-101 Policy instrument

Queensland Seniors Action Plan 2024-2026

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

This three year action plan pursues an age friendly state where older people live active, healthy and productive lives, adding $2.5 million per year for social isolation services from 2024-25 and up to $1,672 in electricity concessions for eligible seniors. Funded actions target isolation, healthcare access and physical activity.

Full APA reference

Department of Child Safety, Seniors and Disability Services. (2024). Queensland seniors action plan 2024-2026. Queensland Government. https://www.families.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/seniors/queensland-seniors-action-plan-2024-2026.pdf

Document header reads 'Seniors Action Plan 2024-2026' and commits additional social isolation funding from 2024-25.

All fields
ID
GOV-101
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Child Safety, Seniors and Disability Services
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Seniors Action Plan 2024-2026
Description
This three year action plan pursues an age friendly state where older people live active, healthy and productive lives, adding $2.5 million per year for social isolation services from 2024-25 and up to $1,672 in electricity concessions for eligible seniors. Funded actions target isolation, healthcare access and physical activity.
Operative period
2024-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.families.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/seniors/queensland-seniors-action-plan-2024-2026.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Child Safety, Seniors and Disability Services. (2024). *Queensland seniors action plan 2024-2026*. Queensland Government. https://www.families.qld.gov.au/_media/documents/seniors/queensland-seniors-action-plan-2024-2026.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document header reads 'Seniors Action Plan 2024-2026' and commits additional social isolation funding from 2024-25.
GOV-102 Policy instrument

ShapingSEQ 2023

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Planning and built environment
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

ShapingSEQ 2023 is Queensland's 25 year regional plan for South East Queensland, planning for around six million residents by 2046, prioritising a minimum 60/40 consolidation to expansion ratio and setting local government housing supply targets for 2031 and 2046. Statutory settlement patterns shape walkability, social infrastructure and access to natural assets.

Full APA reference

Department of State Development, Infrastructure and Planning. (2023). ShapingSEQ 2023. Queensland Government. https://www.planning.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0021/86223/shapingseq2023-summary.pdf

Summary states ShapingSEQ 2023 'is the Queensland Government's 25-year strategic plan to guide the future growth of the South East Queensland region'.

All fields
ID
GOV-102
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of State Development, Infrastructure and Planning
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
ShapingSEQ 2023
Description
ShapingSEQ 2023 is Queensland's 25 year regional plan for South East Queensland, planning for around six million residents by 2046, prioritising a minimum 60/40 consolidation to expansion ratio and setting local government housing supply targets for 2031 and 2046. Statutory settlement patterns shape walkability, social infrastructure and access to natural assets.
Operative period
2023-2046
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Planning and built environment
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.planning.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0021/86223/shapingseq2023-summary.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of State Development, Infrastructure and Planning. (2023). *ShapingSEQ 2023*. Queensland Government. https://www.planning.qld.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0021/86223/shapingseq2023-summary.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Summary states ShapingSEQ 2023 'is the Queensland Government's 25-year strategic plan to guide the future growth of the South East Queensland region'.
GOV-103 Policy instrument

Queensland's Disability Plan 2022-2027: Together, a better Queensland

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical and mental health

This five year plan for 2022 to 2027 requires Queensland Government departments to develop, publish and deliver disability service plans aligned with its outcomes, including that people with disability attain the highest possible health and wellbeing outcomes. Departmental planning duties widen access to lifelong learning, community participation and inclusive services.

Full APA reference

Queensland Government. (2022). Queensland's disability plan 2022-2027: Together, a better Queensland. Queensland Government. https://www.families.qld.gov.au/campaign/queenslands-disability-plan/about-plan/queenslands-disability-plan-2022-27

Page presents the 2022 to 2027 plan as current and states departments 'will be required to develop, publish and deliver key actions'.

All fields
ID
GOV-103
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Government
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland's Disability Plan 2022-2027: Together, a better Queensland
Description
This five year plan for 2022 to 2027 requires Queensland Government departments to develop, publish and deliver disability service plans aligned with its outcomes, including that people with disability attain the highest possible health and wellbeing outcomes. Departmental planning duties widen access to lifelong learning, community participation and inclusive services.
Operative period
2022-2027
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.families.qld.gov.au/campaign/queenslands-disability-plan/about-plan/queenslands-disability-plan-2022-27
Full APA reference
Queensland Government. (2022). *Queensland's disability plan 2022-2027: Together, a better Queensland*. Queensland Government. https://www.families.qld.gov.au/campaign/queenslands-disability-plan/about-plan/queenslands-disability-plan-2022-27
Verified date or evidence
Page presents the 2022 to 2027 plan as current and states departments 'will be required to develop, publish and deliver key actions'.
GOV-104 Policy instrument

Managing the risk of psychosocial hazards at work Code of Practice 2022

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Commencing on 1 April 2023 alongside supporting regulations, this code obliges every person conducting a business or undertaking to follow a four step process to identify psychosocial hazards, assess and control risks, and review controls. Inspectors can rely on it, making psychological safety an enforceable workplace duty in Queensland.

Full APA reference

Workplace Health and Safety Queensland. (2022). Managing the risk of psychosocial hazards at work code of practice 2022. Queensland Government. https://www.worksafe.qld.gov.au/laws-and-compliance/codes-of-practice/managing-the-risk-of-psychosocial-hazards-at-work-code-of-practice-2022

Page states 'The Code and Regulations both commenced on 1 April 2023' and remains listed as a current code of practice.

All fields
ID
GOV-104
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Workplace Health and Safety Queensland
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Managing the risk of psychosocial hazards at work Code of Practice 2022
Description
Commencing on 1 April 2023 alongside supporting regulations, this code obliges every person conducting a business or undertaking to follow a four step process to identify psychosocial hazards, assess and control risks, and review controls. Inspectors can rely on it, making psychological safety an enforceable workplace duty in Queensland.
Operative period
2023 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.worksafe.qld.gov.au/laws-and-compliance/codes-of-practice/managing-the-risk-of-psychosocial-hazards-at-work-code-of-practice-2022
Full APA reference
Workplace Health and Safety Queensland. (2022). *Managing the risk of psychosocial hazards at work code of practice 2022*. Queensland Government. https://www.worksafe.qld.gov.au/laws-and-compliance/codes-of-practice/managing-the-risk-of-psychosocial-hazards-at-work-code-of-practice-2022
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The Code and Regulations both commenced on 1 April 2023' and remains listed as a current code of practice.
GOV-105 Policy instrument

Student Wellbeing Package

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Education and school wellbeing
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

From 1 July 2021 the Department of Education has delivered this $106.7 million package over three years, recruiting additional wellbeing professionals so every state school student can access one, and piloting general practitioners in 50 secondary schools. School based staffing gives students free onsite mental health and health support.

Full APA reference

Department of Education. (2021). Student wellbeing package. Queensland Government. https://education.qld.gov.au/students/student-health-safety-wellbeing/student-wellbeing-package

Page states 'From 1 July 2021, schools and regions have been working closely to recruit additional wellbeing professionals' under a $106.7 million investment.

All fields
ID
GOV-105
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Education
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Student Wellbeing Package
Description
From 1 July 2021 the Department of Education has delivered this $106.7 million package over three years, recruiting additional wellbeing professionals so every state school student can access one, and piloting general practitioners in 50 secondary schools. School based staffing gives students free onsite mental health and health support.
Operative period
2021 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Education and school wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://education.qld.gov.au/students/student-health-safety-wellbeing/student-wellbeing-package
Full APA reference
Department of Education. (2021). *Student wellbeing package*. Queensland Government. https://education.qld.gov.au/students/student-health-safety-wellbeing/student-wellbeing-package
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'From 1 July 2021, schools and regions have been working closely to recruit additional wellbeing professionals' under a $106.7 million investment.
GOV-106 Policy instrument

Healthy Food and Drink Supply Strategy for Queensland Schools

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Food security and food systems
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

The Department of Education maintains this school food strategy, updated to version 1.4 in January 2020, which limits red category foods and drinks to no more than two occasions per term and nominates plain water as the best drink choice. Rules cover tuckshops, vending machines, camps, fundraising and classroom rewards.

Full APA reference

Department of Education. (2020). Healthy food and drink supply strategy for Queensland schools. Queensland Government. https://education.qld.gov.au/student/Documents/smart-choices-strategy.pdf

Document records 'Version 1.4 Updated January 2020' and applies to all school food and drink supply situations.

All fields
ID
GOV-106
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Education
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Food and Drink Supply Strategy for Queensland Schools
Description
The Department of Education maintains this school food strategy, updated to version 1.4 in January 2020, which limits red category foods and drinks to no more than two occasions per term and nominates plain water as the best drink choice. Rules cover tuckshops, vending machines, camps, fundraising and classroom rewards.
Operative period
Ongoing
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Food security and food systems
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://education.qld.gov.au/student/Documents/smart-choices-strategy.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Education. (2020). *Healthy food and drink supply strategy for Queensland schools*. Queensland Government. https://education.qld.gov.au/student/Documents/smart-choices-strategy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document records 'Version 1.4 Updated January 2020' and applies to all school food and drink supply situations.
GOV-107 Policy instrument

Queensland Walking Strategy 2019-2029

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Transport and Main Roads set this ten year walking strategy for 2019 to 2029 with directions covering walkable communities and connected, comfortable and safe walking environments, delivered through successive action plans carrying dozens of actions. Investment in footpaths and crossings supports walking the department ties to good health and mental wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Department of Transport and Main Roads. (2019). Queensland walking strategy 2019-2029. Queensland Government. https://www.tmr.qld.gov.au/travel-and-transport/pedestrians-and-walking/queensland-walking-strategy

Page states the strategy 'sets the direction to make walking an easy choice for everyone, every day over the next 10 years'.

All fields
ID
GOV-107
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Department of Transport and Main Roads
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Walking Strategy 2019-2029
Description
The Department of Transport and Main Roads set this ten year walking strategy for 2019 to 2029 with directions covering walkable communities and connected, comfortable and safe walking environments, delivered through successive action plans carrying dozens of actions. Investment in footpaths and crossings supports walking the department ties to good health and mental wellbeing.
Operative period
2019-2029
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.tmr.qld.gov.au/travel-and-transport/pedestrians-and-walking/queensland-walking-strategy
Full APA reference
Department of Transport and Main Roads. (2019). *Queensland walking strategy 2019-2029*. Queensland Government. https://www.tmr.qld.gov.au/travel-and-transport/pedestrians-and-walking/queensland-walking-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page states the strategy 'sets the direction to make walking an easy choice for everyone, every day over the next 10 years'.
GOV-108 Policy instrument

Queensland Climate Adaptation Strategy 2017-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Climate and environmental health
  • Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical and mental health

Queensland Treasury administers this adaptation strategy for 2017 to 2030, now under review, which supported seven industry led sector adaptation plans and the QCoast2100 program for coastal erosion, storm tide inundation and sea level rise. A human health and wellbeing sector plan and household preparedness tools address extreme heat and disaster exposure.

Full APA reference

Queensland Treasury. (2017). Queensland climate adaptation strategy 2017-2030. Queensland Government. https://www.treasury.qld.gov.au/policies-and-programs/climate/climate-adaptation-strategy/

Page refers to 'The Queensland Climate Adaptation Strategy (Q-CAS) 2017-2030 (currently under review)' and its sector adaptation plans.

All fields
ID
GOV-108
Jurisdiction
Australia - Queensland
Issuing body
Queensland Treasury
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
Queensland Climate Adaptation Strategy 2017-2030
Description
Queensland Treasury administers this adaptation strategy for 2017 to 2030, now under review, which supported seven industry led sector adaptation plans and the QCoast2100 program for coastal erosion, storm tide inundation and sea level rise. A human health and wellbeing sector plan and household preparedness tools address extreme heat and disaster exposure.
Operative period
2017-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Climate and environmental health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current, under review
URL
https://www.treasury.qld.gov.au/policies-and-programs/climate/climate-adaptation-strategy/
Full APA reference
Queensland Treasury. (2017). *Queensland climate adaptation strategy 2017-2030*. Queensland Government. https://www.treasury.qld.gov.au/policies-and-programs/climate/climate-adaptation-strategy/
Verified date or evidence
Page refers to 'The Queensland Climate Adaptation Strategy (Q-CAS) 2017-2030 (currently under review)' and its sector adaptation plans.
GOV-109 Policy instrument

Western Australian Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

The WA Mental Health Commission's five year strategy for 2026 to 2031 sets aspirations across four domains, people, community, services and leadership, then pillars and focus areas from universal wellbeing to specialised supports. Developed after the Independent Review of WA Health System Governance, it guides government, non-government and community effort without imposing duties.

Full APA reference

WA Mental Health Commission. (2026). Western Australian mental health and alcohol and other drugs strategy 2026-2031. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/

Commission page states "last updated: 6 July 2026"; the strategy site refers to "the final document" and to annual implementation and monitoring plans, replacing the 2020-2030 Services Plan

All fields
ID
GOV-109
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Mental Health Commission
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Western Australian Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031
Description
The WA Mental Health Commission's five year strategy for 2026 to 2031 sets aspirations across four domains, people, community, services and leadership, then pillars and focus areas from universal wellbeing to specialised supports. Developed after the Independent Review of WA Health System Governance, it guides government, non-government and community effort without imposing duties.
Operative period
2026-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.mhc.wa.gov.au/our-initiatives/our-projects/mental-health-and-alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2026-2031
Full APA reference
WA Mental Health Commission. (2026). *Western Australian mental health and alcohol and other drugs strategy 2026-2031*. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Commission page states "last updated: 6 July 2026"; the strategy site refers to "the final document" and to annual implementation and monitoring plans, replacing the 2020-2030 Services Plan
Related items
REF-128
Same document as
REF-128
GOV-110 Policy instrument

State Public Health Plan 2025-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

Prepared by the Chief Health Officer under the Public Health Act 2016, Western Australia's 2025 to 2030 plan sets four objectives, promote, prevent, protect and enable, plus overarching aims on Aboriginal health and wellbeing and on equity and inclusion. Every local government must produce a public health plan consistent with it.

Full APA reference

WA Department of Health. (2025). State public health plan 2025-2030. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Articles/N_R/Public-health-planning/State-Public-Health-Plan

Page states "Last reviewed: 04-06-2025" and names the 2025-2030 plan made under the Public Health Act 2016

All fields
ID
GOV-110
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Department of Health, Public Health
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
State Public Health Plan 2025-2030
Description
Prepared by the Chief Health Officer under the Public Health Act 2016, Western Australia's 2025 to 2030 plan sets four objectives, promote, prevent, protect and enable, plus overarching aims on Aboriginal health and wellbeing and on equity and inclusion. Every local government must produce a public health plan consistent with it.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Articles/N_R/Public-health-planning/State-Public-Health-Plan
Full APA reference
WA Department of Health. (2025). *State public health plan 2025-2030*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Articles/N_R/Public-health-planning/State-Public-Health-Plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Last reviewed: 04-06-2025" and names the 2025-2030 plan made under the Public Health Act 2016
GOV-111 Policy instrument

Western Australian Eating Disorders Framework 2025-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

The WA Mental Health Commission's 2025 to 2030 framework sets six focus areas covering promotion and prevention, earlier community treatment, specialised bed based care, workforce education, care navigation and research. It is funder neutral but sits alongside $6.6 million for navigation, screening and prevention, and asks hospitals to treat eating disorders as core business.

Full APA reference

WA Mental Health Commission. (2025). Western Australian eating disorders framework 2025-2030. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/

Named on the strategy site as a current targeted framework for 2025-2030

All fields
ID
GOV-111
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Mental Health Commission
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Western Australian Eating Disorders Framework 2025-2030
Description
The WA Mental Health Commission's 2025 to 2030 framework sets six focus areas covering promotion and prevention, earlier community treatment, specialised bed based care, workforce education, care navigation and research. It is funder neutral but sits alongside $6.6 million for navigation, screening and prevention, and asks hospitals to treat eating disorders as core business.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
WA Mental Health Commission. (2025). *Western Australian eating disorders framework 2025-2030*. Government of Western Australia. https://mhaod.mhc.wa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Named on the strategy site as a current targeted framework for 2025-2030
GOV-112 Policy instrument

Western Australian Health Promotion Strategic Framework 2022-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

The Population and Preventive Health Directorate's 2022 to 2026 framework guides chronic disease and injury prevention through four focus areas: making smoking history, healthy eating and active living to halt the rise in obesity, reducing harmful alcohol use, and preventing injury. It guides the health system and partners rather than binding them.

Full APA reference

WA Department of Health. (2022). Western Australian health promotion strategic framework 2022-2026. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/~/media/Corp/Documents/Reports-and-publications/HPSF/Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework-2022-2026.pdf

PDF subtitle states a five year plan to reduce preventable chronic disease and injury, covering 2022-2026

All fields
ID
GOV-112
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Department of Health, Population and Preventive Health Directorate
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Western Australian Health Promotion Strategic Framework 2022-2026
Description
The Population and Preventive Health Directorate's 2022 to 2026 framework guides chronic disease and injury prevention through four focus areas: making smoking history, healthy eating and active living to halt the rise in obesity, reducing harmful alcohol use, and preventing injury. It guides the health system and partners rather than binding them.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework
Full APA reference
WA Department of Health. (2022). *Western Australian health promotion strategic framework 2022-2026*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/~/media/Corp/Documents/Reports-and-publications/HPSF/Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework-2022-2026.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF subtitle states a five year plan to reduce preventable chronic disease and injury, covering 2022-2026
Related items
REF-132
Same document as
REF-132
GOV-113 Policy instrument

Healthy Options WA Food and Nutrition Policy (MP 0142/20)

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

Mandatory for WA Health Service Providers under the Health Services Act 2016 and for the Department of Health, this food and nutrition policy has applied since 1 February 2021. Most food and drinks sold on health premises must be healthy choices, with unhealthy items not promoted, especially to children.

Full APA reference

WA Department of Health. (2020). Healthy Options WA food and nutrition policy (MP 0142/20). Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/About-us/Policy-frameworks/Public-Health/Mandatory-requirements/Chronic-Disease-Prevention-and-Health-Promotion/Healthy-Options-WA-Food-and-Nutrition-Policy

Page states "Date of effect: 01 February 2021" and lists the policy as a mandatory requirement

All fields
ID
GOV-113
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Department of Health
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Options WA Food and Nutrition Policy (MP 0142/20)
Description
Mandatory for WA Health Service Providers under the Health Services Act 2016 and for the Department of Health, this food and nutrition policy has applied since 1 February 2021. Most food and drinks sold on health premises must be healthy choices, with unhealthy items not promoted, especially to children.
Operative period
Date of effect 1 February 2021, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/About-us/Policy-frameworks/Public-Health/Mandatory-requirements/Chronic-Disease-Prevention-and-Health-Promotion/Healthy-Options-WA-Food-and-Nutrition-Policy
Full APA reference
WA Department of Health. (2020). *Healthy Options WA food and nutrition policy* (MP 0142/20). Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/About-us/Policy-frameworks/Public-Health/Mandatory-requirements/Chronic-Disease-Prevention-and-Health-Promotion/Healthy-Options-WA-Food-and-Nutrition-Policy
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Date of effect: 01 February 2021" and lists the policy as a mandatory requirement
GOV-114 Policy instrument

Sustainable Health Review: Final Report to the Western Australian Government, enduring strategies

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Western Australia's 2019 review made 30 recommendations across eight strategy areas, carried forward by enduring strategies on major public health issues, mental health outcomes, great beginnings and a dignified end of life, and person centred, equitable, seamless access. Immediate work covers six recommendations, including timely outpatient access and community care models.

Full APA reference

WA Department of Health. (2019). Sustainable Health Review: Final report to the Western Australian Government. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/improving-wa-health/sustainable-health-review

Page states "Last reviewed: 01-10-2024" and presents the review's enduring strategies with no end date

All fields
ID
GOV-114
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Department of Health
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Sustainable Health Review: Final Report to the Western Australian Government, enduring strategies
Description
Western Australia's 2019 review made 30 recommendations across eight strategy areas, carried forward by enduring strategies on major public health issues, mental health outcomes, great beginnings and a dignified end of life, and person centred, equitable, seamless access. Immediate work covers six recommendations, including timely outpatient access and community care models.
Operative period
Enduring, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/improving-wa-health/sustainable-health-review
Full APA reference
WA Department of Health. (2019). *Sustainable Health Review: Final report to the Western Australian Government*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/improving-wa-health/sustainable-health-review
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Last reviewed: 01-10-2024" and presents the review's enduring strategies with no end date
GOV-115 Policy instrument

WA Aboriginal Health and Wellbeing Framework 2015-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

WA Health's framework for 2015 to 2030 sets seven priority areas: addressing risk factors, managing illness better, building community capacity, better health systems, Aboriginal workforce development, data, evidence and research, and addressing the social determinants of health. It names racism as a key social determinant and requires care free of racism.

Full APA reference

WA Department of Health. (2015). WA Aboriginal health and wellbeing framework 2015-2030. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Improving-WA-Health/About-Aboriginal-Health/WA-Aboriginal-Health-and-Wellbeing-Framework-2015-2030

Page states "Last reviewed: 09-11-2022" and names the 2015-2030 period

All fields
ID
GOV-115
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Department of Health
Year
2015
Year added to library
2026
Title
WA Aboriginal Health and Wellbeing Framework 2015-2030
Description
WA Health's framework for 2015 to 2030 sets seven priority areas: addressing risk factors, managing illness better, building community capacity, better health systems, Aboriginal workforce development, data, evidence and research, and addressing the social determinants of health. It names racism as a key social determinant and requires care free of racism.
Operative period
2015-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Improving-WA-Health/About-Aboriginal-Health/WA-Aboriginal-Health-and-Wellbeing-Framework-2015-2030
Full APA reference
WA Department of Health. (2015). *WA Aboriginal health and wellbeing framework 2015-2030*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Improving-WA-Health/About-Aboriginal-Health/WA-Aboriginal-Health-and-Wellbeing-Framework-2015-2030
Verified date or evidence
Page states "Last reviewed: 09-11-2022" and names the 2015-2030 period
GOV-116 Policy instrument

Climate Adaptation Strategy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Climate and environmental health
  • Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Published in July 2023, Western Australia's adaptation strategy commits to net zero emissions by 2050, an 80 per cent cut in whole of government emissions below 2020 levels by 2030 and climate legislation with statutory adaptation planning requirements. Adaptation duties respond to health impacts from heatwaves and the mental health effects of extreme weather.

Full APA reference

Department of Water and Environmental Regulation. (2023). Climate adaptation strategy. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2023-07/climate_adaption_strategy_220623.pdf

Document is dated July 2023 and states climate change 'impacts human health directly, through extreme weather events or heatwaves'.

All fields
ID
GOV-116
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of Water and Environmental Regulation
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Climate Adaptation Strategy
Description
Published in July 2023, Western Australia's adaptation strategy commits to net zero emissions by 2050, an 80 per cent cut in whole of government emissions below 2020 levels by 2030 and climate legislation with statutory adaptation planning requirements. Adaptation duties respond to health impacts from heatwaves and the mental health effects of extreme weather.
Operative period
2023 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Climate and environmental health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2023-07/climate_adaption_strategy_220623.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Water and Environmental Regulation. (2023). *Climate adaptation strategy*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2023-07/climate_adaption_strategy_220623.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated July 2023 and states climate change 'impacts human health directly, through extreme weather events or heatwaves'.
GOV-117 Policy instrument

Psychosocial hazards in the workplace: Code of practice

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Issued in 2022 under Western Australian work health and safety laws, this code requires each person conducting a business or undertaking to eliminate or minimise psychosocial risk so far as is reasonably practicable and to consult workers and safety representatives. Legal duties address hazards capable of causing psychological or physical harm.

Full APA reference

Department of Mines, Industry Regulation and Safety. (2022). Psychosocial hazards in the workplace: Code of practice. Government of Western Australia. https://www.worksafe.wa.gov.au/sites/default/files/atoms/files/221154_cp_psychosocialhazards.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright State of Western Australia (Department of Mines, Industry Regulation and Safety) 2022' and states mandatory duties.

All fields
ID
GOV-117
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of Mines, Industry Regulation and Safety
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Psychosocial hazards in the workplace: Code of practice
Description
Issued in 2022 under Western Australian work health and safety laws, this code requires each person conducting a business or undertaking to eliminate or minimise psychosocial risk so far as is reasonably practicable and to consult workers and safety representatives. Legal duties address hazards capable of causing psychological or physical harm.
Operative period
2022 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.worksafe.wa.gov.au/sites/default/files/atoms/files/221154_cp_psychosocialhazards.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Mines, Industry Regulation and Safety. (2022). *Psychosocial hazards in the workplace: Code of practice*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.worksafe.wa.gov.au/sites/default/files/atoms/files/221154_cp_psychosocialhazards.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright State of Western Australia (Department of Mines, Industry Regulation and Safety) 2022' and states mandatory duties.
GOV-118 Policy instrument

Active Transport Infrastructure Policy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise
  • Physical health

Approved on 20 December 2021, this policy requires Western Australian transport portfolio agencies to consider active transport infrastructure when planning major upgrades or network expansion of state controlled assets, including cycling routes in the Long Term Cycling Network. Design must suit all ages and abilities, including pedestrians and people with disabilities.

Full APA reference

WA Transport Portfolio. (2021). Active transport infrastructure policy. Government of Western Australia. https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/getmedia/702E0E58-4388-40BE-8243-B947B8F51FB1/AT_P_ActiveTransportInfrastructurePolicyDec2021.pdf

Document records 'Date approved: 20/12/21' and applies to all state controlled asset upgrades regardless of funding source.

All fields
ID
GOV-118
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
WA Transport Portfolio
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Active Transport Infrastructure Policy
Description
Approved on 20 December 2021, this policy requires Western Australian transport portfolio agencies to consider active transport infrastructure when planning major upgrades or network expansion of state controlled assets, including cycling routes in the Long Term Cycling Network. Design must suit all ages and abilities, including pedestrians and people with disabilities.
Operative period
2021 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/getmedia/702E0E58-4388-40BE-8243-B947B8F51FB1/AT_P_ActiveTransportInfrastructurePolicyDec2021.pdf
Full APA reference
WA Transport Portfolio. (2021). *Active transport infrastructure policy*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/getmedia/702E0E58-4388-40BE-8243-B947B8F51FB1/AT_P_ActiveTransportInfrastructurePolicyDec2021.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document records 'Date approved: 20/12/21' and applies to all state controlled asset upgrades regardless of funding source.
GOV-119 Policy instrument

Aboriginal Empowerment Strategy - Western Australia 2021-2029

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

The Department of the Premier and Cabinet directs whole of government effort through this strategy for 2021 to 2029, built on ten strategic elements grouped into four themes with a set of core principles. Commitments on culture, economic opportunity and services support Aboriginal people, families and communities to live good lives from a secure foundation.

Full APA reference

Department of the Premier and Cabinet. (2021). Aboriginal empowerment strategy - Western Australia 2021-2029. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/organisation/department-of-the-premier-and-cabinet/aboriginal-empowerment-strategy-western-australia-2021-2029

Page states the strategy 'sets out how the Western Australian Government will direct its efforts' over 2021 to 2029.

All fields
ID
GOV-119
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of the Premier and Cabinet
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Aboriginal Empowerment Strategy - Western Australia 2021-2029
Description
The Department of the Premier and Cabinet directs whole of government effort through this strategy for 2021 to 2029, built on ten strategic elements grouped into four themes with a set of core principles. Commitments on culture, economic opportunity and services support Aboriginal people, families and communities to live good lives from a secure foundation.
Operative period
2021-2029
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.wa.gov.au/organisation/department-of-the-premier-and-cabinet/aboriginal-empowerment-strategy-western-australia-2021-2029
Full APA reference
Department of the Premier and Cabinet. (2021). *Aboriginal empowerment strategy - Western Australia 2021-2029*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/organisation/department-of-the-premier-and-cabinet/aboriginal-empowerment-strategy-western-australia-2021-2029
Verified date or evidence
Page states the strategy 'sets out how the Western Australian Government will direct its efforts' over 2021 to 2029.
GOV-120 Policy instrument

All Paths Lead to a Home: Western Australia's 10-Year Strategy on Homelessness 2020-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Communities guides homelessness responses through this ten year strategy for 2020 to 2030, delivering the Djuripiny Mia supportive landlord model with 100 homes for rough sleepers and a $2.2 million Country-Connect service. Housing First and outreach investment reduces rough sleeping, including during medical treatment away from home.

Full APA reference

Department of Communities. (2020). All paths lead to a home: Western Australia's 10-year strategy on homelessness 2020-2030. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/government/document-collections/all-paths-lead-home-western-australias-10-year-strategy-homelessness-2020-2030

Page states current responses are 'Guided by the All Paths Lead to a Home' strategy and lists the $2.2 million Country-Connect service.

All fields
ID
GOV-120
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of Communities
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
All Paths Lead to a Home: Western Australia's 10-Year Strategy on Homelessness 2020-2030
Description
The Department of Communities guides homelessness responses through this ten year strategy for 2020 to 2030, delivering the Djuripiny Mia supportive landlord model with 100 homes for rough sleepers and a $2.2 million Country-Connect service. Housing First and outreach investment reduces rough sleeping, including during medical treatment away from home.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.wa.gov.au/government/document-collections/all-paths-lead-home-western-australias-10-year-strategy-homelessness-2020-2030
Full APA reference
Department of Communities. (2020). *All paths lead to a home: Western Australia's 10-year strategy on homelessness 2020-2030*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/government/document-collections/all-paths-lead-home-western-australias-10-year-strategy-homelessness-2020-2030
Verified date or evidence
Page states current responses are 'Guided by the All Paths Lead to a Home' strategy and lists the $2.2 million Country-Connect service.
GOV-121 Policy instrument

A Western Australia for Everyone: State Disability Strategy 2020-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Department of Communities set this ten year disability strategy for 2020 to 2030, including a public sector target of five per cent representation of employees with disability and priorities for meaningful employment and skills. The Disability Services Act 1993 requires public authorities to publish and annually report on access and inclusion plans.

Full APA reference

Department of Communities. (2020). A Western Australia for everyone: State disability strategy 2020-2030. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2021-05/State-Disability-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf

Document titled for 2020 to 2030 states people with disability should 'attain the highest possible health and wellbeing outcomes throughout their lives'.

All fields
ID
GOV-121
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of Communities
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
A Western Australia for Everyone: State Disability Strategy 2020-2030
Description
The Department of Communities set this ten year disability strategy for 2020 to 2030, including a public sector target of five per cent representation of employees with disability and priorities for meaningful employment and skills. The Disability Services Act 1993 requires public authorities to publish and annually report on access and inclusion plans.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2021-05/State-Disability-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Communities. (2020). *A Western Australia for everyone: State disability strategy 2020-2030*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.wa.gov.au/system/files/2021-05/State-Disability-Strategy-2020-2030.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document titled for 2020 to 2030 states people with disability should 'attain the highest possible health and wellbeing outcomes throughout their lives'.
GOV-122 Policy instrument

Western Australian Bicycle Network Plan 2014-2031

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
  • Physical health

Updated in 2017, this network plan runs to 2031 with the goal of making Western Australia a place where bike riding is safe, connected, convenient and widely accepted, and it funds local governments to build cycling infrastructure. Grants encourage people of all ages and abilities to ride more often for transport and recreation.

Full APA reference

Department of Transport. (2017). Western Australian bicycle network plan 2014-2031. Government of Western Australia. https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/active-transport/programs-initiatives/wa-bicycle-network-plan

Page states 'An updated version of the WABN Plan was released in 2017' and describes current local government grant funding.

All fields
ID
GOV-122
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Issuing body
Department of Transport
Year
2017
Year added to library
2026
Title
Western Australian Bicycle Network Plan 2014-2031
Description
Updated in 2017, this network plan runs to 2031 with the goal of making Western Australia a place where bike riding is safe, connected, convenient and widely accepted, and it funds local governments to build cycling infrastructure. Grants encourage people of all ages and abilities to ride more often for transport and recreation.
Operative period
2014-2031
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/active-transport/programs-initiatives/wa-bicycle-network-plan
Full APA reference
Department of Transport. (2017). *Western Australian bicycle network plan 2014-2031*. Government of Western Australia. https://www.transport.wa.gov.au/active-transport/programs-initiatives/wa-bicycle-network-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'An updated version of the WABN Plan was released in 2017' and describes current local government grant funding.
GOV-123 Policy instrument

State Public Health Plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, Liveable, Connected

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

South Australia's 2026 state plan, made under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011, sets five priorities: promote healthy living to reduce chronic disease, improve mental health and wellbeing, prevent infectious disease, reduce injury, and ensure healthy environments. Promotion, protection and prevention are its pillars, sitting on equity and determinants of health principles.

Full APA reference

Government of South Australia. (2026). State public health plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, liveable, connected. SA Health. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan

Resource page titled "SA State Public Health Plan 2026" and states the Plan was co-developed with public health stakeholders; the linked PDF is named "State Public Health Plan_2026 FINAL"

All fields
ID
GOV-123
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Government of South Australia, SA Health
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
State Public Health Plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, Liveable, Connected
Description
South Australia's 2026 state plan, made under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011, sets five priorities: promote healthy living to reduce chronic disease, improve mental health and wellbeing, prevent infectious disease, reduce injury, and ensure healthy environments. Promotion, protection and prevention are its pillars, sitting on equity and determinants of health principles.
Operative period
From 2026, next statutory cycle
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/resources/sa+state+public+health+plan+2026
Full APA reference
Government of South Australia. (2026). *State public health plan South Australia 2026: Healthy, liveable, connected*. SA Health. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan
Verified date or evidence
Resource page titled "SA State Public Health Plan 2026" and states the Plan was co-developed with public health stakeholders; the linked PDF is named "State Public Health Plan_2026 FINAL"
Related items
REF-049
Same document as
REF-049
GOV-124 Policy instrument

South Australian Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy 2025-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Taking a harm minimisation approach, South Australia's 2025 to 2030 drug strategy sets five priorities: health promotion and prevention, disruption and supply reduction, early and targeted intervention, treatment and support, and engaging communities. It names eight priority populations, including Aboriginal peoples, males aged 15 to 44 and people with mental health comorbidity.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2025). South Australian alcohol and other drug strategy 2025-2030. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/south-australian-alcohol-and-other-drug-strategy-2025-2030

Dedicated agency page names the strategy and its 2025-2030 period

All fields
ID
GOV-124
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
South Australian Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy 2025-2030
Description
Taking a harm minimisation approach, South Australia's 2025 to 2030 drug strategy sets five priorities: health promotion and prevention, disruption and supply reduction, early and targeted intervention, treatment and support, and engaging communities. It names eight priority populations, including Aboriginal peoples, males aged 15 to 44 and people with mental health comorbidity.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/south-australian-alcohol-and-other-drug-strategy-2025-2030
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2025). *South Australian alcohol and other drug strategy 2025-2030*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/south-australian-alcohol-and-other-drug-strategy-2025-2030
Verified date or evidence
Dedicated agency page names the strategy and its 2025-2030 period
GOV-125 Policy instrument

Preventive Health SA Strategic Directions

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

Preventive Health SA's strategic directions state the agency's vision, purpose and commitment to Closing the Gap, and form the foundation for the agency strategic plan developed in 2025. They organise prevention work around five priorities: obesity prevention, alcohol and other drugs, tobacco and vaping, mental health and wellbeing, and healthy living.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2025). Preventive Health SA strategic directions. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/assets/downloads/strategic-plan/Preventive-Health-Strategic-Directions.pdf

Agency page states the Strategic Directions set vision, purpose, Closing the Gap commitment and strategic objectives, and are the foundation for a Strategic Plan developed from 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-125
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Preventive Health SA Strategic Directions
Description
Preventive Health SA's strategic directions state the agency's vision, purpose and commitment to Closing the Gap, and form the foundation for the agency strategic plan developed in 2025. They organise prevention work around five priorities: obesity prevention, alcohol and other drugs, tobacco and vaping, mental health and wellbeing, and healthy living.
Operative period
Ongoing, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2025). *Preventive Health SA strategic directions*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/assets/downloads/strategic-plan/Preventive-Health-Strategic-Directions.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Agency page states the Strategic Directions set vision, purpose, Closing the Gap commitment and strategic objectives, and are the foundation for a Strategic Plan developed from 2025
GOV-126 Policy instrument

South Australian Tobacco Control Strategy 2023-2027

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Physical health

South Australia's 2023 to 2027 tobacco strategy aims to cut daily smoking among people aged 15 and over from 9.8 percent in 2021 to 6 percent by 2027. Its seven priorities include cessation services, smoke free areas, curbing youth vaping, and lowering smoking among Aboriginal communities and people with mental illness.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2023). South Australian tobacco control strategy 2023-2027. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/

Listed as a current strategy on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2023-2027 period

All fields
ID
GOV-126
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
South Australian Tobacco Control Strategy 2023-2027
Description
South Australia's 2023 to 2027 tobacco strategy aims to cut daily smoking among people aged 15 and over from 9.8 percent in 2021 to 6 percent by 2027. Its seven priorities include cessation services, smoke free areas, curbing youth vaping, and lowering smoking among Aboriginal communities and people with mental illness.
Operative period
2023-2027
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2023). *South Australian tobacco control strategy 2023-2027*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current strategy on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2023-2027 period
GOV-127 Policy instrument

Skin Cancer Prevention Partnership Framework 2023-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy
  • Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Physical health

A joint commitment between Preventive Health SA and Cancer Council SA covering 2023 to 2028, this framework for action formalises shared work to reduce skin cancer incidence and mortality. An accompanying annual action plan sets each organisation's yearly commitments and targets and is revised as funding, emerging evidence and priorities shift.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2023). Skin cancer prevention partnership framework 2023-2028. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/

Listed as a current framework on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2023-2028 period

All fields
ID
GOV-127
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Skin Cancer Prevention Partnership Framework 2023-2028
Description
A joint commitment between Preventive Health SA and Cancer Council SA covering 2023 to 2028, this framework for action formalises shared work to reduce skin cancer incidence and mortality. An accompanying annual action plan sets each organisation's yearly commitments and targets and is revised as funding, emerging evidence and priorities shift.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2023). *Skin cancer prevention partnership framework 2023-2028*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current framework on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2023-2028 period
GOV-128 Policy instrument

SA Health Aboriginal Health Care Framework 2023-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

SA Health's 2023 to 2031 framework sets four strategic priorities: healthier Aboriginal communities, strengthen Aboriginal workforce, improve health service access and delivery, and partner for better outcomes. Designed with Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Services and Aboriginal South Australians, it directs SA Health investment toward closing health disparities and a more responsive system.

Full APA reference

SA Health. (2023). SA Health Aboriginal health care framework 2023-2031. Government of South Australia. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/about+sa+health/aboriginal+health/aboriginal+health+care+framework+2023-2031

Page title and content name the 2023-2031 framework period

All fields
ID
GOV-128
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
SA Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
SA Health Aboriginal Health Care Framework 2023-2031
Description
SA Health's 2023 to 2031 framework sets four strategic priorities: healthier Aboriginal communities, strengthen Aboriginal workforce, improve health service access and delivery, and partner for better outcomes. Designed with Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Services and Aboriginal South Australians, it directs SA Health investment toward closing health disparities and a more responsive system.
Operative period
2023-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/about+sa+health/aboriginal+health/aboriginal+health+care+framework+2023-2031
Full APA reference
SA Health. (2023). *SA Health Aboriginal health care framework 2023-2031*. Government of South Australia. https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/about+sa+health/aboriginal+health/aboriginal+health+care+framework+2023-2031
Verified date or evidence
Page title and content name the 2023-2031 framework period
GOV-129 Policy instrument

Walking Strategy for South Australia 2022-2032

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
  • Physical health

South Australia's ten year walking blueprint for 2022 to 2032 has three priorities: plan walkable neighbourhoods, towns and cities, build connected, safe and pleasant walking environments for all, and create a South Australian walking culture. Preventive Health SA oversees a three year action plan, treating walking as the most equitable physical activity.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2022). Walking strategy for South Australia 2022-2032. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/

Listed as a current strategy on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2022-2032 period

All fields
ID
GOV-129
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Walking Strategy for South Australia 2022-2032
Description
South Australia's ten year walking blueprint for 2022 to 2032 has three priorities: plan walkable neighbourhoods, towns and cities, build connected, safe and pleasant walking environments for all, and create a South Australian walking culture. Preventive Health SA oversees a three year action plan, treating walking as the most equitable physical activity.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment; Social connection
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2022). *Walking strategy for South Australia 2022-2032*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current strategy on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2022-2032 period
GOV-130 Policy instrument

Aboriginal Health Promotion Strategy 2022-2030, with Action Plan 2022-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Built on cultural determinants including connection to Country, Indigenous language, family and kinship, and self determination and leadership, South Australia's Aboriginal health promotion strategy runs 2022 to 2030. Its 2022 to 2026 action plan commits to a community grants program, Public Health Partner Authorities, and policy reform on racism and data sovereignty.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2023). Aboriginal health promotion strategy 2022-2030 and action plan 2022-2026. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/aboriginal-health-promotion-strategy-2022-2030

Agency page names the strategy period 2022-2030 and the action plan released in February 2023 covering 2022-2026

All fields
ID
GOV-130
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Aboriginal Health Promotion Strategy 2022-2030, with Action Plan 2022-2026
Description
Built on cultural determinants including connection to Country, Indigenous language, family and kinship, and self determination and leadership, South Australia's Aboriginal health promotion strategy runs 2022 to 2030. Its 2022 to 2026 action plan commits to a community grants program, Public Health Partner Authorities, and policy reform on racism and data sovereignty.
Operative period
Strategy 2022-2030, action plan 2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/aboriginal-health-promotion-strategy-2022-2030
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2023). *Aboriginal health promotion strategy 2022-2030 and action plan 2022-2026*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans/aboriginal-health-promotion-strategy-2022-2030
Verified date or evidence
Agency page names the strategy period 2022-2030 and the action plan released in February 2023 covering 2022-2026
GOV-131 Policy instrument

Healthy Parks Healthy People South Australia Framework 2021-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Backed by a Public Health Partner Authority agreement between SA's health and environment departments and Wellbeing SA, the 2021 to 2026 framework covers seven priorities: physical activity in nature, mental health benefits of nature contact, and the cultural value of Country. Action plans sit under each priority, focused on urban residents.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (2021). Healthy Parks Healthy People South Australia framework 2021-2026. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/

Listed as a current framework on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2021-2026 period

All fields
ID
GOV-131
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Parks Healthy People South Australia Framework 2021-2026
Description
Backed by a Public Health Partner Authority agreement between SA's health and environment departments and Wellbeing SA, the 2021 to 2026 framework covers seven priorities: physical activity in nature, mental health benefits of nature contact, and the cultural value of Country. Action plans sit under each priority, focused on urban residents.
Operative period
2021-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (2021). *Healthy Parks Healthy People South Australia framework 2021-2026*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current framework on the Preventive Health SA strategies index with the 2021-2026 period
GOV-132 Policy instrument

Health in All Policies approach, South Australia

  • Health portfolio
  • Health equity or social determinants
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Running since 2007 and led by Preventive Health SA, this approach uses co-design and co-benefits to build health into other portfolios, including early childhood education, migrant wellbeing, Aboriginal road safety and healthy urban development. The South Australian Public Health Act 2011 lets the Minister designate Public Health Partner Authorities.

Full APA reference

Preventive Health SA. (n.d.). Health in All Policies (HiAP). Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/our-agency/other-prevention-work/partnerships/health-in-all-policies-hiap

Page describes HiAP as current agency practice, anchored in the South Australian Public Health Act 2011 which came into effect in 2013, and references the WHO Collaborating Centre for Advancing Health in All Policies Implementation

All fields
ID
GOV-132
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Preventive Health SA
Year
Ongoing
Year added to library
2026
Title
Health in All Policies approach, South Australia
Description
Running since 2007 and led by Preventive Health SA, this approach uses co-design and co-benefits to build health into other portfolios, including early childhood education, migrant wellbeing, Aboriginal road safety and healthy urban development. The South Australian Public Health Act 2011 lets the Minister designate Public Health Partner Authorities.
Operative period
Ongoing since 2007, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Health equity or social determinants
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/our-agency/other-prevention-work/partnerships/health-in-all-policies-hiap
Full APA reference
Preventive Health SA. (n.d.). *Health in All Policies (HiAP)*. Government of South Australia. https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/our-agency/other-prevention-work/partnerships/health-in-all-policies-hiap
Verified date or evidence
Page describes HiAP as current agency practice, anchored in the South Australian Public Health Act 2011 which came into effect in 2013, and references the WHO Collaborating Centre for Advancing Health in All Policies Implementation
GOV-133 Policy instrument

South Australia's Plan for Ageing Well 2026-2036

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Released in February 2026, this ten year plan opens with the priority to be safe and well, commits the South Australian Housing Trust to 100 gold standard homes in its first half and records $325,000 in 2025 digital inclusion grants to 24 community organisations. Wellbeing is defined across physical, mental, spiritual and social dimensions.

Full APA reference

Department of Human Services. (2026). South Australia's plan for ageing well 2026-2036. Government of South Australia. https://dhs.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0011/192188/SA-Plan-For-Ageing-Well-2026-2036.pdf.pdf

Document citation reads 'Department of Human Services (February 2026), South Australia's Plan for Ageing Well, 2026-2036'.

All fields
ID
GOV-133
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Department of Human Services
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
South Australia's Plan for Ageing Well 2026-2036
Description
Released in February 2026, this ten year plan opens with the priority to be safe and well, commits the South Australian Housing Trust to 100 gold standard homes in its first half and records $325,000 in 2025 digital inclusion grants to 24 community organisations. Wellbeing is defined across physical, mental, spiritual and social dimensions.
Operative period
2026-2036
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://dhs.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0011/192188/SA-Plan-For-Ageing-Well-2026-2036.pdf.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Human Services. (2026). *South Australia's plan for ageing well 2026-2036*. Government of South Australia. https://dhs.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0011/192188/SA-Plan-For-Ageing-Well-2026-2036.pdf.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document citation reads 'Department of Human Services (February 2026), South Australia's Plan for Ageing Well, 2026-2036'.
GOV-134 Policy instrument

Greater Adelaide Regional Plan

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Planning and built environment
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

The State Planning Commission maintains this current regional plan for Greater Adelaide, guiding where housing, services and amenities are located and directing growth towards strong, connected communities. Statutory regional planning shapes walkability, access to services and green space, the built determinants that influence activity levels and social participation.

Full APA reference

State Planning Commission. (2025). Greater Adelaide regional plan. Government of South Australia. https://plan.sa.gov.au/resources/planning/regional_plans/greater-adelaide-regional-plan

Page states 'The current version of the Greater Adelaide Regional Plan can be viewed on the Regional Planning Portal'.

All fields
ID
GOV-134
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
State Planning Commission
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Greater Adelaide Regional Plan
Description
The State Planning Commission maintains this current regional plan for Greater Adelaide, guiding where housing, services and amenities are located and directing growth towards strong, connected communities. Statutory regional planning shapes walkability, access to services and green space, the built determinants that influence activity levels and social participation.
Operative period
2025 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Planning and built environment
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://plan.sa.gov.au/resources/planning/regional_plans/greater-adelaide-regional-plan
Full APA reference
State Planning Commission. (2025). *Greater Adelaide regional plan*. Government of South Australia. https://plan.sa.gov.au/resources/planning/regional_plans/greater-adelaide-regional-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The current version of the Greater Adelaide Regional Plan can be viewed on the Regional Planning Portal'.
GOV-135 Policy instrument

Strategic Plan 2025 - 2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The Office for Recreation, Sport and Racing set this five year plan for 2025 to 2030 around sector success and sporting excellence, including a $92 million investment to rebuild the Netball SA stadium. Sector and facility funding grows participation the office links to healthier, more connected and more resilient communities across South Australia.

Full APA reference

Office for Recreation, Sport and Racing. (2025). Strategic plan 2025 - 2030. Government of South Australia. https://www.orsr.sa.gov.au/about-us/strategic-plan-2025-2030

Page introduces 'our ambitious vision through the 2025 - 2030 Strategic Plan' as the current plan.

All fields
ID
GOV-135
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Office for Recreation, Sport and Racing
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Strategic Plan 2025 - 2030
Description
The Office for Recreation, Sport and Racing set this five year plan for 2025 to 2030 around sector success and sporting excellence, including a $92 million investment to rebuild the Netball SA stadium. Sector and facility funding grows participation the office links to healthier, more connected and more resilient communities across South Australia.
Operative period
2025-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.orsr.sa.gov.au/about-us/strategic-plan-2025-2030
Full APA reference
Office for Recreation, Sport and Racing. (2025). *Strategic plan 2025 - 2030*. Government of South Australia. https://www.orsr.sa.gov.au/about-us/strategic-plan-2025-2030
Verified date or evidence
Page introduces 'our ambitious vision through the 2025 - 2030 Strategic Plan' as the current plan.
GOV-136 Policy instrument

South Australia's Implementation Plan 2024 - 2026

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

Developed with the South Australian Aboriginal Community Controlled Organisation Network, this Closing the Gap plan for 2024 to 2026 allocates $10.3 million for the First Nations Voice and targets 62 per cent employment among Aboriginal people aged 25 to 64 by 2031. Actions address physical health and social, emotional, spiritual and ecological wellbeing.

Full APA reference

Attorney-General's Department. (2024). South Australia's implementation plan 2024 - 2026. Government of South Australia. https://www.agd.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1096758/SA-Closing-the-Gap-Implementation-Plan-24-26.pdf

Document states the plan 'was developed in partnership with SAACCON and the South Australian Government' for 2024 to 2026.

All fields
ID
GOV-136
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
Attorney-General's Department
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
South Australia's Implementation Plan 2024 - 2026
Description
Developed with the South Australian Aboriginal Community Controlled Organisation Network, this Closing the Gap plan for 2024 to 2026 allocates $10.3 million for the First Nations Voice and targets 62 per cent employment among Aboriginal people aged 25 to 64 by 2031. Actions address physical health and social, emotional, spiritual and ecological wellbeing.
Operative period
2024-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.agd.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1096758/SA-Closing-the-Gap-Implementation-Plan-24-26.pdf
Full APA reference
Attorney-General's Department. (2024). *South Australia's implementation plan 2024 - 2026*. Government of South Australia. https://www.agd.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1096758/SA-Closing-the-Gap-Implementation-Plan-24-26.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states the plan 'was developed in partnership with SAACCON and the South Australian Government' for 2024 to 2026.
GOV-137 Policy instrument

Our Housing Future 2020-2030

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Dated December 2019, South Australia's ten year housing strategy for 2020 to 2030 commits to 20,000 affordable housing solutions, more than $452 million for new social and affordable supply and mandated sustainable design standards for at least 75 per cent of new public housing. The strategy states that appropriate housing improves health outcomes.

Full APA reference

South Australian Government. (2019). Our housing future 2020-2030. Government of South Australia. https://www.housing.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/130692/Our-Housing-Future-2020-2030.pdf

Document is dated December 2019 and sets targets across the 2020 to 2030 period.

All fields
ID
GOV-137
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Issuing body
South Australian Government
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Our Housing Future 2020-2030
Description
Dated December 2019, South Australia's ten year housing strategy for 2020 to 2030 commits to 20,000 affordable housing solutions, more than $452 million for new social and affordable supply and mandated sustainable design standards for at least 75 per cent of new public housing. The strategy states that appropriate housing improves health outcomes.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.housing.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/130692/Our-Housing-Future-2020-2030.pdf
Full APA reference
South Australian Government. (2019). *Our housing future 2020-2030*. Government of South Australia. https://www.housing.sa.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/130692/Our-Housing-Future-2020-2030.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated December 2019 and sets targets across the 2020 to 2030 period.
GOV-138 Policy instrument

The Health Revolution: Our pathway for living well in Tasmania 2026-2046, with Action Plan 1

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Released in June 2026, Tasmania's preventive health pathway to 2046 tackles the root causes of poor health, naming stable housing, secure jobs, education, safe transport, healthy food and strong social connections. Shaped by almost 6,000 Tasmanians, it carries $20 million over four years and a first Action Plan of foundation work.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Government. (2026, June 4). The Health Revolution: Our pathway for living well in Tasmania 2026-2046. Department of Health. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution

Ministerial release dated 4 June 2026 launches the 20 year strategy with its first action plan; a draft was released for comment in December 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-138
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
The Health Revolution: Our pathway for living well in Tasmania 2026-2046, with Action Plan 1
Description
Released in June 2026, Tasmania's preventive health pathway to 2046 tackles the root causes of poor health, naming stable housing, secure jobs, education, safe transport, healthy food and strong social connections. Shaped by almost 6,000 Tasmanians, it carries $20 million over four years and a first Action Plan of foundation work.
Operative period
2026-2046
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Government. (2026, June 4). *The Health Revolution: Our pathway for living well in Tasmania 2026-2046*. Department of Health. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution
Verified date or evidence
Ministerial release dated 4 June 2026 launches the 20 year strategy with its first action plan; a draft was released for comment in December 2025
Related items
REF-118
Same document as
REF-118
GOV-139 Policy instrument

Rethink and Beyond: discussion paper for Tasmania's next mental health strategy

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Tasmania's Minister for Health, Mental Health and Wellbeing opened consultation from 24 March to 1 May 2026 on a discussion paper for Rethink and Beyond. It reviews progress under Rethink 2020 and asks for feedback on emerging priorities, drawing on an October 2025 roundtable and preventive health strategy consultation.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Government. (2026, March 24). Rethink and Beyond: Consultation on Tasmania's next mental health strategy. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy

Release states consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026; the preceding Rethink 2020 State Plan 2020-2025 has ended

All fields
ID
GOV-139
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Rethink and Beyond: discussion paper for Tasmania's next mental health strategy
Description
Tasmania's Minister for Health, Mental Health and Wellbeing opened consultation from 24 March to 1 May 2026 on a discussion paper for Rethink and Beyond. It reviews progress under Rethink 2020 and asks for feedback on emerging priorities, drawing on an October 2025 roundtable and preventive health strategy consultation.
Operative period
Consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Draft or consultation
URL
https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Government. (2026, March 24). *Rethink and Beyond: Consultation on Tasmania's next mental health strategy*. https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Release states consultation opened 24 March 2026 and closed 1 May 2026; the preceding Rethink 2020 State Plan 2020-2025 has ended
Related items
REF-119
Same document as
REF-119
GOV-140 Policy instrument

Tasmanian Drug Strategy 2024-2029

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

Cabinet approved this Tasmanian Government strategy on 30 January 2024, structuring alcohol, tobacco and other drug work for 2024 to 2029 around three pillars: supply, demand and harm reduction. Implementation Plan One runs 1 July 2024 to 31 December 2025 and pursues a Tasmania free of stigma and discrimination where people are treated equitably.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Department of Health. (2024). Tasmanian drug strategy 2024-2029. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/health-topics/alcohol-and-drugs/projects-and-initiatives-alcohol-and-drugs-tasmania/tasmanian-drug-strategy-2024-2029

Page states the strategy was approved by Cabinet on 30 January 2024 and runs to 2029

All fields
ID
GOV-140
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmanian Drug Strategy 2024-2029
Description
Cabinet approved this Tasmanian Government strategy on 30 January 2024, structuring alcohol, tobacco and other drug work for 2024 to 2029 around three pillars: supply, demand and harm reduction. Implementation Plan One runs 1 July 2024 to 31 December 2025 and pursues a Tasmania free of stigma and discrimination where people are treated equitably.
Operative period
2024-2029
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.tas.gov.au/health-topics/alcohol-and-drugs/projects-and-initiatives-alcohol-and-drugs-tasmania/tasmanian-drug-strategy-2024-2029
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Department of Health. (2024). *Tasmanian drug strategy 2024-2029*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/health-topics/alcohol-and-drugs/projects-and-initiatives-alcohol-and-drugs-tasmania/tasmanian-drug-strategy-2024-2029
Verified date or evidence
Page states the strategy was approved by Cabinet on 30 January 2024 and runs to 2029
GOV-141 Policy instrument

Long-Term Plan for Healthcare in Tasmania 2040, with Implementation Plan 2023-2025

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

Department of Health Tasmania's plan to 2040 sets six action areas, including a single integrated statewide system, care in the right place, and a supported workforce, delivered through an Implementation Plan for 2023 to 2025. Actions include integrating mental health services and strengthening prevention, with equity among six stated principles.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Department of Health. (2023). Long-term plan for healthcare in Tasmania 2040. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/long-term-plan-healthcare-tasmania-2040

Publication page dates the plan to June 2023; a progress report was issued in November 2025

All fields
ID
GOV-141
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Long-Term Plan for Healthcare in Tasmania 2040, with Implementation Plan 2023-2025
Description
Department of Health Tasmania's plan to 2040 sets six action areas, including a single integrated statewide system, care in the right place, and a supported workforce, delivered through an Implementation Plan for 2023 to 2025. Actions include integrating mental health services and strengthening prevention, with equity among six stated principles.
Operative period
Plan to 2040
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/long-term-plan-healthcare-tasmania-2040
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Department of Health. (2023). *Long-term plan for healthcare in Tasmania 2040*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/long-term-plan-healthcare-tasmania-2040
Verified date or evidence
Publication page dates the plan to June 2023; a progress report was issued in November 2025
GOV-142 Policy instrument

Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Tasmania's Department of Health names eight focus areas for 2022 to 2026: priority populations, health literacy, mental health and wellbeing, active living, eating well, smoke-free communities, reducing alcohol harm, and climate change and health. Guided by equity, empowerment and sustainability, it funds community-led action and targets food access, physical activity, psychological distress and social isolation.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Department of Health. (2022). Healthy Tasmania five-year strategic plan 2022-2026. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/healthy-tasmania-five-year-strategic-plan-2022-2026

Publication page states publication date 4 March 2022 and the 2022-2026 period

All fields
ID
GOV-142
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026
Description
Tasmania's Department of Health names eight focus areas for 2022 to 2026: priority populations, health literacy, mental health and wellbeing, active living, eating well, smoke-free communities, reducing alcohol harm, and climate change and health. Guided by equity, empowerment and sustainability, it funds community-led action and targets food access, physical activity, psychological distress and social isolation.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/healthy-tasmania-five-year-strategic-plan-2022-2026
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Department of Health. (2022). *Healthy Tasmania five-year strategic plan 2022-2026*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/healthy-tasmania-five-year-strategic-plan-2022-2026
Verified date or evidence
Publication page states publication date 4 March 2022 and the 2022-2026 period
GOV-143 Policy instrument

It Takes a Tasmanian Village: Child and Youth Wellbeing Strategy

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • Social connection; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental and physical health

Tasmania's Child and Youth Wellbeing Strategy backs children and young people aged 0 to 25 with a four year action plan worth $100 million and 65 initiatives, with particular focus on the first 1,000 days. Ten principles guide implementation, and it sets the wellbeing framework for future four year action plans.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Government. (2021). It takes a Tasmanian village: Child and youth wellbeing strategy. https://wellbeing.tas.gov.au/strategy

Page describes the strategy with 65 initiatives and a four year action plan backed by about 100 million dollars

All fields
ID
GOV-143
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
It Takes a Tasmanian Village: Child and Youth Wellbeing Strategy
Description
Tasmania's Child and Youth Wellbeing Strategy backs children and young people aged 0 to 25 with a four year action plan worth $100 million and 65 initiatives, with particular focus on the first 1,000 days. Ten principles guide implementation, and it sets the wellbeing framework for future four year action plans.
Operative period
Ongoing, four year initial action plan
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://wellbeing.tas.gov.au/strategy
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Government. (2021). *It takes a Tasmanian village: Child and youth wellbeing strategy*. https://wellbeing.tas.gov.au/strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page describes the strategy with 65 initiatives and a four year action plan backed by about 100 million dollars
GOV-144 Policy instrument

Improving Aboriginal Cultural Respect Across Tasmania's Health System Action Plan 2020-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Department of Health Tasmania sets six focus areas for 2020 to 2026, including workforce development and Aboriginal employment, partnerships with Aboriginal community controlled organisations, and data and evaluation. Phase two runs 2023 to 2026 and commits staff training that recognises colonisation, racism and intergenerational trauma as direct causes of Tasmanian Aboriginal people's poorer health.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Department of Health. (2020). Improving Aboriginal cultural respect across Tasmania's health system action plan 2020-2026. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/professionals/education-and-training-health-professionals/aboriginal-health-and-cultural-respect/culturally-respectful-health-services

Page names the action plan and its 2020-2026 period

All fields
ID
GOV-144
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government, Department of Health
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Improving Aboriginal Cultural Respect Across Tasmania's Health System Action Plan 2020-2026
Description
Department of Health Tasmania sets six focus areas for 2020 to 2026, including workforce development and Aboriginal employment, partnerships with Aboriginal community controlled organisations, and data and evaluation. Phase two runs 2023 to 2026 and commits staff training that recognises colonisation, racism and intergenerational trauma as direct causes of Tasmanian Aboriginal people's poorer health.
Operative period
2020-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.tas.gov.au/professionals/education-and-training-health-professionals/aboriginal-health-and-cultural-respect/culturally-respectful-health-services
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Department of Health. (2020). *Improving Aboriginal cultural respect across Tasmania's health system action plan 2020-2026*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.health.tas.gov.au/professionals/education-and-training-health-professionals/aboriginal-health-and-cultural-respect/culturally-respectful-health-services
Verified date or evidence
Page names the action plan and its 2020-2026 period
GOV-145 Policy instrument

Tasmanian Wellbeing Framework

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Tasmania's Department of Premier and Cabinet organises whole of government policy around six wellbeing domains, community, governance, health, learning, place and prosperity, and 27 population outcomes including physical and mental health, meaningful work and strong social connections. Equity, inclusivity and evidence informed decision making guide its use by government, councils, businesses and families.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Department of Premier and Cabinet. (n.d.). Community wellbeing and sustainability: Wellbeing framework. Tasmanian Government. https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/for-communities/community-programs/community-wellbeing-and-sustainability

Page presents the Wellbeing Framework as current whole of government work with no stated year range

All fields
ID
GOV-145
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Department of Premier and Cabinet
Year
Not stated
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmanian Wellbeing Framework
Description
Tasmania's Department of Premier and Cabinet organises whole of government policy around six wellbeing domains, community, governance, health, learning, place and prosperity, and 27 population outcomes including physical and mental health, meaningful work and strong social connections. Equity, inclusivity and evidence informed decision making guide its use by government, councils, businesses and families.
Operative period
Ongoing, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/for-communities/community-programs/community-wellbeing-and-sustainability
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Department of Premier and Cabinet. (n.d.). *Community wellbeing and sustainability: Wellbeing framework*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/for-communities/community-programs/community-wellbeing-and-sustainability
Verified date or evidence
Page presents the Wellbeing Framework as current whole of government work with no stated year range
GOV-146 Policy instrument

She moves. She leads. She belongs. Tasmanian Women and Girls Sport Strategy 2025-2032

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Published in October 2025, this seven year strategy runs to 2032 across participation, leadership and inclusive environments, seeking equal opportunities for women and girls in community, recreational and elite sport. Facility and governance actions address safety and comfort barriers, supporting the health and social benefits and mental wellbeing the strategy names.

Full APA reference

Department of State Growth. (2025). She moves. She leads. She belongs. Tasmanian women and girls sport strategy 2025-2032. Tasmanian Government. https://www.active.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/607215/She-moves.-She-leads.-She-belongs.-Tasmanian-Women-and-Girls-Sport-Strategy-2025-2032.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright State of Tasmania, October 2025' and covers the period 2025 to 2032.

All fields
ID
GOV-146
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Department of State Growth
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
She moves. She leads. She belongs. Tasmanian Women and Girls Sport Strategy 2025-2032
Description
Published in October 2025, this seven year strategy runs to 2032 across participation, leadership and inclusive environments, seeking equal opportunities for women and girls in community, recreational and elite sport. Facility and governance actions address safety and comfort barriers, supporting the health and social benefits and mental wellbeing the strategy names.
Operative period
2025-2032
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.active.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/607215/She-moves.-She-leads.-She-belongs.-Tasmanian-Women-and-Girls-Sport-Strategy-2025-2032.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of State Growth. (2025). *She moves. She leads. She belongs. Tasmanian women and girls sport strategy 2025-2032*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.active.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0003/607215/She-moves.-She-leads.-She-belongs.-Tasmanian-Women-and-Girls-Sport-Strategy-2025-2032.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright State of Tasmania, October 2025' and covers the period 2025 to 2032.
GOV-147 Policy instrument

Tasmania's Disability Strategy 2025-2027

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

This three year strategy for 2025 to 2027 sets a whole of government approach under Australia's Disability Strategy 2021-2031 and requires all Tasmanian agencies to implement just and inclusive policies and practices. Agency obligations pursue an inclusive community where people with disability, in all their diversity, can reach their full potential.

Full APA reference

Department of Premier and Cabinet. (2025). Tasmania's disability strategy 2025-2027. Tasmanian Government. https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/divisions/cpp/community-and-disability-services/tasmanias-disability-strategy

Page states the strategy 'sets out a whole of government approach' under Australia's Disability Strategy 2021-2031 for 2025 to 2027.

All fields
ID
GOV-147
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Department of Premier and Cabinet
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmania's Disability Strategy 2025-2027
Description
This three year strategy for 2025 to 2027 sets a whole of government approach under Australia's Disability Strategy 2021-2031 and requires all Tasmanian agencies to implement just and inclusive policies and practices. Agency obligations pursue an inclusive community where people with disability, in all their diversity, can reach their full potential.
Operative period
2025-2027
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/divisions/cpp/community-and-disability-services/tasmanias-disability-strategy
Full APA reference
Department of Premier and Cabinet. (2025). *Tasmania's disability strategy 2025-2027*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/divisions/cpp/community-and-disability-services/tasmanias-disability-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Page states the strategy 'sets out a whole of government approach' under Australia's Disability Strategy 2021-2031 for 2025 to 2027.
GOV-148 Policy instrument

Tasmania's Plan for Closing the Gap 2025-2028

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

Published on 5 September 2025, this three year plan for 2025 to 2028 is organised around formal partnerships and shared decision making, building the community controlled sector and transforming government organisations. Whole of government commitments target the gap in life outcomes between Tasmanian Aboriginal people and the wider community.

Full APA reference

Tasmanian Government. (2025). Tasmania's plan for closing the gap 2025-2028. Tasmanian Government. https://www.justice.tas.gov.au/about-us/news/articles/tasmanias-plan-for-closing-the-gap-2025-2028

Page records 'Published: 5 September 2025' for the 2025 to 2028 plan.

All fields
ID
GOV-148
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Tasmanian Government
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmania's Plan for Closing the Gap 2025-2028
Description
Published on 5 September 2025, this three year plan for 2025 to 2028 is organised around formal partnerships and shared decision making, building the community controlled sector and transforming government organisations. Whole of government commitments target the gap in life outcomes between Tasmanian Aboriginal people and the wider community.
Operative period
2025-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.justice.tas.gov.au/about-us/news/articles/tasmanias-plan-for-closing-the-gap-2025-2028
Full APA reference
Tasmanian Government. (2025). *Tasmania's plan for closing the gap 2025-2028*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.justice.tas.gov.au/about-us/news/articles/tasmanias-plan-for-closing-the-gap-2025-2028
Verified date or evidence
Page records 'Published: 5 September 2025' for the 2025 to 2028 plan.
GOV-149 Policy instrument

Tasmanian Walk, Wheel, Ride Policy 2024

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Active transport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

Dated August 2024, this policy applies to all activities on state controlled transport networks and all departmental projects regardless of funding source, aiming to improve safety for vulnerable road users, with formal evaluation every two years. Network design decisions now weigh the social, health, cultural and environmental benefits of walking, wheeling and riding.

Full APA reference

Department of State Growth. (2024). Tasmanian walk, wheel, ride policy 2024. Tasmanian Government. https://www.infrastructure.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0017/532304/tasmanian-walk-wheel-ride-policy-2024.pdf

Document is dated August 2024 and states implementation 'will be monitored and formally evaluated every two years'.

All fields
ID
GOV-149
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Department of State Growth
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmanian Walk, Wheel, Ride Policy 2024
Description
Dated August 2024, this policy applies to all activities on state controlled transport networks and all departmental projects regardless of funding source, aiming to improve safety for vulnerable road users, with formal evaluation every two years. Network design decisions now weigh the social, health, cultural and environmental benefits of walking, wheeling and riding.
Operative period
2024 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Active transport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.infrastructure.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0017/532304/tasmanian-walk-wheel-ride-policy-2024.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of State Growth. (2024). *Tasmanian walk, wheel, ride policy 2024*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.infrastructure.tas.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0017/532304/tasmanian-walk-wheel-ride-policy-2024.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated August 2024 and states implementation 'will be monitored and formally evaluated every two years'.
GOV-150 Policy instrument

Tasmanian Housing Strategy Action Plan 2023-27

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

This first action plan under Tasmania's 20 year housing strategy runs from 2023 to 2027, committing to an additional 2,000 social homes by 2032, scaling up the building industry and developing a Housing First model. Funded actions target homelessness and place homes closer to jobs, public transport and community infrastructure.

Full APA reference

Department of State Growth. (2023). Tasmanian housing strategy action plan 2023-27. Tasmanian Government. https://www.tasmanianhousingstrategy.tas.gov.au/action-plans

Page refers to 'The Tasmanian Housing Strategy's Action Plan 2023-27' and its commitment to 2,000 additional social homes by 2032.

All fields
ID
GOV-150
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Department of State Growth
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Tasmanian Housing Strategy Action Plan 2023-27
Description
This first action plan under Tasmania's 20 year housing strategy runs from 2023 to 2027, committing to an additional 2,000 social homes by 2032, scaling up the building industry and developing a Housing First model. Funded actions target homelessness and place homes closer to jobs, public transport and community infrastructure.
Operative period
2023-2027
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.tasmanianhousingstrategy.tas.gov.au/action-plans
Full APA reference
Department of State Growth. (2023). *Tasmanian housing strategy action plan 2023-27*. Tasmanian Government. https://www.tasmanianhousingstrategy.tas.gov.au/action-plans
Verified date or evidence
Page refers to 'The Tasmanian Housing Strategy's Action Plan 2023-27' and its commitment to 2,000 additional social homes by 2032.
GOV-151 Policy instrument

Child and Student Wellbeing Strategy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Education and school wellbeing
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Dated May 2022 and running to 2028, this strategy commits Tasmanian government primary schools to a recommended two hours per week of timetabled physical activity and to developing a validated resilience scale for years 4 to 9. Actions cover nutrition, physical activity, coping with stress and access to physical and mental health services.

Full APA reference

Department of Education. (2022). Child and student wellbeing strategy. Tasmanian Government. https://publicdocumentcentre.education.tas.gov.au/library/Shared%20Documents/Child-and-Student-Wellbeing-Strategy.pdf

Document is dated May 2022, covers 2022 to 2028 and records the 2021 agreement on two hours per week of timetabled physical activity.

All fields
ID
GOV-151
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Issuing body
Department of Education
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Child and Student Wellbeing Strategy
Description
Dated May 2022 and running to 2028, this strategy commits Tasmanian government primary schools to a recommended two hours per week of timetabled physical activity and to developing a validated resilience scale for years 4 to 9. Actions cover nutrition, physical activity, coping with stress and access to physical and mental health services.
Operative period
2022-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Education and school wellbeing
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nutrition and diet; Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://publicdocumentcentre.education.tas.gov.au/library/Shared%20Documents/Child-and-Student-Wellbeing-Strategy.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Education. (2022). *Child and student wellbeing strategy*. Tasmanian Government. https://publicdocumentcentre.education.tas.gov.au/library/Shared%20Documents/Child-and-Student-Wellbeing-Strategy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is dated May 2022, covers 2022 to 2028 and records the 2021 agreement on two hours per week of timetabled physical activity.
GOV-152 Policy instrument

Active Travel Plan 2024-30

  • Health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
  • Physical health

Transport Canberra and City Services set five priorities for 2024 to 2030: safe walking and riding infrastructure, a better connected network, new forms of active travel and micromobility, easy bicycle parking, and behaviour change with communities. Measures include protected cycleways, lower speed zones and street design for children and older people, supporting Vision Zero.

Full APA reference

Transport Canberra and City Services Directorate. (2024). Active travel plan 2024-30. ACT Government. https://www.transport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0006/2550795/Active_Travel_Plan_2024-30.pdf

PDF states the period 2024-30, carries the ACT copyright line for 2023, and confirms it is the final plan following the July 2022 draft

All fields
ID
GOV-152
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
Transport Canberra and City Services Directorate
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Active Travel Plan 2024-30
Description
Transport Canberra and City Services set five priorities for 2024 to 2030: safe walking and riding infrastructure, a better connected network, new forms of active travel and micromobility, easy bicycle parking, and behaviour change with communities. Measures include protected cycleways, lower speed zones and street design for children and older people, supporting Vision Zero.
Operative period
2024-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.transport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0006/2550795/Active_Travel_Plan_2024-30.pdf
Full APA reference
Transport Canberra and City Services Directorate. (2024). *Active travel plan 2024-30*. ACT Government. https://www.transport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0006/2550795/Active_Travel_Plan_2024-30.pdf
Verified date or evidence
PDF states the period 2024-30, carries the ACT copyright line for 2023, and confirms it is the final plan following the July 2022 draft
GOV-153 Policy instrument

ACT Mental Health Workforce Strategy 2023-2033, Framework for Action 2023-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

ACT Government sets four mental health workforce priorities for 2023 to 2033: data driven planning; attraction, recruitment and retention; education, training, research and innovation; and developing the lived experience workforce. The Framework for Action 2023 to 2026 adds annual work plans and an oversight committee including people with lived experience, reviewed in 2026.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2023). ACT mental health workforce strategy 2023-2033: Framework for action 2023-2026 including 2024 work plan. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/2431792/ACT-Mental-Health-Workforce-Strategy-2023-2033-Framework-for-Action-2023-2026-including-2024-Work-Plan.pdf

Document title states the strategy period 2023-2033 and the framework for action 2023-2026

All fields
ID
GOV-153
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government, ACT Health Directorate
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
ACT Mental Health Workforce Strategy 2023-2033, Framework for Action 2023-2026
Description
ACT Government sets four mental health workforce priorities for 2023 to 2033: data driven planning; attraction, recruitment and retention; education, training, research and innovation; and developing the lived experience workforce. The Framework for Action 2023 to 2026 adds annual work plans and an oversight committee including people with lived experience, reviewed in 2026.
Operative period
Strategy 2023-2033, framework for action 2023-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/2431792/ACT-Mental-Health-Workforce-Strategy-2023-2033-Framework-for-Action-2023-2026-including-2024-Work-Plan.pdf
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2023). *ACT mental health workforce strategy 2023-2033: Framework for action 2023-2026 including 2024 work plan*. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/2431792/ACT-Mental-Health-Workforce-Strategy-2023-2033-Framework-for-Action-2023-2026-including-2024-Work-Plan.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document title states the strategy period 2023-2033 and the framework for action 2023-2026
GOV-154 Policy instrument

ACT Health Services Plan 2022-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

ACT Government's roadmap for 2022 to 2030 contains 121 actions grouped under person-centred care, working with other health services, and taking action and making improvements, with progress reviews published every two years. Actions address service demand, smoother transitions between services, the ACT's regional provider role and stronger clinical support services.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2022). ACT health services plan 2022-2030. https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan

Page states the plan was released in August 2022 by the Minister for Health and covers 2022-2030

All fields
ID
GOV-154
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government, ACT Health Directorate
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
ACT Health Services Plan 2022-2030
Description
ACT Government's roadmap for 2022 to 2030 contains 121 actions grouped under person-centred care, working with other health services, and taking action and making improvements, with progress reviews published every two years. Actions address service demand, smoother transitions between services, the ACT's regional provider role and stronger clinical support services.
Operative period
2022-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2022). *ACT health services plan 2022-2030*. https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan
Verified date or evidence
Page states the plan was released in August 2022 by the Minister for Health and covers 2022-2030
GOV-155 Policy instrument

ACT Drug Strategy Action Plan 2022-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
  • Mental and physical health

ACT Government's plan for 2022 to 2026 applies a health based approach to alcohol, tobacco and other drugs, focusing on service navigation, stigma reduction and people with co-occurring issues. It replaces the 2018 to 2021 plan and sits under the National Drug Strategy 2017 to 2026, with a mid-point progress report.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2022). ACT drug strategy action plan 2022-2026. https://www.act.gov.au/directorates-and-agencies/act-health/strategies-programs-and-reports/strategies-and-plans/alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-strategies

Page lists the 2022-2026 action plan as the current plan, replacing the 2018-2021 plan

All fields
ID
GOV-155
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government, ACT Health Directorate
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
ACT Drug Strategy Action Plan 2022-2026
Description
ACT Government's plan for 2022 to 2026 applies a health based approach to alcohol, tobacco and other drugs, focusing on service navigation, stigma reduction and people with co-occurring issues. It replaces the 2018 to 2021 plan and sits under the National Drug Strategy 2017 to 2026, with a mid-point progress report.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/directorates-and-agencies/act-health/strategies-programs-and-reports/strategies-and-plans/alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-strategies
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2022). *ACT drug strategy action plan 2022-2026*. https://www.act.gov.au/directorates-and-agencies/act-health/strategies-programs-and-reports/strategies-and-plans/alcohol-tobacco-and-other-drug-strategies
Verified date or evidence
Page lists the 2022-2026 action plan as the current plan, replacing the 2018-2021 plan
GOV-156 Policy instrument

Towards our Vision: Re-envisioning Older Persons Mental Health and Wellbeing in the ACT Strategy 2022-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

ACT's Office for Mental Health and Wellbeing proposes 25 actions across three priority areas for 2022 to 2026: building mentally healthy communities, enhancing the lives of older Canberrans with mental illness, and improving system capacity. Actions target social participation, suicide prevention for at risk older people and workforce capacity, with 2021 as baseline.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2022). Towards our vision: Re-envisioning older persons mental health and wellbeing in the ACT strategy 2022-2026. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0020/2551043/Towards-our-Vision-Re-envisioning-Older-Persons-Mental-Health-and-Wellbeing-in-the-ACT-Strategy-2022-2026.pdf

Document title states the 2022-2026 period

All fields
ID
GOV-156
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government, ACT Health Directorate
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
Towards our Vision: Re-envisioning Older Persons Mental Health and Wellbeing in the ACT Strategy 2022-2026
Description
ACT's Office for Mental Health and Wellbeing proposes 25 actions across three priority areas for 2022 to 2026: building mentally healthy communities, enhancing the lives of older Canberrans with mental illness, and improving system capacity. Actions target social participation, suicide prevention for at risk older people and workforce capacity, with 2021 as baseline.
Operative period
2022-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0020/2551043/Towards-our-Vision-Re-envisioning-Older-Persons-Mental-Health-and-Wellbeing-in-the-ACT-Strategy-2022-2026.pdf
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2022). *Towards our vision: Re-envisioning older persons mental health and wellbeing in the ACT strategy 2022-2026*. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0020/2551043/Towards-our-Vision-Re-envisioning-Older-Persons-Mental-Health-and-Wellbeing-in-the-ACT-Strategy-2022-2026.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document title states the 2022-2026 period
GOV-157 Policy instrument

Accessible, Accountable, Sustainable: A Framework for the ACT Public Health System 2020-2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

ACT Health Directorate's framework for 2020 to 2030 sets three strategic goals: access to the right service at the right time, accountable and transparent decision making, and sustainability through strategic investment. Delivery runs through named strategies including Healthy Canberra: ACT Preventive Health Plan 2020 to 2025 and a regional mental health and suicide prevention plan.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2020). Accessible, accountable, sustainable: A framework for the ACT public health system 2020-2030. https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan

Named on the Health Services Plan page as the overarching 2020-2030 framework the plan sits under

All fields
ID
GOV-157
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government, ACT Health Directorate
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Accessible, Accountable, Sustainable: A Framework for the ACT Public Health System 2020-2030
Description
ACT Health Directorate's framework for 2020 to 2030 sets three strategic goals: access to the right service at the right time, accountable and transparent decision making, and sustainability through strategic investment. Delivery runs through named strategies including Healthy Canberra: ACT Preventive Health Plan 2020 to 2025 and a regional mental health and suicide prevention plan.
Operative period
2020-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2020). *Accessible, accountable, sustainable: A framework for the ACT public health system 2020-2030*. https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan
Verified date or evidence
Named on the Health Services Plan page as the overarching 2020-2030 framework the plan sits under
GOV-158 Policy instrument

ACT Wellbeing Framework

  • Health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Nature and environment
  • Mental and physical health

ACT Government measures territory progress across twelve wellbeing domains covering environmental, social and economic factors, built after consultation with nearly 3,000 Canberrans in 2019 and 2020. A dashboard update is published every two years, and the Personal Wellbeing Index tracks satisfaction with health, relationships, safety and community connectedness.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2020). ACT wellbeing framework. https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing/wellbeing-framework

Framework pages describe twelve wellbeing domains, 56 indicators, and a wellbeing progress update released every two years through the wellbeing dashboard

All fields
ID
GOV-158
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
ACT Wellbeing Framework
Description
ACT Government measures territory progress across twelve wellbeing domains covering environmental, social and economic factors, built after consultation with nearly 3,000 Canberrans in 2019 and 2020. A dashboard update is published every two years, and the Personal Wellbeing Index tracks satisfaction with health, relationships, safety and community connectedness.
Operative period
Ongoing, progress updates every two years
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection; Nature and environment
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing/wellbeing-framework
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2020). *ACT wellbeing framework*. https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing/wellbeing-framework
Verified date or evidence
Framework pages describe twelve wellbeing domains, 56 indicators, and a wellbeing progress update released every two years through the wellbeing dashboard
Related items
REF-001
Same document as
REF-001
GOV-159 Policy instrument

Wellbeing Budget Statement 2025-26

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Wellbeing framework
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The ACT directorate published this 2025-26 wellbeing budget statement around six priorities including mental and physical health, housing and children's early years, with more than $145 million over four years for housing initiatives and 30,000 more homes by 2030. Budget decisions are reported against wellbeing domains rather than fiscal measures alone.

Full APA reference

Chief Minister, Treasury and Economic Development Directorate. (2025). Wellbeing budget statement 2025-26. ACT Government. https://www.treasury.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/2869388/Budget-2025-26-Wellbeing-Budget-Statement.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, Canberra 2025' and states that good mental and physical health is fundamental to wellbeing.

All fields
ID
GOV-159
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
Chief Minister, Treasury and Economic Development Directorate
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Wellbeing Budget Statement 2025-26
Description
The ACT directorate published this 2025-26 wellbeing budget statement around six priorities including mental and physical health, housing and children's early years, with more than $145 million over four years for housing initiatives and 30,000 more homes by 2030. Budget decisions are reported against wellbeing domains rather than fiscal measures alone.
Operative period
2025-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Wellbeing framework
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.treasury.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/2869388/Budget-2025-26-Wellbeing-Budget-Statement.pdf
Full APA reference
Chief Minister, Treasury and Economic Development Directorate. (2025). *Wellbeing budget statement 2025-26*. ACT Government. https://www.treasury.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0008/2869388/Budget-2025-26-Wellbeing-Budget-Statement.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, Canberra 2025' and states that good mental and physical health is fundamental to wellbeing.
GOV-160 Policy instrument

Work Health and Safety (Managing Psychosocial Hazards at Work Code of Practice) Approval 2023

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

In effect from 27 November 2023, this approved ACT code requires duty holders to eliminate or minimise exposure to psychosocial hazards so far as is reasonably practicable, with officer due diligence duties and worker care obligations. Enforcement treats work related stress capable of causing psychological or physical injury as a regulated hazard.

Full APA reference

WorkSafe ACT. (2023). Work Health and Safety (Managing Psychosocial Hazards at Work Code of Practice) Approval 2023. ACT Government. https://www.worksafe.act.gov.au/health-and-safety-portal/safety-topics/psychosocial-hazards

Page states the Approval 2023 'comes into effect on 27 November 2023' and describes current duties for PCBUs, officers and workers.

All fields
ID
GOV-160
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
WorkSafe ACT
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Work Health and Safety (Managing Psychosocial Hazards at Work Code of Practice) Approval 2023
Description
In effect from 27 November 2023, this approved ACT code requires duty holders to eliminate or minimise exposure to psychosocial hazards so far as is reasonably practicable, with officer due diligence duties and worker care obligations. Enforcement treats work related stress capable of causing psychological or physical injury as a regulated hazard.
Operative period
2023 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.worksafe.act.gov.au/health-and-safety-portal/safety-topics/psychosocial-hazards
Full APA reference
WorkSafe ACT. (2023). *Work Health and Safety (Managing Psychosocial Hazards at Work Code of Practice) Approval 2023*. ACT Government. https://www.worksafe.act.gov.au/health-and-safety-portal/safety-topics/psychosocial-hazards
Verified date or evidence
Page states the Approval 2023 'comes into effect on 27 November 2023' and describes current duties for PCBUs, officers and workers.
GOV-161 Policy instrument

CBR next move: Sport and Recreation Strategy 2023 to 2028

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Physical activity and sport
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

Dated December 2022, this five year strategy covers 2023 to 2028 with the goal of all Canberrans moving more through sport and active recreation, building sector capability and capacity and committing to inclusion and quality experiences. Sector investment supports movement the strategy links to physical and mental health across the community.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2022). CBR next move: Sport and recreation strategy 2023 to 2028. ACT Government. https://www.sport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/2120866/CBR-Next-Move-Accessible-NEW.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, December, 2022' and covers 2023 to 2028.

All fields
ID
GOV-161
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
CBR next move: Sport and Recreation Strategy 2023 to 2028
Description
Dated December 2022, this five year strategy covers 2023 to 2028 with the goal of all Canberrans moving more through sport and active recreation, building sector capability and capacity and committing to inclusion and quality experiences. Sector investment supports movement the strategy links to physical and mental health across the community.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Physical activity and sport
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.sport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/2120866/CBR-Next-Move-Accessible-NEW.pdf
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2022). *CBR next move: Sport and recreation strategy 2023 to 2028*. ACT Government. https://www.sport.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/2120866/CBR-Next-Move-Accessible-NEW.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, December, 2022' and covers 2023 to 2028.
GOV-162 Policy instrument

Set up for Success: An Early Childhood Strategy for the ACT

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Early years and families
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

Published in 2020, this ACT strategy commits to working towards 15 hours per week, or 600 hours per year, of free universal early childhood education for three year olds and 100 Koori Preschool places for three year olds from 2020. Expanded early education addresses foundations for future learning, health and wellbeing.

Full APA reference

ACT Government. (2020). Set up for success: An early childhood strategy for the ACT. ACT Government. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/2820609/Early-Childhood-Strategy-for-the-ACT.pdf

Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, Canberra 2020' and states the commitment to 600 hours per year of free early education.

All fields
ID
GOV-162
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Issuing body
ACT Government
Year
2020
Year added to library
2026
Title
Set up for Success: An Early Childhood Strategy for the ACT
Description
Published in 2020, this ACT strategy commits to working towards 15 hours per week, or 600 hours per year, of free universal early childhood education for three year olds and 100 Koori Preschool places for three year olds from 2020. Expanded early education addresses foundations for future learning, health and wellbeing.
Operative period
2020 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Early years and families
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/2820609/Early-Childhood-Strategy-for-the-ACT.pdf
Full APA reference
ACT Government. (2020). *Set up for success: An early childhood strategy for the ACT*. ACT Government. https://www.act.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/2820609/Early-Childhood-Strategy-for-the-ACT.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document carries 'Copyright Australian Capital Territory, Canberra 2020' and states the commitment to 600 hours per year of free early education.
GOV-163 Policy instrument

Public Health Division Plan 2025-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

NT Health's Public Health Division plans 2025 to 2028 around focus areas including supporting the public health workforce and promoting wellbeing and preventing illness. It commits to removing unhealthy products and promotions from NT Government and partner sites, resources and events, and to increasing the Aboriginal public health workforce.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2025). Public Health Division plan 2025-2028. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/1485703/public-health-division-plan.pdf

Plan document states the 2025-2028 period

All fields
ID
GOV-163
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health, Public Health Division
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
Public Health Division Plan 2025-2028
Description
NT Health's Public Health Division plans 2025 to 2028 around focus areas including supporting the public health workforce and promoting wellbeing and preventing illness. It commits to removing unhealthy products and promotions from NT Government and partner sites, resources and events, and to increasing the Aboriginal public health workforce.
Operative period
2025-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/1485703/public-health-division-plan.pdf
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2025). *Public Health Division plan 2025-2028*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/1485703/public-health-division-plan.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Plan document states the 2025-2028 period
GOV-164 Policy instrument

NT Aboriginal Health Forum Strategic Plan 2026 to 2030

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Northern Territory Aboriginal Health Forum sets priorities for 2026 to 2030 starting with driving the transition of government health services to Aboriginal community control under the P2CC framework and strengthening the interface between acute, primary, disability and aged care. Success is measured by year on year growth in services transitioned to community control.

Full APA reference

Northern Territory Aboriginal Health Forum. (2025). NT Aboriginal Health Forum strategic plan 2026 to 2030. https://amsant.org.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/NT-Aboriginal-Health-Forum-2026-2030-Strategic-Plan.pdf

Plan is dated 15 December 2025 for the period 2026 to 2030. The Forum is the tripartite partnership of NT Health, the Commonwealth and AMSANT, and the document is hosted on the AMSANT site rather than a government domain

All fields
ID
GOV-164
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
Northern Territory Aboriginal Health Forum
Year
2025
Year added to library
2026
Title
NT Aboriginal Health Forum Strategic Plan 2026 to 2030
Description
Northern Territory Aboriginal Health Forum sets priorities for 2026 to 2030 starting with driving the transition of government health services to Aboriginal community control under the P2CC framework and strengthening the interface between acute, primary, disability and aged care. Success is measured by year on year growth in services transitioned to community control.
Operative period
2026-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://amsant.org.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/NT-Aboriginal-Health-Forum-2026-2030-Strategic-Plan.pdf
Full APA reference
Northern Territory Aboriginal Health Forum. (2025). *NT Aboriginal Health Forum strategic plan 2026 to 2030*. https://amsant.org.au/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/NT-Aboriginal-Health-Forum-2026-2030-Strategic-Plan.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Plan is dated 15 December 2025 for the period 2026 to 2030. The Forum is the tripartite partnership of NT Health, the Commonwealth and AMSANT, and the document is hosted on the AMSANT site rather than a government domain
GOV-165 Policy instrument

Healthy, Well and Thriving 2024 to 2030: prevention and early intervention framework for chronic conditions

  • Health portfolio
  • Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

NT Health's chronic conditions framework for 2024 to 2030 prioritises five risk factors: unhealthy food and drink, tobacco, sedentary lifestyles, harmful alcohol use, and social and emotional wellbeing. Launched July 2024, it takes a systems approach to diabetes, cardiovascular disease, cancer and chronic kidney disease, recognising social, economic, cultural and commercial drivers of illness.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2024). Healthy, well and thriving 2024 to 2030: A prevention and early intervention framework for chronic conditions in the Northern Territory. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/1408390/2024-healthy-well-and-thriving-spreads.pdf

Framework was launched in July 2024 for 2024 to 2030 and names unhealthy food and drink, tobacco, sedentary lifestyles, harmful alcohol use and social factors as the drivers of disease burden

All fields
ID
GOV-165
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy, Well and Thriving 2024 to 2030: prevention and early intervention framework for chronic conditions
Description
NT Health's chronic conditions framework for 2024 to 2030 prioritises five risk factors: unhealthy food and drink, tobacco, sedentary lifestyles, harmful alcohol use, and social and emotional wellbeing. Launched July 2024, it takes a systems approach to diabetes, cardiovascular disease, cancer and chronic kidney disease, recognising social, economic, cultural and commercial drivers of illness.
Operative period
2024-2030
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Preventive health strategy; Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/chronic-conditions-health-professionals/chronic-conditions-prevention-and-management
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2024). *Healthy, well and thriving 2024 to 2030: A prevention and early intervention framework for chronic conditions in the Northern Territory*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/1408390/2024-healthy-well-and-thriving-spreads.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Framework was launched in July 2024 for 2024 to 2030 and names unhealthy food and drink, tobacco, sedentary lifestyles, harmful alcohol use and social factors as the drivers of disease burden
GOV-166 Policy instrument

Northern Territory Mental Health and Wellbeing Plan for Integration and Co-Investment 2024-29

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

NT Primary Health Network, NT Health and AMSANT set five integration priorities for 2024 to 2029, from early engagement with at risk populations and clear pathways for moderate mental illness to joined up services for children and young people. Other priorities are greater support for severe and complex needs and using technology.

Full APA reference

Northern Territory Primary Health Network & NT Health. (2024). Northern Territory mental health and wellbeing plan for integration and co-investment 2024-29. https://ntphn.org.au/programs/mental-health-and-wellbeing-plan/

Program page names the joint plan and the 2024-29 period. Hosted by NT PHN, a Commonwealth funded body, jointly with NT Health

All fields
ID
GOV-166
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Primary Health Network and NT Health
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Northern Territory Mental Health and Wellbeing Plan for Integration and Co-Investment 2024-29
Description
NT Primary Health Network, NT Health and AMSANT set five integration priorities for 2024 to 2029, from early engagement with at risk populations and clear pathways for moderate mental illness to joined up services for children and young people. Other priorities are greater support for severe and complex needs and using technology.
Operative period
2024-2029
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://ntphn.org.au/programs/mental-health-and-wellbeing-plan/
Full APA reference
Northern Territory Primary Health Network & NT Health. (2024). *Northern Territory mental health and wellbeing plan for integration and co-investment 2024-29*. https://ntphn.org.au/programs/mental-health-and-wellbeing-plan/
Verified date or evidence
Program page names the joint plan and the 2024-29 period. Hosted by NT PHN, a Commonwealth funded body, jointly with NT Health
GOV-167 Policy instrument

NT Health Strategic Plan 2023-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • General health

NT Health's plan for 2023 to 2028 sets four strategic focus areas: support and develop our workforce, promote wellbeing and prevent illness, provide high quality care reflecting personal and community needs, and connect service delivery for a sustainable future. Named goals include sustainably increasing the Aboriginal workforce and embedding culturally safe practice.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2023). NT Health strategic plan 2023-2028. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0015/1206510/nt-health-strategic-plan-2023-2028.pdf

Listed as a current strategy on the NT Health strategies index with the 2023-2028 period

All fields
ID
GOV-167
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
NT Health Strategic Plan 2023-2028
Description
NT Health's plan for 2023 to 2028 sets four strategic focus areas: support and develop our workforce, promote wellbeing and prevent illness, provide high quality care reflecting personal and community needs, and connect service delivery for a sustainable future. Named goals include sustainably increasing the Aboriginal workforce and embedding culturally safe practice.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2023). *NT Health strategic plan 2023-2028*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0015/1206510/nt-health-strategic-plan-2023-2028.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current strategy on the NT Health strategies index with the 2023-2028 period
GOV-168 Policy instrument

Keeping Everyone Safe: Northern Territory Suicide Prevention Implementation Plan 2023-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

NT Health, AMSANT and NT PHN released this suicide prevention plan on World Suicide Prevention Day 2023, guiding investment to 2028 through six action areas including community led responses, workforce investment and support for priority groups. It aims to cut suicide rates and stigmatised attitudes, applying trauma informed, recovery focused and equity principles.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2023). Keeping everyone safe: Northern Territory suicide prevention implementation plan 2023-2028. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies

Listed on the NT Health strategies index; released 10 September 2023 for 2023-2028

All fields
ID
GOV-168
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2023
Year added to library
2026
Title
Keeping Everyone Safe: Northern Territory Suicide Prevention Implementation Plan 2023-2028
Description
NT Health, AMSANT and NT PHN released this suicide prevention plan on World Suicide Prevention Day 2023, guiding investment to 2028 through six action areas including community led responses, workforce investment and support for priority groups. It aims to cut suicide rates and stigmatised attitudes, applying trauma informed, recovery focused and equity principles.
Operative period
2023-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2023). *Keeping everyone safe: Northern Territory suicide prevention implementation plan 2023-2028*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Verified date or evidence
Listed on the NT Health strategies index; released 10 September 2023 for 2023-2028
GOV-169 Policy instrument

NT Health Aboriginal Health Plan 2021-2031

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

NT Health sets five strategic directions for 2021 to 2031: improving health service delivery to Aboriginal people, building sustainable partnerships, delivering culturally secure and safe services, strengthening the health workforce, and improving Aboriginal population health and promoting wellbeing. These directions guide NT Health investment, business planning and partnerships with Aboriginal Territorians and organisations.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2021). NT Health Aboriginal health plan 2021-2031. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health/aboriginal-health-policy

Page presents the plan as current Aboriginal health policy for 2021-2031

All fields
ID
GOV-169
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
NT Health Aboriginal Health Plan 2021-2031
Description
NT Health sets five strategic directions for 2021 to 2031: improving health service delivery to Aboriginal people, building sustainable partnerships, delivering culturally secure and safe services, strengthening the health workforce, and improving Aboriginal population health and promoting wellbeing. These directions guide NT Health investment, business planning and partnerships with Aboriginal Territorians and organisations.
Operative period
2021-2031
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health/aboriginal-health-policy
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2021). *NT Health Aboriginal health plan 2021-2031*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-health/aboriginal-health-policy
Verified date or evidence
Page presents the plan as current Aboriginal health policy for 2021-2031
GOV-170 Policy instrument

The Best Opportunities in Life: Northern Territory Child and Adolescent Health and Wellbeing Strategic Plan 2018-2028

  • Health portfolio
  • Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
  • Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

NT Health's plan for 2018 to 2028 covers children and young Territorians aged 0 to 24, guiding health, housing, education, youth justice, child protection and police services to support their physical, emotional and social development. Actions are monitored annually and align with youth justice and child protection reform set by the Royal Commission.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2018). The best opportunities in life: Northern Territory child and adolescent health and wellbeing strategic plan 2018-2028. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies

Listed as a current plan on the NT Health strategies index with the 2018-2028 period

All fields
ID
GOV-170
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2018
Year added to library
2026
Title
The Best Opportunities in Life: Northern Territory Child and Adolescent Health and Wellbeing Strategic Plan 2018-2028
Description
NT Health's plan for 2018 to 2028 covers children and young Territorians aged 0 to 24, guiding health, housing, education, youth justice, child protection and police services to support their physical, emotional and social development. Actions are monitored annually and align with youth justice and child protection reform set by the Royal Commission.
Operative period
2018-2028
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Overarching health plans, strategies and guidelines
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet; Physical activity and exercise; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2018). *The best opportunities in life: Northern Territory child and adolescent health and wellbeing strategic plan 2018-2028*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current plan on the NT Health strategies index with the 2018-2028 period
GOV-171 Policy instrument

NT Aboriginal Cultural Security Framework 2016-2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
  • Mental and physical health

NT Health's ten year framework applies to all staff from 2016 to 2026, organised in six domains: workforce, communication, whole of organisation approach, leadership, consumer and community participation, and quality improvement, planning, research and evaluation. It provides for annual reporting on cultural security, a mid-term review and an evaluation before expiry.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (2016). Northern Territory Aboriginal cultural security framework 2016-2026. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies

Listed as a current framework on the NT Health strategies index with the 2016-2026 period

All fields
ID
GOV-171
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
2016
Year added to library
2026
Title
NT Aboriginal Cultural Security Framework 2016-2026
Description
NT Health's ten year framework applies to all staff from 2016 to 2026, organised in six domains: workforce, communication, whole of organisation approach, leadership, consumer and community participation, and quality improvement, planning, research and evaluation. It provides for annual reporting on cultural security, a mid-term review and an evaluation before expiry.
Operative period
2016-2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection; General lifestyle (not domain-specific)
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Full APA reference
NT Health. (2016). *Northern Territory Aboriginal cultural security framework 2016-2026*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies
Verified date or evidence
Listed as a current framework on the NT Health strategies index with the 2016-2026 period
GOV-172 Policy instrument

Healthy Choices Made Easy: NT Health Food and Drinks Provision policy

  • Health portfolio
  • Nutrition and food policy
  • Nutrition and diet
  • Physical health

NT Health grades foods and drinks green, amber or red and requires green and amber options to make up at least 80 per cent of everything provided or sold on its premises. It sits within NT Health work on overweight and obesity, reducing energy dense, nutrient poor food and drinks and encouraging active lifestyles.

Full APA reference

NT Health. (n.d.). Healthy Choices Made Easy: NT Health food and drinks provision. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/nutrition-and-physical-activity

Page lists the Healthy Choices Made Easy policy as current NT Health practice; no year range or publication date is stated

All fields
ID
GOV-172
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT Health
Year
Not stated
Year added to library
2026
Title
Healthy Choices Made Easy: NT Health Food and Drinks Provision policy
Description
NT Health grades foods and drinks green, amber or red and requires green and amber options to make up at least 80 per cent of everything provided or sold on its premises. It sits within NT Health work on overweight and obesity, reducing energy dense, nutrient poor food and drinks and encouraging active lifestyles.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Nutrition and food policy
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nutrition and diet
Health focus
Physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/nutrition-and-physical-activity
Full APA reference
NT Health. (n.d.). *Healthy Choices Made Easy: NT Health food and drinks provision*. Northern Territory Government. https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/nutrition-and-physical-activity
Verified date or evidence
Page lists the Healthy Choices Made Easy policy as current NT Health practice; no year range or publication date is stated
GOV-173 Policy instrument

Managing psychosocial hazards at work

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Work health and safety psychosocial
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Approved on 23 May 2024, this Northern Territory code of practice guides persons conducting a business or undertaking to identify psychosocial hazards, assess and control risks and review controls under work health and safety law. Regulator approval makes psychological safety an inspectable duty for Territory employers of all sizes.

Full APA reference

NT WorkSafe. (2024). Managing psychosocial hazards at work. Northern Territory Government. https://worksafe.nt.gov.au/forms-and-resources/codes-of-practice/managing-psychosocial-hazards-at-work

Page records that the code of practice was 'approved on Thursday 23 May 2024' and lists it among current codes.

All fields
ID
GOV-173
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
NT WorkSafe
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
Managing psychosocial hazards at work
Description
Approved on 23 May 2024, this Northern Territory code of practice guides persons conducting a business or undertaking to identify psychosocial hazards, assess and control risks and review controls under work health and safety law. Regulator approval makes psychological safety an inspectable duty for Territory employers of all sizes.
Operative period
2024 onwards
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Work health and safety psychosocial
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://worksafe.nt.gov.au/forms-and-resources/codes-of-practice/managing-psychosocial-hazards-at-work
Full APA reference
NT WorkSafe. (2024). *Managing psychosocial hazards at work*. Northern Territory Government. https://worksafe.nt.gov.au/forms-and-resources/codes-of-practice/managing-psychosocial-hazards-at-work
Verified date or evidence
Page records that the code of practice was 'approved on Thursday 23 May 2024' and lists it among current codes.
GOV-174 Policy instrument

NT Community Housing Growth Strategy 2022-32

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Housing and homelessness
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

This ten year Northern Territory strategy is delivered across three phases from 2022, seed funded with $22.3 million across 2021-22 and 2022-23, and transfers up to 40 per cent of urban and regional public housing to community housing providers under long term leases. Provider growth targets tenant wellbeing and economic participation.

Full APA reference

Territory Families, Housing and Communities. (2022). NT community housing growth strategy 2022-32. Northern Territory Government. https://tfhc.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1099170/tfhc-community-housing-growth-strategy-202232.pdf

Document states 'This 10 year Strategy will be delivered across three phases' with $22.3 million in seed funding.

All fields
ID
GOV-174
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
Territory Families, Housing and Communities
Year
2022
Year added to library
2026
Title
NT Community Housing Growth Strategy 2022-32
Description
This ten year Northern Territory strategy is delivered across three phases from 2022, seed funded with $22.3 million across 2021-22 and 2022-23, and transfers up to 40 per cent of urban and regional public housing to community housing providers under long term leases. Provider growth targets tenant wellbeing and economic participation.
Operative period
2022-2032
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Housing and homelessness
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://tfhc.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1099170/tfhc-community-housing-growth-strategy-202232.pdf
Full APA reference
Territory Families, Housing and Communities. (2022). *NT community housing growth strategy 2022-32*. Northern Territory Government. https://tfhc.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0009/1099170/tfhc-community-housing-growth-strategy-202232.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document states 'This 10 year Strategy will be delivered across three phases' with $22.3 million in seed funding.
GOV-175 Policy instrument

Northern Territory Seniors Policy

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion
  • Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Physical and mental health

The Office of Senior Territorians administers this seniors policy for 2021 to 2026, organised around economic participation and financial security, safety and security, and health and wellbeing, and it supports active ageing and age friendly communities. Program funding sustains independence, social participation and wellbeing for older Territorians.

Full APA reference

Office of Senior Territorians. (2021). Northern Territory seniors policy. Northern Territory Government. https://dpsc.nt.gov.au/community-programs-support/seniors/northern-territory-seniors-policy

Page states 'The NT Seniors Policy 2021 - 2026 supports active ageing and the evolution of age-friendly communities'.

All fields
ID
GOV-175
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
Office of Senior Territorians
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Northern Territory Seniors Policy
Description
The Office of Senior Territorians administers this seniors policy for 2021 to 2026, organised around economic participation and financial security, safety and security, and health and wellbeing, and it supports active ageing and age friendly communities. Program funding sustains independence, social participation and wellbeing for older Territorians.
Operative period
2021-2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Physical activity and exercise; Social connection; Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://dpsc.nt.gov.au/community-programs-support/seniors/northern-territory-seniors-policy
Full APA reference
Office of Senior Territorians. (2021). *Northern Territory seniors policy*. Northern Territory Government. https://dpsc.nt.gov.au/community-programs-support/seniors/northern-territory-seniors-policy
Verified date or evidence
Page states 'The NT Seniors Policy 2021 - 2026 supports active ageing and the evolution of age-friendly communities'.
GOV-176 Policy instrument

Everyone together - Aboriginal Affairs Strategy 2019-2029

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Closing the Gap
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • General health

The Office of Aboriginal Affairs directs this ten year strategy for 2019 to 2029, backed by $1.1 billion over ten years for remote housing, $426 million over eight years for subdivisions and targets of 16 per cent Aboriginal employment sector wide. Objectives include culturally responsive health services and equitable health outcomes for Aboriginal Territorians.

Full APA reference

Office of Aboriginal Affairs. (2019). Everyone together - Aboriginal affairs strategy 2019-2029. Northern Territory Government. https://dcm.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/799219/everyone-together-aa-strategy.pdf

Document is titled Aboriginal Affairs Strategy 2019-2029 and lists the $1.1 billion ten year remote housing commitment.

All fields
ID
GOV-176
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Issuing body
Office of Aboriginal Affairs
Year
2019
Year added to library
2026
Title
Everyone together - Aboriginal Affairs Strategy 2019-2029
Description
The Office of Aboriginal Affairs directs this ten year strategy for 2019 to 2029, backed by $1.1 billion over ten years for remote housing, $426 million over eight years for subdivisions and targets of 16 per cent Aboriginal employment sector wide. Objectives include culturally responsive health services and equitable health outcomes for Aboriginal Territorians.
Operative period
2019-2029
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Closing the Gap
New or updated in 2026
No, but operative in 2026
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
General health
Status
Current
URL
https://dcm.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/799219/everyone-together-aa-strategy.pdf
Full APA reference
Office of Aboriginal Affairs. (2019). *Everyone together - Aboriginal affairs strategy 2019-2029*. Northern Territory Government. https://dcm.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/799219/everyone-together-aa-strategy.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Document is titled Aboriginal Affairs Strategy 2019-2029 and lists the $1.1 billion ten year remote housing commitment.
GOV-177 Policy instrument

Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Ageing and disability inclusion; Health equity or social determinants
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
  • Physical and mental health

The national ten year framework agreed by all Australian governments, built on the social model of disability and organised around seven outcome areas: employment and financial security, inclusive homes and communities, safety rights and justice, personal and community support, education and learning, health and wellbeing, and community attitudes. It replaced the National Disability Strategy 2010–2020 and was updated in January 2025, with progress reported annually by the AIHW.

Full APA reference

Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2021). Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031. Australian Government. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/australias-disability-strategy

Department page read in September 2026, stating that all Australian governments have signed up to the strategy, that it is a ten year plan based on the social model of disability, and listing the seven outcome areas. A Department of Social Services news item dated 29 January 2025 records the strategy update.

All fields
ID
GOV-177
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
All Australian governments
Year
2021
Year added to library
2026
Title
Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031
Description
The national ten year framework agreed by all Australian governments, built on the social model of disability and organised around seven outcome areas: employment and financial security, inclusive homes and communities, safety rights and justice, personal and community support, education and learning, health and wellbeing, and community attitudes. It replaced the National Disability Strategy 2010–2020 and was updated in January 2025, with progress reported annually by the AIHW.
Operative period
2021 to 2031
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Ageing and disability inclusion; Health equity or social determinants
New or updated in 2026
No
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Social connection
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/australias-disability-strategy
Full APA reference
Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. (2021). *Australia's Disability Strategy 2021–2031*. Australian Government. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/australias-disability-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Department page read in September 2026, stating that all Australian governments have signed up to the strategy, that it is a ten year plan based on the social model of disability, and listing the seven outcome areas. A Department of Social Services news item dated 29 January 2025 records the strategy update.
GOV-179 Policy instrument

National Carer Strategy 2024–2034

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Social inclusion and connection; Health equity or social determinants
  • General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
  • Mental and physical health

Released on 10 December 2024 as a ten year national agenda for Australia's unpaid carers, described as a framework for co-designing, developing and delivering actions that holistically improve carers' lives. It targets awareness of carers and the impacts of caring, carer wellbeing, economic and social participation, and easier navigation of services across Commonwealth, state and territory governments, with an Action Plan for 2024 to 2027.

Full APA reference

Australian Government. (2024). National Carer Strategy 2024–2034. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-carer-strategy

Department page read in September 2026, giving a release date of 10 December 2024, the 2024 to 2034 period, the quoted framework wording and the companion Action Plan 2024–2027.

All fields
ID
GOV-179
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Government
Year
2024
Year added to library
2026
Title
National Carer Strategy 2024–2034
Description
Released on 10 December 2024 as a ten year national agenda for Australia's unpaid carers, described as a framework for co-designing, developing and delivering actions that holistically improve carers' lives. It targets awareness of carers and the impacts of caring, carer wellbeing, economic and social participation, and easier navigation of services across Commonwealth, state and territory governments, with an Action Plan for 2024 to 2027.
Operative period
2024 to 2034
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Social inclusion and connection; Health equity or social determinants
New or updated in 2026
No
Lifestyle domains
General lifestyle (not domain-specific); Stress, mind and positive psychology; Social connection
Health focus
Mental and physical health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-carer-strategy
Full APA reference
Australian Government. (2024). *National Carer Strategy 2024–2034*. https://www.health.gov.au/our-work/national-carer-strategy
Verified date or evidence
Department page read in September 2026, giving a release date of 10 December 2024, the 2024 to 2034 period, the quoted framework wording and the companion Action Plan 2024–2027.
GOV-180 Policy instrument

Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)

  • Health portfolio
  • Digital and online safety
  • Stress, mind and positive psychology
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Explains when apps, websites and platforms for mental health assessment, therapy or self-management are regulated medical devices requiring ARTG listing, and when they are excluded. Includes consumer safety and privacy advice.

Full APA reference

Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2026, February 11). Digital mental health tools (DMHTs). Australian Government. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts

TGA page dated 11 February 2026, read 17 October 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-180
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Therapeutic Goods Administration
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)
Description
Explains when apps, websites and platforms for mental health assessment, therapy or self-management are regulated medical devices requiring ARTG listing, and when they are excluded. Includes consumer safety and privacy advice.
Operative period
In force, no stated end date
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Digital and online safety
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Stress, mind and positive psychology
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts
Full APA reference
Therapeutic Goods Administration. (2026, February 11). *Digital mental health tools (DMHTs)*. Australian Government. https://www.tga.gov.au/products/medical-devices/software-and-artificial-intelligence-ai/overview/types-software-based-medical-devices/digital-mental-health-tools-dmhts
Verified date or evidence
TGA page dated 11 February 2026, read 17 October 2026
Related items
REF-520
Same document as
REF-520
GOV-181 Policy instrument

Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026

  • Health portfolio
  • Mental health plan or strategy
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Tracks the Royal Commission's 74 recommendations: 19 delivered and work underway on 95%. More than 41,000 people have received care through 22 Local Services at 24 locations.

Full APA reference

Department of Health. (2026). Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf

Report states progress as of May 2026 (ISBN 978-1-76131-999-0), read 17 October 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-181
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Issuing body
Department of Health, Victorian Government
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026
Description
Tracks the Royal Commission's 74 recommendations: 19 delivered and work underway on 95%. More than 41,000 people have received care through 22 Local Services at 24 locations.
Operative period
Progress report, May 2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Mental health plan or strategy
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf
Full APA reference
Department of Health. (2026). *Mental health and wellbeing reform progress report 2026*. Victorian Government. https://www.health.vic.gov.au/sites/default/files/2026-05/mental-health-wellbeing-reform-progress-report.pdf
Verified date or evidence
Report states progress as of May 2026 (ISBN 978-1-76131-999-0), read 17 October 2026
Related items
REF-523
Same document as
REF-523
GOV-182 Policy instrument

Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report

  • Beyond health portfolio
  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
  • Social connection
  • Mental health and wellbeing

Draws on 14 waves of the Longitudinal Study of Indigenous Children. Culture, family, community and school are protective; young people who felt safe and supported at school were about 50% less likely to report self-harm or suicidal thoughts.

Full APA reference

Australian National University. (2026). Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report. Department of Social Services. https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report

DSS page updated 26 May 2026, read 17 October 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-182
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Department of Social Services
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report
Description
Draws on 14 waves of the Longitudinal Study of Indigenous Children. Culture, family, community and school are protective; young people who felt safe and supported at school were about 50% less likely to report self-harm or suicidal thoughts.
Operative period
Research report, 2026
Sector
Beyond health portfolio
Category
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Social connection
Health focus
Mental health and wellbeing
Status
Current
URL
https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report
Full APA reference
Australian National University. (2026). *Footprints in Time: Helping spirits stay strong: Social and emotional wellbeing report*. Department of Social Services. https://www.dss.gov.au/long-term-research/helping-spirits-stay-strong-social-and-emotional-wellbeing-report
Verified date or evidence
DSS page updated 26 May 2026, read 17 October 2026
Related items
REF-522
Same document as
REF-522
GOV-183 Policy instrument

Guidance on climate risk assessment and adaptation planning for Australian health system organisations

  • Health portfolio
  • Climate and environmental health
  • Nature and environment
  • Physical and mental health

National guidance, local hazard data and practical templates to help health system organisations assess climate risks and plan adaptation. It is aimed at Local Health Networks, Primary Health Networks, hospitals, residential aged care, state and territory health departments, Aboriginal Community-Controlled Health Services, general practice, and allied health and psychology services. The manual guides organisations to assess climate risks, prioritise adaptation actions and develop plans that protect population health, service delivery, infrastructure and workforce resilience. District-level hazard data for every state and territory covers heat, fire, drought, rainfall, floods, storms and coastal flooding, using past data and future projections. The package also includes an overview, a climate risk dashboard, and risk assessment, adaptation plan and business case templates.

Full APA reference

Australian Centre for Disease Control. (2026). Guidance on climate risk assessment and adaptation planning for Australian health system organisations: Manual. Australian Government. https://www.cdc.gov.au/resources/collections/climate-risk-assessment-and-adaptation-planning-resources

Collection page, manual and overview published 13 October 2026 (manual version 1.0, October 2026); read 28 October 2026

All fields
ID
GOV-183
Jurisdiction
Australia - national
Issuing body
Australian Centre for Disease Control
Year
2026
Year added to library
2026
Title
Guidance on climate risk assessment and adaptation planning for Australian health system organisations
Description
National guidance, local hazard data and practical templates to help health system organisations assess climate risks and plan adaptation. It is aimed at Local Health Networks, Primary Health Networks, hospitals, residential aged care, state and territory health departments, Aboriginal Community-Controlled Health Services, general practice, and allied health and psychology services. The manual guides organisations to assess climate risks, prioritise adaptation actions and develop plans that protect population health, service delivery, infrastructure and workforce resilience. District-level hazard data for every state and territory covers heat, fire, drought, rainfall, floods, storms and coastal flooding, using past data and future projections. The package also includes an overview, a climate risk dashboard, and risk assessment, adaptation plan and business case templates.
Operative period
Version 1.0, October 2026
Sector
Health portfolio
Category
Climate and environmental health
New or updated in 2026
Yes, new or updated in 2026
Lifestyle domains
Nature and environment
Health focus
Physical and mental health
Status
Current
URL
https://www.cdc.gov.au/resources/collections/climate-risk-assessment-and-adaptation-planning-resources
Full APA reference
Australian Centre for Disease Control. (2026). *Guidance on climate risk assessment and adaptation planning for Australian health system organisations: Manual*. Australian Government. https://www.cdc.gov.au/resources/collections/climate-risk-assessment-and-adaptation-planning-resources
Verified date or evidence
Collection page, manual and overview published 13 October 2026 (manual version 1.0, October 2026); read 28 October 2026
Related items
GOV-015; REF-251; REF-575

Identified policy gaps

Categories where a jurisdiction has no current instrument.

GAP-01 Policy gap

Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs strategy

NSW does not appear to have a current tobacco strategy. The NSW Tobacco Strategy 2012-2021 and its Work Plan 2019-2021 remain the only instruments listed, on a page marked "Current as at: Wednesday 15 July 2026" (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/tobacco/Pages/tobacco-strategy.aspx), and no NSW vaping, alcohol or other drug strategy is listed on the AOD key plans page (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aod/strategy/Pages/default.aspx). Narrower instruments remain in force, including the NSW Alcohol and Other Drugs Workforce Strategy 2024-2032 (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aod/resources/Pages/aod-workforce-strategy.aspx), the NSW Cancer Plan 2022-2027 (https://www.cancer.nsw.gov.au/what-we-do/nsw-cancer-plan), and NSW Health smoking, vaping and smoke free care policies. Responding to the 2024 Drug Summit on 28 October 2025, the government committed to release a 10 year whole of government Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy within six months (https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-government-delivers-response-to-2024-drug-summit-report), which had not appeared on those pages when checked in September 2026.

All fields
ID
GAP-01
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Category with no current instrument
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs strategy
Evidence
NSW does not appear to have a current tobacco strategy. The NSW Tobacco Strategy 2012-2021 and its Work Plan 2019-2021 remain the only instruments listed, on a page marked "Current as at: Wednesday 15 July 2026" (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/tobacco/Pages/tobacco-strategy.aspx), and no NSW vaping, alcohol or other drug strategy is listed on the AOD key plans page (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aod/strategy/Pages/default.aspx). Narrower instruments remain in force, including the NSW Alcohol and Other Drugs Workforce Strategy 2024-2032 (https://www.health.nsw.gov.au/aod/resources/Pages/aod-workforce-strategy.aspx), the NSW Cancer Plan 2022-2027 (https://www.cancer.nsw.gov.au/what-we-do/nsw-cancer-plan), and NSW Health smoking, vaping and smoke free care policies. Responding to the 2024 Drug Summit on 28 October 2025, the government committed to release a 10 year whole of government Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy within six months (https://www.nsw.gov.au/ministerial-releases/nsw-government-delivers-response-to-2024-drug-summit-report), which had not appeared on those pages when checked in September 2026.
GAP-02 Policy gap

Mental health plan, whole of population

NSW does not appear to have a current, consolidated statewide mental health and wellbeing strategy in force that provides a whole-of-population and whole-of-government framework. The previous overarching NSW Health mental health framework expired in 2022, and Living Well concluded in 2024. NSW retains several important but more limited instruments, including a suicide-prevention framework, specialist population and workforce strategies, and ongoing mental-health service-planning work, while a broader NSW Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy has been under development. The Mental Health Commission consultation paper of June 2025 is the most recent published step in that development (https://www.nswmentalhealthcommission.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-06/Mental%20Health%20Strategy_Consultation_2025.pdf).

All fields
ID
GAP-02
Jurisdiction
Australia - New South Wales
Category with no current instrument
Mental health plan, whole of population
Evidence
NSW does not appear to have a current, consolidated statewide mental health and wellbeing strategy in force that provides a whole-of-population and whole-of-government framework. The previous overarching NSW Health mental health framework expired in 2022, and Living Well concluded in 2024. NSW retains several important but more limited instruments, including a suicide-prevention framework, specialist population and workforce strategies, and ongoing mental-health service-planning work, while a broader NSW Mental Health and Wellbeing Strategy has been under development. The Mental Health Commission consultation paper of June 2025 is the most recent published step in that development (https://www.nswmentalhealthcommission.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-06/Mental%20Health%20Strategy_Consultation_2025.pdf).
GAP-03 Policy gap

Health equity or social determinants

Victoria does not appear to have a single standalone departmental health equity or social determinants strategy. Equity is instead embedded in the legislated Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27 and its outcomes framework (https://www.health.vic.gov.au/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2023-27), and pursued through the Department of Health multicultural health action plan 2023-27 (https://www.health.vic.gov.au/multicultural-health-action-plan-2023-27/our-multicultural-health-approach), Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027 (https://www.dffh.vic.gov.au/publications/korin-korin-balit-djak), and whole of government inclusion strategies covering LGBTIQA+ Victorians, disability, gender equality, young people and older people. Two further equity relevant instruments are listed as coming soon, a Wellbeing in Victoria strategy to promote good mental health and a Diverse Communities Mental Health and Wellbeing Framework.

All fields
ID
GAP-03
Jurisdiction
Australia - Victoria
Category with no current instrument
Health equity or social determinants
Evidence
Victoria does not appear to have a single standalone departmental health equity or social determinants strategy. Equity is instead embedded in the legislated Victorian public health and wellbeing plan 2023-27 and its outcomes framework (https://www.health.vic.gov.au/victorian-public-health-and-wellbeing-plan-2023-27), and pursued through the Department of Health multicultural health action plan 2023-27 (https://www.health.vic.gov.au/multicultural-health-action-plan-2023-27/our-multicultural-health-approach), Korin Korin Balit-Djak: Aboriginal health, wellbeing and safety strategic plan 2017-2027 (https://www.dffh.vic.gov.au/publications/korin-korin-balit-djak), and whole of government inclusion strategies covering LGBTIQA+ Victorians, disability, gender equality, young people and older people. Two further equity relevant instruments are listed as coming soon, a Wellbeing in Victoria strategy to promote good mental health and a Diverse Communities Mental Health and Wellbeing Framework.
GAP-04 Policy gap

Wellbeing framework, whole of government

Western Australia does not appear to have a whole of government wellbeing framework. The closest current instruments are WA Government Priorities 2025-2029, which sets six priority areas but is not described as a wellbeing framework (https://www.wa.gov.au/government/wa-government-priorities-2025-2029), and the Community Services Outcomes Measurement Framework, which spans government agencies and the community services sector with no stated period (https://www.wa.gov.au/government/publications/community-services-outcomes-measurement-framework). Broader direction also comes from the Sustainable Health Review's enduring strategies (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/improving-wa-health/sustainable-health-review) and the WA Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031 (https://www.mhc.wa.gov.au/our-initiatives/our-projects/mental-health-and-alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2026-2031). WA is developing its first comprehensive Preventative Health Strategy as a long term roadmap for health and wellbeing, with consultation open until 24 July 2026 (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/News/2026/Western-Australians-invited-to-help-shape-the-States-first-Preventative-Health-Strategy).

All fields
ID
GAP-04
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Category with no current instrument
Wellbeing framework, whole of government
Evidence
Western Australia does not appear to have a whole of government wellbeing framework. The closest current instruments are WA Government Priorities 2025-2029, which sets six priority areas but is not described as a wellbeing framework (https://www.wa.gov.au/government/wa-government-priorities-2025-2029), and the Community Services Outcomes Measurement Framework, which spans government agencies and the community services sector with no stated period (https://www.wa.gov.au/government/publications/community-services-outcomes-measurement-framework). Broader direction also comes from the Sustainable Health Review's enduring strategies (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/improving-wa-health/sustainable-health-review) and the WA Mental Health and Alcohol and Other Drugs Strategy 2026-2031 (https://www.mhc.wa.gov.au/our-initiatives/our-projects/mental-health-and-alcohol-and-other-drugs-strategy-2026-2031). WA is developing its first comprehensive Preventative Health Strategy as a long term roadmap for health and wellbeing, with consultation open until 24 July 2026 (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/News/2026/Western-Australians-invited-to-help-shape-the-States-first-Preventative-Health-Strategy).
GAP-05 Policy gap

Physical activity strategy

Western Australia does not appear to have a standalone state physical activity strategy. Physical activity sits inside the Western Australian Health Promotion Strategic Framework 2022-2026, whose "Healthy eating and active living" priority area commits to encouraging and supporting active living across the lifespan (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework). Outside health, the Department of Local Government, Sport and Cultural Industries maintains the More People More Active Outdoors framework, which states no period (https://www.cits.wa.gov.au/department/publications/publication/more-people-more-active-outdoors), along with workplace physical activity guidance (https://www.dlgsc.wa.gov.au/department/publications/publication/workplace-physical-activity). The Western Australian Strategic Trails Blueprint 2017-2021 has ended. WA's first comprehensive Preventative Health Strategy, now in development, names physical activity among the everyday preventative health actions (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/News/2026/Western-Australians-invited-to-help-shape-the-States-first-Preventative-Health-Strategy).

All fields
ID
GAP-05
Jurisdiction
Australia - Western Australia
Category with no current instrument
Physical activity strategy
Evidence
Western Australia does not appear to have a standalone state physical activity strategy. Physical activity sits inside the Western Australian Health Promotion Strategic Framework 2022-2026, whose "Healthy eating and active living" priority area commits to encouraging and supporting active living across the lifespan (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/Reports-and-publications/WA-Health-Promotion-Strategic-Framework). Outside health, the Department of Local Government, Sport and Cultural Industries maintains the More People More Active Outdoors framework, which states no period (https://www.cits.wa.gov.au/department/publications/publication/more-people-more-active-outdoors), along with workplace physical activity guidance (https://www.dlgsc.wa.gov.au/department/publications/publication/workplace-physical-activity). The Western Australian Strategic Trails Blueprint 2017-2021 has ended. WA's first comprehensive Preventative Health Strategy, now in development, names physical activity among the everyday preventative health actions (https://www.health.wa.gov.au/News/2026/Western-Australians-invited-to-help-shape-the-States-first-Preventative-Health-Strategy).
GAP-06 Policy gap

Overarching health plan, direct successor

The South Australian Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2020-2025 has reached the end of its stated period and is still listed on SA Health's strategy and planning page with no status and no named successor (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/strategy+and+planning/strategy+and+planning). South Australia is not, however, without an overarching public health instrument: a new statutory State Public Health Plan 2026, "Healthy | Liveable | Connected", has been published under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011 following consultation on a draft in 2025 (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan). Other current plans are narrower, including the SA Health Regional Aged Care Strategy 2021-2025, Preventive Health SA's Strategic Directions and the South Australian Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy 2025-2030 (https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans).

All fields
ID
GAP-06
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Category with no current instrument
Overarching health plan, direct successor
Evidence
The South Australian Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2020-2025 has reached the end of its stated period and is still listed on SA Health's strategy and planning page with no status and no named successor (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/strategy+and+planning/strategy+and+planning). South Australia is not, however, without an overarching public health instrument: a new statutory State Public Health Plan 2026, "Healthy | Liveable | Connected", has been published under the South Australian Public Health Act 2011 following consultation on a draft in 2025 (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/legislation/public+health+act/state+public+health+plan/state+public+health+plan). Other current plans are narrower, including the SA Health Regional Aged Care Strategy 2021-2025, Preventive Health SA's Strategic Directions and the South Australian Alcohol and Other Drug Strategy 2025-2030 (https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/about/strategy-plans).
GAP-07 Policy gap

Mental health plan

South Australia's Mental Health Services Plan 2020-2025 has reached the end of its stated period, and SA Health's page for it names no successor and gives no development timing (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/publications+and+resources/plans/sa+mental+health+services+plan/sa+health+mental+health+services+plan). No replacement whole of population mental health plan appears to have been published. Suicide prevention instruments are current and more specific: the South Australian Suicide Prevention Plan 2023-2026, launched on 12 July 2023 under the Suicide Prevention Act 2021 (https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/suicideprevention/south-australian-suicide-prevention-plan-2023-2026), and the Department for Health and Wellbeing Suicide Prevention Action Plan 2026-2029, "Compassion, Connection, Hope and Care", published in 2026 (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/publications+and+resources/plans/department+for+health+and+wellbeing+suicide+prevention+action+plan+2026-2029).

All fields
ID
GAP-07
Jurisdiction
Australia - South Australia
Category with no current instrument
Mental health plan
Evidence
South Australia's Mental Health Services Plan 2020-2025 has reached the end of its stated period, and SA Health's page for it names no successor and gives no development timing (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/publications+and+resources/plans/sa+mental+health+services+plan/sa+health+mental+health+services+plan). No replacement whole of population mental health plan appears to have been published. Suicide prevention instruments are current and more specific: the South Australian Suicide Prevention Plan 2023-2026, launched on 12 July 2023 under the Suicide Prevention Act 2021 (https://www.preventivehealth.sa.gov.au/suicideprevention/south-australian-suicide-prevention-plan-2023-2026), and the Department for Health and Wellbeing Suicide Prevention Action Plan 2026-2029, "Compassion, Connection, Hope and Care", published in 2026 (https://www.sahealth.sa.gov.au/wps/wcm/connect/public+content/sa+health+internet/about+us/publications+and+resources/plans/department+for+health+and+wellbeing+suicide+prevention+action+plan+2026-2029).
GAP-08 Policy gap

Mental health plan

Rethink 2020: A State Plan for Mental Health in Tasmania 2020-2025 has reached the end of its period (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/rethink-2020-state-plan-2020-2025) and no final successor strategy appears to have been released. Consultation on a Discussion Paper for the next strategy, "Rethink and Beyond", ran from 24 March 2026 to 1 May 2026, with further focus groups and community forums flagged on a draft strategy and no release date announced (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy). In the meantime the Tasmanian Suicide Prevention Strategy 2023-2027 remains in force with sequential implementation plans (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/tasmanian-suicide-prevention-strategy-2023-2027), mental health and wellbeing is a focus area of the Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026 (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/about/what-we-do/strategic-programs-and-initiatives/healthy-tasmania-strategic-plan), and the 20 year preventive health strategy, The Health Revolution, launched with its first action plan on 4 June 2026 (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution).

All fields
ID
GAP-08
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Category with no current instrument
Mental health plan
Evidence
Rethink 2020: A State Plan for Mental Health in Tasmania 2020-2025 has reached the end of its period (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/rethink-2020-state-plan-2020-2025) and no final successor strategy appears to have been released. Consultation on a Discussion Paper for the next strategy, "Rethink and Beyond", ran from 24 March 2026 to 1 May 2026, with further focus groups and community forums flagged on a draft strategy and no release date announced (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/march/consultation-opens-on-tasmanias-next-mental-health-strategy). In the meantime the Tasmanian Suicide Prevention Strategy 2023-2027 remains in force with sequential implementation plans (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/publications/tasmanian-suicide-prevention-strategy-2023-2027), mental health and wellbeing is a focus area of the Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026 (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/about/what-we-do/strategic-programs-and-initiatives/healthy-tasmania-strategic-plan), and the 20 year preventive health strategy, The Health Revolution, launched with its first action plan on 4 June 2026 (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2026/june/launching-into-tasmanias-health-revolution).
GAP-09 Policy gap

Population nutrition policy, and physical activity strategy

Tasmania does not appear to have a standalone population nutrition policy or physical activity strategy. It does have a dedicated food instrument, Building Food Resilient Communities: Tasmania's Food Resilience Strategy 2025-2031, launched on 27 November 2025 with $8.9 million over four years and replacing the Food Relief to Food Resilience Action Plan 2023-2025 (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2025/november/launch-of-tasmanias-food-resilience-strategy-2025-2031), with a new action plan under it expected in 2026 (https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/for-communities/community-programs/food-resilience). That strategy addresses food resilience and food relief rather than population nutrition, which sits with "Active living" inside the Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026 (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/about/what-we-do/strategic-programs-and-initiatives/healthy-tasmania-strategic-plan). Departmental physical activity guidance points to Healthy Tasmania Move More and the national movement and physical activity guidelines (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/professionals/working-health-promoting-ways/priority-areas/more-active-communities-more-active-people). The Health Revolution, launched 4 June 2026, is the new 20 year frame for both areas.

All fields
ID
GAP-09
Jurisdiction
Australia - Tasmania
Category with no current instrument
Population nutrition policy, and physical activity strategy
Evidence
Tasmania does not appear to have a standalone population nutrition policy or physical activity strategy. It does have a dedicated food instrument, Building Food Resilient Communities: Tasmania's Food Resilience Strategy 2025-2031, launched on 27 November 2025 with $8.9 million over four years and replacing the Food Relief to Food Resilience Action Plan 2023-2025 (https://www.premier.tas.gov.au/latest-news/2025/november/launch-of-tasmanias-food-resilience-strategy-2025-2031), with a new action plan under it expected in 2026 (https://www.dpac.tas.gov.au/for-communities/community-programs/food-resilience). That strategy addresses food resilience and food relief rather than population nutrition, which sits with "Active living" inside the Healthy Tasmania Five-Year Strategic Plan 2022-2026 (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/about/what-we-do/strategic-programs-and-initiatives/healthy-tasmania-strategic-plan). Departmental physical activity guidance points to Healthy Tasmania Move More and the national movement and physical activity guidelines (https://www.health.tas.gov.au/professionals/working-health-promoting-ways/priority-areas/more-active-communities-more-active-people). The Health Revolution, launched 4 June 2026, is the new 20 year frame for both areas.
GAP-10 Policy gap

Preventive health strategy

Healthy Canberra: ACT Preventive Health Plan 2020-2025 and its ACT Preventive Health Action Plan 2023-2025 have both reached the end of their periods, and the ACT open government page for the plan lists no successor, the latest document being the progress report covering January 2023 to June 2024 (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-preventive-health-plan). No replacement preventive health plan, consultation or announcement was located, making this the clearest of the gaps in this list. Prevention activity continues through the Healthy Canberra Grants program and specific measures reported in the plan's final phase, including the Active Travel Plan 2024-30, the ACT Food and Drink Marketing Policy and the Meals in Schools pilot (https://preventioncentre.org.au/news/healthy-canberra-a-cross-government-plan-enters-its-final-phase/). Broader direction sits in the ACT Health Services Plan 2022-2030 (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan).

All fields
ID
GAP-10
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Category with no current instrument
Preventive health strategy
Evidence
Healthy Canberra: ACT Preventive Health Plan 2020-2025 and its ACT Preventive Health Action Plan 2023-2025 have both reached the end of their periods, and the ACT open government page for the plan lists no successor, the latest document being the progress report covering January 2023 to June 2024 (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-preventive-health-plan). No replacement preventive health plan, consultation or announcement was located, making this the clearest of the gaps in this list. Prevention activity continues through the Healthy Canberra Grants program and specific measures reported in the plan's final phase, including the Active Travel Plan 2024-30, the ACT Food and Drink Marketing Policy and the Meals in Schools pilot (https://preventioncentre.org.au/news/healthy-canberra-a-cross-government-plan-enters-its-final-phase/). Broader direction sits in the ACT Health Services Plan 2022-2030 (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-health-services-plan).
GAP-11 Policy gap

Health portfolio nutrition strategy, and standalone health equity strategy

This entry has been narrowed after checking, because the ACT does have current instruments covering food policy, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health and wellbeing. What appears to be absent is a health portfolio nutrition strategy and a standalone health equity or social determinants strategy. Food policy sits in the Canberra Region Local Food Strategy, released in June 2024, which aims to improve access to fresh, healthy and affordable food (https://www.act.gov.au/open/canberra-region-local-food-strategy), supported by the ACT Food and Drink Marketing Policy and the Meals in Schools pilot. Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health is covered by the ACT Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Agreement 2019-2028, now in phase two with a dedicated Health and Wellbeing action plan (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-agreement). Equity and wellbeing are addressed through the ACT Wellbeing Framework, which states no end period and targets those with lower than average wellbeing (https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing/wellbeing-framework).

All fields
ID
GAP-11
Jurisdiction
Australia - ACT
Category with no current instrument
Health portfolio nutrition strategy, and standalone health equity strategy
Evidence
This entry has been narrowed after checking, because the ACT does have current instruments covering food policy, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health and wellbeing. What appears to be absent is a health portfolio nutrition strategy and a standalone health equity or social determinants strategy. Food policy sits in the Canberra Region Local Food Strategy, released in June 2024, which aims to improve access to fresh, healthy and affordable food (https://www.act.gov.au/open/canberra-region-local-food-strategy), supported by the ACT Food and Drink Marketing Policy and the Meals in Schools pilot. Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health is covered by the ACT Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Agreement 2019-2028, now in phase two with a dedicated Health and Wellbeing action plan (https://www.act.gov.au/open/act-aboriginal-and-torres-strait-islander-agreement). Equity and wellbeing are addressed through the ACT Wellbeing Framework, which states no end period and targets those with lower than average wellbeing (https://www.act.gov.au/wellbeing/wellbeing-framework).
GAP-12 Policy gap

Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs strategy

The Northern Territory Alcohol Action Plan 2023-2025 has reached the end of its period, the NT alcohol policy publications page lists nothing newer than 2022, and the plan's own page remains the December 2022 draft consultation notice (https://alcoholpolicy.nt.gov.au/publications). The NT Tobacco action plan 2019-2023 has also expired and NT Health lists no later tobacco plan (https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/alcohol-and-other-drugs/tobacco,-volatile-substances-and-others-drugs/tobacco), so the Territory does not appear to have a current published alcohol, tobacco or other drug strategy. Statutory and community level instruments continue, including the Liquor Act 2019, the Banned Drinker Register, Community Alcohol Plans and the Alcohol Action Initiatives funding program (https://alcoholpolicy.nt.gov.au/alcohol-in-communities), alongside the Tobacco Control Act 2002 and its Tobacco Control Action Committee reporting. A document titled "NTG - Plan to tackle problem drinking", dated 30 June 2026, has been circulated by the NT alcohol and other drug peak body (https://www.aadant.org.au/ntg-plan-to-tackle-problem-drinking), but no successor plan was located on an NT Government site.

All fields
ID
GAP-12
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Category with no current instrument
Alcohol, tobacco and other drugs strategy
Evidence
The Northern Territory Alcohol Action Plan 2023-2025 has reached the end of its period, the NT alcohol policy publications page lists nothing newer than 2022, and the plan's own page remains the December 2022 draft consultation notice (https://alcoholpolicy.nt.gov.au/publications). The NT Tobacco action plan 2019-2023 has also expired and NT Health lists no later tobacco plan (https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/alcohol-and-other-drugs/tobacco,-volatile-substances-and-others-drugs/tobacco), so the Territory does not appear to have a current published alcohol, tobacco or other drug strategy. Statutory and community level instruments continue, including the Liquor Act 2019, the Banned Drinker Register, Community Alcohol Plans and the Alcohol Action Initiatives funding program (https://alcoholpolicy.nt.gov.au/alcohol-in-communities), alongside the Tobacco Control Act 2002 and its Tobacco Control Action Committee reporting. A document titled "NTG - Plan to tackle problem drinking", dated 30 June 2026, has been circulated by the NT alcohol and other drug peak body (https://www.aadant.org.au/ntg-plan-to-tackle-problem-drinking), but no successor plan was located on an NT Government site.
GAP-13 Policy gap

Mental health plan, whole of population

The NT Mental Health Strategic Plan 2019-2025 has reached the end of its period and no longer appears among the instruments listed on NT Health's strategies page (https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies), so the Territory does not appear to have a current standalone whole of population mental health plan. The current joint planning instrument is the Northern Territory Mental Health and Wellbeing Plan for Integration and Co-Investment 2024-2029, developed with NT PHN, which identifies priority areas for system improvement and service integration (https://ntphn.org.au/programs/mental-health-and-wellbeing-plan/). Suicide prevention is covered by the Northern Territory Suicide Prevention Implementation Plan 2023-2028, "Keeping Everyone Safe", released on 10 September 2023 under the 2018-2023 strategic framework (https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies/suicide-prevention-strategy-review). A Joint Regional Plan 2023-2027 is in development with AMSANT, NT Health and the National Indigenous Australians Agency.

All fields
ID
GAP-13
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Category with no current instrument
Mental health plan, whole of population
Evidence
The NT Mental Health Strategic Plan 2019-2025 has reached the end of its period and no longer appears among the instruments listed on NT Health's strategies page (https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies), so the Territory does not appear to have a current standalone whole of population mental health plan. The current joint planning instrument is the Northern Territory Mental Health and Wellbeing Plan for Integration and Co-Investment 2024-2029, developed with NT PHN, which identifies priority areas for system improvement and service integration (https://ntphn.org.au/programs/mental-health-and-wellbeing-plan/). Suicide prevention is covered by the Northern Territory Suicide Prevention Implementation Plan 2023-2028, "Keeping Everyone Safe", released on 10 September 2023 under the 2018-2023 strategic framework (https://health.nt.gov.au/governance-strategies-committees/nt-health-strategies/suicide-prevention-strategy-review). A Joint Regional Plan 2023-2027 is in development with AMSANT, NT Health and the National Indigenous Australians Agency.
GAP-14 Policy gap

Physical activity strategy, and standalone wellbeing or health equity instrument

The Northern Territory does not appear to have a standalone physical activity strategy. The NT Health Nutrition and Physical Activity Strategy 2015-2020 has lapsed, the NT Sport and Active Recreation Plan 2021-2025 has reached the end of its period, and NT Health's nutrition and physical activity page points to Australia's physical activity and sedentary behaviour guidelines and the Australian dietary guidelines rather than a Territory strategy (https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/nutrition-and-physical-activity). Equity and social determinants are not absent but embedded: the NT Health Strategic Plan 2023-2028 states that equity underpins decision making and commits to tackling the social determinants of health (https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0015/1206510/nt-health-strategic-plan-2023-2028.pdf), and Healthy, well and thriving 2024-2030 is the Territory's chronic conditions prevention and early intervention framework (https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/1405564/healthy-well-and-thriving-2024-2030.pdf). The Northern Territory Social Outcomes Framework performs a wellbeing framework role, with seven domains described as closely aligned to the social determinants of health, although it states no period (https://cmc.nt.gov.au/children/northern-territory-social-outcomes-framework). Aboriginal health equity is carried by the NT Health Aboriginal Health Plan 2021-2031 and the NT Aboriginal Cultural Security Framework 2016-2026.

All fields
ID
GAP-14
Jurisdiction
Australia - Northern Territory
Category with no current instrument
Physical activity strategy, and standalone wellbeing or health equity instrument
Evidence
The Northern Territory does not appear to have a standalone physical activity strategy. The NT Health Nutrition and Physical Activity Strategy 2015-2020 has lapsed, the NT Sport and Active Recreation Plan 2021-2025 has reached the end of its period, and NT Health's nutrition and physical activity page points to Australia's physical activity and sedentary behaviour guidelines and the Australian dietary guidelines rather than a Territory strategy (https://health.nt.gov.au/professionals/nutrition-and-physical-activity). Equity and social determinants are not absent but embedded: the NT Health Strategic Plan 2023-2028 states that equity underpins decision making and commits to tackling the social determinants of health (https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0015/1206510/nt-health-strategic-plan-2023-2028.pdf), and Healthy, well and thriving 2024-2030 is the Territory's chronic conditions prevention and early intervention framework (https://health.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0007/1405564/healthy-well-and-thriving-2024-2030.pdf). The Northern Territory Social Outcomes Framework performs a wellbeing framework role, with seven domains described as closely aligned to the social determinants of health, although it states no period (https://cmc.nt.gov.au/children/northern-territory-social-outcomes-framework). Aboriginal health equity is carried by the NT Health Aboriginal Health Plan 2021-2031 and the NT Aboriginal Cultural Security Framework 2016-2026.

About this library

## Who compiled this

Put together by **Mark Anns**, Founder of Psych and Lifestyle and Fellow of the Australian Society of Lifestyle Medicine. It is maintained as a working resource rather than a finished publication, so corrections are welcome. If you find an error, a broken link, a superseded policy, or know of research or a government instrument that should be included, please email (use the contact address shown on the current site).

## What it holds

Two linked collections. **Papers, guidelines and statements** holds peer reviewed research, systematic reviews, clinical guidelines, professional position statements and government policy on lifestyle medicine, lifestyle psychiatry and public health, with a consistent focus on how lifestyle behaviours and social determinants interact with physical and mental health. A dedicated **Social determinants of health** focus gathers the work on the conditions people live and work in, from the Whitehall studies of British civil servants through the Marmot reviews to current Australian burden, welfare and inequality reporting. **Australian Government policy** holds Commonwealth national strategies and priorities together with state and territory policy instruments, all operative in 2026, drawn from health portfolios and from portfolios beyond health.

## How each entry is described

Every record carries a **two sentence description** written from the source itself. The first sentence states what the document is and what it found, recommends or requires, with the design, population or jurisdiction where the source gives them. The second states why it belongs in a library about lifestyle, social determinants and the interaction of physical and mental health. These are original summaries rather than publisher abstracts, so every entry reads consistently whether it is a trial, a guideline or a government strategy.

Every instrument in the Australian Government section carries a description too. Because policy documents are easy to summarise vaguely, each one names the issuing body, the operative period and the document's actual content, its priority areas, targets, funding or binding requirements, rather than describing the kind of document it is.

Alongside the description, every record carries the same structured tags so lists can be produced by any combination of them:

- **Resource type**, what the document is, such as a journal article, a guideline or a policy.
- **Evidence type**, the study design or evidence class, such as a randomised controlled trial or a systematic review.
- **Source type**, who produced it, such as an academic journal, a government or a professional body.
- **Field or discipline**, the research or practice field it belongs to, from lifestyle medicine and public health policy through to sport and exercise psychology, health psychology, integrative medicine, positive psychology, occupational psychology, environmental psychology and developmental psychology.
- **Region and jurisdiction**, where it applies.
- **Lifestyle domain**, the behaviour in focus, such as physical activity, nutrition, sleep, social connection or nature.
- **Health focus**, whether the item speaks to physical health, mental health or both.
- **Source list** and **Year added to library**, when the item entered this library. This is deliberately separate from the item's own publication year, which is the large year shown on the left of every card. A 2021 guideline added during the 2026 update is tagged "Added 2026" but still reads as a 2021 publication.
- **Related items**, a list of other record IDs. Every record carries a stable ID, REF-001 onwards for papers, guidelines and statements, and GOV-001 onwards for government policy instruments, shown at the foot of its card. Cross-references are two way, so linking one record to another makes the link appear on both cards without needing to enter it twice.

## Verification

Each description was written after retrieving the source. Where a publisher blocked retrieval, the record was read from PubMed, Europe PMC, PubMed Central, an institutional repository or the issuing organisation's own summary, and no finding was written that a retrieved source did not state.

Items added in the 2026 update were each checked against the publisher or issuing organisation page, and the Australian Government entries were verified against the relevant Commonwealth, state or territory government page in September 2026. Where a claim could not be confirmed from a primary source it is not listed. A small number of government pages block automated retrieval, and those entries are cited to the ministerial announcement or the departmental publications index instead.

## Orientation panels

The **Papers, guidelines and statements** page opens with a **scope panel** stating plainly that the collection is not exhaustive, and listing the kinds of work it holds, from systematic reviews and landmark studies through to government policy and deliberately included dissenting work.

Filtering by a **Health focus** opens a panel naming the topics that focus covers, so you can see the range of a large result set before reading it. Opening **Australian Government policy** shows a similar panel describing the kinds of policy and strategy in the register. Filtering by a **Lifestyle domain** opens a short orientation panel above the results. It states what this collection of work collectively establishes in that domain, the distinct lines of evidence running through it, how governments and guideline developers have responded, and what the collection does not yet cover well. Each claim cites the record numbers behind it, and those numbers are clickable, so a summary can be checked against the items it rests on. The panel can be dismissed if you would rather go straight to the list.

Selecting a domain returns every item tagged with that domain, not only those where it is the primary focus, so a study of diet and exercise together appears under both.

## Producing a list

Search runs across titles, authors, journals, descriptions and themes. Set any combination of filters, then use **Copy APA list** to put a formatted reference list of that selection on your clipboard, or **APA list** in the header to build a printable reference list of the selection or of the entire library, or **Download CSV** for the full structured data of the current selection. Printing the page also produces a clean reference list of the current selection, with the full APA reference shown under each item.

## Saving your own copy

**Save HTML** in the header downloads the whole library as a single self-contained HTML file. Every paper, guideline, statement, government policy instrument, summary panel and all of the search and filtering behaviour is inside that one file, with no external data file, database or server needed. Upload it to any web host, or open it from a USB stick or a local folder, and it works the same way.

**How the two lists differ, and why some counts overlap.** The reference list holds anything you would cite: peer reviewed research, systematic reviews, agency reports, and the guidelines, position statements and policy frameworks issued by professional bodies, journals, international agencies and governments. The policy register is a different kind of table. It tracks Australian Government policy instruments as instruments, with an issuing body, an operative period, a portfolio and a current status, so you can see what is actually in force. A document can legitimately sit in both places, cited as a source in one and tracked as an instrument in the other. Where that happens the two records are cross linked, and the single headline figure counts distinct documents, so nothing is counted twice.

**APA list** in the header builds a formatted APA 7th edition reference list, alphabetically ordered and set flush left, with a blank line between entries rather than a hanging indent. You can merge the reference list and the policy register into a single A to Z sequence, which is what a report reference list needs, or keep them grouped, or take either one on its own, or export only what you have filtered on the two tabs. A keyword box narrows whatever you have chosen. Documents that sit in both lists are named once, not twice. From there you can print it, save it as a PDF, download it as a Word document that keeps the same layout, or download it as plain text for pasting into a reference manager.

**Save Excel** builds an Excel workbook of the entire database, not just the current selection, with five sheets: a read me, the full table of papers, guidelines and statements, the Australian Government policy register, the policy gaps, and summary counts by every category for pivot tables and charts. The workbook is generated inside the page, so it works offline and always matches the version of the library you are looking at. Use **Download CSV** instead when you only want the rows currently on screen.

## Use and limits

This is a research and teaching resource. It is not clinical advice, and inclusion of an item is not endorsement of its conclusions. Check the linked source before relying on any finding. Policy instruments change, and several of the state instruments listed expire during 2026.